Sunteți pe pagina 1din 541

STAAD.Pro 2002 STAAD.

Pro 2002

7(&+1,&$/5()(5(1&(0$18$/ 7(&+1,&$/5()(5(1&(0$18$/

a division of netGuru, Inc. a division of netGuru, Inc.

www.reiworld.com www.reiworld.com
www.reel.co.uk www.reel.co.uk
STAAD.Pro 2002 is a proprietary computer program of STAAD.Pro 2002 is a proprietary computer program of
Research Engineers, Intl. (REI), a division of netGuru, Inc. Research Engineers, Intl. (REI), a division of netGuru, Inc.
Although every effort has been made to ensure the correctness Although every effort has been made to ensure the correctness
of this program, REI will not accept responsibility for any of this program, REI will not accept responsibility for any
mistake, error or misrepresentation in or as a result of the usage mistake, error or misrepresentation in or as a result of the usage
of this program. of this program.

RELEASE 2002 RELEASE 2002

Copyright Copyright
Research Engineers, Intl. Research Engineers, Intl.
Division of netGuru, Inc. Division of netGuru, Inc.
Published April, 2002 Published April, 2002
$ERXW67$$'3UR $ERXW67$$'3UR

STAAD.Pro is a widely used software for structural analysis and design STAAD.Pro is a widely used software for structural analysis and design
from Research Engineers International. from Research Engineers International.

The STAAD.Pro software consists of the following: The STAAD.Pro software consists of the following:

The STAAD.Pro Graphical User Interface (GUI): It is used to generate the The STAAD.Pro Graphical User Interface (GUI): It is used to generate the
model, which can then be analyzed using the STAAD engine. After model, which can then be analyzed using the STAAD engine. After
analysis and design is completed, the GUI can also be used to view the analysis and design is completed, the GUI can also be used to view the
results graphically. results graphically.

The STAAD analysis and design engine: It is a general-purpose The STAAD analysis and design engine: It is a general-purpose
calculation engine for structural analysis and integrated Steel, Concrete, calculation engine for structural analysis and integrated Steel, Concrete,
Timber and Aluminum design. Timber and Aluminum design.
$ERXWWKH67$$'3UR $ERXWWKH67$$'3UR
'RFXPHQWDWLRQ 'RFXPHQWDWLRQ
The documentation for STAAD.Pro consists of a set of manuals as described The documentation for STAAD.Pro consists of a set of manuals as described
below. below.

Getting Started and Tutorials : This manual contains information on the Getting Started and Tutorials : This manual contains information on the
contents of the STAAD.Pro package, computer system requirements, installation contents of the STAAD.Pro package, computer system requirements, installation
process, copy protection issues and a description on how to run the programs in process, copy protection issues and a description on how to run the programs in
the package. Tutorials that provide detailed and step-by-step explanation on the package. Tutorials that provide detailed and step-by-step explanation on
using the programs are also provided. using the programs are also provided.

Examples : This book offers examples of various problems that can be solved Examples : This book offers examples of various problems that can be solved
using the STAAD engine. The examples represent various structural analyses using the STAAD engine. The examples represent various structural analyses
and design problems commonly encountered by structural engineers. and design problems commonly encountered by structural engineers.

Graphical Environment : This manual contains a detailed description of the Graphical Environment : This manual contains a detailed description of the
Graphical User Interface (GUI) of STAAD.Pro. The topics covered include Graphical User Interface (GUI) of STAAD.Pro. The topics covered include
model generation, structural analysis and design, result verification, and report model generation, structural analysis and design, result verification, and report
generation. This manual is generally provided only in the electronic form and generation. This manual is generally provided only in the electronic form and
can be accessed from the Help facilities of STAAD.Pro. Users who wish to can be accessed from the Help facilities of STAAD.Pro. Users who wish to
obtain a printed copy of this book may contact Research Engineers. See the back obtain a printed copy of this book may contact Research Engineers. See the back
cover of this book for addresses and phone numbers. cover of this book for addresses and phone numbers.

Technical Reference : This manual deals with the theory behind the Technical Reference : This manual deals with the theory behind the
engineering calculations made by the STAAD engine. It also includes an engineering calculations made by the STAAD engine. It also includes an
explanation of the commands available in the STAAD command file. explanation of the commands available in the STAAD command file.

International Design Codes : This document contains information on the International Design Codes : This document contains information on the
various Concrete, Steel, and Aluminum design codes, of several countries, that various Concrete, Steel, and Aluminum design codes, of several countries, that
are implemented in STAAD. Generally, this book is supplied only to those users are implemented in STAAD. Generally, this book is supplied only to those users
who purchase the international codes utilities with STAAD.Pro. who purchase the international codes utilities with STAAD.Pro.

OpenSTAAD : This document contains information on the library of functions OpenSTAAD : This document contains information on the library of functions
which enable users to access STAAD.Pro’s input and results data for importing which enable users to access STAAD.Pro’s input and results data for importing
into other applications. into other applications.
7DEOHRI&RQWHQWV 7DEOHRI&RQWHQWV
67$$'3527HFKQLFDO5HIHUHQFH0DQXDO 67$$'3527HFKQLFDO5HIHUHQFH0DQXDO

6HFWLRQ  *HQHUDO 'HVFULSWLRQ  6HFWLRQ  *HQHUDO 'HVFULSWLRQ 

1.1 Introduction 1-1 1.1 Introduction 1-1


1.2 Input Generation 1 1.2 Input Generation 1
1.3 Types of Structures 2 1.3 Types of Structures 2
1.4 Unit Systems 3 1.4 Unit Systems 3
1.5 Structure Geometry and Coordinate Systems 4 1.5 Structure Geometry and Coordinate Systems 4
1.5.1 Global Coordinate System 4 1.5.1 Global Coordinate System 4
1.5.2 Local Coordinate System 6 1.5.2 Local Coordinate System 6
1.5.3 Relationship Between Global & Local Coordinates 10 1.5.3 Relationship Between Global & Local Coordinates 10
1.6 Finite Element Information 17 1.6 Finite Element Information 17
1.6.1 Plate/Shell Element 17 1.6.1 Plate/Shell Element 17
1.6.2 Solid Element 30 1.6.2 Solid Element 30
1.7 Member Properties 33 1.7 Member Properties 33
1.7.1 Prismatic Properties 33 1.7.1 Prismatic Properties 33
1.7.2 Built-In Steel Section Library 35 1.7.2 Built-In Steel Section Library 35
1.7.3 User Provided Steel Table 35 1.7.3 User Provided Steel Table 35
1.7.4 Tapered Sections 36 1.7.4 Tapered Sections 36
1.7.5 Assign Command 36 1.7.5 Assign Command 36
1.7.6 Curved Members 36 1.7.6 Curved Members 36
1.8 Member/Element Release 36 1.8 Member/Element Release 36
1.9 Truss/Tension/Compression - Only Members 37 1.9 Truss/Tension/Compression - Only Members 37
1.10 Tension/Compression - Only Springs 37 1.10 Tension/Compression - Only Springs 37
1.11 Cable Members 38 1.11 Cable Members 38
1.12 Member Offsets 41 1.12 Member Offsets 41
1.13 Material Constants 41 1.13 Material Constants 41
1.14 Supports 42 1.14 Supports 42
1.15 Master/Slave Joints 43 1.15 Master/Slave Joints 43
1.16 Loads 43 1.16 Loads 43
1.16.1 Joint Load 44 1.16.1 Joint Load 44
1.16.2 Member Load 44 1.16.2 Member Load 44
1.16.3 Area Load / Floor Load 45 1.16.3 Area Load / Floor Load 45
1.16.4 Fixed End Member Load 47 1.16.4 Fixed End Member Load 47
1.16.5 Prestress and Poststress Member Load 47 1.16.5 Prestress and Poststress Member Load 47
1.16.6 Temperature/Strain Load 49 1.16.6 Temperature/Strain Load 49
1.16.7 Support Displacement Load 50 1.16.7 Support Displacement Load 50
1.16.8 Loading on Elements 50 1.16.8 Loading on Elements 50
1.17 Load Generator 51 1.17 Load Generator 51
1.17.1 Moving Load Generator 1 - 52 1.17.1 Moving Load Generator 1 - 52
1.17.2 UBC and IBC Seismic Load Generator 1 - 52 1.17.2 UBC and IBC Seismic Load Generator 1 - 52
1.17.3 Wind Load Generator 53 1.17.3 Wind Load Generator 53
1.18 Analysis Facilities 53 1.18 Analysis Facilities 53
1.18.1 Stiffness Analysis 54 1.18.1 Stiffness Analysis 54
1.18.2 Second Order Analysis 58 1.18.2 Second Order Analysis 58
1.18.2.1 P-Delta Analysis 58 1.18.2.1 P-Delta Analysis 58
1.18.2.2 Non Linear Analysis 60 1.18.2.2 Non Linear Analysis 60
1.18.2.3 Multi-Linear Springs 61 1.18.2.3 Multi-Linear Springs 61
1.18.2.4 Tension / Compression Only 62 1.18.2.4 Tension / Compression Only 62
1.18.2.5 Nonlinear Cable/Truss 63 1.18.2.5 Nonlinear Cable/Truss 63
1.18.3 Dynamic Analysis 64 1.18.3 Dynamic Analysis 64
1.19 Member End Forces 69 1.19 Member End Forces 69
1.19.1 Secondary Analysis 74 1.19.1 Secondary Analysis 74
1.19.2 Member Forces at Intermediate Sections 74 1.19.2 Member Forces at Intermediate Sections 74
1.19.3 Member Displacements at Intermediate Sections 74 1.19.3 Member Displacements at Intermediate Sections 74
1.19.4 Member Stresses at Specified Sections 75 1.19.4 Member Stresses at Specified Sections 75
1.19.5 Force Envelopes 75 1.19.5 Force Envelopes 75
1.20 Multiple Analyses 76 1.20 Multiple Analyses 76
1.21 Steel/Concrete/Timber Design 77 1.21 Steel/Concrete/Timber Design 77
1.22 Footing Design 77 1.22 Footing Design 77
1.23 Printing Facilities 77 1.23 Printing Facilities 77
1.24 Plotting Facilities 78 1.24 Plotting Facilities 78
1.25 Miscellaneous Facilities 78 1.25 Miscellaneous Facilities 78
1.26 Post Processing Facilities 78 1.26 Post Processing Facilities 78

6HFWLRQ  $PHULFDQ 6WHHO 'HVLJQ  6HFWLRQ  $PHULFDQ 6WHHO 'HVLJQ 

2.1 Design Operations 2-1 2.1 Design Operations 2-1


2.2 Member Properties 2 2.2 Member Properties 2
2.2.1 Built - in Steel Section Library 2 2.2.1 Built - in Steel Section Library 2
2.3 Allowables per AISC Code 6 2.3 Allowables per AISC Code 6
2.3.1 Tension Stress 6 2.3.1 Tension Stress 6
2.3.2 Shear Stress 6 2.3.2 Shear Stress 6
2.3.3 Stress Due To Compression 7 2.3.3 Stress Due To Compression 7
2.3.4 Bending Stress 7 2.3.4 Bending Stress 7
2.3.5 Combined Compression and Bending 8 2.3.5 Combined Compression and Bending 8
2.3.6 Singly Symmetric Sections 9 2.3.6 Singly Symmetric Sections 9
2.3.7 Torsion per Publication T114 9 2.3.7 Torsion per Publication T114 9
2.3.8 Design of Web Tapered Sections 11 2.3.8 Design of Web Tapered Sections 11
2.4 Design Parameters 11 2.4 Design Parameters 11
2.5 Code Checking 12 2.5 Code Checking 12
2.6 Member Selection 12 2.6 Member Selection 12
2.6.1 Member Selection by Optimization 13 2.6.1 Member Selection by Optimization 13
2.6.2 Deflection Check With Steel Design 13 2.6.2 Deflection Check With Steel Design 13
2.7 Truss Members 14 2.7 Truss Members 14
2.8 Unsymmetric Sections 14 2.8 Unsymmetric Sections 14
2.9 Composite Beam Design as per AISC-ASD 19 2.9 Composite Beam Design as per AISC-ASD 19
2.10 Plate Girders 2 - 21 2.10 Plate Girders 2 - 21
2.11 Tabulated Results of Steel Design 2 - 21 2.11 Tabulated Results of Steel Design 2 - 21
2.12 Weld Design 23 2.12 Weld Design 23
2.13 Steel Design per AASHTO Specifications 26 2.13 Steel Design per AASHTO Specifications 26
2.13.1 General Comments 26 2.13.1 General Comments 26
2.13.2 Allowable Stresses per AASHTO Code 27 2.13.2 Allowable Stresses per AASHTO Code 27
2.13.3 Stability Requirements per AASHTO Code 30 2.13.3 Stability Requirements per AASHTO Code 30
2.13.4 Minimum Metal Thickness Requirement 30 2.13.4 Minimum Metal Thickness Requirement 30
2.14 Steel Design per AISC/LRFD Specification 30 2.14 Steel Design per AISC/LRFD Specification 30
2.14.1 General Comments 30 2.14.1 General Comments 30
2.14.2 LRFD Fundamentals 31 2.14.2 LRFD Fundamentals 31
2.14.3 Analysis Requirements 33 2.14.3 Analysis Requirements 33
2.14.4 Section Classification 33 2.14.4 Section Classification 33
2.14.5 Axial Tension 33 2.14.5 Axial Tension 33
2.14.6 Axial Compression 34 2.14.6 Axial Compression 34
2.14.7 Flexural Design Strength 35 2.14.7 Flexural Design Strength 35
2.14.8 Combined Axial Force And Bending 35 2.14.8 Combined Axial Force And Bending 35
2.14.9 Design for Shear 36 2.14.9 Design for Shear 36
2.14.10 Design Parameters 36 2.14.10 Design Parameters 36
2.14.11 Code Checking and Member Selection 36 2.14.11 Code Checking and Member Selection 36
2.14.12 Tabulated Results of Steel Design 37 2.14.12 Tabulated Results of Steel Design 37
2.15 Steel Design per AISI Cold Formed Specification 39 2.15 Steel Design per AISI Cold Formed Specification 39
2.15.1 General 39 2.15.1 General 39
2.15.2 Design Procedure 42 2.15.2 Design Procedure 42

6HFWLRQ  $PHULFDQ &RQFUHWH 'HVLJQ  6HFWLRQ  $PHULFDQ &RQFUHWH 'HVLJQ 

3.1 Design Operations 3-1 3.1 Design Operations 3-1


3.2 Section Types for Concrete Design 1 3.2 Section Types for Concrete Design 1
3.3 Member Dimensions 2 3.3 Member Dimensions 2
3.4 Design Parameters 3 3.4 Design Parameters 3
3.5 Slenderness Effects and Analysis Consideration 3 3.5 Slenderness Effects and Analysis Consideration 3
3.6 Beam Design 7 3.6 Beam Design 7
3.7 Column Design 11 3.7 Column Design 11
3.8 Slab/Wall Design 14 3.8 Slab/Wall Design 14

6HFWLRQ  7LPEHU 'HVLJQ  6HFWLRQ  7LPEHU 'HVLJQ 

4.1 Timber Design 4-1 4.1 Timber Design 4-1


4.2 Design Operations 2 4.2 Design Operations 2
4.3 Input Specification 4 4.3 Input Specification 4
4.4 Code Checking 6 4.4 Code Checking 6
4.5 Orientation of Lamination 6 4.5 Orientation of Lamination 6
4.6 Member Selection 7 4.6 Member Selection 7
6HFWLRQ  &RPPDQGV DQG ,QSXW ,QVWUXFWLRQV  6HFWLRQ  &RPPDQGV DQG ,QSXW ,QVWUXFWLRQV 

5.1 Command Language Conventions 5-2 5.1 Command Language Conventions 5-2
5.1.1 Elements of The Commands 3 5.1.1 Elements of The Commands 3
5.1.2 Command Formats 5 5.1.2 Command Formats 5
5.1.3 Listing of Members by Specification of Global Ranges 8 5.1.3 Listing of Members by Specification of Global Ranges 8
5.2 Problem Initiation And Title 5 - 10 5.2 Problem Initiation And Title 5 - 10
5.3 Unit Specification 12 5.3 Unit Specification 12
5.4 Input/Output Width Specification 14 5.4 Input/Output Width Specification 14
5.5 Set Command Specification 15 5.5 Set Command Specification 15
5.6 Separator Command 19 5.6 Separator Command 19
5.7 Page New Command 20 5.7 Page New Command 20
5.8 Page Length/Eject Command 21 5.8 Page Length/Eject Command 21
5.9 Ignore Specifications 22 5.9 Ignore Specifications 22
5.10 No Design Specification 23 5.10 No Design Specification 23
5.11 Joint Coordinates Specification 24 5.11 Joint Coordinates Specification 24
5.12 Member Incidences Specification 29 5.12 Member Incidences Specification 29
5.13 Element Incidence Specification 33 5.13 Element Incidence Specification 33
5.14 Element Mesh Generation 37 5.14 Element Mesh Generation 37
5.15 Redefinition of Joint and Member Numbers 43 5.15 Redefinition of Joint and Member Numbers 43
5.16 Listing of Members/Joints by Specification of GROUPS 45 5.16 Listing of Members/Joints by Specification of GROUPS 45
5.17 Rotation of Structure Geometry 48 5.17 Rotation of Structure Geometry 48
5.18 Inactive/Delete Specification 49 5.18 Inactive/Delete Specification 49
5.19 User Steel Table Specification 51 5.19 User Steel Table Specification 51
5.20 Member Property Specification 60 5.20 Member Property Specification 60
5.20.1 Specifying Properties from Steel Table 62 5.20.1 Specifying Properties from Steel Table 62
5.20.2 Prismatic Property Specification 65 5.20.2 Prismatic Property Specification 65
5.20.2.1 Prismatic Tapered Tube Property Specification 66 5.20.2.1 Prismatic Tapered Tube Property Specification 66
5.20.3 Tapered Member Specification 68 5.20.3 Tapered Member Specification 68
5.20.4 Property Specification from User Provided Table 69 5.20.4 Property Specification from User Provided Table 69
5.20.5 Assign Profile Specification 70 5.20.5 Assign Profile Specification 70
5.20.6 Examples of Member Property Specification 71 5.20.6 Examples of Member Property Specification 71
5.20.7 Curved Member Specification 73 5.20.7 Curved Member Specification 73
5.21 Element Property Specification 77 5.21 Element Property Specification 77
5.22 Member/Element Releases 78 5.22 Member/Element Releases 78
5.22.1 Member Release Specification 79 5.22.1 Member Release Specification 79
5.22.2 Element Release Specification 82 5.22.2 Element Release Specification 82
5.23 Member Truss/Cable/Tension/Compression Specification 84 5.23 Member Truss/Cable/Tension/Compression Specification 84
5.23.1 Member Truss Specification 85 5.23.1 Member Truss Specification 85
5.23.2 Member Cable Specification 86 5.23.2 Member Cable Specification 86
5.23.3 Member Tension/Compression Specification 89 5.23.3 Member Tension/Compression Specification 89
5.23.4 Spring Tension/Compression Specification 95 5.23.4 Spring Tension/Compression Specification 95
5.24 Element Plane Stress and Inplane Rotation Specification 100 5.24 Element Plane Stress and Inplane Rotation Specification 100
5.25 Member Offset Specification 102 5.25 Member Offset Specification 102
5.26 Constant Specification 5.26 Constant Specification
5.26.1 Definition of Material Constants 104 5.26.1 Definition of Material Constants 104
5.26.2 Constant Specification 106 5.26.2 Constant Specification 106
5.26.3 Modal Damping Information 5 - 112 5.26.3 Modal Damping Information 5 - 112
5.27 Support Specifications 5 - 114 5.27 Support Specifications 5 - 114
5.27.1 Global Support Specification 115 5.27.1 Global Support Specification 115
5.27.2 Inclined Support Specification 118 5.27.2 Inclined Support Specification 118
5.27.3 Automatic Spring Support Generator for Foundations 120 5.27.3 Automatic Spring Support Generator for Foundations 120
5.27.4 Multi-linear Spring Support Specification 124 5.27.4 Multi-linear Spring Support Specification 124
5.28 Master/Slave Specification 128 5.28 Master/Slave Specification 128
5.29 Draw Specifications 129 5.29 Draw Specifications 129
5.30 Cut-Off Frequency, Mode Shapes or Time 130 5.30 Cut-Off Frequency, Mode Shapes or Time 130
5.31 Definition of Load Systems 131 5.31 Definition of Load Systems 131
5.31.1 Definition of Moving Load System 132 5.31.1 Definition of Moving Load System 132
5.31.2 UBC Definitions 136 5.31.2 UBC Definitions 136
5.31.2.1 UBC 1997 Load Definition 137 5.31.2.1 UBC 1997 Load Definition 137
5.31.2.2 UBC 1994 or 1985 Load Definition 141 5.31.2.2 UBC 1994 or 1985 Load Definition 141
5.31.2.3 Colombian Seismic Load 145 5.31.2.3 Colombian Seismic Load 145
5.31.2.4 Japanese Seismic Load 148 5.31.2.4 Japanese Seismic Load 148
5.31.2.5 Definition of Lateral Seismic Load per IS:1893 151 5.31.2.5 Definition of Lateral Seismic Load per IS:1893 151
5.31.2.6 IBC 2000 Load Definition 154 5.31.2.6 IBC 2000 Load Definition 154
5.31.3 Definition of Wind Load 159 5.31.3 Definition of Wind Load 159
5.31.4 Definition of Time History Load 162 5.31.4 Definition of Time History Load 162
5.32 Loading Specifications 168 5.32 Loading Specifications 168
5.32.1 Joint Load Specification 169 5.32.1 Joint Load Specification 169
5.32.2 Member Load Specification 170 5.32.2 Member Load Specification 170
5.32.3 Element Load Specification 173 5.32.3 Element Load Specification 173
5.32.4 Area Load/Floor Load Specification 176 5.32.4 Area Load/Floor Load Specification 176
5.32.5 Prestress Load Specification 182 5.32.5 Prestress Load Specification 182
5.32.6 Temperature Load Specification 189 5.32.6 Temperature Load Specification 189
5.32.7 Fixed-End Load Specification 191 5.32.7 Fixed-End Load Specification 191
5.32.8 Support Joint Displacement Specification 192 5.32.8 Support Joint Displacement Specification 192
5.32.9 Selfweight Load Specification 195 5.32.9 Selfweight Load Specification 195
5.32.10 Dynamic Loading Specification 196 5.32.10 Dynamic Loading Specification 196
5.32.10.1 Response Spectrum Specification 197 5.32.10.1 Response Spectrum Specification 197
5.32.10.2 Application of Time Varying Load for Response 5.32.10.2 Application of Time Varying Load for Response
History Analysis 202 History Analysis 202
5.32.11 Repeat Load Specification 204 5.32.11 Repeat Load Specification 204
5.32.12 Generation of Loads 206 5.32.12 Generation of Loads 206
Generation of Moving Loads 206 Generation of Moving Loads 206
Generation of UBC / IBC Loads 208 Generation of UBC / IBC Loads 208
Generation of Wind Loads 214 Generation of Wind Loads 214
5.33 Rayleigh Frequency Calculation 217 5.33 Rayleigh Frequency Calculation 217
5.34 Modal Calculation Command 219 5.34 Modal Calculation Command 219
5.35 Load Combination Specification 220 5.35 Load Combination Specification 220
5.36 Calculation of Problem Statistics 224 5.36 Calculation of Problem Statistics 224
5.37 Analysis Specification 225 5.37 Analysis Specification 225
5.38 Change Specification 229 5.38 Change Specification 229
5.39 Load List Specification 231 5.39 Load List Specification 231
5.40 Section Specification 233 5.40 Section Specification 233
5.41 Print Specifications (includes CG and Story Drift) 235 5.41 Print Specifications (includes CG and Story Drift) 235
5.42 Print Section Displacement 5 - 242 5.42 Print Section Displacement 5 - 242
5.43 Print Force Envelope Specification 5 - 244 5.43 Print Force Envelope Specification 5 - 244
5.44 Post Analysis Printer Plot Specifications 246 5.44 Post Analysis Printer Plot Specifications 246
5.45 Post Analysis Graphics Display 247 5.45 Post Analysis Graphics Display 247
5.46 Size Specification 248 5.46 Size Specification 248
5.47 Steel Design Specifications 250 5.47 Steel Design Specifications 250
5.47.1 Parameter Specifications 251 5.47.1 Parameter Specifications 251
5.47.2 Code Checking Specification 253 5.47.2 Code Checking Specification 253
5.47.3 Member Selection Specification 254 5.47.3 Member Selection Specification 254
5.47.4 Member Selection by Optimization 255 5.47.4 Member Selection by Optimization 255
5.47.5 Weld Selection Specification 256 5.47.5 Weld Selection Specification 256
5.48 Group Specification 257 5.48 Group Specification 257
5.49 Steel Take Off Specification 259 5.49 Steel Take Off Specification 259
5.50 Timber Design Specifications 260 5.50 Timber Design Specifications 260
5.50.1 Timber Design Parameter Specifications 261 5.50.1 Timber Design Parameter Specifications 261
5.50.2 Code Checking Specification 262 5.50.2 Code Checking Specification 262
5.50.3 Member Selection Specification 263 5.50.3 Member Selection Specification 263
5.51 Concrete Design Specifications 264 5.51 Concrete Design Specifications 264
5.51.1 Design Initiation 265 5.51.1 Design Initiation 265
5.51.2 Concrete Design-Parameter Specification 266 5.51.2 Concrete Design-Parameter Specification 266
5.51.3 Concrete Design Command 267 5.51.3 Concrete Design Command 267
5.51.4 Concrete Take Off Command 268 5.51.4 Concrete Take Off Command 268
5.51.5 Concrete Design Terminator 269 5.51.5 Concrete Design Terminator 269
5.52 Footing Design Specifications 270 5.52 Footing Design Specifications 270
5.52.1 Design Initiation 273 5.52.1 Design Initiation 273
5.52.2 Footing Design Parameter Specification 274 5.52.2 Footing Design Parameter Specification 274
5.52.3 Footing Design Command 275 5.52.3 Footing Design Command 275
5.52.4 Footing Design Terminator 277 5.52.4 Footing Design Terminator 277
5.53 End Run Specification 278 5.53 End Run Specification 278

6HFWLRQ  67$5'<1( IRU 67$$' 3UR  6HFWLRQ  67$5'<1( IRU 67$$' 3UR 

6.1 Introduction 6-1 6.1 Introduction 6-1


6.2 Input Generation – STARDYNE 2 6.2 Input Generation – STARDYNE 2
6.3 Types of Structures – STARDYNE 2 6.3 Types of Structures – STARDYNE 2
6.4 Unit Systems – STARDYNE 2 6.4 Unit Systems – STARDYNE 2
6.5 Structure Geometry and Coordinate Systems–STARDYNE 2 6.5 Structure Geometry and Coordinate Systems–STARDYNE 2
6.5.1 Global Coordinate System 3 6.5.1 Global Coordinate System 3
6.5.2 Local Element Coordinate System 3 6.5.2 Local Element Coordinate System 3
6.6 Finite Element Information – STARDYNE 4 6.6 Finite Element Information – STARDYNE 4
6.6.1 Plate/Shell Element 4 6.6.1 Plate/Shell Element 4
6.6.2 Solid Element 8 6.6.2 Solid Element 8
6.6.3 Matrix (General Spring) Element 10 6.6.3 Matrix (General Spring) Element 10
6.6.4 Beam Element 10 6.6.4 Beam Element 10
6.6.4.1 Beam Element Prismatic Properties 12 6.6.4.1 Beam Element Prismatic Properties 12
6.6.4.2 Tapered Beam Elements 12 6.6.4.2 Tapered Beam Elements 12
6.6.4.3 Pipe and Elbow Beam Elements 12 6.6.4.3 Pipe and Elbow Beam Elements 12
6.6.4.4 Beam Element End Releases 12 6.6.4.4 Beam Element End Releases 12
6.6.4.5 Tension - Only Elements 6 - 13 6.6.4.5 Tension - Only Elements 6 - 13
6.6.4.6 Cable Elements 6 - 13 6.6.4.6 Cable Elements 6 - 13
6.6.4.7 Beam Element Offsets 13 6.6.4.7 Beam Element Offsets 13
6.7 Rigid System of Nodes – STARDYNE 13 6.7 Rigid System of Nodes – STARDYNE 13
6.8 Material Constants – STARDYNE 14 6.8 Material Constants – STARDYNE 14
6.9 Supports – STARDYNE 15 6.9 Supports – STARDYNE 15
6.10 Loads (STARDYNE) 15 6.10 Loads (STARDYNE) 15
6.10.1 Node Load 15 6.10.1 Node Load 15
6.10.2 Element Loads 16 6.10.2 Element Loads 16
6.10.3 Node Temperature Load 17 6.10.3 Node Temperature Load 17
6.10.4 Support Displacement Specification 18 6.10.4 Support Displacement Specification 18
6.11 STARDYNE Analysis Capabilities 18 6.11 STARDYNE Analysis Capabilities 18
6.11.1 STARDYNE Static Analysis 19 6.11.1 STARDYNE Static Analysis 19
6.11.2 STARDYNE Second Order Static Analysis 23 6.11.2 STARDYNE Second Order Static Analysis 23
6.11.3 STARDYNE Dynamic Response Analysis 26 6.11.3 STARDYNE Dynamic Response Analysis 26
6.11.3.1 STARDYNE Response Spectrum Analysis 6.11.3.1 STARDYNE Response Spectrum Analysis
(Dynre4) 30 (Dynre4) 30
6.11.3.2 STARDYNE Linear Time History Response 6.11.3.2 STARDYNE Linear Time History Response
Analysis (Dynre1) 31 Analysis (Dynre1) 31
6.12 References (STARDYNE) 34 6.12 References (STARDYNE) 34

6HFWLRQ  67$3/( &RPPDQG /DQJXDJH  6HFWLRQ  67$3/( &RPPDQG /DQJXDJH 

7.1 STAPLE Command Language Conventions 7-3 7.1 STAPLE Command Language Conventions 7-3
7.1.1 Elements of the Commands 4 7.1.1 Elements of the Commands 4
7.1.2 Command Formats 5 7.1.2 Command Formats 5
7.2 STAPLE Commands 9 7.2 STAPLE Commands 9
7.2.1 STAPLE Initiation 9 7.2.1 STAPLE Initiation 9
7.2.2 UNIT Specification 10 7.2.2 UNIT Specification 10
7.2.3 The OPEN Command 12 7.2.3 The OPEN Command 12
7.2.4 The FOR Command 13 7.2.4 The FOR Command 13
7.2.5 The WRITE and FORMAT Commands 15 7.2.5 The WRITE and FORMAT Commands 15
7.2.5.1 Write Commands 16 7.2.5.1 Write Commands 16
7.2.5.2 Format Specification 24 7.2.5.2 Format Specification 24
7.2.6 The SORT Command 28 7.2.6 The SORT Command 28
7.2.7 The EXECUTE Command 33 7.2.7 The EXECUTE Command 33
7.2.8 The CALL Command 36 7.2.8 The CALL Command 36
7.2.9 The End Script Language Command 38 7.2.9 The End Script Language Command 38
7.3 Graphics Commands in STAPLE 39 7.3 Graphics Commands in STAPLE 39

,QGH[ ,QGH[
1-1 1-1

General Description General Description

Section 1 Section 1

1.1 Introduction 1.1 Introduction

The STAAD.Pro 2002 Graphical User Interface (GUI) is normally used The STAAD.Pro 2002 Graphical User Interface (GUI) is normally used
to create all input specifications and all output reports and displays (See to create all input specifications and all output reports and displays (See
the Graphical Environment manual). These structural modeling and the Graphical Environment manual). These structural modeling and
analysis input specifications are stored in a text file with extension analysis input specifications are stored in a text file with extension
“.STD”. When the GUI does a File Open to start a session with an existing “.STD”. When the GUI does a File Open to start a session with an existing
model it gets all of its information from the STD file. A user may model it gets all of its information from the STD file. A user may
edit/create this STD file and have the GUI and the analysis engine both edit/create this STD file and have the GUI and the analysis engine both
reflect the changes. reflect the changes.

The STD file is processed by the STAAD analysis “engine” to produce The STD file is processed by the STAAD analysis “engine” to produce
results that are stored in several files with extensions such as ANL, BMD, results that are stored in several files with extensions such as ANL, BMD,
TMH, etc. The ANL text file contains the printable output as created by TMH, etc. The ANL text file contains the printable output as created by
the specifications in this manual. The other files contain the results the specifications in this manual. The other files contain the results
(displacements, member/element forces, mode shapes, section (displacements, member/element forces, mode shapes, section
forces/moments/displacements, etc.) that are used by the GUI in post forces/moments/displacements, etc.) that are used by the GUI in post
processing mode. processing mode.

This section of the manual contains a general description of the analysis This section of the manual contains a general description of the analysis
and design facilities available in the STAAD engine. Specific information and design facilities available in the STAAD engine. Specific information
on Steel, Concrete, and Timber design are available in Sections 2, 3, and 4 on Steel, Concrete, and Timber design are available in Sections 2, 3, and 4
of this manual, respectively. Detailed STAAD engine STD file command of this manual, respectively. Detailed STAAD engine STD file command
formats and other specific user information is presented in Section 5. formats and other specific user information is presented in Section 5.

The objective of this section is to familiarize the user with the basic The objective of this section is to familiarize the user with the basic
principles involved in the implementation of the various analysis/design principles involved in the implementation of the various analysis/design
facilities offered by the STAAD engine. As a general rule, the sequence in facilities offered by the STAAD engine. As a general rule, the sequence in
General Description General Description
1-2 Section 1 1-2 Section 1
which the facilities are discussed follows the recommended sequence of which the facilities are discussed follows the recommended sequence of
their usage in the STD input file. their usage in the STD input file.

STAAD.Pro 2002 also offers a second analysis engine, the STARDYNE STAAD.Pro 2002 also offers a second analysis engine, the STARDYNE
Advanced Analysis engine, which is discussed in Section 6. Advanced Analysis engine, which is discussed in Section 6.

1.2 Input Generation 1.2 Input Generation

The GUI (or user) communicates with the STAAD analysis engine through The GUI (or user) communicates with the STAAD analysis engine through
the STD input file. That input file is a text file consisting of a series of the STD input file. That input file is a text file consisting of a series of
commands which are executed sequentially. The commands contain either commands which are executed sequentially. The commands contain either
instructions or data pertaining to analysis and/or design. The elements and instructions or data pertaining to analysis and/or design. The elements and
conventions of the STAAD command language are described in Section 5 conventions of the STAAD command language are described in Section 5
of this manual. of this manual.

The STAAD input file can be created through a text editor or the GUI The STAAD input file can be created through a text editor or the GUI
Modeling facility. In general, any text editor may be utilized to edit/create Modeling facility. In general, any text editor may be utilized to edit/create
the STD input file. The GUI Modeling facility creates the input file the STD input file. The GUI Modeling facility creates the input file
through an interactive menu-driven graphics oriented procedure. through an interactive menu-driven graphics oriented procedure.

1.3 Types of Structures 1.3 Types of Structures

A STRUCTURE can be defined as an assemblage of elements. A STRUCTURE can be defined as an assemblage of elements.
STAAD is capable of analyzing and designing structures consisting of both STAAD is capable of analyzing and designing structures consisting of both
frame, plate/shell and solid elements. Almost any type of structure can be frame, plate/shell and solid elements. Almost any type of structure can be
analyzed by STAAD. analyzed by STAAD.
A SPACE structure, which is a three dimensional framed A SPACE structure, which is a three dimensional framed
structure with loads applied in any plane, is the most general. structure with loads applied in any plane, is the most general.
For input, For input,
A PLANE structure is bound by a global X-Y coordinate A PLANE structure is bound by a global X-Y coordinate
see section see section
system with loads in the same plane. system with loads in the same plane.
5.2 5.2
A TRUSS structure consists of truss members which can A TRUSS structure consists of truss members which can
have only axial member forces and no bending in the members. have only axial member forces and no bending in the members.
A FLOOR structure is a two or three dimensional structure having A FLOOR structure is a two or three dimensional structure having
no horizontal (global X or Z) movement of the structure [FX, FZ & MY no horizontal (global X or Z) movement of the structure [FX, FZ & MY
are restrained at every joint]. The floor framing (in global X-Z plane) of a are restrained at every joint]. The floor framing (in global X-Z plane) of a
building is an ideal example of a FLOOR structure. Columns can also be building is an ideal example of a FLOOR structure. Columns can also be
modeled with the floor in a FLOOR structure as long as the structure has modeled with the floor in a FLOOR structure as long as the structure has
Section 1 1-3 Section 1 1-3
no horizontal loading. If there is any horizontal load, it must be no horizontal loading. If there is any horizontal load, it must be
analyzed as a SPACE structure. analyzed as a SPACE structure.
Specification of the correct structure type reduces the number of Specification of the correct structure type reduces the number of
equations to be solved during the analysis. This results in a faster and equations to be solved during the analysis. This results in a faster and
more economic solution for the user. The degrees of freedom associated more economic solution for the user. The degrees of freedom associated
with frame elements of different types of structures is illustrated in Figure with frame elements of different types of structures is illustrated in Figure
1.1. 1.1.

Structure Types Structure Types

Figure 1.1 Figure 1.1

1.4 Unit Systems 1.4 Unit Systems

For input,
The user is allowed to input data and request output in almost all For input,
The user is allowed to input data and request output in almost all
see section
commonly used engineering unit systems including MKS, SI and see section
commonly used engineering unit systems including MKS, SI and
5.3
FPS. In the input file, the user may change units as many times as 5.3
FPS. In the input file, the user may change units as many times as
required. Mix and match between length and force units from required. Mix and match between length and force units from
different unit systems is also allowed. The input-unit for angles (or different unit systems is also allowed. The input-unit for angles (or
rotations) is degrees. However, in JOINT DISPLACEMENT rotations) is degrees. However, in JOINT DISPLACEMENT
output, the rotations are provided in radians. For all output, the output, the rotations are provided in radians. For all output, the
units are clearly specified by the program. units are clearly specified by the program.
General Description General Description
1-4 Section 1 1-4 Section 1

1.5 Structure Geometry and Coordinate Systems 1.5 Structure Geometry and Coordinate Systems

A structure is an assembly of individual components such as beams, A structure is an assembly of individual components such as beams,
columns, slabs, plates etc.. In STAAD, frame elements and plate elements columns, slabs, plates etc.. In STAAD, frame elements and plate elements
may be used to model the structural components. Typically, modeling of may be used to model the structural components. Typically, modeling of
the structure geometry consists of two steps: the structure geometry consists of two steps:

A. Identification and description of joints or nodes. A. Identification and description of joints or nodes.

B. Modeling of members or elements through specification of B. Modeling of members or elements through specification of
connectivity (incidences) between joints. connectivity (incidences) between joints.

In general, the term MEMBER will be used to refer to frame In general, the term MEMBER will be used to refer to frame
elements and the term ELEMENT will be used to refer to elements and the term ELEMENT will be used to refer to
For input, For input,
plate/shell and solid elements. Connectivity for MEMBERs may be plate/shell and solid elements. Connectivity for MEMBERs may be
see sections see sections
provided through the MEMBER INCIDENCE command while provided through the MEMBER INCIDENCE command while
5.11 to 5.17 5.11 to 5.17
connectivity for ELEMENTs may be provided through the connectivity for ELEMENTs may be provided through the
ELEMENT INCIDENCE command. ELEMENT INCIDENCE command.

STAAD uses two types of coordinate systems to define the structure STAAD uses two types of coordinate systems to define the structure
geometry and loading patterns. The GLOBAL coordinate system is an geometry and loading patterns. The GLOBAL coordinate system is an
arbitrary coordinate system in space which is utilized to specify the overall arbitrary coordinate system in space which is utilized to specify the overall
geometry & loading pattern of the structure. A LOCAL coordinate system geometry & loading pattern of the structure. A LOCAL coordinate system
is associated with each member (or element) and is utilized in MEMBER is associated with each member (or element) and is utilized in MEMBER
END FORCE output or local load specification. END FORCE output or local load specification.

1.5.1 Global Coordinate System 1.5.1 Global Coordinate System


The following coordinate systems are available for specification of the The following coordinate systems are available for specification of the
structure geometry. structure geometry.

A. Conventional Cartesian Coordinate System: This coordinate system A. Conventional Cartesian Coordinate System: This coordinate system
(Fig. 1.2) is a rectangular coordinate system (X, Y, Z) which follows (Fig. 1.2) is a rectangular coordinate system (X, Y, Z) which follows
the orthogonal right hand rule. This coordinate system may be used to the orthogonal right hand rule. This coordinate system may be used to
define the joint locations and loading directions. The translational define the joint locations and loading directions. The translational
degrees of freedom are denoted by u 1 , u 2 , u 3 and the rotational degrees of freedom are denoted by u 1 , u 2 , u 3 and the rotational
degrees of freedom are denoted by u 4 , u 5 & u 6 . degrees of freedom are denoted by u 4 , u 5 & u 6 .
Section 1 1-5 Section 1 1-5
B. Cylindrical Coordinate System: In this coordinate system, (Fig. 1.3) the X B. Cylindrical Coordinate System: In this coordinate system, (Fig. 1.3) the X
and Y coordinates of the conventional cartesian system are replaced by R and Y coordinates of the conventional cartesian system are replaced by R
(radius) and Ø (angle in degrees). The Z coordinate is identical to the Z (radius) and Ø (angle in degrees). The Z coordinate is identical to the Z
coordinate of the cartesian system and its positive direction is determined by coordinate of the cartesian system and its positive direction is determined by
the right hand rule. the right hand rule.

C. Reverse Cylindrical Coordinate System: This is a cylindrical type C. Reverse Cylindrical Coordinate System: This is a cylindrical type
coordinate system (Fig. 1.4) where the R- Ø plane corresponds to the coordinate system (Fig. 1.4) where the R- Ø plane corresponds to the
X-Z plane of the cartesian system. The right hand rule is followed to X-Z plane of the cartesian system. The right hand rule is followed to
determine the positive direction of the Y axis. determine the positive direction of the Y axis.

Figure 1.2 : Cartesian (Rectangular) Coordinate System Figure 1.2 : Cartesian (Rectangular) Coordinate System

Figure 1.3 : Cylindrical Coordinate System Figure 1.3 : Cylindrical Coordinate System
General Description General Description
1-6 Section 1 1-6 Section 1

Figure 1.4 : Reverse Cylindrical Coordinate System Figure 1.4 : Reverse Cylindrical Coordinate System

1.5.2 Local Coordinate System 1.5.2 Local Coordinate System


A local coordinate system is associated with each member. Each axis of A local coordinate system is associated with each member. Each axis of
the local orthogonal coordinate system is also based on the right hand rule. the local orthogonal coordinate system is also based on the right hand rule.
Fig. 1.5 shows a beam member with start joint 'i' and end joint 'j'. The Fig. 1.5 shows a beam member with start joint 'i' and end joint 'j'. The
positive direction of the local x-axis is determined by joining 'i' to 'j' and positive direction of the local x-axis is determined by joining 'i' to 'j' and
projecting it in the same direction. The right hand rule may be applied to projecting it in the same direction. The right hand rule may be applied to
obtain the positive directions of the local y and z axes. The local y and z- obtain the positive directions of the local y and z axes. The local y and z-
axes coincide with the axes of the two principal moments of inertia. Note axes coincide with the axes of the two principal moments of inertia. Note
that the local coordinate system is always rectangular. that the local coordinate system is always rectangular.

A wide range of cross-sectional shapes may be specified for analysis. A wide range of cross-sectional shapes may be specified for analysis.
These include rolled steel shapes, user specified prismatic shapes etc.. Fig. These include rolled steel shapes, user specified prismatic shapes etc.. Fig.
1.6 shows local axis system(s) for these shapes. 1.6 shows local axis system(s) for these shapes.
Section 1 1-7 Section 1 1-7

Figure 1.5 Figure 1.5


General Description General Description
1-8 Section 1 1-8 Section 1

Local axis for different cross-sections Local axis for different cross-sections
Figure 1.6 Figure 1.6
NOTE: The local x-axis of the above sections are going into the paper NOTE: The local x-axis of the above sections are going into the paper

α α

α α α α α α
Section 1 1-9 Section 1 1-9

Local Axis System Local Axis System


for different cross sections when the “ SET Z UP” command is specified. for different cross sections when the “ SET Z UP” command is specified.

α α
α α
α α

Local X axis goes into the page. Local X axis goes into the page.
General Description General Description
1-10 Section 1 1-10 Section 1

1.5.3 Relationship Between Global & Local 1.5.3 Relationship Between Global & Local
Coordinates Coordinates
Since the input for member loads can be provided in the local and Since the input for member loads can be provided in the local and
global coordinate system and the output for member-end-forces is global coordinate system and the output for member-end-forces is
printed in the local coordinate system, it is important to know the printed in the local coordinate system, it is important to know the
relationship between the local and global coordinate systems. This relationship between the local and global coordinate systems. This
relationship is defined by an angle measured in the following relationship is defined by an angle measured in the following
specified way. This angle will be defined as the beta (β) angle. specified way. This angle will be defined as the beta (β) angle.
For offset members the beta angle/reference point specifications For offset members the beta angle/reference point specifications
are based on the offset position of the local axis, not the joint are based on the offset position of the local axis, not the joint
positions. positions.

Beta Angle Beta Angle


When the local x-axis is parallel to the global Y-axis, as in the When the local x-axis is parallel to the global Y-axis, as in the
For input, case of a column in a structure, the beta angle is the angle through For input, case of a column in a structure, the beta angle is the angle through
see section which the local z-axis has been rotated about the local x-axis from see section which the local z-axis has been rotated about the local x-axis from
5.26 a position of being parallel and in the same positive direction of 5.26 a position of being parallel and in the same positive direction of
the global Z-axis. the global Z-axis.

When the local x-axis is not parallel to the global Y-axis, the beta When the local x-axis is not parallel to the global Y-axis, the beta
angle is the angle through which the local coordinate system has angle is the angle through which the local coordinate system has
been rotated about the local x-axis from a position of having the been rotated about the local x-axis from a position of having the
local z-axis parallel to the global X-Z plane and the local y-axis in local z-axis parallel to the global X-Z plane and the local y-axis in
the same positive direction as the global Y-axis. Figure 1.7 details the same positive direction as the global Y-axis. Figure 1.7 details
the positions for beta equals 0 degrees or 90 degrees. When the positions for beta equals 0 degrees or 90 degrees. When
providing member loads in the local member axis, it is helpful to providing member loads in the local member axis, it is helpful to
refer to this figure for a quick determination of the local axis refer to this figure for a quick determination of the local axis
system. system.

Reference Point Reference Point


An alternative to providing the member orientation is to input the An alternative to providing the member orientation is to input the
coordinates (or a joint number) which will be a reference point coordinates (or a joint number) which will be a reference point
located in the member x-y plane but not on the axis of the member. located in the member x-y plane but not on the axis of the member.
Section 1 1-11 Section 1 1-11
From the location of the reference point, the program From the location of the reference point, the program
automatically calculates the orientation of the member x-y plane. automatically calculates the orientation of the member x-y plane.

< <
[ [ [ [

\ ] \ ]

] \ ] \
\ ] \ ]
\ \
] \ ] \
[ \ [ ] [ \ [ ]
[ [ [ [
[ [
\ ] \ ]
\ ; \ ;
\ \
] ]
\ [ [ [ \ [ [ [
\ \
[ ] [ ]
] ] \ ] ] ] \ ]
] ]

[ [
= =
Relationship between Global and Local axes Relationship between Global and Local axes
Figure 1.7 Figure 1.7
General Description General Description
1-12 Section 1 1-12 Section 1
Section 1 1-13 Section 1 1-13
General Description General Description
1-14 Section 1 1-14 Section 1
Section 1 1-15 Section 1 1-15
General Description General Description
1-16 Section 1 1-16 Section 1
Section 1 1-17 Section 1 1-17

1.6 Finite Element Information 1.6 Finite Element Information


For input, For input,
see sections STAAD is equipped with a state-of-the-art plate/shell and solid see sections STAAD is equipped with a state-of-the-art plate/shell and solid
5.11, 5.13, finite element. The features of each is explained below. 5.11, 5.13, finite element. The features of each is explained below.
5.14, 5.21, 5.14, 5.21,
5.24, and 5.24, and
5.32.3 5.32.3

1.6.1 Plate/Shell Element 1.6.1 Plate/Shell Element


The Plate/Shell finite element is based on the hybrid element The Plate/Shell finite element is based on the hybrid element
formulation. The element can be 3-noded (triangular) or 4-noded formulation. The element can be 3-noded (triangular) or 4-noded
(quadrilateral). If all the four nodes of a quadrilateral element do (quadrilateral). If all the four nodes of a quadrilateral element do
not lie on one plane, it is advisable to model them as triangular not lie on one plane, it is advisable to model them as triangular
elements. The thickness of the element may be different from one elements. The thickness of the element may be different from one
node to another. node to another.

“Surface structures” such as walls, slabs, plates and shells may be “Surface structures” such as walls, slabs, plates and shells may be
modeled using finite elements. For convenience in generation of a modeled using finite elements. For convenience in generation of a
finer mesh of plate/shell elements within a large area, a MESH finer mesh of plate/shell elements within a large area, a MESH
GENERATION facility is available. The facility is described in GENERATION facility is available. The facility is described in
detail in Section 5.14. detail in Section 5.14.

The user may also use the element for PLANE STRESS action The user may also use the element for PLANE STRESS action
only (i.e. membrane/in-plane stiffness only). The ELEMENT only (i.e. membrane/in-plane stiffness only). The ELEMENT
PLANE STRESS command should be used for this purpose. PLANE STRESS command should be used for this purpose.
General Description General Description
1-18 Section 1 1-18 Section 1
Geometry Modeling Considerations Geometry Modeling Considerations

The following geometry related modeling rules should be The following geometry related modeling rules should be
remembered while using the plate/shell element remembered while using the plate/shell element

1) The program automatically generates a fifth node "O" (center 1) The program automatically generates a fifth node "O" (center
node - see Fig. 1.8) at the element center. node - see Fig. 1.8) at the element center.
2) While assigning nodes to an element in the input data, it is 2) While assigning nodes to an element in the input data, it is
essential that the nodes be specified either clockwise or essential that the nodes be specified either clockwise or
counter clockwise (Fig. 1.9). For better efficiency, similar counter clockwise (Fig. 1.9). For better efficiency, similar
elements should be numbered sequentially elements should be numbered sequentially
3) Element aspect ratio should not be excessive. They should be 3) Element aspect ratio should not be excessive. They should be
on the order of 1:1, and preferably less than 4:1. on the order of 1:1, and preferably less than 4:1.
4) Individual elements should not be distorted. Angles between 4) Individual elements should not be distorted. Angles between
two adjacent element sides should not be much larger than 90 two adjacent element sides should not be much larger than 90
and never larger than 180. and never larger than 180.
Section 1 1-19 Section 1 1-19
Element Load Specification Element Load Specification
Following load specifications are available: Following load specifications are available:

1) Joint loads at element nodes in global directions. 1) Joint loads at element nodes in global directions.
2) Concentrated loads at any user specified point within the 2) Concentrated loads at any user specified point within the
element in global or local directions. element in global or local directions.
3) Uniform pressure on element surface in global or local 3) Uniform pressure on element surface in global or local
directions directions
4) Partial uniform pressure on user specified portion of element 4) Partial uniform pressure on user specified portion of element
surface in global or local directions surface in global or local directions
5) Linearly varying pressure on element surface in local 5) Linearly varying pressure on element surface in local
directions. directions.
6) Temperature load due to uniform increase or decrease of 6) Temperature load due to uniform increase or decrease of
temperature. temperature.
7) Temperature load due to difference in temperature between top 7) Temperature load due to difference in temperature between top
and bottom surfaces of the element. and bottom surfaces of the element.

Correct numbering Correct numbering

Generated Node Generated Node


(Center Node) (Center Node)

Incorrect numbering Incorrect numbering

Figure 1.8 Figure 1.9 Figure 1.8 Figure 1.9

Good Elements Good Elements


Bad Elements Bad Elements

Figure 1.10 Figure 1.11 Figure 1.10 Figure 1.11


General Description General Description
1-20 Section 1 1-20 Section 1
Theoretical Basis Theoretical Basis
The STAAD plate finite element is based on hybrid finite element The STAAD plate finite element is based on hybrid finite element
formulations. A complete quadratic stress distribution is assumed. formulations. A complete quadratic stress distribution is assumed.
For plane stress action, the assumed stress distribution is as For plane stress action, the assumed stress distribution is as
follows. follows.

σ\ σ\
τ\[ τ\[

σ[ τ[\ σ[ τ[\
σ[ σ[
τ[\ τ[\
τ\[ τ\[
σ\ σ\

Complete quadratic assumed stress distribution: Complete quadratic assumed stress distribution:

 D   D 
   
 σ [   [ \    
  
[ [\    D   σ [   [ \    
  
[ [\    D 
 D   D 
 σ \  =     [ \  \  [\   
 σ \  =     [ \  \  [\   
     
 τ [\   − \    − [  − [\ − \
 − [       τ [\   − \    − [  − [\ − \
 − [     
     
 D   D 

a 1 through a 10 = constants of stress polynomials. a 1 through a 10 = constants of stress polynomials.


Section 1 1-21 Section 1 1-21
The following quadratic stress distribution is assumed for plate The following quadratic stress distribution is assumed for plate
bending action: bending action:

4\ 0 \[ 4\ 0 \[
4[ 4[
0\ 0\
0 [\ 4[ 0 [\ 4[
0[ 0[
0 [\ 0 [\
= 0[ = 0[
< <
0\ 0\
; 0 \[ ; 0 \[
4\ 4\

Complete quadratic assumed stress distribution: Complete quadratic assumed stress distribution:

 D   D 
 0 [   [ \       [  [\       0 [   [ \       [  [\     
     D       D 
 0 \      [ \     
 [\ \    0 \      [ \     
 [\ \  
 0[\  =   
D   0[\  =   
D 
         [ \ − [\   − [\
            [ \ − [\   − [\
  
 4 [           [ \  −[    4 [           [ \  −[  
             
 4 \           −\  [ \     4 \           −\  [ \   
 D   D 
a 1 through a 13 = constants of stress polynomials. a 1 through a 13 = constants of stress polynomials.

The distinguishing features of this finite element are: The distinguishing features of this finite element are:

1) Displacement compatibility between the plane stress component 1) Displacement compatibility between the plane stress component
of one element and the plate bending component of an adjacent of one element and the plate bending component of an adjacent
element which is at an angle to the first (see Fig. below) is element which is at an angle to the first (see Fig. below) is
achieved by the elements. This compatibility requirement is achieved by the elements. This compatibility requirement is
usually ignored in most flat shell/plate elements. usually ignored in most flat shell/plate elements.

2) The out of plane rotational stiffness from the plane stress 2) The out of plane rotational stiffness from the plane stress
portion of each element is usefully incorporated and not portion of each element is usefully incorporated and not
General Description General Description
1-22 Section 1 1-22 Section 1
treated as a dummy as is usually done in most commonly treated as a dummy as is usually done in most commonly
available commercial software. available commercial software.
3) Despite the incorporation of the rotational stiffness mentioned 3) Despite the incorporation of the rotational stiffness mentioned
previously, the elements satisfy the patch test absolutely. previously, the elements satisfy the patch test absolutely.
4) These elements are available as triangles and quadrilaterals, 4) These elements are available as triangles and quadrilaterals,
with corner nodes only, with each node having six degrees of with corner nodes only, with each node having six degrees of
freedom. freedom.
5) These elements are the simplest forms of flat shell/plate 5) These elements are the simplest forms of flat shell/plate
elements possible with corner nodes only and six degrees of elements possible with corner nodes only and six degrees of
freedom per node. Yet solutions to sample problems converge freedom per node. Yet solutions to sample problems converge
rapidly to accurate answers even with a large mesh size. rapidly to accurate answers even with a large mesh size.
6) These elements may be connected to plane/space frame 6) These elements may be connected to plane/space frame
members with full displacement compatibility. No additional members with full displacement compatibility. No additional
restraints/releases are required. restraints/releases are required.
7) Out of plane shear strain energy is incorporated in the 7) Out of plane shear strain energy is incorporated in the
formulation of the plate bending component. As a result, the formulation of the plate bending component. As a result, the
elements respond to Poisson boundary conditions which are elements respond to Poisson boundary conditions which are
considered to be more accurate than the customary Kirchoff considered to be more accurate than the customary Kirchoff
boundary conditions boundary conditions
8) The plate bending portion can handle thick and thin plates, thus 8) The plate bending portion can handle thick and thin plates, thus
extending the usefulness of the plate elements into a multiplicity extending the usefulness of the plate elements into a multiplicity
of problems. In addition, the thickness of the plate is taken into of problems. In addition, the thickness of the plate is taken into
consideration in calculating the out of plane shear. consideration in calculating the out of plane shear.
9) The plane stress triangle behaves almost on par with the well 9) The plane stress triangle behaves almost on par with the well
known linear stress triangle. The triangles of most similar flat known linear stress triangle. The triangles of most similar flat
shell elements incorporate the constant stress triangle which shell elements incorporate the constant stress triangle which
has very slow rates of convergence. Thus the triangular shell has very slow rates of convergence. Thus the triangular shell
element is very useful in problems with double curvature element is very useful in problems with double curvature
where the quadrilateral element may not be suitable. where the quadrilateral element may not be suitable.
10) Stress retrieval at nodes and at any point within the element. 10) Stress retrieval at nodes and at any point within the element.

Element Local Coordinate System Element Local Coordinate System


The precise orientation of local coordinates is determined as The precise orientation of local coordinates is determined as
follows: follows:

1) Designate the midpoints of the four or three element edges IJ, 1) Designate the midpoints of the four or three element edges IJ,
JK, KL, LI by M, N, O, P respectively. JK, KL, LI by M, N, O, P respectively.
Section 1 1-23 Section 1 1-23
2) The vector pointing from P to N is defined to be the local 2) The vector pointing from P to N is defined to be the local
x- axis. (In a triangle, this is always parallel to IJ). x- axis. (In a triangle, this is always parallel to IJ).

3) The cross-product of vectors PN and MO (for a triangle, ON 3) The cross-product of vectors PN and MO (for a triangle, ON
and MK) defines the local z-axis, i.e., z = PN x MO. and MK) defines the local z-axis, i.e., z = PN x MO.

4) The cross-product of vectors z and x defines the local y- axis, 4) The cross-product of vectors z and x defines the local y- axis,
i.e., y = z x x. i.e., y = z x x.

The sign convention of output force and moment resultants is The sign convention of output force and moment resultants is
illustrated in Fig. 1.13. illustrated in Fig. 1.13.

02 0. 02 0.

\ \
\ \
. .
/ ] 2 . / ] 2 .
] ]
[ 21 [ 21
3 1 3 1
1 [ 31 2 1 [ 31 2
, - , -
0 0 0 0
- , - ,

Figure 1.12 Figure 1.12

Output of Element Forces Output of Element Forces


ELEMENT FORCE outputs are available at the following ELEMENT FORCE outputs are available at the following
locations: locations:

A. Center point of the element. A. Center point of the element.


B. All corner nodes of the element. B. All corner nodes of the element.
C. At any user specified point within the element. C. At any user specified point within the element.

Following are the items included in the ELEMENT STRESS Following are the items included in the ELEMENT STRESS
output. output.

SQX, SQY Shear stresses (Force/ unit len./ thk.) SQX, SQY Shear stresses (Force/ unit len./ thk.)
SX, SY, SXY Membrane stresses (Force/unit len./ thk) SX, SY, SXY Membrane stresses (Force/unit len./ thk)
MX, MY, MXY Bending moments per unit width (Moment/unit MX, MY, MXY Bending moments per unit width (Moment/unit
len.) len.)
SMAX, SMIN Principal stresses (Force/unit area) SMAX, SMIN Principal stresses (Force/unit area)
General Description General Description
1-24 Section 1 1-24 Section 1
TMAX Maximum shear stress (Force/unit area) TMAX Maximum shear stress (Force/unit area)
ANGLE Orientation of the principal plane (Degrees) ANGLE Orientation of the principal plane (Degrees)
VONT, VONB Von Mises stress, where VONT, VONB Von Mises stress, where
90 =  (60$; − 60,1) + 60$;  + 60,1 90 =  (60$; − 60,1) + 60$;  + 60,1
Notes: Notes:
1. All element stress output is in the local coordinate system. 1. All element stress output is in the local coordinate system.
The direction and sense of the element stresses are The direction and sense of the element stresses are
explained in Fig. 1.13. explained in Fig. 1.13.
2. To obtain element stresses at a specified point within the 2. To obtain element stresses at a specified point within the
element, the user must provide the coordinate system for element, the user must provide the coordinate system for
the element. Note that the origin of the local coordinate the element. Note that the origin of the local coordinate
system coincides with the center node of the element. system coincides with the center node of the element.
3. Principal stresses (SMAX & SMIN), the maximum shear 3. Principal stresses (SMAX & SMIN), the maximum shear
stress (TMAX), the orientation of the principal plane stress (TMAX), the orientation of the principal plane
(ANGLE), and the Von Mises stress (VONT & VONB) are (ANGLE), and the Von Mises stress (VONT & VONB) are
also printed for the top and bottom surfaces of the also printed for the top and bottom surfaces of the
elements. The top and the bottom surfaces are determined elements. The top and the bottom surfaces are determined
on the basis of the direction of the local z-axis. on the basis of the direction of the local z-axis.

Sign Convention of Element Forces Sign Convention of Element Forces

Figure 1.13 Figure 1.13


Section 1 1-25 Section 1 1-25
General Description General Description
1-26 Section 1 1-26 Section 1
Section 1 1-27 Section 1 1-27
General Description General Description
1-28 Section 1 1-28 Section 1

Please note the following few restrictions in using the finite Please note the following few restrictions in using the finite
element portion of STAAD: element portion of STAAD:
1) Both frame members and finite elements can be used together 1) Both frame members and finite elements can be used together
in a STAAD analysis. The ELEMENT INCIDENCES command in a STAAD analysis. The ELEMENT INCIDENCES command
must directly follow the MEMBER INCIDENCES input. must directly follow the MEMBER INCIDENCES input.
2) The selfweight of the finite elements is converted to joint 2) The selfweight of the finite elements is converted to joint
loads at the connected nodes and is not used as an element loads at the connected nodes and is not used as an element
pressure load. pressure load.
3) Element stresses are printed at the centroid and joints, but not 3) Element stresses are printed at the centroid and joints, but not
along any edge. along any edge.
4) In addition to the stresses shown in Fig 1.13, the Von Mises 4) In addition to the stresses shown in Fig 1.13, the Von Mises
stresses at the top and bottom surface of the element are also stresses at the top and bottom surface of the element are also
printed. printed.

Element Numbering Element Numbering


During the generation of element stiffness matrix, the program During the generation of element stiffness matrix, the program
verifies whether the element is same as the previous one or not. If verifies whether the element is same as the previous one or not. If
it is same, repetitive calculations are not performed. The sequence it is same, repetitive calculations are not performed. The sequence
Section 1 1-29 Section 1 1-29
in which the element stiffness matrix is generated is the same in which the element stiffness matrix is generated is the same
as the sequence in which elements are input in element incidences. as the sequence in which elements are input in element incidences.

Therefore, to save some computing time, similar elements should Therefore, to save some computing time, similar elements should
be numbered sequentially. Fig. 1.14 shows examples of efficient be numbered sequentially. Fig. 1.14 shows examples of efficient
and non-efficient element numbering. and non-efficient element numbering.

However the user has to decide between adopting a numbering However the user has to decide between adopting a numbering
system which reduces the computation time versus a numbering system which reduces the computation time versus a numbering
system which increases the ease of defining the structure system which increases the ease of defining the structure
geometry. geometry.

     
 
       

(IILFLHQW (OHPHQW QXPEHULQJ (IILFLHQW (OHPHQW QXPEHULQJ

     
 

       

,QHIILFLHQW (OHPHQW QXPEHULQJ ,QHIILFLHQW (OHPHQW QXPEHULQJ

Figure 1.14 Figure 1.14


General Description General Description
1-30 Section 1 1-30 Section 1

1.6.2 Solid Element 1.6.2 Solid Element


Solid elements enable the solution of structural problems involving Solid elements enable the solution of structural problems involving
general three dimensional stresses. There is a class of problems general three dimensional stresses. There is a class of problems
such as stress distribution in concrete dams, soil and rock strata such as stress distribution in concrete dams, soil and rock strata
where finite element analysis using solid elements provides a where finite element analysis using solid elements provides a
powerful tool. powerful tool.

Theoretical Basis Theoretical Basis

The solid element used in STAAD is of eight noded isoparametric The solid element used in STAAD is of eight noded isoparametric
type. These elements have three translational degrees-of-freedom type. These elements have three translational degrees-of-freedom
per node. per node.

By collapsing various nodes together, an eight noded solid element By collapsing various nodes together, an eight noded solid element
can be degenerated to the following forms with four to seven can be degenerated to the following forms with four to seven
nodes. nodes.
Section 1 1-31 Section 1 1-31
The stiffness matrix of the solid element is evaluated by The stiffness matrix of the solid element is evaluated by
numerical integration with eight Gauss-Legendre points. To numerical integration with eight Gauss-Legendre points. To
facilitate the numerical integration, the geometry of the element is facilitate the numerical integration, the geometry of the element is
expressed by interpolating functions using natural coordinate expressed by interpolating functions using natural coordinate
system, (r,s,t) of the element with its origin at the center of system, (r,s,t) of the element with its origin at the center of
gravity. The interpolating functions are shown below: gravity. The interpolating functions are shown below:

8 8 8 8 8 8
x = ∑ hixi , y = ∑ hiyi , z = ∑ h iz i x = ∑ hixi , y = ∑ hiyi , z = ∑ h iz i
i =1 i =1 i =1 i =1 i =1 i =1

where x,y and z are the coordinates of any point in the element and where x,y and z are the coordinates of any point in the element and
x i , y i , z i , i=1,..,8 are the coordinates of nodes defined in the global x i , y i , z i , i=1,..,8 are the coordinates of nodes defined in the global
coordinate system. The interpolation functions, h i are defined in coordinate system. The interpolation functions, h i are defined in
the natural coordinate system, (r,s,t). Each of r,s and t varies the natural coordinate system, (r,s,t). Each of r,s and t varies
between -1 and +1. The fundamental property of the unknown between -1 and +1. The fundamental property of the unknown
interpolation functions h i is that their values in natural coordinate interpolation functions h i is that their values in natural coordinate
system is unity at node, i, and zero at all other nodes of the system is unity at node, i, and zero at all other nodes of the
element. The element displacements are also interpreted the same element. The element displacements are also interpreted the same
way as the geometry. For completeness, the functions are given way as the geometry. For completeness, the functions are given
below: below:

8 8 8 8 8 8
u= ∑ hiui , v = ∑ hivi , w = ∑ hiwi u= ∑ hiui , v = ∑ hivi , w = ∑ hiwi
i=1 i=1 i=1 i=1 i=1 i=1

where u, v and w are displacements at any point in the element and where u, v and w are displacements at any point in the element and
u i ,v i , w i , i=1,8 are corresponding nodal displacements in the u i ,v i , w i , i=1,8 are corresponding nodal displacements in the
coordinate system used to describe the geometry. coordinate system used to describe the geometry.

Three additional displacement “bubble” functions which have zero Three additional displacement “bubble” functions which have zero
displacements at the surfaces are added in each direction for displacements at the surfaces are added in each direction for
improved shear performance to form a 33x33 matrix. Static improved shear performance to form a 33x33 matrix. Static
condensation is used to reduce this matrix to a 24x24 matrix at the condensation is used to reduce this matrix to a 24x24 matrix at the
corner joints. corner joints.
General Description General Description
1-32 Section 1 1-32 Section 1

Local Coordinate System Local Coordinate System

The local coordinate system used in solid elements is the same as The local coordinate system used in solid elements is the same as
the global system as shown below : the global system as shown below :

Figure 1.15 Figure 1.15

Properties and Constants Properties and Constants

Unlike members and shell (plate) elements, no properties are Unlike members and shell (plate) elements, no properties are
required for solid elements. However, the constants such as required for solid elements. However, the constants such as
modulus of elasticity and Poisson’s ratio are to be specified. Also, modulus of elasticity and Poisson’s ratio are to be specified. Also,
Density needs to be provided if selfweight is included in any load Density needs to be provided if selfweight is included in any load
case. case.

Output of Element Stresses Output of Element Stresses

Element stresses may be obtained at the center and at the joints of Element stresses may be obtained at the center and at the joints of
the solid element. The items that are printed are : the solid element. The items that are printed are :

Normal Stresses : SXX, SYY and SZZ Normal Stresses : SXX, SYY and SZZ
Shear Stresses : SXY, SYZ and SZX Shear Stresses : SXY, SYZ and SZX
Principal stresses : S1, S2 and S3. Principal stresses : S1, S2 and S3.
Von Mises stresses: __________________________ Von Mises stresses: __________________________
SIGE= .707 √ (S1-S2) 2 + (S2-S3) 2 + (S3-S1) 2 SIGE= .707 √ (S1-S2) 2 + (S2-S3) 2 + (S3-S1) 2
Section 1 1-33 Section 1 1-33
Direction cosines : 6 direction cosines are printed, following the Direction cosines : 6 direction cosines are printed, following the
expression DC, corresponding to the first two principal stress directions. expression DC, corresponding to the first two principal stress directions.

1.7 Member Properties 1.7 Member Properties

The following types of member property specifications are The following types of member property specifications are
available in STAAD: available in STAAD:

A) PRISMATIC property specifications A) PRISMATIC property specifications


B) Standard Steel shapes from built-in section library B) Standard Steel shapes from built-in section library
See section See section
C) User created steel tables C) User created steel tables
5.20 5.20
D) TAPERED sections D) TAPERED sections
E) Through ASSIGN command E) Through ASSIGN command
F) CURVEd specification F) CURVEd specification

1.7.1 Prismatic Properties 1.7.1 Prismatic Properties


The following prismatic properties are required for analysis: The following prismatic properties are required for analysis:

AX = Cross sectional area AX = Cross sectional area


IX = Torsional constant IX = Torsional constant
See section IY = Moment of inertia about y-axis. See section IY = Moment of inertia about y-axis.
5.20.2 IZ = Moment of inertia about z-axis. 5.20.2 IZ = Moment of inertia about z-axis.

In addition, the user may choose to specify the following In addition, the user may choose to specify the following
properties: properties:

AY = Effective shear area for shear force parallel to local y-axis. AY = Effective shear area for shear force parallel to local y-axis.
AZ = Effective shear area for shear force parallel to local z-axis. AZ = Effective shear area for shear force parallel to local z-axis.
YD = Depth of section parallel to local y-axis. YD = Depth of section parallel to local y-axis.
ZD = Depth of section parallel to local z-axis. ZD = Depth of section parallel to local z-axis.

To specify T-beam or Trapezoidal beam, the following additional To specify T-beam or Trapezoidal beam, the following additional
properties must be provided. properties must be provided.

YB = Depth of Web of T-section [See figure below] YB = Depth of Web of T-section [See figure below]
ZB = Width of web of T-section or bottom width of Trapezoidal ZB = Width of web of T-section or bottom width of Trapezoidal
section. section.
General Description General Description
1-34 Section 1 1-34 Section 1
To specify T-beam, the user must specify YD, ZD, YB & ZB. To specify T-beam, the user must specify YD, ZD, YB & ZB.
Similarly for Trapezoidal sections, YD, ZD and ZB must be Similarly for Trapezoidal sections, YD, ZD and ZB must be
provided. provided.

If the shear areas are input, the program will automatically If the shear areas are input, the program will automatically
consider shear deformations in the analysis, and if they are left consider shear deformations in the analysis, and if they are left
out, shear deformation will be ignored. In a frame structure, the out, shear deformation will be ignored. In a frame structure, the
ratio of shear deflection to bending deflection is so small that, in ratio of shear deflection to bending deflection is so small that, in
most cases, it can be ignored. The depths in the two major most cases, it can be ignored. The depths in the two major
directions (YD and ZD) are used in the program to calculate the directions (YD and ZD) are used in the program to calculate the
section moduli. These are needed only to calculate member section moduli. These are needed only to calculate member
stresses or to perform concrete design. The user can omit the YD stresses or to perform concrete design. The user can omit the YD
& ZD values if stresses or design of these members are of no & ZD values if stresses or design of these members are of no
interest. The default value is 254 mm (10 inches) for YD and ZD. interest. The default value is 254 mm (10 inches) for YD and ZD.
All the prismatic properties are input in the local member All the prismatic properties are input in the local member
coordinates. coordinates.

=' =' =' ='

<' <% <' <' <% <'

=% =% =% =%

To define a concrete member, the user must not provide AX, but To define a concrete member, the user must not provide AX, but
instead, provide YD and ZD for a rectangular section and just YD instead, provide YD and ZD for a rectangular section and just YD
for a circular section. If no moment of inertia or shear areas are for a circular section. If no moment of inertia or shear areas are
provided, the program will automatically calculate these from YD provided, the program will automatically calculate these from YD
and ZD. and ZD.

Table 1.1 is offered to assist the user in specifying the necessary Table 1.1 is offered to assist the user in specifying the necessary
section values. It lists, by structural type, the required section section values. It lists, by structural type, the required section
properties for any analysis. For the PLANE or FLOOR type properties for any analysis. For the PLANE or FLOOR type
analyses, the choice of the required moment of inertia depends analyses, the choice of the required moment of inertia depends
upon the beta angle. If BETA equals zero, the required property is upon the beta angle. If BETA equals zero, the required property is
IZ. IZ.
Section 1 1-35 Section 1 1-35
Table 1.1 Required properties Table 1.1 Required properties

6WUX FWXU DO 5HTXL UH G 6WUX FWXU DO 5HTXL UH G

7\SH 3UR SH UWLH V 7\SH 3UR SH UWLH V

75866 VW UXFWX UH $; 75866 VW UXFWX UH $;

3/ $ 1 ( VW UXFWX UH $ ;  ,= RU ,< 3/ $ 1 ( VW UXFWX UH $ ;  ,= RU ,<

)/225 VW UXFWX U H ,; ,= RU ,< )/225 VW UXFWX U H ,; ,= RU ,<

6 3 $ & ( VWUX FWX UH $ ;  , ; ,< ,= 6 3 $ & ( VWUX FWX UH $ ;  , ; ,< ,=

1.7.2 Built-In Steel Section Library 1.7.2 Built-In Steel Section Library
This feature of the program allows the user to specify section This feature of the program allows the user to specify section
names of standard steel shapes manufactured in different names of standard steel shapes manufactured in different
countries. Information pertaining to the American steel shapes is countries. Information pertaining to the American steel shapes is
available in section 2. available in section 2.
See section See section
Contact our Technical Support for information on steel shapes for Contact our Technical Support for information on steel shapes for
2.2.1 and 2.2.1 and
other countries. other countries.
5.20.1 5.20.1

Since the shear areas of the sections are built into the tables, shear Since the shear areas of the sections are built into the tables, shear
deformation is always considered for these sections. deformation is always considered for these sections.

1.7.3 User Provided Steel Table 1.7.3 User Provided Steel Table
The user can provide a customized steel table with designated The user can provide a customized steel table with designated
See sections names and proper corresponding properties. The program can then See sections names and proper corresponding properties. The program can then
5.19 and find member properties from those tables. Member selection may 5.19 and find member properties from those tables. Member selection may
5.20.4 also be performed with the program selecting members from the 5.20.4 also be performed with the program selecting members from the
provided tables only. provided tables only.

These tables can be provided as a part of a STAAD input or as These tables can be provided as a part of a STAAD input or as
separately created files from which the program can read the separately created files from which the program can read the
properties. The user who does not use standard rolled shapes or properties. The user who does not use standard rolled shapes or
who uses a limited number of specific shapes may create who uses a limited number of specific shapes may create
permanent member property files. Analysis and design can be permanent member property files. Analysis and design can be
limited to the sections in these files. limited to the sections in these files.
General Description General Description
1-36 Section 1 1-36 Section 1

1.7.4 Tapered Sections 1.7.4 Tapered Sections


Properties of tapered I-sections may be provided through Properties of tapered I-sections may be provided through
See section See section
MEMBER PROPERTY specifications. Given key section MEMBER PROPERTY specifications. Given key section
5.20.3 5.20.3
dimensions, the program is capable of calculating cross-sectional dimensions, the program is capable of calculating cross-sectional
properties which are subsequently used in analysis. Specification properties which are subsequently used in analysis. Specification
of TAPERED sections is described in Section 5 of this manual. of TAPERED sections is described in Section 5 of this manual.

1.7.5 Assign Command 1.7.5 Assign Command


Through this command, the user may instruct the program to Through this command, the user may instruct the program to
automatically select a steel section from the table for analysis and automatically select a steel section from the table for analysis and
See section subsequent design. The section types that may be ASSIGNed See section subsequent design. The section types that may be ASSIGNed
5.20.5 include BEAM, COLUMN, CHANNEL, ANGLE and DOUBLE 5.20.5 include BEAM, COLUMN, CHANNEL, ANGLE and DOUBLE
ANGLE. When a BEAM or COLUMN is specified, the program ANGLE. When a BEAM or COLUMN is specified, the program
will assign an I-beam section (WF for AISC) and subsequent will assign an I-beam section (WF for AISC) and subsequent
member selection or optimization will be performed with a similar member selection or optimization will be performed with a similar
type section. type section.

1.7.6 Curved Members (not available) 1.7.6 Curved Members (not available)
Any section may be assigned to a curved member. Also pipe Any section may be assigned to a curved member. Also pipe
See section See section
elbows may be assigned a ASME code based flexibility reduction. elbows may be assigned a ASME code based flexibility reduction.
5.20.7 5.20.7

1.8 Member/Element Release 1.8 Member/Element Release

STAAD allows releases for both members and elements. STAAD allows releases for both members and elements.

One or both ends of a member or element can be released. One or both ends of a member or element can be released.
See Members/Elements are assumed to be rigidly framed into joints in See Members/Elements are assumed to be rigidly framed into joints in
section 5.22 accordance with the structural type specified. When this full section 5.22 accordance with the structural type specified. When this full
rigidity is not applicable, individual force components at either rigidity is not applicable, individual force components at either
end of the member can be set to zero with member release end of the member can be set to zero with member release
statements. By specifying release components, individual degrees statements. By specifying release components, individual degrees
of freedom are removed from the analysis. Release components are of freedom are removed from the analysis. Release components are
Section 1 1-37 Section 1 1-37
given in the local coordinate system for each member. Note given in the local coordinate system for each member. Note
that PARTIAL moment release is also allowed. that PARTIAL moment release is also allowed.

Only one of sections 1.8 and 1.9 properties can be assigned to a Only one of sections 1.8 and 1.9 properties can be assigned to a
given member. The last one entered will be used. given member. The last one entered will be used.

1.9 Truss/Tension/Compression - Only Members 1.9 Truss/Tension/Compression - Only Members

For analyses which involve members that carry axial loads only, For analyses which involve members that carry axial loads only,
i.e. truss members, there are two methods for specifying this i.e. truss members, there are two methods for specifying this
condition. When all the members in the structure are truss condition. When all the members in the structure are truss
See section members, the type of structure is declared as TRUSS whereas, See section members, the type of structure is declared as TRUSS whereas,
5.23 when only some of the members are truss members (e.g. bracings 5.23 when only some of the members are truss members (e.g. bracings
of a building), the MEMBER TRUSS command can be used where of a building), the MEMBER TRUSS command can be used where
those members will be identified separately. A considerable those members will be identified separately. A considerable
amount of analysis and design time is saved by declaring an axial amount of analysis and design time is saved by declaring an axial
member as a TRUSS member, specification of such members as member as a TRUSS member, specification of such members as
frame members with both ends pinned should be avoided wherever frame members with both ends pinned should be avoided wherever
possible. possible.

In STAAD, the MEMBER TENSION or MEMBER In STAAD, the MEMBER TENSION or MEMBER
COMPRESSION command can be used to limit the load direction COMPRESSION command can be used to limit the load direction
the member may carry. The analysis will be performed the member may carry. The analysis will be performed
accordingly. Refer to Section 5.23.3 for details on this facility. accordingly. Refer to Section 5.23.3 for details on this facility.

1.10 Tension/Compression - Only Springs 1.10 Tension/Compression - Only Springs

In STAAD, the SPRING TENSION or SPRING COMPRESSION In STAAD, the SPRING TENSION or SPRING COMPRESSION
command can be used to limit the load direction the support spring command can be used to limit the load direction the support spring
See section may carry. The analysis will be performed accordingly. Refer to See section may carry. The analysis will be performed accordingly. Refer to
5.23 Section 5.23.4 for details on this facility. 5.23 Section 5.23.4 for details on this facility.
General Description General Description
1-38 Section 1 1-38 Section 1

1.11 Cable Members 1.11 Cable Members

1.11.1 Linearized Cable Members 1.11.1 Linearized Cable Members

Cable members may be specified by using the MEMBER CABLE Cable members may be specified by using the MEMBER CABLE
command. While specifying cable members, the initial tension in command. While specifying cable members, the initial tension in
See the cable must be provided. The following paragraph explains how See the cable must be provided. The following paragraph explains how
section 5.23, cable stiffness is calculated. section 5.23, cable stiffness is calculated.
5.37 & 5.37 &
1.18.2.5 The increase in length of a loaded cable is a combination of two 1.18.2.5 The increase in length of a loaded cable is a combination of two
effects. The first component is the elastic stretch, and is governed effects. The first component is the elastic stretch, and is governed
by the familiar spring relationship: by the familiar spring relationship:

($ ($
) = .[ ZKHUH . HODVWLF = ) = .[ ZKHUH . HODVWLF =
/ /

The second component of the lengthening is due to a change in The second component of the lengthening is due to a change in
geometry (as a cable is pulled taut, sag is reduced). This geometry (as a cable is pulled taut, sag is reduced). This
relationship can be described by relationship can be described by

 
7 7
) = .[ EXW KHUH .VDJ = ( 1.0 / cos α )
2
) = .[ EXW KHUH .VDJ = ( 1.0 / cos α )
2

   
Z / Z /

where w = weight per unit length of cable where w = weight per unit length of cable
T = tension in cable T = tension in cable
α = angle that the axis of the cable makes with a α = angle that the axis of the cable makes with a
horizontal plane (= 0, cable is horizontal; = 90, horizontal plane (= 0, cable is horizontal; = 90,
cable is vertical). cable is vertical).

Therefore, the "stiffness" of a cable depends on the initial installed Therefore, the "stiffness" of a cable depends on the initial installed
tension (or sag). These two effects may be combined as follows tension (or sag). These two effects may be combined as follows

1 1
Kcomb = Kcomb =
1 / Ksag + 1 / Kelastic 1 / Ksag + 1 / Kelastic
Section 1 1-39 Section 1 1-39

K comb = (EA/L) / [1+w L EA(cos α)/12T ] K comb = (EA/L) / [1+w L EA(cos α)/12T ]
2 2 2 3 2 2 2 3

Note: When T = infinity, K comb = EA/L Note: When T = infinity, K comb = EA/L
When T = 0, K comb = 0 When T = 0, K comb = 0

It may be noticed that as the tension increases (sag decreases) the It may be noticed that as the tension increases (sag decreases) the
combined stiffness approaches that of the pure elastic situation. combined stiffness approaches that of the pure elastic situation.

The following points need to be considered when using the cable The following points need to be considered when using the cable
member in STAAD : member in STAAD :

1) The cable member is only a truss member whose properties 1) The cable member is only a truss member whose properties
accomodate the sag factor and initial tension. The behavior of accomodate the sag factor and initial tension. The behavior of
the cable member is identical to that of the truss member. It the cable member is identical to that of the truss member. It
can carry axial loads only. As a result, the fundamental rules can carry axial loads only. As a result, the fundamental rules
involved in modeling truss members have to be followed when involved in modeling truss members have to be followed when
modeling cable members. For example, when two cable modeling cable members. For example, when two cable
members meet at a common joint, if there isn't a support or a members meet at a common joint, if there isn't a support or a
3rd member connected to that joint, it is a point of potential 3rd member connected to that joint, it is a point of potential
instability. instability.

2) Due to the reasons specified in 1) above, applying a transverse 2) Due to the reasons specified in 1) above, applying a transverse
load on a cable member is not advisable. The load will be load on a cable member is not advisable. The load will be
converted to two concentrated loads at the 2 ends of the cable converted to two concentrated loads at the 2 ends of the cable
and the true deflection pattern of the cable will never be and the true deflection pattern of the cable will never be
realized. realized.

3) A cable member offers no resistance to a compressive force 3) A cable member offers no resistance to a compressive force
applied at its ends. When the end joints of the member are applied at its ends. When the end joints of the member are
subjected to a compressive force, they "give in" thereby subjected to a compressive force, they "give in" thereby
causing the cable to sag. Under these circumstances, the cable causing the cable to sag. Under these circumstances, the cable
member has zero stiffness and this situation has to be member has zero stiffness and this situation has to be
accounted for in the stiffness matrix and the displacements accounted for in the stiffness matrix and the displacements
have to be recalculated. But in STAAD, merely declaring the have to be recalculated. But in STAAD, merely declaring the
member to be a cable member does not guarantee that this member to be a cable member does not guarantee that this
behavior will be accounted for. It is also important that the behavior will be accounted for. It is also important that the
user declare the member to be a tension only member by using user declare the member to be a tension only member by using
the MEMBER TENSION command, after the CABLE the MEMBER TENSION command, after the CABLE
General Description General Description
1-40 Section 1 1-40 Section 1
command. This will ensure that the program will test the command. This will ensure that the program will test the
nature of the force in the member after the analysis and if it is nature of the force in the member after the analysis and if it is
compressive, the member is switched off and the stiffness compressive, the member is switched off and the stiffness
matrix re-calculated. Please read the MEMBER TENSION matrix re-calculated. Please read the MEMBER TENSION
command requirements regarding the PERFORM ANALYSIS command requirements regarding the PERFORM ANALYSIS
and CHANGE commands with each load case; and the SET NL and CHANGE commands with each load case; and the SET NL
command. command.

4) Due to potential instability problems explained in item 1 4) Due to potential instability problems explained in item 1
above, users should also avoid modeling a catenary by above, users should also avoid modeling a catenary by
breaking it down into a number of straight line segments. The breaking it down into a number of straight line segments. The
cable member in STAAD cannot be used to simulate the cable member in STAAD cannot be used to simulate the
behavior of a catenary. By catenary, we are referring to those behavior of a catenary. By catenary, we are referring to those
structural components which have a curved profile and develop structural components which have a curved profile and develop
axial forces due to their self weight. This behavior is in reality axial forces due to their self weight. This behavior is in reality
a non-linear behavior where the axial force is caused because a non-linear behavior where the axial force is caused because
of either a change in the profile of the member or induced by of either a change in the profile of the member or induced by
large displacements, neither of which are valid assumptions in large displacements, neither of which are valid assumptions in
an elastic analysis. A typical example of a catenary is the main an elastic analysis. A typical example of a catenary is the main
U shaped cable used in suspension bridges. U shaped cable used in suspension bridges.

5) The increase of stiffness of the cable as the tension in it 5) The increase of stiffness of the cable as the tension in it
increases under applied loading is updated after each iteration increases under applied loading is updated after each iteration
if the cable members are also declared to be MEMBER if the cable members are also declared to be MEMBER
TENSION. However, iteration stops when all tension members TENSION. However, iteration stops when all tension members
are in tension or slack; not when the cable tension converges. are in tension or slack; not when the cable tension converges.
For more iterations enter multiple, consecutive PERFORM For more iterations enter multiple, consecutive PERFORM
ANALYSIS commands; then there will be an additional ANALYSIS commands; then there will be an additional
iteration for each command entered. iteration for each command entered.

1.11.2 Non Linear Cable & Truss Members 1.11.2 Non Linear Cable & Truss Members

Cable members for the Non Linear Cable Analysis may be Cable members for the Non Linear Cable Analysis may be
specified by using the MEMBER CABLE command. While specified by using the MEMBER CABLE command. While
specifying cable members, the initial tension in the cable or the specifying cable members, the initial tension in the cable or the
unstressed length of the cable may be provided. The user should unstressed length of the cable may be provided. The user should
ensure that all cables will be in sufficient tension for all load cases ensure that all cables will be in sufficient tension for all load cases
Section 1 1-41 Section 1 1-41
to converge. Use selfweight in every load case and to converge. Use selfweight in every load case and
temperature if appropriate; i.e. don’t enter component cases (e.g. temperature if appropriate; i.e. don’t enter component cases (e.g.
See wind only). See wind only).
section 5.23, section 5.23,
5.37 & There are two cable types in the nonlinear PERFORM CABLE 5.37 & There are two cable types in the nonlinear PERFORM CABLE
1.18.2.5 ANALYSIS procedure. One is the cable whose stiffness is 1.18.2.5 ANALYSIS procedure. One is the cable whose stiffness is
described in section 1.11.1 above. In the nonlinear cable analysis, described in section 1.11.1 above. In the nonlinear cable analysis,
the cable may have large motions and the sag is checked on every the cable may have large motions and the sag is checked on every
load step and every equilibrium iteration. The second cable type is load step and every equilibrium iteration. The second cable type is
not available yet. It is a catenary shaped cable that is integrated not available yet. It is a catenary shaped cable that is integrated
along its length to determine its end forces on every load step and along its length to determine its end forces on every load step and
every equilibrium iteration. every equilibrium iteration.

In addition there is a nonlinear truss which is specified in the In addition there is a nonlinear truss which is specified in the
Member Truss command. The nonlinear truss is simply any truss Member Truss command. The nonlinear truss is simply any truss
with pretension specified. It is essentially the same as a cable with pretension specified. It is essentially the same as a cable
without sag. This member takes compression. If all cables are without sag. This member takes compression. If all cables are
taut for all load cases, then the nonlinear truss may be used to taut for all load cases, then the nonlinear truss may be used to
simulate cables. The reason for using this substitution is that the simulate cables. The reason for using this substitution is that the
truss solution is more reliable. truss solution is more reliable.

Points 1, 2, and 4 above will not apply to nonlinear cable analysis Points 1, 2, and 4 above will not apply to nonlinear cable analysis
if sufficient pretension is applied, so joints may be entered along if sufficient pretension is applied, so joints may be entered along
the shape of a cable (in some cases a stabilizing stiffness may be the shape of a cable (in some cases a stabilizing stiffness may be
required and entered for the first loadstep). Point 3 above: The required and entered for the first loadstep). Point 3 above: The
Member Tension command is ignored for the nonlinear cable Member Tension command is ignored for the nonlinear cable
analysis and the results may be in compression. Point 5 above: analysis and the results may be in compression. Point 5 above:
The cable tensions are iterated to convergence in the nonlinear The cable tensions are iterated to convergence in the nonlinear
cable analysis. cable analysis.

1.12 Member Offsets 1.12 Member Offsets

Some members of a structure may not be concurrent with the Some members of a structure may not be concurrent with the
incident joints thereby creating offsets. This offset distance is incident joints thereby creating offsets. This offset distance is
See section specified in terms of global or local coordinate system (i.e. X, Y See section specified in terms of global or local coordinate system (i.e. X, Y
5.25 and Z distances from the incident joint). Secondary forces induced, 5.25 and Z distances from the incident joint). Secondary forces induced,
due to this offset connection, are taken into account in analyzing due to this offset connection, are taken into account in analyzing
the structure and also to calculate the individual member forces. the structure and also to calculate the individual member forces.
General Description General Description
1-42 Section 1 1-42 Section 1
The new offset centroid of the member can be at the start or end The new offset centroid of the member can be at the start or end
incidences and the new working point will also be the new start or incidences and the new working point will also be the new start or
end of the member. Therefore, any reference from the start or end end of the member. Therefore, any reference from the start or end
of that member will always be from the new offset points. of that member will always be from the new offset points.

7' 7'
6' 6'

9' 9'

0(0%(5 2)) 6 (7 0(0%(5 2)) 6 (7

 67 $ 57   67 $ 57 

 (1'   (1' 

 (1'    (1'  

Figure 1.15 Figure 1.15

1.13 Material Constants 1.13 Material Constants

The material constants are: modulus of elasticity (E); weight The material constants are: modulus of elasticity (E); weight
density (DEN); Poisson's ratio (POISS); co-efficient of thermal density (DEN); Poisson's ratio (POISS); co-efficient of thermal
expansion (ALPHA), Composite Damping Ratio, and beta angle expansion (ALPHA), Composite Damping Ratio, and beta angle
See (BETA) or coordinates for any reference (REF) point. See (BETA) or coordinates for any reference (REF) point.
section 5.26 section 5.26
E value for members must be provided or the analysis will not be E value for members must be provided or the analysis will not be
performed. Weight density (DEN) is used only when selfweight of performed. Weight density (DEN) is used only when selfweight of
the structure is to be taken into account. Poisson's ratio (POISS) is the structure is to be taken into account. Poisson's ratio (POISS) is
used to calculate the shear modulus (commonly known as G) by used to calculate the shear modulus (commonly known as G) by
the formula, the formula,

G = 0.5 x E/(1 + POISS) G = 0.5 x E/(1 + POISS)

If Poisson's ratio is not provided, STAAD will assume a value for If Poisson's ratio is not provided, STAAD will assume a value for
this quantity based on the value of E. Coefficient of thermal this quantity based on the value of E. Coefficient of thermal
Section 1 1-43 Section 1 1-43
expansion (ALPHA) is used to calculate the expansion of the expansion (ALPHA) is used to calculate the expansion of the
members if temperature loads are applied. The temperature unit for members if temperature loads are applied. The temperature unit for
temperature load and ALPHA has to be the same. temperature load and ALPHA has to be the same.

Composite damping ratio is used to compute the damping ratio for Composite damping ratio is used to compute the damping ratio for
each mode in a dynamic solution. This is only useful if there are each mode in a dynamic solution. This is only useful if there are
several materials with different damping ratios. several materials with different damping ratios.

BETA angle and REFerence point are discussed in Sec 1.5.3 and BETA angle and REFerence point are discussed in Sec 1.5.3 and
are input as part of the member constants. are input as part of the member constants.

Note: Poisson’s Ratio must always be defined after the Modulus of Note: Poisson’s Ratio must always be defined after the Modulus of
Elasticity for a given member/element. Elasticity for a given member/element.

1.14 Supports 1.14 Supports

STAAD allows specifications of supports that are parallel as well STAAD allows specifications of supports that are parallel as well
as inclined to the global axes. as inclined to the global axes.

Supports are specified as PINNED, FIXED, or FIXED with Supports are specified as PINNED, FIXED, or FIXED with
See different releases. A pinned support has restraints against all See different releases. A pinned support has restraints against all
section 5.27 translational movement and none against rotational movement. In section 5.27 translational movement and none against rotational movement. In
other words, a pinned support will have reactions for all forces but other words, a pinned support will have reactions for all forces but
will resist no moments. A fixed support has restraints against all will resist no moments. A fixed support has restraints against all
directions of movement. directions of movement.

The restraints of a fixed support can also be released in any The restraints of a fixed support can also be released in any
desired direction as specified in section 5. desired direction as specified in section 5.

Translational and rotational springs can also be specified. The Translational and rotational springs can also be specified. The
springs are represented in terms of their spring constants. A springs are represented in terms of their spring constants. A
translational spring constant is defined as the force to displace a translational spring constant is defined as the force to displace a
support joint one length unit in the specified global direction. support joint one length unit in the specified global direction.
Similarly, a rotational spring constant is defined as the force to Similarly, a rotational spring constant is defined as the force to
rotate the support joint one degree around the specified global rotate the support joint one degree around the specified global
direction. direction.
For static analysis, Multi-linear spring supports can be used to For static analysis, Multi-linear spring supports can be used to
model the varying, non-linear resistance of a support (e.g. soil). model the varying, non-linear resistance of a support (e.g. soil).
General Description General Description
1-44 Section 1 1-44 Section 1
See section 5.27 for descriptions of the elastic footing and elastic See section 5.27 for descriptions of the elastic footing and elastic
foundation mat facilities. foundation mat facilities.

The Support command is also used to specify joints and directions The Support command is also used to specify joints and directions
where support displacements will be enforced. where support displacements will be enforced.

1.15 Master/Slave Joints 1.15 Master/Slave Joints

The master/slave option is provided to enable the user to model The master/slave option is provided to enable the user to model
rigid links in the structural system. This facility can be used to rigid links in the structural system. This facility can be used to
See model special structural elements like a rigid floor diaphragm. See model special structural elements like a rigid floor diaphragm.
section 5.28 Several slave joints may be provided which will be assigned same section 5.28 Several slave joints may be provided which will be assigned same
displacements as the master joint. The user is also allowed the displacements as the master joint. The user is also allowed the
flexibility to choose the specific degrees of freedom for which the flexibility to choose the specific degrees of freedom for which the
displacement constraints will be imposed on the slaved joints. If displacement constraints will be imposed on the slaved joints. If
all degrees of freedom (Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, My and Mz) are provided all degrees of freedom (Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, My and Mz) are provided
as constraints, the joints will be assumed to be rigidly connected. as constraints, the joints will be assumed to be rigidly connected.

1.16 Loads 1.16 Loads

Loads in a structure can be specified as joint load, member load, Loads in a structure can be specified as joint load, member load,
temperature load and fixed-end member load. STAAD can also temperature load and fixed-end member load. STAAD can also
generate the self-weight of the structure and use it as uniformly generate the self-weight of the structure and use it as uniformly
distributed member loads in analysis. Any fraction of this self- distributed member loads in analysis. Any fraction of this self-
weight can also be applied in any desired direction. weight can also be applied in any desired direction.

1.16.1 Joint Load 1.16.1 Joint Load


Joint loads, both forces and moments, may be applied to any free Joint loads, both forces and moments, may be applied to any free
See section joint of a structure. These loads act in the global coordinate system See section joint of a structure. These loads act in the global coordinate system
5.32.1 of the structure. Positive forces act in the positive coordinate 5.32.1 of the structure. Positive forces act in the positive coordinate
directions. Any number of loads may be applied on a single joint, directions. Any number of loads may be applied on a single joint,
in which case the loads will be additive on that joint. in which case the loads will be additive on that joint.
Section 1 1-45 Section 1 1-45

1.16.2 Member Load 1.16.2 Member Load


Three types of member loads may be applied directly to a member Three types of member loads may be applied directly to a member
of a structure. These loads are uniformly distributed loads, of a structure. These loads are uniformly distributed loads,
See section See section
concentrated loads, and linearly varying loads (including concentrated loads, and linearly varying loads (including
5.32.2 5.32.2
trapezoidal). Uniform loads act on the full or partial length of a trapezoidal). Uniform loads act on the full or partial length of a
member. Concentrated loads act at any intermediate, specified member. Concentrated loads act at any intermediate, specified
point. Linearly varying loads act over the full length of a member. point. Linearly varying loads act over the full length of a member.
Trapezoidal linearly varying loads act over the full or partial Trapezoidal linearly varying loads act over the full or partial
length of a member. Trapezoidal loads are converted into a length of a member. Trapezoidal loads are converted into a
uniform load and several concentrated loads. uniform load and several concentrated loads.
Any number of loads may be specified to act upon a member in Any number of loads may be specified to act upon a member in
any independent loading condition. Member loads can be specified any independent loading condition. Member loads can be specified
in the member coordinate system or the global coordinate system. in the member coordinate system or the global coordinate system.
Uniformly distributed member loads provided in the global Uniformly distributed member loads provided in the global
coordinate system may be specified to act along the full or coordinate system may be specified to act along the full or
projected member length. Refer to Fig. 1.3 to find the relation of projected member length. Refer to Fig. 1.3 to find the relation of
the member to the global coordinate systems for specifying the member to the global coordinate systems for specifying
member loads. Positive forces act in the positive coordinate member loads. Positive forces act in the positive coordinate
directions, local or global, as the case may be. directions, local or global, as the case may be.
General Description General Description
1-46 Section 1 1-46 Section 1

Member Load Configurations - Figure 1.16 Member Load Configurations - Figure 1.16

1.16.3 Area / Floor Load 1.16.3 Area / Floor Load


Many times a floor (bound by X-Z plane) is subjected to a Many times a floor (bound by X-Z plane) is subjected to a
uniformly distributed load. It could require a lot of work to uniformly distributed load. It could require a lot of work to
calculate the member load for individual members in that floor. calculate the member load for individual members in that floor.
See section However, with the AREA or FLOOR LOAD command, the user See section However, with the AREA or FLOOR LOAD command, the user
5.32.4 can specify the area loads (unit load per unit square area) for 5.32.4 can specify the area loads (unit load per unit square area) for
members. The program will calculate the tributary area for these members. The program will calculate the tributary area for these
members and provide the proper member loads. The Area Load is members and provide the proper member loads. The Area Load is
used for one way distributions and the Floor Load is used for two used for one way distributions and the Floor Load is used for two
way distributions. way distributions.

The following assumptions are made while transferring the The following assumptions are made while transferring the
area/floor load to member load: area/floor load to member load:
Section 1 1-47 Section 1 1-47
a) The member load is assumed to be a linearly varying load a) The member load is assumed to be a linearly varying load
for which the start and the end values may be of different for which the start and the end values may be of different
magnitude. magnitude.

b) Tributary area of a member with an area load is calculated b) Tributary area of a member with an area load is calculated
based on half the spacing to the nearest approximately parallel based on half the spacing to the nearest approximately parallel
members on both sides. If the spacing is more than or equal to members on both sides. If the spacing is more than or equal to
the length of the member, the area load will be ignored. the length of the member, the area load will be ignored.

c) Area/Floor load should not be specified on members declared c) Area/Floor load should not be specified on members declared
as MEMBER CABLE, MEMBER TRUSS, MEMBER as MEMBER CABLE, MEMBER TRUSS, MEMBER
TENSION, MEMBER COMPRESSION or CURVED. TENSION, MEMBER COMPRESSION or CURVED.

Figure 1.17 shows a floor structure with area load specification of Figure 1.17 shows a floor structure with area load specification of
0.1. 0.1.

P P P P ; P P P P ;

       

         

       

P P P P

= =
Figure 1.17 Figure 1.17

Member 1 will have a linear load of 0.3 at one end and 0.2 at the Member 1 will have a linear load of 0.3 at one end and 0.2 at the
other end. Members 2 and 4 will have a uniform load of 0.5 over other end. Members 2 and 4 will have a uniform load of 0.5 over
the full length. Member 3 will have a linear load of 0.45 and 0.55 the full length. Member 3 will have a linear load of 0.45 and 0.55
at respective ends. Member 5 will have a uniform load of 0.25. at respective ends. Member 5 will have a uniform load of 0.25.
The rest of the members, 6 through 13, will have no contributory The rest of the members, 6 through 13, will have no contributory
General Description General Description
1-48 Section 1 1-48 Section 1
area load since the nearest parallel members are more than each of area load since the nearest parallel members are more than each of
the member lengths apart. However, the reactions from the the member lengths apart. However, the reactions from the
members to the girder will be considered. members to the girder will be considered.

Plates and solids are ignored in these commands. Plates and solids are ignored in these commands.

1.16.4 Fixed End Member Load 1.16.4 Fixed End Member Load
Load effects on a member may also be specified in terms of its Load effects on a member may also be specified in terms of its
fixed end loads. These loads are given in terms of the member fixed end loads. These loads are given in terms of the member
See section coordinate system and the directions are opposite to the actual load See section coordinate system and the directions are opposite to the actual load
5.32.7 on the member. Each end of a member can have six forces: axial; 5.32.7 on the member. Each end of a member can have six forces: axial;
shear y; shear z; torsion; moment y, and moment z. shear y; shear z; torsion; moment y, and moment z.

1.16.5 Prestress and Poststress Member Load 1.16.5 Prestress and Poststress Member Load
Members in a structure may be subjected to prestress load for which the Members in a structure may be subjected to prestress load for which the
load distribution in the structure may be investigated. The prestressing load load distribution in the structure may be investigated. The prestressing load
in a member may be applied axially or eccentrically. The eccentricities can in a member may be applied axially or eccentrically. The eccentricities can
See section be provided at the start joint, at the middle, and at the end joint. These See section be provided at the start joint, at the middle, and at the end joint. These
5.32.5 eccentricities are only in the local y-axis. A positive eccentricity will be in 5.32.5 eccentricities are only in the local y-axis. A positive eccentricity will be in
the positive local y-direction. Since eccentricities are only provided in the the positive local y-direction. Since eccentricities are only provided in the
local y-axis, care should be taken when providing prismatic properties or in local y-axis, care should be taken when providing prismatic properties or in
specifying the correct BETA angle when rotating the member coordinates, specifying the correct BETA angle when rotating the member coordinates,
if necessary. Two types of prestress load specification are available; if necessary. Two types of prestress load specification are available;
PRESTRESS, where the effects of the load are transmitted to the PRESTRESS, where the effects of the load are transmitted to the
rest of the structure, and POSTSTRESS, where the effects of the rest of the structure, and POSTSTRESS, where the effects of the
load are experienced exclusively by the members on which it is load are experienced exclusively by the members on which it is
applied. applied.

1) The cable is assumed to have a generalized parabolic profile. 1) The cable is assumed to have a generalized parabolic profile.
The equation of the parabola is assumed to be The equation of the parabola is assumed to be

y = ax2 + bx + c y = ax2 + bx + c

1 1
where a=
2
(2 es − 4 em + 2 ee) where a= (2 es − 4 em + 2 ee)
L L2
1 1
b = ( 4em − ee − 3es) b = ( 4em − ee − 3es)
L L
Section 1 1-49 Section 1 1-49
c = es c = es

where es = eccentricity of cable at start of member (in local where es = eccentricity of cable at start of member (in local
y-axis) y-axis)
em = eccentricity of cable at middle of member (in em = eccentricity of cable at middle of member (in
local y-axis) local y-axis)
ee = eccentricity of cable at end of member (in local ee = eccentricity of cable at end of member (in local
y-axis) y-axis)
L = Length of member L = Length of member

2) The angle of inclination of the cable with respect to the local 2) The angle of inclination of the cable with respect to the local
x-axis (a straight line joining the start and end joints of the x-axis (a straight line joining the start and end joints of the
member) at the start and end points is small which gives rise to member) at the start and end points is small which gives rise to
the assumption that the assumption that

sin θ = θ = dy / dx sin θ = θ = dy / dx

Hence, if the axial force in the cable is P, the vertical Hence, if the axial force in the cable is P, the vertical
component of the force at the ends is P(dy / dx) and the component of the force at the ends is P(dy / dx) and the
horizontal component of the cable force is, horizontal component of the cable force is,

2 2
 dy   dy 
P 1−   P 1−  
 dx   dx 

Users are advised to ensure that their cable profile meets this Users are advised to ensure that their cable profile meets this
requirement. An angle under 5 degrees is recommended. requirement. An angle under 5 degrees is recommended.

3) The member is analyzed for the prestressing/poststressing 3) The member is analyzed for the prestressing/poststressing
effects using the equivalent load method. This method is well effects using the equivalent load method. This method is well
documented in most reputed books on Analysis and Design of documented in most reputed books on Analysis and Design of
Prestressed concrete. The magnitude of the uniformly Prestressed concrete. The magnitude of the uniformly
distributed load is calculated as distributed load is calculated as

8Pe 8Pe
udl = udl =
L2 L2

where P = axial force in the cable where P = axial force in the cable
(es + ee) (es + ee)
e= − em e= − em
2 2
L = length of the member L = length of the member
General Description General Description
1-50 Section 1 1-50 Section 1
4) The force in the cable is assumed to be same throughout the 4) The force in the cable is assumed to be same throughout the
member length. No reduction is made in the cable forces to member length. No reduction is made in the cable forces to
account for friction or other losses. account for friction or other losses.

5) The term MEMBER PRESTRESS as used in STAAD signifies 5) The term MEMBER PRESTRESS as used in STAAD signifies
the following condition. The structure is constructed first. the following condition. The structure is constructed first.
Then, the prestressing force is applied on the relevant Then, the prestressing force is applied on the relevant
members. As a result, the members deform and depending on members. As a result, the members deform and depending on
their end conditions, forces are transmitted to other members their end conditions, forces are transmitted to other members
in the structure. In other words, "PRE" refers to the time of in the structure. In other words, "PRE" refers to the time of
placement of the member in the structure relative to the time placement of the member in the structure relative to the time
of stressing. of stressing.

6) The term MEMBER POSTSTRESS as used in STAAD 6) The term MEMBER POSTSTRESS as used in STAAD
signifies the following condition. The members on which such signifies the following condition. The members on which such
load is applied are first cast in the factory. Following this, the load is applied are first cast in the factory. Following this, the
prestressing force is applied on them. Meanwhile, the rest of prestressing force is applied on them. Meanwhile, the rest of
the structure is constructed at the construction site. Then, the the structure is constructed at the construction site. Then, the
prestressed members are brought and placed in position on the prestressed members are brought and placed in position on the
partially built structure. Due to this sequence, the effects of partially built structure. Due to this sequence, the effects of
prestressing are "experienced" by only the prestressed prestressing are "experienced" by only the prestressed
members and not transmitted to the rest of the structure. In members and not transmitted to the rest of the structure. In
other words, "POST" refers to the time of placement of the other words, "POST" refers to the time of placement of the
member in the structure relative to the time of stressing. member in the structure relative to the time of stressing.

7) As may be evident from Item (6) above, it is not possible to 7) As may be evident from Item (6) above, it is not possible to
compute the displacements of the ends of the compute the displacements of the ends of the
POSTSTRESSED members for the effects of POSTSTRESSED members for the effects of
POSTSTRESSing, and hence are assumed to be zero. As a POSTSTRESSing, and hence are assumed to be zero. As a
result, displacements of intermediate sections (See SECTION result, displacements of intermediate sections (See SECTION
DISPLACEMENT command) are measured relative to the DISPLACEMENT command) are measured relative to the
straight line joining the start and end joints of the members as straight line joining the start and end joints of the members as
defined by their initial JOINT COORDINATES. defined by their initial JOINT COORDINATES.

1.16.6 Temperature/Strain Load 1.16.6 Temperature/Strain Load


See section Uniform temperature difference throughout members and elements See section Uniform temperature difference throughout members and elements
5.32.6 may be specified. Temperature differences across both faces of 5.32.6 may be specified. Temperature differences across both faces of
members and through the thickness of plates may also be specified members and through the thickness of plates may also be specified
(uniform temperature only for solids).. The program calculates the (uniform temperature only for solids).. The program calculates the
axial strain (elongation and shrinkage) due to the temperature axial strain (elongation and shrinkage) due to the temperature
difference for members. From this it calculates the induced forces difference for members. From this it calculates the induced forces
Section 1 1-51 Section 1 1-51
in the member and the analysis is done accordingly. The strain in the member and the analysis is done accordingly. The strain
intervals of elongation and shrinkage can be input directly. intervals of elongation and shrinkage can be input directly.

1.16.7 Support Displacement Load 1.16.7 Support Displacement Load


Static Loads can be applied to the structure in terms of the Static Loads can be applied to the structure in terms of the
displacement of the supports. Displacement can be translational or displacement of the supports. Displacement can be translational or
See section rotational. Translational displacements are provided in the See section rotational. Translational displacements are provided in the
5.32.8 specified length while the rotational displacements are always in 5.32.8 specified length while the rotational displacements are always in
degrees. Note that displacements can be specified only in degrees. Note that displacements can be specified only in
directions in which the support has an “enforced” specification in directions in which the support has an “enforced” specification in
the Support command. the Support command.

1.16.8 Loading on Elements 1.16.8 Loading on Elements


On Plate/Shell elements, the types of loading that are permissible On Plate/Shell elements, the types of loading that are permissible
are: are:

1) Pressure loading which consists of loads which act 1) Pressure loading which consists of loads which act
perpendicular to the surface of the element. The pressure loads perpendicular to the surface of the element. The pressure loads
can be of uniform intensity or trapezoidally varying intensity can be of uniform intensity or trapezoidally varying intensity
over a small portion or over the entire surface of the element. over a small portion or over the entire surface of the element.

2) Joint loads which are forces or moments that are applied at the 2) Joint loads which are forces or moments that are applied at the
joints in the direction of the global axes. joints in the direction of the global axes.

3) Temperature loads which may be constant throughout the plate 3) Temperature loads which may be constant throughout the plate
element (causing only elongation / shortening) or may vary element (causing only elongation / shortening) or may vary
across the depth of a plate element causing bending on the plate across the depth of a plate element causing bending on the plate
element. The coefficient of thermal expansion for the material of element. The coefficient of thermal expansion for the material of
the element must be provided in order to facilitate computation the element must be provided in order to facilitate computation
of these effects. of these effects.

4) The self-weight of the elements can be applied using the 4) The self-weight of the elements can be applied using the
SELFWEIGHT loading condition. The density of the elements SELFWEIGHT loading condition. The density of the elements
has to be provided in order to facilitate computation of the self- has to be provided in order to facilitate computation of the self-
weight. weight.
General Description General Description
1-52 Section 1 1-52 Section 1

On Solid elements, the only three loading types available are On Solid elements, the only three loading types available are

1) The self-weight of the solid elements can be applied using the 1) The self-weight of the solid elements can be applied using the
SELFWEIGHT loading condition. The density of the elements SELFWEIGHT loading condition. The density of the elements
has to be provided in order to facilitate computation of the self- has to be provided in order to facilitate computation of the self-
weight. weight.

2) Joint loads which are forces or moments that are applied at the 2) Joint loads which are forces or moments that are applied at the
joints in the direction of the global axes. joints in the direction of the global axes.

3) Temperature loads which may be constant throughout the solid 3) Temperature loads which may be constant throughout the solid
elements (causing only elongation / shortening). The coefficient elements (causing only elongation / shortening). The coefficient
of thermal expansion for the material of the element must be of thermal expansion for the material of the element must be
provided in order to facilitate computation of these effects. provided in order to facilitate computation of these effects.

Note that only translational stiffness is supported in solid elements. Thus, Note that only translational stiffness is supported in solid elements. Thus,
at joints where there are only solid elements, moments may not be applied. at joints where there are only solid elements, moments may not be applied.
For efficiency, rotational supports should be used at these joints. For efficiency, rotational supports should be used at these joints.

1.17 Load Generator 1.17 Load Generator

STAAD is equipped with built-in algorithms to generate moving STAAD is equipped with built-in algorithms to generate moving
loads and lateral seismic loads (per the Uniform Building Code loads and lateral seismic loads (per the Uniform Building Code
and the IS 1893 code) on a structure. Use of the load generation and the IS 1893 code) on a structure. Use of the load generation
facility consists of two parts : facility consists of two parts :

1) Definition of the load system(s). 1) Definition of the load system(s).


2) Generation of primary load cases using previously defined 2) Generation of primary load cases using previously defined
load system(s). load system(s).

The following sections describe the salient features of the moving The following sections describe the salient features of the moving
load generator, the seismic load generator and the wind load load generator, the seismic load generator and the wind load
generator available. generator available.
Section 1 1-53 Section 1 1-53

1.17.1 Moving Load Generator 1.17.1 Moving Load Generator


This feature enables the user to generate moving loads on members This feature enables the user to generate moving loads on members
of a structure. Moving load system(s) consisting of concentrated of a structure. Moving load system(s) consisting of concentrated
See sections loads at fixed specified distances in both directions on a plane can See sections loads at fixed specified distances in both directions on a plane can
5.31.1 and be defined by the user. A user specified number of primary load 5.31.1 and be defined by the user. A user specified number of primary load
5.32.12 cases will be subsequently generated by the program and taken 5.32.12 cases will be subsequently generated by the program and taken
into consideration in analysis. American Association of State into consideration in analysis. American Association of State
Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO, 1983) loadings Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO, 1983) loadings
are available within the program and can be specified using are available within the program and can be specified using
standard AASHTO designations. standard AASHTO designations.

1.17.2 UBC / IBC Seismic Load Generator 1.17.2 UBC / IBC Seismic Load Generator
The STAAD seismic load generator follows the UBC or IBC The STAAD seismic load generator follows the UBC or IBC
procedure of equivalent lateral load analysis. It is assumed that the procedure of equivalent lateral load analysis. It is assumed that the
lateral loads will be exerted in X and Z directions and Y will be lateral loads will be exerted in X and Z directions and Y will be
See sections See sections
the direction of the gravity loads. Thus, for a building model, Y the direction of the gravity loads. Thus, for a building model, Y
5.31.2 and 5.31.2 and
axis will be perpendicular to the floors and point upward (all Y axis will be perpendicular to the floors and point upward (all Y
5.32.12 5.32.12
joint coordinates positive). The user is required to set up his model joint coordinates positive). The user is required to set up his model
accordingly. Total lateral seismic force or base shear is accordingly. Total lateral seismic force or base shear is
automatically calculated by STAAD using the appropriate UBC automatically calculated by STAAD using the appropriate UBC
equation. Note that IBC 2000, UBC 1997, 1994, or 1995, IS:1893, equation. Note that IBC 2000, UBC 1997, 1994, or 1995, IS:1893,
Japanese, or Colombian specifications may be used. Japanese, or Colombian specifications may be used.

For load generation per the codes, the user is required to provide For load generation per the codes, the user is required to provide
seismic zone coefficients, importance factors, periods, etc. See seismic zone coefficients, importance factors, periods, etc. See
section 5.31.2 for the detailed input required for each code. section 5.31.2 for the detailed input required for each code.

Instead of using approximate UBC formulas to estimate the Instead of using approximate UBC formulas to estimate the
building period in a certain direction, the program calculates the building period in a certain direction, the program calculates the
period using Raleigh quotient technique. This period is then period using Raleigh quotient technique. This period is then
utilized to calculate seismic coefficient C. utilized to calculate seismic coefficient C.

After the base shear is calculated from the appropriate equation, it After the base shear is calculated from the appropriate equation, it
is distributed among the various levels and roof per UBC is distributed among the various levels and roof per UBC
specifications. The distributed base shears are subsequently specifications. The distributed base shears are subsequently
General Description General Description
1-54 Section 1 1-54 Section 1
applied as lateral loads on the structure. These loads may then be applied as lateral loads on the structure. These loads may then be
utilized as normal load cases for analysis and design. utilized as normal load cases for analysis and design.

1.17.3 Wind Load Generator 1.17.3 Wind Load Generator

The STAAD Wind Load generator is capable of calculating wind The STAAD Wind Load generator is capable of calculating wind
loads on joints of a structure from user specified wind intensities loads on joints of a structure from user specified wind intensities
See sections and exposure factors. Different wind intensities may be specified See sections and exposure factors. Different wind intensities may be specified
5.31.5 and for different height zones of the structure. Openings in the 5.31.5 and for different height zones of the structure. Openings in the
5.32.12 structure may be modeled using exposure factors. An exposure 5.32.12 structure may be modeled using exposure factors. An exposure
factor is associated with each joint of the structure and is defined factor is associated with each joint of the structure and is defined
as the fraction of the influence area on which the wind load acts. as the fraction of the influence area on which the wind load acts.
Built-in algorithms automatically calculate the exposed area based Built-in algorithms automatically calculate the exposed area based
on the areas bounded by members (plates and solids are not on the areas bounded by members (plates and solids are not
considered), then calculates the wind loads from the intensity and considered), then calculates the wind loads from the intensity and
exposure input and distributes the loads as lateral joint loads. exposure input and distributes the loads as lateral joint loads.

1.18 Analysis Facilities 1.18 Analysis Facilities

The following PERFORM ANALYSIS facilities are available in The following PERFORM ANALYSIS facilities are available in
STAAD. STAAD.

1) Stiffness Analysis / Linear Static Analysis 1) Stiffness Analysis / Linear Static Analysis
2) Second Order Static Analysis 2) Second Order Static Analysis
P-Delta Analysis P-Delta Analysis
Non-Linear Analysis Non-Linear Analysis
Multi Linear Spring Support Multi Linear Spring Support
Member/Spring Tension/Compression only Member/Spring Tension/Compression only
3) Dynamic Analysis 3) Dynamic Analysis
Time History Time History
Response Spectrum Response Spectrum

Salient features of each type of analysis are discussed in the Salient features of each type of analysis are discussed in the
following sections. Detailed theoretical treatments of these following sections. Detailed theoretical treatments of these
features are available in standard structural engineering textbooks. features are available in standard structural engineering textbooks.
Section 1 1-55 Section 1 1-55

1.18.1 Stiffness Analysis 1.18.1 Stiffness Analysis


The stiffness analysis implemented in STAAD is based on the The stiffness analysis implemented in STAAD is based on the
matrix displacement method. In the matrix analysis of structures matrix displacement method. In the matrix analysis of structures
See section by the displacement method, the structure is first idealized into an See section by the displacement method, the structure is first idealized into an
5.37 assembly of discrete structural components (frame members or 5.37 assembly of discrete structural components (frame members or
finite elements). Each component has an assumed form of finite elements). Each component has an assumed form of
displacement in a manner which satisfies the force equilibrium and displacement in a manner which satisfies the force equilibrium and
displacement compatibility at the joints. displacement compatibility at the joints.

Structural systems such as slabs, plates, spread footings, etc., Structural systems such as slabs, plates, spread footings, etc.,
which transmit loads in 2 directions have to be discretized into a which transmit loads in 2 directions have to be discretized into a
number of 3 or 4 noded finite elements connected to each other at number of 3 or 4 noded finite elements connected to each other at
their nodes. Loads may be applied in the form of distributed loads their nodes. Loads may be applied in the form of distributed loads
on the element surfaces or as concentrated loads at the joints. The on the element surfaces or as concentrated loads at the joints. The
plane stress effects as well as the plate bending effects are taken plane stress effects as well as the plate bending effects are taken
into consideration in the analysis. into consideration in the analysis.

Assumptions of the Analysis Assumptions of the Analysis


For a complete analysis of the structure, the necessary matrices are For a complete analysis of the structure, the necessary matrices are
generated on the basis of the following assumptions: generated on the basis of the following assumptions:

1) The structure is idealized into an assembly of beam, plate and 1) The structure is idealized into an assembly of beam, plate and
solid type elements joined together at their vertices (nodes). solid type elements joined together at their vertices (nodes).
The assemblage is loaded and reacted by concentrated loads The assemblage is loaded and reacted by concentrated loads
acting at the nodes. These loads may be both forces and acting at the nodes. These loads may be both forces and
moments which may act in any specified direction. moments which may act in any specified direction.

2) A beam member is a longitudinal structural member having a 2) A beam member is a longitudinal structural member having a
constant, doubly symmetric or near-doubly symmetric cross constant, doubly symmetric or near-doubly symmetric cross
section along its length. Beam members always carry axial section along its length. Beam members always carry axial
forces. They may also be subjected to shear and bending in forces. They may also be subjected to shear and bending in
two arbitrary perpendicular planes, and they may also be two arbitrary perpendicular planes, and they may also be
subjected to torsion. From this point these beam members are subjected to torsion. From this point these beam members are
referred to as "members" in the manual. referred to as "members" in the manual.

3) A plate element is a three or four noded planar element having 3) A plate element is a three or four noded planar element having
variable thickness. A solid element is a 4-8 noded three variable thickness. A solid element is a 4-8 noded three
General Description General Description
1-56 Section 1 1-56 Section 1
dimensional element. These plate and solid elements are dimensional element. These plate and solid elements are
referred to as "elements" in the manual. referred to as "elements" in the manual.

4) Internal and external loads acting on each node are in 4) Internal and external loads acting on each node are in
equilibrium. If torsional or bending properties are defined for equilibrium. If torsional or bending properties are defined for
any member, six degrees of freedom are considered at each any member, six degrees of freedom are considered at each
node (i.e. three translational and three rotational) in the node (i.e. three translational and three rotational) in the
generation of relevant matrices. If the member is defined as generation of relevant matrices. If the member is defined as
truss member (i.e. carrying only axial forces) then only the truss member (i.e. carrying only axial forces) then only the
three degrees (translational) of freedom are considered at each three degrees (translational) of freedom are considered at each
node. node.

5) Two types of coordinate systems are used in the generation of 5) Two types of coordinate systems are used in the generation of
the required matrices and are referred to as local and global the required matrices and are referred to as local and global
systems. systems.

Local coordinate axes are assigned to each individual element and Local coordinate axes are assigned to each individual element and
are oriented such that computing effort for element stiffness are oriented such that computing effort for element stiffness
matrices are generalized and minimized. Global coordinate axes matrices are generalized and minimized. Global coordinate axes
are a common datum established for all idealized elements so that are a common datum established for all idealized elements so that
element forces and displacements may be related to a common element forces and displacements may be related to a common
frame of reference. frame of reference.

Basic Equation Basic Equation


The complete stiffness matrix of the structure is obtained by The complete stiffness matrix of the structure is obtained by
systematically summing the contributions of the various member systematically summing the contributions of the various member
and element stiffness. The external loads on the structure are and element stiffness. The external loads on the structure are
represented as discrete concentrated loads acting only at the nodal represented as discrete concentrated loads acting only at the nodal
points of the structure. points of the structure.

The stiffness matrix relates these loads to the displacements of the The stiffness matrix relates these loads to the displacements of the
nodes by the equation: nodes by the equation:

Aj = a j + Sj x D j Aj = a j + Sj x D j

This formulation includes all the joints of the structure, whether This formulation includes all the joints of the structure, whether
they are free to displace or are restrained by supports. Those they are free to displace or are restrained by supports. Those
components of joint displacements that are free to move are called components of joint displacements that are free to move are called
Section 1 1-57 Section 1 1-57
degrees of freedom. The total number of degrees of freedom degrees of freedom. The total number of degrees of freedom
represent the number of unknowns in the analysis. represent the number of unknowns in the analysis.

Method to Solve for Displacements Method to Solve for Displacements


There are many methods to solve the unknowns from a series of There are many methods to solve the unknowns from a series of
simultaneous equations. An approach which is particularly suited simultaneous equations. An approach which is particularly suited
for structural analysis is called the method of decomposition. This for structural analysis is called the method of decomposition. This
method has been selected for use in STAAD. Since the stiffness method has been selected for use in STAAD. Since the stiffness
matrices of all linearly elastic structures are always symmetric, an matrices of all linearly elastic structures are always symmetric, an
especially efficient form of the decomposition called Modified especially efficient form of the decomposition called Modified
Cholesky's method may be applied to these problems. This method Cholesky's method may be applied to these problems. This method
is very accurate and cost effective and well suited for the Gaussian is very accurate and cost effective and well suited for the Gaussian
elimination process in solving the simultaneous equations. elimination process in solving the simultaneous equations.

Consideration of Bandwidth Consideration of Bandwidth


The method of decomposition is particularly efficient when The method of decomposition is particularly efficient when
applied to a symmetrically banded matrix. For this type of matrix applied to a symmetrically banded matrix. For this type of matrix
fewer calculations are required due to the fact that elements fewer calculations are required due to the fact that elements
outside the band are all equal to zero. outside the band are all equal to zero.

STAAD takes full advantage of this bandwidth during solution, as STAAD takes full advantage of this bandwidth during solution, as
it is important to have the least bandwidth to obtain the most it is important to have the least bandwidth to obtain the most
efficient solution. For this purpose, STAAD offers features by efficient solution. For this purpose, STAAD offers features by
which the program can internally rearrange the joint numbers to which the program can internally rearrange the joint numbers to
provide a better bandwidth. provide a better bandwidth.

Structural Integrity Structural Integrity

The integrity of the structure is a very important requirement that The integrity of the structure is a very important requirement that
must be satisfied by all models. Users must make sure that the must be satisfied by all models. Users must make sure that the
model developed represents one single structure only, not two or model developed represents one single structure only, not two or
more separate structures. more separate structures.

An "integral" structure or "one" structure may be defined as a system An "integral" structure or "one" structure may be defined as a system
in which proper "stiffness connections" exist between the in which proper "stiffness connections" exist between the
members/elements. The entire model functions as a single integrated members/elements. The entire model functions as a single integrated
load resisting system. Two or more independent structures within one load resisting system. Two or more independent structures within one
model results in erroneous mathematical formulation and therefore, model results in erroneous mathematical formulation and therefore,
General Description General Description
1-58 Section 1 1-58 Section 1

generates numerical problems. STAAD checks structural integrity generates numerical problems. STAAD checks structural integrity
using a sophisticated algorithm and reports detection of multiple using a sophisticated algorithm and reports detection of multiple
structures within the model. structures within the model.

Modeling and Numerical Instability Problems Modeling and Numerical Instability Problems

Instability problems can occur due to two primary reasons. Instability problems can occur due to two primary reasons.

1) Modeling problem 1) Modeling problem

There are a variety of modeling problems which can give rise There are a variety of modeling problems which can give rise
to instability conditions. They can be classified into two to instability conditions. They can be classified into two
groups. groups.

a) Local instability - A local instability is a condition where a) Local instability - A local instability is a condition where
the fixity conditions at the end(s) of a member are such as the fixity conditions at the end(s) of a member are such as
to cause an instability in the member about one or more to cause an instability in the member about one or more
degrees of freedom. Examples of local instability are: degrees of freedom. Examples of local instability are:

(i) Member Release: Members released at both ends for (i) Member Release: Members released at both ends for
any of the following degrees of freedom (FX, FY, FZ any of the following degrees of freedom (FX, FY, FZ
and MX) will be subjected to this problem. and MX) will be subjected to this problem.
(ii) A framed structure with columns and beams where the (ii) A framed structure with columns and beams where the
columns are defined as "TRUSS" members. Such a columns are defined as "TRUSS" members. Such a
column has no capacity to transfer shears or moments column has no capacity to transfer shears or moments
from the superstructure to the supports. from the superstructure to the supports.

b) Global Instability - These are caused when the supports of the b) Global Instability - These are caused when the supports of the
structure are such that they cannot offer any resistance to structure are such that they cannot offer any resistance to
sliding or overturning of the structure in one or more sliding or overturning of the structure in one or more
directions. For example, a 2D structure (frame in the XY directions. For example, a 2D structure (frame in the XY
plane) which is defined as a SPACE FRAME with pinned plane) which is defined as a SPACE FRAME with pinned
supports and subjected to a force in the Z direction will topple supports and subjected to a force in the Z direction will topple
over about the X-axis. Another example is that of a space over about the X-axis. Another example is that of a space
frame with all the supports released for FX, FY or FZ. frame with all the supports released for FX, FY or FZ.
Section 1 1-59 Section 1 1-59
2) Math precision 2) Math precision

A math precision error is caused when numerical instabilities A math precision error is caused when numerical instabilities
occur in the matrix decomposition (inversion) process. One of the occur in the matrix decomposition (inversion) process. One of the
terms of the equilibrium equation takes the form 1/(1-A), where terms of the equilibrium equation takes the form 1/(1-A), where
A=k1/(k1+k2); k1 and k2 being the stiffness coefficients of two A=k1/(k1+k2); k1 and k2 being the stiffness coefficients of two
adjacent members. When a very "stiff" member is adjacent to a adjacent members. When a very "stiff" member is adjacent to a
very "flexible" member, viz., when k1>>k2, or k1+k2 ≅ k1, A=1 very "flexible" member, viz., when k1>>k2, or k1+k2 ≅ k1, A=1
and hence, 1/(1-A) =1/0. Thus, huge variations in stiffnesses of and hence, 1/(1-A) =1/0. Thus, huge variations in stiffnesses of
adjacent members are not permitted. Artificially high E or I adjacent members are not permitted. Artificially high E or I
values should be reduced when this occurs. values should be reduced when this occurs.

Math precision errors are also caused when the units of length Math precision errors are also caused when the units of length
and force are not defined correctly for member lengths, and force are not defined correctly for member lengths,
member properties, constants etc. member properties, constants etc.

Users also have to ensure that the model defined represents one Users also have to ensure that the model defined represents one
single structure only, not two or more separate structures. For single structure only, not two or more separate structures. For
example, in an effort to model an expansion joint, the user may example, in an effort to model an expansion joint, the user may
end up defining separate structures within the same input file. end up defining separate structures within the same input file.
Multiple structures defined in one input file can lead to grossly Multiple structures defined in one input file can lead to grossly
erroneous results. erroneous results.

1.18.2 Second Order Analysis 1.18.2 Second Order Analysis


STAAD offers the capability to perform second order stability STAAD offers the capability to perform second order stability
See analyses. Two methods are available - a simplified method called See analyses. Two methods are available - a simplified method called
section 5.37 P-Delta Analysis and an elaborate method called Non Linear section 5.37 P-Delta Analysis and an elaborate method called Non Linear
Analysis. Both methods are explained below. Analysis. Both methods are explained below.

1.18.2.1 P-Delta Analysis 1.18.2.1 P-Delta Analysis


Structures subjected to lateral loads often experience secondary Structures subjected to lateral loads often experience secondary
See See
forces due to the movement of the point of application of vertical forces due to the movement of the point of application of vertical
section 5.37 section 5.37
loads. This secondary effect, commonly known as the P-Delta loads. This secondary effect, commonly known as the P-Delta
effect, plays an important role in the analysis of the structure. In effect, plays an important role in the analysis of the structure. In
STAAD, a unique procedure has been adopted to incorporate the STAAD, a unique procedure has been adopted to incorporate the
P-Delta effect into the analysis. The procedure consists of the P-Delta effect into the analysis. The procedure consists of the
following steps: following steps:
General Description General Description
1-60 Section 1 1-60 Section 1

1) First, the primary deflections are calculated based on the 1) First, the primary deflections are calculated based on the
provided external loading. provided external loading.

2) Primary deflections are then combined with the originally 2) Primary deflections are then combined with the originally
applied loading to create the secondary loadings. The load applied loading to create the secondary loadings. The load
vector is then revised to include the secondary effects. vector is then revised to include the secondary effects.

Note that the lateral loading must be present concurrently with Note that the lateral loading must be present concurrently with
the vertical loading for proper consideration of the P-Delta the vertical loading for proper consideration of the P-Delta
effect. The REPEAT LOAD facility (see Section 5.32.11) has effect. The REPEAT LOAD facility (see Section 5.32.11) has
been created with this requirement in mind. This facility been created with this requirement in mind. This facility
allows the user to combine previously defined primary load allows the user to combine previously defined primary load
cases to create a new primary load case. cases to create a new primary load case.

3) A new stiffness analysis is carried out based on the revised 3) A new stiffness analysis is carried out based on the revised
load vector to generate new deflections. load vector to generate new deflections.

4) Element/Member forces and support reactions are calculated 4) Element/Member forces and support reactions are calculated
based on the new deflections. based on the new deflections.

It may be noted that this procedure yields very accurate results It may be noted that this procedure yields very accurate results
with all small displacement problems. STAAD allows the user to with all small displacement problems. STAAD allows the user to
go through multiple iterations of the P-Delta procedure if go through multiple iterations of the P-Delta procedure if
necessary. The user is allowed to specify the number of iterations necessary. The user is allowed to specify the number of iterations
based on the requirement. To set the displacement convergence based on the requirement. To set the displacement convergence
tolerance, enter a SET DISP f command before the Joint tolerance, enter a SET DISP f command before the Joint
Coordinates. If the change in displacement norm from one iteration Coordinates. If the change in displacement norm from one iteration
to the next is less than f then it is converged. to the next is less than f then it is converged.

The P-Delta analysis is recommended by several design codes such The P-Delta analysis is recommended by several design codes such
as ACI 318, LRFD, IS456-1978, etc. in lieu of the moment as ACI 318, LRFD, IS456-1978, etc. in lieu of the moment
magnification method for the calculation of more realistic forces magnification method for the calculation of more realistic forces
and moments. and moments.

P-Delta effects are calculated for frame members and plate P-Delta effects are calculated for frame members and plate
elements only. They are not calculated for solid elements. P-Delta elements only. They are not calculated for solid elements. P-Delta
and Nonlinear analysis is restricted to structures where members and Nonlinear analysis is restricted to structures where members
Section 1 1-61 Section 1 1-61
and plate elements carry the vertical load from one structure and plate elements carry the vertical load from one structure
level to the next. level to the next.

1.18.2.2 Non Linear Analysis 1.18.2.2 Non Linear Analysis


STAAD also offers the capability to perform non-linear static STAAD also offers the capability to perform non-linear static
analysis based on geometric non-linearity. The non-linear analysis analysis based on geometric non-linearity. The non-linear analysis
algorithm incorporates both member geometric stiffness algorithm incorporates both member geometric stiffness
corrections and secondary loadings. corrections and secondary loadings.
See See
section 5.37 Non linear analysis methodology is generally adopted for section 5.37 Non linear analysis methodology is generally adopted for
structures subject to large displacements. As large displacements structures subject to large displacements. As large displacements
generally result in significant movement of the point of application generally result in significant movement of the point of application
of loads, consideration of secondary loadings becomes an of loads, consideration of secondary loadings becomes an
important criteria. In addition, geometric stiffness corrections are important criteria. In addition, geometric stiffness corrections are
applied to take into consideration the modified geometry. Since the applied to take into consideration the modified geometry. Since the
geometric stiffness corrections are based on generated geometric stiffness corrections are based on generated
displacements, they are different for different load cases. This displacements, they are different for different load cases. This
makes the non-linear analysis option load dependent. The STAAD makes the non-linear analysis option load dependent. The STAAD
non-linear analysis algorithm consists of the following steps : non-linear analysis algorithm consists of the following steps :
1) First, primary displacements are calculated for the applied 1) First, primary displacements are calculated for the applied
loading. loading.
2) Stiffness corrections are applied on the member/plate element 2) Stiffness corrections are applied on the member/plate element
stiffness matrices based on observed displacements. New stiffness matrices based on observed displacements. New
global stiffness matrix is assembled based on revised global stiffness matrix is assembled based on revised
member/element stiffness matrices using updated joint member/element stiffness matrices using updated joint
coordinates. coordinates.
3) Load vectors are revised to include the secondary effects due 3) Load vectors are revised to include the secondary effects due
to primary displacements. to primary displacements.
4) The new set of equations are solved to generate new 4) The new set of equations are solved to generate new
displacements. displacements.
5) Element/Member forces and support reactions are calculated 5) Element/Member forces and support reactions are calculated
from these new displacements. from these new displacements.
6) The STAAD non-linear analysis algorithm allows the user to 6) The STAAD non-linear analysis algorithm allows the user to
go through multiple iterations of the above procedure. The go through multiple iterations of the above procedure. The
number of iterations may be specified by the user based on the number of iterations may be specified by the user based on the
General Description General Description
1-62 Section 1 1-62 Section 1
requirement. It may be noted, however, that multiple iterations requirement. It may be noted, however, that multiple iterations
may increase the computer resource requirements and may increase the computer resource requirements and
execution time substantially. execution time substantially.

Note : The following points may be noted with respect to the non- Note : The following points may be noted with respect to the non-
linear analysis facility - linear analysis facility -
1) Since the procedure is load dependent, the user is required to 1) Since the procedure is load dependent, the user is required to
use the SET NL and CHANGE commands properly. The SET use the SET NL and CHANGE commands properly. The SET
NL command must be provided to specify the total number of NL command must be provided to specify the total number of
primary load cases. The CHANGE command should be used to primary load cases. The CHANGE command should be used to
reset the stiffness matrices after each load case. reset the stiffness matrices after each load case.
2) As the geometric corrections are based on displacements, all 2) As the geometric corrections are based on displacements, all
loads that are capable of producing significant displacements loads that are capable of producing significant displacements
must be part of the load case(s) identified for non-linear must be part of the load case(s) identified for non-linear
analysis. analysis.
3) To set the displacement divergence tolerance, enter a SET 3) To set the displacement divergence tolerance, enter a SET
DISP f command before the Joint Coordinates. If any DISP f command before the Joint Coordinates. If any
displacement on any iteration exceeds f , then the solution is displacement on any iteration exceeds f , then the solution is
diverging and is terminated. The default value for f is the diverging and is terminated. The default value for f is the
largest of the total width, height, or depth of the structure largest of the total width, height, or depth of the structure
divided by 120. divided by 120.

P-Delta and Nonlinear analysis is restricted to structures where P-Delta and Nonlinear analysis is restricted to structures where
members or plates carry the axial load from one structure level to members or plates carry the axial load from one structure level to
the next. the next.

1.18.2.3 Multi-Linear Analysis 1.18.2.3 Multi-Linear Analysis

When soil is to be modeled as spring supports, the varying resistance When soil is to be modeled as spring supports, the varying resistance
it offers to external loads can be modeled using this facility, such as it offers to external loads can be modeled using this facility, such as
when its behavior in tension differs from its behavior in when its behavior in tension differs from its behavior in
compression. Stiffness-Displacement characteristics of soil can be compression. Stiffness-Displacement characteristics of soil can be
represented by a multi-linear curve. Amplitude of this curve will represented by a multi-linear curve. Amplitude of this curve will
represent the spring characteristic of the soil at different represent the spring characteristic of the soil at different
displacement values. The load cases in a multi-linear spring analysis displacement values. The load cases in a multi-linear spring analysis
must be separated by the CHANGE command and PERFORM must be separated by the CHANGE command and PERFORM
ANALYSIS command. The SET NL command must be provided to ANALYSIS command. The SET NL command must be provided to
Section 1 1-63 Section 1 1-63
specify the total number of primary load cases. There may not be specify the total number of primary load cases. There may not be
any PDELTA, NONLINEAR, dynamic, or TENSION/ any PDELTA, NONLINEAR, dynamic, or TENSION/
COMPRESSION member cases. The multi-linear spring command COMPRESSION member cases. The multi-linear spring command
will initiate an iterative analysis which continues to convergence. will initiate an iterative analysis which continues to convergence.

1.18.2.4 Tension / Compression Only Analysis 1.18.2.4 Tension / Compression Only Analysis

When some members or support springs are linear but carry only When some members or support springs are linear but carry only
tension (or only compression), then this analysis may be used. This tension (or only compression), then this analysis may be used. This
analysis is automatically selected if any member or spring has been analysis is automatically selected if any member or spring has been
given the tension or compression only characteristic. This analysis is given the tension or compression only characteristic. This analysis is
an iterative analysis which continues to convergence. Any member/ an iterative analysis which continues to convergence. Any member/
spring that fails its criteria will be inactive (omitted) on the next spring that fails its criteria will be inactive (omitted) on the next
iteration. Iteration continues until all such members have the proper iteration. Iteration continues until all such members have the proper
load direction or are inactive (default iteration limit is 10). load direction or are inactive (default iteration limit is 10).

This is a simple method that may not work in some cases because This is a simple method that may not work in some cases because
members are removed on interim iterations that are needed for members are removed on interim iterations that are needed for
stability. If instability messages appear on the 2 nd and subsequent stability. If instability messages appear on the 2 nd and subsequent
iterations that did not appear on the first cycle, then do not use the iterations that did not appear on the first cycle, then do not use the
solution. If this occurs on cases where only springs are the solution. If this occurs on cases where only springs are the
tension/compression entities, then use multi-linear spring analysis. tension/compression entities, then use multi-linear spring analysis.

The load cases in a tension/compression analysis must be separated The load cases in a tension/compression analysis must be separated
by the CHANGE command and PERFORM ANALYSIS command. by the CHANGE command and PERFORM ANALYSIS command.
The SET NL command must be provided to specify the total number The SET NL command must be provided to specify the total number
of primary load cases. There may not be any Multi-linear springs, of primary load cases. There may not be any Multi-linear springs,
NONLINEAR, or dynamic cases. NONLINEAR, or dynamic cases.
General Description General Description
1-64 Section 1 1-64 Section 1

1.18.2.5 Non Linear Cable/Truss Analysis 1.18.2.5 Non Linear Cable/Truss Analysis
(available in limited form) (available in limited form)

When all of the members, elements and support springs are linear When all of the members, elements and support springs are linear
except for cable and/or preloaded truss members, then this analysis except for cable and/or preloaded truss members, then this analysis
type may be used. This analysis is based on applying the load in type may be used. This analysis is based on applying the load in
steps with equilibrium iterations to convergence at each step. The steps with equilibrium iterations to convergence at each step. The
step sizes start small and gradually increase (15-20 steps is the step sizes start small and gradually increase (15-20 steps is the
default). Iteration continues at each step until the change in default). Iteration continues at each step until the change in
deformations is small before proceeding to the next step. If not deformations is small before proceeding to the next step. If not
converged, then the solution is stopped. The user can then select converged, then the solution is stopped. The user can then select
more steps or modify the structure and rerun. more steps or modify the structure and rerun.
See sections See sections
5.30, 5.37, Structures can be artificially stabilized during the first few load 5.30, 5.37, Structures can be artificially stabilized during the first few load
1.11 steps in case the structure is initially unstable (in the linear, small 1.11 steps in case the structure is initially unstable (in the linear, small
displacement, static theory sense). displacement, static theory sense).

The user has control of the number of steps, the maximum number of The user has control of the number of steps, the maximum number of
iterations per step, the convergence tolerance, the artificial iterations per step, the convergence tolerance, the artificial
stabilizing stiffness, and the minimum amount of stiffness remaining stabilizing stiffness, and the minimum amount of stiffness remaining
after a cable sags. after a cable sags.

This method assumes small displacement theory for all This method assumes small displacement theory for all
members/trusses/elements other than cables & preloaded trusses. members/trusses/elements other than cables & preloaded trusses.
The cables and preloaded trusses can have large displacement and The cables and preloaded trusses can have large displacement and
moderate/large strain. Cables and preloaded trusses may carry moderate/large strain. Cables and preloaded trusses may carry
tension and compression but cables have a reduced E modulus if not tension and compression but cables have a reduced E modulus if not
fully taut. Pretension is the force necessary to stretch the cable/truss fully taut. Pretension is the force necessary to stretch the cable/truss
from its unstressed length to enable it to fit between the two end from its unstressed length to enable it to fit between the two end
joints. Alternatively, you may enter the unstressed length for cables. joints. Alternatively, you may enter the unstressed length for cables.

The current nonlinear cable analysis procedure can result in The current nonlinear cable analysis procedure can result in
compressive forces in the final cable results. The procedure was compressive forces in the final cable results. The procedure was
developed for structures, loadings, and pretensioning loads that will developed for structures, loadings, and pretensioning loads that will
result in sufficient tension in every cable for all loading conditions. result in sufficient tension in every cable for all loading conditions.
The possibility of compression was considered acceptable in the The possibility of compression was considered acceptable in the
initial implementation because most design codes strongly initial implementation because most design codes strongly
Section 1 1-65 Section 1 1-65
recommend cables to be in tension to avoid the undesirable recommend cables to be in tension to avoid the undesirable
dynamic effects of a slack cable such as galloping, singing, or dynamic effects of a slack cable such as galloping, singing, or
pounding. The engineer must specify initial preloading tensions pounding. The engineer must specify initial preloading tensions
which will ensure that all cable results are in tension. In addition which will ensure that all cable results are in tension. In addition
this procedure is much more reliable and efficient than general this procedure is much more reliable and efficient than general
nonlinear algorithms. To minimize the compression the SAGMIN nonlinear algorithms. To minimize the compression the SAGMIN
input variable can be set to a small value such as 0.01, however that input variable can be set to a small value such as 0.01, however that
can lead to a failure to converge unless many more steps are can lead to a failure to converge unless many more steps are
specified and a higher equilibrium iteration limit is specified. specified and a higher equilibrium iteration limit is specified.
SAGMIN values below 0.70 generally requires some adjustments of SAGMIN values below 0.70 generally requires some adjustments of
the other input parameters to get convergence. the other input parameters to get convergence.

Currently the cable and truss are not automatically loaded by Currently the cable and truss are not automatically loaded by
selfweight, but the user should ensure that selfweight is applied in selfweight, but the user should ensure that selfweight is applied in
every load case. Do not enter component load cases such as wind every load case. Do not enter component load cases such as wind
only; every case must be realistic. Member loads will be lumped at only; every case must be realistic. Member loads will be lumped at
the ends for cables and trusses. Temperature load may also be the ends for cables and trusses. Temperature load may also be
applied to the cables and trusses. It is OK to break up the applied to the cables and trusses. It is OK to break up the
cable/truss into several members and apply forces to the intermediate cable/truss into several members and apply forces to the intermediate
joints. Y-up is assumed and required. joints. Y-up is assumed and required.

The member force printed for the cable is Fx and is along the chord The member force printed for the cable is Fx and is along the chord
line between the displaced positions of the end joints. line between the displaced positions of the end joints.

The analysis sequence is as follows: The analysis sequence is as follows:


1. Compute the unstressed length of the nonlinear members based 1. Compute the unstressed length of the nonlinear members based
on joint coordinates, pretension, and temperature. on joint coordinates, pretension, and temperature.
2. Member/Element/Cable stiffness is formed. Cable stiffness is 2. Member/Element/Cable stiffness is formed. Cable stiffness is
from EA/L and the sag formula plus a geometric stiffness based from EA/L and the sag formula plus a geometric stiffness based
on current tension. on current tension.
3. Assemble and solve the global matrix with the percentage of the 3. Assemble and solve the global matrix with the percentage of the
total applied load used for this load step. total applied load used for this load step.
4. Perform equilibrium iterations to adjust the change in directions 4. Perform equilibrium iterations to adjust the change in directions
of the forces in the nonlinear cables, so that the structure is in of the forces in the nonlinear cables, so that the structure is in
static equilibrium in the deformed position. If force changes are static equilibrium in the deformed position. If force changes are
too large or convergence criteria not met within 15 iterations too large or convergence criteria not met within 15 iterations
then stop the analysis. then stop the analysis.
General Description General Description
1-66 Section 1 1-66 Section 1

5. Go to step 2 and repeat with a greater percentage of the applied 5. Go to step 2 and repeat with a greater percentage of the applied
load. The nonlinear members will have an updated orientation load. The nonlinear members will have an updated orientation
with new tension and sag effects. with new tension and sag effects.
6. After 100% of the applied load has converged then proceed to 6. After 100% of the applied load has converged then proceed to
compute member forces, reactions, and static check. Note that compute member forces, reactions, and static check. Note that
the static check is not exactly in balance due to the the static check is not exactly in balance due to the
displacements of the applied static equivalent joint loads. displacements of the applied static equivalent joint loads.

The load cases in a non linear cable analysis must be separated by The load cases in a non linear cable analysis must be separated by
the CHANGE command and PERFORM CABLE ANALYSIS the CHANGE command and PERFORM CABLE ANALYSIS
command. The SET NL command must be provided to specify the command. The SET NL command must be provided to specify the
total number of primary load cases. There may not be any Multi- total number of primary load cases. There may not be any Multi-
linear springs, compression only, PDelta, NONLINEAR, or dynamic linear springs, compression only, PDelta, NONLINEAR, or dynamic
cases. cases.

Also for cables and preloaded trusses: Also for cables and preloaded trusses:
1. Do not use Member Offsets. 1. Do not use Member Offsets.
2. Do not include the end joints in Master/Slave command. 2. Do not include the end joints in Master/Slave command.
3. Do not connect to inclined support joints. 3. Do not connect to inclined support joints.
4. Y direction must be up. 4. Y direction must be up.
5. Do not impose displacements. 5. Do not impose displacements.
6. Do not use Support springs in the model. 6. Do not use Support springs in the model.
7. Applied loads do not change global directions due to 7. Applied loads do not change global directions due to
displacements. displacements.
8. Do not apply Prestress load, Fixed end load. 8. Do not apply Prestress load, Fixed end load.
9. Do not use Load Combination command to combine cable 9. Do not use Load Combination command to combine cable
analysis results. Use a primary case with Repeat Load instead. analysis results. Use a primary case with Repeat Load instead.

1.18.3 Dynamic Analysis 1.18.3 Dynamic Analysis


Currently available dynamic analysis facilities include solution of Currently available dynamic analysis facilities include solution of
the free vibration problem (eigenproblem), response spectrum the free vibration problem (eigenproblem), response spectrum
analysis and forced vibration analysis. analysis and forced vibration analysis.

Solution of the Eigenproblem Solution of the Eigenproblem


See sections The eigenproblem is solved for structure frequencies and mode See sections The eigenproblem is solved for structure frequencies and mode
5.30, shapes considering a diagonal, lumped mass matrix, with masses 5.30, shapes considering a diagonal, lumped mass matrix, with masses
5.32.10, 5.34 possible at all active d.o.f. included. Two solution methods may be 5.32.10, 5.34 possible at all active d.o.f. included. Two solution methods may be
Section 1 1-67 Section 1 1-67
used: the subspace iteration method for all problem sizes used: the subspace iteration method for all problem sizes
(default for all problem sizes), and the optional determinant search (default for all problem sizes), and the optional determinant search
method for small problems. method for small problems.

Mass Modeling Mass Modeling


The natural frequencies and mode shapes of a structure are the The natural frequencies and mode shapes of a structure are the
primary parameters that affect the response of a structure under primary parameters that affect the response of a structure under
dynamic loading. The free vibration problem is solved to extract dynamic loading. The free vibration problem is solved to extract
these values. Since no external forcing function is involved, the these values. Since no external forcing function is involved, the
natural frequencies and mode shapes are direct functions of the natural frequencies and mode shapes are direct functions of the
stiffness and mass distribution in the structure. Results of the stiffness and mass distribution in the structure. Results of the
frequency and mode shape calculations may vary significantly frequency and mode shape calculations may vary significantly
depending upon the mass modeling. This variation, in turn, affects depending upon the mass modeling. This variation, in turn, affects
the response spectrum and forced vibration analysis results. Thus, the response spectrum and forced vibration analysis results. Thus,
extreme caution should be exercised in mass modeling in a extreme caution should be exercised in mass modeling in a
dynamic analysis problem. dynamic analysis problem.

In STAAD, all masses that are capable of moving should be In STAAD, all masses that are capable of moving should be
modeled as loads applied in all possible directions of movement. modeled as loads applied in all possible directions of movement.
Even if the loading is known to be only in one direction there is Even if the loading is known to be only in one direction there is
usually mass motion in other directions at some or all joints and usually mass motion in other directions at some or all joints and
these mass directions (“loads” in weight units) must be entered to these mass directions (“loads” in weight units) must be entered to
be correct. Joint moments that are entered will be considered to be be correct. Joint moments that are entered will be considered to be
2 2
weight moment of inertias (force-length units). weight moment of inertias (force-length units).

Please enter selfweight, joint and element loadings in global Please enter selfweight, joint and element loadings in global
directions with the same sign as much as possible so that the directions with the same sign as much as possible so that the
“masses” do not cancel each other. “masses” do not cancel each other.

Member/Element loadings may also be used to generate joint Member/Element loadings may also be used to generate joint
translational masses. Note that member end joint moments that are translational masses. Note that member end joint moments that are
generated by the member loading (including concentrated generated by the member loading (including concentrated
moments) are discarded as irrelevant to dynamics. Enter mass moments) are discarded as irrelevant to dynamics. Enter mass
moments of inertia, if needed, at the joints as joint moments. moments of inertia, if needed, at the joints as joint moments.

STAAD uses a diagonal mass matrix of 6 lumped mass equations STAAD uses a diagonal mass matrix of 6 lumped mass equations
per joint. The selfweight or uniformly loaded member is lumped per joint. The selfweight or uniformly loaded member is lumped
50% to each end joint without rotational mass moments of inertia. 50% to each end joint without rotational mass moments of inertia.
General Description General Description
1-68 Section 1 1-68 Section 1
The other element types are integrated but roughly speaking the The other element types are integrated but roughly speaking the
weight is distributed equally amongst the joints of the element. weight is distributed equally amongst the joints of the element.

The members/elements of finite element theory are simple The members/elements of finite element theory are simple
mathematical representations of deformation meant to apply over a mathematical representations of deformation meant to apply over a
small region. The FEA procedures will converge if you subdivide small region. The FEA procedures will converge if you subdivide
the elements and rerun; then subdivide the elements that have the elements and rerun; then subdivide the elements that have
significantly changed results and rerun; etc. until the key results significantly changed results and rerun; etc. until the key results
are converged to the accuracy needed. are converged to the accuracy needed.

An example of a simple beam problem that needs to subdivide real An example of a simple beam problem that needs to subdivide real
members to better represent the mass distribution (and the dynamic members to better represent the mass distribution (and the dynamic
response and the force distribution response along members) is a response and the force distribution response along members) is a
simple floor beam between 2 columns will put all of the mass on simple floor beam between 2 columns will put all of the mass on
the column joints. In this example, a vertical ground motion will the column joints. In this example, a vertical ground motion will
not bend the beam even if there is a concentrated force (mass) at not bend the beam even if there is a concentrated force (mass) at
mid span. mid span.

In addition, the dynamic results will not reflect the location of In addition, the dynamic results will not reflect the location of
a mass within a member (i.e. the masses are lumped at the a mass within a member (i.e. the masses are lumped at the
joints). This means that the motion, of a large mass in the joints). This means that the motion, of a large mass in the
middle of a member relative to the ends of the member, is not middle of a member relative to the ends of the member, is not
considered. This may affect the frequencies and mode shapes. considered. This may affect the frequencies and mode shapes.
If this is important to the solution, split the member into two. If this is important to the solution, split the member into two.
Another effect of moving the masses to the joints is that the Another effect of moving the masses to the joints is that the
resulting shear/moment distribution is based as if the masses resulting shear/moment distribution is based as if the masses
were not within the member. Note also that if one end of a were not within the member. Note also that if one end of a
member is a support, then half of the that member mass is member is a support, then half of the that member mass is
lumped at the support and will not move during the dynamic lumped at the support and will not move during the dynamic
response. response.

Damping Modeling Damping Modeling


Damping may be specified by entering values for each mode, or Damping may be specified by entering values for each mode, or
using a formula based on the first two frequencies, or by using using a formula based on the first two frequencies, or by using
composite modal damping. Composite modal damping permits composite modal damping. Composite modal damping permits
computing the damping of a mode from the different damping computing the damping of a mode from the different damping
ratios for different materials (steel, concrete, soil). Modes that ratios for different materials (steel, concrete, soil). Modes that
deform mostly the steel would have steel damping ratio, whereas deform mostly the steel would have steel damping ratio, whereas
Section 1 1-69 Section 1 1-69
modes that mostly deform the soil, would have the soil modes that mostly deform the soil, would have the soil
damping ratio. damping ratio.

Response Spectrum Analysis Response Spectrum Analysis


This capability allows the user to analyze the structure for seismic This capability allows the user to analyze the structure for seismic
loading. For any supplied response spectrum (either acceleration loading. For any supplied response spectrum (either acceleration
vs. period or displacement vs. period), joint displacements, vs. period or displacement vs. period), joint displacements,
member forces, and support reactions may be calculated. Modal member forces, and support reactions may be calculated. Modal
See section responses may be combined using one of the square root of the See section responses may be combined using one of the square root of the
5.32.10 sum of squares (SRSS), the complete quadratic combination 5.32.10 sum of squares (SRSS), the complete quadratic combination
(CQC), the ASCE4-98 (ASCE), the Ten Percent (TEN) or the (CQC), the ASCE4-98 (ASCE), the Ten Percent (TEN) or the
absolute (ABS) methods to obtain the resultant responses. Results absolute (ABS) methods to obtain the resultant responses. Results
of the response spectrum analysis may be combined with the of the response spectrum analysis may be combined with the
results of the static analysis to perform subsequent design. To results of the static analysis to perform subsequent design. To
account for reversibility of seismic activity, load combinations can account for reversibility of seismic activity, load combinations can
be created to include either the positive or negative contribution of be created to include either the positive or negative contribution of
seismic results. seismic results.

Response Time History Analysis Response Time History Analysis


STAAD is equipped with a facility to perform a response history STAAD is equipped with a facility to perform a response history
See Sections analysis on a structure subjected to time varying forcing function See Sections analysis on a structure subjected to time varying forcing function
5.31.6 and loads at the joints and/or a ground motion at its base. This analysis 5.31.6 and loads at the joints and/or a ground motion at its base. This analysis
5.32.10.2 is performed using the modal superposition method. Hence, all the 5.32.10.2 is performed using the modal superposition method. Hence, all the
active masses should be modeled as loads in order to facilitate active masses should be modeled as loads in order to facilitate
determination of the mode shapes and frequencies. Please refer to determination of the mode shapes and frequencies. Please refer to
the section above on "mass modeling" for additional information the section above on "mass modeling" for additional information
on this topic. In the mode superposition analysis, it is assumed that on this topic. In the mode superposition analysis, it is assumed that
the structural response can be obtained from the "p" lowest modes. the structural response can be obtained from the "p" lowest modes.
The equilibrium equations are written as The equilibrium equations are written as

   
>P@^[`  >F@^[`  >N@^[` ^3` ...
W ... (1) >P@^[`  >F@^[`  >N@^[` ^3` ...
W ... (1)

Using the transformation Using the transformation

S S
{[} = ∑ {φ}L TL {[} = ∑ {φ}L TL
L = L =
General Description General Description
1-70 Section 1 1-70 Section 1

Equation 1 reduces to "p" separate uncoupled equations of the Equation 1 reduces to "p" separate uncoupled equations of the
form form

TL+ ξL ωL T L+ ω LTL= 5 L  W TL+ ξL ωL T L+ ω LTL= 5 L  W

where ξ is the modal damping ratio and ω the natural where ξ is the modal damping ratio and ω the natural
frequency for the i th mode. frequency for the i th mode.

These are solved by the Wilson- θ method which is an These are solved by the Wilson- θ method which is an
unconditionally stable step by step scheme. The time step for the unconditionally stable step by step scheme. The time step for the
response is chosen as 0.1 T where T is the period of the highest response is chosen as 0.1 T where T is the period of the highest
mode that is to be included in the response. The q i s are substituted mode that is to be included in the response. The q i s are substituted
in equation 2 to obtain the displacements {x} at each time step. in equation 2 to obtain the displacements {x} at each time step.

Time History Analysis for a Structure Subjected Time History Analysis for a Structure Subjected
to a Harmonic Loading to a Harmonic Loading

A Harmonic loading is one in which can be described using the A Harmonic loading is one in which can be described using the
following equation following equation

) W = ) VLQ ωW + φ ) W = ) VLQ ωW + φ

In the above equation, In the above equation,

F(t) = Value of the forcing function at any instant of time "t" F(t) = Value of the forcing function at any instant of time "t"
F 0 = Peak value of the forcing function F 0 = Peak value of the forcing function
ω = Frequency of the forcing function ω = Frequency of the forcing function
φ = Phase Angle φ = Phase Angle

A plot of the above equation is shown in the figure below. A plot of the above equation is shown in the figure below.
Section 1 1-71 Section 1 1-71

Note that the results are the maximums over the entire time period, Note that the results are the maximums over the entire time period,
including start-up transients, thus they do not match steady-state including start-up transients, thus they do not match steady-state
response. response.

Definition of Input in STAAD for the Above Definition of Input in STAAD for the Above
Forcing Function Forcing Function

As can be seen from its definition, a forcing function is a As can be seen from its definition, a forcing function is a
continuous function. However, in STAAD, a set of discrete time- continuous function. However, in STAAD, a set of discrete time-
force pairs is generated from the forcing function and an analysis force pairs is generated from the forcing function and an analysis
is performed using these discrete time-forcing pairs. What that is performed using these discrete time-forcing pairs. What that
means is that based on the number of cycles that the user specifies means is that based on the number of cycles that the user specifies
for the loading, STAAD will generate a table consisting of the for the loading, STAAD will generate a table consisting of the
magnitude of the force at various points of time. The time values magnitude of the force at various points of time. The time values
are chosen from this time ′0′ to n*tc in steps of "STEP" where n is are chosen from this time ′0′ to n*tc in steps of "STEP" where n is
the number of cycles and tc is the duration of one cycle. STEP is a the number of cycles and tc is the duration of one cycle. STEP is a
value that the user may provide or may choose the default value value that the user may provide or may choose the default value
that is built into the program. STAAD will adjust STEP so that a that is built into the program. STAAD will adjust STEP so that a
¼ cycle will be evenly divided into one or more steps. Users may ¼ cycle will be evenly divided into one or more steps. Users may
refer to section 5.31.4 of this manual for a list of input parameters refer to section 5.31.4 of this manual for a list of input parameters
that need to be specified for a Time History Analysis on a that need to be specified for a Time History Analysis on a
structure subjected to a Harmonic loading. structure subjected to a Harmonic loading.

The relationship between variables that appear in the STAAD The relationship between variables that appear in the STAAD
input and the corresponding terms in the equation shown above is input and the corresponding terms in the equation shown above is
explained below. explained below.

F0 = AMPLITUDE F0 = AMPLITUDE
ω = FREQUENCY ω = FREQUENCY
φ = PHASE φ = PHASE

1.19 Member End Forces 1.19 Member End Forces

Member end forces and moments in the member result from loads Member end forces and moments in the member result from loads
applied to the structure. These forces are in the local member applied to the structure. These forces are in the local member
See See
coordinate system. Figure 1.18 shows the member end actions with coordinate system. Figure 1.18 shows the member end actions with
section 5.41 section 5.41
their directions. their directions.
General Description General Description
1-72 Section 1 1-72 Section 1
Section 1 1-73 Section 1 1-73

Figure 1.18 Figure 1.18


General Description General Description
1-74 Section 1 1-74 Section 1

Stress Zones due to bending about Y axis (MY) Stress Zones due to bending about Y axis (MY)
Notes: Local X axis goes into the page; Global Y is vertically upwards; Shaded area Notes: Local X axis goes into the page; Global Y is vertically upwards; Shaded area
indicates zone under compression; Non-shaded area indicates zone under tension indicates zone under compression; Non-shaded area indicates zone under tension
Section 1 1-75 Section 1 1-75

Stress Zones due to bending about Z axis (MZ) Stress Zones due to bending about Z axis (MZ)
Notes: Local X axis goes into the page; Global Y is vertically upwards; Shaded area Notes: Local X axis goes into the page; Global Y is vertically upwards; Shaded area
indicates zone under compression; Non-shaded area indicates zone under tension indicates zone under compression; Non-shaded area indicates zone under tension
General Description General Description
1-76 Section 1 1-76 Section 1

1.19.1 Secondary Analysis 1.19.1 Secondary Analysis

See sections Solution of the stiffness equations yield displacements and forces See sections Solution of the stiffness equations yield displacements and forces
5.40, 5.41, at the joints or end points of the member. STAAD is equipped with 5.40, 5.41, at the joints or end points of the member. STAAD is equipped with
5.42 and the following secondary analysis capabilities to obtain results at 5.42 and the following secondary analysis capabilities to obtain results at
5.43 intermediate points within a member. 5.43 intermediate points within a member.

1) Member forces at intermediate sections. 1) Member forces at intermediate sections.


2) Member displacements at intermediate sections. 2) Member displacements at intermediate sections.
3) Member stresses at specified sections. 3) Member stresses at specified sections.
4) Force envelopes. 4) Force envelopes.

The following sections describe the secondary analysis capabilities The following sections describe the secondary analysis capabilities
in detail. in detail.

1.19.2 Member Forces at Intermediate Sections 1.19.2 Member Forces at Intermediate Sections
With the SECTION command, the user may choose any With the SECTION command, the user may choose any
See sections intermediate section of a member where forces and moments need See sections intermediate section of a member where forces and moments need
5.40 and to be calculated. These forces and moments may also be used in 5.40 and to be calculated. These forces and moments may also be used in
5.41 design of the members. The maximum number of sections 5.41 design of the members. The maximum number of sections
specified may not exceed five, including one at the start and one at specified may not exceed five, including one at the start and one at
the end of a member. If no intermediate sections are requested, the the end of a member. If no intermediate sections are requested, the
program will consider the start and end member forces for design. program will consider the start and end member forces for design.
However, of the sections provided, they are the only ones to be However, of the sections provided, they are the only ones to be
considered for design. considered for design.

1.19.3 Member Displacements at Intermediate 1.19.3 Member Displacements at Intermediate


Sections Sections
See sections See sections
Like forces, displacements of intermediate sections of members Like forces, displacements of intermediate sections of members
5.42 and 5.42 and
can be printed or plotted. This command may not be used for truss can be printed or plotted. This command may not be used for truss
5.45.2 5.45.2
or cable members. or cable members.
Section 1 1-77 Section 1 1-77

1.19.4 Member Stresses at Specified Sections 1.19.4 Member Stresses at Specified Sections
Member stresses can be printed at specified intermediate sections Member stresses can be printed at specified intermediate sections
See as well as at the start and end joints. These stresses include: See as well as at the start and end joints. These stresses include:
sections sections
5.40 and a) Axial stress, which is calculated by dividing the axial force by 5.40 and a) Axial stress, which is calculated by dividing the axial force by
5.41 the cross sectional area, 5.41 the cross sectional area,
b) Bending-y stress, which is calculated by dividing the moment b) Bending-y stress, which is calculated by dividing the moment
in local-y direction by the section modulus in the same in local-y direction by the section modulus in the same
direction, direction,
c) Bending-z stress, which is the same as above except in local-z c) Bending-z stress, which is the same as above except in local-z
direction, direction,
d) Shear stresses (in y and z directions), and d) Shear stresses (in y and z directions), and
e) Combined stress, which is the sum of axial, bending-y and e) Combined stress, which is the sum of axial, bending-y and
bending-z stresses. bending-z stresses.

All the stresses are calculated as the absolute value. All the stresses are calculated as the absolute value.

1.19.5 Force Envelopes 1.19.5 Force Envelopes


Force envelopes of the member forces FX (axial force), FY (Shear- Force envelopes of the member forces FX (axial force), FY (Shear-
y), and MZ (moment around local z-axis, i.e. strong axis) can be y), and MZ (moment around local z-axis, i.e. strong axis) can be
See section printed for any number of intermediate sections. The force values See section printed for any number of intermediate sections. The force values
5.43 include maximum and minimum numbers representing maximum 5.43 include maximum and minimum numbers representing maximum
positive and maximum negative values. The following is the sign positive and maximum negative values. The following is the sign
convention for the maximum and minimum values: convention for the maximum and minimum values:

FX A positive value is compression, and negative tension. FX A positive value is compression, and negative tension.
FY A positive value is shear in the positive y-direction, and FY A positive value is shear in the positive y-direction, and
negative in the negative y-direction. negative in the negative y-direction.
FZ Same as above, except in local z-direction. FZ Same as above, except in local z-direction.
MZ A positive moment will mean a moment causing tension at the MZ A positive moment will mean a moment causing tension at the
top of the member. Conversely, a negative moment will cause top of the member. Conversely, a negative moment will cause
tension at the bottom of the member. The top of a member is tension at the bottom of the member. The top of a member is
defined as the side towards positive local y-axis. defined as the side towards positive local y-axis.
MY Same as above, except about local z axis. MY Same as above, except about local z axis.
General Description General Description
1-78 Section 1 1-78 Section 1

1.20 Multiple Analyses 1.20 Multiple Analyses

Structural analysis/design may require multiple analyses in the Structural analysis/design may require multiple analyses in the
same run. STAAD allows the user to change input such as member same run. STAAD allows the user to change input such as member
properties, support conditions etc. in an input file to facilitate properties, support conditions etc. in an input file to facilitate
multiple analyses in the same run. Results from different analyses multiple analyses in the same run. Results from different analyses
may be combined for design purposes. may be combined for design purposes.

For structures with bracing, it may be necessary to make certain For structures with bracing, it may be necessary to make certain
members inactive for a particular load case and subsequently members inactive for a particular load case and subsequently
activate them for another. STAAD provides an INACTIVE facility activate them for another. STAAD provides an INACTIVE facility
for this type of analysis. The INACTIVE option is discussed in for this type of analysis. The INACTIVE option is discussed in
detail in the following paragraph. detail in the following paragraph.

Inactive Members Inactive Members


With the INACTIVE command, members can be made inactive. With the INACTIVE command, members can be made inactive.
These inactive members will not be considered in the stiffness These inactive members will not be considered in the stiffness
See section analysis or in any printout. The members made inactive by the See section analysis or in any printout. The members made inactive by the
5.18 INACTIVE command are made active again with the CHANGE 5.18 INACTIVE command are made active again with the CHANGE
command. This can be useful in an analysis where tension-only command. This can be useful in an analysis where tension-only
bracing is desired, so a set of members should be inactive for bracing is desired, so a set of members should be inactive for
certain load cases. This can be accomplished by: certain load cases. This can be accomplished by:

a) making the desired members inactive; a) making the desired members inactive;
b) providing the relevant load cases for which the members are b) providing the relevant load cases for which the members are
inactive; inactive;
c) performing the analysis; c) performing the analysis;
d) using the CHANGE command to make all the inactive d) using the CHANGE command to make all the inactive
members active; members active;
e) and making the other set of members inactive and providing e) and making the other set of members inactive and providing
the proper load cases for which the members are meant to be the proper load cases for which the members are meant to be
inactive, performing the analysis and repeating the procedure inactive, performing the analysis and repeating the procedure
as necessary as necessary
Section 1 1-79 Section 1 1-79

1.21 Steel/Concrete/Timber Design 1.21 Steel/Concrete/Timber Design

Extensive design capabilities are available in STAAD for steel, Extensive design capabilities are available in STAAD for steel,
See sections See sections
concrete and timber sections. Detailed information on steel, concrete and timber sections. Detailed information on steel,
2, 3 and 4 2, 3 and 4
concrete and timber design is presented in Sections 2, 3 and 4 concrete and timber design is presented in Sections 2, 3 and 4
respectively. respectively.

1.22 Footing Design 1.22 Footing Design

A footing design facility capable of designing individual footings A footing design facility capable of designing individual footings
for user specified support(s) is available. All active load cases are for user specified support(s) is available. All active load cases are
checked and design is performed for the support reaction(s) which checked and design is performed for the support reaction(s) which
See requires the maximum footing size. Parameters are available to See requires the maximum footing size. Parameters are available to
section 5.52 control the design. Output includes footing dimensions and section 5.52 control the design. Output includes footing dimensions and
reinforcement details. Dowel bars and development lengths are reinforcement details. Dowel bars and development lengths are
also calculated and included in the design output. Detailed also calculated and included in the design output. Detailed
description and command specification(s) for footing design is description and command specification(s) for footing design is
available in section 5.52 of this manual. available in section 5.52 of this manual.

1.23 Printing Facilities 1.23 Printing Facilities

All input data and output may be printed using PRINT commands All input data and output may be printed using PRINT commands
available in STAAD. The input is normally echoed back in the available in STAAD. The input is normally echoed back in the
output. This is important from a documentation point of view. output. This is important from a documentation point of view.
However, if required, the echo can be switched off. However, if required, the echo can be switched off.

Extensive listing facilities are provided in almost all PRINT Extensive listing facilities are provided in almost all PRINT
commands to allow the user to select joints or members (elements) commands to allow the user to select joints or members (elements)
for which values are required. for which values are required.
General Description General Description
1-80 Section 1 1-80 Section 1

1.24 Plotting Facilities 1.24 Plotting Facilities

Please refer to the STAAD.Pro Graphical Environment Manual for Please refer to the STAAD.Pro Graphical Environment Manual for
a complete description of the extensive screen and hardcopy a complete description of the extensive screen and hardcopy
graphical facilities available and how to use them. graphical facilities available and how to use them.

1.25 Miscellaneous Facilities 1.25 Miscellaneous Facilities

STAAD offers the following miscellaneous facilities for problem STAAD offers the following miscellaneous facilities for problem
solution. solution.

Perform Rotation Perform Rotation


See This command can be used to rotate the structure shape through See This command can be used to rotate the structure shape through
section 5.17 any desired angle about any global axis. The rotated configuration section 5.17 any desired angle about any global axis. The rotated configuration
can be used for further analysis and design. This command may be can be used for further analysis and design. This command may be
entered after the Joint Coordinates or between two Joint entered after the Joint Coordinates or between two Joint
Coordinate commands or after all Member/Element Incidences are Coordinate commands or after all Member/Element Incidences are
specified. specified.

Substitute Substitute
Joint and member numbers may be redefined in STAAD through Joint and member numbers may be redefined in STAAD through
See the use of the SUBSTITUTE command. After a new set of numbers See the use of the SUBSTITUTE command. After a new set of numbers
section 5.15 are assigned, input and output values will be in accordance with section 5.15 are assigned, input and output values will be in accordance with
the new numbering scheme. This facility allows the user to specify the new numbering scheme. This facility allows the user to specify
numbering schemes that will result in simple input specification as numbering schemes that will result in simple input specification as
well as easy interpretation of data. well as easy interpretation of data.

Calculation of Center of Gravity Calculation of Center of Gravity


STAAD is capable of calculating the center of gravity of the STAAD is capable of calculating the center of gravity of the
See section See section
structure. The PRINT CG command may be utilized for this structure. The PRINT CG command may be utilized for this
5.41 5.41
purpose. purpose.
Section 1 1-81 Section 1 1-81

1.26 Post Processing Facilities 1.26 Post Processing Facilities

All output from the STAAD run may be utilized for further All output from the STAAD run may be utilized for further
processing by the STAAD.Pro GUI. Please refer to the processing by the STAAD.Pro GUI. Please refer to the
STAAD.Pro Graphical Environment Manual for a complete STAAD.Pro Graphical Environment Manual for a complete
description of the extensive screen and hardcopy graphical description of the extensive screen and hardcopy graphical
facilities available and how to use them. facilities available and how to use them.
2-1 2-1

American Steel Design American Steel Design

Section 2 Section 2

2.1 Design Operations 2.1 Design Operations

STAAD contains a broad set of facilities for designing structural STAAD contains a broad set of facilities for designing structural
members as individual components of an analyzed structure. The members as individual components of an analyzed structure. The
member design facilities provide the user with the ability to carry member design facilities provide the user with the ability to carry
out a number of different design operations. These facilities may out a number of different design operations. These facilities may
be used selectively in accordance with the requirements of the be used selectively in accordance with the requirements of the
design problem. The operations to perform a design are: design problem. The operations to perform a design are:

Specify the members and the load cases to be considered in the Specify the members and the load cases to be considered in the
design. design.

Specify whether to perform code checking or member Specify whether to perform code checking or member
selection. selection.

Specify design parameter values, if different from the default Specify design parameter values, if different from the default
values. values.

These operations may be repeated by the user any number of times These operations may be repeated by the user any number of times
depending upon the design requirements. depending upon the design requirements.

Steel Design may be performed based on the following codes: Steel Design may be performed based on the following codes:
AISC-ASD, AISC-LRFD and AASHTO. A brief description of AISC-ASD, AISC-LRFD and AASHTO. A brief description of
each is presented in the following pages. each is presented in the following pages.

Currently STAAD supports steel design of wide flange, S, M, HP Currently STAAD supports steel design of wide flange, S, M, HP
shapes, angle, double angle, channel, double channel, beams with shapes, angle, double angle, channel, double channel, beams with
American Steel Design American Steel Design

2-2 Section 2 2-2 Section 2

cover plate, composite beams and code checking of prismatic cover plate, composite beams and code checking of prismatic
properties. properties.

2.2 Member Properties 2.2 Member Properties

For specification of member properties of standard American steel For specification of member properties of standard American steel
sections, the steel section library available in STAAD may be sections, the steel section library available in STAAD may be
used. The syntax for specifying the names of built-in steel shapes used. The syntax for specifying the names of built-in steel shapes
is described in the next section. is described in the next section.

2.2.1 Built - in Steel Section Library 2.2.1 Built - in Steel Section Library
The following sections describe specification of steel sections The following sections describe specification of steel sections
from the AISC (9th Edition, 1989) Steel Tables. from the AISC (9th Edition, 1989) Steel Tables.

AISC Steel Table AISC Steel Table


Almost all AISC steel shapes are available for input. Following are Almost all AISC steel shapes are available for input. Following are
the descriptions of all the types of sections available: the descriptions of all the types of sections available:

Wide Flanges (W shapes) Wide Flanges (W shapes)


All wide flange sections as listed in AISC/LRFD-89 are available All wide flange sections as listed in AISC/LRFD-89 are available
the way they are written, e.g. W10X49, W21X50, etc. the way they are written, e.g. W10X49, W21X50, etc.

 72  7 $ 67 :;  72  7 $ 67 :;
  7$ 67 :;   7$ 67 :;

C, MC, S, M, HP Shapes C, MC, S, M, HP Shapes


The above shapes are available as listed in AISC (9th Edition) The above shapes are available as listed in AISC (9th Edition)
without decimal points. For example, C8X11.5 will be input as without decimal points. For example, C8X11.5 will be input as
C8X11 and S15X42.9 will be input as S15X42, omitting the C8X11 and S15X42.9 will be input as S15X42, omitting the
decimal weights. (Exception: MC6X151 for MC6X15.1 and decimal weights. (Exception: MC6X151 for MC6X15.1 and
MC6X153 for MC6X15.3.) MC6X153 for MC6X15.3.)
Section 2 2-3 Section 2 2-3

 72  %<  7 $ 67 &;  72  %<  7 $ 67 &;


  7$ 67 0&;   7$ 67 0&;

Double Channels Double Channels


Back to back double channels, with or without spacing between Back to back double channels, with or without spacing between
them, are available. The letter D in front of the section name will them, are available. The letter D in front of the section name will
specify a double channel. specify a double channel.

   7$ ' 0&;    7$ ' 0&;


 72  7 $ ' &;  72  7 $ ' &;

Angles Angles
Angle specifications in STAAD are different from those in the Angle specifications in STAAD are different from those in the
AISC manual. The following example illustrates angle AISC manual. The following example illustrates angle
specifications. specifications.

/    /  [  [  /    /  [  [ 

$QJOH V \PERO 7KLFNQHVV LQ WK $QJOH V \PERO 7KLFNQHVV LQ WK


LQFK LQFK

 WLPHV OHQJWK  WLPHV OHQJWK RI  WLPHV OHQJWK  WLPHV OHQJWK RI


RI RQH OHJ LQ LQFK RWKHU OHJ LQ LQFK RI RQH OHJ LQ LQFK RWKHU OHJ LQ LQFK

Similarly, L505010 = L 5 x 5 x 5/8 and L904016 = L 9 x 4 x 1 Similarly, L505010 = L 5 x 5 x 5/8 and L904016 = L 9 x 4 x 1

At present, there are two ways to define the local y and z-axes for At present, there are two ways to define the local y and z-axes for
an angle section. To make the transition from the AISC Manual to an angle section. To make the transition from the AISC Manual to
the program data easy, the standard section for an angle is the program data easy, the standard section for an angle is
specified: specified:

   7$ 67 /    7$ 67 /

This specification has the local z-axis (i.e., the minor axis) This specification has the local z-axis (i.e., the minor axis)
corresponding to the Z-Z axis specified in the steel tables. Many corresponding to the Z-Z axis specified in the steel tables. Many
American Steel Design American Steel Design

2-4 Section 2 2-4 Section 2


engineers are familiar with a convention used by some other engineers are familiar with a convention used by some other
programs in which the local y-axis is the minor axis. STAAD programs in which the local y-axis is the minor axis. STAAD
provides for this convention by accepting the command: provides for this convention by accepting the command:

   7$ 5 $ / 5$ GHQRWHV UHYHUVH DQJOH    7$ 5 $ / 5$ GHQRWHV UHYHUVH DQJOH

Double Angles Double Angles


Short leg back to back or long leg back to back double angles can Short leg back to back or long leg back to back double angles can
be specified by inputting the word SD or LD, respectively, in front be specified by inputting the word SD or LD, respectively, in front
of the angle size. In case of an equal angle either LD or SD will of the angle size. In case of an equal angle either LD or SD will
serve the purpose. serve the purpose.

 72  7 $ /' / 63  /RQJ OHJ EDFN WR EDFN  72  7 $ /' / 63  /RQJ OHJ EDFN WR EDFN
/[[ ZLWK  /[[ ZLWK 
VSDFH VSDFH

  7$ 6' / 6KRUW OHJ EDFN WR EDFN   7$ 6' / 6KRUW OHJ EDFN WR EDFN
/[[ /[[

Tees Tees
Tees are not input by their actual names, as they are listed in the Tees are not input by their actual names, as they are listed in the
AISC manual, but instead by designating the beam shapes (W and AISC manual, but instead by designating the beam shapes (W and
S) from which they are cut. For example, S) from which they are cut. For example,

    7$ 7 :; WHH FXW IURP :; ZKLFK LV :7;     7$ 7 :; WHH FXW IURP :; ZKLFK LV :7;

Pipes Pipes
Two types of specifications can be used for pipe sections. In Two types of specifications can be used for pipe sections. In
general pipes may be input by their outer and inner diameters. For general pipes may be input by their outer and inner diameters. For
example, example,

 72  7$ 67 3,3( 2'  ,'  ZLOO PHDQ D SLSH  72  7$ 67 3,3( 2'  ,'  ZLOO PHDQ D SLSH
ZLWK 2' RI  ZLWK 2' RI 
DQG ,' RI  LQ DQG ,' RI  LQ
FXUUHQW LQSXW XQLWV FXUUHQW LQSXW XQLWV
Section 2 2-5 Section 2 2-5
Pipe sections listed in the AISC manual can be specified as Pipe sections listed in the AISC manual can be specified as
follows. follows.

 72  7$ 67 3,3;  72  7$ 67 3,3;

3,3 ;  GHQRWHV H[WUD VWURQJ SLSH RI  3,3 ;  GHQRWHV H[WUD VWURQJ SLSH RI 
LQGLD LQGLD

3LSH V\PERO  ; 'LD LQ LQFKHV 3LSH V\PERO  ; 'LD LQ LQFKHV


VSHFLI \ RQO\ SRUWLRQ EHIRUH VSHFLI \ RQO\ SRUWLRQ EHIRUH
GHFLPDO SRLQW GHFLPDO SRLQW
6WUHQJWK VSHF 6WUHQJWK VSHF
6 6WDQGDUG ; ([WUDVWURQJ ' 'RXEOH H[WUDVWURQJ 6 6WDQGDUG ; ([WUDVWURQJ ' 'RXEOH H[WUDVWURQJ

Tubes Tubes

Tubes from the AISC tables can be specified as follows. Tubes from the AISC tables can be specified as follows.

 72  7$ 67 78%  72  7$ 67 78%

78%    78%   

7XEH 6 \PERO 7KLFNQHVV LQ WK LQ 7XEH 6 \PERO 7KLFNQHVV LQ WK LQ

+HLJKW [  LQ :LGWK [  LQ +HLJKW [  LQ :LGWK [  LQ

Tubes, like pipes, can be input by their dimensions (Height, Width Tubes, like pipes, can be input by their dimensions (Height, Width
and Thickness) as follows. and Thickness) as follows.

 7$ 67 78%( '7  :7  7+   7$ 67 78%( '7  :7  7+ 
LV D WXEH WKDW KDV D KHLJKW RI  D ZLGWK RI  DQG D ZDOO LV D WXEH WKDW KDV D KHLJKW RI  D ZLGWK RI  DQG D ZDOO
WKLFNQHVV RI  WKLFNQHVV RI 

Member Selection cannot be performed on tubes specified in the Member Selection cannot be performed on tubes specified in the
latter way. Only code checking can be performed on these latter way. Only code checking can be performed on these
sections. sections.

Welded Plate Girders Welded Plate Girders


Welded plate girders from the AISC manual may be specified as Welded plate girders from the AISC manual may be specified as
follows. follows.
American Steel Design American Steel Design

2-6 Section 2 2-6 Section 2

%    %   

%XLOWXS VHFWLRQ V\PERO 7KLFNQHVV RI IODQJH LQ %XLOWXS VHFWLRQ V\PERO 7KLFNQHVV RI IODQJH LQ
LQFKHV ;  2QO \ XVH LQFKHV ;  2QO \ XVH
SRUWLRQ EHIRUH GHFLPDO SRUWLRQ EHIRUH GHFLPDO
SRLQW SRLQW

1RPLQDO 'HSWK LQ LQFKHV 1RPLQDO IODQJH :LGWK 1RPLQDO 'HSWK LQ LQFKHV 1RPLQDO IODQJH :LGWK
LQFKHV LQFKHV

Example : Example :
1 TO 10 TA ST B612017 1 TO 10 TA ST B612017
15 16 TA ST B682210 15 16 TA ST B682210

2.3 Allowables per AISC Code 2.3 Allowables per AISC Code

For steel design, STAAD compares the actual stresses with the For steel design, STAAD compares the actual stresses with the
allowable stresses as defined by the American Institute of Steel allowable stresses as defined by the American Institute of Steel
Construction (AISC) Code. The ninth edition of the AISC Code, as Construction (AISC) Code. The ninth edition of the AISC Code, as
published in 1989, is used as the basis of this design (except for published in 1989, is used as the basis of this design (except for
tension stress). Because of the size and complexity of the AISC tension stress). Because of the size and complexity of the AISC
codes, it would not be practical to describe every aspect of the codes, it would not be practical to describe every aspect of the
steel design in this manual. Instead, a brief description of some of steel design in this manual. Instead, a brief description of some of
the major allowable stresses are described herein. the major allowable stresses are described herein.

2.3.1 Tension Stress 2.3.1 Tension Stress


Allowable tensile stress on the net section is calculated as 0.60 Fy. Allowable tensile stress on the net section is calculated as 0.60 Fy.

2.3.2 Shear Stress 2.3.2 Shear Stress


Allowable shear stress on the gross section, Allowable shear stress on the gross section,

F v = 0.4F y F v = 0.4F y

For shear on the web, the gross section is taken as the product of For shear on the web, the gross section is taken as the product of
the total depth and the web thickness. For shear on the flanges, the the total depth and the web thickness. For shear on the flanges, the
gross section is taken as 2/3 times the total flange areas. gross section is taken as 2/3 times the total flange areas.
Section 2 2-7 Section 2 2-7

2.3.3 Stress Due To Compression 2.3.3 Stress Due To Compression


Allowable compressive stress on the gross section of axially Allowable compressive stress on the gross section of axially
loaded compression members is calculated based on the formula E- loaded compression members is calculated based on the formula E-
1 in the AISC Code, when the largest effective slenderness ratio 1 in the AISC Code, when the largest effective slenderness ratio
(Kl/r) is less than C c . If Kl/r exceeds C c , allowable compressive (Kl/r) is less than C c . If Kl/r exceeds C c , allowable compressive
stress is decreased as per formula 1E2-2 of the Code. stress is decreased as per formula 1E2-2 of the Code.

 
&F =  π (  )\ &F =  π (  )\

2.3.4 Bending Stress 2.3.4 Bending Stress


Allowable bending stress for tension and compression for a Allowable bending stress for tension and compression for a
symmetrical member loaded in the plane of its minor axis, as given symmetrical member loaded in the plane of its minor axis, as given
in Section 1.5.1.4 is: in Section 1.5.1.4 is:

F b = 0.66F y F b = 0.66F y

If meeting the requirements of this section of: If meeting the requirements of this section of:

a) b f /2t f is less than or equal to 65/ )\ a) b f /2t f is less than or equal to 65/ )\
b) b f /t f is less than or equal to 190/ )\ b) b f /t f is less than or equal to 190/ )\
c) d/t is less than or equal to 640(1-3.74(fa /F y ))/ )\ when (f a /F y ) c) d/t is less than or equal to 640(1-3.74(fa /F y ))/ )\ when (f a /F y )
< 0.16, or than 257/ )\ if (f a /F y ) >0.16 < 0.16, or than 257/ )\ if (f a /F y ) >0.16
d) The laterally unsupported length shall not exceed 76.0b f /F y d) The laterally unsupported length shall not exceed 76.0b f /F y
(except for pipes or tubes), nor 20,000/(dF y /A f ) (except for pipes or tubes), nor 20,000/(dF y /A f )
e) The diameter-thickness ratio of pipes shall not exceed 3300/F y e) The diameter-thickness ratio of pipes shall not exceed 3300/F y

If for these symmetrical members, b f /2t f exceeds 65/ )\ , but is less If for these symmetrical members, b f /2t f exceeds 65/ )\ , but is less
than 95/ )\ , F b =F y (0.79-0.002(b f /2t f ) )\ ) than 95/ )\ , F b =F y (0.79-0.002(b f /2t f ) )\ )

For other symmetrical members which do not meet the above, F b is For other symmetrical members which do not meet the above, F b is
calculated as the larger value computed as per AISC formulas F1-6 calculated as the larger value computed as per AISC formulas F1-6
or F1-7 and F1-8 as applicable, but not more than 0.60F y . An or F1-7 and F1-8 as applicable, but not more than 0.60F y . An
unstiffened member subject to axial compression or compression unstiffened member subject to axial compression or compression
due to bending is considered fully effective when the width- due to bending is considered fully effective when the width-
thickness ratio is not greater than the following: thickness ratio is not greater than the following:
American Steel Design American Steel Design

2-8 Section 2 2-8 Section 2


76.0/ )\ , for single angles or double angles with separators. 76.0/ )\ , for single angles or double angles with separators.
95.0/ )\ , for double angles in contact. 95.0/ )\ , for double angles in contact.
127./ )\ , for stems of tees. 127./ )\ , for stems of tees.

When the actual width-thickness ratio exceeds these values, the When the actual width-thickness ratio exceeds these values, the
allowable stress is governed by B5 of the AISC code. allowable stress is governed by B5 of the AISC code.

Tension and compression for the doubly symmetric (I & H) Tension and compression for the doubly symmetric (I & H)
sections with b f /2t f less than 65/ )\ and bent about their minor sections with b f /2t f less than 65/ )\ and bent about their minor
axis, F b = 0.75F y If b f /2t f exceeds 65/ )\ , but is less than 95/ )\ , axis, F b = 0.75F y If b f /2t f exceeds 65/ )\ , but is less than 95/ )\ ,
F b = F y (1.075-0.005(b f /2t f ) )\ ) F b = F y (1.075-0.005(b f /2t f ) )\ )

For tubes, meeting the subparagraphs b and c of this Section, bent For tubes, meeting the subparagraphs b and c of this Section, bent
about the minor axis, F b = 0.66F y ; failing the subparagraphs b and about the minor axis, F b = 0.66F y ; failing the subparagraphs b and
c but a width-thickness ratio less than 238/ )\ , F b =0.6F y . c but a width-thickness ratio less than 238/ )\ , F b =0.6F y .

2.3.5 Combined Compression and Bending 2.3.5 Combined Compression and Bending
Members subjected to both axial compression and bending stresses Members subjected to both axial compression and bending stresses
are proportioned to satisfy AISC formula H1-1 and H1-2 when are proportioned to satisfy AISC formula H1-1 and H1-2 when
f a /F a is greater than 0.15, otherwise formula H1-3 is used. It f a /F a is greater than 0.15, otherwise formula H1-3 is used. It
should be noted that during code checking or member selection, if should be noted that during code checking or member selection, if
f a /F a exceeds unity, the program does not compute the second and f a /F a exceeds unity, the program does not compute the second and
third part of the formula H1-1, because this would result in a third part of the formula H1-1, because this would result in a
misleadingly liberal ratio. The value of the coefficient C m is taken misleadingly liberal ratio. The value of the coefficient C m is taken
as 0.85 for sidesway and 0.6 - 0.4 (M1/M2), but not less than 0.4 as 0.85 for sidesway and 0.6 - 0.4 (M1/M2), but not less than 0.4
for no sidesway. for no sidesway.
Section 2 2-9 Section 2 2-9

2.3.6 Singly Symmetric Sections 2.3.6 Singly Symmetric Sections


For double angles and Tees which have only one axis of symmetry, For double angles and Tees which have only one axis of symmetry,
the KL/r ratio about the local Y-Y axis is determined using the the KL/r ratio about the local Y-Y axis is determined using the
clauses specified on page 3-53 of the AISC Manual. clauses specified on page 3-53 of the AISC Manual.

2.3.7 Torsion per Publication T114 2.3.7 Torsion per Publication T114
The AISC 89 code of specifications for steel design currently does The AISC 89 code of specifications for steel design currently does
not have any provisions specifically meant for design of sections not have any provisions specifically meant for design of sections
for Torsion. However, AISC has published a separate document for Torsion. However, AISC has published a separate document
called “Torsional Analysis of Steel Members” which provides called “Torsional Analysis of Steel Members” which provides
guidelines on transforming torsional moments into normal stresses guidelines on transforming torsional moments into normal stresses
and shear stresses which can then be incorporated into the and shear stresses which can then be incorporated into the
interaction equations explained in Chapter H of the AISC 89 code. interaction equations explained in Chapter H of the AISC 89 code.
The guidelines of the publication have now been incorporated into The guidelines of the publication have now been incorporated into
the AISC-89 steel design modules of STAAD. the AISC-89 steel design modules of STAAD.

To consider stresses due to torsion in the code checking or member To consider stresses due to torsion in the code checking or member
selection procedure, specify the parameter TORSION with a value selection procedure, specify the parameter TORSION with a value
of 1.0. See Table 2.1 for more details. of 1.0. See Table 2.1 for more details.

Methodology Methodology

If the user were to request design for torsion, the torsional If the user were to request design for torsion, the torsional
properties required for calculating the warping normal stresses, properties required for calculating the warping normal stresses,
warping shear stresses and pure shear stresses are first determined. warping shear stresses and pure shear stresses are first determined.
These depend of the ”boundary” conditions that prevail at the ends These depend of the ”boundary” conditions that prevail at the ends
of the member. These boundary conditions are defined as “Free”, of the member. These boundary conditions are defined as “Free”,
“Pinned” or “Fixed”. They are explained below: “Pinned” or “Fixed”. They are explained below:

Free : “Free” represents the boundary condition such as that which Free : “Free” represents the boundary condition such as that which
exists at the free end of a cantilever beam. It means that there is no exists at the free end of a cantilever beam. It means that there is no
other member connected to the beam at that point. other member connected to the beam at that point.

Pinned : “Pinned” represents the condition that corresponds to Pinned : “Pinned” represents the condition that corresponds to
either a pinned support defined at the joint through the Support either a pinned support defined at the joint through the Support
American Steel Design American Steel Design

2-10 Section 2 2-10 Section 2

command or a release of any of the moments at the joint through a command or a release of any of the moments at the joint through a
Member Release specification. Member Release specification.

Fixed : “Fixed” represents the condition where a fixed support Fixed : “Fixed” represents the condition where a fixed support
exists at the joint. In the absence of a support at that joint, it exists at the joint. In the absence of a support at that joint, it
represents a condition where a rigid frame connection exists represents a condition where a rigid frame connection exists
between the given member and at least one other member between the given member and at least one other member
connected to that joint. Also, no member releases should be connected to that joint. Also, no member releases should be
present at that joint on the given member. present at that joint on the given member.

After the boundary conditions are determined, the normal and After the boundary conditions are determined, the normal and
shear stresses are determined. The guidelines specified in the shear stresses are determined. The guidelines specified in the
publication T114 for concentrated torsional moments acting at the publication T114 for concentrated torsional moments acting at the
ends of the member are used to determine these stresses. ends of the member are used to determine these stresses.

The warping normal stresses are added to the axial stresses caused The warping normal stresses are added to the axial stresses caused
by axial load. These are then substituted into the interaction by axial load. These are then substituted into the interaction
equations in Chapter H of the AISC 89 code for determining the equations in Chapter H of the AISC 89 code for determining the
ratio. The plane shear and warping shear stresses are added to the ratio. The plane shear and warping shear stresses are added to the
shear stresses causes by actual shear forces and compared against shear stresses causes by actual shear forces and compared against
the allowable shear stresses on the cross section. the allowable shear stresses on the cross section.

Restrictions Restrictions

This facility is currently available for Wide Flange shapes (W,M & This facility is currently available for Wide Flange shapes (W,M &
S), Channels, Tee shapes, Pipes and Tubes. It is not available for S), Channels, Tee shapes, Pipes and Tubes. It is not available for
Single Angles, Double Angles, members with the PRISMATIC Single Angles, Double Angles, members with the PRISMATIC
property specification, Composite sections (Wide Flanges with property specification, Composite sections (Wide Flanges with
concrete slabs or plates on top), or Double Channels. Also, the concrete slabs or plates on top), or Double Channels. Also, the
stresses are calculated based on the rules for concentrated stresses are calculated based on the rules for concentrated
torsional moments acting at the ends of the member. torsional moments acting at the ends of the member.
Section 2 2-11 Section 2 2-11

2.3.8 Design of Web Tapered Sections 2.3.8 Design of Web Tapered Sections
Appendix F of AISC-89 provides specifications for design of Web- Appendix F of AISC-89 provides specifications for design of Web-
Tapered members. These specifications have been incorporated Tapered members. These specifications have been incorporated
into STAAD to perform code checking on web tapered wide flange into STAAD to perform code checking on web tapered wide flange
shapes. Please note that member selection cannot be performed on shapes. Please note that member selection cannot be performed on
web-tapered members. web-tapered members.

2.4 Design Parameters 2.4 Design Parameters

The program contains a large number of parameter names which The program contains a large number of parameter names which
are needed to perform designing and code checking. These are needed to perform designing and code checking. These
parameter names, with their default values, are listed in Table 2.1. parameter names, with their default values, are listed in Table 2.1.
These parameters communicate design decisions from the engineer These parameters communicate design decisions from the engineer
to the program. to the program.

The default parameter values have been selected such that they are The default parameter values have been selected such that they are
frequently used numbers for conventional design. Depending on frequently used numbers for conventional design. Depending on
See Table the particular design requirements of an analysis, some or all of See Table the particular design requirements of an analysis, some or all of
2.1 and these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly model 2.1 and these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly model
Section the physical structure. For example, by default the KZ (k value in Section the physical structure. For example, by default the KZ (k value in
5.47.1 local z-axis) value of a member is set to 1.0, while in the real 5.47.1 local z-axis) value of a member is set to 1.0, while in the real
structure it may be 1.5. In that case, the KZ value in the program structure it may be 1.5. In that case, the KZ value in the program
can be changed to 1.5, as shown in the input instructions (Section can be changed to 1.5, as shown in the input instructions (Section
6). Similarly, the TRACK value of a member is set to 0.0, which 6). Similarly, the TRACK value of a member is set to 0.0, which
means no allowable stresses of the member will be printed. If the means no allowable stresses of the member will be printed. If the
allowable stresses are to be printed, the TRACK value must be set allowable stresses are to be printed, the TRACK value must be set
to 1.0. to 1.0.

Note that parameter names PROFILE, DMAX and DMIN are only Note that parameter names PROFILE, DMAX and DMIN are only
used for member selection. used for member selection.
American Steel Design American Steel Design

2-12 Section 2 2-12 Section 2

2.5 Code Checking 2.5 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to check whether the provided The purpose of code checking is to check whether the provided
section properties of the members are adequate. The adequacy is section properties of the members are adequate. The adequacy is
See Section checked as per AISC-89. Code checking is done using the forces See Section checked as per AISC-89. Code checking is done using the forces
5.47.2 and and moments at specified sections of the members. If no sections 5.47.2 and and moments at specified sections of the members. If no sections
Example 1 are specified, the program uses the start and end forces for code Example 1 are specified, the program uses the start and end forces for code
checking. checking.

When code checking is selected, the program calculates and prints When code checking is selected, the program calculates and prints
whether the members have passed the code or have failed; the whether the members have passed the code or have failed; the
critical condition of the AISC code (like any of the AISC critical condition of the AISC code (like any of the AISC
specifications or compression, tension, shear, etc.); the value of specifications or compression, tension, shear, etc.); the value of
the ratio of the critical condition (overstressed for a value more the ratio of the critical condition (overstressed for a value more
than 1.0 or any other specified RATIO value); the governing load than 1.0 or any other specified RATIO value); the governing load
case, and the location (distance from the start of the member) of case, and the location (distance from the start of the member) of
forces in the member where the critical condition occurs. forces in the member where the critical condition occurs.

Code checking can be done with any type of steel section listed in Code checking can be done with any type of steel section listed in
Section 2.2 of this manual. Section 2.2 of this manual.

2.6 Member Selection 2.6 Member Selection

STAAD is capable of performing design operations on specified STAAD is capable of performing design operations on specified
members. Once an analysis has been performed, the program can members. Once an analysis has been performed, the program can
select the most economical section, i.e. the lightest section, which select the most economical section, i.e. the lightest section, which
fulfills the code requirements for the specified member. The fulfills the code requirements for the specified member. The
section selected will be of the same type section as originally section selected will be of the same type section as originally
designated for the member being designed. A wide flange will be designated for the member being designed. A wide flange will be
selected to replace a wide flange, etc.. Several parameters are selected to replace a wide flange, etc.. Several parameters are
See Section available to guide this selection. If the PROFILE parameter is See Section available to guide this selection. If the PROFILE parameter is
5.47.3 provided, the search for the lightest section is restricted to that 5.47.3 provided, the search for the lightest section is restricted to that
profile. Up to three (3) profiles may be provided for any member profile. Up to three (3) profiles may be provided for any member
with a section being selected from each one. Member selection can with a section being selected from each one. Member selection can
also be constrained by the parameters DMAX and DMIN which also be constrained by the parameters DMAX and DMIN which
limit the maximum and minimum depth of the members. Note that limit the maximum and minimum depth of the members. Note that
Section 2 2-13 Section 2 2-13
if the PROFILE parameter is provided for specified members, if the PROFILE parameter is provided for specified members,
DMAX or DMIN parameters will be ignored by the program in DMAX or DMIN parameters will be ignored by the program in
selecting these members. selecting these members.

Member selection can be performed with all the types of steel Member selection can be performed with all the types of steel
sections listed in Section 2.2 of this manual. Note that for beams sections listed in Section 2.2 of this manual. Note that for beams
with cover plates, the sizes of the cover plate are kept constant with cover plates, the sizes of the cover plate are kept constant
while the beam section is iterated. while the beam section is iterated.

Selection of members, whose properties are originally input from a Selection of members, whose properties are originally input from a
user created table, will be limited to sections in the user table. user created table, will be limited to sections in the user table.

Member selection can not be performed on members whose section Member selection can not be performed on members whose section
properties are input as prismatic. properties are input as prismatic.

2.6.1 Member Selection by Optimization 2.6.1 Member Selection by Optimization


Steel table properties of an entire structure can be optimized by Steel table properties of an entire structure can be optimized by
STAAD. This optimization method involves a state-of-the-art STAAD. This optimization method involves a state-of-the-art
technique which requires automatic multiple analyses. The user technique which requires automatic multiple analyses. The user
See Section can start with no properties for the members but provide the type See Section can start with no properties for the members but provide the type
5.47.4 of profile-spec they have (e.g. BEAM, COLUMN, CHANNEL, 5.47.4 of profile-spec they have (e.g. BEAM, COLUMN, CHANNEL,
ANGLE etc. Refer to Section 2.7.5). The sizes of the members are ANGLE etc. Refer to Section 2.7.5). The sizes of the members are
optimized by the stiffness they are contributing and the amount of optimized by the stiffness they are contributing and the amount of
loads they are receiving. Based on this, a balanced size is selected loads they are receiving. Based on this, a balanced size is selected
for each member. This method requires extensive computer time for each member. This method requires extensive computer time
and hence should be used with caution. and hence should be used with caution.

2.6.2 Deflection Check With Steel Design 2.6.2 Deflection Check With Steel Design
This facility allows the user to consider deflection as a criteria in This facility allows the user to consider deflection as a criteria in
the CODE CHECK and MEMBER SELECTION processes. The the CODE CHECK and MEMBER SELECTION processes. The
deflection check may be controlled using three parameters which deflection check may be controlled using three parameters which
are described in Table 2.1. Note that deflection is used in addition are described in Table 2.1. Note that deflection is used in addition
to other strength and stability related criteria. The local deflection to other strength and stability related criteria. The local deflection
calculation is based on the latest analysis results. calculation is based on the latest analysis results.
American Steel Design American Steel Design

2-14 Section 2 2-14 Section 2

2.7 Truss Members 2.7 Truss Members

As mentioned earlier, a truss member is capable of carrying only As mentioned earlier, a truss member is capable of carrying only
axial forces. So in design no time is wasted calculating the axial forces. So in design no time is wasted calculating the
allowable bending or shear stresses, thus reducing design time allowable bending or shear stresses, thus reducing design time
considerably. Therefore, if there is any truss member in an considerably. Therefore, if there is any truss member in an
analysis (like bracing or strut, etc.), it is wise to declare it as a analysis (like bracing or strut, etc.), it is wise to declare it as a
truss member rather than as a regular frame member with both truss member rather than as a regular frame member with both
ends pinned. ends pinned.

2.8 Unsymmetric Sections 2.8 Unsymmetric Sections

For unsymmetric sections (like angle, double angle and tee), For unsymmetric sections (like angle, double angle and tee),
STAAD considers the smaller section modulus for checking STAAD considers the smaller section modulus for checking
against bending. For some cases, this approach may produce against bending. For some cases, this approach may produce
slightly conservative results. slightly conservative results.

Appendix C of the AISC code has been implemented for stress Appendix C of the AISC code has been implemented for stress
reduction of unstiffened compression elements. In addition, the reduction of unstiffened compression elements. In addition, the
AISC specification for SINGLE ANGLE design has been fully AISC specification for SINGLE ANGLE design has been fully
implemented including lateral torsional buckling effects. implemented including lateral torsional buckling effects.

7DEOH$,6&3DUDPHWHUV 7DEOH$,6&3DUDPHWHUV

3DUDPHWHU 'HIDXOW 'HVFULSWLRQ 3DUDPHWHU 'HIDXOW 'HVFULSWLRQ


1DPH 9DOXH 1DPH 9DOXH
.<  . YDOXH LQ ORFDO \D[LV 8VXDOO\ WKLV LV .<  . YDOXH LQ ORFDO \D[LV 8VXDOO\ WKLV LV
PLQRU D[LV PLQRU D[LV

.=  . YDOXH LQ ORFDO ]D[LV 8VXDOO\ WKLV LV .=  . YDOXH LQ ORFDO ]D[LV 8VXDOO\ WKLV LV
PDMRU D[LV PDMRU D[LV

/< 0HPEHU /HQJWK /HQJWK WR FDOFXODWH VOHQGHUQHVV UDWLR IRU /< 0HPEHU /HQJWK /HQJWK WR FDOFXODWH VOHQGHUQHVV UDWLR IRU
EXFNOLQJ DERXW ORFDO < D[LV EXFNOLQJ DERXW ORFDO < D[LV

/= 0HPEHU /HQJWK 6DPH DV DERYH H[FHSW LQ ]D[LV PDMRU  /= 0HPEHU /HQJWK 6DPH DV DERYH H[FHSW LQ ]D[LV PDMRU 
Section 2 2-15 Section 2 2-15
7DEOH$,6&3DUDPHWHUV&RQW 7DEOH$,6&3DUDPHWHUV&RQW
3DUDPHWHU 'HIDXOW 'HVFULSWLRQ 3DUDPHWHU 'HIDXOW 'HVFULSWLRQ
1DPH 9DOXH 1DPH 9DOXH
)</'  .6, <LHOG VWUHQJWK RI VWHHO LQ FXUUHQW XQLWV )</'  .6, <LHOG VWUHQJWK RI VWHHO LQ FXUUHQW XQLWV

)8  .6, 8OWLPDWH WHQVLOH VWUHQJWK RI VWHHO LQ FXUUHQW )8  .6, 8OWLPDWH WHQVLOH VWUHQJWK RI VWHHO LQ FXUUHQW
XQLWV XQLWV

16)  1HW VHFWLRQ IDFWRU IRU WHQVLRQ PHPEHUV 16)  1HW VHFWLRQ IDFWRU IRU WHQVLRQ PHPEHUV

817 0HPEHU /HQJWK 8QVXSSRUWHG OHQJWK RI WKH WRS IODQJH IRU 817 0HPEHU /HQJWK 8QVXSSRUWHG OHQJWK RI WKH WRS IODQJH IRU
FDOFXODWLQJ DOORZDEOH EHQGLQJ FRPSUHVVLYH FDOFXODWLQJ DOORZDEOH EHQGLQJ FRPSUHVVLYH
VWUHVV :LOO EH XVHG RQO\ LI IOH[XUDO VWUHVV :LOO EH XVHG RQO\ LI IOH[XUDO
FRPSUHVVLRQ LV RQ WKH WRS IODQJH FRPSUHVVLRQ LV RQ WKH WRS IODQJH

81% 0HPEHU /HQJWK 8QVXSSRUWHG OHQJWK RI WKH ERWWRP IODQJH IRU 81% 0HPEHU /HQJWK 8QVXSSRUWHG OHQJWK RI WKH ERWWRP IODQJH IRU
FDOFXODWLQJ DOORZDEOH EHQGLQJ FRPSUHVVLYH FDOFXODWLQJ DOORZDEOH EHQGLQJ FRPSUHVVLYH
VWUHVV :LOO EH XVHG RQO\ LI IOH[XUDO VWUHVV :LOO EH XVHG RQO\ LI IOH[XUDO
FRPSUHVVLRQ LV RQ WKH ERWWRP IODQJH FRPSUHVVLRQ LV RQ WKH ERWWRP IODQJH

&%  &E YDOXH DV XVHG LQ VHFWLRQ  RI $,6&  &%  &E YDOXH DV XVHG LQ VHFWLRQ  RI $,6& 
&E YDOXH WR EH FDOFXODWHG $Q\ RWKHU YDOXH &E YDOXH WR EH FDOFXODWHG $Q\ RWKHU YDOXH
ZLOO PHDQ WKH YDOXH WR EH XVHG LQ GHVLJQ ZLOO PHDQ WKH YDOXH WR EH XVHG LQ GHVLJQ

66<   6LGHVZD\ LQ ORFDO \D[LV 66<   6LGHVZD\ LQ ORFDO \D[LV
 1R VLGHVZD\  1R VLGHVZD\

66=  6DPH DV DERYH H[FHSW LQ ORFDO ]D[LV 66=  6DPH DV DERYH H[FHSW LQ ORFDO ]D[LV

&0<  IRU VLGHVZD\ &P YDOXH LQ ORFDO \ ] D[HV &0<  IRU VLGHVZD\ &P YDOXH LQ ORFDO \ ] D[HV
DQG FDOFXODWHG DQG FDOFXODWHG
&0= &0=
IRU QR VLGHVZD\ IRU QR VLGHVZD\

0$,1   FKHFN IRU VOHQGHUQHVV 0$,1   FKHFN IRU VOHQGHUQHVV
 VXSSUHVV VOHQGHUQHVV FKHFN  VXSSUHVV VOHQGHUQHVV FKHFN

67,)) 0HPEHU OHQJWK 6SDFLQJ RI VWLIIHQHUV IRU SODWH JLUGHU GHVLJQ 67,)) 0HPEHU OHQJWK 6SDFLQJ RI VWLIIHQHUV IRU SODWH JLUGHU GHVLJQ

75$&.  &RQWUROV WKH OHYHO RI GHWDLO WR ZKLFK UHVXOWV 75$&.  &RQWUROV WKH OHYHO RI GHWDLO WR ZKLFK UHVXOWV
DUH UHSRUWHG DUH UHSRUWHG

 0LQLPXP GHWDLO  0LQLPXP GHWDLO


 ,QWHUPHGLDWH GHWDLO OHYHO  ,QWHUPHGLDWH GHWDLO OHYHO
 0D[LPXP GHWDLO VHH )LJXUH  0D[LPXP GHWDLO VHH )LJXUH

'0$;  LQ 0D[LPXP DOORZDEOH GHSWK '0$;  LQ 0D[LPXP DOORZDEOH GHSWK

'0,1  LQ 0LQLPXP DOORZDEOH GHSWK '0,1  LQ 0LQLPXP DOORZDEOH GHSWK

5$7,2  3HUPLVVLEOH UDWLR RI WKH DFWXDO WR DOORZDEOH 5$7,2  3HUPLVVLEOH UDWLR RI WKH DFWXDO WR DOORZDEOH
VWUHVVHV VWUHVVHV

*Top and Bottom represent the positive and negative side of the *Top and Bottom represent the positive and negative side of the
local Y axis (local Z axis if SET Z UP is used. local Y axis (local Z axis if SET Z UP is used.
American Steel Design American Steel Design

2-16 Section 2 2-16 Section 2

7DEOH$,6&3DUDPHWHUV&RQW 7DEOH$,6&3DUDPHWHUV&RQW
3DUDPHWHU 'HIDXOW 'HVFULSWLRQ 3DUDPHWHU 'HIDXOW 'HVFULSWLRQ
1DPH 9DOXH 1DPH 9DOXH
:(/'  IRU FORVHG VHFWLRQV :HOG W\SH DV H[SODLQHG LQ VHFWLRQ  $ :(/'  IRU FORVHG VHFWLRQV :HOG W\SH DV H[SODLQHG LQ VHFWLRQ  $
 IRU RSHQ VHFWLRQV YDOXH RI  ZLOO PHDQ ZHOGLQJ LV RQ RQH VLGH  IRU RSHQ VHFWLRQV YDOXH RI  ZLOO PHDQ ZHOGLQJ LV RQ RQH VLGH
RQO\ H[FHSW IRU ZLGHIODQJH RU WHH VHFWLRQV RQO\ H[FHSW IRU ZLGHIODQJH RU WHH VHFWLRQV
ZKHUH WKH ZHE LV DOZD\V DVVXPHG WR EH ZKHUH WKH ZHE LV DOZD\V DVVXPHG WR EH
ZHOGHG RQ ERWK VLGHV $ YDOXH RI  ZLOO ZHOGHG RQ ERWK VLGHV $ YDOXH RI  ZLOO
PHDQ ZHOGLQJ RQ ERWK VLGHV )RU FORVHG PHDQ ZHOGLQJ RQ ERWK VLGHV )RU FORVHG
VHFWLRQV OLNH SLSH RU WXEH WKH ZHOGLQJ ZLOO VHFWLRQV OLNH SLSH RU WXEH WKH ZHOGLQJ ZLOO
EH RQ RQH VLGH RQO\ EH RQ RQH VLGH RQO\

%($0   GHVLJQ DW HQGV DQG WKRVH ORFDWLRQV %($0   GHVLJQ DW HQGV DQG WKRVH ORFDWLRQV
VSHFLILHG E\ WKH 6(&7,21 FRPPDQG VSHFLILHG E\ WKH 6(&7,21 FRPPDQG
WK WK
 GHVLJQ DW HQGV DQG DW HYHU\   GHVLJQ DW HQGV DQG DW HYHU\ 
SRLQW DORQJ PHPEHU OHQJWK 'HIDXOW SRLQW DORQJ PHPEHU OHQJWK 'HIDXOW

:0,1  LQFK 0LQLPXP ZHOGLQJ WKLFNQHVV :0,1  LQFK 0LQLPXP ZHOGLQJ WKLFNQHVV

:675  [ )</' $OORZDEOH ZHOGLQJ VWUHVV :675  [ )</' $OORZDEOH ZHOGLQJ VWUHVV

')) 1RQH 'HIOHFWLRQ /HQJWK  0D[P DOORZDEOH ORFDO ')) 1RQH 'HIOHFWLRQ /HQJWK  0D[P DOORZDEOH ORFDO
0DQGDWRU\ IRU GHIOHFWLRQ GHIOHFWLRQ 0DQGDWRU\ IRU GHIOHFWLRQ GHIOHFWLRQ
FKHFN FKHFN

'- 6WDUW -RLQW -RLQW 1R GHQRWLQJ VWDUWLQJ SRLQW IRU '- 6WDUW -RLQW -RLQW 1R GHQRWLQJ VWDUWLQJ SRLQW IRU
RI PHPEHU FDOFXODWLRQ RI 'HIOHFWLRQ /HQJWK 6HH RI PHPEHU FDOFXODWLRQ RI 'HIOHFWLRQ /HQJWK 6HH
1RWH  1RWH 

'- (QG -RLQW RI PHPEHU -RLQW 1R GHQRWLQJ HQG SRLQW IRU FDOFXODWLRQ '- (QG -RLQW RI PHPEHU -RLQW 1R GHQRWLQJ HQG SRLQW IRU FDOFXODWLRQ
RI 'HIOHFWLRQ /HQJWK 6HH 1RWH  RI 'HIOHFWLRQ /HQJWK 6HH 1RWH 

7256,21   1R WRUVLRQ FKHFN SHUIRUPHG 7256,21   1R WRUVLRQ FKHFN SHUIRUPHG
 3HUIRUP WRUVLRQ FKHFN EDVHG RQ  3HUIRUP WRUVLRQ FKHFN EDVHG RQ
UXOHV RI $,6& 7 UXOHV RI $,6& 7

7$3(5   'HVLJQ WDSHUHG ,VHFWLRQ EDVHG RQ 7$3(5   'HVLJQ WDSHUHG ,VHFWLRQ EDVHG RQ
UXOHV RI &KDSWHU ) DQG $SSHQGL[ % UXOHV RI &KDSWHU ) DQG $SSHQGL[ %
RQO\ 'R QRW XVH WKH UXOHV RI RQO\ 'R QRW XVH WKH UXOHV RI
$SSHQGL[ ) $SSHQGL[ )

 'HVLJQ WDSHUHG ,VHFWLRQV EDVHG RQ  'HVLJQ WDSHUHG ,VHFWLRQV EDVHG RQ
UXOHV RI $SSHQGL[ ) RI $,6& UXOHV RI $SSHQGL[ ) RI $,6&
Section 2 2-17 Section 2 2-17
NOTE: NOTE:
1) "Deflection Length" is defined as the length that is used for 1) "Deflection Length" is defined as the length that is used for
calculation of local deflections within a member. It may be calculation of local deflections within a member. It may be
noted that for most cases the "Deflection Length" will be equal noted that for most cases the "Deflection Length" will be equal
to the length of the member. However, in some situations, the to the length of the member. However, in some situations, the
"Deflection Length" may be different. For example, refer to "Deflection Length" may be different. For example, refer to
the figure below where a beam has been modeled using four the figure below where a beam has been modeled using four
joints and three members. Note that the "Deflection Length" joints and three members. Note that the "Deflection Length"
for all three members will be equal to the total length of the for all three members will be equal to the total length of the
beam in this case. The parameters DJ1 and DJ2 should be used beam in this case. The parameters DJ1 and DJ2 should be used
to model this situation. Also the straight line joining DJ1 and to model this situation. Also the straight line joining DJ1 and
DJ2 is used as the reference line from which local deflections DJ2 is used as the reference line from which local deflections
are measured. Thus, for all three members here, DJ1 should be are measured. Thus, for all three members here, DJ1 should be
"1" and DJ2 should be "4". "1" and DJ2 should be "4".

    EXAMPLE : PARAMETERS     EXAMPLE : PARAMETERS


     
' DFF 300. ALL ' DFF 300. ALL
DJ1 1 ALL DJ1 1 ALL
' 0D[LPXP ORFDO GHIOHFWLRQ IRU PHPEHUV DJ2 4 ALL ' 0D[LPXP ORFDO GHIOHFWLRQ IRU PHPEHUV DJ2 4 ALL
  DQG    DQG 

2) If DJ1 and DJ2 are not used, "Deflection Length" will default 2) If DJ1 and DJ2 are not used, "Deflection Length" will default
to the member length and local deflections will be measured to the member length and local deflections will be measured
from original member line. from original member line.
3) It is important to note that unless a DFF value is specified, 3) It is important to note that unless a DFF value is specified,
STAAD will not perform a deflection check. This is in STAAD will not perform a deflection check. This is in
accordance with the fact that there is no default value for DFF accordance with the fact that there is no default value for DFF
(see Table 2.1). (see Table 2.1).
4) A critical difference exists between the parameters UNT/UNB 4) A critical difference exists between the parameters UNT/UNB
and the parameters LY & LZ. UNT/UNB parameters represent and the parameters LY & LZ. UNT/UNB parameters represent
the laterally unsupported length of the compression flange. It the laterally unsupported length of the compression flange. It
is defined in Chapter F, page 5-47 of the specifications in the is defined in Chapter F, page 5-47 of the specifications in the
AISC 1989 ASD manual as the distance between cross sections AISC 1989 ASD manual as the distance between cross sections
braced against twist or lateral displacement of the compression braced against twist or lateral displacement of the compression
flange. UNT/UNB parameters are used to calculate the flange. UNT/UNB parameters are used to calculate the
allowable compressive stress (FCZ and FCY) for behavior as a allowable compressive stress (FCZ and FCY) for behavior as a
beam. LY and LZ on the other hand are the unbraced lengths beam. LY and LZ on the other hand are the unbraced lengths
for behavior as a column and are used to calculate the KL/r for behavior as a column and are used to calculate the KL/r
ratios and the allowable axial compressive stress FA. ratios and the allowable axial compressive stress FA.
American Steel Design American Steel Design

2-18 Section 2 2-18 Section 2

5) SSY and CMY are 2 parameters which are based upon 2 values 5) SSY and CMY are 2 parameters which are based upon 2 values
defined in page 5-55, Chapter H of the AISC 9th ed. manual. defined in page 5-55, Chapter H of the AISC 9th ed. manual.
SSY is a variable which allows the user to define whether or SSY is a variable which allows the user to define whether or
not the member is subject to sidesway in the local Y direction. not the member is subject to sidesway in the local Y direction.
CMY is a variable used for defining the expresiion called Cm CMY is a variable used for defining the expresiion called Cm
in the AISC manual. When SSY is set to 0 (which is the in the AISC manual. When SSY is set to 0 (which is the
default value), it means that the member is subject to sidesway default value), it means that the member is subject to sidesway
in the local Y direction. When SSY is set to 1.0, it means that in the local Y direction. When SSY is set to 1.0, it means that
the member is not subject to sidesway in the local Y direction. the member is not subject to sidesway in the local Y direction.
The only effect that SSY has is that it causes the program to The only effect that SSY has is that it causes the program to
calculate the appropriate value of CMY. If SSY is set to 0 and calculate the appropriate value of CMY. If SSY is set to 0 and
CMY is not provided, STAAD will calculate CMY as 0.85. If CMY is not provided, STAAD will calculate CMY as 0.85. If
SSY is set to 1 and CMY is not provided, STAAD will SSY is set to 1 and CMY is not provided, STAAD will
calculate CMY from the equation on page 5-55. However, if calculate CMY from the equation on page 5-55. However, if
the user provides CMY, the program will use that value and the user provides CMY, the program will use that value and
not calculate CMY at all, regardless of what the user defines not calculate CMY at all, regardless of what the user defines
SSY to be. SSY to be.

Terms used in calculating slenderness ratios KL/r for local Y and Z axes Terms used in calculating slenderness ratios KL/r for local Y and Z axes
Section 2 2-19 Section 2 2-19

2.9 Composite Beam Design as per AISC-ASD 2.9 Composite Beam Design as per AISC-ASD

Description Description
STAAD now supports composite flexural member design per the STAAD now supports composite flexural member design per the
AISC-ASD code. Full composite action and uniformly distributed AISC-ASD code. Full composite action and uniformly distributed
loading are assumed. Shear connectors are to be continued in the loading are assumed. Shear connectors are to be continued in the
negative moment area. Formed steel deck is assumed to be negative moment area. Formed steel deck is assumed to be
perpendicular to the member. If it is parallel to the member, the perpendicular to the member. If it is parallel to the member, the
number of shear connectors must be adjusted. number of shear connectors must be adjusted.

The following additional parameters have been introduced to The following additional parameters have been introduced to
support the composite member design. support the composite member design.
American Steel Design American Steel Design

2-20 Section 2 2-20 Section 2

3DUDPHWHU 'HIDXOW 'HVFULSWLRQ 3DUDPHWHU 'HIDXOW 'HVFULSWLRQ


1DPH YDOXH 1DPH YDOXH

&03  &RPSRVLWH DFWLRQ ZLWK FRQQHFWRUV &03  &RPSRVLWH DFWLRQ ZLWK FRQQHFWRUV
 QR FRPSRVLWH DFWLRQ  QR FRPSRVLWH DFWLRQ
 FRPSRVLWH DFWLRQ  FRPSRVLWH DFWLRQ
',$  LQ 'LDPHWHU RI VKHDU FRQQHFWRUV ',$  LQ 'LDPHWHU RI VKHDU FRQQHFWRUV
+*7  LQ +HLJKW RI VKHDU FRQQHFWRUV DIWHU ZHOGLQJ +*7  LQ +HLJKW RI VKHDU FRQQHFWRUV DIWHU ZHOGLQJ
'5  5DWLR RI PRPHQW GXH WR GHDG ORDG DSSOLHG '5  5DWLR RI PRPHQW GXH WR GHDG ORDG DSSOLHG
EHIRUH FRQFUHWH KDUGHQV WR WKH EHIRUH FRQFUHWH KDUGHQV WR WKH
WRWDO PRPHQW WRWDO PRPHQW
:,'  WLPHV WKH PHPEHU (IIHFWLYH :LGWK RI FRQFUHWH VODE :,'  WLPHV WKH PHPEHU (IIHFWLYH :LGWK RI FRQFUHWH VODE
OHQJWK OHQJWK
)3&  NVL &RPSUHVVLYH VWUHQJWK RI FRQFUHWH DW  )3&  NVL &RPSUHVVLYH VWUHQJWK RI FRQFUHWH DW 
GD\V GD\V
3/7  7KLFNQHVV RI FRYHU SODWH ZHOGHG WR ERWWRP 3/7  7KLFNQHVV RI FRYHU SODWH ZHOGHG WR ERWWRP
IODQJH RI FRPSRVLWH EHDP IODQJH RI FRPSRVLWH EHDP
3/:  :LGWK RI FRYHU SODWH ZHOGHG WR ERWWRP 3/:  :LGWK RI FRYHU SODWH ZHOGHG WR ERWWRP
IODQJH RI FRPSRVLWH EHDP IODQJH RI FRPSRVLWH EHDP
5%+  +HLJKW RI ULE RI IRUP VWHHO GHFN 5%+  +HLJKW RI ULE RI IRUP VWHHO GHFN
5%:  LQ :LGWK RI ULE RI IRUP VWHHO GHFN 5%:  LQ :LGWK RI ULE RI IRUP VWHHO GHFN
6+5  7HPSRUDU\ VKRULQJ GXULQJ FRQVWUXFWLRQ 6+5  7HPSRUDU\ VKRULQJ GXULQJ FRQVWUXFWLRQ
 ZLWKRXW VKRULQJ  ZLWKRXW VKRULQJ
 ZLWK VKRULQJ  ZLWK VKRULQJ
7+.  LQ 7KLFNQHVV RI FRQFUHWH VODE RU WKH WKLFNQHVV 7+.  LQ 7KLFNQHVV RI FRQFUHWH VODE RU WKH WKLFNQHVV
RI FRQFUHWH VODE DERYH WKH IRUP RI FRQFUHWH VODE DERYH WKH IRUP
VWHHO GHFN VWHHO GHFN

81,7 ,1&+ 81,7 ,1&+


3 $5 $0(7(5 3 $5 $0(7(5
&2'( $,6& &2'( $,6&
%( $0  $// %( $0  $//
75$&.  $// 75$&.  $//
'5  $// '5  $//
:,'  $// :,'  $//
)3&  $// )3&  $//
7+.  $// 7+.  $//
&03  $// &03  $//
&+(&. &2'( $// &+(&. &2'( $//
6(/(&7 $// 6(/(&7 $//
Section 2 2-21 Section 2 2-21

2.10 Plate Girders 2.10 Plate Girders

Plate girders may be designed according to Chapter G of the AISC Plate girders may be designed according to Chapter G of the AISC
specifications. The generalized ISECTION specification capability specifications. The generalized ISECTION specification capability
available in the User Table facility may be used to specify the available in the User Table facility may be used to specify the
plate girder sections. The AISC welded plate girder shapes(pages plate girder sections. The AISC welded plate girder shapes(pages
2-230 and 2-231 - AISC 9th Edition) are available in the Steel 2-230 and 2-231 - AISC 9th Edition) are available in the Steel
Section library of the program. Both CODE CHECKING & Section library of the program. Both CODE CHECKING &
MEMBER SELECTION may be performed when sections are MEMBER SELECTION may be performed when sections are
specified from a standard AISC plate girder section table or specified from a standard AISC plate girder section table or
through the generalized ISECTION facility. Parameter STIFF (see through the generalized ISECTION facility. Parameter STIFF (see
Table 2.1) may be used to specify stiffener spacing so that the Table 2.1) may be used to specify stiffener spacing so that the
right allowable shear stress may be calculated. The program right allowable shear stress may be calculated. The program
automatically calculates the flange stresses according to the automatically calculates the flange stresses according to the
requirements of section G2. requirements of section G2.

2.11 Tabulated Results of Steel Design 2.11 Tabulated Results of Steel Design

For code checking or member selection, the program produces the For code checking or member selection, the program produces the
results in a tabulated fashion. The items in the output table are results in a tabulated fashion. The items in the output table are
explained as follows: explained as follows:

a) MEMBER refers to the member number for which the design a) MEMBER refers to the member number for which the design
is performed. is performed.

b) TABLE refers to the AISC steel section name which has been b) TABLE refers to the AISC steel section name which has been
checked against the steel code or has been selected. checked against the steel code or has been selected.

c) RESULT prints whether the member has PASSed or FAILed. c) RESULT prints whether the member has PASSed or FAILed.
If the RESULT is FAIL, there will be an asterisk (*) mark in If the RESULT is FAIL, there will be an asterisk (*) mark in
front of the member number. front of the member number.

d) CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the AISC code d) CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the AISC code
which governed the design. which governed the design.
American Steel Design American Steel Design

2-22 Section 2 2-22 Section 2

e) RATIO prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable e) RATIO prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable
stresses for the critical condition. Normally a value of 1.0 or stresses for the critical condition. Normally a value of 1.0 or
less will mean the member has passed. less will mean the member has passed.

f) LOADING provides the load case number which governed the f) LOADING provides the load case number which governed the
design. design.

g) FX, MY and MZ provide the axial force, moment in local y- g) FX, MY and MZ provide the axial force, moment in local y-
axis and moment in local z-axis respectively. Although axis and moment in local z-axis respectively. Although
STAAD does consider all the member forces and moments to STAAD does consider all the member forces and moments to
perform design, only FX MY and MZ are printed since they perform design, only FX MY and MZ are printed since they
are the ones which are of interest, in most cases. are the ones which are of interest, in most cases.
h) LOCATION specifies the actual distance from the start of the h) LOCATION specifies the actual distance from the start of the
member to the section where design forces govern. member to the section where design forces govern.

i) If the parameter TRACK is set to 1.0, the program will block i) If the parameter TRACK is set to 1.0, the program will block
out part of the table and will print the allowable bending out part of the table and will print the allowable bending
stresses in compression (FCY & FCZ) and tension (FTY & stresses in compression (FCY & FCZ) and tension (FTY &
FTZ), allowable axial stress in compression (FA), and FTZ), allowable axial stress in compression (FA), and
allowable shear stress (FV), all in kips per square inch. In allowable shear stress (FV), all in kips per square inch. In
addition, member length, area, section moduli, governing KL/r addition, member length, area, section moduli, governing KL/r
ratio and CB are also printed. ratio and CB are also printed.

j) In the output for TRACK 2.0, the items Fey and Fez are as j) In the output for TRACK 2.0, the items Fey and Fez are as
follows: follows:

12 π 2Ε 12 π 2Ε
Fey = Fey =
23( K Y L Y rY ) 23( K Y L Y rY )
2 2

12 π 2 Ε 12 π 2 Ε
Fez = Fez =
23( K Z L Z rZ ) 23( K Z L Z rZ )
2 2
Section 2 2-23 Section 2 2-23

Figure 2.1 Figure 2.1

2.12 Weld Design 2.12 Weld Design

STAAD is able to select weld thickness for connections and STAAD is able to select weld thickness for connections and
tabulate the various stresses. The weld design is limited to the tabulate the various stresses. The weld design is limited to the
See Section members having properties from wide flange, tee, single angle, See Section members having properties from wide flange, tee, single angle,
5.47.5 single channel, pipe and tube section tables only. The parameters 5.47.5 single channel, pipe and tube section tables only. The parameters
WELD, WMIN and WSTR (as explained in Table 2.1) govern the WELD, WMIN and WSTR (as explained in Table 2.1) govern the
weld design. weld design.
American Steel Design American Steel Design

2-24 Section 2 2-24 Section 2

Since the thickness of a weld is very small in comparison to its Since the thickness of a weld is very small in comparison to its
length, the properties of the weld can be calculated as line length, the properties of the weld can be calculated as line
member. Therefore, the cross-sectional area (AZ) of the weld will member. Therefore, the cross-sectional area (AZ) of the weld will
actually be the length of the weld. Similarly, the units for the actually be the length of the weld. Similarly, the units for the
section moduli (SY and SZ) will be length-squared and for the section moduli (SY and SZ) will be length-squared and for the
polar moments of inertia (JW) will be length-cubed. The following polar moments of inertia (JW) will be length-cubed. The following
table shows the different available weld lines, their type and their table shows the different available weld lines, their type and their
coordinate axes. coordinate axes.

:(/' :(/'
7<3( $1*/( :,'()/$1*( 7(( &+$11(/ 3,3( 78%( 7<3( $1*/( :,'()/$1*( 7(( &+$11(/ 3,3( 78%(

\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \

 ] ] ] ] ]  ] ] ] ] ]

] ]

\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \

] ] ] ] ] ]
 
] ]

Actual stresses, calculated from the member forces, can be Actual stresses, calculated from the member forces, can be
specified by three names, based on their directions. specified by three names, based on their directions.

Horizontal Stress - as produced by the local z-shear force and Horizontal Stress - as produced by the local z-shear force and
torsional moment. torsional moment.

Vertical Stress - as produced by the axial y-shear force and Vertical Stress - as produced by the axial y-shear force and
torsional moment. torsional moment.

Direct Stress - as produced by the axial force and bending Direct Stress - as produced by the axial force and bending
moments in the local y and z directions. moments in the local y and z directions.

The Combined Stress is calculated by the square root of the The Combined Stress is calculated by the square root of the
summation of the squares of the above three principal stresses. summation of the squares of the above three principal stresses.

Following are the equations: Following are the equations:

Forces Forces

MX = Torsional moment MX = Torsional moment


MY = Bending in local y-axis MY = Bending in local y-axis
Section 2 2-25 Section 2 2-25
MZ = Bending in local z-axis MZ = Bending in local z-axis
FX = Axial force FX = Axial force
VY = Shear in local y-axis VY = Shear in local y-axis
VZ = Shear in local z-axis VZ = Shear in local z-axis

Properties of Weld Properties of Weld

AX =
Area of the weld as the line member AX =
Area of the weld as the line member
SY =
Section modulus around local y-axis SY =
Section modulus around local y-axis
SZ =
Section modulus around local z-axis SZ =
Section modulus around local z-axis
JW =
Polar moment of inertia JW =
Polar moment of inertia
CH =
Distance of the extreme fiber for horizontal (local z) CH =
Distance of the extreme fiber for horizontal (local z)
forces forces
CV = Distance of the extreme fiber for vertical (local y) forces CV = Distance of the extreme fiber for vertical (local y) forces

Stress Equations: Stress Equations:

9= &+ × 0; 9= &+ × 0;
Horizontal stress, )K = + Horizontal stress, )K = +
$; -: $; -:

9< &9 × 0; 9< &9 × 0;


Vertical stress, )Y = + Vertical stress, )Y = +
$; -: $; -:


); 0= 0< ); 0= 0<
Direct stress, )G = + + Direct stress, )G = + +
$; 6= 6< $; 6= 6<

* Note that the moments MY and MZ are taken as the absolute values, * Note that the moments MY and MZ are taken as the absolute values,
which may result in some conservative results for asymmetrical sections which may result in some conservative results for asymmetrical sections
like angle, tee and channel. like angle, tee and channel.

     
Combined force )FRPE = )K  )Y  )G Combined force )FRPE = )K  )Y  )G

)FRPE )FRPE
Weld thickness = Weld thickness =
)Z )Z

where F w = Allowable weld stress, default value is 0.4 FYLD where F w = Allowable weld stress, default value is 0.4 FYLD
(Table 2.1). (Table 2.1).
American Steel Design American Steel Design

2-26 Section 2 2-26 Section 2

The thickness t is rounded up to the nearest 1/16th of an inch and The thickness t is rounded up to the nearest 1/16th of an inch and
all the stresses are recalculated. The tabulated output prints the all the stresses are recalculated. The tabulated output prints the
latter stresses. If the parameter TRACK is set to 1.0, the output latter stresses. If the parameter TRACK is set to 1.0, the output
will include the weld properties. Note that the program does not will include the weld properties. Note that the program does not
calculate the minimum weld thickness as needed by some codes, calculate the minimum weld thickness as needed by some codes,
but checks only against the minimum thickness as provided by the but checks only against the minimum thickness as provided by the
user (or 1/16th inch if not provided). user (or 1/16th inch if not provided).

When the TRUSS qualifier is used with SELECT WELD When the TRUSS qualifier is used with SELECT WELD
command, the program will design the welds required for truss command, the program will design the welds required for truss
angle and double angle members that are attached to gusset plates. angle and double angle members that are attached to gusset plates.
The program reports the number of welds (two for single angles, The program reports the number of welds (two for single angles,
four for double angles), and the length required for each weld. The four for double angles), and the length required for each weld. The
thickness of the weld is taken as 1/4 inch (6 mm) for members up thickness of the weld is taken as 1/4 inch (6 mm) for members up
to 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, and 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) less than the to 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, and 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) less than the
angle thickness for members greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick. angle thickness for members greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick.
Minimum weld length is taken as four times weld thickness. Minimum weld length is taken as four times weld thickness.

3 3

Figure 2.2 - Weld design for SELECT WELD TRUSS. Figure 2.2 - Weld design for SELECT WELD TRUSS.

2.13 Steel Design per AASHTO Specifications 2.13 Steel Design per AASHTO Specifications
2.13.1 General Comments 2.13.1 General Comments
This section presents some general statements regarding the This section presents some general statements regarding the
implementations of American Association of State Highway and implementations of American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials (AASHTO) specifications for structural Transportation Officials (AASHTO) specifications for structural
steel design in STAAD. The design philosophy and procedural steel design in STAAD. The design philosophy and procedural
logistics for member selection and code checking is based upon the logistics for member selection and code checking is based upon the
principles of allowable stress design. Two major failure modes are principles of allowable stress design. Two major failure modes are
recognized: failure by overstressing and failure by stability recognized: failure by overstressing and failure by stability
Section 2 2-27 Section 2 2-27
considerations. The following sections describe the salient considerations. The following sections describe the salient
features of the allowable stresses being calculated and the stability features of the allowable stresses being calculated and the stability
criteria being used. Members are proportioned to resist the design criteria being used. Members are proportioned to resist the design
loads without exceeding the allowable stresses and the most loads without exceeding the allowable stresses and the most
economical section is selected on the basis of the least weight economical section is selected on the basis of the least weight
criteria. The code checking part of the program also checks the criteria. The code checking part of the program also checks the
slenderness requirements, the minimum metal thickness slenderness requirements, the minimum metal thickness
requirements and the width-thickness requirement. It is generally requirements and the width-thickness requirement. It is generally
assumed that the user will take care of the detailing requirements assumed that the user will take care of the detailing requirements
like provision of stiffeners and check the local effects like flange like provision of stiffeners and check the local effects like flange
buckling, web crippling etc. buckling, web crippling etc.

2.13.2 Allowable Stresses per AASHTO Code 2.13.2 Allowable Stresses per AASHTO Code
As mentioned before, the member design and code checking in As mentioned before, the member design and code checking in
STAAD is based upon the allowable stress design method. It is a STAAD is based upon the allowable stress design method. It is a
method for proportioning structural members using design loads method for proportioning structural members using design loads
and forces, allowable stresses, and design limitations for the and forces, allowable stresses, and design limitations for the
appropriate material under service conditions. It is beyond the appropriate material under service conditions. It is beyond the
scope of this manual to describe every aspect of structural steel scope of this manual to describe every aspect of structural steel
design per AASHTO specifications because of practical reasons. design per AASHTO specifications because of practical reasons.
This section will discuss the salient features of the allowable This section will discuss the salient features of the allowable
stresses specified by the AASHTO code. Table 10.32.1A of the stresses specified by the AASHTO code. Table 10.32.1A of the
AASHTO code specifies the allowable stresses. AASHTO code specifies the allowable stresses.

Axial Stress Axial Stress


Allowable tension stress, as calculated in AASHTO is based on the Allowable tension stress, as calculated in AASHTO is based on the
net section. This tends to produce a slightly conservative result. net section. This tends to produce a slightly conservative result.
Allowable tension stress on the net section is given by, Allowable tension stress on the net section is given by,

)W =  )\ )W =  )\

Allowable compressive stress on the gross section of axially Allowable compressive stress on the gross section of axially
loaded compression members is calculated based on the following loaded compression members is calculated based on the following
formula: formula:

 
)\  .O  U )\ )\  .O  U )\
)D = ZKHQ .O  U < &F )D = ZKHQ .O  U < &F
 
)6 π ( )6 π (
American Steel Design American Steel Design

2-28 Section 2 2-28 Section 2

 
π ( π (
)D = ZKHQ .O  U > &F )D = ZKHQ .O  U > &F
 
) 6 .O  U ) 6 .O  U

     
ZLWK & F =  π (  )\ DQG ) 6 =  ZLWK & F =  π (  )\ DQG ) 6 = 

It can be mentioned here that AASHTO does not have a provision It can be mentioned here that AASHTO does not have a provision
for increase in allowable stresses for a secondary member and for increase in allowable stresses for a secondary member and
when 1/r exceeds a certain value. when 1/r exceeds a certain value.

Bending Stress Bending Stress


Allowable stress in bending compression for rolled shape girders Allowable stress in bending compression for rolled shape girders
and built-up sections whose compression flanges are supported and built-up sections whose compression flanges are supported
laterally through its full length by embedment in concrete is given laterally through its full length by embedment in concrete is given
by by

)E =  )\ )E =  )\

For similar members with unsupported or partially supported For similar members with unsupported or partially supported
flange lengths, the allowable bending compressive stress is given flange lengths, the allowable bending compressive stress is given
by by
 
  U )\   U )\
)E =  )\  − ZKHQ NO  U < &F )E =  )\  − ZKHQ NO  U < &F
( (
π π

   
ZLWK U =E   ZLWK U =E  

The AASHTO code does not have a specification for maximum The AASHTO code does not have a specification for maximum
allowable tensile stress in members subject to bending. The allowable tensile stress in members subject to bending. The
corresponding AISC specification is 0.66Fy for compact hot rolled corresponding AISC specification is 0.66Fy for compact hot rolled
or built-up sections symmetrical about, and loaded in, the plane of or built-up sections symmetrical about, and loaded in, the plane of
their minor axes and meeting other requirements of Section their minor axes and meeting other requirements of Section
1.5.1.4.1 of the AISC specifications. A common practice among 1.5.1.4.1 of the AISC specifications. A common practice among
bridge designers is to use 0.55F as the allowable bending tensile bridge designers is to use 0.55F as the allowable bending tensile
stress for members meeting other requirements of Section 1.5.1.4.1 stress for members meeting other requirements of Section 1.5.1.4.1
of the AISC specifications. This practice is slightly conservative of the AISC specifications. This practice is slightly conservative
and is being used here in the STAAD implementation of the and is being used here in the STAAD implementation of the
AASHTO steel code. AASHTO steel code.
Section 2 2-29 Section 2 2-29

Shear Stress Shear Stress


Allowable shear stress on the gross section is given by Allowable shear stress on the gross section is given by

)Y =)\ )Y =)\

For shear on the web, the gross section is defined as the product of For shear on the web, the gross section is defined as the product of
the total depth and the web thickness. The AASHTO code does not the total depth and the web thickness. The AASHTO code does not
specify any allowable stress for shear on flanges. The program specify any allowable stress for shear on flanges. The program
assumes the same allowable for shear stress (0.33Fy) for both assumes the same allowable for shear stress (0.33Fy) for both
shear on the web and shear on the flanges. For shear on the shear on the web and shear on the flanges. For shear on the
flanges, the gross section is taken as 2/3 times the total flange flanges, the gross section is taken as 2/3 times the total flange
area. area.

Bending-Axial Stress Interaction Bending-Axial Stress Interaction


Members subjected to both axial and bending stresses are Members subjected to both axial and bending stresses are
proportioned according to section 10.36 of the AASHTO steel proportioned according to section 10.36 of the AASHTO steel
code. All members subject to bending and axial compression are code. All members subject to bending and axial compression are
required to satisfy the following formula: required to satisfy the following formula:

ID & P[ I E[ & P\ I E\ ID & P[ I E[ & P\ I E\


+ + <   + + <  
)D  − I D  )H[ )E[  − I D  )H\ )E\ )D  − I D  )H[ )E[  − I D  )H\ )E\

at intermediate points, and at intermediate points, and

ID I E[ I E\ ID I E[ I E\
+ + <   + + <  
  )\ )E[ )E\   )\ )E[ )E\

at support points. at support points.

The AASHTO steel code does not provide any specification for The AASHTO steel code does not provide any specification for
combined axial tension and bending interaction. The AISC combined axial tension and bending interaction. The AISC
procedure of checking bending-axial tension interaction is used in procedure of checking bending-axial tension interaction is used in
the AASHTO implementation of STAAD. All members subject to the AASHTO implementation of STAAD. All members subject to
combined axial tension and bending are required to satisfy combined axial tension and bending are required to satisfy
provisions of AISC 1.6.2. provisions of AISC 1.6.2.
American Steel Design American Steel Design

2-30 Section 2 2-30 Section 2

2.13.3 Stability Requirements per AASHTO Code 2.13.3 Stability Requirements per AASHTO Code
According to AASHTO code, for compression members, the According to AASHTO code, for compression members, the
slenderness ratio, KL/r, shall be limited to 120 for main members slenderness ratio, KL/r, shall be limited to 120 for main members
and to 140 for secondary members. The AASHTO code defines and to 140 for secondary members. The AASHTO code defines
secondary members as those whose primary purpose is to brace the secondary members as those whose primary purpose is to brace the
structure against lateral or longitudinal force, or to reduce the structure against lateral or longitudinal force, or to reduce the
unbraced length of other members, main or secondary. For tension unbraced length of other members, main or secondary. For tension
members, KL/r is 200 for main members and 240 for secondary members, KL/r is 200 for main members and 240 for secondary
members. members.

2.13.4 Minimum Metal Thickness Requirement 2.13.4 Minimum Metal Thickness Requirement
The AASHTO code has a minimum thickness requirement for all The AASHTO code has a minimum thickness requirement for all
structural steel. According to this requirement, all structural steel structural steel. According to this requirement, all structural steel
except for webs of certain rolled shapes, closed ribs in orthotropic except for webs of certain rolled shapes, closed ribs in orthotropic
decks, fillers and railings, shall not be less than 0.3125 inches. decks, fillers and railings, shall not be less than 0.3125 inches.
The web thickness of rolled beams or channels shall be not less The web thickness of rolled beams or channels shall be not less
than 0.23 inches. These requirements have been incorporated in than 0.23 inches. These requirements have been incorporated in
the AASHTO implementation of STAAD. the AASHTO implementation of STAAD.

2.14 Steel Design per AISC/LRFD Specification 2.14 Steel Design per AISC/LRFD Specification
2.14.1 General Comments 2.14.1 General Comments
The design philosophy embodied in the Load and Resistance The design philosophy embodied in the Load and Resistance
Factor Design (LRFD) Specification is built around the concept of Factor Design (LRFD) Specification is built around the concept of
limit state design, the current state-of-the-art in structural limit state design, the current state-of-the-art in structural
engineering. Structures are designed and proportioned taking into engineering. Structures are designed and proportioned taking into
consideration the limit states at which they would become unfit for consideration the limit states at which they would become unfit for
their intended use. Two major categories of limit-state are their intended use. Two major categories of limit-state are
recognized--ultimate and serviceability. The primary recognized--ultimate and serviceability. The primary
considerations in ultimate limit state design are strength and considerations in ultimate limit state design are strength and
stability, while that in serviceability is deflection. Appropriate stability, while that in serviceability is deflection. Appropriate
load and resistance factors are used so that a uniform reliability is load and resistance factors are used so that a uniform reliability is
achieved for all steel structures under various loading conditions achieved for all steel structures under various loading conditions
Section 2 2-31 Section 2 2-31
and at the same time the chances of limits being surpassed are and at the same time the chances of limits being surpassed are
acceptably remote. acceptably remote.

In the STAAD implementation of LRFD, members are In the STAAD implementation of LRFD, members are
proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the limit proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the limit
states of strength, stability and serviceability. Accordingly, the states of strength, stability and serviceability. Accordingly, the
most economic section is selected on the basis of the least weight most economic section is selected on the basis of the least weight
criteria as augmented by the designer in specification of allowable criteria as augmented by the designer in specification of allowable
member depths, desired section type, or other such parameters. member depths, desired section type, or other such parameters.
The code checking portion of the program checks that code The code checking portion of the program checks that code
requirements for each selected section are met and identifies the requirements for each selected section are met and identifies the
governing criteria. governing criteria.

The following sections describe the salient features of the LRFD The following sections describe the salient features of the LRFD
specifications as implemented in STAAD steel design. A detailed specifications as implemented in STAAD steel design. A detailed
description of the design process along with its underlying description of the design process along with its underlying
concepts and assumptions is available in the LRFD manual. concepts and assumptions is available in the LRFD manual.
However, since the design philosophy is drastically different from However, since the design philosophy is drastically different from
the conventional Allowable Stress Design (ASD), a brief the conventional Allowable Stress Design (ASD), a brief
description of the fundamental concepts is presented here to description of the fundamental concepts is presented here to
initiate the user into the design process. initiate the user into the design process.

2.14.2 LRFD Fundamentals 2.14.2 LRFD Fundamentals


The primary objective of the LRFD Specification is to provide a The primary objective of the LRFD Specification is to provide a
uniform reliability for all steel structures under various loading uniform reliability for all steel structures under various loading
conditions. This uniformity can not be obtained with the allowable conditions. This uniformity can not be obtained with the allowable
stress design (ASD) format. stress design (ASD) format.

The ASD method can be represented by the inequality The ASD method can be represented by the inequality

∑ Q i < R n / F.S. ∑ Q i < R n / F.S.

The left side is the required strength, which is the summation of The left side is the required strength, which is the summation of
the load effects, Qi (forces and moments). The right side, the the load effects, Qi (forces and moments). The right side, the
design strength, is the nominal strength or resistance, R n , divided design strength, is the nominal strength or resistance, R n , divided
by a factor of safety. When divided by the appropriate section by a factor of safety. When divided by the appropriate section
property (area or section modulus), the two sides of the inequality property (area or section modulus), the two sides of the inequality
become the actual stress and allowable stress respectively. ASD, become the actual stress and allowable stress respectively. ASD,
American Steel Design American Steel Design

2-32 Section 2 2-32 Section 2

then, is characterized by the use of unfactored "working" loads in then, is characterized by the use of unfactored "working" loads in
conjunction with a single factor of safety applied to the resistance. conjunction with a single factor of safety applied to the resistance.
Because of the greater variability and, hence, unpredictability of Because of the greater variability and, hence, unpredictability of
the live load and other loads in comparison with the dead load, a the live load and other loads in comparison with the dead load, a
uniform reliability is not possible. uniform reliability is not possible.

LRFD, as its name implies, uses separate factors for each load and LRFD, as its name implies, uses separate factors for each load and
resistance. Because the different factors reflect the degree of resistance. Because the different factors reflect the degree of
uncertainty of different loads and combinations of loads and of the uncertainty of different loads and combinations of loads and of the
accuracy of predicted strength, a more uniform reliability is accuracy of predicted strength, a more uniform reliability is
possible. The LRFD method may be summarized by the inequality possible. The LRFD method may be summarized by the inequality

\ L 4L < 5 Q∅ \ L 4L < 5 Q∅

On the left side of the inequality, the required strength is the On the left side of the inequality, the required strength is the
summation of the various load effects, Q i , multiplied by their summation of the various load effects, Q i , multiplied by their
respective load factors, y i . The design strength, on the right side, respective load factors, y i . The design strength, on the right side,
is the nominal strength or resistance, R n , multiplied by a resistance is the nominal strength or resistance, R n , multiplied by a resistance
factor, Ø. factor, Ø.

In the STAAD implementation of LRFD, it is assumed that the In the STAAD implementation of LRFD, it is assumed that the
user will use appropriate load factors and create the load user will use appropriate load factors and create the load
combinations necessary for analysis. The design portion of the combinations necessary for analysis. The design portion of the
program will take into consideration the load effects (forces and program will take into consideration the load effects (forces and
moments) obtained from analysis. In calculation of resistances of moments) obtained from analysis. In calculation of resistances of
various elements (beams, columns etc.), resistance (nominal various elements (beams, columns etc.), resistance (nominal
strength) and applicable resistance factor will be automatically strength) and applicable resistance factor will be automatically
considered. considered.
Section 2 2-33 Section 2 2-33

2.14.3 Analysis Requirements 2.14.3 Analysis Requirements


The types of construction recognized by AISC specification have The types of construction recognized by AISC specification have
not changed, except that both "simple framing" (formerly Type 2) not changed, except that both "simple framing" (formerly Type 2)
and "semi-rigid framing" (formerly Type 3) have been combined and "semi-rigid framing" (formerly Type 3) have been combined
into the same category, Type PR (partially restrained). "Rigid into the same category, Type PR (partially restrained). "Rigid
Framing" (formerly Type 1) is now Type FR (fully restrained). Framing" (formerly Type 1) is now Type FR (fully restrained).
Type FR construction is permitted unconditionally. Type PR Type FR construction is permitted unconditionally. Type PR
construction may necessitate some inelastic, but self-limiting, construction may necessitate some inelastic, but self-limiting,
deformation of a structural steel element. Thus, when specifying deformation of a structural steel element. Thus, when specifying
Type PR construction, the designer should take into consideration Type PR construction, the designer should take into consideration
the effects of partial restraint on the stability of the structure, the effects of partial restraint on the stability of the structure,
lateral deflections and second order bending moments. As stated in lateral deflections and second order bending moments. As stated in
Sect. C1 of the LRFD specification, an analysis of second order Sect. C1 of the LRFD specification, an analysis of second order
effects is required. Thus, when using LRFD code for steel design, effects is required. Thus, when using LRFD code for steel design,
the user must use the P-Delta analysis feature of STAAD. the user must use the P-Delta analysis feature of STAAD.

2.14.4 Section Classification 2.14.4 Section Classification


The LRFD specification allows inelastic deformation of section The LRFD specification allows inelastic deformation of section
elements. Thus local buckling becomes an important criterion. elements. Thus local buckling becomes an important criterion.
Steel sections are classified as compact, noncompact or slender Steel sections are classified as compact, noncompact or slender
element sections depending upon their local buckling element sections depending upon their local buckling
characteristics. This classification is a function of the geometric characteristics. This classification is a function of the geometric
properties of the section. The design procedures are different properties of the section. The design procedures are different
depending on the section class. STAAD is capable of determining depending on the section class. STAAD is capable of determining
the section classification for the standard shapes and user specified the section classification for the standard shapes and user specified
shapes and design accordingly. shapes and design accordingly.

2.14.5 Axial Tension 2.14.5 Axial Tension


The criteria governing the capacity of tension members is based on The criteria governing the capacity of tension members is based on
two limit states. The limit state of yielding in the gross section is two limit states. The limit state of yielding in the gross section is
intended to prevent excessive elongation of the member. The intended to prevent excessive elongation of the member. The
second limit state involves fracture at the section with the second limit state involves fracture at the section with the
minimum effective net area. The net section area may be specified minimum effective net area. The net section area may be specified
by the user through the use of the parameter NSF (see Table 2.2). by the user through the use of the parameter NSF (see Table 2.2).
STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a given member based STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a given member based
American Steel Design American Steel Design

2-34 Section 2 2-34 Section 2

on these two limit states and proceeds with member selection or on these two limit states and proceeds with member selection or
code check accordingly. code check accordingly.

2.14.6 Axial Compression 2.14.6 Axial Compression


The column strength equations have been revised in LRFD to take The column strength equations have been revised in LRFD to take
into account inelastic deformation and other recent research in into account inelastic deformation and other recent research in
column behavior. Two equations governing column strength are column behavior. Two equations governing column strength are
available, one for inelastic buckling and the other for elastic or available, one for inelastic buckling and the other for elastic or
Euler buckling. Both equations include the effects of residual Euler buckling. Both equations include the effects of residual
stresses and initial out-of-straightness. Compression strength for a stresses and initial out-of-straightness. Compression strength for a
particular member is calculated by STAAD according to the particular member is calculated by STAAD according to the
procedure outlined in Chapter E of the LRFD specifications. For procedure outlined in Chapter E of the LRFD specifications. For
slender elements, the procedure described in Appendix B5.3 is slender elements, the procedure described in Appendix B5.3 is
used. used.

Singly symmetric and unsymmetric compression members are Singly symmetric and unsymmetric compression members are
designed on the basis of the limit states of flexural-torsional and designed on the basis of the limit states of flexural-torsional and
torsional buckling. The procedure of Appendix E3 is implemented torsional buckling. The procedure of Appendix E3 is implemented
for the determination of design strength for these limit states. for the determination of design strength for these limit states.

Effective length for calculation of compression resistance may be Effective length for calculation of compression resistance may be
provided through the use of the parameters KY, KZ and/or LY, provided through the use of the parameters KY, KZ and/or LY,
LZ. If not provided, the entire member length will be taken into LZ. If not provided, the entire member length will be taken into
consideration. consideration.

In addition to the compression resistance criterion, compression In addition to the compression resistance criterion, compression
members are required to satisfy slenderness limitations which are a members are required to satisfy slenderness limitations which are a
function of the nature of use of the member (main load resisting function of the nature of use of the member (main load resisting
component, bracing member, etc.). In both the member selection component, bracing member, etc.). In both the member selection
and code checking process, STAAD immediately does a and code checking process, STAAD immediately does a
slenderness check on appropriate members before continuing with slenderness check on appropriate members before continuing with
other procedures for determining the adequacy of a given member. other procedures for determining the adequacy of a given member.
Section 2 2-35 Section 2 2-35

2.14.7 Flexural Design Strength 2.14.7 Flexural Design Strength


In LRFD, the flexural design strength of a member is determined In LRFD, the flexural design strength of a member is determined
by the limit state of lateral torsional buckling. Inelastic bending is by the limit state of lateral torsional buckling. Inelastic bending is
allowed and the basic measure of flexural capacity is the plastic allowed and the basic measure of flexural capacity is the plastic
moment capacity of the section. The flexural resistance is a moment capacity of the section. The flexural resistance is a
function of plastic moment capacity, actual laterally unbraced function of plastic moment capacity, actual laterally unbraced
length, limiting laterally unbraced length, buckling moment and length, limiting laterally unbraced length, buckling moment and
the bending coefficient. The limiting laterally unbraced length L r the bending coefficient. The limiting laterally unbraced length L r
and buckling moment M r are functions of the section geometry and and buckling moment M r are functions of the section geometry and
are calculated as per the procedure of Chapter F. The purpose of are calculated as per the procedure of Chapter F. The purpose of
bending coefficient C b is to account for the influence of the bending coefficient C b is to account for the influence of the
moment gradient on lateral-torsional buckling. This coefficient can moment gradient on lateral-torsional buckling. This coefficient can
be specified by the user through the use of parameter CB (see be specified by the user through the use of parameter CB (see
Table 2.2) or may be calculated by the program (if CB is specified Table 2.2) or may be calculated by the program (if CB is specified
as 0.0). In the absence of the parameter CB, a default value of 1.0 as 0.0). In the absence of the parameter CB, a default value of 1.0
will be used. The procedure for calculation of design strength for will be used. The procedure for calculation of design strength for
flexure also accounts for the presence of residual stresses of flexure also accounts for the presence of residual stresses of
rolling. To specify laterally unsupported length, the parameters rolling. To specify laterally unsupported length, the parameters
UNT/UNB (see Table 2.2) can be used. UNT/UNB (see Table 2.2) can be used.

2.14.8 Combined Axial Force And Bending 2.14.8 Combined Axial Force And Bending
The interaction of flexure and axial forces in singly and doubly The interaction of flexure and axial forces in singly and doubly
symmetric shapes is governed by formulas H1-1a and H1-1b. symmetric shapes is governed by formulas H1-1a and H1-1b.
These interaction formulas cover the general case of biaxial These interaction formulas cover the general case of biaxial
bending combined with axial force. They are also valid for bending combined with axial force. They are also valid for
uniaxial bending and axial force. uniaxial bending and axial force.
American Steel Design American Steel Design

2-36 Section 2 2-36 Section 2

2.14.9 Design for Shear 2.14.9 Design for Shear


The procedure of Sect. F2 of the LRFD Specification is used in The procedure of Sect. F2 of the LRFD Specification is used in
STAAD to design for shear forces in members. Shear strength as STAAD to design for shear forces in members. Shear strength as
calculated in LRFD is governed by the following limit states: Eq. calculated in LRFD is governed by the following limit states: Eq.
F2-1a by yielding of the web; Eq. F2-2a by inelastic buckling of F2-1a by yielding of the web; Eq. F2-2a by inelastic buckling of
the web; Eq. F2-3a by elastic buckling of the web. Shear in wide the web; Eq. F2-3a by elastic buckling of the web. Shear in wide
flanges and channel sections is resisted by the area of the web, flanges and channel sections is resisted by the area of the web,
which is taken as the overall depth times the web thickness. which is taken as the overall depth times the web thickness.

2.14.10 Design Parameters 2.14.10 Design Parameters


Design per LRFD specifications is requested by using the CODE Design per LRFD specifications is requested by using the CODE
parameter (see Section 5.47). Other applicable parameters are parameter (see Section 5.47). Other applicable parameters are
summarized in Table 2.2. These parameters communicate design summarized in Table 2.2. These parameters communicate design
decisions from the engineer to the program and thus allow the decisions from the engineer to the program and thus allow the
engineer to control the design process to suit an application's engineer to control the design process to suit an application's
specific needs. specific needs.

See Table The default parameter values have been selected such that they are See Table The default parameter values have been selected such that they are
2.2 and frequently used numbers for conventional design. Depending on 2.2 and frequently used numbers for conventional design. Depending on
Section the particular design requirements, some or all of these parameter Section the particular design requirements, some or all of these parameter
5.47.1 values may be changed to exactly model the physical structure. 5.47.1 values may be changed to exactly model the physical structure.

The parameters DMAX and DMIN are applicable for member The parameters DMAX and DMIN are applicable for member
selection only. selection only.

2.14.11 Code Checking and Member Selection 2.14.11 Code Checking and Member Selection
Both code checking and member selection options are available in Both code checking and member selection options are available in
STAAD LRFD implementation. For general information on these STAAD LRFD implementation. For general information on these
options, refer to Sections 2.5 and 2.6. For information on options, refer to Sections 2.5 and 2.6. For information on
specification of these commands, refer to Section 5.47.1. specification of these commands, refer to Section 5.47.1.
Section 2 2-37 Section 2 2-37

2.14.12 Tabulated Results of Steel Design 2.14.12 Tabulated Results of Steel Design
Results of code checking and member selection are presented in a Results of code checking and member selection are presented in a
tabular format. A detailed discussion of the format is provided in tabular format. A detailed discussion of the format is provided in
Section 2.11. Following exceptions may be noted: CRITICAL Section 2.11. Following exceptions may be noted: CRITICAL
COND refers to the section of the LRFD specifications which COND refers to the section of the LRFD specifications which
governed the design. governed the design.

If the TRACK is set to 1.0, member design strengths will be If the TRACK is set to 1.0, member design strengths will be
printed out. printed out.

7DEOH/5)'3DUDPHWHUV 7DEOH/5)'3DUDPHWHUV
3DUDPHWHU 'HIDXOW 'HVFULSWLRQ 3DUDPHWHU 'HIDXOW 'HVFULSWLRQ
1DPH 9DOXH 1DPH 9DOXH

.;  . YDOXH IRU IOH[XUDOWRUVLRQDO .;  . YDOXH IRU IOH[XUDOWRUVLRQDO


EXFNOLQJ EXFNOLQJ

.<  . YDOXH LQ ORFDO <D[LV .<  . YDOXH LQ ORFDO <D[LV
8VXDOO\ WKLV LV WKH PLQRU D[LV 8VXDOO\ WKLV LV WKH PLQRU D[LV

.=  . YDOXH LQ ORFDO =D[LV .=  . YDOXH LQ ORFDO =D[LV


8VXDOO\ WKLV LV WKH PDMRU D[LV 8VXDOO\ WKLV LV WKH PDMRU D[LV

/; 0HPEHU /HQJWK /HQJWK IRU IOH[XUDOWRUVLRQDO /; 0HPEHU /HQJWK /HQJWK IRU IOH[XUDOWRUVLRQDO
EXFNOLQJ EXFNOLQJ

/< 0HPEHU /HQJWK /HQJWK WR FDOFXODWH /< 0HPEHU /HQJWK /HQJWK WR FDOFXODWH
VOHQGHUQHVV UDWLR IRU EXFNOLQJ VOHQGHUQHVV UDWLR IRU EXFNOLQJ
DERXW ORFDO <D[LV DERXW ORFDO <D[LV

/= 0HPEHU /HQJWK /HQJWK WR FDOFXODWH /= 0HPEHU /HQJWK /HQJWK WR FDOFXODWH


VOHQGHUQHVV UDWLR IRU EXFNOLQJ VOHQGHUQHVV UDWLR IRU EXFNOLQJ
DERXW ORFDO =D[LV DERXW ORFDO =D[LV

)</'  NVL <LHOG VWUHQJWK RI VWHHO )</'  NVL <LHOG VWUHQJWK RI VWHHO

)8  NVL 8OWLPDWH WHQVLOH VWUHQJWK RI )8  NVL 8OWLPDWH WHQVLOH VWUHQJWK RI
VWHHO VWHHO

16)  1HW VHFWLRQ IDFWRU IRU WHQVLRQ 16)  1HW VHFWLRQ IDFWRU IRU WHQVLRQ
PHPEHUV PHPEHUV
American Steel Design American Steel Design

2-38 Section 2 2-38 Section 2

7DEOH/5)'3DUDPHWHUV&RQW 7DEOH/5)'3DUDPHWHUV&RQW
3DUDPHWHU 'HIDXOW 'HVFULSWLRQ 3DUDPHWHU 'HIDXOW 'HVFULSWLRQ
1DPH 9DOXH 1DPH 9DOXH

817 0HPEHU /HQJWK 8QVXSSRUWHG OHQJWK / E RI WKH 817 0HPEHU /HQJWK 8QVXSSRUWHG OHQJWK / E RI WKH
WRS IODQJH IRU FDOFXODWLQJ WRS IODQJH IRU FDOFXODWLQJ
IOH[XUDO VWUHQJWK :LOO EH XVHG IOH[XUDO VWUHQJWK :LOO EH XVHG
RQO\ LI IOH[XUDO FRPSUHVVLRQ LV RQO\ LI IOH[XUDO FRPSUHVVLRQ LV
RQ WKH WRS IODQJH RQ WKH WRS IODQJH

81% 0HPEHU /HQJWK 8QVXSSRUWHG OHQJWK / E RI WKH 81% 0HPEHU /HQJWK 8QVXSSRUWHG OHQJWK / E RI WKH
ERWWRP IODQJH IRU FDOFXODWLQJ ERWWRP IODQJH IRU FDOFXODWLQJ
IOH[XUDO VWUHQJWK :LOO EH XVHG IOH[XUDO VWUHQJWK :LOO EH XVHG
RQO\ LI IOH[XUDO FRPSUHVVLRQ LV RQO\ LI IOH[XUDO FRPSUHVVLRQ LV
RQ WKH ERWWRP IODQJH RQ WKH ERWWRP IODQJH

67,)) 0HPEHU /HQJWK 6SDFLQJ RI VWLIIHQHUV IRU EHDPV 67,)) 0HPEHU /HQJWK 6SDFLQJ RI VWLIIHQHUV IRU EHDPV
IRU VKHDU GHVLJQ IRU VKHDU GHVLJQ

&%  &RHIILFLHQW &E SHU &KDSWHU ) ,I &%  &RHIILFLHQW &E SHU &KDSWHU ) ,I
&E LV VHW WR  LW ZLOO EH &E LV VHW WR  LW ZLOO EH
FDOFXODWHG E\ WKH SURJUDP $Q\ FDOFXODWHG E\ WKH SURJUDP $Q\
RWKHU YDOXH ZLOO EH GLUHFWO\ XVHG RWKHU YDOXH ZLOO EH GLUHFWO\ XVHG
LQ GHVLJQ LQ GHVLJQ

75$&.   6XSSUHVV DOO GHVLJQ 75$&.   6XSSUHVV DOO GHVLJQ
VWUHQJWKV VWUHQJWKV
 3ULQW DOO GHVLJQ VWUHQJWKV  3ULQW DOO GHVLJQ VWUHQJWKV
 3ULQW H[SDQGHG GHVLJQ  3ULQW H[SDQGHG GHVLJQ
RXWSXW RXWSXW

'0$;  LQ 0D[LPXP DOORZDEOH GHSWK '0$;  LQ 0D[LPXP DOORZDEOH GHSWK

'0,1  LQ 0LQLPXP DOORZDEOH GHSWK '0,1  LQ 0LQLPXP DOORZDEOH GHSWK

5$7,2  3HUPLVVLEOH UDWLR RI DFWXDO ORDG 5$7,2  3HUPLVVLEOH UDWLR RI DFWXDO ORDG
HIIHFW DQG GHVLJQ VWUHQJWK HIIHFW DQG GHVLJQ VWUHQJWK

%($0   GHVLJQ DW HQGV DQG WKRVH %($0   GHVLJQ DW HQGV DQG WKRVH
ORFDWLRQV VSHFLILHG E\ ORFDWLRQV VSHFLILHG E\
6(&7,21 FRPPDQG 6(&7,21 FRPPDQG
 GHVLJQ DW HQGV DQG DW  GHVLJQ DW HQGV DQG DW
WK WK
HYHU\  SRLQW DORQJ HYHU\  SRLQW DORQJ
PHPEHU OHQJWK 'HIDXOW PHPEHU OHQJWK 'HIDXOW

*Top and Bottom represent the positive and negative side of the *Top and Bottom represent the positive and negative side of the
local Y axis (local Z axis if SET Z UP is used. local Y axis (local Z axis if SET Z UP is used.

Note: For deflection check, parameters DFF, DJ1 and DJ2 from Note: For deflection check, parameters DFF, DJ1 and DJ2 from
Table 2.1 may be used. All requirements remain the same. Table 2.1 may be used. All requirements remain the same.
Section 2 2-39 Section 2 2-39

2.15 Design per American Cold Formed Steel 2.15 Design per American Cold Formed Steel
Code Code
*HQHUDO *HQHUDO

Provisions of the AISI Specification for the Design of Cold- Provisions of the AISI Specification for the Design of Cold-
Formed Steel Structural Members, 1996 Edition have been Formed Steel Structural Members, 1996 Edition have been
implemented. The program allows design of single (non- implemented. The program allows design of single (non-
composite) members in tension, compression, bending, shear, as composite) members in tension, compression, bending, shear, as
well as their combinations using the LRFD Method. For flexural well as their combinations using the LRFD Method. For flexural
members, the Nominal Section Strength is calculated on the basis members, the Nominal Section Strength is calculated on the basis
of initiation of yielding in the effective section (Procedure I). of initiation of yielding in the effective section (Procedure I).
Strength increase from Cold Work of Forming is a user selectable Strength increase from Cold Work of Forming is a user selectable
option. option.

&URVV6HFWLRQDO 3URSHUWLHV &URVV6HFWLRQDO 3URSHUWLHV

The user specifies the geometry of the cross-section by choosing The user specifies the geometry of the cross-section by choosing
one of the section shape designations from the STAAD Steel one of the section shape designations from the STAAD Steel
Tables for cold-formed sections, which mirror the Gross Section Tables for cold-formed sections, which mirror the Gross Section
Property Tables published in the "Cold- Formed Steel Design Property Tables published in the "Cold- Formed Steel Design
Manual", AISI, 1996 Edition. Manual", AISI, 1996 Edition.

The Tables are currently available for the following shapes: The Tables are currently available for the following shapes:

• Channel with Lips • Channel with Lips


• Channel without Lips • Channel without Lips
• Angle with Lips • Angle with Lips
• Angle without Lips • Angle without Lips
• Z with Lips • Z with Lips
• Z without Lips • Z without Lips
• Hat • Hat

Shape selection may be done using the member property pages of Shape selection may be done using the member property pages of
the graphical user interface (GUI) or by specifying the section the graphical user interface (GUI) or by specifying the section
American Steel Design American Steel Design

2-40 Section 2 2-40 Section 2

designation symbol in the input file. Details of the latter are designation symbol in the input file. Details of the latter are
explained below. explained below.

7KH $,6, 6WHHO 6HFWLRQ /LEUDU\ 7KH $,6, 6WHHO 6HFWLRQ /LEUDU\

The command-line syntax for assigning steel sections from the The command-line syntax for assigning steel sections from the
AISI library is as explained below : AISI library is as explained below :

C-Section With Lips C-Section With Lips

 72  7 $ 67 &6;  72  7 $ 67 &6;
  7$ 67 &6;   7$ 67 &6;
  7$ 67 &6;   7$ 67 &6;

C-Section Without Lips C-Section Without Lips

 72  7 $ 67 &8;  72  7 $ 67 &8;
  7$ 67 &8;   7$ 67 &8;
  7$ 67 &8;   7$ 67 &8;

Z-Section With Lips Z-Section With Lips

   7$ 67 =6;    7$ 67 =6;
  7$ 67 =6;   7$ 67 =6;
  7$ 67 =6;   7$ 67 =6;

Z-Section Without Lips Z-Section Without Lips

  7$ 67 =8;   7$ 67 =8;
  7$ 67 =8;   7$ 67 =8;
  7$ 67 =8;   7$ 67 =8;
Section 2 2-41 Section 2 2-41
Equal Leg Angles With Lips Equal Leg Angles With Lips

  7$ 67 /6;   7$ 67 /6;
  7$ 67 /6;   7$ 67 /6;
  7$ 67 /6;   7$ 67 /6;

Equal Leg Angles Without Lips Equal Leg Angles Without Lips

  7$ 67 /8;   7$ 67 /8;
  7$ 67 /8;   7$ 67 /8;
  7$ 67 /8;   7$ 67 /8;

Hat Sections Without Lips Hat Sections Without Lips

  7$ 67 +8;   7$ 67 +8;
  7$ 67 +8;   7$ 67 +8;
  7$ 67 +8;   7$ 67 +8;

&XUUHQW /LPLWDWLRQV  &XUUHQW /LPLWDWLRQV 

At the present time, only standard single sections are available for At the present time, only standard single sections are available for
specification. Options such as double angles, double channels, and specification. Options such as double angles, double channels, and
user provided sections including pipes and tubes will be available user provided sections including pipes and tubes will be available
at a later date. Additionally, combination sections, such as an at a later date. Additionally, combination sections, such as an
angle placed on top of a channel, or a plate welded to the top, angle placed on top of a channel, or a plate welded to the top,
bottom or side of one of the above shapes, are not available at this bottom or side of one of the above shapes, are not available at this
time. time.

STAAD.Pro uses unreduced section properties in the structure STAAD.Pro uses unreduced section properties in the structure
analysis stage. Both unreduced and effective section properties are analysis stage. Both unreduced and effective section properties are
used in the design stage, as applicable. used in the design stage, as applicable.
American Steel Design American Steel Design

2-42 Section 2 2-42 Section 2

'HVLJQ 3URFHGXUH 'HVLJQ 3URFHGXUH

The following two design modes are available: The following two design modes are available:

1. Code Checking 1. Code Checking

The program compares the resistance of members with the applied The program compares the resistance of members with the applied
load effects, in accordance with the LRFD Method of the AISI load effects, in accordance with the LRFD Method of the AISI
code. Code checking is carried out for locations specified by the code. Code checking is carried out for locations specified by the
user via the SECTION command or the BEAM parameter. The user via the SECTION command or the BEAM parameter. The
results are presented in a form of a PASS/FAIL identifier and a results are presented in a form of a PASS/FAIL identifier and a
RATIO of load effect to resistance for each member checked. The RATIO of load effect to resistance for each member checked. The
user may choose the degree of detail in the output data by setting user may choose the degree of detail in the output data by setting
the TRACK parameter. the TRACK parameter.

2. Member Selection 2. Member Selection


The user may request that the program search the cold formed steel The user may request that the program search the cold formed steel
shapes database (AISI standard sections) for alternative members shapes database (AISI standard sections) for alternative members
that pass the code check and meet the least weight criterion. In that pass the code check and meet the least weight criterion. In
addition, a minimum and/or maximum acceptable depth of the addition, a minimum and/or maximum acceptable depth of the
member may be specified. The program will then evaluate all member may be specified. The program will then evaluate all
database sections of the type initially specified (i.e., channel, database sections of the type initially specified (i.e., channel,
angle, etc.) and, if a suitable replacement is found, present design angle, etc.) and, if a suitable replacement is found, present design
results for that section. If no section satisfying the depth results for that section. If no section satisfying the depth
restrictions or lighter than the initial one can be found, the restrictions or lighter than the initial one can be found, the
program leaves the member unchanged, regardless of whether it program leaves the member unchanged, regardless of whether it
passes the code check or not. passes the code check or not.

The program calculates effective section properties in accordance The program calculates effective section properties in accordance
with the following Sections: with the following Sections:

• B2.1, Uniformly Compressed Stiffened Elements • B2.1, Uniformly Compressed Stiffened Elements
• B2.3, Webs and Stiffened Elements with Stress Gradient • B2.3, Webs and Stiffened Elements with Stress Gradient
• B3.1, Uniformly Compressed Unstiffened Elements • B3.1, Uniformly Compressed Unstiffened Elements
• B3.2, Unstiffened Elements and Edge Stiffeners with • B3.2, Unstiffened Elements and Edge Stiffeners with
Stress Gradient Stress Gradient
• B4.2, Uniformly Compressed Elements with an Edge • B4.2, Uniformly Compressed Elements with an Edge
Stiffener Stiffener
Section 2 2-43 Section 2 2-43

Cross-sectional properties of members are checked for compliance Cross-sectional properties of members are checked for compliance
with the following Sections: with the following Sections:

• B1.1(a), Maximum Flat-Width-to-Thickness Ratios, and • B1.1(a), Maximum Flat-Width-to-Thickness Ratios, and
• B1.2, Maximum Web Depth-to-Thickness Ratio • B1.2, Maximum Web Depth-to-Thickness Ratio

The program checks member strength in accordance with Chapter The program checks member strength in accordance with Chapter
C of the specification as follows: C of the specification as follows:

1. Tension Members. 1. Tension Members.


Resistance is calculated in accordance with Section C2. Resistance is calculated in accordance with Section C2.

2. Flexural Members. 2. Flexural Members.


a) C3.1, Strength for bending only: a) C3.1, Strength for bending only:
• C3.1.1, Nominal Section Strength, Procedure I • C3.1.1, Nominal Section Strength, Procedure I
• C3.1.2, Lateral Buckling Strength • C3.1.2, Lateral Buckling Strength
b) C3.2, Strength for Shear Only b) C3.2, Strength for Shear Only
c) C3.3, Strength for Combined Bending and Shear c) C3.3, Strength for Combined Bending and Shear

3. Concentrically Loaded Compression Members. 3. Concentrically Loaded Compression Members.


a) C4.1, Sections not subject to Torsional or Torsional-Flexural a) C4.1, Sections not subject to Torsional or Torsional-Flexural
Buckling, and Buckling, and
b) C4.2, Doubly or Singly Symmetric sections subject to b) C4.2, Doubly or Singly Symmetric sections subject to
Torsional or Torsional-Flexural Buckling. Torsional or Torsional-Flexural Buckling.
4. Combined Axial Load and Bending. 4. Combined Axial Load and Bending.
a) C5.1, Combined Tensile Axial Load and Bending, and a) C5.1, Combined Tensile Axial Load and Bending, and
b) C5.2, Combined Compressive Axial Load and Bending. b) C5.2, Combined Compressive Axial Load and Bending.
American Steel Design American Steel Design

2-44 Section 2 2-44 Section 2

The following table contains the input parameters for specifying The following table contains the input parameters for specifying
values of design variables and selection of design options. values of design variables and selection of design options.

AISI COLD FORMED STEEL DESIGN PARAMETERS AISI COLD FORMED STEEL DESIGN PARAMETERS
Parameter Default Description Parameter Default Description
Name Value Name Value
BEAM 1.0 When this parameter is set to 1.0 (default), the BEAM 1.0 When this parameter is set to 1.0 (default), the
adequacy of the member is determined by checking a adequacy of the member is determined by checking a
total of 13 equally spaced locations along the length total of 13 equally spaced locations along the length
of the member. If the BEAM value is 0.0, the 13 of the member. If the BEAM value is 0.0, the 13
location check is not conducted, and instead, location check is not conducted, and instead,
checking is done only at the locations specified by checking is done only at the locations specified by
the SECTION command (See STAAD manual for the SECTION command (See STAAD manual for
details). If neither the BEAM parameter nor any details). If neither the BEAM parameter nor any
SECTION command is specified, STAAD will SECTION command is specified, STAAD will
terminate the run and ask the user to provide one of terminate the run and ask the user to provide one of
those 2 commands. This rule is not enforced for those 2 commands. This rule is not enforced for
TRUSS members. TRUSS members.
CMZ 1.0 End moment coefficient for bending about Z axis. CMZ 1.0 End moment coefficient for bending about Z axis.
See AISI C5.2.2. Used for combined axial load and See AISI C5.2.2. Used for combined axial load and
bending design. Values range from 0.4 to 1.0. bending design. Values range from 0.4 to 1.0.
CMY 0.0 End moment coefficient for bending about Y axis. CMY 0.0 End moment coefficient for bending about Y axis.
See AISI C5.2.2. Used for combined axial load and See AISI C5.2.2. Used for combined axial load and
bending design. Values range from 0.4 to 1.0. bending design. Values range from 0.4 to 1.0.
CWY 0 Specifies whether the cold work of forming CWY 0 Specifies whether the cold work of forming
strengthening effect should be included in resistance strengthening effect should be included in resistance
computation. See AISI A7.2. computation. See AISI A7.2.

Values: 0 – effect should not be included Values: 0 – effect should not be included

1 – effect should be included 1 – effect should be included


Section 2 2-45 Section 2 2-45

AISI Cold Formed Steel Design Parameters AISI Cold Formed Steel Design Parameters
Parameter Default Description Parameter Default Description
Name Value Name Value
DMAX 1000.0 Maximum depth permissible for the section during DMAX 1000.0 Maximum depth permissible for the section during
member selection. This value must be provided in member selection. This value must be provided in
the current units. the current units.
DMIN 0.0 Minimum depth required for the section during DMIN 0.0 Minimum depth required for the section during
member selection. This value must be provided in member selection. This value must be provided in
the current units. the current units.
FLX 1 Specifies whether torsional-flexural buckling FLX 1 Specifies whether torsional-flexural buckling
restraint is provided or is not necessary for the restraint is provided or is not necessary for the
member. See AISI C4.1 member. See AISI C4.1

Values: Values:
0 – Section subject to torsional flexural buckling and 0 – Section subject to torsional flexural buckling and
restraint not provided restraint not provided
1 – restraint provided or unnecessary 1 – restraint provided or unnecessary

FU 58 ksi Ultimate tensile strength of steel in current units. FU 58 ksi Ultimate tensile strength of steel in current units.
FYLD 36 ksi Yield strength of steel in current units. FYLD 36 ksi Yield strength of steel in current units.
KT 1.0 Effective length factor for torsional buckling. It is a KT 1.0 Effective length factor for torsional buckling. It is a
fraction and is unit-less. Values can range from 0.01 fraction and is unit-less. Values can range from 0.01
(for a column completely prevented from torsional (for a column completely prevented from torsional
buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used
to compute the KL/R ratio for twisting for to compute the KL/R ratio for twisting for
determining the capacity in axial compression. determining the capacity in axial compression.
KY 1.0 Effective length factor for overall column buckling KY 1.0 Effective length factor for overall column buckling
about the local Y-axis. It is a fraction and is unit- about the local Y-axis. It is a fraction and is unit-
less. Values can range from 0.01 (for a column less. Values can range from 0.01 (for a column
completely prevented from buckling) to any user completely prevented from buckling) to any user
specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R
ratio for determining the capacity in axial ratio for determining the capacity in axial
compression. compression.
American Steel Design American Steel Design

2-46 Section 2 2-46 Section 2

AISI Cold Formed Steel Design Parameters AISI Cold Formed Steel Design Parameters
Parameter Default Description Parameter Default Description
Name Value Name Value
KZ 1.0 Effective length factor for overall column buckling KZ 1.0 Effective length factor for overall column buckling
in the local Z-axis. It is a fraction and is unit-less. in the local Z-axis. It is a fraction and is unit-less.
Values can range from 0.01 (for a column Values can range from 0.01 (for a column
completely prevented from buckling) to any user completely prevented from buckling) to any user
specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R
ratio for determining the capacity in axial ratio for determining the capacity in axial
compression. compression.
LT Member Unbraced length for twisting. It is input in the LT Member Unbraced length for twisting. It is input in the
length current units of length. Values can range from 0.01 length current units of length. Values can range from 0.01
(for a column completely prevented from torsional (for a column completely prevented from torsional
buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used
to compute the KL/R ratio for twisting for to compute the KL/R ratio for twisting for
determining the capacity in axial compression. determining the capacity in axial compression.
LY Member Effective length for overall column buckling in the LY Member Effective length for overall column buckling in the
length local Y-axis. It is input in the current units of length. length local Y-axis. It is input in the current units of length.
Values can range from 0.01 (for a column Values can range from 0.01 (for a column
completely prevented from buckling) to any user completely prevented from buckling) to any user
specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R
ratio for determining the capacity in axial ratio for determining the capacity in axial
compression. compression.
LZ Member Effective length for overall column buckling in the LZ Member Effective length for overall column buckling in the
length local Z-axis. It is input in the current units of length. length local Z-axis. It is input in the current units of length.
Values can range from 0.01 (for a column Values can range from 0.01 (for a column
completely prevented from buckling) to any user completely prevented from buckling) to any user
specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R
ratio for determining the allowable stress in axial ratio for determining the allowable stress in axial
compression. compression.
NSF 1.0 Net section factor for tension members, See AISI C2. NSF 1.0 Net section factor for tension members, See AISI C2.
Section 2 2-47 Section 2 2-47

AISI Cold Formed Steel Design Parameters AISI Cold Formed Steel Design Parameters
Parameter Default Description Parameter Default Description
Name Value Name Value
STIFF Member Spacing in the longitudinal direction of shear STIFF Member Spacing in the longitudinal direction of shear
length stiffeners for reinforced web elements. It is input in length stiffeners for reinforced web elements. It is input in
the current units of length. See section AISI C3.2 the current units of length. See section AISI C3.2
TRACK 0 This parameter is used to control the level of detail TRACK 0 This parameter is used to control the level of detail
in which the design output is reported in the output in which the design output is reported in the output
file. The allowable values are: file. The allowable values are:

0 - Prints only the member number, section name, 0 - Prints only the member number, section name,
ratio, and PASS/FAIL status. ratio, and PASS/FAIL status.

1 - Prints the design summary in addition to that 1 - Prints the design summary in addition to that
printed by TRACK 1 printed by TRACK 1

2 - Prints member and material properties in addition 2 - Prints member and material properties in addition
to that printed by TRACK 2. to that printed by TRACK 2.
TSA 1 Specifies whether bearing and intermediate TSA 1 Specifies whether bearing and intermediate
transverse stiffeners are present. If true, the program transverse stiffeners are present. If true, the program
uses the more liberal set of interaction equations in uses the more liberal set of interaction equations in
AISI C3.3.2. AISI C3.3.2.

Values: Values:
0 – Beams with un-reinforced webs 0 – Beams with un-reinforced webs
1 – Beams with transverse web stiffeners 1 – Beams with transverse web stiffeners
3-1 3-1

American Concrete Design American Concrete Design

Section 3 Section 3

3.1 Design Operations 3.1 Design Operations

STAAD has the capabilities for performing concrete design. It will STAAD has the capabilities for performing concrete design. It will
calculate the reinforcement needed for the specified concrete calculate the reinforcement needed for the specified concrete
section. All the concrete design calculations are based on the section. All the concrete design calculations are based on the
current ACI 318. current ACI 318.

3.2 Section Types for Concrete Design 3.2 Section Types for Concrete Design

The following types of cross sections can be defined for concrete The following types of cross sections can be defined for concrete
design. design.

For Beams Prismatic (Rectangular & Square), For Beams Prismatic (Rectangular & Square),
Trapezoidal and T-shapes Trapezoidal and T-shapes
For Columns Prismatic (Rectangular, Square and Circular) For Columns Prismatic (Rectangular, Square and Circular)
For Slabs Finite element with a specified thickness. For Slabs Finite element with a specified thickness.
Walls/Plates Walls/Plates

<' =' =' <' =' ='

<' <'
<' <% <' <' <% <'

=' =% =' =%
35,60$7,& &,5&8/$5 =% 35,60$7,& &,5&8/$5 =%
7(( 75$3(=2,'$/ 7(( 75$3(=2,'$/
American Concrete Design American Concrete Design
3-2 Section 3 3-2 Section 3

3.3 Member Dimensions 3.3 Member Dimensions

Concrete members which will be designed by the program must Concrete members which will be designed by the program must
have certain section properties input under the MEMBER have certain section properties input under the MEMBER
PROPERTY command. The following example shows the required PROPERTY command. The following example shows the required
input: input:

81,7 ,1&+ 81,7 ,1&+

0(0%(5 3523(57< 0(0%(5 3523(57<

  72   35,60 <'  ='  ,=  ,<    72   35,60 <'  ='  ,=  ,< 

  35 <'    35 <' 

 72  35,6 <'  ='  <%  =%   72  35,6 <'  ='  <%  =% 

 72  35 <'  ='  =%   72  35 <'  ='  =% 

In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (18 inch In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (18 inch
depth and 12 inch width) and the second set of members, with only depth and 12 inch width) and the second set of members, with only
depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be circular with depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be circular with
12 inch diameter. Note that no area (AX) is provided for these 12 inch diameter. Note that no area (AX) is provided for these
members. For concrete design, this property must not be provided. members. For concrete design, this property must not be provided.
If shear areas and moments of inertias are not provided, the If shear areas and moments of inertias are not provided, the
program calculates these values from YD and ZD. Notice that in program calculates these values from YD and ZD. Notice that in
the above example the IZ and IY values provided are actually 50% the above example the IZ and IY values provided are actually 50%
of the values calculated using YD and ZD. This is a conventional of the values calculated using YD and ZD. This is a conventional
practice which takes into consideration revised section parameters practice which takes into consideration revised section parameters
due to cracking of section. due to cracking of section.

Note that the third and the fourth set of members in the above Note that the third and the fourth set of members in the above
example represent a T-shape and a TRAPEZOIDAL shape example represent a T-shape and a TRAPEZOIDAL shape
respectively. Depending on the properties (YD, ZD, YB, ZB, etc.) respectively. Depending on the properties (YD, ZD, YB, ZB, etc.)
provided, the program will determine whether the section is provided, the program will determine whether the section is
rectangular, trapezoidal or T-shaped and the BEAM design will be rectangular, trapezoidal or T-shaped and the BEAM design will be
done accordingly. done accordingly.
Section 3 3-3 Section 3 3-3

3.4 Design Parameters 3.4 Design Parameters

The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to
perform design by the ACI code. Default parameter values have perform design by the ACI code. Default parameter values have
been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for
conventional design requirements. These values may be changed to conventional design requirements. These values may be changed to
suit the particular design being performed. Table 3.1 is a complete suit the particular design being performed. Table 3.1 is a complete
list of the available parameters and their default values. list of the available parameters and their default values.

Section 5.51.2 of this manual describes the commands required to Section 5.51.2 of this manual describes the commands required to
See Section See Section
provide these parameters in the input file. For example, the values provide these parameters in the input file. For example, the values
5.51 5.51
of SFACE and EFACE (parameters that are used in shear design), of SFACE and EFACE (parameters that are used in shear design),
the distances of the face of supports from the end nodes of a beam, the distances of the face of supports from the end nodes of a beam,
are assigned values of zero by default but may be changed are assigned values of zero by default but may be changed
depending on the actual situation. Similarly, beams and columns depending on the actual situation. Similarly, beams and columns
are designed for moments directly obtained from the analyses are designed for moments directly obtained from the analyses
without any magnification. The factor MMAG may be used for without any magnification. The factor MMAG may be used for
magnification of column moments. For beams, the user may magnification of column moments. For beams, the user may
generate load cases which contain loads magnified by the generate load cases which contain loads magnified by the
appropriate load factors. appropriate load factors.

3.5 Slenderness Effects and Analysis 3.5 Slenderness Effects and Analysis
Consideration Consideration

Slenderness effects are extremely important in designing Slenderness effects are extremely important in designing
compression members. The ACI-318 code specifies two options by compression members. The ACI-318 code specifies two options by
which the slenderness effect can be accommodated (Section 10.10 which the slenderness effect can be accommodated (Section 10.10
& 10.11 ACI-318). One option is to perform an exact analysis & 10.11 ACI-318). One option is to perform an exact analysis
which will take into account the influence of axial loads and which will take into account the influence of axial loads and
variable moment of inertia on member stiffness and fixed-end variable moment of inertia on member stiffness and fixed-end
moments, the effect of deflections on moments and forces, and the moments, the effect of deflections on moments and forces, and the
effect of the duration of loads. Another option is to approximately effect of the duration of loads. Another option is to approximately
magnify design moments. magnify design moments.

STAAD has been written to allow the use of both the options. To STAAD has been written to allow the use of both the options. To
perform the first type of analysis, use the command PDELTA perform the first type of analysis, use the command PDELTA
ANALYSIS instead of PERFORM ANALYSIS. This analysis ANALYSIS instead of PERFORM ANALYSIS. This analysis
American Concrete Design American Concrete Design
3-4 Section 3 3-4 Section 3

method will accommodate the requirements as specified in Section method will accommodate the requirements as specified in Section
10.10 of the ACI-318 Code, except for the effects of the duration 10.10 of the ACI-318 Code, except for the effects of the duration
of the loads. It is felt that this effect may be safely ignored because of the loads. It is felt that this effect may be safely ignored because
experts believe that the effects of the duration of loads are experts believe that the effects of the duration of loads are
negligible in a normal structural configuration. If it is desired, negligible in a normal structural configuration. If it is desired,
STAAD can also accommodate any arbitrary moment magnification STAAD can also accommodate any arbitrary moment magnification
factor (second option) as an input, in order to provide some safety factor (second option) as an input, in order to provide some safety
due to the effects of the duration of loads. due to the effects of the duration of loads.

7DEOH 7DEOH
3DUDPHWHU 'HIDXOW 'HVFULSWLRQ 3DUDPHWHU 'HIDXOW 'HVFULSWLRQ

1DPH 9DOXH 1DPH 9DOXH

)<0$,1  SVL <LHOG 6WUHVV IRU PDLQ )<0$,1  SVL <LHOG 6WUHVV IRU PDLQ
UHLQIRUFLQJ VWHHO UHLQIRUFLQJ VWHHO
)<6(&  SVL <LHOG 6WUHVV IRU VHFRQGDU\ )<6(&  SVL <LHOG 6WUHVV IRU VHFRQGDU\
VWHHO VWHHO
)&  SVL &RPSUHVVLYH 6WUHQJWK RI )&  SVL &RPSUHVVLYH 6WUHQJWK RI
&RQFUHWH &RQFUHWH
&/7  LQFK &OHDU FRYHU IRU WRS &/7  LQFK &OHDU FRYHU IRU WRS
UHLQIRUFHPHQW UHLQIRUFHPHQW
&/%  LQFK &OHDU FRYHU IRU ERWWRP &/%  LQFK &OHDU FRYHU IRU ERWWRP
UHLQIRUFHPHQW UHLQIRUFHPHQW
&/6  LQFK &OHDU FRYHU IRU VLGH &/6  LQFK &OHDU FRYHU IRU VLGH
UHLQIRUFHPHQW UHLQIRUFHPHQW
0,10$,1 1XPEHU  EDU 0LQLPXP PDLQ UHLQIRUFHPHQW 0,10$,1 1XPEHU  EDU 0LQLPXP PDLQ UHLQIRUFHPHQW
EDU VL]H 1XPEHU    EDU VL]H 1XPEHU   
0,16(& 1XPEHU  EDU 0LQLPXP VHFRQGDU\ 0,16(& 1XPEHU  EDU 0LQLPXP VHFRQGDU\
UHLQIRUFHPHQW EDU VL]H UHLQIRUFHPHQW EDU VL]H
0$;0$,1 1XPEHU  EDU 0D[LPXP PDLQ UHLQIRUFHPHQW 0$;0$,1 1XPEHU  EDU 0D[LPXP PDLQ UHLQIRUFHPHQW
EDU VL]H EDU VL]H
Section 3 3-5 Section 3 3-5

7DEOH&RQW 7DEOH&RQW
3DUDPHWHU 'HIDXOW 'HVFULSWLRQ 3DUDPHWHU 'HIDXOW 'HVFULSWLRQ

1DPH 9DOXH 1DPH 9DOXH

6)$&(  )DFH RI VXSSRUW ORFDWLRQ DW 6)$&(  )DFH RI VXSSRUW ORFDWLRQ DW
VWDUW RI EHDP ,I VSHFLILHG WKH VWDUW RI EHDP ,I VSHFLILHG WKH
VKHDU IRUFH DW VWDUW LV VKHDU IRUFH DW VWDUW LV
FRPSXWHG DW D GLVWDQFH RI FRPSXWHG DW D GLVWDQFH RI
6)$&(G IURP WKH VWDUW MRLQW 6)$&(G IURP WKH VWDUW MRLQW
RI WKH PHPEHU RI WKH PHPEHU
()$&(  )DFH RI VXSSRUW ORFDWLRQ DW ()$&(  )DFH RI VXSSRUW ORFDWLRQ DW
HQG RI EHDP 1RWH %RWK HQG RI EHDP 1RWH %RWK
6)$&( ()$&( DUH LQSXW DV 6)$&( ()$&( DUH LQSXW DV
SRVLWLYH QXPEHUV ,I VSHFLILHG SRVLWLYH QXPEHUV ,I VSHFLILHG
WKH VKHDU IRUFH DW HQG LV WKH VKHDU IRUFH DW HQG LV
FRPSXWHG DW D GLVWDQFH RI FRPSXWHG DW D GLVWDQFH RI
()$&(G IURP WKH HQG MRLQW RI ()$&(G IURP WKH HQG MRLQW RI
WKH PHPEHU WKH PHPEHU
5(,1)  7LHG &ROXPQ $ YDOXH RI  5(,1)  7LHG &ROXPQ $ YDOXH RI 
ZLOO PHDQ VSLUDO ZLOO PHDQ VSLUDO
00$*  $ IDFWRU E\ ZKLFK WKH FROXPQ 00$*  $ IDFWRU E\ ZKLFK WKH FROXPQ
IRU FROXPQV RQO\ GHVLJQ PRPHQWV ZLOO EH IRU FROXPQV RQO\ GHVLJQ PRPHQWV ZLOO EH
PDJQLILHG PDJQLILHG
:,'7+ =' :LGWK RI FRQFUHWH PHPEHU :,'7+ =' :LGWK RI FRQFUHWH PHPEHU
7KLV YDOXH GHIDXOWV WR =' DV 7KLV YDOXH GHIDXOWV WR =' DV
SURYLGHG XQGHU 0(0%(5 SURYLGHG XQGHU 0(0%(5
3523(57,(6 3523(57,(6
'(37+ <' 'HSWK RI FRQFUHWH PHPEHU '(37+ <' 'HSWK RI FRQFUHWH PHPEHU
7KLV YDOXH GHIDXOWV WR <' DV 7KLV YDOXH GHIDXOWV WR <' DV
SURYLGHG XQGHU 0(0%(5 SURYLGHG XQGHU 0(0%(5
3523(57,(6 3523(57,(6
16(&7,21  1XPEHU RI HTXDOO\VSDFHG 16(&7,21  1XPEHU RI HTXDOO\VSDFHG
VHFWLRQV WR EH FRQVLGHUHG LQ VHFWLRQV WR EH FRQVLGHUHG LQ
ILQGLQJ FULWLFDO PRPHQWV IRU ILQGLQJ FULWLFDO PRPHQWV IRU
EHDP GHVLJQ EHDP GHVLJQ
American Concrete Design American Concrete Design
3-6 Section 3 3-6 Section 3

7DEOH&RQW 7DEOH&RQW
3DUDPHWHU 'HIDXOW 'HVFULSWLRQ 3DUDPHWHU 'HIDXOW 'HVFULSWLRQ

1DPH 9DOXH 1DPH 9DOXH

75$&.  %($0 '(6,*1 75$&.  %($0 '(6,*1

:LWK 75$&. VHW WR  &ULWLFDO :LWK 75$&. VHW WR  &ULWLFDO
0RPHQW ZLOO QRW EH SULQWHG RXW 0RPHQW ZLOO QRW EH SULQWHG RXW
ZLWK EHDP GHVLJQ UHSRUW ZLWK EHDP GHVLJQ UHSRUW
$ YDOXH RI  ZLOO PHDQ D SULQW $ YDOXH RI  ZLOO PHDQ D SULQW
RXW RXW
$ YDOXH RI  ZLOO SULQW RXW $ YDOXH RI  ZLOO SULQW RXW
UHTXLUHG VWHHO DUHDV IRU DOO UHTXLUHG VWHHO DUHDV IRU DOO
LQWHUPHGLDWH VHFWLRQV VSHFLILHG LQWHUPHGLDWH VHFWLRQV VSHFLILHG
E\ 16(&7,21 E\ 16(&7,21
&2/801 '(6,*1 &2/801 '(6,*1
75$&.  SULQWV RXW GHWDLOHG 75$&.  SULQWV RXW GHWDLOHG
GHVLJQ UHVXOWV GHVLJQ UHVXOWV
75$&.  SULQWV RXW FROXPQ 75$&.  SULQWV RXW FROXPQ
LQWHUDFWLRQ DQDO\VLV UHVXOWV LQ LQWHUDFWLRQ DQDO\VLV UHVXOWV LQ
DGGLWLRQ WR 75$&.  RXWSXW DGGLWLRQ WR 75$&.  RXWSXW
75$&.  SULQWV RXW D 75$&.  SULQWV RXW D
VFKHPDWLF LQWHUDFWLRQ GLDJUDP VFKHPDWLF LQWHUDFWLRQ GLDJUDP
DQG LQWHUPHGLDWH LQWHUDFWLRQ DQG LQWHUPHGLDWH LQWHUDFWLRQ
YDOXHV LQ DGGLWLRQ WR DOO RI DERYH YDOXHV LQ DGGLWLRQ WR DOO RI DERYH
* These values must be provided in the current unit system being used. * These values must be provided in the current unit system being used.
** When using metric units for ACI design, provide values for these ** When using metric units for ACI design, provide values for these
parameters in actual 'mm' units instead of the bar number. The parameters in actual 'mm' units instead of the bar number. The
following metric bar sizes are available: 6 mm, 8 mm, 10 mm, 12 following metric bar sizes are available: 6 mm, 8 mm, 10 mm, 12
mm, 16 mm, 20 mm, 25 mm, 32 mm, 40 mm, 50 mm and 60 mm. mm, 16 mm, 20 mm, 25 mm, 32 mm, 40 mm, 50 mm and 60 mm.

Although ignoring load duration effects is somewhat of an Although ignoring load duration effects is somewhat of an
approximation, it must be realized that the approximate evaluation approximation, it must be realized that the approximate evaluation
of slenderness effects is also an approximate method. In this of slenderness effects is also an approximate method. In this
method, moment-magnification is based on empirical formula and method, moment-magnification is based on empirical formula and
assumptions on sidesway. assumptions on sidesway.

Considering all this information, it is our belief, that a PDELTA Considering all this information, it is our belief, that a PDELTA
ANALYSIS, as performed by STAAD, is most appropriate for the ANALYSIS, as performed by STAAD, is most appropriate for the
design of concrete members. However, the user must note, to take design of concrete members. However, the user must note, to take
advantage of this analysis, all combinations of loadings must be advantage of this analysis, all combinations of loadings must be
provided as primary load cases and not as load combinations. This provided as primary load cases and not as load combinations. This
is due to the fact that load combinations are just algebraic is due to the fact that load combinations are just algebraic
Section 3 3-7 Section 3 3-7
combinations of forces and moments, whereas a primary load combinations of forces and moments, whereas a primary load
case is revised during the pdelta analysis based on the deflections. case is revised during the pdelta analysis based on the deflections.
Also note that the proper factored loads (such as 1.4 for DL etc.) Also note that the proper factored loads (such as 1.4 for DL etc.)
should be provided by the user. STAAD does not factor the loads should be provided by the user. STAAD does not factor the loads
automatically. automatically.

3.6 Beam Design 3.6 Beam Design

Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. For all these Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. For all these
forces, all active beam loadings are prescanned to locate the forces, all active beam loadings are prescanned to locate the
possible critical sections. The total number of sections considered possible critical sections. The total number of sections considered
is 12 (twelve) unless this number is redefined with an NSECTION is 12 (twelve) unless this number is redefined with an NSECTION
parameter. All of these equally spaced sections are scanned to parameter. All of these equally spaced sections are scanned to
determine moment and shear envelopes. determine moment and shear envelopes.

Design for Flexure Design for Flexure


Reinforcement for positive and negative moments are calculated on Reinforcement for positive and negative moments are calculated on
the basis of the section properties provided by the user. If the the basis of the section properties provided by the user. If the
section dimensions are inadequate to carry the applied load, that is section dimensions are inadequate to carry the applied load, that is
if the required reinforcement is greater than the maximum if the required reinforcement is greater than the maximum
allowable for the cross section, the program reports that beam fails allowable for the cross section, the program reports that beam fails
in maximum reinforcement. Effective depth is chosen as Total in maximum reinforcement. Effective depth is chosen as Total
depth - (Clear cover + diameter of stirrup + half the dia. of main depth - (Clear cover + diameter of stirrup + half the dia. of main
reinforcement), and a trial value is obtained by adopting proper bar reinforcement), and a trial value is obtained by adopting proper bar
sizes for the stirrups and main reinforcements. The relevant clauses sizes for the stirrups and main reinforcements. The relevant clauses
in Sections 10.2 to 10.6 of ACI 318 are utilized to obtain the actual in Sections 10.2 to 10.6 of ACI 318 are utilized to obtain the actual
amount of steel required as well as the maximum allowable and amount of steel required as well as the maximum allowable and
minimum required steel. These values are reported as ROW, minimum required steel. These values are reported as ROW,
ROWMX and ROWMN in the output and can be printed using the ROWMX and ROWMN in the output and can be printed using the
parameter TRACK 1.0 (see Table 3.1). In addition, the maximum, parameter TRACK 1.0 (see Table 3.1). In addition, the maximum,
minimum and actual bar spacing are also printed. minimum and actual bar spacing are also printed.

It is important to note that beams are designed for flexural moment It is important to note that beams are designed for flexural moment
MZ only. The moment MY is not considered in the flexural design. MZ only. The moment MY is not considered in the flexural design.
American Concrete Design American Concrete Design
3-8 Section 3 3-8 Section 3

Design for Shear Design for Shear


Shear reinforcement is calculated to resist both shear forces and Shear reinforcement is calculated to resist both shear forces and
torsional moments. Shear forces are calculated at a distance torsional moments. Shear forces are calculated at a distance
(d+SFACE) and (d+EFACE) away from the end nodes of the beam. (d+SFACE) and (d+EFACE) away from the end nodes of the beam.
SFACE and EFACE have default values of zero unless provided SFACE and EFACE have default values of zero unless provided
under parameters (see Table 3.1). Note that the value of the under parameters (see Table 3.1). Note that the value of the
effective depth "d", used for this purpose, accounts for the actual effective depth "d", used for this purpose, accounts for the actual
c.g. of the main reinforcement calculated under flexural design. c.g. of the main reinforcement calculated under flexural design.
The relevant clauses of ACI 318 are used to calculate the The relevant clauses of ACI 318 are used to calculate the
reinforcement for shear forces and torsional moments. Based on the reinforcement for shear forces and torsional moments. Based on the
total stirrup reinforcement required, the size of bars, the spacing, total stirrup reinforcement required, the size of bars, the spacing,
the number of bars and the distance over which they are provided the number of bars and the distance over which they are provided
are calculated. Stirrups are always assumed to be 2-legged. are calculated. Stirrups are always assumed to be 2-legged.

Design for Anchorage Design for Anchorage


In the output for flexural design, the anchorage details are also In the output for flexural design, the anchorage details are also
provided. At any particular level, the START and END coordinates provided. At any particular level, the START and END coordinates
of the layout of the main reinforcement is described along with the of the layout of the main reinforcement is described along with the
information whether anchorage in the form of a hook or information whether anchorage in the form of a hook or
continuation is required or not at these START and END points. continuation is required or not at these START and END points.
Note that the coordinates of these START and END points are Note that the coordinates of these START and END points are
obtained after taking into account the anchorage requirements. obtained after taking into account the anchorage requirements.
Anchorage length is calculated on the basis of the Clauses Anchorage length is calculated on the basis of the Clauses
described in Chapter 12 of ACI 318. described in Chapter 12 of ACI 318.
Section 3 3-9 Section 3 3-9

Description of Output for Beam Design Description of Output for Beam Design
Table 3.2 shows a sample output of an actual reinforcement pattern Table 3.2 shows a sample output of an actual reinforcement pattern
developed by the program. The following annotations apply to the developed by the program. The following annotations apply to the
Table 3.2: Table 3.2:

1) LEVEL Serial number of bar level which may contain 1) LEVEL Serial number of bar level which may contain
one or more bar group one or more bar group
2) HEIGHT Height of bar level from the bottom of beam. 2) HEIGHT Height of bar level from the bottom of beam.
3) BAR INFO Reinforcement bar information specifying 3) BAR INFO Reinforcement bar information specifying
number of bars and bar size. number of bars and bar size.
4) FROM Distance from the start of the beam to the start 4) FROM Distance from the start of the beam to the start
of the reinforcement bar. of the reinforcement bar.
5) TO Distance from the start of the beam to the end of 5) TO Distance from the start of the beam to the end of
the reinforcement bar. the reinforcement bar.
6) ANCHOR States whether anchorage, 6) ANCHOR States whether anchorage,
(STA/END) either a hook or continuation, is needed at start (STA/END) either a hook or continuation, is needed at start
(STA) or at the end. (STA) or at the end.
7) ROW Actually required flexural reinforcement 7) ROW Actually required flexural reinforcement
(As/bd) where b = width of cross section (ZD (As/bd) where b = width of cross section (ZD
for rectangular and square section) and d = for rectangular and square section) and d =
effective depth of cross section (YD - distance effective depth of cross section (YD - distance
from extreme tension fiber to the c.g. of main from extreme tension fiber to the c.g. of main
reinforcement). reinforcement).
8) ROWMN Minimum required flexural reinforcement 8) ROWMN Minimum required flexural reinforcement
(Amin/bd) (Amin/bd)
9) ROWMX Maximum allowable flexural reinforcement 9) ROWMX Maximum allowable flexural reinforcement
(Amax/bd) (Amax/bd)
10) SPACING Distance between centers of adjacent bars of 10) SPACING Distance between centers of adjacent bars of
main reinforcement main reinforcement
11) Vu Factored shear force at section. 11) Vu Factored shear force at section.
12) Vc Nominal shear strength provided by concrete. 12) Vc Nominal shear strength provided by concrete.
13) Vs Nominal shear strength provided by shear 13) Vs Nominal shear strength provided by shear
reinforcement. reinforcement.
14) Tu Factored torsional moment at section 14) Tu Factored torsional moment at section
15) Tc Nominal torsional moment strength provided by 15) Tc Nominal torsional moment strength provided by
concrete. concrete.
16) Ts Nominal torsional moment strength provided by 16) Ts Nominal torsional moment strength provided by
torsion reinforcement. torsion reinforcement.
+22. ,) $1&+25 ,6 <(6 +22. ,) $1&+25 ,6 <(6
67,5583 63$&,1* 67,5583 63$&,1*

67,55836 67,55836

+7 2) /(9(/ +7 2) /(9(/

2) 5(%$5 2) 5(%$5

63$&,1* 63$&,1*

+7 2) /(9(/ +7 2) /(9(/


&/($5 67$57 &/($5 67$57
2) 5(%$5 2) 5(%$5
(1' (1'
American Concrete Design American Concrete Design
3-10 Section 3 3-10 Section 3

Table 3.2 Table 3.2


(Actual Output from Design) (Actual Output from Design)
==================================================================== ====================================================================

B E A M N O. 14 D E S I G N R E S U L T S - FLEXURE B E A M N O. 14 D E S I G N R E S U L T S - FLEXURE

LEN - 20.00FT. FY - 60000. FC - 4000. SIZE - 15.00 X 21.00 INCHES LEN - 20.00FT. FY - 60000. FC - 4000. SIZE - 15.00 X 21.00 INCHES

LEVEL HEIGHT BAR INFO FROM TO ANCHOR LEVEL HEIGHT BAR INFO FROM TO ANCHOR
FT. IN. FT. IN. FT. IN. STA END FT. IN. FT. IN. FT. IN. STA END
--------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------------------------

1 0 + 2-5/8 3-NUM.9 2 + 4-5/8 20 + 0-0/0 NO YES 1 0 + 2-5/8 3-NUM.9 2 + 4-5/8 20 + 0-0/0 NO YES
|----------------------------------------------------------------| |----------------------------------------------------------------|
| CRITICAL POS MOMENT= 189.77 KIP-FT AT 12.00 FT, LOAD 1 | | CRITICAL POS MOMENT= 189.77 KIP-FT AT 12.00 FT, LOAD 1 |
| REQD STEEL= 2.48 IN2, ROW=0.0090, ROWMX=0.0214 ROWMN=0.0033 | | REQD STEEL= 2.48 IN2, ROW=0.0090, ROWMX=0.0214 ROWMN=0.0033 |
| MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING= 7.50/ 2.26/ 4.94 INCH | | MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING= 7.50/ 2.26/ 4.94 INCH |
| BASIC/REQD. DEVELOPMENT LENGTH = 37.95/ 31.42 INCH | | BASIC/REQD. DEVELOPMENT LENGTH = 37.95/ 31.42 INCH |
|----------------------------------------------------------------| |----------------------------------------------------------------|

2 1 + 6-1/8 4-NUM.11 0 + 0-0/0 18 +10-0/0 YES NO 2 1 + 6-1/8 4-NUM.11 0 + 0-0/0 18 +10-0/0 YES NO
|----------------------------------------------------------------| |----------------------------------------------------------------|
| CRITICAL NEG MOMENT= 369.86 KIP-FT AT 0.00 FT, LOAD 1 | | CRITICAL NEG MOMENT= 369.86 KIP-FT AT 0.00 FT, LOAD 1 |
| REQD STEEL= 5.47 IN2, ROW=0.0198, ROWMX=0.0214 ROWMN=0.0033 | | REQD STEEL= 5.47 IN2, ROW=0.0198, ROWMX=0.0214 ROWMN=0.0033 |
| MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING= 7.50/ 2.82/ 3.20 INCH | | MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING= 7.50/ 2.82/ 3.20 INCH |
| BASIC/REQD. DEVELOPMENT LENGTH = 59.20/153.91 INCH | | BASIC/REQD. DEVELOPMENT LENGTH = 59.20/153.91 INCH |
|----------------------------------------------------------------| |----------------------------------------------------------------|

3 1 + 6-3/8 3-NUM.6 16 + 8-1/4 20 + 0-0/0 NO YES 3 1 + 6-3/8 3-NUM.6 16 + 8-1/4 20 + 0-0/0 NO YES
|----------------------------------------------------------------| |----------------------------------------------------------------|

| CRITICAL NEG MOMENT= 105.87 KIP-FT AT 20.00 FT, LOAD 1 | | CRITICAL NEG MOMENT= 105.87 KIP-FT AT 20.00 FT, LOAD 1 |
| REQD STEEL= 1.31 IN2, ROW=0.0047, ROWMX=0.0214 ROWMN=0.0033 | | REQD STEEL= 1.31 IN2, ROW=0.0047, ROWMX=0.0214 ROWMN=0.0033 |
| MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING= 7.50/ 1.75/ 5.13 INCH | | MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING= 7.50/ 1.75/ 5.13 INCH |
| BASIC/REQD. DEVELOPMENT LENGTH = 16.70/ 27.75 INCH | | BASIC/REQD. DEVELOPMENT LENGTH = 16.70/ 27.75 INCH |
|----------------------------------------------------------------| |----------------------------------------------------------------|

B E A M N O. 14 D E S I G N R E S U L T S - SHEAR B E A M N O. 14 D E S I G N R E S U L T S - SHEAR

AT START SUPPORT - Vu= 83.90 KIP Vc= 35.10 KIP Vs= 63.61 KIP AT START SUPPORT - Vu= 83.90 KIP Vc= 35.10 KIP Vs= 63.61 KIP
PROVIDE NUM. 4 BARS AT 7.0 IN. C/C FOR 108. IN. PROVIDE NUM. 4 BARS AT 7.0 IN. C/C FOR 108. IN.
AT END SUPPORT - Vu= 57.51 KIP Vc= 35.10 KIP Vs= 32.56 KIP AT END SUPPORT - Vu= 57.51 KIP Vc= 35.10 KIP Vs= 32.56 KIP
PROVIDE NUM. 4 BARS AT 9.3 IN. C/C FOR 84. IN. PROVIDE NUM. 4 BARS AT 9.3 IN. C/C FOR 84. IN.
Section 3 3-11 Section 3 3-11

3.7 Column Design 3.7 Column Design

Columns design in STAAD per the ACI code is performed for axial Columns design in STAAD per the ACI code is performed for axial
force and uniaxial as well as biaxial moments. All active loadings force and uniaxial as well as biaxial moments. All active loadings
are checked to compute reinforcement. The loading which produces are checked to compute reinforcement. The loading which produces
the largest amount of reinforcement is called the critical load. the largest amount of reinforcement is called the critical load.
Column design is done for square, rectangular and circular Column design is done for square, rectangular and circular
sections. For rectangular and circular sections, reinforcement is sections. For rectangular and circular sections, reinforcement is
always assumed to be equally distributed on all faces. This means always assumed to be equally distributed on all faces. This means
that the total number of bars for these sections will always be a that the total number of bars for these sections will always be a
multiple of four (4). If the MMAG parameter is specified, the multiple of four (4). If the MMAG parameter is specified, the
column moments are multiplied by the MMAG value to arrive at column moments are multiplied by the MMAG value to arrive at
the ultimate moments on the column. Since the ACI code no longer the ultimate moments on the column. Since the ACI code no longer
requires any minimum eccentricity conditions to be satisfied, such requires any minimum eccentricity conditions to be satisfied, such
checks are not made. checks are not made.

Method used: Bresler Load Contour Method Method used: Bresler Load Contour Method

Known Values: Pu, Muy, Muz, B, D, Clear cover, Fc, Fy Known Values: Pu, Muy, Muz, B, D, Clear cover, Fc, Fy
Ultimate Strain for concrete : 0.003 Ultimate Strain for concrete : 0.003

Steps involved : Steps involved :

1) Assume some reinforcement. Minimum reinforcement (1%) is a 1) Assume some reinforcement. Minimum reinforcement (1%) is a
good amount to start with. good amount to start with.
2) Find an approximate arrangement of bars for the assumed 2) Find an approximate arrangement of bars for the assumed
reinforcement. reinforcement.
3) Calculate PNMAX = 0.85 Po, where Po is the maximum axial 3) Calculate PNMAX = 0.85 Po, where Po is the maximum axial
load capacity of the section. Ensure that the actual nominal load capacity of the section. Ensure that the actual nominal
load on the column does not exceed PNMAX. If PNMAX is load on the column does not exceed PNMAX. If PNMAX is
less than Pu/PHI, (PHI is the strength reduction factor) less than Pu/PHI, (PHI is the strength reduction factor)
increase the reinforcement and repeat steps 2 and 3. If the increase the reinforcement and repeat steps 2 and 3. If the
reinforcement exceeds 8%, the column cannot be designed with reinforcement exceeds 8%, the column cannot be designed with
its current dimensions. its current dimensions.
4) For the assumed reinforcement, bar arrangement and axial load, 4) For the assumed reinforcement, bar arrangement and axial load,
find the uniaxial moment capacities of the column for the Y find the uniaxial moment capacities of the column for the Y
and the Z axes, independently. These values are referred to as and the Z axes, independently. These values are referred to as
MYCAP and MZCAP respectively. MYCAP and MZCAP respectively.
American Concrete Design American Concrete Design
3-12 Section 3 3-12 Section 3

5) Solve the Interaction equation 5) Solve the Interaction equation


α α α α
 M ny   M   M ny   M 
  + nz  ≤ 1.0   + nz  ≤ 1.0
M    M   
 ycap   M zcap   ycap   M zcap 

where α =1.24 where α =1.24


If the column is subjected to a uniaxial moment, α is chosen as If the column is subjected to a uniaxial moment, α is chosen as
1.0 1.0
6) If the Interaction equation is satisfied, find an arrangement 6) If the Interaction equation is satisfied, find an arrangement
with available bar sizes, find the uniaxial capacities and solve with available bar sizes, find the uniaxial capacities and solve
the interaction equation again. If the equation is satisfied now, the interaction equation again. If the equation is satisfied now,
the reinforcement details are written to the output file. the reinforcement details are written to the output file.
7) If the interaction equation is not satisfied, the assumed 7) If the interaction equation is not satisfied, the assumed
reinforcement is increased (ensuring that it is under 8%) and reinforcement is increased (ensuring that it is under 8%) and
steps 2 to 6 are repeated. steps 2 to 6 are repeated.

Column Interaction Column Interaction


The column interaction values may be obtained by using the design The column interaction values may be obtained by using the design
parameter TRACK 1.0 or TRACK 2.0 for the column member. If a parameter TRACK 1.0 or TRACK 2.0 for the column member. If a
value of 2.0 is used for the TRACK parameter, 12 different Pn-Mn value of 2.0 is used for the TRACK parameter, 12 different Pn-Mn
pairs, each representing a different point on the Pn-Mn curve are pairs, each representing a different point on the Pn-Mn curve are
printed. Each of these points represents one of the several Pn-Mn printed. Each of these points represents one of the several Pn-Mn
combinations that this column is capable of carrying about the combinations that this column is capable of carrying about the
given axis, for the actual reinforcement that the column has been given axis, for the actual reinforcement that the column has been
designed for. In the case of circular columns, the values are for any designed for. In the case of circular columns, the values are for any
of the radial axes. The values printed for the TRACK 1.0 output of the radial axes. The values printed for the TRACK 1.0 output
are: are:

P0 = Maximum purely axial load carrying capacity of the P0 = Maximum purely axial load carrying capacity of the
column (zero moment). column (zero moment).
Pnmax = Maximum allowable axial load on the column (Section Pnmax = Maximum allowable axial load on the column (Section
10.3.5 of ACI 318). 10.3.5 of ACI 318).
P-bal = Axial load capacity at balanced strain condition. P-bal = Axial load capacity at balanced strain condition.
M-bal = Uniaxial moment capacity at balanced strain condition. M-bal = Uniaxial moment capacity at balanced strain condition.
e-bal = M-bal / P-bal = Eccentricity at balanced strain e-bal = M-bal / P-bal = Eccentricity at balanced strain
condition. condition.
M0 = Moment capacity at zero axial load. M0 = Moment capacity at zero axial load.
P-tens = Maximum permissible tensile load on the column. P-tens = Maximum permissible tensile load on the column.
Section 3 3-13 Section 3 3-13
Des. Pn = Pu/PHI where PHI is the Strength Reduction Des. Pn = Pu/PHI where PHI is the Strength Reduction
Factor and Pu is the axial load for the critical load Factor and Pu is the axial load for the critical load
case. case.
Des. Mn = Mu*MMAG/PHI where PHI is the Strength Reduction Des. Mn = Mu*MMAG/PHI where PHI is the Strength Reduction
Factor and Mu is the bending moment for the Factor and Mu is the bending moment for the
appropriate axis for the critical load case. For circular appropriate axis for the critical load case. For circular
columns, columns,
Mu = M2uy + M2uz Mu = M2uy + M2uz
e/h = (Mn/Pn)/h where h is the length of the column. e/h = (Mn/Pn)/h where h is the length of the column.

Column Design Output Column Design Output


The following table illustrates different levels of the column design The following table illustrates different levels of the column design
output. output.

Table 3.3 Table 3.3

The following output is generated without any TRACK The following output is generated without any TRACK
specification. specification.

==================================================================== ====================================================================

C O L U M N N O. 5 D E S I G N R E S U L T S C O L U M N N O. 5 D E S I G N R E S U L T S
FY - 60000 FC - 4000 PSI, SQRE SIZE - 12.00 X 12.00 INCHES, TIED FY - 60000 FC - 4000 PSI, SQRE SIZE - 12.00 X 12.00 INCHES, TIED

AREA OF STEEL REQUIRED = 7.888 SQ. IN. AREA OF STEEL REQUIRED = 7.888 SQ. IN.

BAR CONFIGURATION REINF PCT. LOAD LOCATION PHI BAR CONFIGURATION REINF PCT. LOAD LOCATION PHI
---------------------------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------------

8 - NUMBER 9 5.556 2 STA 0.700 8 - NUMBER 9 5.556 2 STA 0.700


(PROVIDE EQUAL NUMBER OF BARS AT EACH FACE) (PROVIDE EQUAL NUMBER OF BARS AT EACH FACE)

TRACK 1.0 generates the following additional output. TRACK 1.0 generates the following additional output.

COLUMN INTERACTION: MOMENT ABOUT Z -AXIS (KIP-FT) COLUMN INTERACTION: MOMENT ABOUT Z -AXIS (KIP-FT)

-------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------------
P0 Pn max P-bal. M-bal. e-bal.(inch) P0 Pn max P-bal. M-bal. e-bal.(inch)
897.12 717.70 189.56 158.50 10.03 897.12 717.70 189.56 158.50 10.03
M0 P-tens. Des.Pn Des.Mn e/h M0 P-tens. Des.Pn Des.Mn e/h
137.46 -432.00 323.12 9.88 0.003 137.46 -432.00 323.12 9.88 0.003
-------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------------
COLUMN INTERACTION: MOMENT ABOUT Y -AXIS (KIP-FT) COLUMN INTERACTION: MOMENT ABOUT Y -AXIS (KIP-FT)

-------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------------
P0 Pn max P-bal. M-bal. e-bal.(inch) P0 Pn max P-bal. M-bal. e-bal.(inch)
897.12 717.70 189.56 158.50 10.03 897.12 717.70 189.56 158.50 10.03
M0 P-tens. Des.Pn Des.Mn e/h M0 P-tens. Des.Pn Des.Mn e/h
American Concrete Design American Concrete Design
3-14 Section 3 3-14 Section 3
137.46 -432.00 323.12 128.08 0.033 137.46 -432.00 323.12 128.08 0.033
-------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------------

TRACK 2.0 generates the following output in addition to all of the TRACK 2.0 generates the following output in addition to all of the
above. above.

Pn Mn Pn Mn (@ Z ) Pn Mn Pn Mn (@ Z )
| 210.44 166.60 156.52 170.63 | 210.44 166.60 156.52 170.63
P0 |* 202.41 168.67 149.93 169.69 P0 |* 202.41 168.67 149.93 169.69
| * 194.25 169.97 143.69 168.61 | * 194.25 169.97 143.69 168.61
Pn,max|__* 185.95 170.45 137.80 167.44 Pn,max|__* 185.95 170.45 137.80 167.44
| * 178.93 171.48 132.25 166.20 | * 178.93 171.48 132.25 166.20
Pn | * 163.81 171.74 127.39 165.41 Pn | * 163.81 171.74 127.39 165.41
NOMINAL | * Pn Mn Pn Mn (@ Y ) NOMINAL | * Pn Mn Pn Mn (@ Y )
AXIAL | * 210.44 166.60 156.52 170.63 AXIAL | * 210.44 166.60 156.52 170.63
COMPRESSION| * 202.41 168.67 149.93 169.69 COMPRESSION| * 202.41 168.67 149.93 169.69
Pb|-------*Mb 194.25 169.97 143.69 168.61 Pb|-------*Mb 194.25 169.97 143.69 168.61
| * 185.95 170.45 137.80 167.44 | * 185.95 170.45 137.80 167.44
___________|____*_______ 178.93 171.48 132.25 166.20 ___________|____*_______ 178.93 171.48 132.25 166.20
| * M0 Mn, 163.81 171.74 127.39 165.41 | * M0 Mn, 163.81 171.74 127.39 165.41
| * BENDING | * BENDING
P-tens|* MOMENT P-tens|* MOMENT
| |

3.8 Slab/Wall Design 3.8 Slab/Wall Design

Slab and walls are designed per ACI specifications. To design a Slab and walls are designed per ACI specifications. To design a
slab or wall, it must be modeled using finite elements. slab or wall, it must be modeled using finite elements.

Element design will be performed only for the moments MX and Element design will be performed only for the moments MX and
MY at the center of the element. Design will not be performed for MY at the center of the element. Design will not be performed for
FX, FY, FXY, QX, QY or MXY. Also, design is not performed at FX, FY, FXY, QX, QY or MXY. Also, design is not performed at
any other point on the surface of the element. any other point on the surface of the element.

A typical example of element design output is shown in Table 3.4. A typical example of element design output is shown in Table 3.4.
The reinforcement required to resist Mx moment is denoted as The reinforcement required to resist Mx moment is denoted as
longitudinal reinforcement and the reinforcement required to resist longitudinal reinforcement and the reinforcement required to resist
My moment is denoted as transverse reinforcement (Figure 3.1). My moment is denoted as transverse reinforcement (Figure 3.1).
The parameters FYMAIN, FC, and CLB (CLEAR) listed in Table The parameters FYMAIN, FC, and CLB (CLEAR) listed in Table
3.1 are relevant to slab design. Other parameters mentioned in 3.1 are relevant to slab design. Other parameters mentioned in
Table 3.1 are not applicable to slab design. Table 3.1 are not applicable to slab design.
Section 3 3-15 Section 3 3-15
= =

< <

0y 0y

; ;

0x 0x

75$16 75$16

0x 0x
0 0
y y

/21* /21*

Table 3.4 Table 3.4


(Actual Output from Design) (Actual Output from Design)

ELEMENT FORCES FORCE,LENGTH UNITS= KIP FEET ELEMENT FORCES FORCE,LENGTH UNITS= KIP FEET
-------------- --------------
FORCE OR STRESS = FORCE/WIDTH/THICK, MOMENT = FORCE-LENGTH/WIDTH FORCE OR STRESS = FORCE/WIDTH/THICK, MOMENT = FORCE-LENGTH/WIDTH
ELEMENT LOAD QX QY MX MY MXY ELEMENT LOAD QX QY MX MY MXY
FX FY FXY FX FY FXY
13 1 0.00 0.04 0.14 0.06 0.00 13 1 0.00 0.04 0.14 0.06 0.00
6.05 0.76 0.00 6.05 0.76 0.00
TOP : SMAX= 9.35 SMIN= 2.09 TMAX= 3.63 ANGLE= 0.0 TOP : SMAX= 9.35 SMIN= 2.09 TMAX= 3.63 ANGLE= 0.0
BOTT: SMAX= 2.74 SMIN= -0.56 TMAX= 1.65 ANGLE= 0.0 BOTT: SMAX= 2.74 SMIN= -0.56 TMAX= 1.65 ANGLE= 0.0
3 0.00 0.03 0.10 0.04 0.00 3 0.00 0.03 0.10 0.04 0.00
2.63 0.25 1.46 2.63 0.25 1.46
TOP : SMAX= 5.44 SMIN= 0.74 TMAX= 2.35 ANGLE= 18.7 TOP : SMAX= 5.44 SMIN= 0.74 TMAX= 2.35 ANGLE= 18.7
BOTT: SMAX= 1.37 SMIN= -1.81 TMAX= 1.59 ANGLE= 35.5 BOTT: SMAX= 1.37 SMIN= -1.81 TMAX= 1.59 ANGLE= 35.5
ELEMENT DESIGN SUMMARY ELEMENT DESIGN SUMMARY
---------------------- ----------------------
ELEMENT LONG. REINF MOM-X /LOAD TRANS. REINF MOM-Y /LOAD ELEMENT LONG. REINF MOM-X /LOAD TRANS. REINF MOM-Y /LOAD
(SQ.IN/FT) (K-FT/FT) (SQ.IN/FT) (K-FT/FT) (SQ.IN/FT) (K-FT/FT) (SQ.IN/FT) (K-FT/FT)
13 TOP : 0.130 0.14 / 1 0.130 0.06 / 1 13 TOP : 0.130 0.14 / 1 0.130 0.06 / 1
BOTT: 0.000 0.00 / 0 0.000 0.00 / 0 BOTT: 0.000 0.00 / 0 0.000 0.00 / 0
American Concrete Design American Concrete Design
3-16 Section 3 3-16 Section 3
4-1 4-1

Timber Design Timber Design

Section 4 Section 4

4.1 Timber Design 4.1 Timber Design

STAAD Timber design module offers design of Glulam timber STAAD Timber design module offers design of Glulam timber
sections as per AITC Codes (Timber Construction Manual, 3rd. sections as per AITC Codes (Timber Construction Manual, 3rd.
Edition, 1985). It also conforms to the National Design Edition, 1985). It also conforms to the National Design
Specification for Wood Construction and Supplement (NDS) and Specification for Wood Construction and Supplement (NDS) and
building codes like Uniform Building Code (UBC), Basic/National building codes like Uniform Building Code (UBC), Basic/National
Building Code and Standard Building Code. Some of the main Building Code and Standard Building Code. Some of the main
features of the program are: features of the program are:

1. This feature is for Glulam Timber only. 1. This feature is for Glulam Timber only.
2. Code check and design of members as per TCM - AITC. 2. Code check and design of members as per TCM - AITC.
3. Design values for Structural Glued Laminated Timber tables 3. Design values for Structural Glued Laminated Timber tables
are in-built into the program. The program accepts Table no., are in-built into the program. The program accepts Table no.,
Combination and Species specifications as inputs (e.g, 1:16F- Combination and Species specifications as inputs (e.g, 1:16F-
V3-SP/SP) and reads design values from in-built tables. V3-SP/SP) and reads design values from in-built tables.
4. Incorporates all the following Allowable stress modifiers: 4. Incorporates all the following Allowable stress modifiers:
i) Duration of Load Factor i) Duration of Load Factor
ii) Size Factor ii) Size Factor
iii) Form Factor iii) Form Factor
iv) Lateral stability of Beams and Columns iv) Lateral stability of Beams and Columns
v) Moisture Content Factor v) Moisture Content Factor
vi) Temperature and Curvature factors. vi) Temperature and Curvature factors.
The allowable stresses for bending, tension, compression, shear The allowable stresses for bending, tension, compression, shear
and Moduli of elasticities are modified accordingly . and Moduli of elasticities are modified accordingly .
5. Determines slenderness for beams and columns (Short, 5. Determines slenderness for beams and columns (Short,
intermediate and long) and checks for min. eccentricity, lateral intermediate and long) and checks for min. eccentricity, lateral
Timber Design Timber Design
4-2 Section 4 4-2 Section 4

stability, buckling, bending and compression, bending and stability, buckling, bending and compression, bending and
tension and horizontal shear against both axes. tension and horizontal shear against both axes.
6. The output results show sections provided or chosen, actual 6. The output results show sections provided or chosen, actual
and allowable stresses, governing condition and ratios of and allowable stresses, governing condition and ratios of
interaction formulae and the relevant AITC clause nos. etc for interaction formulae and the relevant AITC clause nos. etc for
each individual member. each individual member.

4.2 Design Operations 4.2 Design Operations

Explanation of Terms and Symbols Used in This Section Explanation of Terms and Symbols Used in This Section

Symbols Description Symbols Description

fa Actual compression or tension stress (in PSI). For fa Actual compression or tension stress (in PSI). For
tension, the axial load is divided by net sectional area tension, the axial load is divided by net sectional area
(i.e, NSF x X-area). (i.e, NSF x X-area).
FA Allowable design value for compression or tension (in FA Allowable design value for compression or tension (in
PSI) modified with applicable modifiers or calculated PSI) modified with applicable modifiers or calculated
based on slenderness in case of compression. based on slenderness in case of compression.
f bz , f by Actual bending stresses about local Z and Y axis (in f bz , f by Actual bending stresses about local Z and Y axis (in
PSI). PSI).
FBZ, FBY Allowable design values for bending stresses about FBZ, FBY Allowable design values for bending stresses about
local Z and Y axis (in PSI) modified by the applicable local Z and Y axis (in PSI) modified by the applicable
modifiers. modifiers.
JZ, JY Modifier for P-DELTA effect about the Z and Y axis JZ, JY Modifier for P-DELTA effect about the Z and Y axis
respectively as explained in formula 5-18 of TCM. respectively as explained in formula 5-18 of TCM.
f vz , f vy Actual horizontal shear stresses. f vz , f vy Actual horizontal shear stresses.
FVZ, FVY Allowable horizontal shear stresses. FVZ, FVY Allowable horizontal shear stresses.
VZ, VY Shear in local Z and local Y direction. VZ, VY Shear in local Z and local Y direction.
ZD, YD Depth of section in local Z and Y axis. ZD, YD Depth of section in local Z and Y axis.
EZ, EY Minimum eccentricity along Z and Y axis. EZ, EY Minimum eccentricity along Z and Y axis.
CFZ, CFY CFZ and CFY are values of the size factors in the Z- CFZ, CFY CFZ and CFY are values of the size factors in the Z-
axis and Y-axis respectively. axis and Y-axis respectively.
CLZ, CLY CLZ and CLY represent the factors of lateral stability CLZ, CLY CLZ and CLY represent the factors of lateral stability
for beams about Z-axis and Y-axis respectively. for beams about Z-axis and Y-axis respectively.
RATIO Permissible ratio of the stresses as provided by the RATIO Permissible ratio of the stresses as provided by the
user. The default value is 1. user. The default value is 1.
Section 4 4-3 Section 4 4-3

Combined Bending and Axial Stresses Combined Bending and Axial Stresses

Bending and Axial Tension: Bending and Axial Tension:


The following interaction formulae are checked : The following interaction formulae are checked :

i) f a /FA + f bz /(FBZ x CFZ) + f by /(FBY x CFY) =< RATIO i) f a /FA + f bz /(FBZ x CFZ) + f by /(FBY x CFY) =< RATIO
ii) Lateral stability check with Net compressive stress: ii) Lateral stability check with Net compressive stress:
- f a /FA + f bz /(FBZ x CLZ) + f by /(FBY x CLY) =< RATIO - f a /FA + f bz /(FBZ x CLZ) + f by /(FBY x CLY) =< RATIO

Bending and Axial Compression: Bending and Axial Compression:


i) f a /FA + f bz /(FBZ-JZ x f a ) + f by /(FBY-JY x f a ) =< RATIO i) f a /FA + f bz /(FBZ-JZ x f a ) + f by /(FBY-JY x f a ) =< RATIO

Applicability of the size factor: Applicability of the size factor:


a) When CF < 1.00, a) When CF < 1.00,
if fa > FBZ x (1-CFZ), FBZ is not modified with CFZ. if fa if fa > FBZ x (1-CFZ), FBZ is not modified with CFZ. if fa
> FBY x (1-CFY), FBY is not modified with CFY. > FBY x (1-CFY), FBY is not modified with CFY.

if fa < FBZ x (1-CFZ) FBZ is taken as FBZ x CFZ + fa but if fa < FBZ x (1-CFZ) FBZ is taken as FBZ x CFZ + fa but
shall not exceed FBZ x CLZ shall not exceed FBZ x CLZ

if fa < FBY x (1-CFY) FBY is taken as FBY x CFY + fa if fa < FBY x (1-CFY) FBY is taken as FBY x CFY + fa
but shall not exceed FBY x CLY but shall not exceed FBY x CLY

b) When CF >= 1.00, the effect of CF and CL are cumulative b) When CF >= 1.00, the effect of CF and CL are cumulative
FBZ is taken as FBZ x CFZ x CLZ FBY is taken as FBY x FBZ is taken as FBZ x CFZ x CLZ FBY is taken as FBY x
CFY x CLY CFY x CLY

Min. Eccentricity: Min. Eccentricity:


The program checks against min. eccentricity in following cases: The program checks against min. eccentricity in following cases:

a) The member is a FRAME member and not a truss member a) The member is a FRAME member and not a truss member
and under compression. and under compression.
b) The value of actual axial compressive stress does not b) The value of actual axial compressive stress does not
exceed 30% of the allowable compressive stress. exceed 30% of the allowable compressive stress.
c) The actual moments about both axes are less than moments c) The actual moments about both axes are less than moments
that would be caused due to min. eccentricity. In this that would be caused due to min. eccentricity. In this
Timber Design Timber Design
4-4 Section 4 4-4 Section 4

approach, the moment due to min. eccentricity is taken as approach, the moment due to min. eccentricity is taken as
the compressive load times an eccentricity of 1 in. or 0.1 x the compressive load times an eccentricity of 1 in. or 0.1 x
depth whichever is larger. depth whichever is larger.

In case of min. eccentricity, In case of min. eccentricity,


f bz is taken as f a x (6+1.5 x JZ)/(EZ/ZD) f by is taken as f a x (6+1.5 f bz is taken as f a x (6+1.5 x JZ)/(EZ/ZD) f by is taken as f a x (6+1.5
x JY)/ (EY/YD) x JY)/ (EY/YD)
the following conditions are checked : the following conditions are checked :
f a /FA + f bz /(FBZ-JZ x f a ) =< RATIO and f a /FA + f by /(FBY-JY x f a /FA + f bz /(FBZ-JZ x f a ) =< RATIO and f a /FA + f by /(FBY-JY x
f a ) =< RATIO f a ) =< RATIO

Shear Stresses: Shear Stresses:


Horizontal stresses are calculated and checked against allowable Horizontal stresses are calculated and checked against allowable
values: values:

f vz = 3 x VY /(2 x Area x NSF) =< FVZ/f vy = 3 x VZ /(2 x Area x f vz = 3 x VY /(2 x Area x NSF) =< FVZ/f vy = 3 x VZ /(2 x Area x
NSF) =< FVY NSF) =< FVY

4.3 Input Specification 4.3 Input Specification

A typical set of input commands for STAAD TIMBER DESIGN is A typical set of input commands for STAAD TIMBER DESIGN is
listed below: listed below:

81,7 .,3 ,1&+ 81,7 .,3 ,1&+


3$5$0(7(5 3$5$0(7(5
&2'( 7,0%(5 &2'( 7,0%(5
*/8/$0 )9')') 0(0%  72  */8/$0 )9')') 0(0%  72 
*/8/$0 )(6363 0(0%  72  */8/$0 )(6363 0(0%  72 
*/8/$0 ') 0(0%  72  */8/$0 ') 0(0%  72 
/$0,1  /<  0(0%    72  /$0,1  /<  0(0%    72 
/=  0(0%  72      72  /=  0(0%  72      72 
/8=  $// /8=  $//
/8<  $// /8<  $//
:(7  $// :(7  $//
&'7  &'7 
16)  16) 
%($0  $// %($0  $//
Section 4 4-5 Section 4 4-5

&+(&. &2'(  72  &+(&. &2'(  72 


6(/(&7 0(0%  72  6(/(&7 0(0%  72 

Input Commands and Parameters Explained Input Commands and Parameters Explained
Specify PARAMETER and then CODE TIMBER to start TIMBER Specify PARAMETER and then CODE TIMBER to start TIMBER
DESIGN before specifying the input parameters. The user must DESIGN before specifying the input parameters. The user must
provide the timber grade (GLULAM GRADE) for each member he provide the timber grade (GLULAM GRADE) for each member he
intends to design. The parameters can be specified for all or intends to design. The parameters can be specified for all or
specified list of members. If a parameter is not specified, the specified list of members. If a parameter is not specified, the
default value is assigned to it. See following INPUT default value is assigned to it. See following INPUT
PARAMETERS LIST TABLE for description and default values of PARAMETERS LIST TABLE for description and default values of
the parameters. the parameters.

Glulam Grade & Allowable Stresses from Table Glulam Grade & Allowable Stresses from Table
The allowable stresses for GLULAM members are read in from The allowable stresses for GLULAM members are read in from
Table-1 and Table-2 of AITC for design values for Structural Table-1 and Table-2 of AITC for design values for Structural
Glued Laminated Timber. The structural members are to be Glued Laminated Timber. The structural members are to be
specified in the following manner: specified in the following manner:

Table - 1 Members : Table - 1 Members :

Table Combination Species Table Combination Species


No. Symbol (Outer/core No. Symbol (Outer/core
Lamination) Lamination)

GLULAM 1 : 16F-V3-DF/DF GLULAM 1 : 16F-V3-DF/DF


Timber Design Timber Design
4-6 Section 4 4-6 Section 4

Table - 2 Members : Table - 2 Members :

Table Combination Species Table Combination Species


No. No. No. No.

GLULAM 2 : 3 - DF GLULAM 2 : 3 - DF

For TABLE-2 members, the applicable stress values are selected For TABLE-2 members, the applicable stress values are selected
based on the depth and the number of laminations. Please note here based on the depth and the number of laminations. Please note here
that lamination thickness (in inch) can be provided by the user and that lamination thickness (in inch) can be provided by the user and
in case it is not provided the default is taken as 1.5 inch. Usually, it in case it is not provided the default is taken as 1.5 inch. Usually, it
is either 1.5 inch or 1.375 inch. is either 1.5 inch or 1.375 inch.

4.4 Code Checking 4.4 Code Checking

The CHECK CODE command enables the user to check the The CHECK CODE command enables the user to check the
adequacy of the size ( YD X ZD ) provided in the MEMBER adequacy of the size ( YD X ZD ) provided in the MEMBER
PROPERTIES for the most critical forces and moments. The PROPERTIES for the most critical forces and moments. The
program prints whether the member has PASSed or FAILed, the program prints whether the member has PASSed or FAILed, the
critical conditions and the value of the ratio. critical conditions and the value of the ratio.

4.5 Orientation of Lamination 4.5 Orientation of Lamination

Laminations are always assumed to lie along the local Z-plane of Laminations are always assumed to lie along the local Z-plane of
the member. The user may please note that in MEMBER the member. The user may please note that in MEMBER
PROPERTIES section, YD always represents the depth of the PROPERTIES section, YD always represents the depth of the
section across the grain and ZD represents the width along the section across the grain and ZD represents the width along the
grain. grain.
Section 4 4-7 Section 4 4-7

< <
= =

<' = =' < <' = =' <

<' <'
=' ='

4.6 Member Selection 4.6 Member Selection

The SELECT MEMBER command starts with the min. permissible The SELECT MEMBER command starts with the min. permissible
depth (or min. depth provided thru DMIN parameter) and checks depth (or min. depth provided thru DMIN parameter) and checks
the code. If the member fails with this depth, the thickness is the code. If the member fails with this depth, the thickness is
increased by one lamination thickness and the codal requirements increased by one lamination thickness and the codal requirements
are checked again. The process is continued till the section passes are checked again. The process is continued till the section passes
all the codal requirements. This ensures the least weight section for all the codal requirements. This ensures the least weight section for
the member. If the depth of the section reaches max. allowable or the member. If the depth of the section reaches max. allowable or
available depth and the member still fails, the user can have the available depth and the member still fails, the user can have the
following options for redesign: following options for redesign:

i) Change the width or increase the max. allowable depth i) Change the width or increase the max. allowable depth
(DMAX) (DMAX)
ii) Change the timber grade ii) Change the timber grade
iii) Change the design parameters. iii) Change the design parameters.

7DEOH7LPEHU'HVLJQ3DUDPHWHUV 7DEOH7LPEHU'HVLJQ3DUDPHWHUV
3DUDPHWHU 'HIDXOW 'HVFULSWLRQ 3DUDPHWHU 'HIDXOW 'HVFULSWLRQ
1DPH 9DOXH 1DPH 9DOXH

/= /HQJWK RI (IIHFWLYH OHQJWK RI WKH FROXPQ /= /HQJWK RI (IIHFWLYH OHQJWK RI WKH FROXPQ
WKH 0HPEHU / LQ ]D[LV WKH 0HPEHU / LQ ]D[LV

/< '2 6DPH DV DERYH LQ \D[LV /< '2 6DPH DV DERYH LQ \D[LV

/8=  / 8QVXSSRUWHG HIIHFWLYH OHQJWK /8=  / 8QVXSSRUWHG HIIHFWLYH OHQJWK
IRU EHDP LQ ] IRU EHDP LQ ]

/8<  / 8QVXSSRUWHG HIIHFWLYH OHQJWK /8<  / 8QVXSSRUWHG HIIHFWLYH OHQJWK
IRU EHDP LQ \ IRU EHDP LQ \
Timber Design Timber Design
4-8 Section 4 4-8 Section 4

7DEOH7LPEHU'HVLJQ3DUDPHWHUV&RQW 7DEOH7LPEHU'HVLJQ3DUDPHWHUV&RQW
3DUDPHWHU 'HIDXOW 'HVFULSWLRQ 3DUDPHWHU 'HIDXOW 'HVFULSWLRQ
1DPH 9DOXH 1DPH 9DOXH

:(7    GU\ FRQGLWLRQ :(7    GU\ FRQGLWLRQ
  ZHW FRQGLWLRQ   ZHW FRQGLWLRQ
ZHW XVH IDFWRUV DUH LQEXLOW ZHW XVH IDFWRUV DUH LQEXLOW

16)  1HW VHFWLRQ IDFWRU IRU WHQVLRQ 16)  1HW VHFWLRQ IDFWRU IRU WHQVLRQ
PHPEHUV ERWK VKHDU DQG PHPEHUV ERWK VKHDU DQG
WHQVLRQ VWUHVVHV DUH EDVHG WHQVLRQ VWUHVVHV DUH EDVHG
RQ VHFWLRQDO DUHD [ QVI RQ VHFWLRQDO DUHD [ QVI

&'7  'XUDWLRQ RI ORDG IDFWRU &'7  'XUDWLRQ RI ORDG IDFWRU

&6)  )RUP IDFWRU &6)  )RUP IDFWRU

&70  7HPS IDFWRU &70  7HPS IDFWRU

&&5  &XUYDWXUH IDFWRU &&5  &XUYDWXUH IDFWRU

5$7,2  3HUPLVVLEOH UDWLR RI DFWXDO WR 5$7,2  3HUPLVVLEOH UDWLR RI DFWXDO WR
DOORZDEOH VWUHVVHV DOORZDEOH VWUHVVHV

/$0,1$7,21  LQFK 7KLFNQHVV RI ODPLQDWLRQ LQ /$0,1$7,21  LQFK 7KLFNQHVV RI ODPLQDWLRQ LQ
LQFK  RU  LQFK  RU 

%($0   GHVLJQ IRU HQG IRUFHV RU %($0   GHVLJQ IRU HQG IRUFHV RU
DW ORFDWLRQV VSHFLILHG E\ DW ORFDWLRQV VSHFLILHG E\
VHFWLRQ FRPPDQG VHFWLRQ FRPPDQG
 FDOFXODWH PRPHQWV DW  FDOFXODWH PRPHQWV DW
WHQWK DORQJ WKH EHDP WHQWK DORQJ WKH EHDP
DQG XVH WKH PD[ IRU DQG XVH WKH PD[ IRU
GHVLJQ 'HIDXOW GHVLJQ 'HIDXOW

Note: Note:
i. In case the column buckling is restrained in Y and/or Z i. In case the column buckling is restrained in Y and/or Z
direction provide LY and/or LZ as zero(s). Similarly, lateral direction provide LY and/or LZ as zero(s). Similarly, lateral
beam buckling in Y and/or Z direction could be restrained by beam buckling in Y and/or Z direction could be restrained by
providing LUY and/or LUZ as zeros. providing LUY and/or LUZ as zeros.
ii. Size Factor, lateral stability and moisture content factors and ii. Size Factor, lateral stability and moisture content factors and
few others are either calculated or read from tables within the few others are either calculated or read from tables within the
program. program.
Section 4 4-9 Section 4 4-9

SAMPLE OUTPUT RESULTS SAMPLE OUTPUT RESULTS

STAAD CODE CHECKING - (AITC) STAAD CODE CHECKING - (AITC)


*********************** ***********************

ALL UNITS ARE - KIP FEET (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) ALL UNITS ARE - KIP FEET (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)

MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/
FX MY MZ LOCATION FX MY MZ LOCATION
======================================================================= =======================================================================

2 PR 8.000X15.000 FAIL TCM:CL. 5-18 1.205 2 2 PR 8.000X15.000 FAIL TCM:CL. 5-18 1.205 2
2.24 C 0.00 45.38 0.0000 2.24 C 0.00 45.38 0.0000
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------| |--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| MEMB- 2 GLULAM GRADE:16F-V1-DF/WW LAM.=1.500 UNITS: POUND-INCH | | MEMB- 2 GLULAM GRADE:16F-V1-DF/WW LAM.=1.500 UNITS: POUND-INCH |
| LZ=240.00 LY=240.00 LUZ=240.00 LUY=240.00 JZ =0.370 JY =1.000 CDT=1.000 | | LZ=240.00 LY=240.00 LUZ=240.00 LUY=240.00 JZ =0.370 JY =1.000 CDT=1.000 |
| CSF=1.00 WET=0.0 CCR=1.00 CTM=1.00 CFZ=0.98 CFY=1.00 CLZ=1.000 CLY=1.000 | | CSF=1.00 WET=0.0 CCR=1.00 CTM=1.00 CFZ=0.98 CFY=1.00 CLZ=1.000 CLY=1.000 |
|ACTUAL STRESSES: fa= 18.67,fbz=1815.06,fby= 0.00,fvz= 49.37,fvy= 0.00 | |ACTUAL STRESSES: fa= 18.67,fbz=1815.06,fby= 0.00,fvz= 49.37,fvy= 0.00 |
|ALLOW. STRESSES: FA= 366.67,FBZ=1579.49,FBY= 950.00,FVZ=140.00,FVY=130.00 | |ALLOW. STRESSES: FA= 366.67,FBZ=1579.49,FBY= 950.00,FVZ=140.00,FVY=130.00 |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------| |--------------------------------------------------------------------------|

3 PR 8.000X15.000 FAIL TCM:CL. 5-18 1.239 2 3 PR 8.000X15.000 FAIL TCM:CL. 5-18 1.239 2
10.64 C 0.00 43.94 0.0000 10.64 C 0.00 43.94 0.0000
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------| |--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| MEMB- 3 GLULAM GRADE:16F-V1-DF/WW LAM.=1.500 UNITS: POUND-INCH | | MEMB- 3 GLULAM GRADE:16F-V1-DF/WW LAM.=1.500 UNITS: POUND-INCH |
| LZ=180.00 LY=180.00 LUZ=180.00 LUY=180.00 JZ =0.074 JY =0.997 CDT=1.000 | | LZ=180.00 LY=180.00 LUZ=180.00 LUY=180.00 JZ =0.074 JY =0.997 CDT=1.000 |
| CSF=1.00 WET=0.0 CCR=1.00 CTM=1.00 CFZ=0.98 CFY=1.00 CLZ=1.000 CLY=1.000 | | CSF=1.00 WET=0.0 CCR=1.00 CTM=1.00 CFZ=0.98 CFY=1.00 CLZ=1.000 CLY=1.000 |
|ACTUAL STRESSES: fa= 88.68,fbz=1757.49,fby= 0.00,fvz= 36.61,fvy= 0.00 | |ACTUAL STRESSES: fa= 88.68,fbz=1757.49,fby= 0.00,fvz= 36.61,fvy= 0.00 |
|ALLOW. STRESSES: FA= 652.22,FBZ=1600.00,FBY= 950.00,FVZ=140.00,FVY=130.00 | |ALLOW. STRESSES: FA= 652.22,FBZ=1600.00,FBY= 950.00,FVZ=140.00,FVY=130.00 |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------| |--------------------------------------------------------------------------|

STAAD MEMBER SELECTION - (AITC) STAAD MEMBER SELECTION - (AITC)


************************** **************************

ALL UNITS ARE - KIP FEET (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) ALL UNITS ARE - KIP FEET (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)

MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/
FX MY MZ LOCATION FX MY MZ LOCATION
======================================================================= =======================================================================

2 PR 8.000X18.000 PASS TCM:CL. 5-18 0.860 2 2 PR 8.000X18.000 PASS TCM:CL. 5-18 0.860 2
2.24 C 0.00 45.38 0.0000 2.24 C 0.00 45.38 0.0000
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------| |--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| MEMB- 2 GLULAM GRADE:16F-V1-DF/WW LAM.=1.500 UNITS: POUND-INCH | | MEMB- 2 GLULAM GRADE:16F-V1-DF/WW LAM.=1.500 UNITS: POUND-INCH |
| LZ=240.00 LY=240.00 LUZ=240.00 LUY=240.00 JZ =0.173 JY =1.000 CDT=1.000 | | LZ=240.00 LY=240.00 LUZ=240.00 LUY=240.00 JZ =0.173 JY =1.000 CDT=1.000 |
| CSF=1.00 WET=0.0 CCR=1.00 CTM=1.00 CFZ=0.96 CFY=1.00 CLZ=1.000 CLY=1.000 | | CSF=1.00 WET=0.0 CCR=1.00 CTM=1.00 CFZ=0.96 CFY=1.00 CLZ=1.000 CLY=1.000 |
|ACTUAL STRESSES: fa= 15.56,fbz=1260.46,fby= 0.00,fvz= 41.14,fvy= 0.00 | |ACTUAL STRESSES: fa= 15.56,fbz=1260.46,fby= 0.00,fvz= 41.14,fvy= 0.00 |
|ALLOW. STRESSES: FA= 366.67,FBZ=1545.08,FBY= 950.00,FVZ=140.00,FVY=130.00 | |ALLOW. STRESSES: FA= 366.67,FBZ=1545.08,FBY= 950.00,FVZ=140.00,FVY=130.00 |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------| |--------------------------------------------------------------------------|

3 PR 8.000X18.000 PASS TCM:CL. 5-18 0.876 2 3 PR 8.000X18.000 PASS TCM:CL. 5-18 0.876 2
10.64 C 0.00 43.94 0.0000 10.64 C 0.00 43.94 0.0000
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------| |--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| MEMB- 3 GLULAM GRADE:16F-V1-DF/WW LAM.=1.500 UNITS: POUND-INCH | | MEMB- 3 GLULAM GRADE:16F-V1-DF/WW LAM.=1.500 UNITS: POUND-INCH |
| LZ=180.00 LY=180.00 LUZ=180.00 LUY=180.00 JZ =0.000 JY =0.997 CDT=1.000 | | LZ=180.00 LY=180.00 LUZ=180.00 LUY=180.00 JZ =0.000 JY =0.997 CDT=1.000 |
| CSF=1.00 WET=0.0 CCR=1.00 CTM=1.00 CFZ=0.96 CFY=1.00 CLZ=1.000 CLY=1.000 | | CSF=1.00 WET=0.0 CCR=1.00 CTM=1.00 CFZ=0.96 CFY=1.00 CLZ=1.000 CLY=1.000 |
|ACTUAL STRESSES: fa= 73.90,fbz=1220.48,fby= 0.00,fvz= 30.51,fvy= 0.00 | |ACTUAL STRESSES: fa= 73.90,fbz=1220.48,fby= 0.00,fvz= 30.51,fvy= 0.00 |
|ALLOW. STRESSES: FA= 652.22,FBZ=1600.00,FBY= 950.00,FVZ=140.00,FVY=130.00 | |ALLOW. STRESSES: FA= 652.22,FBZ=1600.00,FBY= 950.00,FVZ=140.00,FVY=130.00 |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------| |--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
Timber Design Timber Design
4-10 Section 4 4-10 Section 4

Output Results and Parameters Explained Output Results and Parameters Explained

For CODE CHECKING and/or MEMBER SELECTION the output For CODE CHECKING and/or MEMBER SELECTION the output
results are printed as shown in the previous section. The items are results are printed as shown in the previous section. The items are
explained as follows: explained as follows:

a) MEMBER refers to the member number for which the design is a) MEMBER refers to the member number for which the design is
performed. performed.
b) TABLE refers to the size of the PRISMATIC section (B X D or b) TABLE refers to the size of the PRISMATIC section (B X D or
ZD X YD). ZD X YD).
c) RESULT prints whether the member has PASSed or FAILed . c) RESULT prints whether the member has PASSed or FAILed .
d) CRITICAL COND refers to the CLAUSE or FORMULA NO. d) CRITICAL COND refers to the CLAUSE or FORMULA NO.
from the TIMBER CONSTRUCTION MANUAL (3rd. Edition, from the TIMBER CONSTRUCTION MANUAL (3rd. Edition,
AITC-1985) which governed the design. See following table: AITC-1985) which governed the design. See following table:

Critical Governing Criteria Critical Governing Criteria


Condition Condition
CLAUSE 5-19 Axial Compression and Bending with CLAUSE 5-19 Axial Compression and Bending with
MINIMUM ECCENTRICITY. MINIMUM ECCENTRICITY.
CLAUSE 5-18 Axial Compression and Bending CLAUSE 5-18 Axial Compression and Bending
CLAUSE 5-42 Axial Tension and Bending CLAUSE 5-42 Axial Tension and Bending
CLAUSE 5-24 Horizontal Shear CLAUSE 5-24 Horizontal Shear
CLAUSE 5-40 Lateral stability for net compressive stress CLAUSE 5-40 Lateral stability for net compressive stress
in case of Tension and Bending. in case of Tension and Bending.

e) RATIO prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable e) RATIO prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable
stresses for the critical condition. This ratio is usually the stresses for the critical condition. This ratio is usually the
cumulative ratio of stresses in the interaction formula. In case cumulative ratio of stresses in the interaction formula. In case
of shear governing the design, it means the ratio of the actual of shear governing the design, it means the ratio of the actual
shear stress to allowable shear stress. If this value exceeds the shear stress to allowable shear stress. If this value exceeds the
allowable ratio (default 1.0) the member is FAILed. allowable ratio (default 1.0) the member is FAILed.
f) LOADING provides the load case number that governed. f) LOADING provides the load case number that governed.
g) FX, MY and MZ provide the design axial force, moment in g) FX, MY and MZ provide the design axial force, moment in
local Y axes and moment in local Z axes respectively. FX value local Y axes and moment in local Z axes respectively. FX value
is followed by a letter C or T to denote COMPRESSION or is followed by a letter C or T to denote COMPRESSION or
TENSION. TENSION.
Section 4 4-11 Section 4 4-11
h) LOCATION specifies the actual distance from the start of h) LOCATION specifies the actual distance from the start of
the member to the section where design forces govern in case the member to the section where design forces govern in case
BEAM command or SECTION command is specified. BEAM command or SECTION command is specified.

OUTPUT parameters that appear within the box are explained as OUTPUT parameters that appear within the box are explained as
follows: follows:

a) MEMB refers to the same member number for which the design a) MEMB refers to the same member number for which the design
is performed. is performed.
b) GLULAM GRADE refers to the grade of the timber. b) GLULAM GRADE refers to the grade of the timber.
c) LAM refers to lamination thickness provided in the input or c) LAM refers to lamination thickness provided in the input or
assumed by the program. See INPUT PARAMETERS section. assumed by the program. See INPUT PARAMETERS section.
d) LZ, LY, LUZ and LUY are the effective lengths as provided or d) LZ, LY, LUZ and LUY are the effective lengths as provided or
calculated. See INPUT PARAMETERS section. calculated. See INPUT PARAMETERS section.
e) JZ and JY are the modifiers for the P-DELTA effect about Z- e) JZ and JY are the modifiers for the P-DELTA effect about Z-
axis and Y-axis respectively. These are calculated by the axis and Y-axis respectively. These are calculated by the
program. program.
f) CDT, CSF, WET, CCR, CTM are the allowable stress f) CDT, CSF, WET, CCR, CTM are the allowable stress
modifiers explained in the INPUT PARAMETERS section. modifiers explained in the INPUT PARAMETERS section.
g) CFZ and CFY are values of the size factors in the Z-axis and g) CFZ and CFY are values of the size factors in the Z-axis and
Y-axis respectively. CLZ and CLY represent the factors of Y-axis respectively. CLZ and CLY represent the factors of
lateral stability for beams about Z-axis and Y-axis respectively. lateral stability for beams about Z-axis and Y-axis respectively.
These values are printed to help the user see the intermediate These values are printed to help the user see the intermediate
design values and re-check the design calculations. design values and re-check the design calculations.
h) f a , f bz , f by , f vz and f vy are the actual axial stress, bending h) f a , f bz , f by , f vz and f vy are the actual axial stress, bending
stresses about Z and Y axes and horizontal shear stresses about stresses about Z and Y axes and horizontal shear stresses about
Z and Y axes respectively. If the bending moments about both Z and Y axes respectively. If the bending moments about both
axes are less then the eccentric moments based on min. axes are less then the eccentric moments based on min.
eccentricity then bending stresses are calculated based on the eccentricity then bending stresses are calculated based on the
min. eccentricity . Refer DESIGN OPERATIONS section for min. eccentricity . Refer DESIGN OPERATIONS section for
details. details.
i) FA, FBZ, FBY, FVZ and FVY are the final allowable axial, i) FA, FBZ, FBY, FVZ and FVY are the final allowable axial,
bending (Z and Y axes) and horizontal shear (Z and Y axes) bending (Z and Y axes) and horizontal shear (Z and Y axes)
stresses. Refer DESIGN OPERATIONS section for details. stresses. Refer DESIGN OPERATIONS section for details.
Timber Design Timber Design
4-12 Section 4 4-12 Section 4
5-1 5-1

STAAD Commands and STAAD Commands and


Input Instructions Input Instructions

Section 5 Section 5
This section of the manual describes in detail various commands This section of the manual describes in detail various commands
and related instructions for STAAD. The user utilizes a command and related instructions for STAAD. The user utilizes a command
language format to communicate instructions to the program. Each language format to communicate instructions to the program. Each
of these commands either supplies some data to the program or of these commands either supplies some data to the program or
instructs it to perform some calculations using the data already instructs it to perform some calculations using the data already
specified. The command language format and conventions are specified. The command language format and conventions are
described in Section 5.1. This is followed by a description of the described in Section 5.1. This is followed by a description of the
available commands. available commands.

Although the STAAD input can be created through the Modeling Although the STAAD input can be created through the Modeling
mode, it is very important to understand the command language. mode, it is very important to understand the command language.
With the knowledge of this language, it is easy to understand the With the knowledge of this language, it is easy to understand the
problem and add or comment data as necessary. The general problem and add or comment data as necessary. The general
sequence in which the commands should appear in an input file sequence in which the commands should appear in an input file
should ideally follow the same sequence in which they are should ideally follow the same sequence in which they are
presented in this section. The commands are executed in the presented in this section. The commands are executed in the
sequence entered. Obviously then the data needed for proper sequence entered. Obviously then the data needed for proper
execution of a command must precede the command (e.g. Print execution of a command must precede the command (e.g. Print
results after Perform Analysis). Otherwise, the commands can be results after Perform Analysis). Otherwise, the commands can be
provided in any order with the following exceptions. provided in any order with the following exceptions.

i) All design related data can be provided only after the analysis i) All design related data can be provided only after the analysis
command. command.
ii) All load cases and load combinations must be provided ii) All load cases and load combinations must be provided
together, except in a case where the CHANGE and RESTORE together, except in a case where the CHANGE and RESTORE
commands are used. Additional load cases can be provided in commands are used. Additional load cases can be provided in
the latter part of input. the latter part of input.
All input data provided is stored by the program. Data can be All input data provided is stored by the program. Data can be
added, deleted or modified within an existing data file. added, deleted or modified within an existing data file.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-2 Section 5 5-2 Section 5

Input Instructions Input Instructions

5.1 Command Language Conventions 5.1 Command Language Conventions

This section describes the command language used in STAAD. This section describes the command language used in STAAD.
First, the various elements of the language are discussed and then First, the various elements of the language are discussed and then
the command format is described in detail. the command format is described in detail.
Section 5 5-3 Section 5 5-3

5.1.1 Elements of The Commands 5.1.1 Elements of The Commands


a) Integer Numbers: Integer numbers are whole numbers written a) Integer Numbers: Integer numbers are whole numbers written
without a decimal point. These numbers are designated as i 1 , without a decimal point. These numbers are designated as i 1 ,
i 2 , etc., and should not contain any decimal point. Signs (+ or - i 2 , etc., and should not contain any decimal point. Signs (+ or -
) are permitted in front of these numbers. If the sign is omitted, ) are permitted in front of these numbers. If the sign is omitted,
it is assumed to be positive (+). it is assumed to be positive (+).

b) Floating Point Numbers: These are real numbers which may b) Floating Point Numbers: These are real numbers which may
contain a decimal portion. These numbers are designated as f 1 , contain a decimal portion. These numbers are designated as f 1 ,
f 2 ... etc.. Values may have a decimal point and/or exponent. f 2 ... etc.. Values may have a decimal point and/or exponent.
When specifying numbers with magnitude less than 1/100, it is When specifying numbers with magnitude less than 1/100, it is
advisable to use the E format to avoid precision related errors. advisable to use the E format to avoid precision related errors.
Limit these to 16 characters. Limit these to 16 characters.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

       


( ( ( (
HWF HWF

When the sign is omitted, it is assumed to be positive (+). Also When the sign is omitted, it is assumed to be positive (+). Also
note that the decimal point may be omitted, if the decimal note that the decimal point may be omitted, if the decimal
portion of the number is zero. portion of the number is zero.

c) Alphanumeric: These are characters, which are used to c) Alphanumeric: These are characters, which are used to
construct the names for data, titles or commands. Alphabetic construct the names for data, titles or commands. Alphabetic
characters may be input in upper or lower case letters. No characters may be input in upper or lower case letters. No
quotation marks are needed to enclose them. quotation marks are needed to enclose them.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

0(0%(5 3523(57,(6 0(0%(5 3523(57,(6


 72  7$%/( 67 :;  72  7$%/( 67 :;
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-4 Section 5 5-4 Section 5

d) Repetitive Data: Repetitive numerical data may be provided d) Repetitive Data: Repetitive numerical data may be provided
by using the following format: by using the following format:

n*f n*f
where n = number of times data has to be repeated where n = number of times data has to be repeated
f = numeric data, integer and floating point f = numeric data, integer and floating point

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

-2,17 &225',1$7(6 -2,17 &225',1$7(6


     

This joint coordinate specification is same as: This joint coordinate specification is same as:

       
Section 5 5-5 Section 5 5-5

5.1.2 Command Formats 5.1.2 Command Formats


a) Free-Format Input: All input to STAAD is in free-format a) Free-Format Input: All input to STAAD is in free-format
style. Input data items should be separated by blank spaces style. Input data items should be separated by blank spaces
from the other input data items. Quotation marks are never from the other input data items. Quotation marks are never
needed to separate any alphabetic words such as data, needed to separate any alphabetic words such as data,
commands or titles. Limit a data item to 16 characters. commands or titles. Limit a data item to 16 characters.

b) Commenting Input: For documentation of a STAAD data file, b) Commenting Input: For documentation of a STAAD data file,
the facility to provide comments is available. Comments can be the facility to provide comments is available. Comments can be
included by providing an asterisk (*) mark as the first non- included by providing an asterisk (*) mark as the first non-
blank character in any line. The line with the comment is blank character in any line. The line with the comment is
"echoed" in the output file but not processed by the program. "echoed" in the output file but not processed by the program.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

-2,17 /2$' -2,17 /2$'


7+( )2//2:,1* ,6 $1 (48,30(17 /2$' 7+( )2//2:,1* ,6 $1 (48,30(17 /2$'
   )<     )< 
HWF HWF

c) Meaning of Underlining in the Manual: Exact command c) Meaning of Underlining in the Manual: Exact command
formats are described in the latter part of this section. Many formats are described in the latter part of this section. Many
words in the commands and data may be abbreviated. The full words in the commands and data may be abbreviated. The full
word intended is given in the command description with the word intended is given in the command description with the
portion actually required (the abbreviation) underlined. portion actually required (the abbreviation) underlined.

For example, if the word MEMBER is used in a command, only For example, if the word MEMBER is used in a command, only
the portion MEMB need be input. It is clearer for others the portion MEMB need be input. It is clearer for others
reading the output if the entire word is used, but an reading the output if the entire word is used, but an
experienced user may desire to use the abbreviations. experienced user may desire to use the abbreviations.

d) Meaning of Braces and Parenthesis: In some command d) Meaning of Braces and Parenthesis: In some command
formats, braces enclose a number of choices, which are formats, braces enclose a number of choices, which are
arranged vertically. One and only one of the choices can be arranged vertically. One and only one of the choices can be
selected. However, several of the listed choices may be selected. However, several of the listed choices may be
selected if an asterisk (*) mark is located outside the braces. selected if an asterisk (*) mark is located outside the braces.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-6 Section 5 5-6 Section 5
([DPSOH ([DPSOH

 ;<   ;< 
 <=   <= 
 ;=   ;= 

In the above example, the user must make a choice of XY or In the above example, the user must make a choice of XY or
YZ or XZ. YZ or XZ.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

 );   ); 
 )<   )< 
 )=   )= 

Here the user can choose one or all of the listing (FX, FY and FZ) Here the user can choose one or all of the listing (FX, FY and FZ)
in any order. Parentheses, ( ), enclosing a portion of a command in any order. Parentheses, ( ), enclosing a portion of a command
indicate that the enclosed portion is optional. The presence or indicate that the enclosed portion is optional. The presence or
absence of this portion affects the meaning of the command, as is absence of this portion affects the meaning of the command, as is
explained in the description of the particular command. explained in the description of the particular command.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

35,17 0(0%(5 )25&(6 35,17 0(0%(5 )25&(6


3(5)250 $1$/<6,6 35,17 /2$' '$7$ 3(5)250 $1$/<6,6 35,17 /2$' '$7$

In the first line, the word MEMBER may be omitted with no In the first line, the word MEMBER may be omitted with no
change of the meaning of the command. In the second line, change of the meaning of the command. In the second line,

35,17 /2$' '$7$ 35,17 /2$' '$7$

command may also be omitted, in which case the load data will not command may also be omitted, in which case the load data will not
be printed. be printed.

e) Multiple Data Separator: Multiple data can be provided on a e) Multiple Data Separator: Multiple data can be provided on a
single line, if they are separated by a semicolon (;) character. single line, if they are separated by a semicolon (;) character.
Section 5 5-7 Section 5 5-7
One restriction is that a semicolon can not separate One restriction is that a semicolon can not separate
consecutive commands. They must appear on separate lines. consecutive commands. They must appear on separate lines.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

0(0%(5 ,1&,'(1&(6 0(0%(5 ,1&,'(1&(6


                 
HWF HWF
3RVVLEOH (UURU 3RVVLEOH (UURU
35,17 )25&(6 35,17 675(66(6 35,17 )25&(6 35,17 675(66(6

In the above case, only the PRINT FORCES command is In the above case, only the PRINT FORCES command is
processed and the PRINT STRESSES command is ignored. processed and the PRINT STRESSES command is ignored.

f) Listing Data: In some STAAD command descriptions, the f) Listing Data: In some STAAD command descriptions, the
word "list" is used to identify a list of joints, word "list" is used to identify a list of joints,
members/elements or loading cases. The format of a list can be members/elements or loading cases. The format of a list can be
defined as follows: defined as follows:

 L 1  L 2  L 3    L 1  L 2  L 3  
OLVW  L 1 72 L 2 %< L 3  OLVW  L 1 72 L 2 %< L 3 
 ; RU < RU =   ; RU < RU = 

TO means all integers from the first (i1 ) to the second (i 2 ) TO means all integers from the first (i1 ) to the second (i 2 )
inclusive. BY means that the numbers are incremented by an inclusive. BY means that the numbers are incremented by an
amount equal to the third data item (i 3 ). If BY i 3 is omitted, the amount equal to the third data item (i 3 ). If BY i 3 is omitted, the
increment will be set to one. Sometimes the list may be too increment will be set to one. Sometimes the list may be too
long to fit on one line, in which case the list may be continued long to fit on one line, in which case the list may be continued
to the next line by providing a hyphen preceded by a blank. to the next line by providing a hyphen preceded by a blank.
Also note that only a list may be continued and not any other Also note that only a list may be continued and not any other
type of data. type of data.

Instead of a numerical list, the specification X ( or Y or Z) may Instead of a numerical list, the specification X ( or Y or Z) may
be used. This specification will include all MEMBERs parallel be used. This specification will include all MEMBERs parallel
to the global direction specified. Note that this is not to the global direction specified. Note that this is not
applicable to JOINTs or ELEMENTs. applicable to JOINTs or ELEMENTs.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-8 Section 5 5-8 Section 5

ALL, BEAM, PLATE, SOLID. Do not use these unless the ALL, BEAM, PLATE, SOLID. Do not use these unless the
documentation for a command specifically mentions them as documentation for a command specifically mentions them as
available for that command. ALL means all members and available for that command. ALL means all members and
elements, BEAM means all members, etc. elements, BEAM means all members, etc.

g) Continuing a command to the next line: Only lists may be g) Continuing a command to the next line: Only lists may be
continued to the next line by ending the line with a blank and continued to the next line by ending the line with a blank and
hyphen (see above) with few exceptions: Multilinear spring hyphen (see above) with few exceptions: Multilinear spring
supports, Supports, Master/Slave. Others have special types of supports, Supports, Master/Slave. Others have special types of
continuations. Please follow the command descriptions. continuations. Please follow the command descriptions.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

   72  %<   72      72  %<   72  
  72  );    72  ); 
7KLV OLVW RI LWHPV LV WKH VDPH DV 7KLV OLVW RI LWHPV LV WKH VDPH DV
              );                ); 
3RVVLEOH (UURU 3RVVLEOH (UURU
  72       72    
);  ); 

In this case, the continuation mark for list items is used when In this case, the continuation mark for list items is used when
list items are not continued. This will result in an error list items are not continued. This will result in an error
message or possibly unpredictable results. message or possibly unpredictable results.

5.1.3 Listing of Joints/Members/Elements by 5.1.3 Listing of Joints/Members/Elements by


Specification of Global Ranges Specification of Global Ranges
This command allows the user to specify lists of This command allows the user to specify lists of
joints/members/elements by providing global ranges. The general joints/members/elements by providing global ranges. The general
format of the specification is as follows. format of the specification is as follows.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

;5$1*(  ;5$1*( 
<5$1*(  I I <5$1*(  I I
=5$1*(  =5$1*( 
Section 5 5-9 Section 5 5-9

where, where,
XRANGE, YRANGE, ZRANGE = direction of range (parallel to XRANGE, YRANGE, ZRANGE = direction of range (parallel to
global X, Y, Z directions global X, Y, Z directions
respectively) respectively)

f1, f2 = values (in current unit system) that defines the specified f1, f2 = values (in current unit system) that defines the specified
range. range.

1RWHV 1RWHV

1) Only one range direction (XRANGE, YRANGE etc.) is allowed 1) Only one range direction (XRANGE, YRANGE etc.) is allowed
per list. (Exceptions:Area/Floor load and Master/Slave). per list. (Exceptions:Area/Floor load and Master/Slave).
2) No other items may be in the list. 2) No other items may be in the list.
3) The values defining the range (f1, f2) must be in the current 3) The values defining the range (f1, f2) must be in the current
unit system. unit system.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

0(0%(5 75866 0(0%(5 75866


;5$1*(   ;5$1*(  
&2167$176 &2167$176
( 67((/ <5$1*(   ( 67((/ <5$1*(  

In the above example, a XRANGE is specified with values of 20. In the above example, a XRANGE is specified with values of 20.
and 70. This range will include all members lying entirely within a and 70. This range will include all members lying entirely within a
range parallel to the global X-axis and limited by X=20 and X=70. range parallel to the global X-axis and limited by X=20 and X=70.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-10 Section 5 5-10 Section 5

STAAD Commands STAAD Commands

5.2 Problem Initiation And Title 5.2 Problem Initiation And Title

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command initiates the STAAD run, allows the user to specify This command initiates the STAAD run, allows the user to specify
the type of the structure and an optional title. the type of the structure and an optional title.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

3/$1(  3/$1( 
63$&(  63$&( 
67$$'   DQ\ WLWOH D  67$$'   DQ\ WLWOH D 
75866  75866 
)/225  )/225 

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

Any STAAD input has to start with the word STAAD. Following Any STAAD input has to start with the word STAAD. Following
type specifications are available: type specifications are available:

PLANE = Plane frame structure PLANE = Plane frame structure


See SPACE = Space frame structure See SPACE = Space frame structure
Section 1.3 TRUSS = Plane or space truss structure Section 1.3 TRUSS = Plane or space truss structure
FLOOR = Floor structure FLOOR = Floor structure

a 1 = Any title for the problem. This title will appear on the top of a 1 = Any title for the problem. This title will appear on the top of
every output page. To include additional information in the page every output page. To include additional information in the page
header, use a comment line containing the pertinent information as header, use a comment line containing the pertinent information as
the second line of input. the second line of input.
Section 5 5-11 Section 5 5-11
1RWHV 1RWHV

1) The user should be careful about choosing the type of the 1) The user should be careful about choosing the type of the
structure. The choice is dependent on the various degrees of structure. The choice is dependent on the various degrees of
freedom that need to be considered in the analysis. The freedom that need to be considered in the analysis. The
following figure illustrates the degrees of freedoms considered following figure illustrates the degrees of freedoms considered
in the various type specifications. Detailed discussions are in the various type specifications. Detailed discussions are
available in Section 1.3. available in Section 1.3.

6758&785( 7<3(6 6758&785( 7<3(6

3/$1( 3/$1(

63$&( 63$&(

75866 ' ' 75866 ' '

)/225 )/225

2) The optional title provided by the user is printed on top of 2) The optional title provided by the user is printed on top of
every page of the output. The user can use this facility to every page of the output. The user can use this facility to
customize his output. customize his output.

/LPLWV /LPLWV

1) Joint numbers: 1 to 999999 1) Joint numbers: 1 to 999999


* *
2) Number of joints: 100000 2) Number of joints: 100000
3) Member/Element numbers: 1 to 999999 3) Member/Element numbers: 1 to 999999
* *
4) Number of Members & Elements: 100000 4) Number of Members & Elements: 100000
5) Load Case numbers: 1 to 99999 5) Load Case numbers: 1 to 99999
6) Number of primary & 6) Number of primary &
combination cases 1000 combination cases 1000
* Some STAAD copies are available with much smaller limits, * Some STAAD copies are available with much smaller limits,
please check what limits you have purchased. please check what limits you have purchased.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-12 Section 5 5-12 Section 5

5.3 Unit Specification 5.3 Unit Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command allows the user to specify or change length and This command allows the user to specify or change length and
force units for input and output. force units for input and output.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

OHQJWKXQLW  OHQJWKXQLW 
81,7   81,7  
IRUFHXQLW  IRUFHXQLW 
,1&+(6  ,1&+(6 
)((7 RU )7  )((7 RU )7 
&0  &0 
OHQJWKXQLW 0(7(5  OHQJWKXQLW 0(7(5 
006  006 
'0(  '0( 
.0  .0 
.,3  .,3 
3281'  3281' 
.*  .* 
IRUFHXQLW 0721  IRUFHXQLW 0721 
1(:721  1(:721 
.16  .16 
016  016 
'16  '16 

Note: Note:
DME denotes Decimeters. MNS denotes mega Newtons DME denotes Decimeters. MNS denotes mega Newtons
(1000 Newtons) and DNS denotes DecaNewtons (10 (1000 Newtons) and DNS denotes DecaNewtons (10
Newtons). MTON denotes Metric Ton (1000 kilograms). All Newtons). MTON denotes Metric Ton (1000 kilograms). All
other units are self explanatory. other units are self explanatory.

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

The UNIT command can be specified any number of times during The UNIT command can be specified any number of times during
an analysis. All data is assumed to be in the most recent unit an analysis. All data is assumed to be in the most recent unit
specification preceding that data. Also note that the input-unit for specification preceding that data. Also note that the input-unit for
Section 5 5-13 Section 5 5-13
angles is always degrees. However, the output unit for joint angles is always degrees. However, the output unit for joint
rotations (in joint displacement) is radians. For all output, the units rotations (in joint displacement) is radians. For all output, the units
are clearly specified by the program. are clearly specified by the program.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

81,7 .,3 )7 81,7 .,3 )7


81,7 ,1&+ 81,7 ,1&+
81,7 0(7(5 .16 81,7 0(7(5 .16
81,7 &0 0721 81,7 &0 0721

1RWHV 1RWHV

This command may be used as frequently as needed to specify data This command may be used as frequently as needed to specify data
or generate output in the desired length and/or force units. Note or generate output in the desired length and/or force units. Note
that mix and match between different unit systems (Imperial, that mix and match between different unit systems (Imperial,
Metric, SI etc.) are allowed. Metric, SI etc.) are allowed.

This command may be anywhere a primary level command (e.g, This command may be anywhere a primary level command (e.g,
JOINT COORD, MEMBER INCIDENCE, etc.) can be. In addition, JOINT COORD, MEMBER INCIDENCE, etc.) can be. In addition,
it may also be wherever a first level load command may be. it may also be wherever a first level load command may be.

Exceptions: The second level load commands (MEMBER LOAD, Exceptions: The second level load commands (MEMBER LOAD,
JOINT LOAD and FLOOR LOAD), allow the UNIT command to be JOINT LOAD and FLOOR LOAD), allow the UNIT command to be
entered on a separate line, not within a continuation or between entered on a separate line, not within a continuation or between
semi-colons. semi-colons.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-14 Section 5 5-14 Section 5

5.4 Input/Output Width Specification 5.4 Input/Output Width Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

These commands may be used to specify the width(s) of the lines of These commands may be used to specify the width(s) of the lines of
output file(s). output file(s).

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

,1387  ,1387 
  :,'7+ L   :,'7+ L
287387  287387 

For OUTPUT WIDTH, For OUTPUT WIDTH,


i 1 = 72 or 118 depending on narrow or wide output. i 1 = 72 or 118 depending on narrow or wide output.

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

The user may specify the required input/output width, as required, The user may specify the required input/output width, as required,
using this command. For INPUT width, 79 is always used. The using this command. For INPUT width, 79 is always used. The
program can create output using two different output widths - 72 program can create output using two different output widths - 72
(default) and 118. The 72-character width may be used for display (default) and 118. The 72-character width may be used for display
on most CRTs and for printing on “portrait” wide paper. The 118- on most CRTs and for printing on “portrait” wide paper. The 118-
character width may be used for printing on “landscape” wide character width may be used for printing on “landscape” wide
paper. paper.

1RWHV 1RWHV

This is a customization facility that may be used to improve the This is a customization facility that may be used to improve the
presentation quality of the run documents. presentation quality of the run documents.
Section 5 5-15 Section 5 5-15

5.5 Set Command Specification 5.5 Set Command Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command allows the user to set various general specifications This command allows the user to set various general specifications
for the analysis/design run. for the analysis/design run.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

 1/ L   1/ L 
 ',63/$&(0(17 L   ',63/$&(0(17 L 
 6'$03 L   6'$03 L 
 :$53 L   :$53 L 
 ,7(5/,0 L   ,7(5/,0 L 
 35,17 L   35,17 L 
 6+($5   6+($5 
   
6(7  21   6(7  21  
(&+2    (&+2   
 2))    2))  
 *8, L   *8, L 
= 83  = 83 
where, where,
i 1 = Maximum number of primary load cases (NL) i 1 = Maximum number of primary load cases (NL)
i 2 = Maximum allowable displacement tolerance for any joint in i 2 = Maximum allowable displacement tolerance for any joint in
the structure. the structure.
i 3 = Damping ratio to be used for all springs in computing the i 3 = Damping ratio to be used for all springs in computing the
modal composite damping in dynamics. modal composite damping in dynamics.
i 4 = Warping restraint ratio to be used for I section members in i 4 = Warping restraint ratio to be used for I section members in
computing the torsional rigidity. If 0.0 then no warping computing the torsional rigidity. If 0.0 then no warping
restraint, normal default option; If 1.0 then full warping restraint, normal default option; If 1.0 then full warping
restraint. Cw, the warping constant, will be computed and restraint. Cw, the warping constant, will be computed and
used in the torsional rigidity calculation. Values between 0.0 used in the torsional rigidity calculation. Values between 0.0
and 1.0 will result in a partial warping restraint. and 1.0 will result in a partial warping restraint.
i 5 = Maximum number of tension/compression iterations. i 5 = Maximum number of tension/compression iterations.
i 6 = 1, Bypass forming data and files needed for post-processing. i 6 = 1, Bypass forming data and files needed for post-processing.
i 7 = 1, Bypass printing Zero Stiffness messages. i 7 = 1, Bypass printing Zero Stiffness messages.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-16 Section 5 5-16 Section 5

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

The SET NL command is used in a multiple analysis run if the user The SET NL command is used in a multiple analysis run if the user
wants to add more primary load cases after one analysis has been wants to add more primary load cases after one analysis has been
performed. Specifically, for those examples, which use the performed. Specifically, for those examples, which use the
See Sections CHANGE or RESTORE command, if the user wants to add more See Sections CHANGE or RESTORE command, if the user wants to add more
5.18 and 5.38 primary load cases, the NL value should be set to the maximum 5.18 and 5.38 primary load cases, the NL value should be set to the maximum
number with the SET NL command. The program will then be able number with the SET NL command. The program will then be able
to set aside additional memory space for information to be added to set aside additional memory space for information to be added
later. Note that this command should be provided before any joint, later. Note that this command should be provided before any joint,
member or load specifications. The value for i 1 should not be member or load specifications. The value for i 1 should not be
greater than the maximum number of primary load cases. greater than the maximum number of primary load cases.

For PDELTA ANALYSIS with CONVERGE option the SET For PDELTA ANALYSIS with CONVERGE option the SET
DISPLACEMENT command is used to specify the convergence DISPLACEMENT command is used to specify the convergence
tolerance. If the RMS displacement of two consecutive iterations tolerance. If the RMS displacement of two consecutive iterations
changes less than the value entered, then that load case is changes less than the value entered, then that load case is
converged. This command should be placed before the JOINT converged. This command should be placed before the JOINT
COORDINATE specification. COORDINATE specification.

For NONLINEAR ANALYSIS the SET DISPLACEMENT For NONLINEAR ANALYSIS the SET DISPLACEMENT
command is used to specify the limiting value of displacement. If command is used to specify the limiting value of displacement. If
any displacement after any iteration exceeds the value entered here, any displacement after any iteration exceeds the value entered here,
then the solution is diverging and is terminated. This command then the solution is diverging and is terminated. This command
should be placed before the JOINT COORDINATE specification. should be placed before the JOINT COORDINATE specification.

The SET ECHO ON command will activate and the SET ECHO The SET ECHO ON command will activate and the SET ECHO
OFF command will deactivate the echoing of input file commands OFF command will deactivate the echoing of input file commands
in the output file. In the absence of the SET ECHO command, input in the output file. In the absence of the SET ECHO command, input
file commands will be echoed back to the output file. file commands will be echoed back to the output file.

By default, the Y-axis is the vertical axis. However, the SET Z UP By default, the Y-axis is the vertical axis. However, the SET Z UP
command may be used to model situations where Z-axis represents command may be used to model situations where Z-axis represents
the vertical axis (direction of gravity load) of the structure. This the vertical axis (direction of gravity load) of the structure. This
situation may arise if the input geometry is created through some situation may arise if the input geometry is created through some
CAD software. Note that this command will affect the default CAD software. Note that this command will affect the default
BETA angle specification. However, BETA can be set to a certain BETA angle specification. However, BETA can be set to a certain
value for all members parallel to a particular global axis by using value for all members parallel to a particular global axis by using
the MEMBER X (or Y or Z) type of listing. For additional the MEMBER X (or Y or Z) type of listing. For additional
information, see the CONSTANTs specification (Section 5.26). information, see the CONSTANTs specification (Section 5.26).
Section 5 5-17 Section 5 5-17

1RWHV IRU 6(7 = 83 1RWHV IRU 6(7 = 83

The SET Z UP Command directly influences the values of The SET Z UP Command directly influences the values of
the following input: the following input:

1) JOINT COORDINATE 1) JOINT COORDINATE


2) Input for the PERFORM ROTATION Command 2) Input for the PERFORM ROTATION Command
3) BETA ANGLE 3) BETA ANGLE

The following features of STAAD cannot be used with the The following features of STAAD cannot be used with the
SET Z UP command: SET Z UP command:

1) Wind Load Generation 1) Wind Load Generation


2) Floor Load Generation 2) Floor Load Generation
3) Automatic Generation of Spring Supports for Mat 3) Automatic Generation of Spring Supports for Mat
Foundations Foundations
4) UBC Loading 4) UBC Loading

The SET SDAMP command will allow the damping of springs to The SET SDAMP command will allow the damping of springs to
be considered in computing the composite modal damping for each be considered in computing the composite modal damping for each
mode in a dynamic solution. This command is not used unless mode in a dynamic solution. This command is not used unless
CDAMP ratios are also entered for the members and elements in CDAMP ratios are also entered for the members and elements in
the CONSTANTS command. Composite damping is generally only the CONSTANTS command. Composite damping is generally only
used if there are many modes in the dynamic solution and there are used if there are many modes in the dynamic solution and there are
a wide range of damping ratios in the springs / members / elements. a wide range of damping ratios in the springs / members / elements.

The SET WARP command will allow the I section member end The SET WARP command will allow the I section member end
warping restraint to be considered in calculating the torsional warping restraint to be considered in calculating the torsional
stiffness rigidity. Full or partial or no warping restraint are stiffness rigidity. Full or partial or no warping restraint are
allowed. allowed.

The SET ITERLIM command is for raising the max. iteration limit The SET ITERLIM command is for raising the max. iteration limit
above the default of 10 in tension/compression iterations. Since above the default of 10 in tension/compression iterations. Since
this iterative procedure will not necessarily converge, this option of this iterative procedure will not necessarily converge, this option of
more iterations may not help and should be used with caution. more iterations may not help and should be used with caution.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-18 Section 5 5-18 Section 5

After any tension/compression analysis, the output file (.ANL) After any tension/compression analysis, the output file (.ANL)
should be scanned for warnings of non-convergence. Do not use should be scanned for warnings of non-convergence. Do not use
results from non-converged cases. results from non-converged cases.

The SET PRINT 1 command is for eliminating the Zero Stiffness The SET PRINT 1 command is for eliminating the Zero Stiffness
messages. messages.

The SET SHEAR command is for omitting the additional pure The SET SHEAR command is for omitting the additional pure
shear distortion stiffness terms in forming beam member shear distortion stiffness terms in forming beam member
stiffnesses. With this command you can exactly match simple stiffnesses. With this command you can exactly match simple
textbook beam theory results. textbook beam theory results.

Other rarely used SET commands: Other rarely used SET commands:

SET DATA CHECK IGNORED SET DATA CHECK IGNORED


SET RUN IGNORED SET RUN IGNORED
SET COMPRESS TURN OFF FILE COMPRESSION SET COMPRESS TURN OFF FILE COMPRESSION
SET SOLUTION INCORE use determinant search for frequencies for small problems SET SOLUTION INCORE use determinant search for frequencies for small problems
SET SOLVER should ignore SET SOLVER should ignore
SET CORE should ignore (Memory) SET CORE should ignore (Memory)
SET EXM should ignore (EXTENDED MEMORY) SET EXM should ignore (EXTENDED MEMORY)
SET NJ should ignore SET NJ should ignore
SET NM should ignore SET NM should ignore
SET CONNECTIVITY should ignore SET CONNECTIVITY should ignore
SET MASS =1 use generated moments as masses. SET MASS =1 use generated moments as masses.
SET MODAL should ignore SET MODAL should ignore
SET THISTORY =2 Use exact force integration in time history. SET THISTORY =2 Use exact force integration in time history.
SET INTERPOLATION Lin or Log for spectra SET INTERPOLATION Lin or Log for spectra
SET DISPLACEMENT METHOD should ignore SET DISPLACEMENT METHOD should ignore
SET ???? ??? file extension for L43 SET ???? ??? file extension for L43
SET BUBBLE =1 do not use bubble fns in solids SET BUBBLE =1 do not use bubble fns in solids
SET NOSECT no section results will be calculated SET NOSECT no section results will be calculated
SET TMH should ignore SET TMH should ignore
Section 5 5-19 Section 5 5-19

5.6 Separator Command 5.6 Separator Command

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command may be used to specify the desired separator This command may be used to specify the desired separator
character that can be used to separate multiple lines of data on a character that can be used to separate multiple lines of data on a
single line of input. single line of input.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

6(3$5$725 D1 6(3$5$725 D1

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

The semicolon (;) is the default character which functions as the The semicolon (;) is the default character which functions as the
See Section separator for multiple line data on one line. However, this See Section separator for multiple line data on one line. However, this
5.1.2 separator character can be changed by the SEPARATOR command 5.1.2 separator character can be changed by the SEPARATOR command
to any character a 1 , other than the comma or asterisk. to any character a 1 , other than the comma or asterisk.

1RWHV 1RWHV

Comma (,) or asterisk (*) may not be used as a separator character. Comma (,) or asterisk (*) may not be used as a separator character.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-20 Section 5 5-20 Section 5

5.7 Page New Command 5.7 Page New Command

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command may be used to instruct the program to start a new This command may be used to instruct the program to start a new
page of output. page of output.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

3$*( 1(: 3$*( 1(:

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

With this command, a new page of output can be started. This With this command, a new page of output can be started. This
command provides the flexibility, the user needs, to design the command provides the flexibility, the user needs, to design the
output format. output format.

1RWHV 1RWHV

The presentation quality of the output document may be improved The presentation quality of the output document may be improved
by using this command properly. by using this command properly.
Section 5 5-21 Section 5 5-21

5.8 Page Length/Eject Command 5.8 Page Length/Eject Command

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

These commands may be used to specify the page length of the These commands may be used to specify the page length of the
output and the desired page eject character. output and the desired page eject character.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

/(1*7+ L  /(1*7+ L 
3$*(   3$*(  
(-(&7 D  (-(&7 D 

The page length in STAAD output is based on a default value of 60 The page length in STAAD output is based on a default value of 60
lines . However, the user may change the page length to any lines . However, the user may change the page length to any
number i (number of lines per page) desired. number i (number of lines per page) desired.

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

Standard page eject character (CNTRL L for PCs and 1 for Standard page eject character (CNTRL L for PCs and 1 for
Mini/Mfrm) is embedded in the STAAD program. The PAGE Mini/Mfrm) is embedded in the STAAD program. The PAGE
EJECT command with the input of the character a 1 will alter the EJECT command with the input of the character a 1 will alter the
default page eject character in the program. A blank character will default page eject character in the program. A blank character will
suppress page ejection. suppress page ejection.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-22 Section 5 5-22 Section 5

5.9 Ignore Specifications 5.9 Ignore Specifications

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command allows the user to provide member lists in a This command allows the user to provide member lists in a
convenient way without triggering error messages pertaining to convenient way without triggering error messages pertaining to
non-existent member numbers. non-existent member numbers.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

,*125( /,67 ,*125( /,67

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

IGNORE LIST may be used if the user wants the program to ignore IGNORE LIST may be used if the user wants the program to ignore
any nonexistent member that may be included in a member list any nonexistent member that may be included in a member list
specification. For example, for the sake of simplicity, a list of specification. For example, for the sake of simplicity, a list of
members may be specified as MEMB 3 TO 40 where members 10 members may be specified as MEMB 3 TO 40 where members 10
and 11 do not exist. An error message can be avoided in this and 11 do not exist. An error message can be avoided in this
situation by providing the IGNORE LIST command anywhere in situation by providing the IGNORE LIST command anywhere in
the beginning of input. A warning message, however, will appear the beginning of input. A warning message, however, will appear
for each nonexistent member. for each nonexistent member.
Section 5 5-23 Section 5 5-23

5.10 No Design Specification 5.10 No Design Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command allows the user to declare that no design operations This command allows the user to declare that no design operations
will be performed during the run. The memory reserved for design will be performed during the run. The memory reserved for design
will be released to accommodate larger analysis jobs. will be released to accommodate larger analysis jobs.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

,1387 12'(6,*1 ,1387 12'(6,*1

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

STAAD always assumes that at some point in the input, the user STAAD always assumes that at some point in the input, the user
may wish to perform design for steel or concrete members. These may wish to perform design for steel or concrete members. These
design processes require more computer memory. If memory design processes require more computer memory. If memory
availability is a problem, the above command may be used to availability is a problem, the above command may be used to
eliminate extra memory requirements. eliminate extra memory requirements.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-24 Section 5 5-24 Section 5

5.11 Joint Coordinates Specification 5.11 Joint Coordinates Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

These commands allow the user to specify and generate the These commands allow the user to specify and generate the
coordinates of the JOINTs of the structure. The JOINT coordinates of the JOINTs of the structure. The JOINT
COORDINATES command initiates the specification of the COORDINATES command initiates the specification of the
coordinates. The REPEAT and REPEAT ALL commands allow coordinates. The REPEAT and REPEAT ALL commands allow
easy generation of coordinates using repetitive patterns. easy generation of coordinates using repetitive patterns.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

-2,17 &225',1$7(6 &</,1'5,&$/ 5(9(56( 12&+(&. EDQGVSHF -2,17 &225',1$7(6 &</,1'5,&$/ 5(9(56( 12&+(&. EDQGVSHF

L [ \ ] L [ \ ] L L [ \ ] L [ \ ] L
5(3($7 Q [L   \L   ]L   [L   \L   ]L   [L Q  \L Q  ]L Q 5(3($7 Q [L   \L   ]L   [L   \L   ]L   [L Q  \L Q  ]L Q
5(3($7 $// Q [L   \L   ]L   [L   \L   ]L   [L Q  \L Q  ]L Q 5(3($7 $// Q [L   \L   ]L   [L   \L   ]L   [L Q  \L Q  ]L Q

-725,* [2ULJLQ \2ULJLQ ]2ULJLQ -725,* [2ULJLQ \2ULJLQ ]2ULJLQ


EDQGVSHF 125('8&( %$1' EDQGVSHF 125('8&( %$1'

NOCHECK= Do not perform check for multiple structures or NOCHECK= Do not perform check for multiple structures or
orphan joints. orphan joints.

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

The command JOINT COORDINATES specifies a Cartesian Coordinate The command JOINT COORDINATES specifies a Cartesian Coordinate
System (see Figure 1.2). Joints are defined using the global X, Y and Z System (see Figure 1.2). Joints are defined using the global X, Y and Z
coordinates. The command JOINT COORDINATES CYLINDRICAL coordinates. The command JOINT COORDINATES CYLINDRICAL
See Section specifies a Cylindrical Coordinate System (see Figure 1.3). Joints are See Section specifies a Cylindrical Coordinate System (see Figure 1.3). Joints are
1.5.1 defined using the r, θ and z coordinates. JOINT COORDINATES 1.5.1 defined using the r, θ and z coordinates. JOINT COORDINATES
CYLINDRICAL REVERSE specifies a Reverse Cylindrical Coordinate CYLINDRICAL REVERSE specifies a Reverse Cylindrical Coordinate
system (see Figure 1.4). Joints are defined using the r, y and θ system (see Figure 1.4). Joints are defined using the r, y and θ
coordinates. coordinates.

JTORIG causes the program to use a different origin than (0, 0, 0) for all JTORIG causes the program to use a different origin than (0, 0, 0) for all
of the joints entered with this JOINT COORDINATES command. The of the joints entered with this JOINT COORDINATES command. The
JTORIG command should be entered on a separate command line. JTORIG command should be entered on a separate command line.
Basically after the joint coordinates are entered or generated, then the Basically after the joint coordinates are entered or generated, then the
Section 5 5-25 Section 5 5-25
xOrigin, yOrigin, and zOrigin values are added to the coordinates. xOrigin, yOrigin, and zOrigin values are added to the coordinates.
For example a cylinder could be generated about the Y axis then moved For example a cylinder could be generated about the Y axis then moved
by this command to its proper place. To create multiple offset structural by this command to its proper place. To create multiple offset structural
parts, enter additional JOINT COORDINATES commands, each with parts, enter additional JOINT COORDINATES commands, each with
one JTORIG command. one JTORIG command.

Note that the multiple JOINT COORDINATES command concept allows Note that the multiple JOINT COORDINATES command concept allows
UNIT changes and PERFORM ROTATION commands in between; such UNIT changes and PERFORM ROTATION commands in between; such
that these commands would apply to a selected portion of the joints. that these commands would apply to a selected portion of the joints.
However, the PERFORM ROTATION command applies to all prior However, the PERFORM ROTATION command applies to all prior
defined joints, not just those in the previous JOINT COORDINATE defined joints, not just those in the previous JOINT COORDINATE
command. command.

NOREDUCE BAND causes the program to execute without performing a NOREDUCE BAND causes the program to execute without performing a
bandwidth reduction. bandwidth reduction.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

-2,17 &225',1$7(6 125('8&( %$1' -2,17 &225',1$7(6 125('8&( %$1'

The REPEAT command causes the previous line of input to be The REPEAT command causes the previous line of input to be
repeated ‘n’ number of times with specified coordinate increments. repeated ‘n’ number of times with specified coordinate increments.
The REPEAT ALL command functions similar to the REPEAT The REPEAT ALL command functions similar to the REPEAT
command except that it repeats all previously specified input back command except that it repeats all previously specified input back
to the most recent REPEAT ALL command, or all joint data if no to the most recent REPEAT ALL command, or all joint data if no
previous REPEAT ALL command has been given. Note: Use previous REPEAT ALL command has been given. Note: Use
“REPEAT ALL 0” to start a section of data to be repeated if “REPEAT ALL 0” to start a section of data to be repeated if
necessary. (When using the REPEAT and REPEAT ALL necessary. (When using the REPEAT and REPEAT ALL
commands, joint numbering must be consecutive and should begin commands, joint numbering must be consecutive and should begin
with 1.) with 1.)

* i1 = The joint number for which the coordinates are * i1 = The joint number for which the coordinates are
provided. Any integer number within the limit (see provided. Any integer number within the limit (see
section 5.2 for limit) is permitted. section 5.2 for limit) is permitted.
x 1 , y 1 and z 1 = X, Y & Z (R, θ & Z for cylindrical or R, Y & θ for x 1 , y 1 and z 1 = X, Y & Z (R, θ & Z for cylindrical or R, Y & θ for
cylindrical reverse) coordinates of the joint. cylindrical reverse) coordinates of the joint.

For PLANE analyses z 1 is an optional data item when defining For PLANE analyses z 1 is an optional data item when defining
input for individual joints. z 1 is always required for joint input for individual joints. z 1 is always required for joint
generation. The following are used only if joints are to be generation. The following are used only if joints are to be
generated. generated.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-26 Section 5 5-26 Section 5

* i2 = The second joint number to which the joint * i2 = The second joint number to which the joint
coordinates are generated. coordinates are generated.
x 2 , y2 , and z 2 = X, Y & Z (R, θ & Z for cylindrical or R, Y & θ for x 2 , y2 , and z 2 = X, Y & Z (R, θ & Z for cylindrical or R, Y & θ for
cylindrical reverse) coordinates of the joint i2 . cylindrical reverse) coordinates of the joint i2 .
i3 = Joint number increment by which the generated i3 = Joint number increment by which the generated
joints will be incremented. Defaults to 1 if left out. joints will be incremented. Defaults to 1 if left out.
n= Number of times repeat is to be carried out. Note n= Number of times repeat is to be carried out. Note
that “n” cannot exceed 989 in any one single that “n” cannot exceed 989 in any one single
REPEAT command. REPEAT command.
xi N , yi N & zi N = X, Y & Z (R, θ & Z [R, Y & θ]) coordinate xi N , yi N & zi N = X, Y & Z (R, θ & Z [R, Y & θ]) coordinate
increments for k th repeat. increments for k th repeat.

The X, Y and Z (R, θ & Z [R, Y & θ]) coordinates will be equally The X, Y and Z (R, θ & Z [R, Y & θ]) coordinates will be equally
spaced between i 1 and i 2 . spaced between i 1 and i 2 .

* Note that the REPEAT command uses the highest joint number * Note that the REPEAT command uses the highest joint number
entered so far plus one for the intermediate generated joint entered so far plus one for the intermediate generated joint
numbers. numbers.

([DPSOH  ([DPSOH 

-2,17 &225',1$7(6 -2,17 &225',1$7(6


       
       
               

In this example, X Y Z coordinates of joints 1 to 6 are provided. In this example, X Y Z coordinates of joints 1 to 6 are provided.
Note that the joints between 3 & 6 will be generated with joints Note that the joints between 3 & 6 will be generated with joints
equally spaced from 3 to 6. Hence, joint 4 will have coordinates of equally spaced from 3 to 6. Hence, joint 4 will have coordinates of
20.25 0.0 8.5 and joint 5 will have coordinates of 35.25 0.0 8.5. 20.25 0.0 8.5 and joint 5 will have coordinates of 35.25 0.0 8.5.

([DPSOH  ([DPSOH 

-2,17 &225',1$7(6 -2,17 &225',1$7(6


               
5(3($7     5(3($7    
5(3($7 $//     5(3($7 $//    
Section 5 5-27 Section 5 5-27

Here, the 220 joint coordinates of a ten story 3 X 4-bay structure Here, the 220 joint coordinates of a ten story 3 X 4-bay structure
are generated. The REPEAT command repeats the first input line 4 are generated. The REPEAT command repeats the first input line 4
times, incrementing each Z coordinate by 15. Thus, the first 2 lines times, incrementing each Z coordinate by 15. Thus, the first 2 lines
are sufficient to create a "floor" of twenty joints. are sufficient to create a "floor" of twenty joints.

                                     


                                     
       
                                     

The REPEAT ALL command repeats all previous data (i.e. the 20 The REPEAT ALL command repeats all previous data (i.e. the 20
joint "floor") ten times, incrementing the Y coordinate by 10 each joint "floor") ten times, incrementing the Y coordinate by 10 each
time. This creates the 200 remaining joints of the structure: time. This creates the 200 remaining joints of the structure:

([DPSOH  ([DPSOH 

                       

                       
                       
                 

The following examples illustrate various uses of the REPEAT The following examples illustrate various uses of the REPEAT
command. command.

5(3($7     5(3($7    

The above REPEAT command will repeat the last input line 10 The above REPEAT command will repeat the last input line 10
times using the same set of increments (i.e. x = 5., y = 10., z = 5.) times using the same set of increments (i.e. x = 5., y = 10., z = 5.)

5(3($7           5(3($7          


STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-28 Section 5 5-28 Section 5

The above REPEAT command will repeat the last input line three The above REPEAT command will repeat the last input line three
times. Each repeat operation will use a different increment set. times. Each repeat operation will use a different increment set.

5(3($7            5(3($7           

The above REPEAT command will repeat the last input line 10 The above REPEAT command will repeat the last input line 10
times; six times using x, y and z increments of 0., 12. and 0., and times; six times using x, y and z increments of 0., 12. and 0., and
four times using increments of 0., 10. and 0. Each x, y and z value four times using increments of 0., 10. and 0. Each x, y and z value
of 0 represents no change from the previous increment. To create of 0 represents no change from the previous increment. To create
the 2nd through 6th repeats, five sets of 0., 0. and 0. (15*0) are the 2nd through 6th repeats, five sets of 0., 0. and 0. (15*0) are
supplied. The seventh repeat is done with increments of 0., 10. and supplied. The seventh repeat is done with increments of 0., 10. and
0. The 8th through 10th repeats are done with the same increments 0. The 8th through 10th repeats are done with the same increments
as 7, and is represented as 9*0. as 7, and is represented as 9*0.

1RWHV 1RWHV

The PRINT JOINT COORDINATE command may be used to verify The PRINT JOINT COORDINATE command may be used to verify
the joint coordinates provided or generated by REPEAT and the joint coordinates provided or generated by REPEAT and
REPEAT ALL commands. Also, use the Post Processing facility to REPEAT ALL commands. Also, use the Post Processing facility to
verify geometry graphically. verify geometry graphically.
Section 5 5-29 Section 5 5-29

5.12 Member Incidences Specification 5.12 Member Incidences Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This set of commands is used to specify MEMBERs by defining This set of commands is used to specify MEMBERs by defining
connectivity between JOINTs. REPEAT and REPEAT ALL connectivity between JOINTs. REPEAT and REPEAT ALL
commands are available to facilitate generation of repetitive commands are available to facilitate generation of repetitive
patterns. patterns.

The member/element incidences must be defined such that the The member/element incidences must be defined such that the
model developed represents one single structure only, not two or model developed represents one single structure only, not two or
more separate structures. STAAD is capable of detecting multiple more separate structures. STAAD is capable of detecting multiple
structures automatically. structures automatically.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

0(0%(5 ,1&,'(1&(6 0(0%(5 ,1&,'(1&(6


L L L L L L L L L L L L
5(3($7 Q P L  M L 5(3($7 Q P L  M L
5(3($7 $// Q P L  M L 5(3($7 $// Q P L  M L

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

The REPEAT command causes the previous line of input to be The REPEAT command causes the previous line of input to be
repeated ‘n’ number of times with specified member and joint repeated ‘n’ number of times with specified member and joint
increments. The REPEAT ALL command functions similar to the increments. The REPEAT ALL command functions similar to the
REPEAT command except that it repeats all previously specified REPEAT command except that it repeats all previously specified
See Section See Section
input back to the most recent REPEAT ALL command or to the input back to the most recent REPEAT ALL command or to the
1.5.2 1.5.2
beginning of the specification if no previous REPEAT ALL beginning of the specification if no previous REPEAT ALL
command has been issued. (When using REPEAT and REPEAT command has been issued. (When using REPEAT and REPEAT
ALL commands, member numbering must be consecutive). ALL commands, member numbering must be consecutive).

i1 = Member number for which incidences are provided. Any i1 = Member number for which incidences are provided. Any
integer number (maximum six digits) is permitted. integer number (maximum six digits) is permitted.
i2 = Start joint number. i2 = Start joint number.
i3 = End joint number. i3 = End joint number.

Note: Use “REPEAT ALL 0”, to start a set of members that will be Note: Use “REPEAT ALL 0”, to start a set of members that will be
repeated if you don’t want to repeat back to the last REPEAT ALL. repeated if you don’t want to repeat back to the last REPEAT ALL.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-30 Section 5 5-30 Section 5

The following data are used for member generation only: The following data are used for member generation only:

i4 = Second member number to which members will be i4 = Second member number to which members will be
generated. generated.
i5 = Member number increment for generation. i5 = Member number increment for generation.
i6 = Joint number increment which will be added to the incident i6 = Joint number increment which will be added to the incident
joints. (i 5 and i 6 will default to 1 if left out.) joints. (i 5 and i 6 will default to 1 if left out.)
n = Number of times repeat is to be carried out. n = Number of times repeat is to be carried out.
mi = Member number increment mi = Member number increment
ji = Joint number increment ji = Joint number increment

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

0(0%(5 ,1&,'(1&(6 0(0%(5 ,1&,'(1&(6


     
       
           

In this example, member 1 goes from joint 1 to 2. Member 2 is In this example, member 1 goes from joint 1 to 2. Member 2 is
connected between joints 5 and 7. Member numbers from 3 to 5 connected between joints 5 and 7. Member numbers from 3 to 5
will be generated with a member number increment of 1 and a joint will be generated with a member number increment of 1 and a joint
number increment 1 (by default). That is, member 3 goes from 6 to number increment 1 (by default). That is, member 3 goes from 6 to
8, member 4 from 7 to 9, member 5 from 8 to 10. Similarly, in the 8, member 4 from 7 to 9, member 5 from 8 to 10. Similarly, in the
next line, member 9 will be from 14 to 16, 11 from 17 to 19 and 13 next line, member 9 will be from 14 to 16, 11 from 17 to 19 and 13
from 20 to 22. from 20 to 22.

$GGLWLRQDO H[DPSOH $GGLWLRQDO H[DPSOH

0(0%(5 ,1&,'(1&(6 0(0%(5 ,1&,'(1&(6


       
       
5(3($7    5(3($7   
       
5(3($7    5(3($7   
5(3($7 $//    5(3($7 $//   
Section 5 5-31 Section 5 5-31
This example creates the 510 members of a ten story 3 X 4-bay This example creates the 510 members of a ten story 3 X 4-bay
structure (this is a continuation of the example started in Section structure (this is a continuation of the example started in Section
5.12). The first input line creates the twenty columns of the first 5.12). The first input line creates the twenty columns of the first
floor: floor:

                                         

The two commands (21 21 22 23 and REPEAT 4 3 4) create 15 The two commands (21 21 22 23 and REPEAT 4 3 4) create 15
members which are the second floor "floor" beams running, for members which are the second floor "floor" beams running, for
example, in the east-west direction: example, in the east-west direction:

                 


                 
     
                 

The next two commands (36 21 25 39 and REPEAT 3 4 4) function The next two commands (36 21 25 39 and REPEAT 3 4 4) function
similar to the previous two commands, but here create the 16 similar to the previous two commands, but here create the 16
second floor "floor" beams running in the north-south direction: second floor "floor" beams running in the north-south direction:

                       


                       
       
                       

The preceding commands have created a single floor unit of both The preceding commands have created a single floor unit of both
beams and columns, a total of 51 members. The REPEAT ALL now beams and columns, a total of 51 members. The REPEAT ALL now
repeats this unit nine times, generating 459 new members and finishing repeats this unit nine times, generating 459 new members and finishing
the ten story structure. The member number is incremented by 51 (the the ten story structure. The member number is incremented by 51 (the
number of members in a repeating unit) and the joint number is number of members in a repeating unit) and the joint number is
incremented by 20, (the number of joints on one floor). incremented by 20, (the number of joints on one floor).
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-32 Section 5 5-32 Section 5

1RWHV 1RWHV

The PRINT MEMBER INFO command may be used to verify the The PRINT MEMBER INFO command may be used to verify the
member incidences provided or generated by REPEAT and member incidences provided or generated by REPEAT and
REPEAT ALL commands. REPEAT ALL commands.

Also, use the Post Processing facility to verify geometry Also, use the Post Processing facility to verify geometry
graphically. graphically.
Section 5 5-33 Section 5 5-33

5.13 Element Incidence Specification 5.13 Element Incidence Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This set of commands is used to specify ELEMENTs by defining This set of commands is used to specify ELEMENTs by defining
the connectivity between JOINTs. REPEAT and REPEAT ALL the connectivity between JOINTs. REPEAT and REPEAT ALL
commands are available to facilitate generation of repetitive commands are available to facilitate generation of repetitive
patterns. patterns.

The element incidences must be defined such that the model The element incidences must be defined such that the model
developed represents one single structure only, not two or more developed represents one single structure only, not two or more
separate structures. STAAD is capable of detecting multiple separate structures. STAAD is capable of detecting multiple
structures automatically. structures automatically.

3ODWH6KHOO(OHPHQW,QFLGHQFHV 3ODWH6KHOO(OHPHQW,QFLGHQFHV

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

(/(0(17 ,1&,'(1&(6 6+(// (/(0(17 ,1&,'(1&(6 6+(//

L   L   L   L   L   72 L   L   L  L   L   L   L   L   72 L   L   L 

5(3($7 Q H L  M L 5(3($7 Q H L  M L
5(3($7 $// Q H L  M L 5(3($7 $// Q H L  M L

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

ELEMENT INCIDENCES SHELL must be provided immediately ELEMENT INCIDENCES SHELL must be provided immediately
after MEMBER INCIDENCES (if any) are specified. The REPEAT after MEMBER INCIDENCES (if any) are specified. The REPEAT
See Section command causes the previous line of input to be repeated ‘n’ See Section command causes the previous line of input to be repeated ‘n’
1.6 number of times with specified element and joint increments. The 1.6 number of times with specified element and joint increments. The
REPEAT ALL command functions similar to the REPEAT REPEAT ALL command functions similar to the REPEAT
command, except that it repeats all previously specified input back command, except that it repeats all previously specified input back
to the most recent REPEAT ALL command; or to the beginning of to the most recent REPEAT ALL command; or to the beginning of
the specification if no previous REPEAT ALL command had been the specification if no previous REPEAT ALL command had been
issued. Use “REPEAT ALL 0 0 0” to start a set of elements that issued. Use “REPEAT ALL 0 0 0” to start a set of elements that
will be repeated if you don’t want to repeat back to the last will be repeated if you don’t want to repeat back to the last
REPEAT ALL. REPEAT ALL.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-34 Section 5 5-34 Section 5

i1 = Element number (any number up to six digits). If i1 = Element number (any number up to six digits). If
MEMBER INCIDENCE is provided, this number must MEMBER INCIDENCE is provided, this number must
not coincide with any MEMBER number. not coincide with any MEMBER number.
i 2 ...i 5 = Clockwise or counterclockwise joint numbers which i 2 ...i 5 = Clockwise or counterclockwise joint numbers which
represent the element connectivity. Note that i5 is not represent the element connectivity. Note that i5 is not
needed for triangular (3 noded) elements. needed for triangular (3 noded) elements.

The following data is needed if elements are to be generated: The following data is needed if elements are to be generated:

i 6 = Last element number to which elements are generated. i 6 = Last element number to which elements are generated.
i 7 = Element number increment by which elements are generated. i 7 = Element number increment by which elements are generated.
Defaults to 1 if omitted. Defaults to 1 if omitted.
i 8 = Joint number increment which will be added to incident joints. i 8 = Joint number increment which will be added to incident joints.
Defaults to 1 if omitted. Defaults to 1 if omitted.

The following data is needed if REPEAT or REPEAT ALL The following data is needed if REPEAT or REPEAT ALL
commands are used to generate elements: commands are used to generate elements:

n = Number of times repeat is to be carried out. n = Number of times repeat is to be carried out.
e i = Element number increment. e i = Element number increment.
j i = Joint number increment. j i = Joint number increment.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

(/(0(17 ,1&,'(1&( (/(0(17 ,1&,'(1&(


         
       
     72       72 
    72      72 

1RWHV 1RWHV

The PRINT ELEMENT INFO command may be used to verify the The PRINT ELEMENT INFO command may be used to verify the
element incidences provided or generated by REPEAT and element incidences provided or generated by REPEAT and
REPEAT ALL commands. REPEAT ALL commands.

Also, use the Post Processing facility to verify geometry Also, use the Post Processing facility to verify geometry
graphically. graphically.
Section 5 5-35 Section 5 5-35
6ROLG(OHPHQW,QFLGHQFHV 6ROLG(OHPHQW,QFLGHQFHV

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

The element incidences for solid elements are to be identified using The element incidences for solid elements are to be identified using
the expression SOLID to distinguish them from PLATE/SHELL the expression SOLID to distinguish them from PLATE/SHELL
elements. elements.

(/(0(17 ,1&,'(1&(6 62/,' (/(0(17 ,1&,'(1&(6 62/,'

L   L   L   L   L   L   L   L   L   72 L   L   ,  L   L   L   L   L   L   L   L   L   72 L   L   , 

5(3($7 Q H L  M L 5(3($7 Q H L  M L
5(3($7 $// Q H L  M L 5(3($7 $// Q H L  M L

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

ELEMENT INCIDENCES SOLID must be provided immediately ELEMENT INCIDENCES SOLID must be provided immediately
after MEMBER INCIDENCES (if any) are specified as well as after MEMBER INCIDENCES (if any) are specified as well as
after the ELEMENT INCIDENCES SHELL (if any). after the ELEMENT INCIDENCES SHELL (if any).

i1 = Element number i1 = Element number


i 2 ... i 9 = Joint numbers of the solid element i 2 ... i 9 = Joint numbers of the solid element
i 10 = Last element number to be generated i 10 = Last element number to be generated
i 11 = Element number increment i 11 = Element number increment
i 12 = Joint number increment i 12 = Joint number increment
n = Number of times REPEAT is to be carried out n = Number of times REPEAT is to be carried out
ei = Element number increment ei = Element number increment
ji = Joint number increment ji = Joint number increment

Specify the four nodes of any of the faces of the solid element in a Specify the four nodes of any of the faces of the solid element in a
counter-clockwise direction as viewed from the outside of the counter-clockwise direction as viewed from the outside of the
element and then go to the opposite face and specify the four nodes element and then go to the opposite face and specify the four nodes
of that face in the same direction used in specifying the nodes of of that face in the same direction used in specifying the nodes of
the first face. The opposite face must be behind the first face, as the first face. The opposite face must be behind the first face, as
defined by the right hand rule, i.e. the opposite (back) face points defined by the right hand rule, i.e. the opposite (back) face points
to the first (front) face, which points to the viewer. to the first (front) face, which points to the viewer.

Use “REPEAT ALL 0” to start a set of solids that will be repeated Use “REPEAT ALL 0” to start a set of solids that will be repeated
if you don’t want to repeat back to the last REPEAT ALL. if you don’t want to repeat back to the last REPEAT ALL.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-36 Section 5 5-36 Section 5
([DPSOH ([DPSOH

(/(0(17 ,1&,'(1&( 62/,' (/(0(17 ,1&,'(1&( 62/,'


         72           72 
         72           72 
Section 5 5-37 Section 5 5-37

5.14 Element Mesh Generation 5.14 Element Mesh Generation

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This set of commands is used to generate finite element meshes. This set of commands is used to generate finite element meshes.
The procedure involves the definition of super-elements, which are The procedure involves the definition of super-elements, which are
subsequently divided into smaller elements. subsequently divided into smaller elements.

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

This is the second method for the generation of element incidences. This is the second method for the generation of element incidences.
If the user needs to divide a big element into a number of small If the user needs to divide a big element into a number of small
elements, he may use this facility which generates the joint elements, he may use this facility which generates the joint
numbers and joint coordinates, the element numbers and the numbers and joint coordinates, the element numbers and the
element incidences automatically. Use of this feature consists of element incidences automatically. Use of this feature consists of
two parts: two parts:

1. Definition of the super-element boundary points: A super- 1. Definition of the super-element boundary points: A super-
element may be defined by either 4 boundary points or 8 element may be defined by either 4 boundary points or 8
boundary points ( see Figure on next page). A boundary point boundary points ( see Figure on next page). A boundary point
is denoted by a unique alphabet (A-Z in upper case or a-z in is denoted by a unique alphabet (A-Z in upper case or a-z in
lower case) and its corresponding coordinates. Hence, any 4 or lower case) and its corresponding coordinates. Hence, any 4 or
8 of the 52 characters may be used to define the super-element 8 of the 52 characters may be used to define the super-element
boundary. If 4 points are used to define the super-element, each boundary. If 4 points are used to define the super-element, each
side of the super-element will be assumed to have a straight side of the super-element will be assumed to have a straight
edge connecting the 2 points defining that side. If 8 points are edge connecting the 2 points defining that side. If 8 points are
used, each side will be a smooth curve connecting the 3 points used, each side will be a smooth curve connecting the 3 points
defining that side. defining that side.
2. Generation of sub-elements: define the super-element using 2. Generation of sub-elements: define the super-element using
boundary points (4 or 8 as explained above) and specify the boundary points (4 or 8 as explained above) and specify the
total number of sub-elements required. total number of sub-elements required.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-38 Section 5 5-38 Section 5

*HQHUDO )RUPDW *HQHUDO )RUPDW

'(),1( 0(6+  &</  '(),1( 0(6+  &</ 


$L [L \L ]L   [ R \ R ] R $L [L \L ]L   [ R \ R ] R
    5&</      5&</ 
$M [M \M ]M $M [M \M ]M
 48$'5,/$7(5$/   48$'5,/$7(5$/ 
*(1(5$7( (/(0(17   *(1(5$7( (/(0(17  
 75,$1*8/$5   75,$1*8/$5 
0(6+ $ L $ M  Q  Q  0(6+ $ L $ M  Q  Q 
0(6+ $ P $ Q  Q  Q  0(6+ $ P $ Q  Q  Q 
   

XS WR  0(6+ LQSXW OLQHV XS WR  0(6+ LQSXW OLQHV

where where
A i , A j = Alphabets A - Z or alphabets a - z. That is max 52. A i , A j = Alphabets A - Z or alphabets a - z. That is max 52.
x i ,y i ,z i = Coordinates for boundary point A i . x i ,y i ,z i = Coordinates for boundary point A i .
If CYL or RCYL is defined, above coordinates will be If CYL or RCYL is defined, above coordinates will be
in cylindrical or reverse cylindrical coordinates system. in cylindrical or reverse cylindrical coordinates system.
Optional coordinates x o , y o and z o will be the cartesian Optional coordinates x o , y o and z o will be the cartesian
coordinates for the origin of the cylindrical coordinates. coordinates for the origin of the cylindrical coordinates.
Defaults to 0, 0, 0 if not provided. Defaults to 0, 0, 0 if not provided.
The 3 fields (x,y,z) may be replaced by a joint number The 3 fields (x,y,z) may be replaced by a joint number
whose coordinates have been defined in the JOINT whose coordinates have been defined in the JOINT
COORDINATE command by entering COORDINATE command by entering
A i JOINT jn instead. A i JOINT jn instead.
A i ,A j ,A k ... =A rectangular super-element defined by four or eight A i ,A j ,A k ... =A rectangular super-element defined by four or eight
boundary points. boundary points.
n1 = Number of elements along the side A i A j of the super- n1 = Number of elements along the side A i A j of the super-
element. (Must not exceed 20). element. (Must not exceed 20).
n2 = Number of elements along the side A j A k of the super- n2 = Number of elements along the side A j A k of the super-
element. (Must not exceed 20). element. (Must not exceed 20).

If n 2 is omitted, that is, only n 1 is provided, then n 1 will indicate If n 2 is omitted, that is, only n 1 is provided, then n 1 will indicate
the total number of elements within the super-element. In this case, the total number of elements within the super-element. In this case,
n 1 must be the square of an integer. n 1 must be the square of an integer.

/LPLWV /LPLWV

There is a limit of 20 Mesh commands. Up to 523 joints may be There is a limit of 20 Mesh commands. Up to 523 joints may be
generated and up to 700 elements. Total number of joints in the generated and up to 700 elements. Total number of joints in the
model after this command is completed may not exceed 20,000. model after this command is completed may not exceed 20,000.
Section 5 5-39 Section 5 5-39
1RWHV 1RWHV

All coordinates are in current unit system. While using this facility All coordinates are in current unit system. While using this facility
the user has to keep the following points in mind: the user has to keep the following points in mind:

1) All super-elements must be 4-noded or 8-noded. Generated 1) All super-elements must be 4-noded or 8-noded. Generated
elements for 4-noded super-elements will retain the straight- elements for 4-noded super-elements will retain the straight-
line edges of the super-elements, while joints of elements line edges of the super-elements, while joints of elements
generated from 8-noded super-elements will lie on a curved generated from 8-noded super-elements will lie on a curved
trajectory. trajectory.
) )
& &
' ( ' (
* *

+ +
' '

$ $
& &

$ % % $ % %

Mesh generated for a Mesh generated for a Mesh generated for a Mesh generated for a
4-noded super-element 8-noded super-element 4-noded super-element 8-noded super-element

2) 2 super-elements, which have a common boundary, must have 2) 2 super-elements, which have a common boundary, must have
the same number of elements along their common boundary. the same number of elements along their common boundary.

3) Sequence of super-elements - MESH commands define the 3) Sequence of super-elements - MESH commands define the
super-elements. The sequence of this MESH command should super-elements. The sequence of this MESH command should
be such that once one is defined, the next super-elements be such that once one is defined, the next super-elements
should be the ones connected to this. Therefore, for should be the ones connected to this. Therefore, for
convenience, the first super-element should be the one, which convenience, the first super-element should be the one, which
is connected by the largest number of super-elements. In the is connected by the largest number of super-elements. In the
example shown here for the tank, the bottom super-element is example shown here for the tank, the bottom super-element is
specified first. specified first.

4) This command must be used after the MEMBER INCIDENCE 4) This command must be used after the MEMBER INCIDENCE
& ELEMENT INCIDENCE section and before the MEMBER & ELEMENT INCIDENCE section and before the MEMBER
PROPERTIES & ELEMENT PROPERTIES section. The PROPERTIES & ELEMENT PROPERTIES section. The
elements that are created internally are numbered sequentially elements that are created internally are numbered sequentially
with an increment of one starting from the last member/element with an increment of one starting from the last member/element
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-40 Section 5 5-40 Section 5

number plus one. Similarly the additional joints created number plus one. Similarly the additional joints created
internally are numbered sequentially with an increment of one internally are numbered sequentially with an increment of one
starting from the last joint number plus one. It is advisable that starting from the last joint number plus one. It is advisable that
users keep the joint numbers and member/element numbers in a users keep the joint numbers and member/element numbers in a
sequence with an increment of one starting from one. sequence with an increment of one starting from one.

5) If there are members embracing a super-element which is being 5) If there are members embracing a super-element which is being
meshed, the users will have to take care of the required meshed, the users will have to take care of the required
additions/modifications in the MEMBER INCIDENCE section additions/modifications in the MEMBER INCIDENCE section
themselves since a few more new joints might appear on the themselves since a few more new joints might appear on the
existing common boundary as a result of meshing the super- existing common boundary as a result of meshing the super-
element. See the following figure: element. See the following figure:

$ % $ %

& &
' '

Note : If a member exists between points A and B, the user must breakup Note : If a member exists between points A and B, the user must breakup
this member into 4 parts. Members will not be meshed automatically. this member into 4 parts. Members will not be meshed automatically.

6) The sub-elements will have the same direction (Clockwise or 6) The sub-elements will have the same direction (Clockwise or
Anti-clockwise) as the super-elements. For a super-element Anti-clockwise) as the super-elements. For a super-element
bounded by four points A, B, C and D, if ABCD, BCDA etc. bounded by four points A, B, C and D, if ABCD, BCDA etc.
are in clockwise direction, CBAD or DCBA etc. are in anti- are in clockwise direction, CBAD or DCBA etc. are in anti-
clock wise direction. If the particular super-element is denoted clock wise direction. If the particular super-element is denoted
as ABCD, all the sub-elements in it will have a clockwise as ABCD, all the sub-elements in it will have a clockwise
element incidence in this example. element incidence in this example.

7) Element incidences of the generated sub-elements may be 7) Element incidences of the generated sub-elements may be
obtained by providing the command 'PRINT ELEMENT obtained by providing the command 'PRINT ELEMENT
INFORMATION' after the 'MESH...' command in the input file. INFORMATION' after the 'MESH...' command in the input file.

8) If the STAAD input file contains commands for JOINT 8) If the STAAD input file contains commands for JOINT
COORDINATES, MEMBER INCIDENCES, ELEMENT COORDINATES, MEMBER INCIDENCES, ELEMENT
INCIDENCES and MESH GENERATION, they should be INCIDENCES and MESH GENERATION, they should be
Section 5 5-41 Section 5 5-41
specified in the following order: specified in the following order:
STAAD SPACE STAAD SPACE
UNIT . . . UNIT . . .
JOINT COORDINATES JOINT COORDINATES
… …
MEMBER INCIDENCES MEMBER INCIDENCES
… …
ELEMENT INCIDENCES ELEMENT INCIDENCES
… …
DEFINE MESH DEFINE MESH
… …
GENERATE ELEMENT GENERATE ELEMENT
… …

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

The following section of input illustrates the use of MESH The following section of input illustrates the use of MESH
GENERATION facility, the user may compare this with the GENERATION facility, the user may compare this with the
geometry inputs for Example Prob. No. 10 in the STAAD example geometry inputs for Example Prob. No. 10 in the STAAD example
manual: manual:

* *

) & ) &

% %

+ +

( ' ( '

$ $

67$$' 63$&( 7$1. 6758&785( :,7+ 67$$' 63$&( 7$1. 6758&785( :,7+
0(6+ *(1(5$7,21 0(6+ *(1(5$7,21
81,7    81,7   
'(),1( 0(6+ '(),1( 0(6+
$     %     &    $     %     &   
'     (     )    '     (     )   
*     +    *     +   
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-42 Section 5 5-42 Section 5

*(1(5$7( (/(0(17 *(1(5$7( (/(0(17


0(6+ $(+'  0(6+ $(+' 
0(6+ ($%)  0(6+ ($%) 
0(6+ $'&%  0(6+ $'&% 
0(6+ +()*  0(6+ +()* 
0(6+ '+*&  0(6+ '+*& 
Typical generated Quad and Triangular elements: Typical generated Quad and Triangular elements:

Typical generated Typical generated Typical generated Typical generated


Quad elements Triangular elements Quad elements Triangular elements
Section 5 5-43 Section 5 5-43

5.15 Redefinition of Joint and Member 5.15 Redefinition of Joint and Member
Numbers Numbers

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command may be used to redefine JOINT and MEMBER This command may be used to redefine JOINT and MEMBER
numbers. Original JOINT and MEMBER numbers are substituted numbers. Original JOINT and MEMBER numbers are substituted
by new numbers. by new numbers.

*HQHUDO )RUPDW *HQHUDO )RUPDW

  -2,17  ;5$1*(     -2,17  ;5$1*(  


   <5$1*(   I I 67$57 L    <5$1*(   I I 67$57 L
68%67  0(0%(5  =5$1*(   68%67  0(0%(5  =5$1*(  
   
 &2/801   &2/801 

where, f 1 and f 2 are two range values of x, y, or z and i is the new where, f 1 and f 2 are two range values of x, y, or z and i is the new
starting number. starting number.

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

Joint and member numbers can be redefined in STAAD through the Joint and member numbers can be redefined in STAAD through the
use of the SUBSTITUTE command. After a new set of numbers is use of the SUBSTITUTE command. After a new set of numbers is
assigned, input and output values will be in accordance with the assigned, input and output values will be in accordance with the
new numbering scheme. The user can design numbering schemes new numbering scheme. The user can design numbering schemes
that will result in simple input specification as well as easy that will result in simple input specification as well as easy
interpretation of results. For example, all joints in first floor of a interpretation of results. For example, all joints in first floor of a
building may be renumbered as 101, 102 ...., all second floor joints building may be renumbered as 101, 102 ...., all second floor joints
may be renumbered as 201, 202 ....., etc. may be renumbered as 201, 202 ....., etc.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

81,7 0(7(5 81,7 0(7(5


68%67 -2,17 <5   67$57  68%67 -2,17 <5   67$57 
68%67 &2/801 67$57  68%67 &2/801 67$57 
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-44 Section 5 5-44 Section 5

Joints with Y coordinates ranging from 9.99 to 10 meters will have Joints with Y coordinates ranging from 9.99 to 10 meters will have
a new number starting from 101. Columns will be renumbered a new number starting from 101. Columns will be renumbered
starting with the new number 901. starting with the new number 901.

1RWH 1RWH

Meaningful respecification of JOINT and MEMBER numbers may Meaningful respecification of JOINT and MEMBER numbers may
significantly improve ease of interpretation of results. significantly improve ease of interpretation of results.
This command may be in between incidence commands: This command may be in between incidence commands:
MEMBER INCIDENCE MEMBER INCIDENCE
SUBSTITUTE SUBSTITUTE
ELEMENT INCIDENCE ELEMENT INCIDENCE
Section 5 5-45 Section 5 5-45

5.16 Listing of Members/Elements/Joints by 5.16 Listing of Members/Elements/Joints by


Specification of GROUPS Specification of GROUPS

This command allows the user to specify a group of This command allows the user to specify a group of
members/elements/joints and save the information using a 'group- members/elements/joints and save the information using a 'group-
name'. The 'group-name' may be subsequently used in the input file name'. The 'group-name' may be subsequently used in the input file
instead of a member/element/joint list to specify other attributes. instead of a member/element/joint list to specify other attributes.
This extremely useful feature allows avoiding of multiple This extremely useful feature allows avoiding of multiple
specifications of the same member/joint list. Following is the specifications of the same member/joint list. Following is the
general format required for the GROUP command. general format required for the GROUP command.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

67$57 *5283 '(),1,7,21 67$57 *5283 '(),1,7,21

*(20(75< *(20(75<
B JURXSQDPH PHPEHUHOHPHQWVROLGOLVW B JURXSQDPH PHPEHUHOHPHQWVROLGOLVW
 GHIDXOW  GHIDXOW

25 25

-2,17 -2,17
B JURXSQDPH MRLQWOLVW B JURXSQDPH MRLQWOLVW
 
0(0%(5 0(0%(5
B JURXSQDPH PHPEHUOLVW B JURXSQDPH PHPEHUOLVW
 
(/(0(17 (/(0(17
B JURXSQDPH HOHPHQWOLVW B JURXSQDPH HOHPHQWOLVW
 
62/,' 62/,'
B JURXSQDPH VROLG HOHPHQWOLVW B JURXSQDPH VROLG HOHPHQWOLVW
 

(1' *5283 '(),1,7,21 (1' *5283 '(),1,7,21


STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-46 Section 5 5-46 Section 5

where, where,
group-name = an alphanumeric name specified by the user to group-name = an alphanumeric name specified by the user to
identify the group. The group-name must start with identify the group. The group-name must start with
the '_' (underscore) character and is limited to 16 the '_' (underscore) character and is limited to 16
characters. characters.
member-list = the list of members/elements/solids belonging to member-list = the list of members/elements/solids belonging to
the group. TO, BY, ALL, BEAM, PLATE, and the group. TO, BY, ALL, BEAM, PLATE, and
SOLID are permitted. ALL means all members+ SOLID are permitted. ALL means all members+
plates+ solids; BEAM means all beams; PLATE all plates+ solids; BEAM means all beams; PLATE all
plates; and SOLID all solids. plates; and SOLID all solids.
joint-list = the list of joints belonging to the group. TO, BY, joint-list = the list of joints belonging to the group. TO, BY,
and ALL are permitted. and ALL are permitted.

1RWHV 1RWHV

1) The GROUP definition must start with the START GROUP 1) The GROUP definition must start with the START GROUP
DEFINITION command and end with the END command. DEFINITION command and end with the END command.
2) More than one GROUP name may be specified within the same 2) More than one GROUP name may be specified within the same
definition specification. definition specification.
3) The words JOINT, MEMBER, ELEMENT and SOLID may be 3) The words JOINT, MEMBER, ELEMENT and SOLID may be
provided if the user wishes to identify the group name and lists provided if the user wishes to identify the group name and lists
with those specific items. However, if the group name and list with those specific items. However, if the group name and list
is merely a means of grouping together more than one type of is merely a means of grouping together more than one type of
structural component under a single heading, the word structural component under a single heading, the word
GEOMETRY may be provided. In the absence of any of those GEOMETRY may be provided. In the absence of any of those
five words (GEOMETRY, JOINT, MEMBER, ELEMENT or five words (GEOMETRY, JOINT, MEMBER, ELEMENT or
SOLID), the list is assumed to be that for GEOMETRY. SOLID), the list is assumed to be that for GEOMETRY.
4) The same joint or member/element number may be included in 4) The same joint or member/element number may be included in
up to 4 groups. Multiple definitions are useful for output but up to 4 groups. Multiple definitions are useful for output but
can be ambiguous for input data such as constants, section can be ambiguous for input data such as constants, section
property, release, etc. property, release, etc.
5) If two or more consecutively entered groups have the same 5) If two or more consecutively entered groups have the same
name, then they will be merged. If not consecutive, the second name, then they will be merged. If not consecutive, the second
entry of the same name will be ignored. entry of the same name will be ignored.
Section 5 5-47 Section 5 5-47
([DPSOH ([DPSOH

67$57 *5283 '(),1,7,21 67$57 *5283 '(),1,7,21


B75866  72    B75866  72   
B%($0  72  B%($0  72 
(1' (1'
0(0%(5 3523(57,(6 0(0%(5 3523(57,(6
B75866 7$ /' / B75866 7$ /' /
B%($0 7$ 67 :; B%($0 7$ 67 :;

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

67$57 *5283 '(),1,7,21 67$57 *5283 '(),1,7,21


-2,17 -2,17
B7$*$  72  B7$*$  72 
0(0%(5 0(0%(5
B7$*%  72  B7$*%  72 
*(20(75< *(20(75<
B7$*&  72  B7$*&  72 
(1' (1'

0(0%(5 3523(57,(6 0(0%(5 3523(57,(6


B7$*% 7$ /' / B7$*% 7$ /' /
B7$*& 7$ 67 :; B7$*& 7$ 67 :;
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-48 Section 5 5-48 Section 5

5.17 Rotation of Structure Geometry 5.17 Rotation of Structure Geometry

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command may be used to rotate the currently defined joint This command may be used to rotate the currently defined joint
coordinates (and the attached members/elements) about the global coordinates (and the attached members/elements) about the global
axes. axes.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

; G  ; G 
3(5)250 527$7,21 < G  3(5)250 527$7,21 < G 
= G  = G 

where, d 1 , d 2 , d 3 are the rotations (in degrees) about the X, Y and where, d 1 , d 2 , d 3 are the rotations (in degrees) about the X, Y and
Z global axes respectively. This command may be entered after the Z global axes respectively. This command may be entered after the
Joint Coordinates or between two Joint Coordinate commands or Joint Coordinates or between two Joint Coordinate commands or
after all Member/Element Incidences are specified. This command after all Member/Element Incidences are specified. This command
can be used to rotate the structure geometry (defined prior to this can be used to rotate the structure geometry (defined prior to this
command) by any desired angle about any global axis. The rotated command) by any desired angle about any global axis. The rotated
configuration is used for analysis and design. While specifying this configuration is used for analysis and design. While specifying this
command, note that the sense of the rotation should conform to the command, note that the sense of the rotation should conform to the
right hand rule. right hand rule.

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

This command can be used to rotate the geometric shape through This command can be used to rotate the geometric shape through
any desired angle about any global axis. The rotated configuration any desired angle about any global axis. The rotated configuration
can be used for analysis and design. can be used for analysis and design.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

3(5)250 527$7,21 ;  =  3(5)250 527$7,21 ;  = 


Section 5 5-49 Section 5 5-49

5.18 Inactive/Delete Specification 5.18 Inactive/Delete Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This set of commands may be used to temporarily INACTIVATE or This set of commands may be used to temporarily INACTIVATE or
permanently DELETE specified JOINTs or MEMBERs. permanently DELETE specified JOINTs or MEMBERs.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

,1$&7,9( 0(0%(56 PHPEHUOLVW ,1$&7,9( 0(0%(56 PHPEHUOLVW

 0(0%(56 PHPEHUOLVW   0(0%(56 PHPEHUOLVW 


'(/(7(   '(/(7(  
 -2,176 MRLQWOLVW   -2,176 MRLQWOLVW 

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

These commands can be used to specify that certain joints or These commands can be used to specify that certain joints or
members be deactivated or completely deleted from a structure. members be deactivated or completely deleted from a structure.
The INACTIVE command makes the members temporarily inactive; The INACTIVE command makes the members temporarily inactive;
the user must re-activate them during the later part of the input for the user must re-activate them during the later part of the input for
further processing. The DELETE command will completely delete further processing. The DELETE command will completely delete
the members from the structure; the user cannot re-activate them. the members from the structure; the user cannot re-activate them.
The Delete Joint command must be immediately after the Joint The Delete Joint command must be immediately after the Joint
Coordinates. The member commands must be provided immediately Coordinates. The member commands must be provided immediately
after all member/element incidences are provided. after all member/element incidences are provided.

1RWHV 1RWHV

a) The DELETE MEMBER command will automatically delete all a) The DELETE MEMBER command will automatically delete all
joints associated with deleted members, provided the joints are joints associated with deleted members, provided the joints are
not connected by any other active members or elements. not connected by any other active members or elements.
b) The DELETE MEMBER command will also delete all the b) The DELETE MEMBER command will also delete all the
joints, which were not connected to the structure in the first joints, which were not connected to the structure in the first
place. For example, such joints may have been generated for place. For example, such joints may have been generated for
ease of input of joint coordinates and were intended to be ease of input of joint coordinates and were intended to be
deleted. Hence, if a DELETE MEMBER command is used, a deleted. Hence, if a DELETE MEMBER command is used, a
DELETE JOINT command should not be used. DELETE JOINT command should not be used.
c) The DELETE MEMBER command is applicable for deletion of c) The DELETE MEMBER command is applicable for deletion of
members as well as elements. If the list of members to be members as well as elements. If the list of members to be
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-50 Section 5 5-50 Section 5

deleted extends beyond one line, it should be continued on to deleted extends beyond one line, it should be continued on to
the next line by providing a blank space followed by a hyphen the next line by providing a blank space followed by a hyphen
(-) at the end of the current line. (-) at the end of the current line.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

,1$&7,9( 0(0%(56   72  ,1$&7,9( 0(0%(56   72 


'(/(7( 0(0%(56  72   '(/(7( 0(0%(56  72  

d) The INACTIVE MEMBER command cannot be used in d) The INACTIVE MEMBER command cannot be used in
situations where inactivating a member results in joints situations where inactivating a member results in joints
becoming unconnected in space. becoming unconnected in space.
e) The INACTIVE MEMBER command should not be used if the e) The INACTIVE MEMBER command should not be used if the
MEMBER TENSION/COMPRESSION command is used. MEMBER TENSION/COMPRESSION command is used.
f) The INACTIVated members may be restored for further f) The INACTIVated members may be restored for further
processes (such as an analysis or design for a 2 nd set of load processes (such as an analysis or design for a 2 nd set of load
cases) by using the CHANGE command. See Section 5.37 and cases) by using the CHANGE command. See Section 5.37 and
Example 4 for more information. Example 4 for more information.
g) The DELETE MEMBER command should be used to delete g) The DELETE MEMBER command should be used to delete
elements too. Specify the command as DELETE MEMBER j elements too. Specify the command as DELETE MEMBER j
where j is the element number of the element you wish to where j is the element number of the element you wish to
delete. In the example shown above, 29 to 34 and 43 are delete. In the example shown above, 29 to 34 and 43 are
element numbers. element numbers.
h) Loads that have been defined on members declared as h) Loads that have been defined on members declared as
INACTIVE members will not be considered in the analysis. INACTIVE members will not be considered in the analysis.
This applies to SELFWEIGHT, MEMBER LOADS, This applies to SELFWEIGHT, MEMBER LOADS,
PRESTRESS and POSTSTRESS LOADS, TEMPERATURE PRESTRESS and POSTSTRESS LOADS, TEMPERATURE
LOADs, etc. LOADs, etc.
i) The DELETE JOINT command must be before the incidence i) The DELETE JOINT command must be before the incidence
commands. commands.
Section 5 5-51 Section 5 5-51

5.19 User Steel Table Specification 5.19 User Steel Table Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

STAAD allows the user to create and use customized Steel Section STAAD allows the user to create and use customized Steel Section
Table (s) for Property specification, Code checking and Member Table (s) for Property specification, Code checking and Member
Selection. This set of commands may be used to create the table(s) Selection. This set of commands may be used to create the table(s)
and provide necessary data. and provide necessary data.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

67$57 86(5 7$%/( 67$57 86(5 7$%/(


7$%/( L I Q 7$%/( L I Q
VHFWLRQW\SH VHFWLRQW\SH
VHFWLRQQDPH VHFWLRQQDPH
SURSHUW\VSHF SURSHUW\VSHF
(1' (1'

where, where,
i1 = table number (1 to 20). During the analysis process, i1 = table number (1 to 20). During the analysis process,
the data in each user provided table is stored in a the data in each user provided table is stored in a
corresponding file with an extension .U0?. For corresponding file with an extension .U0?. For
example, the data of the 5th table is stored in .U05. example, the data of the 5th table is stored in .U05.
The first part of the input file name is the same as The first part of the input file name is the same as
that of the STAAD input file. These files are located that of the STAAD input file. These files are located
in the same working directory as the input file. in the same working directory as the input file.
Hence, they may later be used as external user Hence, they may later be used as external user
provided tables for other input files. provided tables for other input files.
fn = external file name containing the section type, name fn = external file name containing the section type, name
and corresponding properties (up to 16 characters) and corresponding properties (up to 16 characters)
section-type = a steel section name including: WIDE FLANGE, section-type = a steel section name including: WIDE FLANGE,
CHANNEL, ANGLE, DOUBLE ANGLE, TEE, PIPE, CHANNEL, ANGLE, DOUBLE ANGLE, TEE, PIPE,
TUBE, GENERAL, ISECTION & PRISMATIC. TUBE, GENERAL, ISECTION & PRISMATIC.
section-name = Any user designated section name, use 1 to 12 section-name = Any user designated section name, use 1 to 12
characters. First three characters of Pipes and Tubes characters. First three characters of Pipes and Tubes
must be PIP and TUB respectively. Only alphanumeric must be PIP and TUB respectively. Only alphanumeric
characters and digits are allowed for defining section characters and digits are allowed for defining section
names. (Blank spaces, asterisks, question marks, colon, names. (Blank spaces, asterisks, question marks, colon,
semi-colon etc. are not permitted.) semi-colon etc. are not permitted.)
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-52 Section 5 5-52 Section 5

property-spec = Properties for the section. The requirements are property-spec = Properties for the section. The requirements are
different for each section type as follows. Note that different for each section type as follows. Note that
shear areas AY and AZ must be provided to ensure shear areas AY and AZ must be provided to ensure
proper shear stress or shear strength calculations proper shear stress or shear strength calculations
during design. Also, SY, SZ, IZ and IY must be during design. Also, SY, SZ, IZ and IY must be
provided for design provided for design
The default length units for properties are the current The default length units for properties are the current
units. If UNIT command is entered within the User units. If UNIT command is entered within the User
Table in the input file then those units become the Table in the input file then those units become the
current units. However, a UNIT command on an current units. However, a UNIT command on an
external file only affects that file and has no effect on external file only affects that file and has no effect on
the units in subsequent input file commands. The user the units in subsequent input file commands. The user
may specify the desired length unit by using the UNIT may specify the desired length unit by using the UNIT
command as the first command in the table (see command as the first command in the table (see
example following this description). example following this description).
If data is from input file, then use up to 3 lines of input If data is from input file, then use up to 3 lines of input
per property-spec (end all but last with a hyphen, - ). per property-spec (end all but last with a hyphen, - ).
If data is from external file, then use only one line, but If data is from external file, then use only one line, but
it can be up to 250 characters long. it can be up to 250 characters long.

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

Following section types are available under this option. Following section types are available under this option.

Wide Flange Wide Flange


1) AX =Cross section area 1) AX =Cross section area
2) D = Depth of the section 2) D = Depth of the section
3) TW =Thickness of web 3) TW =Thickness of web
4) WF =Width of the flange 4) WF =Width of the flange
5) TF =Thickness of flange 5) TF =Thickness of flange
6) IZ =Moment of inertia about local z-axis (usually strong axis) 6) IZ =Moment of inertia about local z-axis (usually strong axis)
7) IY =Moment of inertia about local y-axis 7) IY =Moment of inertia about local y-axis
8) IX =Torsional constant 8) IX =Torsional constant
9) AY =Shear area in local y-axis. If zero, shear deformation is 9) AY =Shear area in local y-axis. If zero, shear deformation is
ignored in the analysis. ignored in the analysis.
10) AZ = Same as above except in local z-axis. 10) AZ = Same as above except in local z-axis.
Section 5 5-53 Section 5 5-53
Channel Channel
1) AX, 2) D, 3) TW, 4) WF, 5) TF, 6) IZ, 7) IY, 8) IX, 9) CZ, 1) AX, 2) D, 3) TW, 4) WF, 5) TF, 6) IZ, 7) IY, 8) IX, 9) CZ,
10) AY, 11) AZ 10) AY, 11) AZ
< <
&= &=

Angle Angle
1) D, 2) WF, 3) TF, 4) R, 5) AY, 6) AZ 1) D, 2) WF, 3) TF, 4) R, 5) AY, 6) AZ

R = radius of gyration about principal axis, shown as r(Z-Z) in the R = radius of gyration about principal axis, shown as r(Z-Z) in the
AISC manual. Must not be zero. AISC manual. Must not be zero.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-54 Section 5 5-54 Section 5

Double Angle Double Angle


1) D, 2) WF, 3) TF, 4) SP, 5) IZ, 6) IY, 7) IX, 8) CY, 9) AY, 1) D, 2) WF, 3) TF, 4) SP, 5) IZ, 6) IY, 7) IX, 8) CY, 9) AY,
10) AZ 10) AZ

< <
:) :)

&< &<
= =

63 63

Tee Tee
1) AX, 2) D, 3) WF, 4) TF, 5) TW, 6) IZ, 7) IY, 8) IX, 9) CY, 1) AX, 2) D, 3) WF, 4) TF, 5) TW, 6) IZ, 7) IY, 8) IX, 9) CY,
10) AY, 11) AZ 10) AY, 11) AZ

< <
&< &<

= =

Pipe Pipe
1) OD = Outer diameter 1) OD = Outer diameter
2) ID = Inner diameter 2) ID = Inner diameter
3) AY, 4) AZ 3) AY, 4) AZ
Section 5 5-55 Section 5 5-55
Tube Tube
1) AX, 2 ) D, 3) WF, 4) TF, 5) IZ, 6) IY, 7) IX, 8) AY, 9) AZ 1) AX, 2 ) D, 3) WF, 4) TF, 5) IZ, 6) IY, 7) IX, 8) AY, 9) AZ

General General
The following cross-sectional properties should be used for this The following cross-sectional properties should be used for this
section-type. Note that this facility allows the user to specify a section-type. Note that this facility allows the user to specify a
built-up or unconventional Steel Section. Provide both the Y and Z built-up or unconventional Steel Section. Provide both the Y and Z
parameters for design or code checking. parameters for design or code checking.

1) AX = Cross section area. 1) AX = Cross section area.


2) D = Depth of the section. 2) D = Depth of the section.
3) TD = Thickness associated with section element parallel to 3) TD = Thickness associated with section element parallel to
depth (usually web). To be used to check depth (usually web). To be used to check
depth/thickness ratio. depth/thickness ratio.
4) B = Width of the section. 4) B = Width of the section.
5) TB = Thickness associated with section element parallel to 5) TB = Thickness associated with section element parallel to
flange. To be used to check width/thickness ratio. flange. To be used to check width/thickness ratio.
6) IZ = Moment of inertia about local z-axis. 6) IZ = Moment of inertia about local z-axis.
7) IY = Moment of inertia about local y-axis. 7) IY = Moment of inertia about local y-axis.
8) IX = Torsional Constant. 8) IX = Torsional Constant.
9) SZ = Section modulus about local z-axis. 9) SZ = Section modulus about local z-axis.
10) SY = Section modulus about local y-axis. 10) SY = Section modulus about local y-axis.
11) AY = Shear area for shear parallel to local y-axis. 11) AY = Shear area for shear parallel to local y-axis.
12) AZ = Shear area for shear parallel to local z-axis. 12) AZ = Shear area for shear parallel to local z-axis.
13) PZ = Plastic modulus about local z-axis. 13) PZ = Plastic modulus about local z-axis.
14) PY = Plastic modulus about local y-axis. 14) PY = Plastic modulus about local y-axis.
15) HSS = Warping constant for lateral torsional buckling 15) HSS = Warping constant for lateral torsional buckling
calculations. calculations.
16) DEE = Depth of web. For rolled sections, distance between 16) DEE = Depth of web. For rolled sections, distance between
fillets should be provided. fillets should be provided.

Note: Note:
Properties PZ, PY, HSS and DEE must be provided for code Properties PZ, PY, HSS and DEE must be provided for code
checking/member selection per plastic and limit state based checking/member selection per plastic and limit state based
codes (AISC LRFD, British, French, German and codes (AISC LRFD, British, French, German and
Scandinavian codes). For codes based on allowable stress Scandinavian codes). For codes based on allowable stress
design (AISC-ASD, AASHTO, Indian codes), zero values design (AISC-ASD, AASHTO, Indian codes), zero values
may be provided for these properties. may be provided for these properties.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-56 Section 5 5-56 Section 5

Isection Isection
This section type may be used to specify a generalized This section type may be used to specify a generalized
I-shaped section. The cross-sectional properties required are listed I-shaped section. The cross-sectional properties required are listed
below. Note that this facility can be utilized to specify tapered I- below. Note that this facility can be utilized to specify tapered I-
shapes. shapes.

1) DWW = Depth of section at start node. 1) DWW = Depth of section at start node.
2) TWW = Thickness of web. 2) TWW = Thickness of web.
3) DWW1 = Depth of section at end node. 3) DWW1 = Depth of section at end node.
4) BFF = Width of top flange. 4) BFF = Width of top flange.
5) TFF = Thickness of top flange. 5) TFF = Thickness of top flange.
6) BFF1 = Width of bottom flange. 6) BFF1 = Width of bottom flange.
7) TFF1 = Thickness of bottom flange. 7) TFF1 = Thickness of bottom flange.
8) AYF = Shear area for shear parallel to Y-axis. 8) AYF = Shear area for shear parallel to Y-axis.
9) AZF = Shear area for shear parallel to Z-axis. 9) AZF = Shear area for shear parallel to Z-axis.
10) XIF = Torsional constant ( IX or J). 10) XIF = Torsional constant ( IX or J).

%)) %))

7)) 7))

7:: ':: 7:: '::

7)) 7))
%)) %))

':: ':: ':: '::

NOTE: NOTE:
1) DWW should never be less than DWW1. The user should 1) DWW should never be less than DWW1. The user should
provide the member incidences accordingly. provide the member incidences accordingly.
2) The user is allowed the following options for the values AYF, 2) The user is allowed the following options for the values AYF,
AZF and XIF. AZF and XIF.
Section 5 5-57 Section 5 5-57
a) If positive values are provided, they are used directly a) If positive values are provided, they are used directly
by the program. by the program.
b) If zero is provided, the program calculates the properties b) If zero is provided, the program calculates the properties
using the following formula. using the following formula.
AYF = D x TWW (where D =Depth at section under AYF = D x TWW (where D =Depth at section under
consideration) consideration)

AZF = 0.66 ((BFF x TFF) + (BFF1 x TFF1)) AZF = 0.66 ((BFF x TFF) + (BFF1 x TFF1))

XIF = 1/3 ((BFF x TFF 3 ) + (DEE x TWW 3 ) + (BFF1 x XIF = 1/3 ((BFF x TFF 3 ) + (DEE x TWW 3 ) + (BFF1 x
TFF1 3 )) TFF1 3 ))
(where DEE = Depth of web of section) (where DEE = Depth of web of section)
c) If negative values are provided, they are applied as factors c) If negative values are provided, they are applied as factors
on the corresponding value(s) calculated by the program on the corresponding value(s) calculated by the program
using the above formula. The factor applied is always the using the above formula. The factor applied is always the
absolute of the value provided, i.e. if the user provides the absolute of the value provided, i.e. if the user provides the
value of XIF as -1.3, then the program will multiply the value of XIF as -1.3, then the program will multiply the
value of XIF, calculated by the above formula, by a factor value of XIF, calculated by the above formula, by a factor
of 1.3. of 1.3.

Prismatic Prismatic
The property-spec for the PRISMATIC section-type is as follows - The property-spec for the PRISMATIC section-type is as follows -

1) AX = Cross-section area 1) AX = Cross-section area


2) IZ = Moment of inertia about the local z-axis 2) IZ = Moment of inertia about the local z-axis
3) IY = Moment of inertia about the local y-axis 3) IY = Moment of inertia about the local y-axis
4) IX = Torsional constant 4) IX = Torsional constant
5) AY = Shear area for shear parallel to local y-axis. 5) AY = Shear area for shear parallel to local y-axis.
6) AZ = Shear area for shear parallel to local z-axis. 6) AZ = Shear area for shear parallel to local z-axis.
7) YD = Depth of the section in the direction of the local y-axis. 7) YD = Depth of the section in the direction of the local y-axis.
8) ZD = Depth of the section in the direction of the local z-axis. 8) ZD = Depth of the section in the direction of the local z-axis.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

67$57 86(5 7$%/( 67$57 86(5 7$%/(


7$%/(  7$%/( 
81,7    81,7   
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-58 Section 5 5-58 Section 5

:,'( )/$1*( :,'( )/$1*(


:; :;
                   
:; :;
                   
:; :;
                   
7$%/(  7$%/( 
81,7    81,7   
$1*/(6 $1*/(6
/ /
           
/ /
           
(1' (1'

* Note that these section-names must be provided in ascending * Note that these section-names must be provided in ascending
order by weight, since the member-selection process uses these order by weight, since the member-selection process uses these
tables and the iteration starts from the top. The above example tables and the iteration starts from the top. The above example
can also be input as follows: can also be input as follows:

67$57 86(5 7$%/( 67$57 86(5 7$%/(


7$%/(  7),/( 7$%/(  7),/(
7$%/(  7),/( 7$%/(  7),/(
(1' (1'

Where TFILE1 and TFILE2 are names of files which must be Where TFILE1 and TFILE2 are names of files which must be
created prior to running STAAD, and where the file TFILE1 will created prior to running STAAD, and where the file TFILE1 will
contain the following: contain the following:
Section 5 5-59 Section 5 5-59

81,7    81,7   
:,'( )/$1*( :,'( )/$1*(
:; :;
                   
:; :;
                   
:; :;
                   

and the file TFILE2 will contain: and the file TFILE2 will contain:

81,7    81,7   
$1*/(6 $1*/(6
/ /
           
/ /
           

1RWHV 1RWHV

The User-Provided Steel Table(s) may be created and maintained The User-Provided Steel Table(s) may be created and maintained
as separate file(s). The same files may be used for all models using as separate file(s). The same files may be used for all models using
sections from these tables. These files should reside in the same sections from these tables. These files should reside in the same
directory where the input file is located. On each file the first table directory where the input file is located. On each file the first table
should contain a UNITS command. should contain a UNITS command.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-60 Section 5 5-60 Section 5

5.20 Member Property Specification 5.20 Member Property Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This set of commands may be used for specification of section This set of commands may be used for specification of section
properties for frame members. properties for frame members.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

$8675$/,$1  $8675$/,$1 
&$1$',$1  &$1$',$1 
(8523($1  (8523($1 
)5(1&+  )5(1&+ 
0(0%(5 3523(57,(6 ,1',$1  0(0%(5 3523(57,(6 ,1',$1 
$0(5,&$1  $0(5,&$1 
%5,7,6+  %5,7,6+ 
&+,1$  &+,1$ 
.25($  .25($ 
&2/'  &2/' 
$/80,180  $/80,180 
'87&+  '87&+ 
63$,1  63$,1 
5866,$  5866,$ 
*(50$1  *(50$1 
-$3$1(6(  -$3$1(6( 
 7$%/( W\SHVSHF WDEOHQDPH   7$%/( W\SHVSHF WDEOHQDPH 
 DGGLWLRQDOVSHF   DGGLWLRQDOVSHF 
PHPEHUOLVW  35,60$7,& SURSHUW\VSHF  PHPEHUOLVW  35,60$7,& SURSHUW\VSHF 
 7$3(5(' DUJXPHQWOLVW   7$3(5(' DUJXPHQWOLVW 
 837$%/( L1 VHFWLRQQDPH   837$%/( L1 VHFWLRQQDPH 
 $66,*1 SURILOHVSHF   $66,*1 SURILOHVSHF 

AMERICAN, BRITISH, EUROPEAN (etc.) option will instruct the AMERICAN, BRITISH, EUROPEAN (etc.) option will instruct the
program to pick up properties from the appropriate steel table. The program to pick up properties from the appropriate steel table. The
default depends on the country of distribution. default depends on the country of distribution.

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

This command initiates the specification of MEMBER This command initiates the specification of MEMBER
PROPERTY. Following are the various options available: PROPERTY. Following are the various options available:
a) Specification from built-in steel tables. (Section 5.20.1) a) Specification from built-in steel tables. (Section 5.20.1)
b) Specification of prismatic properties. (Section 5.20.2) b) Specification of prismatic properties. (Section 5.20.2)
Section 5 5-61 Section 5 5-61
c) Specification of tapered members. (Section 5.20.3) c) Specification of tapered members. (Section 5.20.3)
d) Specification from user provided table. (Section 5.20.4) d) Specification from user provided table. (Section 5.20.4)
e) Specification by ASSIGNing a profile. (Section 5.20.5) e) Specification by ASSIGNing a profile. (Section 5.20.5)

Each specification is described in detail in the following sections. Each specification is described in detail in the following sections.
Examples are available in Section 5.20.6. Examples are available in Section 5.20.6.

The MEMBER PROPERTY command may be extended to multiple The MEMBER PROPERTY command may be extended to multiple
lines by ending all lines but the last with a space and hyphen (-). lines by ending all lines but the last with a space and hyphen (-).
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-62 Section 5 5-62 Section 5

5.20.1 Specifying Properties from Steel Table 5.20.1 Specifying Properties from Steel Table

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

The following commands are used for specifying section properties The following commands are used for specifying section properties
from built-in steel table(s). from built-in steel table(s).

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

W\SHVSHF  WDEOHQDPH DGGLWLRQDOVSHF W\SHVSHF  WDEOHQDPH DGGLWLRQDOVSHF

67  67 
5$  5$ 
'  ' 
/'  /' 
6'  6' 
W\SHVSHF 7  W\SHVSHF 7 
&0  &0 
7&  7& 
%&  %& 
7%  7% 

ST specifies single section from the standard built-in tables. ST specifies single section from the standard built-in tables.
RA specifies single angle with reverse Y-Z axes (see Section RA specifies single angle with reverse Y-Z axes (see Section
1.5.2). 1.5.2).
D specifies double channel. D specifies double channel.
LD specifies long leg, back to back, double angle. LD specifies long leg, back to back, double angle.
SD specifies short leg, back to back, double angle. SD specifies short leg, back to back, double angle.
T specifies tee section cut from I shaped beams. T specifies tee section cut from I shaped beams.
CM specifies composite section, available with I shaped beams. CM specifies composite section, available with I shaped beams.
TC specifies beams with top cover plate. TC specifies beams with top cover plate.
BC specifies beams with bottom cover plate. BC specifies beams with bottom cover plate.
TB specifies beams with top and bottom cover plates. TB specifies beams with top and bottom cover plates.

table-name = Table section name like W8X18, C15X33 etc. table-name = Table section name like W8X18, C15X33 etc.
The documentation on steel design per individual country codes The documentation on steel design per individual country codes
contains information regarding their steel section specification contains information regarding their steel section specification
also. For details on specifying sections from the American steel also. For details on specifying sections from the American steel
tables, see Section 2.2.1 of this manual. tables, see Section 2.2.1 of this manual.
Section 5 5-63 Section 5 5-63

63 I  63 I 
:3 I  :3 I 
7+ I  7+ I 
:7 I  :7 I 
DGGLWLRQDOVSHF '7 I  DGGLWLRQDOVSHF '7 I 
2' I  2' I 
,' I  ,' I 
&7 I  &7 I 
)& I  )& I 
&: I &: I

SP f 1 = This set describes the spacing (f 1 ) between angles or SP f 1 = This set describes the spacing (f 1 ) between angles or
channels if double angles or double channels are used. f 1 channels if double angles or double channels are used. f 1
defaults to 0.0 if not given. defaults to 0.0 if not given.
WP f 2 = Width (f 2 ) of the cover plate if a cover plate is used with WP f 2 = Width (f 2 ) of the cover plate if a cover plate is used with
I shaped sections. I shaped sections.
See Section TH f 3 = Thickness (f 3 ) of plates or tubes. See Section TH f 3 = Thickness (f 3 ) of plates or tubes.
1.7.2 WT f 4 = Width (f 4 ) of tubes, where TUBE is the table-name. 1.7.2 WT f 4 = Width (f 4 ) of tubes, where TUBE is the table-name.
DT f 5 = Depth (f 5 ) of tubes. DT f 5 = Depth (f 5 ) of tubes.
OD f 6 = Outside diameter (f 6 ) of pipes, where PIPE is the table- OD f 6 = Outside diameter (f 6 ) of pipes, where PIPE is the table-
name. name.
ID f 7 = Inside diameter (f 7 ) of pipes. ID f 7 = Inside diameter (f 7 ) of pipes.
CT f 8 = Concrete thickness (f 8 ) for composite sections. CT f 8 = Concrete thickness (f 8 ) for composite sections.
FC f 9 = Compressive strength (f 9 ) of the concrete for composite FC f 9 = Compressive strength (f 9 ) of the concrete for composite
sections. sections.
CW f 10 = Concrete width (f 10 ) for composite sections. CW f 10 = Concrete width (f 10 ) for composite sections.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

See Section 5.20.6 See Section 5.20.6


STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-64 Section 5 5-64 Section 5

1RWHV 1RWHV

All values f1-9 must be supplied in current units. All values f1-9 must be supplied in current units.

Some important points to note in the case of the composite section Some important points to note in the case of the composite section
are: are:

1) The width of the concrete slab (CW) (if not entered) is 1) The width of the concrete slab (CW) (if not entered) is
assumed to be the width of the top flange of the steel section + assumed to be the width of the top flange of the steel section +
16 times the thickness of the slab. 16 times the thickness of the slab.
2) In order to calculate the section properties of the cross-section, 2) In order to calculate the section properties of the cross-section,
the modular ratio is calculated assuming that: the modular ratio is calculated assuming that:
Es= Modulus of elasticity of steel = 29000 Ksi. Es= Modulus of elasticity of steel = 29000 Ksi.
Ec= Modulus of elasticity of concrete = 1802.5 FC Ksi Ec= Modulus of elasticity of concrete = 1802.5 FC Ksi
where FC (in Ksi) is defined earlier. where FC (in Ksi) is defined earlier.
Section 5 5-65 Section 5 5-65

5.20.2 Prismatic Property Specification 5.20.2 Prismatic Property Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

The following commands are used to specify section properties for The following commands are used to specify section properties for
prismatic cross-sections. prismatic cross-sections.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

For the PRISMATIC specification, properties are provided directly For the PRISMATIC specification, properties are provided directly
(End each line but last with a hyphen “-“) as follows: (End each line but last with a hyphen “-“) as follows:

$; I  $; I 
,; I  ,; I 
,< I  =' ='
,< I  =' ='

,= I  ,= I 
SURSHUW\VSHF $< I  <' SURSHUW\VSHF $< I  <'
 
<' <% <' <%

$= I $= I

<' I  <' I 
=' I  =% =%
=' I  =% =%

<% I  <% I 
76(&7,21 75$3(=2,'$/ 6(&7,21 76(&7,21 75$3(=2,'$/ 6(&7,21

=% I  =% I 

AX f1 = Cross sectional area of the member. AX f1 = Cross sectional area of the member.
IX f2 = Torsional constant. IX f2 = Torsional constant.
IY f3 = Moment of inertia about local y-axis. IY f3 = Moment of inertia about local y-axis.
IZ f4 = Moment of inertia about local z-axis (usually major). IZ f4 = Moment of inertia about local z-axis (usually major).
See Section AY f5 = Effective shear area in local y-axis. See Section AY f5 = Effective shear area in local y-axis.
1.7.1 AZ f6 = Effective shear area in local z-axis. 1.7.1 AZ f6 = Effective shear area in local z-axis.
If any of the above 6 parameters are omitted, it will be If any of the above 6 parameters are omitted, it will be
calculated from the YD, ZD, YB, and/or ZB dimensions. calculated from the YD, ZD, YB, and/or ZB dimensions.
YD f7 = Depth of the member in local y direction. YD f7 = Depth of the member in local y direction.
(Diameter of section for circular members) (Diameter of section for circular members)
ZD f 8 = Depth of the member in local z direction. If ZD is not ZD f 8 = Depth of the member in local z direction. If ZD is not
provided and YD is provided, the section will be provided and YD is provided, the section will be
assumed to be circular. assumed to be circular.
YB f 9 = Depth of stem for T-section. YB f 9 = Depth of stem for T-section.
ZB f 10 = Width of stem for T-section or bottom width for ZB f 10 = Width of stem for T-section or bottom width for
TRAPEZOIDAL section. TRAPEZOIDAL section.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-66 Section 5 5-66 Section 5

5.20.2.1 Prismatic Tapered Tube Property 5.20.2.1 Prismatic Tapered Tube Property
Specification Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

The following commands are used to specify section properties for The following commands are used to specify section properties for
prismatic tapered tube cross-sections. For the property types shown prismatic tapered tube cross-sections. For the property types shown
below, additional information can be obtained from Table 2.1 of below, additional information can be obtained from Table 2.1 of
the ASCE 72 document, 2nd edition. the ASCE 72 document, 2nd edition.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

5281'  5281' 
+(;'(&$*21$/  +(;'(&$*21$/ 
SURSHUW\VSHF '2'(&$*21$/  67$57 G (1' G 7+,&. W SURSHUW\VSHF '2'(&$*21$/  67$57 G (1' G 7+,&. W

2&7$*21$/  2&7$*21$/ 
 +(;$*21$/   +(;$*21$/ 
648$5(  648$5( 
START d 1 = Depth of section at start of member. START d 1 = Depth of section at start of member.
END d 2 = Depth of section at end of member. END d 2 = Depth of section at end of member.
THICK t = Thickness of section (constant throughout the THICK t = Thickness of section (constant throughout the
member length). member length).

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

81,7    81,7   
0(0%(5 3523(57< 0(0%(5 3523(57<
 35,6 5281' 67$  (1'  7+,   35,6 5281' 67$  (1'  7+, 
 35,6 +'& 67$  (1'  7+,   35,6 +'& 67$  (1'  7+, 
 35,6 '2' 67$  (1'  7+,   35,6 '2' 67$  (1'  7+, 
Section 5 5-67 Section 5 5-67
5281' 648$5( 5281' 648$5(
< < < <

[ [ [ [

+(;'(&$*21$/  6,'(6 +(;$*21$/  6,'(6 +(;'(&$*21$/  6,'(6 +(;$*21$/  6,'(6


< < < <

[ [ [ [

'2'(&$*21$/  6,'(6 2&7$*21$/  6,'(6 '2'(&$*21$/  6,'(6 2&7$*21$/  6,'(6


< < < <

[ [ [ [

Prismatic Tapered Tube Shapes Prismatic Tapered Tube Shapes


STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-68 Section 5 5-68 Section 5

5.20.3 Tapered Member Specification 5.20.3 Tapered Member Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

The following commands are used to specify section properties for The following commands are used to specify section properties for
tapered I-shapes. tapered I-shapes.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

argument-list = f1 f 2 f 3 f 4 f 5 (f 6 f 7 ) argument-list = f1 f 2 f 3 f 4 f 5 (f 6 f 7 )

where, where,
f 1 = Depth of section at start node. f 1 = Depth of section at start node.
f 2 = Thickness of web. f 2 = Thickness of web.
f 3 = Depth of section at end node. f 3 = Depth of section at end node.
f 4 = Width of top flange. f 4 = Width of top flange.
See Section f 5 = Thickness of top flange. See Section f 5 = Thickness of top flange.
1.7.4 f 6 = Width of bottom flange. Defaults to f4 if left out. 1.7.4 f 6 = Width of bottom flange. Defaults to f4 if left out.
f 7 = Thickness of bottom flange. Defaults to f 5 left out f 7 = Thickness of bottom flange. Defaults to f 5 left out

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

0(0%(5 3523(57< 0(0%(5 3523(57<


 72  7$3(5('         72  7$3(5('       

1RWHV 1RWHV

1. All dimensions (f 1 , f 2 , .....f 7 ) should be in current units. 1. All dimensions (f 1 , f 2 , .....f 7 ) should be in current units.
2. f 1 (Depth of section at start node) should always be greater 2. f 1 (Depth of section at start node) should always be greater
than f 3 (Depth of section at end node). The user should provide than f 3 (Depth of section at end node). The user should provide
the member incidences accordingly. the member incidences accordingly.
Section 5 5-69 Section 5 5-69

5.20.4 Property Specification from User 5.20.4 Property Specification from User
Provided Table Provided Table

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

The following commands are used to specify section properties The following commands are used to specify section properties
from a previously created USER-PROVIDED STEEL TABLE. from a previously created USER-PROVIDED STEEL TABLE.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

PHPEHUOLVW 837$%/( , VHFWLRQQDPH PHPEHUOLVW 837$%/( , VHFWLRQQDPH

UPTABLE stands for user-provided table UPTABLE stands for user-provided table

i 1 = table number as specified previously (1 to 20) i 1 = table number as specified previously (1 to 20)

section-name = section name as specified in the table. section-name = section name as specified in the table.
(Refer to Section 5.19) (Refer to Section 5.19)
See Section See Section
1.7.3 ([DPSOH 1.7.3 ([DPSOH

See Section 5.20.6 See Section 5.20.6


STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-70 Section 5 5-70 Section 5

5.20.5 Assign Profile Specification 5.20.5 Assign Profile Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

The ASSIGN command may be used to instruct the program to The ASSIGN command may be used to instruct the program to
assign a suitable steel section to a frame member based on the assign a suitable steel section to a frame member based on the
profile-spec shown below. profile-spec shown below.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

%($0  %($0 
&2/801  &2/801 
See Section SURILOHVSHF   See Section SURILOHVSHF  
1.7.5 &+$11(/  1.7.5 &+$11(/ 
$1*/( '28%/(  $1*/( '28%/( 
([DPSOH ([DPSOH

See Section 5.20.6 See Section 5.20.6

1RWHV 1RWHV

Sections are always chosen from the relevant built-in steel table. Sections are always chosen from the relevant built-in steel table.
To find out the details of the sections that are chosen, the command To find out the details of the sections that are chosen, the command
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES should be provided after PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES should be provided after
specification of all member properties. specification of all member properties.
Section 5 5-71 Section 5 5-71

5.20.6 Examples of Member Property 5.20.6 Examples of Member Property


Specification Specification
This section illustrates the various options available for MEMBER This section illustrates the various options available for MEMBER
PROPERTY specification PROPERTY specification

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

81,7    81,7   
0(0%(5 3523(57,(6 0(0%(5 3523(57,(6
 72  7$%/( 67 :;  72  7$%/( 67 :;
  7$%/( /' / 63    7$%/( /' / 63 
 72  35,60$7,& $;  ,=   72  35,60$7,& $;  ,= 
  7$ 67 3,3( 2'  ,'    7$ 67 3,3( 2'  ,' 
 72  7$ 67 78%( '7  :7  7+   72  7$ 67 78%( '7  :7  7+ 
   72   35 $;  ,=  ,<      72   35 $;  ,=  ,<  
,;  <'  ='  ,;  <'  =' 
 72  837  :;  72  837  :;
  837  /   837  /
 72  $66,*1 &2/801  72  $66,*1 &2/801
 7$ 7& :; :3  7+   7$ 7& :; :3  7+ 
 7$ &0 :; &7  )&   7$ &0 :; &7  )& 

This example shows each type of member property input. Members This example shows each type of member property input. Members
1 to 5 are wide flanges selected from the AISC tables; 9 and 10 are 1 to 5 are wide flanges selected from the AISC tables; 9 and 10 are
double angles selected from the AISC tables; 12 to 15 are prismatic double angles selected from the AISC tables; 12 to 15 are prismatic
members with no shear deformation; 17 and 18 are pipe sections; members with no shear deformation; 17 and 18 are pipe sections;
20 to 25 are tube sections; 27, 29, 32 to 40, and 42 are prismatic 20 to 25 are tube sections; 27, 29, 32 to 40, and 42 are prismatic
members with shear deformation; 43 to 47 are wide flanges members with shear deformation; 43 to 47 are wide flanges
selected from the user input table number 1; 50 and 51 are single selected from the user input table number 1; 50 and 51 are single
angles from the user input table number 2; 52 through 55 are angles from the user input table number 2; 52 through 55 are
designated as COLUMN members using the ASSIGN specification. designated as COLUMN members using the ASSIGN specification.
The program will assign a suitable I-section from the steel table for The program will assign a suitable I-section from the steel table for
each member. each member.

Member 56 is a wideflange W12X26 with a 4.0 unit wide cover Member 56 is a wideflange W12X26 with a 4.0 unit wide cover
plate of 0.3 units of thickness at the top. Member 57 is a composite plate of 0.3 units of thickness at the top. Member 57 is a composite
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-72 Section 5 5-72 Section 5

section with a concrete slab of 5.0 units of thickness at the top of a section with a concrete slab of 5.0 units of thickness at the top of a
wide flange W14X34. The compressive strength of the concrete in wide flange W14X34. The compressive strength of the concrete in
2 2
the slab is 3.0 force/length . the slab is 3.0 force/length .
Section 5 5-73 Section 5 5-73

5.20.7 Curved Member Specification (not 5.20.7 Curved Member Specification (not
available) available)

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

The following commands are used to specify that a member is The following commands are used to specify that a member is
curved. The curve is a segment of a circle of arc length less than curved. The curve is a segment of a circle of arc length less than
180 degrees. Any non-tapered cross-section is permitted. 180 degrees. Any non-tapered cross-section is permitted.

Curved Beam Sign Convention Curved Beam Sign Convention

T.I.P. = Tangent Intersect Point T.I.P. = Tangent Intersect Point

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

0(0%(5 &859( 0(0%(5 &859(

 I I I   I I I 
PHPEHUOLVW &859(' =0,186  %(1'5 I

)/(; I

PHPEHUOLVW &859(' =0,186  %(1'5 I

)/(; I

5() I  I  I   5() I  I  I  
5()-7 I   5()-7 I  

where, where,
The bracketed parameters are Curved member local coordinate The bracketed parameters are Curved member local coordinate
system definition (and curve orientation) parameters which are system definition (and curve orientation) parameters which are
optional. Default: The local coordinate system is that of a straight optional. Default: The local coordinate system is that of a straight
member between the two joints and the curve is in the local X-Z member between the two joints and the curve is in the local X-Z
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-74 Section 5 5-74 Section 5

plane on the +Z side. To override the default local system, enter 1 plane on the +Z side. To override the default local system, enter 1
of 4 sets of parameters: of 4 sets of parameters:

[The reference point along with the 2 joints defines a half-plane [The reference point along with the 2 joints defines a half-plane
containing the local +Z axis and the plane of the curve.] containing the local +Z axis and the plane of the curve.]

f 1 f 2 f 3 = x, y, z global distances from the start joint to the f 1 f 2 f 3 = x, y, z global distances from the start joint to the
reference point; or reference point; or
f 4 f 5 f 6 = x, y, z global coordinates of the reference point; or f 4 f 5 f 6 = x, y, z global coordinates of the reference point; or
f 7 = joint number whose x, y, z global coordinates is the reference f 7 = joint number whose x, y, z global coordinates is the reference
point; or point; or

ZM = indicates that the local system is the default but that the ZM = indicates that the local system is the default but that the
plane of the curve will be in the local X-Z plane on the -Z side of a plane of the curve will be in the local X-Z plane on the -Z side of a
line connecting the 2 member joints. line connecting the 2 member joints.

Other parameters: Other parameters:


See Section f 8 = Bend Radius of the centroidal axis of the member (radius of See Section f 8 = Bend Radius of the centroidal axis of the member (radius of
1.7.4 curvature). See figure. 1.7.4 curvature). See figure.
f 9 = Flexibility parameter for pipe bends. See notes. f 9 = Flexibility parameter for pipe bends. See notes.

FLEX Parameter. This applies only to pipe bend (elbow) FLEX Parameter. This applies only to pipe bend (elbow)
members (OD and ID entered). These members will flex more due members (OD and ID entered). These members will flex more due
to ovalization depending on internal pressure. The ASME Boiler to ovalization depending on internal pressure. The ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III, NB-3687.2, 1971, for Class and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III, NB-3687.2, 1971, for Class
I components is used to calculate the flexibility reduction factor. I components is used to calculate the flexibility reduction factor.
Set f 9 = 0 or omit for this flexibility increase calculation to occur Set f 9 = 0 or omit for this flexibility increase calculation to occur
with internal pressure equal to zero. with internal pressure equal to zero.
Set f 9 > 0 to specify internal pressure to use in this flexibility Set f 9 > 0 to specify internal pressure to use in this flexibility
calculation. Pressure reduces the flexibility increase. calculation. Pressure reduces the flexibility increase.
Set f 9 = -9999 to ignore this additional flexibility calculation and Set f 9 = -9999 to ignore this additional flexibility calculation and
use only beam theory. use only beam theory.
Set f 9 = flexibility reduction factor (-FLEXF below); which must Set f 9 = flexibility reduction factor (-FLEXF below); which must
be a negative number less than –1.0 . be a negative number less than –1.0 .
Section 5 5-75 Section 5 5-75
___________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________
• ASME PIPE ELBOW FLEXIBILITY FACTORS • ASME PIPE ELBOW FLEXIBILITY FACTORS
THEORY [ASME SECTION NB-3687.2] THEORY [ASME SECTION NB-3687.2]

This Section only applies if This Section only applies if


(Bend Radius/Mean Radius) ≥ 1.70 (Bend Radius/Mean Radius) ≥ 1.70
or or
if (Arclength) > (2 * Mean Radius) if (Arclength) > (2 * Mean Radius)

FLEXF = (Flexibility Factor) = FLEXF = (Flexibility Factor) =


. *( Mean Radius )2
165 1 . *( Mean Radius )2
165 1
* *
t *( Bend Radius ) 1 + (Pr ess)( Mean Radius )( FACT.) t *( Bend Radius ) 1 + (Pr ess)( Mean Radius)( FACT.)

where where
6 *( MR / t )4/3 *( BR / MR )1/3 6 *( MR / t )4/3 *( BR / MR )1/3
FACT. = FACT. =
Et Et

MR = Mean Radius of elbow wall MR = Mean Radius of elbow wall


BR = Bend Radius BR = Bend Radius
Press = Internal Pressure Press = Internal Pressure
t = elbow wall thickness t = elbow wall thickness
E = Modulus of Elasticity E = Modulus of Elasticity

If the Flexibility Factor computed is less than 1.0, then use If the Flexibility Factor computed is less than 1.0, then use
1.0 . The Flexibility Factor directly multiplies or 1.0 . The Flexibility Factor directly multiplies or
contributes to most non-shear terms in the elbow flexibility contributes to most non-shear terms in the elbow flexibility
matrix. matrix.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

0(0%(5 3523(57< 0(0%(5 3523(57<


 72  &859(' =0 %(1'5   72  &859(' =0 %(1'5 

1RWHV 1RWHV

1. All dimensions or pressures should be in current units. 1. All dimensions or pressures should be in current units.
2. For loads, releases, and outputs, the local x-axis is tangent to 2. For loads, releases, and outputs, the local x-axis is tangent to
the curve; the local z-axis is radially outward from the curve in the curve; the local z-axis is radially outward from the curve in
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-76 Section 5 5-76 Section 5

the plane of the curve; an the local y-axis is perpendicular to the plane of the curve; an the local y-axis is perpendicular to
the plane of the curve. the plane of the curve.
3. This element is not complete except for stiffness, releases, 3. This element is not complete except for stiffness, releases,
and offsets. Truss, tension/compression should not be and offsets. Truss, tension/compression should not be
specified. Member loads are proportioned to each end based on specified. Member loads are proportioned to each end based on
distance instead of using fixed end beam theory. Section results distance instead of using fixed end beam theory. Section results
ignore the actual distribution of load and should be ignored. ignore the actual distribution of load and should be ignored.
Section 5 5-77 Section 5 5-77

5.21 Element Property Specification 5.21 Element Property Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This set of commands may be used to specify properties of plate This set of commands may be used to specify properties of plate
finite elements. finite elements.

Unlike members and plate/shell elements, no properties are Unlike members and plate/shell elements, no properties are
required for solid elements. However, constants such as modulus of required for solid elements. However, constants such as modulus of
elasticity and Poisson’s ratio are to be specified. elasticity and Poisson’s ratio are to be specified.

*HQHUDO )RUPDW *HQHUDO )RUPDW

(/(0(17 3523(57< (/(0(17 3523(57<

HOHPHQWOLVW 7+,&.1(66 I1 I 2  I 3  I 4 HOHPHQWOLVW 7+,&.1(66 I1 I 2  I 3  I 4

I1 7KLFNQHVV RI WKH HOHPHQW I1 7KLFNQHVV RI WKH HOHPHQW


I 2 I 4 7KLFNQHVVHV DW RWKHU QRGHV RI WKH HOHPHQW LI I 2 I 4 7KLFNQHVVHV DW RWKHU QRGHV RI WKH HOHPHQW LI
GLIIHUHQW IURP I 1  GLIIHUHQW IURP I 1 

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

See Elements of uniform or linearly varying thickness may be modeled See Elements of uniform or linearly varying thickness may be modeled
Section 1.6 using this command. Note that the value of the thickness must be Section 1.6 using this command. Note that the value of the thickness must be
provided in current units. provided in current units.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

81,7    81,7   
(/(0(17 3523(57< (/(0(17 3523(57<
 72    7+   72    7+ 
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-78 Section 5 5-78 Section 5

5.22 Member/Element Releases 5.22 Member/Element Releases

STAAD allows specification of releases of degrees of freedom for STAAD allows specification of releases of degrees of freedom for
frame members and plate elements. Section 5.22.1 describes frame members and plate elements. Section 5.22.1 describes
MEMBER release options and Section 5.22.2 describes ELEMENT MEMBER release options and Section 5.22.2 describes ELEMENT
release options. release options.
Section 5 5-79 Section 5 5-79

5.22.1 Member Release Specification 5.22.1 Member Release Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This set of commands may be used to fully release specific degrees This set of commands may be used to fully release specific degrees
of freedom at the ends of frame members. They may also be used to of freedom at the ends of frame members. They may also be used to
describe a mode of attachment where the member end is connected describe a mode of attachment where the member end is connected
to the joint for specific degrees of freedom through the means of to the joint for specific degrees of freedom through the means of
springs . springs .

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

0(0%(5 5(/($6(6 0(0%(5 5(/($6(6


);  .); I  
);  .); I 
67$57  )<  .)< I  67$57  )<  .)< I 
PHPEHUOLVW   )=  .)= I  PHPEHUOLVW   )=  .)= I 
(1'  0;  .0; I  (1'  0;  .0; I 
0<  .0< I  0<  .0< I 
0=  .0= I  0=  .0= I 
where FX through MZ and KFX through KMZ represent force-x where FX through MZ and KFX through KMZ represent force-x
through moment-z degrees of freedom in the member local axes and through moment-z degrees of freedom in the member local axes and
f1 through f6 are spring constants for these degrees of freedom. If f1 through f6 are spring constants for these degrees of freedom. If
FX through MZ is used, it signifies a full release for that d.o.f, and FX through MZ is used, it signifies a full release for that d.o.f, and
if KFX through KMZ is used, it signifies a spring attachment if KFX through KMZ is used, it signifies a spring attachment

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

0(0%(5 5(/($6( 0(0%(5 5(/($6(


  72    67$57 .);  0< 0=   72    67$57 .);  0< 0=
    72  (1' 0= .0;      72  (1' 0= .0; 

In the above example, for members 1, 3 to 9, 11 and 12, the In the above example, for members 1, 3 to 9, 11 and 12, the
moments about the local Y and Z axes are released at their start moments about the local Y and Z axes are released at their start
joints (as specified in MEMBER INCIDENCES). Further, these joints (as specified in MEMBER INCIDENCES). Further, these
members are attached to their START joint along their local x axis members are attached to their START joint along their local x axis
through a spring whose stiffness is 1000.0 units of force/length. through a spring whose stiffness is 1000.0 units of force/length.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-80 Section 5 5-80 Section 5

For members 1, 10, 11 and 13 to 18, the moment about the local Z For members 1, 10, 11 and 13 to 18, the moment about the local Z
axis is released at their end joint. Also, the members are attached axis is released at their end joint. Also, the members are attached
to their END joint about their local x axis through a moment-spring to their END joint about their local x axis through a moment-spring
whose stiffness is 200.0 units of force-length/Degree. Note that whose stiffness is 200.0 units of force-length/Degree. Note that
members 1 and 11 are released at both start and end joints, though members 1 and 11 are released at both start and end joints, though
not necessarily in the same degrees of freedom. not necessarily in the same degrees of freedom.

Partial Moment Release Partial Moment Release


Moments at the end of a member may be released partially. This Moments at the end of a member may be released partially. This
facility may be used to model partial fixity of connections. The facility may be used to model partial fixity of connections. The
following format may be used to provide a partial moment release. following format may be used to provide a partial moment release.
Note that this facility is provided under the MEMBER RELEASE Note that this facility is provided under the MEMBER RELEASE
option and is in addition to the existing RELEASE capabilities. option and is in addition to the existing RELEASE capabilities.

*HQHUDO )RUPDW *HQHUDO )RUPDW

0(0%(5 5(/($6( 0(0%(5 5(/($6(

 03 I   03 I 


67$57    67$57   
PHPEHUOLVW     PHPEHUOLVW    
(1'  03; I  (1'  03; I 
03< I  03< I 
03= I  03= I 

See Section where f 1 = release factor for all 3 moments; or enter f 4 , f 5 , and/or See Section where f 1 = release factor for all 3 moments; or enter f 4 , f 5 , and/or
1.8 f 6 as release factors for each moment separately. The moment 1.8 f 6 as release factors for each moment separately. The moment
related stiffness co-efficient will be multiplied by a factor of (1-f 1 ) related stiffness co-efficient will be multiplied by a factor of (1-f 1 )
at the specified end. at the specified end.
Section 5 5-81 Section 5 5-81
([DPSOH ([DPSOH

0(0%(5 5(/($6( 0(0%(5 5(/($6(


 72  67$57 03   72  67$57 03 

The above RELEASE command will apply a factor of 0.75 on the The above RELEASE command will apply a factor of 0.75 on the
moment related stiffness co-efficients at START of members 15 to moment related stiffness co-efficients at START of members 15 to
25. 25.

1RWHV 1RWHV

It is important to note that the factor f1 indicates a reduction in the It is important to note that the factor f1 indicates a reduction in the
stiffness corresponding to the rotational degrees of freedom MX, stiffness corresponding to the rotational degrees of freedom MX,
MY and MZ. In other words, the user should not expect the MY and MZ. In other words, the user should not expect the
moment on the member to reduce by a factor of f 1 . It may be moment on the member to reduce by a factor of f 1 . It may be
necessary for the user to perform a few trials in order to arrive at necessary for the user to perform a few trials in order to arrive at
the right value of f 1 , which results in the desired reduction in the right value of f 1 , which results in the desired reduction in
moment. moment.

Also, note that START and END is based on the MEMBER Also, note that START and END is based on the MEMBER
INCIDENCE specification. INCIDENCE specification.

At any end of the member, for any particular DOF, full, partial and At any end of the member, for any particular DOF, full, partial and
spring release cannot be applied simultaneously. Only one out of spring release cannot be applied simultaneously. Only one out of
the three is permitted. the three is permitted.

If MY (or MZ) is fully released on both ends, then VZ (or VY) If MY (or MZ) is fully released on both ends, then VZ (or VY)
cannot be transmitted through the member. The final shears in the cannot be transmitted through the member. The final shears in the
member will be entirely due to loads applied directly to the member will be entirely due to loads applied directly to the
member. member.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-82 Section 5 5-82 Section 5

5.22.2 Element Release Specification 5.22.2 Element Release Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This set of commands may be used to release specified degrees of This set of commands may be used to release specified degrees of
freedoms at the corners of plate finite elements. freedoms at the corners of plate finite elements.

*HQHUDO )RUPDW *HQHUDO )RUPDW

(/(0(17 5(/($6( (/(0(17 5(/($6(

);  ); 
-  )<  -  )< 
HOHPHQWOLVW -  )=  HOHPHQWOLVW -  )= 
-  0;  -  0; 
-  0<  -  0< 
0=  0= 

See where the keywords J1, J2, J3 and J4 signify joints in the order of See where the keywords J1, J2, J3 and J4 signify joints in the order of
Section 1.8 the specification of the element incidence. For example, if the Section 1.8 the specification of the element incidence. For example, if the
incidences of the element were defined as 35 42 76 63, J1 incidences of the element were defined as 35 42 76 63, J1
represents 35, J2 represents 42, J3 represents 76, and J4 represents represents 35, J2 represents 42, J3 represents 76, and J4 represents
63. Please note that element releases at multiple joints cannot be 63. Please note that element releases at multiple joints cannot be
specified in a single line. Those must be specified separately as specified in a single line. Those must be specified separately as
shown below. shown below.

FX through MZ represents forces/moments to be released per local FX through MZ represents forces/moments to be released per local
axis system. axis system.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

Correct Usage Incorrect Usage Correct Usage Incorrect Usage

(/(0(17 5(/($6( (/(0(17 5(/($6( (/(0(17 5(/($6( (/(0(17 5(/($6(


 72  - 0; 0<  72  - - 0; 0<  72  - 0; 0<  72  - - 0; 0<
 72  - 0; 0<  72  - - 0<  72  - 0; 0<  72  - - 0<
 72  - 0<  72  - 0<
 72  - 0<  72  - 0<
Section 5 5-83 Section 5 5-83
1RWHV 1RWHV

1. All releases are in the local axis system. Generally, do not over 1. All releases are in the local axis system. Generally, do not over
release. The element must still behave as a plate after the release. The element must still behave as a plate after the
releases. releases.
2. Selfweight is applied at each of the nodes as if there were no 2. Selfweight is applied at each of the nodes as if there were no
releases. releases.
3. Thermal stresses will include the fixed-end thermal pre-stress 3. Thermal stresses will include the fixed-end thermal pre-stress
as if there were no release. as if there were no release.
4. May not be used with the Element Plane Stress or Element 4. May not be used with the Element Plane Stress or Element
Ignore Inplane Rotation commands on the same element. Ignore Inplane Rotation commands on the same element.
5. Note that the usual definitions of local Mx and My are 5. Note that the usual definitions of local Mx and My are
reversed here. reversed here.
6. Releasing Fz, Mx, My will release all bending capability. 6. Releasing Fz, Mx, My will release all bending capability.
Releasing Fx, Fy, Mz will release all in-plane stiffness. Releasing Fx, Fy, Mz will release all in-plane stiffness.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-84 Section 5 5-84 Section 5

5.23 Member Truss/Cable/Tension/Compression 5.23 Member Truss/Cable/Tension/Compression


Specification Specification

A member can have only one of the following specifications: A member can have only one of the following specifications:
MEMBER TRUSS MEMBER TRUSS
MEMBER TENSION MEMBER TENSION
MEMBER COMPRESSION MEMBER COMPRESSION
MEMBER RELEASES MEMBER RELEASES

If multiple specifications are applied to the same member, only the If multiple specifications are applied to the same member, only the
last entered will be used (Warnings will be printed). last entered will be used (Warnings will be printed).

MEMBER TRUSS, MEMBER TENSION, MEMBER MEMBER TRUSS, MEMBER TENSION, MEMBER
COMPRESSION, and MEMBER CABLE are axial-only for COMPRESSION, and MEMBER CABLE are axial-only for
stiffness. stiffness.

MEMBER CABLE are special truss members that may also be MEMBER CABLE are special truss members that may also be
specified as tension-only. specified as tension-only.

Sections 5.23.1 through 5.23.3 describe these specifications. Sections 5.23.1 through 5.23.3 describe these specifications.
Section 5 5-85 Section 5 5-85

5.23.1 Member Truss Specification 5.23.1 Member Truss Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command may be used to model a specified set of members as This command may be used to model a specified set of members as
TRUSS members. TRUSS members.

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

This specification may be used to specify TRUSS type members in This specification may be used to specify TRUSS type members in
a PLANE, SPACE or FLOOR structure. The TRUSS members are a PLANE, SPACE or FLOOR structure. The TRUSS members are
capable of carrying only axial forces. Typically, bracing members capable of carrying only axial forces. Typically, bracing members
in a PLANE or SPACE frame will be of this nature. in a PLANE or SPACE frame will be of this nature.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

0(0%(5 75866 0(0%(5 75866

PHPEHUOLVW 7(16,21 I PHPEHUOLVW 7(16,21 I

where f 1 = optional Initial Tension in truss where f 1 = optional Initial Tension in truss
member (in current units) member (in current units)

For NON-LINEAR CABLE ANALYSIS Only: The Tension For NON-LINEAR CABLE ANALYSIS Only: The Tension
parameter is ignored except in Non Linear Cable Analysis. For that parameter is ignored except in Non Linear Cable Analysis. For that
analysis type, a truss with pretension is considered to be nonlinear analysis type, a truss with pretension is considered to be nonlinear
(large displacement). In this analysis type, trusses without preload (large displacement). In this analysis type, trusses without preload
are assumed to be linear members that carry both tension and are assumed to be linear members that carry both tension and
compression regardless of this command compression regardless of this command

Note that this command is superfluous when a TRUSS type Note that this command is superfluous when a TRUSS type
structure has already been specified. structure has already been specified.
See Sections See Sections
1.9 and 1.10 ([DPSOH 1.9 and 1.10 ([DPSOH

0(0% 75866 0(0% 75866


 72       72     
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-86 Section 5 5-86 Section 5

1RWHV 1RWHV

The TRUSS member has only one degree of freedom,-the axial The TRUSS member has only one degree of freedom,-the axial
deformation. Note also that Member Releases are not allowed. deformation. Note also that Member Releases are not allowed.
Selfweight and transverse loads may induce shear/moment Selfweight and transverse loads may induce shear/moment
distributions in the member. distributions in the member.

Member loads are lumped at each end, whereas a frame member Member loads are lumped at each end, whereas a frame member
with moment releases only retains the axial component of the with moment releases only retains the axial component of the
applied member load. applied member load.
Section 5 5-87 Section 5 5-87

5.23.2 Member Cable Specification 5.23.2 Member Cable Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command may be used to model a specified set of members as This command may be used to model a specified set of members as
CABLE members. CABLE members.

'HVFULSWLRQ IRU XVH LQ DOO DQDO\VHV H[FHSW 1RQ /LQHDU 'HVFULSWLRQ IRU XVH LQ DOO DQDO\VHV H[FHSW 1RQ /LQHDU
&DEOH $QDO\VLV &DEOH $QDO\VLV

The CABLE members, in addition to elastic axial deformation, are The CABLE members, in addition to elastic axial deformation, are
also capable of accommodating the stiffness effect of initial tension also capable of accommodating the stiffness effect of initial tension
and tension due to static loads. Theoretical discussions of CABLE and tension due to static loads. Theoretical discussions of CABLE
members are presented in Section 1.11 of this manual. members are presented in Section 1.11 of this manual.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

0(0%(5 &$%/( 0(0%(5 &$%/(

PHPEHUOLVW 7(16,21 I PHPEHUOLVW 7(16,21 I


See Sections See Sections
1.9, 1.11. where f 1 = Initial Tension in cable member 1.9, 1.11. where f 1 = Initial Tension in cable member
(in current units) (in current units)

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

0(0% &$%/( 0(0% &$%/(


 72  7(16,21   72  7(16,21 

1RWHV 1RWHV

The TENSION specified in the CABLE member is applied on the The TENSION specified in the CABLE member is applied on the
structure as an external load as well as is used to modify the structure as an external load as well as is used to modify the
stiffness of the member. See Section 1.11 for details. If TENSION stiffness of the member. See Section 1.11 for details. If TENSION
or the value is omitted a minimum tension will be used. or the value is omitted a minimum tension will be used.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-88 Section 5 5-88 Section 5

This is a truss member but not a tension-only member unless you This is a truss member but not a tension-only member unless you
also include this member in a MEMBER TENSION input. See also include this member in a MEMBER TENSION input. See
section 5.23.3. Note also that Member Releases are not allowed. section 5.23.3. Note also that Member Releases are not allowed.

The tension is a preload and will not be the final tension in the The tension is a preload and will not be the final tension in the
cable after the deformation due to this preload. cable after the deformation due to this preload.

'HVFULSWLRQ IRU XVH LQ 1RQ /LQHDU &DEOH $QDO\VLV  'HVFULSWLRQ IRU XVH LQ 1RQ /LQHDU &DEOH $QDO\VLV 

The CABLE members, in addition to elastic axial deformation, are The CABLE members, in addition to elastic axial deformation, are
also capable of accommodating large displacements. also capable of accommodating large displacements.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

0(0%(5 &$%/( 0(0%(5 &$%/(

PHPEHUOLVW 7(16,21 I PHPEHUOLVW 7(16,21 I


25 25
PHPEHUOLVW /(1*7+ I PHPEHUOLVW /(1*7+ I
See Sections See Sections
1.9, 1.11, where f 1 = Initial Tension in cable member 1.9, 1.11, where f 1 = Initial Tension in cable member
1.18.2.5, (in current units) 1.18.2.5, (in current units)
5.37 where f 2 = Unstressed cable length 5.37 where f 2 = Unstressed cable length
(in current units) (in current units)

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

0(0% &$%/( 0(0% &$%/(


 72  7(16,21   72  7(16,21 

1RWHV 1RWHV

The TENSION specified in the CABLE member is applied on the The TENSION specified in the CABLE member is applied on the
structure as an external load as well as used to modify the stiffness structure as an external load as well as used to modify the stiffness
of the member. See Section 1.11 for details. of the member. See Section 1.11 for details.

The tension is used to determine the unstressed length. That length The tension is used to determine the unstressed length. That length
will be shorter than the distance between the joints by the distance will be shorter than the distance between the joints by the distance
that the tension will stretch the cable. that the tension will stretch the cable.
Section 5 5-89 Section 5 5-89

5.23.3 Member Tension/Compression 5.23.3 Member Tension/Compression


Specification Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command may be used to designate certain members as This command may be used to designate certain members as
Tension-only or Compression-only members. Tension-only or Compression-only members.

*HQHUDO )RUPDW *HQHUDO )RUPDW

0(0%(5 7(16,21 0(0%(5 7(16,21


PHPEHU  OLVW PHPEHU  OLVW

0(0%(5 &2035(66,21 0(0%(5 &2035(66,21


PHPEHU  OLVW PHPEHU  OLVW

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

Tension-only members are truss/cable members that are capable of Tension-only members are truss/cable members that are capable of
carrying tensile forces only. Thus, they are automatically carrying tensile forces only. Thus, they are automatically
inactivated for load cases that create compression in them. inactivated for load cases that create compression in them.

LINEAR TENSION/COMPRESSION ANALYSIS LINEAR TENSION/COMPRESSION ANALYSIS


Compression-only members are truss members that are capable of Compression-only members are truss members that are capable of
carrying compressive forces only. Thus, they are automatically carrying compressive forces only. Thus, they are automatically
See Section inactivated for load cases that create tension in them. Note that See Section inactivated for load cases that create tension in them. Note that
1.9 Member Releases are not allowed. 1.9 Member Releases are not allowed.

The procedure for analysis of Tension-only or Compression-only The procedure for analysis of Tension-only or Compression-only
members requires iterations for every load case and therefore may members requires iterations for every load case and therefore may
be quite involved. The user may also consider using the INACTIVE be quite involved. The user may also consider using the INACTIVE
specification if the solution time becomes unacceptably high. specification if the solution time becomes unacceptably high.

It is very important to recognize that the input data must be It is very important to recognize that the input data must be
provided in such a way that only one primary load case is provided provided in such a way that only one primary load case is provided
for each PERFORM ANALYSIS command. Also, the SET NL and for each PERFORM ANALYSIS command. Also, the SET NL and
CHANGE commands must be used to convey to STAAD that CHANGE commands must be used to convey to STAAD that
multiple analyses and multiple structural conditions are involved. multiple analyses and multiple structural conditions are involved.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-90 Section 5 5-90 Section 5

For NON-LINEAR CABLE ANALYSIS : This command is For NON-LINEAR CABLE ANALYSIS : This command is
unnecessary and ignored. Cables are automatically assumed to be unnecessary and ignored. Cables are automatically assumed to be
partially to fully tension only (except that there should always be partially to fully tension only (except that there should always be
selfweight) without this command. In this analysis type, trusses selfweight) without this command. In this analysis type, trusses
without preload are assumed to be linear members that carry both without preload are assumed to be linear members that carry both
tension and compression regardless of this command tension and compression regardless of this command

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

0(0%(5 7(16,21 0(0%(5 7(16,21


 72     72   

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

0(0%(5 &2035(66,21 0(0%(5 &2035(66,21


         

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

0(0%(5 7(16,21 0(0%(5 7(16,21


   72      72  
0(0%(5 &2035(66,21 0(0%(5 &2035(66,21
   72      72  

1RWHV IRU LINEAR TENSION/COMPRESSION ANALYSIS 1RWHV IRU LINEAR TENSION/COMPRESSION ANALYSIS

1) Loads that have been defined on members declared as 1) Loads that have been defined on members declared as
MEMBER TENSION or MEMBER COMPRESSION will be MEMBER TENSION or MEMBER COMPRESSION will be
active even when the member becomes INACTIVE during the active even when the member becomes INACTIVE during the
process of analysis. This applies to SELFWEIGHT, MEMBER process of analysis. This applies to SELFWEIGHT, MEMBER
LOADS, PRESTRESS & POSTSTRESS LOADS, LOADS, PRESTRESS & POSTSTRESS LOADS,
TEMPERATURE LOAD, etc. TEMPERATURE LOAD, etc.
2) A member declared as a TENSION only member or a 2) A member declared as a TENSION only member or a
COMPRESSION only member will carry axial forces only. It COMPRESSION only member will carry axial forces only. It
Section 5 5-91 Section 5 5-91
will not carry moments or shear forces. In other words, it will not carry moments or shear forces. In other words, it
is a truss member. is a truss member.
3) The MEMBER TENSION and MEMBER COMPRESSION 3) The MEMBER TENSION and MEMBER COMPRESSION
commands should not be specified if the INACTIVE MEMBER commands should not be specified if the INACTIVE MEMBER
command is specified. command is specified.
4) The following is the general sequence of commands in the 4) The following is the general sequence of commands in the
input file if the MEMBER TENSION or MEMBER input file if the MEMBER TENSION or MEMBER
COMPRESSION command is used. This example is for the COMPRESSION command is used. This example is for the
MEMBER TENSION command. Similar rules are applicable MEMBER TENSION command. Similar rules are applicable
for the MEMBER COMPRESSION command. The dots for the MEMBER COMPRESSION command. The dots
indicate other input data items. indicate other input data items.

67$$' ž 67$$' ž
6(7 1/ ž 6(7 1/ ž
81,76 ž 81,76 ž
-2,17 &225',1$7(6 -2,17 &225',1$7(6
ž ž
0(0%(5 ,1&,'(1&(6 0(0%(5 ,1&,'(1&(6
ž ž
(/(0(17 ,1&,'(1&(6 (/(0(17 ,1&,'(1&(6
ž ž
&2167$176 &2167$176
ž ž
0(0%(5 3523(57< 0(0%(5 3523(57<
ž ž
(/(0(17 3523(57< (/(0(17 3523(57<
ž ž
68332576 68332576
ž ž
0(0%(5 7(16,21 0(0%(5 7(16,21
ž ž
/2$'  /2$' 
ž ž
3(5)250 $1$/<6,6 3(5)250 $1$/<6,6
&+$1*( &+$1*(
0(0%(5 7(16,21 0(0%(5 7(16,21
ž ž
/2$'  /2$' 
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-92 Section 5 5-92 Section 5

ž ž
3(5)250 $1$/<6,6 3(5)250 $1$/<6,6
&+$1*( &+$1*(
0(0%(5 7(16,21 0(0%(5 7(16,21
ž ž
/2$'  /2$' 
ž ž
3(5)250 $1$/<6,6 3(5)250 $1$/<6,6
&+$1*( &+$1*(

0(0%(5 7(16,21 0(0%(5 7(16,21


ž ž
/2$'  /2$' 
ž ž
3(5)250 $1$/<6,6 3(5)250 $1$/<6,6
&+$1*( &+$1*(
0(0%(5 7(16,21 0(0%(5 7(16,21
ž ž
/2$'  /2$' 
ž ž
/2$' &20%,1$7,21  /2$' &20%,1$7,21 
ž ž
/2$' &20%,1$7,21  /2$' &20%,1$7,21 
ž ž
3(5)250 $1$/<6,6 3(5)250 $1$/<6,6
&+$1*( &+$1*(
/2$' /,67 $// /2$' /,67 $//
35,17 ž 35,17 ž
35,17 ž 35,17 ž
3$5$0(7(5 3$5$0(7(5
ž ž
&+(&. &2'( ž &+(&. &2'( ž
6(/(&7 0(0%(5 ž 6(/(&7 0(0%(5 ž
),1,6+ ),1,6+

a) See Section 5.5 for explanation of the SET NL command. a) See Section 5.5 for explanation of the SET NL command.
The number that follows this command is the total number The number that follows this command is the total number
of primary load cases in the file. of primary load cases in the file.
Section 5 5-93 Section 5 5-93
b) STAAD performs up to 10 iterations automatically, b) STAAD performs up to 10 iterations automatically,
stopping if converged. If not converged, a warning stopping if converged. If not converged, a warning
message will be in the output. Enter a SET ITERLIM i message will be in the output. Enter a SET ITERLIM i
command (i>10) before the first load case to increase the command (i>10) before the first load case to increase the
default number of iterations. Since convergence may not default number of iterations. Since convergence may not
be possible using this procedure, do not set the limit too be possible using this procedure, do not set the limit too
high. high.

c) The principle used in the analysis is the following. c) The principle used in the analysis is the following.
• The program reads the list of members declared as • The program reads the list of members declared as
MEMBER TENSION and/or COMPRESSION. MEMBER TENSION and/or COMPRESSION.
• The analysis is performed for the entire structure and • The analysis is performed for the entire structure and
the member forces are computed. the member forces are computed.
• For the members declared as MEMBER TENSION / • For the members declared as MEMBER TENSION /
COMPRESSION, the program checks the axial force to COMPRESSION, the program checks the axial force to
determine whether it is tensile or compressive. If the determine whether it is tensile or compressive. If the
member cannot take that load, the member is "switched member cannot take that load, the member is "switched
off" from the structure. off" from the structure.
• The analysis is performed again without the switched • The analysis is performed again without the switched
off members. off members.
• Up to 10 iterations of the above steps are made for • Up to 10 iterations of the above steps are made for
each PERFORM ANALYSIS command. each PERFORM ANALYSIS command.
• This method does not always converge and may • This method does not always converge and may
become unstable. Check the output for instability become unstable. Check the output for instability
messages. Do not use results if unstable. messages. Do not use results if unstable.
d) In the example shown, only one LOAD case is specified d) In the example shown, only one LOAD case is specified
per ANALYSIS. This is because, a member which is per ANALYSIS. This is because, a member which is
under tension for one load case may be in compression for under tension for one load case may be in compression for
another load case. The stiffness matrix for an analysis can another load case. The stiffness matrix for an analysis can
account for the structural condition of only one of these account for the structural condition of only one of these
two load cases. two load cases.

e) Note that the MEMBER TENSION / COMPRESSION e) Note that the MEMBER TENSION / COMPRESSION
command and its accompanying list of members may be command and its accompanying list of members may be
provided after each (except the last) CHANGE command. provided after each (except the last) CHANGE command.
If entered, the new MEMBER TENSION/COMPRESSION If entered, the new MEMBER TENSION/COMPRESSION
commands replace all prior such commands. This is commands replace all prior such commands. This is
because, each CHANGE command signifies that the because, each CHANGE command signifies that the
previous members in a TENSION / COMPRESSION previous members in a TENSION / COMPRESSION
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-94 Section 5 5-94 Section 5
command are all active again. If these commands are not command are all active again. If these commands are not
entered after a CHANGR, then the previous commands will entered after a CHANGR, then the previous commands will
still be applicable. still be applicable.

f) The MEMBER TENSION command should not be used if f) The MEMBER TENSION command should not be used if
the following load cases are present : Response Spectrum the following load cases are present : Response Spectrum
load case, Time History Load case, UBC Load case, load case, Time History Load case, UBC Load case,
Moving Load case. If used, the MEMBER TENSION Moving Load case. If used, the MEMBER TENSION
/COMPRESSION will be ignored in all load cases. /COMPRESSION will be ignored in all load cases.
Section 5 5-95 Section 5 5-95

5.23.4 Spring Tension/Compression Specification 5.23.4 Spring Tension/Compression Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command may be used to designate certain support springs as This command may be used to designate certain support springs as
Tension-only or Compression-only springs. Tension-only or Compression-only springs.

*HQHUDO )RUPDW *HQHUDO )RUPDW

635,1* 7(16,21 635,1* 7(16,21


MRLQW ¤ OLVW VSULQJVSHF MRLQW ¤ OLVW VSULQJVSHF

635,1* &2035(66,21 635,1* &2035(66,21


MRLQW ¤ OLVW VSULQJVSHF MRLQW ¤ OLVW VSULQJVSHF

.);  .); 
VSULQJVSHF .)<  VSULQJVSHF .)< 
.)=  .)= 

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

Tension-only springs are capable of carrying tensile forces only. Tension-only springs are capable of carrying tensile forces only.
Thus, they are automatically inactivated for load cases that create Thus, they are automatically inactivated for load cases that create
compression in them. Compression-only springs are capable of compression in them. Compression-only springs are capable of
carrying compressive forces only. Thus, they are automatically carrying compressive forces only. Thus, they are automatically
inactivated for load cases that create tension in them. inactivated for load cases that create tension in them.
See Section See Section
1.9 1.9
If no spring spec is entered then all translational springs at that If no spring spec is entered then all translational springs at that
joint will be tension (or compression) only. This input command joint will be tension (or compression) only. This input command
does not create a spring, only that if a support spring exists at the does not create a spring, only that if a support spring exists at the
joint in the specified direction then it will also be tension (or joint in the specified direction then it will also be tension (or
compression) only. See Section 5.27.1 to 5.27.3 to define springs. compression) only. See Section 5.27.1 to 5.27.3 to define springs.

The procedure for analysis of Tension-only or Compression-only The procedure for analysis of Tension-only or Compression-only
springs requires iterations for every load case and therefore may be springs requires iterations for every load case and therefore may be
quite involved. quite involved.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-96 Section 5 5-96 Section 5

It is very important to recognize that the input data must be It is very important to recognize that the input data must be
provided in such a way that only one primary load case is provided provided in such a way that only one primary load case is provided
for each PERFORM ANALYSIS command. Also, the SET NL and for each PERFORM ANALYSIS command. Also, the SET NL and
CHANGE commands must be used to convey to STAAD that CHANGE commands must be used to convey to STAAD that
multiple analyses and multiple structural conditions are involved. multiple analyses and multiple structural conditions are involved.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

635,1* 7(16,21 635,1* 7(16,21


   72      72  
635,1* &2035(66,21 635,1* &2035(66,21
   72   .)<    72   .)<

1RWHV 1RWHV

1) A spring declared as TENSION only or COMPRESSION only 1) A spring declared as TENSION only or COMPRESSION only
will carry axial forces only. It will not carry moments. will carry axial forces only. It will not carry moments.
2) The SPRING TENSION / COMPRESSION commands should 2) The SPRING TENSION / COMPRESSION commands should
not be specified if the INACTIVE MEMBER command is not be specified if the INACTIVE MEMBER command is
specified. specified.
3) The following is the general sequence of commands in the 3) The following is the general sequence of commands in the
input file if the SPRING TENSION or COMPRESSION input file if the SPRING TENSION or COMPRESSION
command is used. This example is for the SPRING TENSION command is used. This example is for the SPRING TENSION
command. Similar rules are applicable for the SPRING command. Similar rules are applicable for the SPRING
COMPRESSION command. The dots indicate other input data COMPRESSION command. The dots indicate other input data
items. items.

67$$' ž 67$$' ž
6(7 1/ ž 6(7 1/ ž
81,76 ž 81,76 ž
-2,17 &225',1$7(6 -2,17 &225',1$7(6
ž ž
0(0%(5 ,1&,'(1&(6 0(0%(5 ,1&,'(1&(6
ž ž
(/(0(17 ,1&,'(1&(6 (/(0(17 ,1&,'(1&(6
ž ž
&2167$176 &2167$176
Section 5 5-97 Section 5 5-97

ž ž
0(0%(5 3523(57< 0(0%(5 3523(57<
ž ž
(/(0(17 3523(57< (/(0(17 3523(57<
ž ž
68332576 68332576
ž ž
635,1* 7(16,21 635,1* 7(16,21
ž ž
/2$'  /2$' 
ž ž
3(5)250 $1$/<6,6 3(5)250 $1$/<6,6
&+$1*( &+$1*(
635,1* 7(16,21 635,1* 7(16,21
ž ž
/2$'  /2$' 
ž ž
3(5)250 $1$/<6,6 3(5)250 $1$/<6,6
&+$1*( &+$1*(
635,1* 7(16,21 635,1* 7(16,21
ž ž
/2$'  /2$' 
ž ž
3(5)250 $1$/<6,6 3(5)250 $1$/<6,6
&+$1*( &+$1*(
635,1* 7(16,21 635,1* 7(16,21
ž ž
/2$'  /2$' 
ž ž
3(5)250 $1$/<6,6 3(5)250 $1$/<6,6
&+$1*( &+$1*(
635,1* 7(16,21 635,1* 7(16,21
ž ž
/2$'  /2$' 
ž ž
/2$' &20%,1$7,21  /2$' &20%,1$7,21 
ž ž
/2$' &20%,1$7,21  /2$' &20%,1$7,21 
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-98 Section 5 5-98 Section 5

ž ž
3(5)250 $1$/<6,6 3(5)250 $1$/<6,6

&+$1*( &+$1*(
/2$' /,67 $// /2$' /,67 $//
35,17 ž 35,17 ž
35,17 ž 35,17 ž
3$5$0(7(5 3$5$0(7(5
ž ž
&+(&. &2'( ž &+(&. &2'( ž
6(/(&7 0(0%(5 ž 6(/(&7 0(0%(5 ž
),1,6+ ),1,6+

a) See Section 5.5 for explanation of the SET NL command. a) See Section 5.5 for explanation of the SET NL command.
The number that follows this command is the total number The number that follows this command is the total number
of primary load cases in the file. of primary load cases in the file.

b) STAAD performs up to 10 iterations automatically, b) STAAD performs up to 10 iterations automatically,


stopping if converged. If not converged, a warning stopping if converged. If not converged, a warning
message will be in the output. Enter a SET ITERLIM i message will be in the output. Enter a SET ITERLIM i
command (i>10) before the first load case to increase the command (i>10) before the first load case to increase the
default number of iterations. Since convergence may not default number of iterations. Since convergence may not
be possible using this procedure, do not set the limit too be possible using this procedure, do not set the limit too
high. If not converged, a message will be in the output. high. If not converged, a message will be in the output.

c) The principle used in the analysis is the following. c) The principle used in the analysis is the following.
• The program reads the list of springs declared as • The program reads the list of springs declared as
SPRING TENSION and/or COMPRESSION. SPRING TENSION and/or COMPRESSION.
• The analysis is performed for the entire structure and • The analysis is performed for the entire structure and
the spring forces are computed. the spring forces are computed.
• For the springs declared as SPRING TENSION / • For the springs declared as SPRING TENSION /
COMPRESSION, the program checks the axial force to COMPRESSION, the program checks the axial force to
determine whether it is tensile or compressive. Positive determine whether it is tensile or compressive. Positive
displacement is TENSION. If the spring cannot take displacement is TENSION. If the spring cannot take
that load, the spring is "switched off" from the that load, the spring is "switched off" from the
structure. structure.
• The analysis is performed again without the switched • The analysis is performed again without the switched
off springs. off springs.
Section 5 5-99 Section 5 5-99
• Up to 10 iterations of the above steps are made for • Up to 10 iterations of the above steps are made for
each PERFORM ANALYSIS command. each PERFORM ANALYSIS command.
• This method does not always converge and may • This method does not always converge and may
become unstable. Check the output for instability become unstable. Check the output for instability
messages. Do not use results if unstable. You may need messages. Do not use results if unstable. You may need
to include some support in each global direction that is to include some support in each global direction that is
not tension (or compression) only to be stable on every not tension (or compression) only to be stable on every
iteration. iteration.
d) In the example shown, only one LOAD case is specified d) In the example shown, only one LOAD case is specified
per ANALYSIS. This is because, a spring which is under per ANALYSIS. This is because, a spring which is under
tension for one load case may be in compression for tension for one load case may be in compression for
another load case. The stiffness matrix for an analysis can another load case. The stiffness matrix for an analysis can
account for the structural condition of only one of these account for the structural condition of only one of these
two load cases. two load cases.

e) Note that the SPRING TENSION / COMPRESSION e) Note that the SPRING TENSION / COMPRESSION
command and its accompanying list of joints may be command and its accompanying list of joints may be
provided after each (except the last) CHANGE command. provided after each (except the last) CHANGE command.
If entered, the new SPRING commands replace all prior If entered, the new SPRING commands replace all prior
SPRING commands. This is because, each CHANGE SPRING commands. This is because, each CHANGE
command signifies that the previous springs in a TENSION command signifies that the previous springs in a TENSION
/ COMPRESSION command are all active again. If not / COMPRESSION command are all active again. If not
entered after a CHANGE, then the previous spring entered after a CHANGE, then the previous spring
definitions are used. definitions are used.

f) The SPRING TENSION command should not be used if the f) The SPRING TENSION command should not be used if the
following load cases are present : Response Spectrum load following load cases are present : Response Spectrum load
case, Time History Load case, UBC Load case, Moving case, Time History Load case, UBC Load case, Moving
Load case. If used, the SPRING TENSION Load case. If used, the SPRING TENSION
/COMPRESSION will be ignored in all load cases. /COMPRESSION will be ignored in all load cases.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-100 Section 5 5-100 Section 5

5.24 Element Plane Stress and Inplane Rotation 5.24 Element Plane Stress and Inplane Rotation
Specifications Specifications

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

These commands allow the user to model the following conditions These commands allow the user to model the following conditions
on plate elements on plate elements

a) PLANE STRESS condition a) PLANE STRESS condition


b) In-plane rotation stiffness reformulated to be rigid or to be b) In-plane rotation stiffness reformulated to be rigid or to be
zero. zero.

*HQHUDO )RUPDW *HQHUDO )RUPDW

3/$1( 675(66  3/$1( 675(66 


(/(0(17  5,*,' ,13/$1( 527$7,21  (/(0(17  5,*,' ,13/$1( 527$7,21 
 ,*125( ,13/$1( 527$7,21   ,*125( ,13/$1( 527$7,21 
HOHPHQWOLVW HOHPHQWOLVW

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

See The PLANE STRESS specification allows the user to model See The PLANE STRESS specification allows the user to model
Section 1.6 selected elements for PLANE STRESS action only [No bending or Section 1.6 selected elements for PLANE STRESS action only [No bending or
transverse shear stiffness]. transverse shear stiffness].

The RIGID INPLANE ROTATION command causes the program The RIGID INPLANE ROTATION command causes the program
to connect the corner Mz "in-plane rotation" action to the other to connect the corner Mz "in-plane rotation" action to the other
corner Mz rotations rigidly. The STAAD plate element corner Mz rotations rigidly. The STAAD plate element
formulation normally produces a very soft Mz stiffness that formulation normally produces a very soft Mz stiffness that
improves the inplane shear deformation. However when the plate improves the inplane shear deformation. However when the plate
Mz is connected to a beam bending moment as the only load path Mz is connected to a beam bending moment as the only load path
for that moment, then the RIGID INPLANE option may be used to for that moment, then the RIGID INPLANE option may be used to
have that element carry the Mz moment to the other joints rigidly have that element carry the Mz moment to the other joints rigidly
to avoid the instability at the beam end. Usually only the elements to avoid the instability at the beam end. Usually only the elements
connected to beams in this manner would have this specification. connected to beams in this manner would have this specification.

The IGNORE INPLANE ROTATION command causes the program The IGNORE INPLANE ROTATION command causes the program
to ignore "in-plane rotation" actions. The STAAD plate element to ignore "in-plane rotation" actions. The STAAD plate element
Section 5 5-101 Section 5 5-101
formulation normally includes this important action formulation normally includes this important action
automatically. However, it may be noted that some element automatically. However, it may be noted that some element
formulations ignore this action by default. The user may utilize this formulations ignore this action by default. The user may utilize this
option to compare STAAD results with solutions from these option to compare STAAD results with solutions from these
programs. programs.

These options are exclusive of each other and also exclusive of These options are exclusive of each other and also exclusive of
element releases. No single element may have more than one of element releases. No single element may have more than one of
these options. these options.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

(/(0(17 3/$1( 675(66 (/(0(17 3/$1( 675(66


 72       72     
(/(0(17 ,*125( (/(0(17 ,*125(
  72    72 
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-102 Section 5 5-102 Section 5

5.25 Member Offset Specification 5.25 Member Offset Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command may be used to rigidly offset a frame member end This command may be used to rigidly offset a frame member end
from a joint to model the offset conditions existing at the ends of from a joint to model the offset conditions existing at the ends of
frame members. frame members.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

0(0%(5 2))6(76 0(0%(5 2))6(76


67$57  67$57 
PHPEHUOLVW   /2&$/ I I I PHPEHUOLVW   /2&$/ I I I
(1'  (1' 

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

f 1 , f 2 , and f 3 correspond to f 1 , f 2 , and f 3 correspond to


the distance, measured in the distance, measured in
LOCALized or Global LOCALized or Global
7' 7'
6' coordinate system, from the 6' coordinate system, from the
joint (START or END as joint (START or END as
9' specified) to the centroid 9' specified) to the centroid
of the starting or ending of the starting or ending
point of the members point of the members
listed. MEMBER OFFSET listed. MEMBER OFFSET
command can be command can be
used for any member whose starting or ending point is not used for any member whose starting or ending point is not
concurrent with the given incident joint. This command enables the concurrent with the given incident joint. This command enables the
See Section See Section
user to account for the secondary forces, which are induced due to user to account for the secondary forces, which are induced due to
1.11 1.11
the eccentricity of the member. Member offsets can be specified in the eccentricity of the member. Member offsets can be specified in
any direction, including the direction that may coincide with the any direction, including the direction that may coincide with the
member x-axis. member x-axis.

wp in the diagram refers to the location of the centroid of the wp in the diagram refers to the location of the centroid of the
starting or ending point of the member. starting or ending point of the member.
Section 5 5-103 Section 5 5-103
LOCAL is an optional parameter, if not entered then I I I LOCAL is an optional parameter, if not entered then I I I
are assumed to be in global. LOCAL means that the distances I are assumed to be in global. LOCAL means that the distances I
I I are in the same member coordinate system that would result I I are in the same member coordinate system that would result
if the member were not offset and BETA = 0.0. if the member were not offset and BETA = 0.0.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

0(0%(5 2))6(7 0(0%(5 2))6(7


 67$57   67$57 
 (1'    (1'  
 (1'    (1'  

1RWHV 1RWHV

1) If a MEMBER LOAD (see MEMBER LOAD specification) is 1) If a MEMBER LOAD (see MEMBER LOAD specification) is
applied on a member for which MEMBER OFFSETS have been applied on a member for which MEMBER OFFSETS have been
specified, the location of the load is measured not from the specified, the location of the load is measured not from the
coordinates of the starting joint. Instead, it is measured from coordinates of the starting joint. Instead, it is measured from
the offset location of the starting joint. the offset location of the starting joint.
2) START and END is based on the user's specification of 2) START and END is based on the user's specification of
MEMBER INCIDENCE for the particular member. MEMBER INCIDENCE for the particular member.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-104 Section 5 5-104 Section 5

5.26.1 Definition of Material Constants 5.26.1 Definition of Material Constants

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command may be used to specify the material properties by This command may be used to specify the material properties by
material name. Then assign the members and elements to this material name. Then assign the members and elements to this
material name in the CONSTANTS command. material name in the CONSTANTS command.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

'(),1( 0$7(5,$/ '(),1( 0$7(5,$/

,627523,& QDPH ,627523,& QDPH

(  ( 
*  * 
32,6621  32,6621 
'(16,7<  I '(16,7<  I
$/3+$  $/3+$ 
'$03,1*  '$03,1* 
&'$03  &'$03 
5HSHDW ,627523,& QDPH DQG YDOXHV IRU DV PDQ\ PDWHULDOV DV 5HSHDW ,627523,& QDPH DQG YDOXHV IRU DV PDQ\ PDWHULDOV DV
GHVLUHG WKHQ GHVLUHG WKHQ

(1' 0$7(5,$/ '(),1,7,21 (1' 0$7(5,$/ '(),1,7,21

Name material name (name of up to 16 characters). Name material name (name of up to 16 characters).
E specifies Young's Modulus. E specifies Young's Modulus.
G specifies Shear Modulus. Enter only for beams G specifies Shear Modulus. Enter only for beams
when Poisson would not be 0.01 to 0.499. when Poisson would not be 0.01 to 0.499.
POISSON specifies Poisson's Ratio. If G is not entered, then this POISSON specifies Poisson's Ratio. If G is not entered, then this
value is used for calculating the Shear Modulus value is used for calculating the Shear Modulus
See next See next
(G=0.5xE/(1+POISSON)). Must be 0.01 to 0.499. (G=0.5xE/(1+POISSON)). Must be 0.01 to 0.499.
command for command for
DENSITY specifies weight density. DENSITY specifies weight density.
example example
ALPHA Co-efficient of thermal expansion. ALPHA Co-efficient of thermal expansion.
DAMPING or CDAMP DAMPING or CDAMP
Damping ratio to be used in computing the modal Damping ratio to be used in computing the modal
damping by the composite damping method. damping by the composite damping method.
Section 5 5-105 Section 5 5-105
f1 Value of the corresponding constants. For E, G, f1 Value of the corresponding constants. For E, G,
POISSON, DENSITY, ALPHA and damping. POISSON, DENSITY, ALPHA and damping.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-106 Section 5 5-106 Section 5

5.26.2 Constant Specification 5.26.2 Constant Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command may be used to specify the material properties This command may be used to specify the material properties
(Moduli of Elasticity and Shear, Poisson's ratio, Density, (Moduli of Elasticity and Shear, Poisson's ratio, Density,
Coefficient of linear expansion, and material damping) of the Coefficient of linear expansion, and material damping) of the
members and elements. In addition, this command may also be used members and elements. In addition, this command may also be used
to specify the member orientation (BETA angle or REFERENCE to specify the member orientation (BETA angle or REFERENCE
point). point).

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

&2167$176 &2167$176

0$7(5,$/ QDPH 0(0%(5 PHPEHOHPOLVW  0$7(5,$/ QDPH 0(0%(5 PHPEHOHPOLVW 


 $//   $// 
ZKHUH QDPH LV WKH PDWHULDO QDPH DV VSHFLILHG LQ WKH ZKHUH QDPH LV WKH PDWHULDO QDPH DV VSHFLILHG LQ WKH
'(),1( 0$7(5,$/ FRPPDQG VHH VHFWLRQ   '(),1( 0$7(5,$/ FRPPDQG VHH VHFWLRQ  

25 >'R QRW XVH WKH DERYH LQSXW IRUP ZLWK WKH RQHV 25 >'R QRW XVH WKH DERYH LQSXW IRUP ZLWK WKH RQHV
EHORZ 8VH D VHSDUDWH &2167$176 FRPPDQG@ EHORZ 8VH D VHSDUDWH &2167$176 FRPPDQG@

(  ( 
*  0(0%(5 PHPEHOHPOLVW  *  0(0%(5 PHPEHOHPOLVW 
32,6621    32,6621   
'(16,7<  I %($0  '(16,7<  I %($0 
%(7$  3/$7(  %(7$  3/$7( 
$/3+$  62/,'  $/3+$  62/,' 
&'$03   $//  &'$03   $// 
5() I I I  0(0%(5 PHPEHOHPOLVW 5() I I I  0(0%(5 PHPEHOHPOLVW
5()-7 I  5()-7 I 

List specifier: MEM, BEA, PLA, SOL, ALL. Only MEM may be List specifier: MEM, BEA, PLA, SOL, ALL. Only MEM may be
followed by a list. Blank means ALL. ALL means all members followed by a list. Blank means ALL. ALL means all members
and elements; BEA means all members; PLA, all plates; SOL, all and elements; BEA means all members; PLA, all plates; SOL, all
solids. solids.
See Section See Section
1.5.3 1.5.3
Section 5 5-107 Section 5 5-107
E specifies Young's Modulus. This value must be E specifies Young's Modulus. This value must be
provided before the POISSON for each provided before the POISSON for each
member/element in the Constants list. member/element in the Constants list.
G specifies Shear Modulus. Enter only for beams G specifies Shear Modulus. Enter only for beams
when Poisson would not be 0.01 to 0.499. when Poisson would not be 0.01 to 0.499.

POISSON specifies Poisson's Ratio. If G is not entered, then POISSON specifies Poisson's Ratio. If G is not entered, then
this value is used for calculating the Shear this value is used for calculating the Shear
Modulus (G=0.5xE/(1+POISSON)). Must be 0.01 Modulus (G=0.5xE/(1+POISSON)). Must be 0.01
to 0.499. to 0.499.

DENSITY specifies weight density. DENSITY specifies weight density.

ALPHA Co-efficient of thermal expansion. ALPHA Co-efficient of thermal expansion.

CDAMP Damping ratio to be used in computing the modal CDAMP Damping ratio to be used in computing the modal
damping by the composite damping method. damping by the composite damping method.

BETA specifies member rotation angle in degrees BETA specifies member rotation angle in degrees
(see Section 2). (see Section 2).

Note : Single angle sections are oriented according Note : Single angle sections are oriented according
to their principal axes by default. If it is necessary to their principal axes by default. If it is necessary
to orient them such that their legs are parallel to to orient them such that their legs are parallel to
the global axes, the BETA specification must be the global axes, the BETA specification must be
used. STAAD offers the following additional used. STAAD offers the following additional
specifications for this purpose : specifications for this purpose :

BETA ANGLE BETA ANGLE


BETA RANGLE BETA RANGLE

Both of the above options will result in an Both of the above options will result in an
orientation with the legs parallel to the global axis. orientation with the legs parallel to the global axis.
The 'ANGLE' option rotates the section through the The 'ANGLE' option rotates the section through the
angle (90 - "alpha") (where "alpha" = angle angle (90 - "alpha") (where "alpha" = angle
between the principal axis system and the global between the principal axis system and the global
axis system). [Please review the figures on the axis system). [Please review the figures on the
next page.] The 'RANGLE' option rotates the next page.] The 'RANGLE' option rotates the
section through an angle equal to (180 - "alpha"). section through an angle equal to (180 - "alpha").
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-108 Section 5 5-108 Section 5

Both options will work the same way for equal Both options will work the same way for equal
angles. For unequal angles, the right option must angles. For unequal angles, the right option must
be used based on the required orientation. be used based on the required orientation.

90−α 180−α 90−α 180−α

α α

90−α 90−α
180−α 180−α

α α
Section 5 5-109 Section 5 5-109

/RFDO < *OREDO ; /RFDO < *OREDO ;

α α

α α

/RFDO = DV ZHOO DV *OREDO = /RFDO = DV ZHOO DV *OREDO =

2ULHQWDWLRQ RI D FROXPQ YHUWLFDO PHPEHU FRUUHVSRQGLQJ WR %(7$  2ULHQWDWLRQ RI D FROXPQ YHUWLFDO PHPEHU FRUUHVSRQGLQJ WR %(7$ 
/RFDO ; DQG *OREDO < FRPH RXW RI WKH SDSHU /RFDO ; LV SDUDOOHO WR *OREDO < /RFDO ; DQG *OREDO < FRPH RXW RI WKH SDSHU /RFDO ; LV SDUDOOHO WR *OREDO <

*OREDO ; *OREDO ;

α α
/RFDO < /RFDO <

*OREDO = *OREDO =
/RFDO = /RFDO =

2ULHQWDWLRQ RI D FROXPQ YHUWLFDO PHPEHU FRUUHVSRQGLQJ WR %(7$ $1*/( 2ULHQWDWLRQ RI D FROXPQ YHUWLFDO PHPEHU FRUUHVSRQGLQJ WR %(7$ $1*/(
/RFDO ; DQG *OREDO < FRPH RXW RI WKH SDSHU /RFDO ; LV SDUDOOHO WR *OREDO < /RFDO ; DQG *OREDO < FRPH RXW RI WKH SDSHU /RFDO ; LV SDUDOOHO WR *OREDO <
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-110 Section 5 5-110 Section 5

f1 Value of the corresponding constants. For E, G, f1 Value of the corresponding constants. For E, G,
POISSON, DENSITY, ALPHA and CDAMP, built- POISSON, DENSITY, ALPHA and CDAMP, built-
in material names can be entered instead of f 1 . The in material names can be entered instead of f 1 . The
built-in names are STEEL, CONCRETE & built-in names are STEEL, CONCRETE &
ALUMINUM. Appropriate values will be ALUMINUM. Appropriate values will be
automatically assigned (ALPHA in deg F units) for automatically assigned (ALPHA in deg F units) for
the built-in names. the built-in names.

CONSTANTS in FPS units CONSTANTS in FPS units


Constant Steel Concrete Aluminum Units Constant Steel Concrete Aluminum Units
E (US) 29000 3150 10000 Kip/in 2 E (US) 29000 3150 10000 Kip/in 2
Poisson’s 0.30 .17 .33 Poisson’s 0.30 .17 .33
Density .000283 .0000868 .000098 Kip/in 3 Density .000283 .0000868 .000098 Kip/in 3
Alpha 6.5E-6 5.5E-6 12.8E-6 L/L/deg-F Alpha 6.5E-6 5.5E-6 12.8E-6 L/L/deg-F
CDAMP .03 .05 .03 Ratio CDAMP .03 .05 .03 Ratio
2
E (nonUS) 29732.736 Kip/in E (nonUS) 29732.736 Kip/in 2
CONSTANTS in MKS units CONSTANTS in MKS units
Constant Steel Concrete Aluminum Units Constant Steel Concrete Aluminum Units
E (US) 199 947 960 21 718 455 68 947 573 kN/m 2 E (US) 199 947 960 21 718 455 68 947 573 kN/m 2
Poisson’s 0.30 .17 .33 Poisson’s 0.30 .17 .33
3
Density 76.819 541 23.561 612 26.601 820 kN/m Density 76.819 541 23.561 612 26.601 820 kN/m 3
Alpha 6.5E-6 5.5E-6 12.8E-6 L/L/deg-F Alpha 6.5E-6 5.5E-6 12.8E-6 L/L/deg-F
CDAMP .03 .05 .03 Ratio CDAMP .03 .05 .03 Ratio
2
E (nonUS) 205 000 000 kN/m E (nonUS) 205 000 000 kN/m 2
E (US) is used if US codes were installed or if Member Properties E (US) is used if US codes were installed or if Member Properties
American is specified for an analysis; otherwise E (nonUS) is used. American is specified for an analysis; otherwise E (nonUS) is used.

f2 , f3 , f4 Global X, Y, and Z coordinates for the reference f2 , f3 , f4 Global X, Y, and Z coordinates for the reference
point or point or
f5 use location of joint f 5 for the reference point, from f5 use location of joint f 5 for the reference point, from
which the BETA angle will be calculated by STAAD which the BETA angle will be calculated by STAAD
(see section 1.5.3). (see section 1.5.3).
Section 5 5-111 Section 5 5-111
([DPSOH ([DPSOH

'(),1( 0$7(5,$/ '(),1( 0$7(5,$/


,627523,& &)67((/ ,627523,& &)67((/
(  ( 
32,6621  32,6621 
'(16,7< ( '(16,7< (
$/3+$ ( $/3+$ (
'$03  '$03 
(1' 0$7(5,$/ (1' 0$7(5,$/

&2167$176 &2167$176
0$7(5,$/ &)67((/ 0(0%  72  0$7(5,$/ &)67((/ 0(0%  72 

&2167$176 &2167$176
( ( $// ( ( $//
%(7$  0(0%   72  %(7$  0(0%   72 
'(16,7< 67((/ 0(0%  72  '(16,7< 67((/ 0(0%  72 
%(7$  0(0% ; %(7$  0(0% ;

Note that the last command in the above example will set BETA as Note that the last command in the above example will set BETA as
90 ° for all members parallel to the X-axis. 90 ° for all members parallel to the X-axis.

1RWHV 1RWHV

1) The value for E must always be given first in the Constants list 1) The value for E must always be given first in the Constants list
for each member/element. for each member/element.
2) All numerical values must be provided in the current units. 2) All numerical values must be provided in the current units.
3) It is not necessary or possible to specify the units of 3) It is not necessary or possible to specify the units of
temperature or ALPHA. The user must ensure that the value temperature or ALPHA. The user must ensure that the value
provided for ALPHA is consistent in terms of units with the provided for ALPHA is consistent in terms of units with the
value provided for temperature (see Section 5.32.6). value provided for temperature (see Section 5.32.6).
4) If the POISSON RATIO is not specified, STAAD will assume a 4) If the POISSON RATIO is not specified, STAAD will assume a
Poisson’s Ratio based upon the Modulus of Elasticity, E. Poisson’s Ratio based upon the Modulus of Elasticity, E.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-112 Section 5 5-112 Section 5

5.26.3 Modal Damping Information 5.26.3 Modal Damping Information

Purpose Purpose

To define unique modal damping ratios for every mode. If all To define unique modal damping ratios for every mode. If all
modes have the same damping, then enter damping with the Define modes have the same damping, then enter damping with the Define
Time History Load or with the Dynamic Loading commands. Time History Load or with the Dynamic Loading commands.

Damping may be entered here EXPLICITly for some or all modes; Damping may be entered here EXPLICITly for some or all modes;
or by specifying that STAAD EVALUATE each mode’s damping or by specifying that STAAD EVALUATE each mode’s damping
based on the frequency of the mode and the minimum and based on the frequency of the mode and the minimum and
maximum damping entered here. The formula used to evaluate the maximum damping entered here. The formula used to evaluate the
damping is given below. damping is given below.

The damping entered will be used in Time History load cases; and The damping entered will be used in Time History load cases; and
in Response Spectrum load cases that use the CQC/ASCE4 in Response Spectrum load cases that use the CQC/ASCE4
methods and/or Spectra vs. Period curves versus damping. methods and/or Spectra vs. Period curves versus damping.

General Syntax General Syntax

'(),1( '$03,1* ,1)250$7,21 '(),1( '$03,1* ,1)250$7,21

 (9$/8$7( GPLQ GPD[   (9$/8$7( GPLQ GPD[ 


   
 (;3/,&,7 G G G G G ž   (;3/,&,7 G G G G G ž 
(1' (1'

1. Enter dmin and dmax as the minimum and maximum damping 1. Enter dmin and dmax as the minimum and maximum damping
ratios respectively to be used in the formula below, or ratios respectively to be used in the formula below, or
2. Alternatively enter d1, d2, d3, etc. as the damping ratios for 2. Alternatively enter d1, d2, d3, etc. as the damping ratios for
each mode. With the Explicit option each value can be each mode. With the Explicit option each value can be
preceded by a repetition factor (rf*damp) without spaces. For preceded by a repetition factor (rf*damp) without spaces. For
example: example:
EXPLICIT 0.03 7*0.05 0.04 <= mode 1 damping is .03, EXPLICIT 0.03 7*0.05 0.04 <= mode 1 damping is .03,
modes 2 to 8 are .05, mode 9 is .04. modes 2 to 8 are .05, mode 9 is .04.
If there are fewer entries than modes, then the last damping If there are fewer entries than modes, then the last damping
entered will apply to the remaining modes. This input may be entered will apply to the remaining modes. This input may be
continued to 10 more input lines with word EXPLICIT only on continued to 10 more input lines with word EXPLICIT only on
Section 5 5-113 Section 5 5-113
line 1; end all but last line with a space then a hyphen. line 1; end all but last line with a space then a hyphen.
There may be additional sets of EXPLICIT lines before the There may be additional sets of EXPLICIT lines before the
END. END.

Damping ratios must be in the range 0.0 through 1.0. Damping ratios must be in the range 0.0 through 1.0.

The formula used for EVALUATE (to evaluate the damping per The formula used for EVALUATE (to evaluate the damping per
modal frequency) is: modal frequency) is:
Damping for the first 2 modes is set to dmin from input. Damping for the first 2 modes is set to dmin from input.
Damping for modes i = 3 to N given dmin and the first two Damping for modes i = 3 to N given dmin and the first two
frequencies ω1 and ω2 and the ith modal frequency ωi . frequencies ω1 and ω2 and the ith modal frequency ωi .
A 1 = dmin / (ω1 + ω2 ) A 1 = dmin / (ω1 + ω2 )
A 0 = A 1 * ω1 * ω2 A 0 = A 1 * ω1 * ω2
D(i) = (A 0 / ωi ) + (A 1 * ωi ) damping for modes i = 3 to N. D(i) = (A 0 / ωi ) + (A 1 * ωi ) damping for modes i = 3 to N.
If the resulting damping is greater than the dmax value of If the resulting damping is greater than the dmax value of
maximum damping, then dmax will be used. maximum damping, then dmax will be used.

Example: (for dmin = .02 , dmax = .12 and the ωi given below) Example: (for dmin = .02 , dmax = .12 and the ωi given below)
Mode ωi Damping ratio Mode ωi Damping ratio
1 3 .0200 1 3 .0200
2 4 .0200 2 4 .0200
3 6 .0228568 3 6 .0228568
N 100 .1200 (calculated as .28605 then reset to N 100 .1200 (calculated as .28605 then reset to
maximum entered) maximum entered)
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-114 Section 5 5-114 Section 5

5.27 Support Specifications 5.27 Support Specifications

STAAD support specifications may be either parallel or inclined to STAAD support specifications may be either parallel or inclined to
the global axes. Specification of supports parallel to the global the global axes. Specification of supports parallel to the global
axes is described in Section 5.27.1. Specification of inclined axes is described in Section 5.27.1. Specification of inclined
supports is described in Section 5.27.2. supports is described in Section 5.27.2.
Section 5 5-115 Section 5 5-115

5.27.1 Global Support Specification 5.27.1 Global Support Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This set of commands may be used to specify the SUPPORT This set of commands may be used to specify the SUPPORT
conditions for supports parallel to the global axes. conditions for supports parallel to the global axes.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

68332576 68332576

3,11('  3,11(' 
MRLQWOLVW   MRLQWOLVW  
),;(' %87 UHOHDVHVSHF>VSULQJVSHF@  ),;(' %87 UHOHDVHVSHF>VSULQJVSHF@ 
(1)25&(' %87 UHOHDVHVSHF  (1)25&(' %87 UHOHDVHVSHF 
);  ); 
)<  )< 
)=  )= 
UHOHDVHVSHF 0;  UHOHDVHVSHF 0; 
0<  0< 
0=  0= 
.); I  .); I 
.)< I  .)< I 
.)= I  .)= I 
VSULQJVSHF .0; I  VSULQJVSHF .0; I 
.0< I  .0< I 
.0= I  .0= I 

'HVFULSWLRQ RI 3LQQHG DQG )L[HG 'HVFULSWLRQ RI 3LQQHG DQG )L[HG

PINNED support is a support that has translational, but no PINNED support is a support that has translational, but no
rotational restraints. In other words, the support has no moment rotational restraints. In other words, the support has no moment
carrying capacity. A FIXED support has both translational and carrying capacity. A FIXED support has both translational and
See Section rotational restraints. A FIXED support can be released in the global See Section rotational restraints. A FIXED support can be released in the global
1.14 directions as described in release-spec (FX for force-X through MZ 1.14 directions as described in release-spec (FX for force-X through MZ
for moment-Z). Also, a fixed support can have spring constants as for moment-Z). Also, a fixed support can have spring constants as
described in spring-spec (translational spring in global X-axis as described in spring-spec (translational spring in global X-axis as
KFX through rotational spring in global Z-axis as KMZ). KFX through rotational spring in global Z-axis as KMZ).
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-116 Section 5 5-116 Section 5

Corresponding spring constants are f 1 through f 6 . Note that the Corresponding spring constants are f 1 through f 6 . Note that the
rotational spring constants are always per degree of rotation. All rotational spring constants are always per degree of rotation. All
six releases may be provided as may be required when using the six releases may be provided as may be required when using the
CHANGE command. If both release specifications and spring CHANGE command. If both release specifications and spring
specifications are to be supplied for the same support joint, release specifications are to be supplied for the same support joint, release
specifications must come first. specifications must come first.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

68332576 68332576
 72   3,11('  72   3,11('
  ),;(' %87 ); 0=   ),;(' %87 ); 0=
  ),;(' %87 0= .);  .)<    ),;(' %87 0= .);  .)< 
  ),;('   ),;('
 ),;(' %87 .)<   ),;(' %87 .)< 

In this example, joints 1 to 4 and joint 7 are pinned. No moments In this example, joints 1 to 4 and joint 7 are pinned. No moments
are carried by those supports. Joints 5 and 6 are fixed for all DOF are carried by those supports. Joints 5 and 6 are fixed for all DOF
except in force-X and moment-Z. Joints 8 and 9 are fixed for all except in force-X and moment-Z. Joints 8 and 9 are fixed for all
DOF except moment-Z and have springs in the global X and Y DOF except moment-Z and have springs in the global X and Y
directions with corresponding spring constants of 50 and 75 units directions with corresponding spring constants of 50 and 75 units
respectively. Joints 18 and 21 are fixed for all translational and respectively. Joints 18 and 21 are fixed for all translational and
rotational degrees of freedom. At joint 27, all the DOF are fixed rotational degrees of freedom. At joint 27, all the DOF are fixed
except the FY DOF where it has a spring with 125 units spring except the FY DOF where it has a spring with 125 units spring
constant. constant.

1RWHV 1RWHV

1) Users are urged to refer to Section 5.38 for information on 1) Users are urged to refer to Section 5.38 for information on
specification of SUPPORTS along with the CHANGE specification of SUPPORTS along with the CHANGE
command specifications. command specifications.
2) Spring constants must be provided in the current units. 2) Spring constants must be provided in the current units.
3) All spring DOF must be entered after the last non-spring DOF 3) All spring DOF must be entered after the last non-spring DOF
is specified, if both are on the same line. is specified, if both are on the same line.
4) If there are two entries for the same joint, then: 4) If there are two entries for the same joint, then:
a) any direction that is pinned/fixed on either will be fixed in a) any direction that is pinned/fixed on either will be fixed in
that direction. that direction.
b) any direction released on one and is a spring on the other b) any direction released on one and is a spring on the other
will use the spring. will use the spring.
Section 5 5-117 Section 5 5-117
c) Any direction that is pinned/fixed on one and a spring c) Any direction that is pinned/fixed on one and a spring
on the other will use pinned/fixed. on the other will use pinned/fixed.

'HVFULSWLRQ RI (QIRUFHG 'HVFULSWLRQ RI (QIRUFHG

Enforced Support defines which translational and rotational Enforced Support defines which translational and rotational
directions, at a joint, may have a support displacement imposed. directions, at a joint, may have a support displacement imposed.
The support displacements are defined for each load case in section The support displacements are defined for each load case in section
5.32.8. If no support displacement is entered, then zero 5.32.8. If no support displacement is entered, then zero
displacement will be imposed, as if that direction was FIXED. The displacement will be imposed, as if that direction was FIXED. The
enforced displacement directions will be fixed for dynamic load enforced displacement directions will be fixed for dynamic load
cases. cases.

If there are two entries for the same joint, then any direction that is If there are two entries for the same joint, then any direction that is
enforced on either will be enforced in that direction, overriding any enforced on either will be enforced in that direction, overriding any
other support specification for that joint-direction. other support specification for that joint-direction.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-118 Section 5 5-118 Section 5

5.27.2 Inclined Support Specification 5.27.2 Inclined Support Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

These commands may be used to specify supports that are inclined These commands may be used to specify supports that are inclined
with respect to the global axes. with respect to the global axes.

*HQHUDO )RUPDW *HQHUDO )RUPDW

6833257 6833257

 I I
  
I  3,11('   I I
  
I  3,11(' 
MRLQWOLVW ,1&OLQHG     MRLQWOLVW ,1&OLQHG    
5() I  I  I   ),;(' %87 UHOHDVHVSHF>VSULQJVSHF@  5() I  I  I   ),;(' %87 UHOHDVHVSHF>VSULQJVSHF@ 
5()-7 I   (1)25&(' %87 UHOHDVHVSHF  5()-7 I   (1)25&(' %87 UHOHDVHVSHF 

where f 1 , f 2 , f 3 are x, y, z global distances from the joint to the where f 1 , f 2 , f 3 are x, y, z global distances from the joint to the
“reference point"; or “reference point"; or
where f 4 , f 5 , f 6 are x, y, z global coordinates of the “reference where f 4 , f 5 , f 6 are x, y, z global coordinates of the “reference
point"; or point"; or
where f 7 is a joint number whose x, y, z global coordinates is the where f 7 is a joint number whose x, y, z global coordinates is the
“reference point". “reference point".

A vector from the joint location to the reference point location A vector from the joint location to the reference point location
serves to define a local coordinate system (same as member with serves to define a local coordinate system (same as member with
BETA=0). The inclined support directions are in this local BETA=0). The inclined support directions are in this local
"Inclined Support Axis System" (see more below). "Inclined Support Axis System" (see more below).

See See
Note the release-spec and spring-spec are the same as in the Note the release-spec and spring-spec are the same as in the
Section 1.14 Section 1.14
previous section (5.27.1). However, please note that FX through previous section (5.27.1). However, please note that FX through
MZ and KFX through KMZ refer to forces/moments and spring MZ and KFX through KMZ refer to forces/moments and spring
constants in the "Inclined Support Axis System" (see below). constants in the "Inclined Support Axis System" (see below).
Section 5 5-119 Section 5 5-119
2 3 2 3

3m 3m

4 Y 4 Y
1 1

4m 3m 4m 3m
X X
Reference point (1, -1, 0) Reference point (1, -1, 0)

Inclined Support Axis System Inclined Support Axis System

The INCLINED SUPPORT specification is based on the "Inclined The INCLINED SUPPORT specification is based on the "Inclined
Support axis system". The local x-axis of this system is defined by Support axis system". The local x-axis of this system is defined by
assuming the inclined support joint as the origin and joining it with assuming the inclined support joint as the origin and joining it with
a "reference point" with co-ordinates of f 1 , f 2 and f 3 (see figure) a "reference point" with co-ordinates of f 1 , f 2 and f 3 (see figure)
measured from the inclined support joint in the global coordinate measured from the inclined support joint in the global coordinate
system. system.

The Y and Z axes of the inclined support axis system have the same The Y and Z axes of the inclined support axis system have the same
orientation as the local Y and Z axes of an imaginary member orientation as the local Y and Z axes of an imaginary member
whose BETA ANGLE is zero and whose incidences are defined whose BETA ANGLE is zero and whose incidences are defined
from the inclined support joint to the reference point. Users may from the inclined support joint to the reference point. Users may
refer to section 1.5.3 of this manual for more information on these refer to section 1.5.3 of this manual for more information on these
concepts. concepts.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

6833257 6833257
 ,1&/,1('    ),;(' %87 )< 0; 0< 0=  ,1&/,1('    ),;(' %87 )< 0; 0< 0=

1RWHV 1RWHV

Inclined support directions are assumed to be same as global when Inclined support directions are assumed to be same as global when
computing some dynamic and UBC intermediate results (e.g. global computing some dynamic and UBC intermediate results (e.g. global
participation factors). If masses and/or forces in the free directions participation factors). If masses and/or forces in the free directions
at inclined supports are a relatively small portion of the overall at inclined supports are a relatively small portion of the overall
forces, then the effect should be very small. forces, then the effect should be very small.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-120 Section 5 5-120 Section 5

5.27.3 Automatic Spring Support Generator for 5.27.3 Automatic Spring Support Generator for
Foundations Foundations
STAAD has a facility for automatic generation of spring supports STAAD has a facility for automatic generation of spring supports
to model footings and foundation mats. This command is specified to model footings and foundation mats. This command is specified
under the SUPPORT command. under the SUPPORT command.

*HQHUDO )RUPDW *HQHUDO )RUPDW

6833257 6833257

;  ; 
 )22WLQJ I I  ;2QO\   )22WLQJ I I  ;2QO\ 
MRLQWOLVW (/$67,&   ',5 <  68%JUDGH I 35,17 MRLQWOLVW (/$67,&   ',5 <  68%JUDGH I 35,17
 0$7  <2QO\   0$7  <2QO\ 
=  = 
 =2QO\   =2QO\ 

where where

f1, f2 = Length and width of the footing. If f2 is not given, the f1, f2 = Length and width of the footing. If f2 is not given, the
footing is assumed to be a square with sides f1 footing is assumed to be a square with sides f1
f3 = Soil sub-grade modulus in force/area/length units f3 = Soil sub-grade modulus in force/area/length units
X,Y,Z = Global direction in which soil springs are to be X,Y,Z = Global direction in which soil springs are to be
generated generated

Do not use this command with SET Z UP. Do not use this command with SET Z UP.

The ELASTIC FOOTING option : If you want to specify the The ELASTIC FOOTING option : If you want to specify the
influence area of a joint yourself and have STAAD simply multiply influence area of a joint yourself and have STAAD simply multiply
the area you specified by the sub-grade modulus, use the the area you specified by the sub-grade modulus, use the
FOOTING option. Situations where this may be appropriate are FOOTING option. Situations where this may be appropriate are
such as when a spread footing is located beneath a joint where you such as when a spread footing is located beneath a joint where you
want to specify a spring support. Please note that it is absolutely want to specify a spring support. Please note that it is absolutely
imperative that you provide f1 (and f2 if its a non-square footing) imperative that you provide f1 (and f2 if its a non-square footing)
if you choose the FOOTING option. if you choose the FOOTING option.

The ELASTIC MAT option : If you want to have STAAD The ELASTIC MAT option : If you want to have STAAD
calculate the influence area for the joint (instead of you specifying calculate the influence area for the joint (instead of you specifying
Section 5 5-121 Section 5 5-121
an area yourself) and use that area along with the sub-grade an area yourself) and use that area along with the sub-grade
modulus to determine the spring stiffness value, use the MAT modulus to determine the spring stiffness value, use the MAT
option. Situations where this may be appropriate are such as when a option. Situations where this may be appropriate are such as when a
slab is on soil and carries the weight of the structure above. You slab is on soil and carries the weight of the structure above. You
may have modeled the entire slab as finite elements and wish to may have modeled the entire slab as finite elements and wish to
generate spring supports at the nodes of the elements. generate spring supports at the nodes of the elements.

The DIRection option : The keyword DIR is followed by one of The DIRection option : The keyword DIR is followed by one of
the alphabets X, Y or Z (or XONLY, YONLY, or ZONLY) which the alphabets X, Y or Z (or XONLY, YONLY, or ZONLY) which
indicate the direction of resistance of the spring supports. If X or indicate the direction of resistance of the spring supports. If X or
Y or Z is selected then a spring support is generated in that Y or Z is selected then a spring support is generated in that
direction plus 3 other directions receive a fixed support, e.g. if Y direction plus 3 other directions receive a fixed support, e.g. if Y
is selected, then FY is supported by a spring; FX and FZ and MY is selected, then FY is supported by a spring; FX and FZ and MY
are fixed supports; and MX and MZ are free. If XONLY, YONLY, are fixed supports; and MX and MZ are free. If XONLY, YONLY,
or ZONLY are selected then only a spring support in that direction or ZONLY are selected then only a spring support in that direction
is generated. is generated.

The SUBGRADE option : The keyword SUBGRADE is followed The SUBGRADE option : The keyword SUBGRADE is followed
by the value of the subgrade reaction. Please note the value should by the value of the subgrade reaction. Please note the value should
be provided in the current unit system signified by the most recent be provided in the current unit system signified by the most recent
UNIT statement prior to the SUPPORT command. UNIT statement prior to the SUPPORT command.

The PRINT option : Prints the influence area of each joint. The PRINT option : Prints the influence area of each joint.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

68332576 68332576
 72  (/$67,& 0$7 ',5(& < 68%*   72  (/$67,& 0$7 ',5(& < 68%* 

The above command instructs STAAD to internally generate The above command instructs STAAD to internally generate
supports for all nodes 1 through 126 with elastic springs. STAAD supports for all nodes 1 through 126 with elastic springs. STAAD
first calculates the influence area perpendicular to the global Y first calculates the influence area perpendicular to the global Y
axis of each node and then multiplies the corresponding influence axis of each node and then multiplies the corresponding influence
area by the soil subgrade modulus of 200.0 to calculate the spring area by the soil subgrade modulus of 200.0 to calculate the spring
constant to be applied to the node. constant to be applied to the node.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-122 Section 5 5-122 Section 5
1RWHV 1RWHV

A closed surface is generated by the program based on the joint-list that A closed surface is generated by the program based on the joint-list that
accompanies the ELASTIC MAT command. The area within this closed surface accompanies the ELASTIC MAT command. The area within this closed surface
is determined and the share of this area for each node in the list is then is determined and the share of this area for each node in the list is then
calculated. calculated.

Hence, while specifying the joint-list, one should make sure that these joints Hence, while specifying the joint-list, one should make sure that these joints
make up a closed surface. Without a proper closed surface, the area calculated make up a closed surface. Without a proper closed surface, the area calculated
for the region may be indeterminate and the spring constant values may be for the region may be indeterminate and the spring constant values may be
erroneous. Consequently, the list should have at a minimum, 3 nodes. erroneous. Consequently, the list should have at a minimum, 3 nodes.

The internal angle formed by 2 adjacent segments connecting 3 consecutive The internal angle formed by 2 adjacent segments connecting 3 consecutive
nodes in the list should be less than 180 degrees. In other words, the region nodes in the list should be less than 180 degrees. In other words, the region
should have the shape of a convex polygon. The example below explains the should have the shape of a convex polygon. The example below explains the
method that may be used to get around a situation where a convex polygon is method that may be used to get around a situation where a convex polygon is
not available. not available.
Section 5 5-123 Section 5 5-123
For the model comprised of plate elements 100 to 102 in the figure below, For the model comprised of plate elements 100 to 102 in the figure below,
one wishes to generate the spring supports at nodes 1 to 8. However, a single one wishes to generate the spring supports at nodes 1 to 8. However, a single
ELASTIC MAT command will not suffice because the internal angle between ELASTIC MAT command will not suffice because the internal angle between
the edges 1-8 and 8-7 at node 8 is 270 degrees, which violates the requirements the edges 1-8 and 8-7 at node 8 is 270 degrees, which violates the requirements
of a convex polygon. So, one should break it up into 2 commands : of a convex polygon. So, one should break it up into 2 commands :

1 2 3 8 ELASTIC MAT DIREC Y SUBG 200. 1 2 3 8 ELASTIC MAT DIREC Y SUBG 200.
3 4 5 6 7 8 ELASTIC MAT DIREC Y SUBG 200. 3 4 5 6 7 8 ELASTIC MAT DIREC Y SUBG 200.

7 6 7 6

102 102

8 8
1 5 1 5

101 101
100 100

2 4 2 4
3 3

Joints 3 and 8 will hence get the contribution from both of the above Joints 3 and 8 will hence get the contribution from both of the above
commands. commands.

The command works only when the plane of the closed region is parallel to one The command works only when the plane of the closed region is parallel to one
of the global planes X-Y, Y-Z or X-Z. For regions that are inclined to one of the of the global planes X-Y, Y-Z or X-Z. For regions that are inclined to one of the
global planes, the spring constant will have to be evaluated manually and global planes, the spring constant will have to be evaluated manually and
specified using the FIXED BUT type of spring support. specified using the FIXED BUT type of spring support.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-124 Section 5 5-124 Section 5

5.27.4 Multi-linear Spring Support Specification 5.27.4 Multi-linear Spring Support Specification
When soil is modeled as spring supports, the varying resistance it When soil is modeled as spring supports, the varying resistance it
offers to external loads can be modeled using this facility, such as offers to external loads can be modeled using this facility, such as
when its behavior in tension differs from its behavior in compression. when its behavior in tension differs from its behavior in compression.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

08/7,/,1($5 635,1*6 08/7,/,1($5 635,1*6

MRLQWOLVW 635,1*6 G V  G  V  žž G Q V Q MRLQWOLVW 635,1*6 G V  G  V  žž G Q V Q

Where (di si) pairs represent displacement and spring constant pairs Where (di si) pairs represent displacement and spring constant pairs
( V L is zero or positive) . The first pair defines the spring constant ( V L is zero or positive) . The first pair defines the spring constant
from large negative displacement up to the displacement in the from large negative displacement up to the displacement in the
second pair. The last pair defines the spring constant for second pair. The last pair defines the spring constant for
displacements greater than the displacement in the last pair. displacements greater than the displacement in the last pair.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

81,7    81,7   
6833257 6833257
 3,11('    ),;(' %87 .)<   3,11('    ),;(' %87 .)< 
08/7,/,1($5 635,1*6 08/7,/,1($5 635,1*6
  635,1*6 ¤  ¤      635,1*6 ¤  ¤   

Load-Displacement characteristics of soil can be represented by a Load-Displacement characteristics of soil can be represented by a
multi-linear curve. Amplitude of this curve will represent the spring multi-linear curve. Amplitude of this curve will represent the spring
characteristic of the soil at different displacement values. A typical characteristic of the soil at different displacement values. A typical
spring characteristic of soil may be represented as the step curve as spring characteristic of soil may be represented as the step curve as
shown in the figure below. In the above example the multi-linear shown in the figure below. In the above example the multi-linear
spring command specifies soil spring at joints 2 and 4. [Note that the spring command specifies soil spring at joints 2 and 4. [Note that the
amplitude of the step curve does not change after the first point.] amplitude of the step curve does not change after the first point.]

Each load case in a multi-linear analysis must be separated by a Each load case in a multi-linear analysis must be separated by a
CHANGE command and have its own PERFORM ANALYSIS CHANGE command and have its own PERFORM ANALYSIS
command. There may not be any PDELTA, NONLIN, dynamics, or command. There may not be any PDELTA, NONLIN, dynamics, or
TENSION/COMPRESSION analysis included. The multi-linear TENSION/COMPRESSION analysis included. The multi-linear
Section 5 5-125 Section 5 5-125
spring command will initiate an iterative analysis and spring command will initiate an iterative analysis and
convergence check cycle. The cycles will continue until the RMS of convergence check cycle. The cycles will continue until the RMS of
the effective spring rates used remain virtually the same for 2 the effective spring rates used remain virtually the same for 2
consecutive cycles. consecutive cycles.

SUPPORT springs must have previously been entered for each spring SUPPORT springs must have previously been entered for each spring
entered here. For the first cycle the spring value used will be the entered here. For the first cycle the spring value used will be the
support spring value (not the zero displacement value here). Use a support spring value (not the zero displacement value here). Use a
realistic and stable value. All spring values at a support joint will realistic and stable value. All spring values at a support joint will
become multi-linear with this one curve. become multi-linear with this one curve.

Note: This command can be continued to up to 11 lines by ending all Note: This command can be continued to up to 11 lines by ending all
but last with a hyphen. The Semi-colons and the XRANGE, but last with a hyphen. The Semi-colons and the XRANGE,
YRANGE, ZRANGE list items may not be used. YRANGE, ZRANGE list items may not be used.

F = Force Units F = Force Units


L = Length units L = Length units
Spring constant is always positive or zero. Spring constant is always positive or zero.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-126 Section 5 5-126 Section 5

5.28 Master/Slave Specification 5.28 Master/Slave Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This set of commands may be used to model specialized linkages This set of commands may be used to model specialized linkages
(displacement tying, rigid links) through the specification of (displacement tying, rigid links) through the specification of
MASTER and SLAVE joints. Please read the notes for restrictions. MASTER and SLAVE joints. Please read the notes for restrictions.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

;<  ;< 
<=  <= 
6/$9( =;  0$67(5 M -2,17 MRLQWVSHF 6/$9( =;  0$67(5 M -2,17 MRLQWVSHF
5,*,'  5,*,' 
);  ); 
)<  )< 
)=  )= 
0;  0; 
0<  0< 
0=  0= 

 MRLQWOLVW   MRLQWOLVW 
   
MRLQWVSHF   ;5$1*(   MRLQWVSHF   ;5$1*(  
  <5$1*(  I I    <5$1*(  I I 
  =5$1*(     =5$1*(  

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

The master/slave option provided in STAAD allows the user to The master/slave option provided in STAAD allows the user to
model specialized linkages (displacement tying, rigid links) in the model specialized linkages (displacement tying, rigid links) in the
system. For example, SLAVE FY … connects the two joints such system. For example, SLAVE FY … connects the two joints such
that the Y displacement at the slave will be the sum of Y that the Y displacement at the slave will be the sum of Y
displacement at the master plus the rigid rotation, displacement at the master plus the rigid rotation,
R SIN θ. R SIN θ.
Section 5 5-127 Section 5 5-127
Notice that instead of providing a joint list for the slaved joints, Notice that instead of providing a joint list for the slaved joints,
a range of coordinate values (in global system) may be used. All a range of coordinate values (in global system) may be used. All
joints whose coordinates are within the range are assumed to be joints whose coordinates are within the range are assumed to be
slaved joints. For convenience, the coordinate range specified for slaved joints. For convenience, the coordinate range specified for
slaved joints in this entry may include the master joint for this slaved joints in this entry may include the master joint for this
entry. However, master and slave joints of other entries must not entry. However, master and slave joints of other entries must not
be included in the coordinate range. All 2 or 3 ranges can be be included in the coordinate range. All 2 or 3 ranges can be
entered to form a “tube” or “box” for selecting joints in the tube or entered to form a “tube” or “box” for selecting joints in the tube or
box region. box region.

Fx, Fy etc. are the directions in which they are slaved (any Fx, Fy etc. are the directions in which they are slaved (any
combination may be entered). combination may be entered).

If two or more entries have the same master, the slave lists will be If two or more entries have the same master, the slave lists will be
merged. It is also OK to have different direction specs. merged. It is also OK to have different direction specs.

The direction specifiers (XY, YZ, ZX) are combinations of the The direction specifiers (XY, YZ, ZX) are combinations of the
basic directions, XY is the same as entering FX, FY, MZ; etc. basic directions, XY is the same as entering FX, FY, MZ; etc.
Any combination of direction specifiers may be entered. An Any combination of direction specifiers may be entered. An
example of the use of this format is: a rigid diaphragm floor that example of the use of this format is: a rigid diaphragm floor that
still retains bending flexibility entered as SLA ZX … . still retains bending flexibility entered as SLA ZX … .

If RIGID or if all directions are provided, the joints are assumed to If RIGID or if all directions are provided, the joints are assumed to
be rigidly connected. be rigidly connected.

5HVWULFWLRQV 5HVWULFWLRQV

Solid elements may not be connected to slave joints. Solid elements may not be connected to slave joints.
Master joints may not be slaves in another entry. Master joints may not be slaves in another entry.
Slave joints may not be master or slaves in another entry. Slave joints may not be master or slaves in another entry.
Slave directions at joints may not be supported directions or have Slave directions at joints may not be supported directions or have
displacements imposed. displacements imposed.
Master and/or slave joints may not be inclined supports. Master and/or slave joints may not be inclined supports.
The master / slave specification is only intended for linear static The master / slave specification is only intended for linear static
and dynamic analysis. and dynamic analysis.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-128 Section 5 5-128 Section 5

Example Fully Rigid and Rigid Floor Diaphragm Example Fully Rigid and Rigid Floor Diaphragm

6/$9( 5,*,' 0$67(5  -2,17  72  6/$9( 5,*,' 0$67(5  -2,17  72 


6/$9( 5,*,' 0$67(5  -2,17 <5   6/$9( 5,*,' 0$67(5  -2,17 <5  
6/$ =; 0$6  -2,17 <5   6/$ =; 0$6  -2,17 <5  
Section 5 5-129 Section 5 5-129

5.29 Draw Specifications 5.29 Draw Specifications

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command has been discontinued in STAAD.Pro. Please use This command has been discontinued in STAAD.Pro. Please use
GUI for screen and hard copy graphics. GUI for screen and hard copy graphics.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-130 Section 5 5-130 Section 5

5.30 Cut-Off Frequency, Mode Shapes or Time 5.30 Cut-Off Frequency, Mode Shapes or Time

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

These commands are used in conjunction with dynamic analysis. These commands are used in conjunction with dynamic analysis.
They may be used to specify the highest frequency or the number They may be used to specify the highest frequency or the number
of mode shapes that need to be considered. of mode shapes that need to be considered.

*HQHUDO )RUPDW *HQHUDO )RUPDW

)5(48(1&< I  )5(48(1&< I 
&87 2)) 02'( 6+$3( L  &87 2)) 02'( 6+$3( L 
7,0( W  7,0( W 

Where, Where,
See Section f 1 = Highest frequency (cycle/sec) to be considered for dynamic See Section f 1 = Highest frequency (cycle/sec) to be considered for dynamic
1.18.3 analysis. 1.18.3 analysis.
i 1 = Number of mode shapes to be considered for dynamic analysis. i 1 = Number of mode shapes to be considered for dynamic analysis.
If the cut off frequency command is not provided the cut off If the cut off frequency command is not provided the cut off
frequency will default to 108 cps. If the cut off mode shape frequency will default to 108 cps. If the cut off mode shape
command is not provided, the first six modes will be command is not provided, the first six modes will be
calculated. These commands should be provided prior to the calculated. These commands should be provided prior to the
loading specifications. loading specifications.
t 1 = Ending time for a time history analysis. If zero (default), the t 1 = Ending time for a time history analysis. If zero (default), the
time history will end when the last forcing function ends. time history will end when the last forcing function ends.

Note that a maximum of i 1 mode shapes will be computed regard- Note that a maximum of i 1 mode shapes will be computed regard-
less of f 1 . If during convergence testing the 0 through f 1 less of f 1 . If during convergence testing the 0 through f 1
frequencies are converged, then the modal calculation will be frequencies are converged, then the modal calculation will be
completed before i 1 mode shapes are calculated. completed before i 1 mode shapes are calculated.
Section 5 5-131 Section 5 5-131

5.31 Definition of Load Systems 5.31 Definition of Load Systems

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This section describes the specifications necessary for defining This section describes the specifications necessary for defining
various load systems, for automatic generation of Moving loads, various load systems, for automatic generation of Moving loads,
UBC Seismic loads and Wind loads. In addition, this section also UBC Seismic loads and Wind loads. In addition, this section also
describes the specification of Time History load for Time History describes the specification of Time History load for Time History
analysis. analysis.

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

STAAD has built-in algorithms to generate moving loads, lateral STAAD has built-in algorithms to generate moving loads, lateral
seismic loads (per the Uniform Building Code), and wind loads on seismic loads (per the Uniform Building Code), and wind loads on
a structure. Use of the load generation facility consists of two a structure. Use of the load generation facility consists of two
parts: parts:

1) Definition of the load system(s). 1) Definition of the load system(s).


2) Generation of primary load cases using previously defined 2) Generation of primary load cases using previously defined
load system(s). load system(s).

Definition of the load system(s) must be provided before any Definition of the load system(s) must be provided before any
See primary load case is specified. This section describes the See primary load case is specified. This section describes the
Section 1.17 specification of load system(s). Information on how to generate Section 1.17 specification of load system(s). Information on how to generate
primary load cases using the defined load system(s) is available in primary load cases using the defined load system(s) is available in
Section 5.32.12. Section 5.32.12.

UBC loads do not fully consider the effects of forces at inclined UBC loads do not fully consider the effects of forces at inclined
support directions or at slave joint directions. Applying forces at support directions or at slave joint directions. Applying forces at
these locations may introduce errors that are generally small. these locations may introduce errors that are generally small.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-132 Section 5 5-132 Section 5

5.31.1 Definition of Moving Load System 5.31.1 Definition of Moving Load System

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This set of commands may be used to define the moving load This set of commands may be used to define the moving load
system. system.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

'(),1( 029,1* /2$' ),/( ILOHQDPH '(),1( 029,1* /2$' ),/( ILOHQDPH

/2$' IIIQ ',67$1&( GGGQ :,'7+ Z  /2$' IIIQ ',67$1&( GGGQ :,'7+ Z 
7<3( M   7<3( M  
ORDGQDPH I  ORDGQDPH I 
QG QG
',67$1&( GGGQ :,'7+ Z  RSWLRQDOO\ DV  VHW ! ',67$1&( GGGQ :,'7+ Z  RSWLRQDOO\ DV  VHW !

Note that the MOVING LOAD system may be defined in two Note that the MOVING LOAD system may be defined in two
possible ways - directly within the input file or using an external possible ways - directly within the input file or using an external
See Section file. See Section file.
5.32.12 5.32.12
The FILE option should be used only in the second case when the The FILE option should be used only in the second case when the
data is to be read from an external file. The filename should be data is to be read from an external file. The filename should be
limited to 16 characters. limited to 16 characters.

Moving Loads can be generated for frame members only. They Moving Loads can be generated for frame members only. They
will not be generated for finite elements. Note: All loads and will not be generated for finite elements. Note: All loads and
distances are in current unit system. distances are in current unit system.

Define Moving Load within input file Define Moving Load within input file
Use the first TYPE specification. Input Data must be all in one line Use the first TYPE specification. Input Data must be all in one line
(as shown above) or in two sets of lines. If two sets, then the (as shown above) or in two sets of lines. If two sets, then the
second set must begin with DIS as shown below. If two sets, then second set must begin with DIS as shown below. If two sets, then
Load and Dist lines may end each line but last of each set with a Load and Dist lines may end each line but last of each set with a
hyphen (See example). hyphen (See example).

7<3( M /2$' I  I  I Q VHW  7<3( M /2$' I  I  I Q VHW 


',67$1&( G  G  žG Q :,'7+ Z VHW  ',67$1&( G  G  žG Q :,'7+ Z VHW 
Section 5 5-133 Section 5 5-133

Where, Where,
j = moving load system type number (integer limit of 100 types) j = moving load system type number (integer limit of 100 types)
n = number of loads (e.g. axles), 2 to 50. n = number of loads (e.g. axles), 2 to 50.
f i = value of conc. i th load f i = value of conc. i th load
d L = distance between the (i+1) th load and the i th load in the d L = distance between the (i+1) th load and the i th load in the
direction of movement direction of movement
w = spacing between loads perpendicular to the direction of w = spacing between loads perpendicular to the direction of
movement. If left out, one dimensional loading is assumed. movement. If left out, one dimensional loading is assumed.
(e.g. the width of vehicle). Note that this parameter will (e.g. the width of vehicle). Note that this parameter will
double the total load since the f i is applied to each wheel. double the total load since the f i is applied to each wheel.

Define Moving Load using an external file Define Moving Load using an external file
Use the second TYPE specification. Use the second TYPE specification.

7<3( M ORDGQDPH I 7<3( M ORDGQDPH I

Where, Where,
load-name Is the name of the moving load system (maximum load-name Is the name of the moving load system (maximum
of 12 characters). of 12 characters).
and f= Optional multiplying factor to scale up or down the and f= Optional multiplying factor to scale up or down the
value of the loads. (default = 1.0) value of the loads. (default = 1.0)

Following is a typical file containing the data. Following is a typical file containing the data.

CS200 ----- name of load system (load-name, must start CS200 ----- name of load system (load-name, must start
in column 1) in column 1)
50. 80. 90. 100. ----- loads (all on one 79 char input line) 50. 80. 90. 100. ----- loads (all on one 79 char input line)
7. 7. 9. ----- distance between loads (one line) 7. 7. 9. ----- distance between loads (one line)
6.5 ----- width 6.5 ----- width
       

 

     


STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-134 Section 5 5-134 Section 5
Note that several load systems may be repeated within the same Note that several load systems may be repeated within the same
file. file.
The STAAD moving load generator assumes: The STAAD moving load generator assumes:

1) All loads are acting in the negative global vertical (Y or Z) 1) All loads are acting in the negative global vertical (Y or Z)
direction. The user is advised to set up the structure model direction. The user is advised to set up the structure model
accordingly. accordingly.
2) Resultant direction of movement is determined from the X, Y 2) Resultant direction of movement is determined from the X, Y
and Z increments of movements as provided by the user. and Z increments of movements as provided by the user.

Reference Load Reference Load


The first specified concentrated load in the moving load system is The first specified concentrated load in the moving load system is
designated as the reference load. While generating subsequent designated as the reference load. While generating subsequent
primary load cases, the initial position of the load system and the primary load cases, the initial position of the load system and the
direction of movement are defined with respect to the reference direction of movement are defined with respect to the reference
load location. Also note that, when selecting the reference load load location. Also note that, when selecting the reference load
location with a positive value of Width specified, then the location with a positive value of Width specified, then the
following two views define the reference load location. following two views define the reference load location.
UHIHUHQFH SRLQW UHIHUHQFH SRLQW

[ [ [ [

G G
: :

G G
G G G G

] ]
UHIHUHQFH SRLQW UHIHUHQFH SRLQW
: :
] ]
Movement parallel to global X axis Movement parallel to global Z axis Movement parallel to global X axis Movement parallel to global Z axis

Notice that in the left view, the reference point is on the positive Z Notice that in the left view, the reference point is on the positive Z
wheel track side; whereas in the right view, the reference point is wheel track side; whereas in the right view, the reference point is
on the least positive X wheel track side. on the least positive X wheel track side.
Section 5 5-135 Section 5 5-135

Specifying standard AASHTO loadings Specifying standard AASHTO loadings


*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

See Section +6  See Section +6 


7<3( L +6  I YV 7<3( L +6  I YV
1.17.1
+  1.17.1
+ 
+  + 
where, where,
i = moving load system type no. (integer). i = moving load system type no. (integer).
f = optional multiplying factor (default = 1.0) f = optional multiplying factor (default = 1.0)
vs = variable spacing as defined by AASHTO, for HS series vs = variable spacing as defined by AASHTO, for HS series
trucks (default = 14 ft.) trucks (default = 14 ft.)
([DPSOH ([DPSOH

'(),1( 029,1* /2$' '(),1( 029,1* /2$'


7<3(  /2$'   ¤ 7<3(  /2$'   ¤
   
',67$1&(   ¤ ',67$1&(   ¤
 :,'7+   :,'7+ 
7<3(  +6   7<3(  +6  

([DPSOH When data is provided through an external file called MOVLOAD ([DPSOH When data is provided through an external file called MOVLOAD

'DWD LQ LQSXW ILOH 'DWD LQ LQSXW ILOH

81,7    81,7   

'(),1( 029,1* /2$' ),/( 029/2$' '(),1( 029,1* /2$' ),/( 029/2$'

7<3(  $;/7<3 7<3(  $;/7<3

7<3(  $;/7<3  7<3(  $;/7<3 

'DWD LQ H[WHUQDO ILOH 029/2$' 'DWD LQ H[WHUQDO ILOH 029/2$'

$;/7<3 $;/7<3

     

   

 

$;/7<3 $;/7<3

   

 

 
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-136 Section 5 5-136 Section 5

 'HILQLWLRQVIRU6WDWLF)RUFH3URFHGXUHV  'HILQLWLRQVIRU6WDWLF)RUFH3URFHGXUHV


IRU6HLVPLF$QDO\VLV IRU6HLVPLF$QDO\VLV

STAAD offers facilities for determining the lateral loads acting on STAAD offers facilities for determining the lateral loads acting on
structures due to seismic forces, using the rules available in structures due to seismic forces, using the rules available in
several national codes and widely accepted publications. The codes several national codes and widely accepted publications. The codes
and publications allow for so called equivalent static force and publications allow for so called equivalent static force
methods to be used in place of more complex methods like methods to be used in place of more complex methods like
response spectrum and time history analysis. Among the several response spectrum and time history analysis. Among the several
such codes supported by STAAD are UBC, IBC, IS 1893, AIJ, etc. such codes supported by STAAD are UBC, IBC, IS 1893, AIJ, etc.

Once the lateral loads are generated, the program can then analyze Once the lateral loads are generated, the program can then analyze
the structure for those loads using the applicable rules explained in the structure for those loads using the applicable rules explained in
the code documents. the code documents.
Section 5 5-137 Section 5 5-137

 8%&/RDG'HILQLWLRQ  8%&/RDG'HILQLWLRQ


Purpose Purpose
This feature enables one to generate seismic loads per the UBC 97 This feature enables one to generate seismic loads per the UBC 97
specifications using a static equivalent approach. specifications using a static equivalent approach.

Description Description
The seismic load generator can be used to generate lateral loads in The seismic load generator can be used to generate lateral loads in
the X and Z directions only. Y is the direction of gravity loads. the X and Z directions only. Y is the direction of gravity loads.
This facility has not been developed for cases where the Z axis is This facility has not been developed for cases where the Z axis is
set to be the vertical direction using the “ SET Z UP” command. set to be the vertical direction using the “ SET Z UP” command.

Methodology Methodology
The design base shear is computed in accordance with Section The design base shear is computed in accordance with Section
1630.2.1 of the UBC 1997 code. The primary equation, namely, 1630.2.1 of the UBC 1997 code. The primary equation, namely,
30-4, as shown below, is checked. 30-4, as shown below, is checked.

Cv I Cv I
V= W …………………. Eqn 30-4 of UBC 1997 V= W …………………. Eqn 30-4 of UBC 1997
RT RT

In addition, the following additional equations are checked : In addition, the following additional equations are checked :

Equation 30-5 – The total design base shear shall not exceed Equation 30-5 – The total design base shear shall not exceed

2.5Ca I 2.5Ca I
V= W V= W
R R

Equation 30-6 - The total design base shear shall not be less than Equation 30-6 - The total design base shear shall not be less than

V = 0.11Ca IW V = 0.11Ca IW
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-138 Section 5 5-138 Section 5
Equation 30-7 – In addition, for Seismic Zone 4, the total base shear shall Equation 30-7 – In addition, for Seismic Zone 4, the total base shear shall
also not be less than also not be less than

0.8ZN v I 0.8ZN v I
V= W V= W
R R

For an explanation of the terms used in the above equations, please refer to For an explanation of the terms used in the above equations, please refer to
the UBC 1997 code. the UBC 1997 code.

There are 2 stages of command specification for generating lateral There are 2 stages of command specification for generating lateral
loads. This is the first stage and is activated through the DEFINE loads. This is the first stage and is activated through the DEFINE
UBC LOAD command. UBC LOAD command.

General Format General Format

DEFINE UBC (ACCIDENTAL) LOAD DEFINE UBC (ACCIDENTAL) LOAD


ZONE f1 ubc-spec ZONE f1 ubc-spec
SELFWEIGHT SELFWEIGHT
JOINT WEIGHT JOINT WEIGHT
Joint-list WEIGHT w Joint-list WEIGHT w
MEMBER WEIGHT MEMBER WEIGHT
Mem-list (UNI ....) Mem-list (UNI ....)

ubc-spec = { I f2, RWX f3, RWZ f4, STYP f5, NA f6, ubc-spec = { I f2, RWX f3, RWZ f4, STYP f5, NA f6,
NV f7, (CT f8), (PX f9), (PZ f10)} NV f7, (CT f8), (PX f9), (PZ f10)}

where, where,

f1 = Seismic zone coefficient f1 = Seismic zone coefficient


f2 = Importance factor f2 = Importance factor
f3 = Numerical coefficient R for lateral load in X direction f3 = Numerical coefficient R for lateral load in X direction
f4 = Numerical coefficient R for lateral load in Z direction f4 = Numerical coefficient R for lateral load in Z direction
f5 = Soil Profile type f5 = Soil Profile type
f6 = Near source factor Na f6 = Near source factor Na
f7 = Near source factor Nv f7 = Near source factor Nv
f8 = Optional CT value to calculate time period based on Method A f8 = Optional CT value to calculate time period based on Method A
f9 = Optional Period of structure (in sec) in X-direction to be used in f9 = Optional Period of structure (in sec) in X-direction to be used in
Method B Method B
f10 = Optional Period of structure (in sec) in Z-direction to be used in f10 = Optional Period of structure (in sec) in Z-direction to be used in
Method B Method B
Section 5 5-139 Section 5 5-139
The Soil Profile Type parameter STYP can take on values from 1 to 5. The Soil Profile Type parameter STYP can take on values from 1 to 5.
These are related to the values shown in Table 16-J of the UBC 1997 code These are related to the values shown in Table 16-J of the UBC 1997 code
in the following manner : in the following manner :

STAAD Value UBC 1997 code value STAAD Value UBC 1997 code value
1 SA 1 SA
2 SB 2 SB
3 SC 3 SC
4 SD 4 SD
5 SE 5 SE

The soil profile type SF is not supported. The soil profile type SF is not supported.

The seismic zone factor (ZONE) in conjunction with the soil profile type The seismic zone factor (ZONE) in conjunction with the soil profile type
(STYP), Near source factor (Na), and the Near source factor (Nv), is used (STYP), Near source factor (Na), and the Near source factor (Nv), is used
to determine the values of seismic coefficients Ca and Cv from Tables 16- to determine the values of seismic coefficients Ca and Cv from Tables 16-
Q and 16-R of the UBC 1997 code. Q and 16-R of the UBC 1997 code.

Examples Examples

'(),1( 8%& /2$' '(),1( 8%& /2$'


=21(  ,  67<3  5:;  5:=  1$  19  &7  =21(  ,  67<3  5:;  5:=  1$  19  &7 

6(/):(,*+7 6(/):(,*+7
-2,17 :(,*+7 -2,17 :(,*+7
    :(,*+7      :(,*+7 
    :(,*+7      :(,*+7 
    :(,*+7      :(,*+7 

Steps to calculate base shear are as follows: Steps to calculate base shear are as follows:

1. Time Period of the structure is calculated based on clause 1. Time Period of the structure is calculated based on clause
1630.2.2.1 (Method A) and 1630.2.2.2 (Method B). 1630.2.2.1 (Method A) and 1630.2.2.2 (Method B).
2. The user may override the period that the program calculates 2. The user may override the period that the program calculates
using Method B by specifying a value for PX or PZ (Items f9 using Method B by specifying a value for PX or PZ (Items f9
and f10) depending on the direction of the UBC load. The and f10) depending on the direction of the UBC load. The
specified value will be used in place of the one calculated specified value will be used in place of the one calculated
using Method B. using Method B.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-140 Section 5 5-140 Section 5

3. The governing Time Period of the structure is then chosen 3. The governing Time Period of the structure is then chosen
between the above-mentioned two periods on the basis of the between the above-mentioned two periods on the basis of the
guidance provided in clause 1630.2.2.2. guidance provided in clause 1630.2.2.2.
4. From Table 16-Q and 16-R, Ca and Cv coefficients are 4. From Table 16-Q and 16-R, Ca and Cv coefficients are
calculated. calculated.
5. The Design Base Shear is calculated based on clause 1630.2.1 5. The Design Base Shear is calculated based on clause 1630.2.1
and distributed at each floor using the rules of clause 1630.5. and distributed at each floor using the rules of clause 1630.5.
6. If the ACCIDENTAL option is specified, the program 6. If the ACCIDENTAL option is specified, the program
calculates the additional torsional moment. The lever arm for calculates the additional torsional moment. The lever arm for
calculating the torsional moment is obtained as 5% of the calculating the torsional moment is obtained as 5% of the
building dimension at each floor level perpendicular to the building dimension at each floor level perpendicular to the
direction of the UBC load (clause 1630.6). At each joint where direction of the UBC load (clause 1630.6). At each joint where
a weight is located, the lateral seismic force acting at that joint a weight is located, the lateral seismic force acting at that joint
is multiplied by this lever arm to obtain the torsional moment is multiplied by this lever arm to obtain the torsional moment
at that joint. at that joint.

The following example shows the commands required to enable the The following example shows the commands required to enable the
program to generate the lateral loads. Users may refer to the LOAD program to generate the lateral loads. Users may refer to the LOAD
GENERATION section of the Reference Manual for this GENERATION section of the Reference Manual for this
information. information.

/2$'  6(,60,& /2$' ,1 ; ',5(&7,21 /2$'  6(,60,& /2$' ,1 ; ',5(&7,21


8%& /2$' ;  8%& /2$' ; 
/2$'  6(,60,& /2$' ,1 = ',5(&7,21 /2$'  6(,60,& /2$' ,1 = ',5(&7,21
8%& /2$' =  8%& /2$' = 
Section 5 5-141 Section 5 5-141

5.31.2.2 UBC 1994 or 1985 Load Definition 5.31.2.2 UBC 1994 or 1985 Load Definition

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This set of commands may be used to define the parameters for This set of commands may be used to define the parameters for
generation of UBC-type equivalent static lateral loads for seismic generation of UBC-type equivalent static lateral loads for seismic
analysis. analysis.

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

The STAAD seismic load generator assumes that the lateral loads The STAAD seismic load generator assumes that the lateral loads
will be exerted in X and Z directions and Y will be the direction of will be exerted in X and Z directions and Y will be the direction of
the gravity loads. Thus, for a building model, Y axis will be the gravity loads. Thus, for a building model, Y axis will be
perpendicular to the floors and point upward (all Y coordinates perpendicular to the floors and point upward (all Y coordinates
positive). The user is advised to set up the model accordingly. Do positive). The user is advised to set up the model accordingly. Do
not use the SET Z UP command. not use the SET Z UP command.

Total lateral seismic force or base shear is automatically calculated Total lateral seismic force or base shear is automatically calculated
by STAAD using the appropriate UBC equation(s). by STAAD using the appropriate UBC equation(s).

See Sections 9 =,& : SHU 8%&   See Sections 9 =,& : SHU 8%&  
1.17.2 and 5Z 1.17.2 and 5Z
5.32.12 5.32.12
9 =,.&6: SHU 8%&   9 =,.&6: SHU 8%&  

Note: Note:
1) All symbols and notations are per UBC 1) All symbols and notations are per UBC
2) Base shear V may be calculated by STAAD using either the 2) Base shear V may be calculated by STAAD using either the
1994 procedure (equation 1) or the 1985 procedure (equation 1994 procedure (equation 1) or the 1985 procedure (equation
2). The user should use the appropriate "ubc-spec" (see 2). The user should use the appropriate "ubc-spec" (see
General Format below) to instruct the program accordingly. General Format below) to instruct the program accordingly.

STAAD utilizes the following procedure to generate the lateral STAAD utilizes the following procedure to generate the lateral
seismic loads. seismic loads.

1. User provides seismic zone co-efficient and desired "ubc-spec" 1. User provides seismic zone co-efficient and desired "ubc-spec"
(1985 or 1994) through the DEFINE UBC LOAD command. (1985 or 1994) through the DEFINE UBC LOAD command.
2. Program calculates the structure period T. 2. Program calculates the structure period T.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-142 Section 5 5-142 Section 5

3. Program calculates C from appropriate UBC equation(s) 3. Program calculates C from appropriate UBC equation(s)
utilizing T. utilizing T.
4. Program calculates V from appropriate equation(s). W is 4. Program calculates V from appropriate equation(s). W is
obtained from SELFWEIGHT, JOINT WEIGHT(s) and obtained from SELFWEIGHT, JOINT WEIGHT(s) and
MEMBER WEIGHT(S) provided by the user through the MEMBER WEIGHT(S) provided by the user through the
DEFINE UBC LOAD command. DEFINE UBC LOAD command.
5. The total lateral seismic load (base shear) is then distributed by 5. The total lateral seismic load (base shear) is then distributed by
the program among different levels of the structure per UBC the program among different levels of the structure per UBC
procedures. procedures.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

'(),1( 8%& $&&,'(17$/ /2$' '(),1( 8%& $&&,'(17$/ /2$'

=21( I XEFVSHF =21( I XEFVSHF

6(/):(,*+7 6(/):(,*+7
-2,17 :(,*+7 -2,17 :(,*+7
MRLQWOLVW :(,*+7 Z MRLQWOLVW :(,*+7 Z
0(0%(5 :(,*+7 0(0%(5 :(,*+7

 81, Y Y Y   81, Y Y Y 
PHPOLVW   PHPOLVW  
 &21 Y Y   &21 Y Y 
, I  , I 
 5:; I   5:; I 
 5:= I  . I   5:= I  . I 
XEFVSHF 6 I  XEFVSHF , I  XEFVSHF 6 I  XEFVSHF , I 
IRU 8%&   &7 I  IRU 8%&   76 I  IRU 8%&   &7 I  IRU 8%&   76 I 
 3; I    3; I  
 3= I    3= I  

where, where,
f1 = seismic zone coefficient (0.2, 0.3 etc.) f1 = seismic zone coefficient (0.2, 0.3 etc.)
f2 = importance factor f2 = importance factor
f3 = numerical co-efficient R w for lateral load in X-direction f3 = numerical co-efficient R w for lateral load in X-direction
f4 = numerical co-efficient R w for lateral load in Z-directions f4 = numerical co-efficient R w for lateral load in Z-directions
f5 = site co-efficient for soil characteristics f5 = site co-efficient for soil characteristics
f6 = horizontal force factor f6 = horizontal force factor
f7 = importance factor f7 = importance factor
Section 5 5-143 Section 5 5-143
f8 = site characteristic period (Referred to as Ts in the UBC f8 = site characteristic period (Referred to as Ts in the UBC
code). Default value is 0.5. code). Default value is 0.5.
f9 = Value of the term C t which appears in the equation of the f9 = Value of the term C t which appears in the equation of the
period of the structure per Method A. It’s default value is period of the structure per Method A. It’s default value is
0.035. 0.035.
f 10 = Period of structure (in seconds) in the X- direction. f 10 = Period of structure (in seconds) in the X- direction.
f 11 = Period of structure (in seconds) in the Z- direction. f 11 = Period of structure (in seconds) in the Z- direction.
w = joint weight associated with list w = joint weight associated with list

UNI = specifies a uniformly distributed load with a value of v 1 UNI = specifies a uniformly distributed load with a value of v 1
starting at a distance of v2 (from the start of the member) starting at a distance of v2 (from the start of the member)
and ending at a distance of v 3 (from the start of the and ending at a distance of v 3 (from the start of the
member). If v 2 and v 3 are omitted, the load is assumed to member). If v 2 and v 3 are omitted, the load is assumed to
cover the entire length of the member. cover the entire length of the member.

CON = specifies a concentrated force with a value of v 4 applied at CON = specifies a concentrated force with a value of v 4 applied at
a distance of v 5 (from the start of the member). If v 5 is a distance of v 5 (from the start of the member). If v 5 is
omitted, the load is assumed to act at the center of the omitted, the load is assumed to act at the center of the
member. member.

1RWHV 1RWHV

1) If the option ACCIDENTAL is used, the accidental torsion will 1) If the option ACCIDENTAL is used, the accidental torsion will
be calculated per UBC specifications. The value of the be calculated per UBC specifications. The value of the
accidental torsion is based on the "center of mass" for each accidental torsion is based on the "center of mass" for each
level. The "center of mass" is calculated from the level. The "center of mass" is calculated from the
SELFWEIGHT, JOINT WEIGHTs and MEMBER WEIGHTs SELFWEIGHT, JOINT WEIGHTs and MEMBER WEIGHTs
specified by the user. specified by the user.

2) In "ubc-spec" for 1985 code, specification of TS is optional. If 2) In "ubc-spec" for 1985 code, specification of TS is optional. If
TS is specified, resonance co-efficient S is determined from the TS is specified, resonance co-efficient S is determined from the
building period T and user provided TS using UBC equations. building period T and user provided TS using UBC equations.
If TS is not specified, the default value of 0.5 is assumed. If TS is not specified, the default value of 0.5 is assumed.

3) By providing either PX or PZ or both, you may override the 3) By providing either PX or PZ or both, you may override the
period calculated by STAAD for Method B of the UBC Code. period calculated by STAAD for Method B of the UBC Code.
The user defined value will then be used instead of the one The user defined value will then be used instead of the one
recommended by UBC per equation 28.5 of UBC 94. If you do recommended by UBC per equation 28.5 of UBC 94. If you do
not define PX or PZ, the period for Method B will be not define PX or PZ, the period for Method B will be
calculated by the program per equation 28.5. calculated by the program per equation 28.5.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-144 Section 5 5-144 Section 5

4) Some of the items in the output for the UBC analysis are 4) Some of the items in the output for the UBC analysis are
explained below. explained below.

&$/&  86(' 3(5,2' &$/&  86(' 3(5,2'

The CALC PERIOD is the period calculated using the The CALC PERIOD is the period calculated using the
Rayleigh method (Method B as per UBC code). For UBC Rayleigh method (Method B as per UBC code). For UBC
in the x-direction, the USED PERIOD is PX. For the UBC in the x-direction, the USED PERIOD is PX. For the UBC
in the z-direction, the USED PERIOD is PZ. If PX and PZ in the z-direction, the USED PERIOD is PZ. If PX and PZ
are not provided, then the used period is the same as the are not provided, then the used period is the same as the
calculated period for that direction. The used period is the calculated period for that direction. The used period is the
one substituted into the critical equation of the UBC code one substituted into the critical equation of the UBC code
to calculate the value of C. to calculate the value of C.

& &$/7 & &$/7

According to the UBC code, C in Eq. 34-2 has to be According to the UBC code, C in Eq. 34-2 has to be
calculated as per a period calculated by method B and a calculated as per a period calculated by method B and a
period calculated by Method A. The former is represented period calculated by Method A. The former is represented
in the output as C. The latter is multiplied by 0.8 (80%) in the output as C. The latter is multiplied by 0.8 (80%)
and the resulting value is represented as C-ALT. and the resulting value is represented as C-ALT.

5) In the analysis for UBC loads, all the supports of the structure 5) In the analysis for UBC loads, all the supports of the structure
have to be at the same level and have to be at the lowest have to be at the same level and have to be at the lowest
elevation level of the structure. elevation level of the structure.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

See Section 5.32.12 under Generation of UBC Seismic Load. See Section 5.32.12 under Generation of UBC Seismic Load.
Section 5 5-145 Section 5 5-145

5.31.2.3 Colombian Seismic Load 5.31.2.3 Colombian Seismic Load

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

The purpose of this command is to define and generate static The purpose of this command is to define and generate static
equivalent seismic loads as per Colombian specifications using a equivalent seismic loads as per Colombian specifications using a
static equivalent approach similar to those outlined by UBC. static equivalent approach similar to those outlined by UBC.
Depending on this definition, equivalent lateral loads will be Depending on this definition, equivalent lateral loads will be
generated in X or Z direction(s). generated in X or Z direction(s).

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

The STAAD seismic load generator assumes that the lateral loads The STAAD seismic load generator assumes that the lateral loads
will be exerted in X and Z directions. Y will be the direction of will be exerted in X and Z directions. Y will be the direction of
gravity loads. Thus, for a building model, the Y axis will be gravity loads. Thus, for a building model, the Y axis will be
perpendicular to the floors and point upward ( all Y coordinates perpendicular to the floors and point upward ( all Y coordinates
positive). The user is advised to set up the model accordingly. . positive). The user is advised to set up the model accordingly. .
Do not use the SET Z UP command. Do not use the SET Z UP command.

0HWKRGRORJ\  0HWKRGRORJ\ 
Seismic zone coefficient and parameter values are supplied by the Seismic zone coefficient and parameter values are supplied by the
user through the DEFINE COLOMBIAN LOAD command. user through the DEFINE COLOMBIAN LOAD command.

Program calculates the natural period of building T utilizing clause Program calculates the natural period of building T utilizing clause
1628.2.2 of UBC 1994. 1628.2.2 of UBC 1994.
Design spectral coefficient ( Sa) is calculated utilizing T as, Design spectral coefficient ( Sa) is calculated utilizing T as,

Sa = Aa I (1.0 + 5.0 T) when, 0 ≤ T ≤ 0.3 sec Sa = Aa I (1.0 + 5.0 T) when, 0 ≤ T ≤ 0.3 sec
= 2.5 Aa I when, 0.3 < T ≤ 0.48 S in sec = 2.5 Aa I when, 0.3 < T ≤ 0.48 S in sec
= 1.2 Aa S I / T when, 0.48 S < T ≤ 2.4 S in sec = 1.2 Aa S I / T when, 0.48 S < T ≤ 2.4 S in sec
= Aa I / 2 when, 2.4 S < T = Aa I / 2 when, 2.4 S < T

where, where,

Aa = Seismic Risk factor (user input) Aa = Seismic Risk factor (user input)
S = Soil Site Coefficient (user input) S = Soil Site Coefficient (user input)
I = Coefficient of Importance (user input) I = Coefficient of Importance (user input)

Base Shear, Vs is calculated as Base Shear, Vs is calculated as

Vs = W * Sa Vs = W * Sa
Where, Where,
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-146 Section 5 5-146 Section 5

W = Total weight on the structure W = Total weight on the structure

Total lateral seismic load, Vs is distributed by the program among Total lateral seismic load, Vs is distributed by the program among
different levels as, different levels as,

Fx = Cvx * Vs Fx = Cvx * Vs

Where, Where,
Cvx = ( Wx * hxK ) / Σni=1 ( Wx * hxK ) Cvx = ( Wx * hxK ) / Σni=1 ( Wx * hxK )

Where, Where,

Wx = Weight at the particular level Wx = Weight at the particular level


hx = Height of that particular level hx = Height of that particular level
K = 1.0 when, T ≤ 0.5 sec K = 1.0 when, T ≤ 0.5 sec
= 0.75 + 0.5 * T when, 0.5 < T ≤ 2.5 sec = 0.75 + 0.5 * T when, 0.5 < T ≤ 2.5 sec
= 2.0 when, 2.5 < T = 2.0 when, 2.5 < T

*HQHUDO )RUPDW *HQHUDO )RUPDW

DEFINE COLOMBIAN LOAD DEFINE COLOMBIAN LOAD


ZONE f1 ubc-spec ZONE f1 ubc-spec
SELFWEIGHT SELFWEIGHT
JOINT WEIGHT JOINT WEIGHT
Joint-list WEIGHT w Joint-list WEIGHT w
MEMBER WEIGHT MEMBER WEIGHT
Mem-list (UNI ....) Mem-list (UNI ....)

ubc-spec = (I f2, S f3) ubc-spec = (I f2, S f3)

Where, f1, f2 and f3 are Seismic Risk factor, Soil Site Coefficient Where, f1, f2 and f3 are Seismic Risk factor, Soil Site Coefficient
and Coefficient of Importance. and Coefficient of Importance.

General format to provide Colombian Seismic load in any load General format to provide Colombian Seismic load in any load
case: case:

LOAD i LOAD i
COLOMBIAN LOAD {X/Y/Z} (f) COLOMBIAN LOAD {X/Y/Z} (f)

where i and f are the load case number and factor to multiply where i and f are the load case number and factor to multiply
horizontal seismic load respectively. horizontal seismic load respectively.
Section 5 5-147 Section 5 5-147
([DPSOHV ([DPSOHV

'(),1( &2/20%,$1 /2$' '(),1( &2/20%,$1 /2$'


=21(  ,  6  =21(  ,  6 
-2,17 :(,*+7 -2,17 :(,*+7
    :(,*+7      :(,*+7 
    :(,*+7      :(,*+7 
    :(,*+7      :(,*+7 

/2$'  6(,60,& /2$' ,1 ; ',5(&7,21 /2$'  6(,60,& /2$' ,1 ; ',5(&7,21


&2/20%,$1 /2$' ; &2/20%,$1 /2$' ;
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-148 Section 5 5-148 Section 5

5.31.2.4 Japanese Seismic Load 5.31.2.4 Japanese Seismic Load

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

The purpose of this command is to define and generate static The purpose of this command is to define and generate static
equivalent seismic loads as per Japanese specifications using a equivalent seismic loads as per Japanese specifications using a
static equivalent approach similar to those outlined by UBC. static equivalent approach similar to those outlined by UBC.
Depending on this definition, equivalent lateral loads will be Depending on this definition, equivalent lateral loads will be
generated in X or Z direction(s). generated in X or Z direction(s).

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

The STAAD seismic load generator assumes that the lateral loads The STAAD seismic load generator assumes that the lateral loads
will be exerted in X and Z directions and Y will be the direction of will be exerted in X and Z directions and Y will be the direction of
gravity loads. Thus, for a building model, Y axis will be gravity loads. Thus, for a building model, Y axis will be
perpendicular to the floors and point upward ( all Y coordinates perpendicular to the floors and point upward ( all Y coordinates
positive). The user is advised to set up the model accordingly. . positive). The user is advised to set up the model accordingly. .
Do not use the SET Z UP command. Do not use the SET Z UP command.

0HWKRGRORJ\  0HWKRGRORJ\ 
Seismic zone coefficient and parameter values are supplied by the Seismic zone coefficient and parameter values are supplied by the
user through the DEFINE AIJ LOAD command. user through the DEFINE AIJ LOAD command.

Program calculates the natural period of building T utilizing the Program calculates the natural period of building T utilizing the
following equation following equation

T = h ( 0.02 + 0.01 α) T = h ( 0.02 + 0.01 α)

where, where,

h = height of building h = height of building


α = ratio of steel part α = ratio of steel part

Design spectral coefficient ( Rt ) is calculated utilizing T and Tc Design spectral coefficient ( Rt ) is calculated utilizing T and Tc
as follows as follows

Rt = 1.0 when T < Tc Rt = 1.0 when T < Tc


= 1 - 0.2 ( T/Tc - 1)2 when Tc ≤ T ≤ 2Tc = 1 - 0.2 ( T/Tc - 1)2 when Tc ≤ T ≤ 2Tc
= 1.6 Tc / T when 2Tc ≤ T = 1.6 Tc / T when 2Tc ≤ T

αi is calculated from the weight provided by the user in Define AIJ αi is calculated from the weight provided by the user in Define AIJ
Load command. Load command.
Section 5 5-149 Section 5 5-149

Seismic coefficient of floor Ci is calculated using appropriate Seismic coefficient of floor Ci is calculated using appropriate
equations equations

Ci = Z Rt Ai Co Ci = Z Rt Ai Co

Where, Where,
Z = zone factor Z = zone factor
Co = normal coefficient of shear force Co = normal coefficient of shear force
Ai = 1 + ( 1 / √αi - αi ) 2T/ ( 1 + 3T ) Ai = 1 + ( 1 / √αi - αi ) 2T/ ( 1 + 3T )

The total lateral seismic load is distributed by the program among The total lateral seismic load is distributed by the program among
different levels. different levels.

*HQHUDO )RUPDW *HQHUDO )RUPDW

DEFINE AIJ LOAD DEFINE AIJ LOAD


ZONE f1 ubc-spec ZONE f1 ubc-spec
SELFWEIGHT SELFWEIGHT
JOINT WEIGHT JOINT WEIGHT
Joint-list WEIGHT w Joint-list WEIGHT w
MEMBER WEIGHT MEMBER WEIGHT
Mem-list (UNI ....) Mem-list (UNI ....)

ubc-spec = (I f2, CO f3, TC f4) ubc-spec = (I f2, CO f3, TC f4)

Where, f1, f2, f3and f4 are Zone factor, Ratio of Steel Part, Normal Where, f1, f2, f3and f4 are Zone factor, Ratio of Steel Part, Normal
coefficient of shear force and Value needed for calculation of Rt. coefficient of shear force and Value needed for calculation of Rt.

General format to provide Japanese Seismic load in any load case: General format to provide Japanese Seismic load in any load case:

LOAD i LOAD i
AIJ LOAD {X/Y/Z} (f) AIJ LOAD {X/Y/Z} (f)

Where, i and f are load case number and factor to multiply Where, i and f are load case number and factor to multiply
horizontal seismic load respectively. horizontal seismic load respectively.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-150 Section 5 5-150 Section 5

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

DEFINE AIJ LOAD DEFINE AIJ LOAD


ZONE 0.8 I 0.0 CO 0.2 TC 0.6 ZONE 0.8 I 0.0 CO 0.2 TC 0.6
JOINT WEIGHT JOINT WEIGHT
51 56 93 100 WEIGHT 1440 51 56 93 100 WEIGHT 1440
101 106 143 150 WEIGHT 1000 101 106 143 150 WEIGHT 1000
151 156 193 200 WEIGHT 720 151 156 193 200 WEIGHT 720
LOAD 1 ( SEISMIC LOAD IN X) LOAD 1 ( SEISMIC LOAD IN X)
AIJ LOAD X AIJ LOAD X
Section 5 5-151 Section 5 5-151

5.31.2.5 DHILQLWLRQRI/DWHUDO6HLVPLF/RDGSHU 5.31.2.5 DHILQLWLRQRI/DWHUDO6HLVPLF/RDGSHU


,6 ,6

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This feature enables one to generate seismic loads per the IS:1893 This feature enables one to generate seismic loads per the IS:1893
specifications using a static equivalent approach. specifications using a static equivalent approach.

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

The seismic load generator can be used to generate lateral loads in The seismic load generator can be used to generate lateral loads in
the X and Z directions only. Y is the direction of gravity loads. the X and Z directions only. Y is the direction of gravity loads.
This facility has not been developed for cases where the Z axis is This facility has not been developed for cases where the Z axis is
set to be the vertical direction using the “ SET Z UP” command. set to be the vertical direction using the “ SET Z UP” command.

Methodology Methodology
The design base shear is computed by STAAD in accordance with The design base shear is computed by STAAD in accordance with
the IS:1893 equation 4.2.1.1. the IS:1893 equation 4.2.1.1.

9 .& αh : 9 .& αh :

Note: Note:
All symbols and notations in the above equation are as per All symbols and notations in the above equation are as per
IS:1893 IS:1893

STAAD utilizes the following procedure to generate the lateral STAAD utilizes the following procedure to generate the lateral
seismic loads. seismic loads.

1. User provides seismic zone co-efficient and desired "1893- 1. User provides seismic zone co-efficient and desired "1893-
specs" through the DEFINE 1893 LOAD command. specs" through the DEFINE 1893 LOAD command.
See section 2. Program calculates the structure period (T). See section 2. Program calculates the structure period (T).
5.32.12 3. Program calculates C utilizing T. 5.32.12 3. Program calculates C utilizing T.
4. Program calculates V from the above equation. W is obtained 4. Program calculates V from the above equation. W is obtained
from SELFWEIGHT, JOINT WEIGHT(s) and MEMBER from SELFWEIGHT, JOINT WEIGHT(s) and MEMBER
WEIGHT(S) provided by the user through the DEFINE 1893 WEIGHT(S) provided by the user through the DEFINE 1893
LOAD command. LOAD command.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-152 Section 5 5-152 Section 5

5. The total lateral seismic load (base shear) is then distributed 5. The total lateral seismic load (base shear) is then distributed
by the program among different levels of the structure per the by the program among different levels of the structure per the
IS:1893 procedures. IS:1893 procedures.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

'(),1(  $&&,'(17$/ /2$' '(),1(  $&&,'(17$/ /2$'

=21( I VSHF =21( I VSHF

6(/):(,*+7 6(/):(,*+7
-2,17 :(,*+7 -2,17 :(,*+7
MRLQWOLVW :(,*+7 Z MRLQWOLVW :(,*+7 Z
0(0%(5 :(,*+7 0(0%(5 :(,*+7

 81, Y Y Y   81, Y Y Y 
PHPOLVW   PHPOLVW  
 &21 Y Y   &21 Y Y 

 . I   . I 
6SHF  , I  6SHF  , I 
 % I   % I 
 3; I   3; I 
 3= I   3= I 

where, where,
f1 = Seismic zone coefficient f1 = Seismic zone coefficient
f2 = the performance factor depending on the structural f2 = the performance factor depending on the structural
framing system and brittleness or ductility of material. framing system and brittleness or ductility of material.
Refer Table 5 of IS:1893. Refer Table 5 of IS:1893.
f3 = importance factor. Refer Table 4 of IS:1893. (Used in f3 = importance factor. Refer Table 4 of IS:1893. (Used in
computing αh per Section 3.4.2.3 computing αh per Section 3.4.2.3
f4 = Beta = soil interaction factor. Refer Table 3 of IS:1893. f4 = Beta = soil interaction factor. Refer Table 3 of IS:1893.
f5 = Period of the structure (in seconds) in the x-direction. f5 = Period of the structure (in seconds) in the x-direction.
By providing PX or PZ or both, you may override the By providing PX or PZ or both, you may override the
period calculated by STAAD. period calculated by STAAD.
f6 = Period of the structure (in seconds) in the z-direction. f6 = Period of the structure (in seconds) in the z-direction.
w = joint weight associated with list w = joint weight associated with list
Section 5 5-153 Section 5 5-153
UNI = specifies a uniformly distributed load with a value of UNI = specifies a uniformly distributed load with a value of
v 1 starting at a distance of v 2 (from the start of the v 1 starting at a distance of v 2 (from the start of the
member) and ending at a distance of v 3 (from the start of member) and ending at a distance of v 3 (from the start of
the member). If v 1 and v 3 are omitted, the load is assumed the member). If v 1 and v 3 are omitted, the load is assumed
to cover the entire length of the member. to cover the entire length of the member.

CON = specifies a concentrated force with a value of v 4 applied at CON = specifies a concentrated force with a value of v 4 applied at
a distance of v 5 (from the start of the member). If v 5 is a distance of v 5 (from the start of the member). If v 5 is
omitted, the load is assumed to act at the center of the omitted, the load is assumed to act at the center of the
member. member.

1RWHV 1RWHV

If ACCIDENTAL option is specified, the program calculates the If ACCIDENTAL option is specified, the program calculates the
increase in shear resulting from the horizontal torsion due to an increase in shear resulting from the horizontal torsion due to an
eccentricity between the centre of mass and centre of rigidity as eccentricity between the centre of mass and centre of rigidity as
per Clause 4.2.4 of IS:1893-1984. per Clause 4.2.4 of IS:1893-1984.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

See section 5.32.12 under Generation of IS:1893 Seismic See section 5.32.12 under Generation of IS:1893 Seismic
Load. Load.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-154 Section 5 5-154 Section 5

 ,%&/RDG'HILQLWLRQ  ,%&/RDG'HILQLWLRQ


'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

The specifications of the IBC 2000 code for seismic analysis of a The specifications of the IBC 2000 code for seismic analysis of a
building using a static equivalent approach have now been building using a static equivalent approach have now been
implemented as described below. implemented as described below.

The seismic load generator can be used to generate lateral loads in The seismic load generator can be used to generate lateral loads in
the X and Z directions only. Y is the direction of gravity loads. the X and Z directions only. Y is the direction of gravity loads.
This facility has not been developed for cases where the Z axis is This facility has not been developed for cases where the Z axis is
set to be the vertical direction using the “ SET Z UP” command. set to be the vertical direction using the “ SET Z UP” command.

0HWKRGRORJ\ 0HWKRGRORJ\

The design base shear is computed in accordance with Section The design base shear is computed in accordance with Section
1617.4 of the IBC 2000 code. The primary equation, namely, 16- 1617.4 of the IBC 2000 code. The primary equation, namely, 16-
34, as shown below, is checked. 34, as shown below, is checked.

V = CS W …………………. Eqn 16-34 of IBC 2000 V = CS W …………………. Eqn 16-34 of IBC 2000

In addition, the following additional equations are checked : In addition, the following additional equations are checked :

The total design base shear shall not exceed The total design base shear shall not exceed

S DS S DS
Cs = ………………. Eqn 16-35 of IBC 2000 Cs = ………………. Eqn 16-35 of IBC 2000
R R
I  I 
 E  E

The total design base shear shall not be less than The total design base shear shall not be less than

S D1 S D1
Cs = ………………. Eqn 16-36 of IBC 2000 Cs = ………………. Eqn 16-36 of IBC 2000
R R
 I T  I T
 E  E
Section 5 5-155 Section 5 5-155
CS = 0.044S DS I E ……………. Eqn 16-37 of IBC 2000 CS = 0.044S DS I E ……………. Eqn 16-37 of IBC 2000

In addition, for the structure for which the 1-second spectral In addition, for the structure for which the 1-second spectral
response, S 1 , is equal to or greater than 0.6g, the value of the response, S 1 , is equal to or greater than 0.6g, the value of the
seismic response coefficient, C s , shall not be taken less than: seismic response coefficient, C s , shall not be taken less than:

0.5S1 0.5S1
Cs = ………………. Eqn 16-38 of IBC 2000 Cs = ………………. Eqn 16-38 of IBC 2000
R  R 
 I E   I E 

For an explanation of the terms used in the above equations, please For an explanation of the terms used in the above equations, please
refer to the IBC 2000 code. refer to the IBC 2000 code.

There are 2 stages of command specification for generating lateral There are 2 stages of command specification for generating lateral
loads. This is the first stage and is activated through the DEFINE loads. This is the first stage and is activated through the DEFINE
IBC2000 LOAD command. IBC2000 LOAD command.

*HQHUDO )RUPDW *HQHUDO )RUPDW

'(),1( ,%& $&&,'(17$/ /2$' '(),1( ,%& $&&,'(17$/ /2$'


6'6 I XEFVSHF 6'6 I XEFVSHF
6(/):(,*+7 6(/):(,*+7
-2,17 :(,*+7 -2,17 :(,*+7
-RLQWOLVW :(,*+7 Z -RLQWOLVW :(,*+7 Z
0(0%(5 :(,*+7 0(0%(5 :(,*+7
0HPOLVW 81,  0HPOLVW 81, 

XEFVSHF ^ 6' I 6 I ,( I 5; I 5= I XEFVSHF ^ 6' I 6 I ,( I 5; I 5= I


6&/$66 I &7 I 3; I 3= I ` 6&/$66 I &7 I 3; I 3= I `

where, where,

f1 = Design spectral response acceleration at short periods f1 = Design spectral response acceleration at short periods
obtained from equation 16-18, Section 1615.1.3 of the obtained from equation 16-18, Section 1615.1.3 of the
International Building Code 2000. International Building Code 2000.
f2 = Design spectral response acceleration at short period as f2 = Design spectral response acceleration at short period as
determined from equation 16-19, Section 1615.1.3. determined from equation 16-19, Section 1615.1.3.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-156 Section 5 5-156 Section 5

f3 = Design spectral response acceleration at 1-second period as f3 = Design spectral response acceleration at 1-second period as
determined in Section 1615.1.3. determined in Section 1615.1.3.
f4 = Occupancy importance factor determined in accordance f4 = Occupancy importance factor determined in accordance
with Section 1616.2. with Section 1616.2.
f5 = The response modification factor from Table 1617.6 for f5 = The response modification factor from Table 1617.6 for
lateral load along the X direction lateral load along the X direction
f6 = The response modification factor from Table 1617.6 for f6 = The response modification factor from Table 1617.6 for
lateral load along the Z direction lateral load along the Z direction
f7 = Site class as defined in Section 1615.1.1 (enter 1 through 6 f7 = Site class as defined in Section 1615.1.1 (enter 1 through 6
in place of A through F, see table below) in place of A through F, see table below)
f8 = Optional CT value to calculate time period as per equation f8 = Optional CT value to calculate time period as per equation
16-39 in IBC 2000 16-39 in IBC 2000
f9 = Optional Period of structure (in sec) in X-direction to be f9 = Optional Period of structure (in sec) in X-direction to be
used as fundamental period of the structure as per Section used as fundamental period of the structure as per Section
1617.4.2 instead of calculated period of the structure 1617.4.2 instead of calculated period of the structure
f10 = Optional Period of structure (in sec) in Z-direction to be f10 = Optional Period of structure (in sec) in Z-direction to be
used as fundamental period of the structure as per Section used as fundamental period of the structure as per Section
1617.4.2 instead of calculated period of the structure 1617.4.2 instead of calculated period of the structure

The Soil Profile Type parameter SCLASS can take on values from The Soil Profile Type parameter SCLASS can take on values from
1 to 6. These are related to the values shown in Table 1615.1.1, 1 to 6. These are related to the values shown in Table 1615.1.1,
Site Class Definitions of the IBC 2000 code in the following Site Class Definitions of the IBC 2000 code in the following
manner : manner :

STAAD Value IBC 2000 code value STAAD Value IBC 2000 code value
1 A 1 A
2 B 2 B
3 C 3 C
4 D 4 D
5 E 5 E
6 F 6 F

([DPSOHV ([DPSOHV

'(),1( ,%& /2$' '(),1( ,%& /2$'


6'6  6'  6  ,  5;  5=  6&/  &7  6'6  6'  6  ,  5;  5=  6&/  &7 
Section 5 5-157 Section 5 5-157

6(/):(,*+7 6(/):(,*+7
-2,17 :(,*+7 -2,17 :(,*+7
    :(,*+7      :(,*+7 
    :(,*+7      :(,*+7 
    :(,*+7      :(,*+7 

Steps to calculate base shear are as follows: Steps to calculate base shear are as follows:

7. Time Period of the structure is calculated based on equation 7. Time Period of the structure is calculated based on equation
16-39 and section 1617.4.2 16-39 and section 1617.4.2
8. The user may override the period that the program calculates 8. The user may override the period that the program calculates
as per the specification in Section 1617.4.2 by specifying a as per the specification in Section 1617.4.2 by specifying a
value for PX or PZ (Items f7 and f8) depending on the value for PX or PZ (Items f7 and f8) depending on the
direction of the IBC load. The specified value will be used in direction of the IBC load. The specified value will be used in
place of the one calculated using the method described in place of the one calculated using the method described in
section 1617.4.2. section 1617.4.2.
9. The governing Time Period of the structure is then chosen 9. The governing Time Period of the structure is then chosen
between the above-mentioned two periods on the basis of the between the above-mentioned two periods on the basis of the
guidance provided in clause 1617.4.2. guidance provided in clause 1617.4.2.
10. The Design Base Shear is calculated based on equation 16-34 10. The Design Base Shear is calculated based on equation 16-34
and distributed at each floor using the rules of clause 1617.4.3, and distributed at each floor using the rules of clause 1617.4.3,
equations 16-41 and 16-42. equations 16-41 and 16-42.
11. If the ACCIDENTAL option is specified, the program 11. If the ACCIDENTAL option is specified, the program
calculates the additional torsional moment. The lever arm for calculates the additional torsional moment. The lever arm for
calculating the torsional moment is obtained as 5% of the calculating the torsional moment is obtained as 5% of the
building dimension at each floor level perpendicular to the building dimension at each floor level perpendicular to the
direction of the IBC load (clause 1617.4.4.4). At each joint direction of the IBC load (clause 1617.4.4.4). At each joint
where a weight is located, the lateral seismic force acting at where a weight is located, the lateral seismic force acting at
that joint is multiplied by this lever arm to obtain the torsional that joint is multiplied by this lever arm to obtain the torsional
moment at that joint. moment at that joint.

The following example shows the commands required to enable the The following example shows the commands required to enable the
program to generate the lateral loads. Users may refer to Section program to generate the lateral loads. Users may refer to Section
5.32.12 of the Technical Reference Manual for this information. 5.32.12 of the Technical Reference Manual for this information.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-158 Section 5 5-158 Section 5

([DPSOHV ([DPSOHV

/2$'  6(,60,& /2$' ,1 ; ',5(&7,21 /2$'  6(,60,& /2$' ,1 ; ',5(&7,21


,%& /2$' ;  ,%& /2$' ; 
/2$'  6(,60,& /2$' ,1 = ',5(&7,21 /2$'  6(,60,& /2$' ,1 = ',5(&7,21
,%& /2$' =  ,%& /2$' = 

The example manual contains examples illustrating load generation The example manual contains examples illustrating load generation
involving IBC and UBC load types. involving IBC and UBC load types.
Section 5 5-159 Section 5 5-159

5.31.3 Definition of Wind Load 5.31.3 Definition of Wind Load

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This set of commands may be used to define some of the This set of commands may be used to define some of the
parameters for generation of wind loads on the structure. See parameters for generation of wind loads on the structure. See
section 5.32.12, Generation of Wind Loads, for the definition of section 5.32.12, Generation of Wind Loads, for the definition of
wind direction and the possible surfaces to be loaded. wind direction and the possible surfaces to be loaded.

The wind load generator can be used to generate lateral loads in The wind load generator can be used to generate lateral loads in
the X and Z directions only. Y must be the vertical direction. This the X and Z directions only. Y must be the vertical direction. This
facility has not been developed for cases where the Z axis is set to facility has not been developed for cases where the Z axis is set to
be the vertical direction using the “ SET Z UP” command. be the vertical direction using the “ SET Z UP” command.

*HQHUDO )RUPDW *HQHUDO )RUPDW

'(),1( :,1' /2$' '(),1( :,1' /2$'


7<3( M 7<3( M
,17(16,7< S  S  S   S Q +(,*+7 K  K  K   K Q ,17(16,7< S  S  S   S Q +(,*+7 K  K  K   K Q

 H  -2,17 MRLQWOLVW   H  -2,17 MRLQWOLVW 


(;32685(   (;32685(  
 H  <5$1*( I I    H  <5$1*( I I  

(;32685( H  VDPH GHILQLWLRQ DV H  (;32685( H  VDPH GHILQLWLRQ DV H 


     
(;32685( HP GLWWR (;32685( HP GLWWR

 -2,17 MRLQWOLVW   -2,17 MRLQWOLVW 


(;&/8'(   (;&/8'(  
 <5 RU ;5 RU =5 I I   <5 RU ;5 RU =5 I I 
where, where,
j= wind load system type number (integer) j= wind load system type number (integer)
p 1 ,p 2 ,p 3 ...p n wind intensities (pressures) in force/area. Up to 100 p 1 ,p 2 ,p 3 ...p n wind intensities (pressures) in force/area. Up to 100
different intensities can be defined in the input file different intensities can be defined in the input file
per type. per type.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-160 Section 5 5-160 Section 5

h 1 ,h 2 ,h 3 ...h n corresponding heights in global vertical direction up h 1 ,h 2 ,h 3 ...h n corresponding heights in global vertical direction up
to which the above intensities occur. to which the above intensities occur.
e  ,e  ,e  ...e P exposure factors. A value of 1.0 means that the wind e  ,e  ,e  ...e P exposure factors. A value of 1.0 means that the wind
force may be applied on the full influence area force may be applied on the full influence area
associated with the joint(s) if they are also exposed associated with the joint(s) if they are also exposed
to the wind load direction. Limit: 99 factors. to the wind load direction. Limit: 99 factors.
joint-list Joint list associated with Exposure Factor or Exclude joint-list Joint list associated with Exposure Factor or Exclude
(joint numbers or “TO” or “BY” or group names). (joint numbers or “TO” or “BY” or group names).
f 1 and f 2 global coordinate values to specify Y vertical range f 1 and f 2 global coordinate values to specify Y vertical range
for Exposure Factor; or X or Y or Z range for for Exposure Factor; or X or Y or Z range for
Exclude. Exclude.

The EXCLUDE command specifies joints that will not be The EXCLUDE command specifies joints that will not be
considered in computing the list of joints that form closed surfaces considered in computing the list of joints that form closed surfaces
exposed to the wind and will therefore not be loaded. Enter any exposed to the wind and will therefore not be loaded. Enter any
number of EXCLUDE commands in each TYPE set. Note that this number of EXCLUDE commands in each TYPE set. Note that this
is not the same as Exposure = 0.0 which allows the joint to be used is not the same as Exposure = 0.0 which allows the joint to be used
in computing the exposed surfaces and the joint influence areas in computing the exposed surfaces and the joint influence areas
(but sets the load to zero for that joint). (but sets the load to zero for that joint).

If the command EXPOSURE is not specified or if a joint is not If the command EXPOSURE is not specified or if a joint is not
listed in an Exposure, the exposure factor for those joints is chosen listed in an Exposure, the exposure factor for those joints is chosen
as 1.0. as 1.0.

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

All loads and heights are in current unit system. In the list of All loads and heights are in current unit system. In the list of
intensities, the first value of intensity acts from the ground level up intensities, the first value of intensity acts from the ground level up
to the first height. The second intensity (p2 ) acts in the Global to the first height. The second intensity (p2 ) acts in the Global
vertical direction between the first two heights (h 1 and h 2 ) and so vertical direction between the first two heights (h 1 and h 2 ) and so
on. The program assumes that the ground level has the lowest on. The program assumes that the ground level has the lowest
global vertical coordinate of any joint entered for the structure. global vertical coordinate of any joint entered for the structure.

See Section Only exposed surfaces bounded by members (not by plates or See Section Only exposed surfaces bounded by members (not by plates or
1.17.3 solids) will be used. The joint influence areas are computed based 1.17.3 solids) will be used. The joint influence areas are computed based
on surface member selection data entered in section 5.32.12 and on surface member selection data entered in section 5.32.12 and
based on the wind direction for a load case. Only joints actually based on the wind direction for a load case. Only joints actually
exposed to the wind and connected to members will be loaded. The exposed to the wind and connected to members will be loaded. The
Section 5 5-161 Section 5 5-161
individual bounded areas must be planar surfaces, to a close individual bounded areas must be planar surfaces, to a close
tolerance, or they will not be loaded. tolerance, or they will not be loaded.

Exposure factor (e) is the fraction of the influence area associated Exposure factor (e) is the fraction of the influence area associated
with the joint(s) on which the load may act if it is also exposed to with the joint(s) on which the load may act if it is also exposed to
the wind load. Total load on a particular joint is calculated as the wind load. Total load on a particular joint is calculated as
follows. follows.

Joint load = (Exposure Factor) X (Influence Area) X (Wind Intensity) Joint load = (Exposure Factor) X (Influence Area) X (Wind Intensity)
The exposure factor may be specified by a joint-list or by giving a The exposure factor may be specified by a joint-list or by giving a
vertical range within which all joints will have the same exposure. vertical range within which all joints will have the same exposure.
If an exposure factor is not entered or not specified for a joint, then If an exposure factor is not entered or not specified for a joint, then
it defaults to 1.0 for those joints; in which case the entire influence it defaults to 1.0 for those joints; in which case the entire influence
area associated with the joint(s) will be considered. area associated with the joint(s) will be considered.

For PLANE FRAMES, influence area for each joint is calculated For PLANE FRAMES, influence area for each joint is calculated
considering unit width perpendicular to the plane of the structure. considering unit width perpendicular to the plane of the structure.
Note that the user can accommodate the actual width by Note that the user can accommodate the actual width by
incorporating it in the Exposure Factor as follows. incorporating it in the Exposure Factor as follows.

Exposure Factor (User Specified) = (Fraction of influence area) X Exposure Factor (User Specified) = (Fraction of influence area) X
(influence width for joint) (influence width for joint)

1RWHV 1RWHV

All intensities, heights and ranges must be provided in the current unit All intensities, heights and ranges must be provided in the current unit
system. system.

If necessary, the INTENSITY, EXPOSURE, and EXCLUDE command If necessary, the INTENSITY, EXPOSURE, and EXCLUDE command
lines can be continued on to additional lines by ending all but last line lines can be continued on to additional lines by ending all but last line
with a space and hyphen (-). Use up to 11 lines for a command. with a space and hyphen (-). Use up to 11 lines for a command.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-162 Section 5 5-162 Section 5

5.31.4 Definition of Time History Load 5.31.4 Definition of Time History Load

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This set of commands may be used to define parameters for Time This set of commands may be used to define parameters for Time
History loading on the structure. History loading on the structure.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

'(),1( 7,0( +,6725< '7 [ '(),1( 7,0( +,6725< '7 [

 $&&(/(5$7,21   $&&(/(5$7,21 
7<3( L   6&$/( I 6$9( 7<3( L   6&$/( I 6$9(
 )25&(   )25&( 
 5($' I Q I   5($' I Q I 
  25     25  
 W  S  W  S   W Q SQ   W  S  W  S   W Q SQ 
  25     25  
 IXQFWLRQVSHF   IXQFWLRQVSHF 
ZKHUH IXQFWLRQVSHF ZKHUH IXQFWLRQVSHF

6,1(  6,1( 
)81&7,21   )81&7,21  
 &26,1(   &26,1( 

)5(48(1&<  68%',9 I  )5(48(1&<  68%',9 I 


$03/,78'( I   I 3+$6( I &<&/(6 I  67(3 I  $03/,78'( I   I 3+$6( I &<&/(6 I  67(3 I 
530    530   

5HSHDW 7<3( DQG $PSOLWXGH YV 7LPH VHWV XQWLO DOO DUH HQWHUHG WKHQ 5HSHDW 7<3( DQG $PSOLWXGH YV 7LPH VHWV XQWLO DOO DUH HQWHUHG WKHQ

See Sections $55,9$/ 7,0( See Sections $55,9$/ 7,0(

1.18.3 and D  D  D   D Q 1.18.3 and D  D  D   D Q

5.32.10.2 5.32.10.2
'$03,1* G  '$03,1* G 
 &'$03   &'$03 
 0'$03   0'$03 
Section 5 5-163 Section 5 5-163
x = solution time step used in the step-by-step x = solution time step used in the step-by-step
integration of the uncoupled equations. Values smaller than integration of the uncoupled equations. Values smaller than
0.00001 will be reset to the default DT value of 0.0013888 0.00001 will be reset to the default DT value of 0.0013888
seconds. seconds.
i = type number of time varying load (integer). Up to i = type number of time varying load (integer). Up to
136 types may be provided. ACCELERATION indicates that the 136 types may be provided. ACCELERATION indicates that the
time varying load type is a ground motion. FORCE indicates that it time varying load type is a ground motion. FORCE indicates that it
is a forcing function. This number should be sequential. is a forcing function. This number should be sequential.
Scale f 7 = The scale factor option multiplies all forces, Scale f 7 = The scale factor option multiplies all forces,
accelerations, and amplitudes entered, read or generated within this accelerations, and amplitudes entered, read or generated within this
Type. Primarily used to convert acceleration in g’s to current units Type. Primarily used to convert acceleration in g’s to current units
(9.81, 386.4, etc.). Default is 1.0. (9.81, 386.4, etc.). Default is 1.0.
Save = The save option results in the creation of two files Save = The save option results in the creation of two files
(input file name with "Tim" and “Frc” extensions) containing the (input file name with "Tim" and “Frc” extensions) containing the
history of the displacements of every node (on “Tim”) and the history of the displacements of every node (on “Tim”) and the
history of the 12 end forces of every member and the history of the history of the 12 end forces of every member and the history of the
support reactions (on “Frc”) of the structure at every time step . support reactions (on “Frc”) of the structure at every time step .
Syntax: TYPE 1 FORCE SAVE Syntax: TYPE 1 FORCE SAVE
t 1 p 1 t 2 p 2 ...= values of time(sec.) and corresponding force t 1 p 1 t 2 p 2 ...= values of time(sec.) and corresponding force
(current force unit) or acceleration (current length unit/sec 2 ) (current force unit) or acceleration (current length unit/sec 2 )
depending on whether the time varying load is a forcing function or depending on whether the time varying load is a forcing function or
a ground motion. If the data is specified through the input file, up a ground motion. If the data is specified through the input file, up
to 499 pairs can be provided for each type in the ascending value to 499 pairs can be provided for each type in the ascending value
of time. More than one line may be used if necessary. However, if of time. More than one line may be used if necessary. However, if
the data is provided through an external file, an unlimited number the data is provided through an external file, an unlimited number
of time-force pairs may be specified. If the first point is not at of time-force pairs may be specified. If the first point is not at
zero time, then the forces before the first time (but after the arrival zero time, then the forces before the first time (but after the arrival
time) will be determined by extrapolation using the first two points time) will be determined by extrapolation using the first two points
entered. Note that if the first point has a nonzero force, there will entered. Note that if the first point has a nonzero force, there will
be a sudden application of that force over a single integration step be a sudden application of that force over a single integration step
(DT) at that time. Zero force will be assumed for all times after the (DT) at that time. Zero force will be assumed for all times after the
last data point. last data point.
a 1 a 2 a 3 ... a n = Values of the various possible arrival times a 1 a 2 a 3 ... a n = Values of the various possible arrival times
(seconds) of the various dynamic load types. Arrival time is the (seconds) of the various dynamic load types. Arrival time is the
time at which a load type begins to act at a joint (forcing function) time at which a load type begins to act at a joint (forcing function)
or at the base of the structure (ground motion). The same load type or at the base of the structure (ground motion). The same load type
may have different arrival times for different joints and hence all may have different arrival times for different joints and hence all
those values must be specified here. The arrival times and the times those values must be specified here. The arrival times and the times
from the time-force pairs will be added to get the times for a from the time-force pairs will be added to get the times for a
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-164 Section 5 5-164 Section 5

particular set of joints in the TIME LOAD data (see section particular set of joints in the TIME LOAD data (see section
5.10.32.2). The arrival times and the time-force pairs for the load 5.10.32.2). The arrival times and the time-force pairs for the load
types are used to create the load vector needed for each time step types are used to create the load vector needed for each time step
of the analysis. Refer to Section 5.32.10.2 for information on input of the analysis. Refer to Section 5.32.10.2 for information on input
specification for application of the forcing function and/or ground specification for application of the forcing function and/or ground
motion loads. Up to 999 arrival time values may be specified. motion loads. Up to 999 arrival time values may be specified.
d = Modal damping ratio (i.e. [Percent of critical d = Modal damping ratio (i.e. [Percent of critical
damping]/100). Default value is 0.05 (5% of critical damping). To damping]/100). Default value is 0.05 (5% of critical damping). To
enter different damping for each mode, enter a Define Damp enter different damping for each mode, enter a Define Damp
command elsewhere and MDAMP here; or for composite damping, command elsewhere and MDAMP here; or for composite damping,
enter CDAMP here and CDAMP ratios for all of the members / enter CDAMP here and CDAMP ratios for all of the members /
elements/ springs in the Constants and Set commands. elements/ springs in the Constants and Set commands.

Note that the "function-spec" option may be used to specify Note that the "function-spec" option may be used to specify
harmonic loads. Both "sine" and "cosine" harmonic functions may harmonic loads. Both "sine" and "cosine" harmonic functions may
be specified. The program will automatically calculate the be specified. The program will automatically calculate the
harmonic load time history based on the following specifications - harmonic load time history based on the following specifications -

f 0 - Max. Amplitude of the forcing function in current units. f 0 - Max. Amplitude of the forcing function in current units.
f 2 - If FREQUENCY, then cyclic frequency (cycles / sec.) f 2 - If FREQUENCY, then cyclic frequency (cycles / sec.)
If RPM, then revolutions per minute. If RPM, then revolutions per minute.
f 3 - Phase Angle in degrees, default = 0 f 3 - Phase Angle in degrees, default = 0
f 4 - No. of cycles of loading. f 4 - No. of cycles of loading.
f 5 - time step of loading, default = one twelfth of the period f 5 - time step of loading, default = one twelfth of the period
corresponding to the frequency of the harmonic loading. It is corresponding to the frequency of the harmonic loading. It is
best to use the default; or best to use the default; or
f 6 - subdivide a ¼ cycle into this many integer time steps. Default f 6 - subdivide a ¼ cycle into this many integer time steps. Default
= 3. = 3.
Note that f 5 or f 6 is only used to digitize the forcing function. It is Note that f 5 or f 6 is only used to digitize the forcing function. It is
not the DT used to integrate for the responses. More subdivisions not the DT used to integrate for the responses. More subdivisions
or smaller step size will make the digitized force curve more or smaller step size will make the digitized force curve more
closely match a sine wave. The default is usually adequate. closely match a sine wave. The default is usually adequate.

Please be aware that if a Cosine function or Sine with nonzero Please be aware that if a Cosine function or Sine with nonzero
phase angle is entered, the force at the arrival time will be nonzero; phase angle is entered, the force at the arrival time will be nonzero;
there will be a sudden application of force over a single integration there will be a sudden application of force over a single integration
step (DT) at that time. step (DT) at that time.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH
Section 5 5-165 Section 5 5-165

81,7    81,7   
'(),1( 7,0( +,6725< '(),1( 7,0( +,6725<
7<3(  )25&( 7<3(  )25&(
               
       
7<3(  $&&(/(5$7,21 7<3(  $&&(/(5$7,21
               
 4.2 2.5 4.5 3.0 4.5 3.5 2.8  4.2 2.5 4.5 3.0 4.5 3.5 2.8
$55,9$/ 7,0( $55,9$/ 7,0(
           
'$03,1*  '$03,1* 

1RWHV 1RWHV

The 'READ fn' command is to be provided only if the history of the The 'READ fn' command is to be provided only if the history of the
time varying load is to be read from an external file. fn is the file time varying load is to be read from an external file. fn is the file
name and may be up to 36 characters long. If the data on the file name and may be up to 36 characters long. If the data on the file
consists only of amplitudes, then enter I8 as the delta time spacing. consists only of amplitudes, then enter I8 as the delta time spacing.

The data in the external file must be provided as one or more time- The data in the external file must be provided as one or more time-
force pairs per line as shown in the following example. force pairs per line as shown in the following example.

'DWD LQ ,QSXW ILOH 'DWD LQ ,QSXW ILOH

81,7    81,7   
'(),1( 7,0( +,6725< '(),1( 7,0( +,6725<
7<3(  )25&( 7<3(  )25&(
5($' 7+),/( 5($' 7+),/(
$55,9$/ 7,0( $55,9$/ 7,0(
 
'$03,1*  '$03,1* 
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-166 Section 5 5-166 Section 5
'DWD LQ WKH ([WHUQDO ILOH ¦7+),/(§ 'DWD LQ WKH ([WHUQDO ILOH ¦7+),/(§

       


   
   
   

([DPSOH IRU +DUPRQLF /RDGLQJ *HQHUDWRU ([DPSOH IRU +DUPRQLF /RDGLQJ *HQHUDWRU

81,7    81,7   
'(),1( 7,0( +,6725< '(),1( 7,0( +,6725<
7<3(  )25&( 7<3(  )25&(
)ROORZLQJ OLQHV IRU +DUPRQLF /RDGLQJ *HQHUDWRU )ROORZLQJ OLQHV IRU +DUPRQLF /RDGLQJ *HQHUDWRU
)81&7,21 6,1( )81&7,21 6,1(
$03/,78'(  )5(48(1&<  &<&/(6  67(3  $03/,78'(  )5(48(1&<  &<&/(6  67(3 
$55,9$/ 7,0( $55,9$/ 7,0(
 
'$03,1*  '$03,1* 

To define more than one sinusoidal load, the input specification is To define more than one sinusoidal load, the input specification is
as follows : as follows :

'(),1( 7,0( +,6725< '(),1( 7,0( +,6725<


7<3(  )25&( 7<3(  )25&(
)81&7,21 6,1( )81&7,21 6,1(
$03/,78'(  530  &<&/(6  $03/,78'(  530  &<&/(6 
7<3(  )25&( 7<3(  )25&(
)81&7,21 6,1( )81&7,21 6,1(
$03/,78'(  530  &<&/(6  $03/,78'(  530  &<&/(6 
7<3(  )25&( 7<3(  )25&(
)81&7,21 6,1( )81&7,21 6,1(
$03/,78'(  530  &<&/(6  $03/,78'(  530  &<&/(6 
$55,9$/ 7,0( $55,9$/ 7,0(
     
'$03,1*  '$03,1* 
Section 5 5-167 Section 5 5-167
1RWH 1RWH

1) By default the response (displacements, forces etc.) will 1) By default the response (displacements, forces etc.) will
contain the contribution of only those modes whose contain the contribution of only those modes whose
frequency is less than or equal to 108 cps. Use the CUT frequency is less than or equal to 108 cps. Use the CUT
OFF FREQUENCY command to change this limit. OFF FREQUENCY command to change this limit.
Contributions of modes with frequency greater than the Cut Contributions of modes with frequency greater than the Cut
Off Frequency are not considered. Off Frequency are not considered.
2) Results are the individual maximums over the time period. 2) Results are the individual maximums over the time period.
Thus, derived quantities such as section forces and Thus, derived quantities such as section forces and
stresses, plate surface stresses and principal stresses should stresses, plate surface stresses and principal stresses should
not be used. not be used.
3) Results from harmonic input are the maximum over the 3) Results from harmonic input are the maximum over the
time period including the start-up transient period. These time period including the start-up transient period. These
results are not the steady-state results. results are not the steady-state results.
4) By default, the results do not include the time period after 4) By default, the results do not include the time period after
the time loads end. Use the CUT OFF TIME command to the time loads end. Use the CUT OFF TIME command to
lengthen (or shorten) the time period. If an intense short- lengthen (or shorten) the time period. If an intense short-
term loading is used, the loading should be continued until term loading is used, the loading should be continued until
after the expected peak response is reached. after the expected peak response is reached.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-168 Section 5 5-168 Section 5

5.32 Loading Specifications 5.32 Loading Specifications

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This section describes the various loading options available in This section describes the various loading options available in
STAAD. The following command may be used to initiate a new STAAD. The following command may be used to initiate a new
load case. load case.
/2$',1* L 1 DQ\ ORDG WLWOH /2$',1* L 1 DQ\ ORDG WLWOH

i 1 = any unique integer number (up to five digits) to identify the i 1 = any unique integer number (up to five digits) to identify the
load case. This number need not be sequential with the load case. This number need not be sequential with the
previous load number. previous load number.

The LOADING command initiates a new load case. Under this The LOADING command initiates a new load case. Under this
heading, all different loads related to this loading number can be heading, all different loads related to this loading number can be
input. These different kinds of loads are described in the remaining input. These different kinds of loads are described in the remaining
sub-sections below. sub-sections below.

Note: For Mass Model Loading in Dynamics please read Mass Modeling Note: For Mass Model Loading in Dynamics please read Mass Modeling
in Section 1.18.3 carefully. For the purpose of entering the mass distribution in Section 1.18.3 carefully. For the purpose of entering the mass distribution
for the first dynamic load case, use the following sections, 5.32.1 through for the first dynamic load case, use the following sections, 5.32.1 through
5.32.4 plus 5.32.9. 5.32.4 plus 5.32.9.

The purpose of the mass modeling step is to create lumped masses at the The purpose of the mass modeling step is to create lumped masses at the
joints that the eigensolution can use. The member/element loading is only a joints that the eigensolution can use. The member/element loading is only a
convenience in generating the joint masses. Analytically the masses are not convenience in generating the joint masses. Analytically the masses are not
in the elements but are lumped at the joints. in the elements but are lumped at the joints.

The absolute value of joint loads or loads distributed to joints from The absolute value of joint loads or loads distributed to joints from
member/element loadings will be treated as weights. The moments applied member/element loadings will be treated as weights. The moments applied
to member/elements or computed at joints as a result of member/element to member/elements or computed at joints as a result of member/element
loadings will be ignored. Only moments (actually weight moment of inertia, loadings will be ignored. Only moments (actually weight moment of inertia,
2 2
force-length units) applied in the Joint Load command will be used in force-length units) applied in the Joint Load command will be used in
defining the weight moment of inertias at joints. For slave joint directions, defining the weight moment of inertias at joints. For slave joint directions,
the associated joint weight or weight moment of inertia will be moved to the the associated joint weight or weight moment of inertia will be moved to the
master. In addition, the translational weights at slave joint directions will be master. In addition, the translational weights at slave joint directions will be
multiplied by the square of the distance to the master to get the additional multiplied by the square of the distance to the master to get the additional
weight moment of inertia at the master. Cross product weight moment of weight moment of inertia at the master. Cross product weight moment of
inertias at the master will be ignored. inertias at the master will be ignored.
Section 5 5-169 Section 5 5-169

5.32.1 Joint Load Specification 5.32.1 Joint Load Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This set of commands may be used to specify JOINT loads on the This set of commands may be used to specify JOINT loads on the
structure. For dynamic mass modeling see sections 5.32 and 1.18.3. structure. For dynamic mass modeling see sections 5.32 and 1.18.3.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

-2,17 /2$' -2,17 /2$'


); I  ); I 
)< I  )< I 
MRLQWOLVW )= I  MRLQWOLVW )= I 
0; I  0; I 
0< I  0< I 
0= I  0= I 

FX, FY and FZ specify a force in the corresponding global FX, FY and FZ specify a force in the corresponding global
direction (even at inclined support joints). direction (even at inclined support joints).
MX, MY and MZ specify a moment in the corresponding global MX, MY and MZ specify a moment in the corresponding global
direction. direction.
f 1 , f 2 ... f 6 are the values of the loads. f 1 , f 2 ... f 6 are the values of the loads.
See Section See Section
1.16.1 ([DPSOH 1.16.1 ([DPSOH

-2,17 /2$' -2,17 /2$'


 72    )<  0=   72    )<  0= 
  );    ); 
 0;  )=   0;  )= 

1RWHV 1RWHV

Joint numbers may be repeated where loads are meant to be Joint numbers may be repeated where loads are meant to be
additive in the joint. additive in the joint.

UNIT command may be on lines in between joint-list lines. UNIT command may be on lines in between joint-list lines.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-170 Section 5 5-170 Section 5

5.32.2 Member Load Specification 5.32.2 Member Load Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This set of commands may be used to specify MEMBER loads on This set of commands may be used to specify MEMBER loads on
frame members. frame members.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

0(0%(5 /2$' 0(0%(5 /2$'

 81, RU 8020 GLUHFWLRQVSHF I I I I   81, RU 8020 GLUHFWLRQVSHF I I I I 
PHPEHUOLVW  &21 RU &020 GLUHFWLRQVSHF I I I  PHPEHUOLVW  &21 RU &020 GLUHFWLRQVSHF I I I 
 /,1 GLUHFWLRQVSHF I I I   /,1 GLUHFWLRQVSHF I I I 
 75$3 GLUHFWLRQVSHF I I I I   75$3 GLUHFWLRQVSHF I I I I 

;  ; 
<  < 
=  = 
 *;   *; 
GLUHFWLRQVSHF  *<  GLUHFWLRQVSHF  *< 
 *=   *= 
 3;   3; 
 3<   3< 
 3=   3= 

UNI or UMOM specifies a uniformly distributed load or moment UNI or UMOM specifies a uniformly distributed load or moment
with a value of f1 , at a distance of f 2 from the with a value of f1 , at a distance of f 2 from the
start of the member to the start of the load, and a start of the member to the start of the load, and a
distance of f 3 from the start of the member to the distance of f 3 from the start of the member to the
end of the load. The load is assumed to cover the end of the load. The load is assumed to cover the
full member length if f 2 and f 3 are omitted. full member length if f 2 and f 3 are omitted.
UMOM is not available for tapered members. UMOM is not available for tapered members.
CON or CMOM specifies a concentrated force or moment with a CON or CMOM specifies a concentrated force or moment with a
value of f 5 applied at a distance of f 6 from the value of f 5 applied at a distance of f 6 from the
start of the member. f 6 will default to half the start of the member. f 6 will default to half the
member length if omitted. member length if omitted.
f4 = Perpendicular distance from the member shear f4 = Perpendicular distance from the member shear
center to the plane of loading. The value is center to the plane of loading. The value is
Section 5 5-171 Section 5 5-171
positive in the general direction of the parallel positive in the general direction of the parallel
(or close to parallel) local axis. (or close to parallel) local axis.
LIN specifies a linearly decreasing or increasing, or a LIN specifies a linearly decreasing or increasing, or a
triangular load. If the load is linearly increasing triangular load. If the load is linearly increasing
or decreasing then f 7 is the value at the start of or decreasing then f 7 is the value at the start of
the member and f 8 is the value at the end. If the the member and f 8 is the value at the end. If the
load is triangular, then f 7 and f 8 are input as zero load is triangular, then f 7 and f 8 are input as zero
and f 9 is the value of the load in the middle of the and f 9 is the value of the load in the middle of the
member. member.
TRAP specifies a trapezoidal linearly varying load that TRAP specifies a trapezoidal linearly varying load that
may act over the full or partial length of a member may act over the full or partial length of a member
and in a local, global or projected direction. The and in a local, global or projected direction. The
starting load value is given by f 10 and the ending starting load value is given by f 10 and the ending
load value by f 11 . The loading location is given by load value by f 11 . The loading location is given by
f 12 , the loading starting point, and f 13 , the f 12 , the loading starting point, and f 13 , the
stopping point. Both are measured from the start stopping point. Both are measured from the start
of the member. If f 12 and f 13 are not given, the of the member. If f 12 and f 13 are not given, the
load is assumed to cover the full member length. load is assumed to cover the full member length.

X, Y, & Z in the direction-spec and local-spec specify the direction X, Y, & Z in the direction-spec and local-spec specify the direction
of the load in the local (member) x, y and z-axes. of the load in the local (member) x, y and z-axes.

GX, GY, & GZ in the direction-spec specify the direction of the GX, GY, & GZ in the direction-spec specify the direction of the
load in the global X, Y, and Z-axes. load in the global X, Y, and Z-axes.

PX, PY and PZ may be used if the load is to be along the projected PX, PY and PZ may be used if the load is to be along the projected
length of the member in the corresponding global direction. Load length of the member in the corresponding global direction. Load
start and end distances are measured along the member length and start and end distances are measured along the member length and
not the projected length. not the projected length.
See Section See Section
1.16.2 1RWHV 1.16.2 1RWHV

If the member being loaded has offset distances (see MEMBER If the member being loaded has offset distances (see MEMBER
OFFSET specification), the location of the load is measured not OFFSET specification), the location of the load is measured not
from the coordinates of the starting node but from the offset from the coordinates of the starting node but from the offset
distance. distance.
Trapezoidal loads are converted into 8 concentrated loads. Trapezoidal loads are converted into 8 concentrated loads.
UNIT command may be on lines in between member-list lines. UNIT command may be on lines in between member-list lines.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-172 Section 5 5-172 Section 5

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

0(0%(5 /2$' 0(0%(5 /2$'


 &21 *<    &21 *<  
 72  81, *; ¤    72  81, *; ¤  
 75$3 *< ¤ ¤    75$3 *< ¤ ¤  
 /,1 ; ¤ ¤  /,1 ; ¤ ¤
 81, 3= ¤  81, 3= ¤
Section 5 5-173 Section 5 5-173

5.32.3 Element Load Specification 5.32.3 Element Load Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command may be used to specify various types of ELEMENT This command may be used to specify various types of ELEMENT
LOADS on the plate elements. LOADS on the plate elements.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

(/(0(17 /2$' (/(0(17 /2$'

  *;     *;  
 35(6685(  *<  I [  \  [  \    35(6685(  *<  I [  \  [  \  
  *=     *=  
   
HOHPHQWOLVW   HOHPHQWOLVW  
 ;    ;  
 75$3   I I   75$3   I I 
 <    <  

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

The PRESSURE option should be used when a UNIFORM pressure The PRESSURE option should be used when a UNIFORM pressure
needs to be specified. The uniform PRESSURE may be provided on needs to be specified. The uniform PRESSURE may be provided on
the entire element or a user specified portion of the element the entire element or a user specified portion of the element
(defined by x 1 , y 1 and x 2 , y 2 - see description below). If x 1 , y 1 and (defined by x 1 , y 1 and x 2 , y 2 - see description below). If x 1 , y 1 and
x 2 , y 2 are not provided, the pressure is applied on the entire x 2 , y 2 are not provided, the pressure is applied on the entire
element. If only x 1 , y 1 is provided, the load is assumed as a element. If only x 1 , y 1 is provided, the load is assumed as a
concentrated load applied at the specified point. concentrated load applied at the specified point.

Note that the PRESSURE may be provided either in GLOBAL Note that the PRESSURE may be provided either in GLOBAL
(GX, GY, GZ) directions or in local Z direction (normal to the (GX, GY, GZ) directions or in local Z direction (normal to the
element). If the GLOBAL direction is omitted, the applied loading element). If the GLOBAL direction is omitted, the applied loading
is assumed to be in the local Z direction. is assumed to be in the local Z direction.

GX,GY,GZ Global direction specification for pressure denotes GX,GY,GZ Global direction specification for pressure denotes
global X, Y, or Z direction respectively. global X, Y, or Z direction respectively.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-174 Section 5 5-174 Section 5

/RFDO < /RFDO <

; <  ; < 
/RFDO ; /RFDO ;

; <  ; < 

8QLIRUPO\ /RDGHG $UHD 8QLIRUPO\ /RDGHG $UHD

See Section f1 Element pressure (force/square of length) or See Section f1 Element pressure (force/square of length) or
1.6 concentrated load (force). Note that f 1 is assumed 1.6 concentrated load (force). Note that f 1 is assumed
as a concentrated load if x 2 and y 2 are omitted. as a concentrated load if x 2 and y 2 are omitted.
x 1 ,y 1 & x 2 ,y 2 Co-ordinate points in local co-ordinate system x 1 ,y 1 & x 2 ,y 2 Co-ordinate points in local co-ordinate system
(center node is origin) defining (center node is origin) defining
8QLIRUPO\ 9DU\LQJ 8QLIRUPO\ 9DU\LQJ
3UHVV 7UDS < /RFDO <
the rectangular area on which 3UHVV 7UDS < /RFDO <
the rectangular area on which
the pressure is applied. the pressure is applied.
/RFDO ; /RFDO ;
The TRAP option should be The TRAP option should be
used when a linearly varying used when a linearly varying
pressure needs to be specified. pressure needs to be specified.
8QLIRUPO\ 9DU\LQJ 8QLIRUPO\ 9DU\LQJ
3UHVV 7UDS ;
The variation must be provided 3UHVV 7UDS ;
The variation must be provided
over the entire element. over the entire element.

X or Y Direction of variation of element pressure. X or Y Direction of variation of element pressure.


The TRAP X/Y option indicates that the variation The TRAP X/Y option indicates that the variation
of the Trapezoid is in the local X or in the local Y of the Trapezoid is in the local X or in the local Y
direction. The load always acts in the local Z axis. direction. The load always acts in the local Z axis.
f2 Pressure intensity at start. f2 Pressure intensity at start.
f3 Pressure intensity at end f3 Pressure intensity at end

Note: Note:
Section 5 5-175 Section 5 5-175
1. "Start" and "end" defined above are based on positive 1. "Start" and "end" defined above are based on positive
directions of the local X or Y axis. directions of the local X or Y axis.
2. While the X or Y indicates the direction of variation of the 2. While the X or Y indicates the direction of variation of the
trapezoidal load, the load itself acts in the local Z direction. trapezoidal load, the load itself acts in the local Z direction.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

/2$'  /2$' 
(/(0(17 /2$' (/(0(17 /2$'
  72  35    72  35 
  35        35     
 72  75$3 ;    72  75$3 ;  
 35     35   
 72  35   72  35 
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-176 Section 5 5-176 Section 5

5.32.4 Area Load/Floor Load Specification 5.32.4 Area Load/Floor Load Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

These commands may be used to specify AREA LOADs or FLOOR These commands may be used to specify AREA LOADs or FLOOR
LOADs on a structure based on members only. The AREA LOAD LOADs on a structure based on members only. The AREA LOAD
may be used for modeling one-way distribution and the FLOOR may be used for modeling one-way distribution and the FLOOR
LOAD may be used for modeling two-way distribution. LOAD may be used for modeling two-way distribution.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW IRU $5($ /2$' *HQHUDO IRUPDW IRU $5($ /2$'

$5($ /2$' $5($ /2$'

PHPEHUOLVW $/2$' I1 PHPEHUOLVW $/2$' I1

See Section See Section


f 1 = The value of the area load (unit weight over square length f 1 = The value of the area load (unit weight over square length
1.16.3 1.16.3
unit). This load always acts along the positive local y-axis. unit). This load always acts along the positive local y-axis.
For the members of a FLOOR analysis, this direction will For the members of a FLOOR analysis, this direction will
coincide with global vertical axis in most cases. coincide with global vertical axis in most cases.
(For detailed description, refer to Section 1.) (For detailed description, refer to Section 1.)

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

$5($ /2$' $5($ /2$'


  72  $/2$'    72  $/2$' 
  $/2$'    $/2$' 

1RWH 1RWH

Area load should not be specified on members declared as Area load should not be specified on members declared as
MEMBER CABLE, MEMBER TRUSS or MEMBER TENSION. MEMBER CABLE, MEMBER TRUSS or MEMBER TENSION.
Section 5 5-177 Section 5 5-177
*HQHUDO )RUPDW IRU )/225 /2$' *HQHUDO )RUPDW IRU )/225 /2$'

)/225 /2$' )/225 /2$'

<5$1*( I I )/2$' I ;5$1*( I  I  <5$1*( I I )/2$' I ;5$1*( I  I 


=5$1*( I I  =5$1*( I I 

Where Where
f1 f2 Global vertical coordinate values to specify vertical range. f1 f2 Global vertical coordinate values to specify vertical range.
The floor load will be calculated for all members lying in The floor load will be calculated for all members lying in
the global horizontal plane within the specified global the global horizontal plane within the specified global
vertical range. vertical range.
f3 The value of the floor load (unit weight over square length f3 The value of the floor load (unit weight over square length
unit). This load always acts parallel to the global vertical unit). This load always acts parallel to the global vertical
axis. A positive value signifies that the load is acting in axis. A positive value signifies that the load is acting in
the positive global Y direction. A negative value indicates the positive global Y direction. A negative value indicates
a load in the negative global Y direction. a load in the negative global Y direction.
f 4 - f 7 Global X or Z coordinate values to define the corner points f 4 - f 7 Global X or Z coordinate values to define the corner points
of the area on which the specified floor load (f3 ) acts. If of the area on which the specified floor load (f3 ) acts. If
not specified, the floor load will be calculated for all not specified, the floor load will be calculated for all
members in all floors within the specified global vertical members in all floors within the specified global vertical
range. range.

1RWHV 1RWHV

1) The structure has to be modeled in such a way that the global 1) The structure has to be modeled in such a way that the global
vertical axis remains perpendicular to the floor plane(s). vertical axis remains perpendicular to the floor plane(s).
2) For the FLOOR LOAD specification, a two-way distribution of 2) For the FLOOR LOAD specification, a two-way distribution of
the load is considered. For the AREA LOAD specification, a the load is considered. For the AREA LOAD specification, a
one-way action is considered. one-way action is considered.
3) FLOOR LOAD from a slab is distributed on the adjoining 3) FLOOR LOAD from a slab is distributed on the adjoining
members as trapezoidal and triangular loads depending on the members as trapezoidal and triangular loads depending on the
length of the sides as shown in the diagram. Internally, these length of the sides as shown in the diagram. Internally, these
loads are converted to multiple point loads. loads are converted to multiple point loads.



Members 1 and 2 get full trapezoidal 


Members 1 and 2 get full trapezoidal
 
 


R

R

and triangular loads respectively. 
R

R

and triangular loads respectively.

Members 3 and 4 get partial trapezoidal 
Members 3 and 4 get partial trapezoidal
loads and 5 and 6 get partial triangular loads and 5 and 6 get partial triangular
 




R
 
Rload. 
R
 
Rload.
   
 
 
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-178 Section 5 5-178 Section 5

4) The load per unit area may not vary for a particular panel and it is 4) The load per unit area may not vary for a particular panel and it is
assumed to be continuous and without holes. assumed to be continuous and without holes.
5) The FLOOR LOAD facility is not available if the SET Z UP 5) The FLOOR LOAD facility is not available if the SET Z UP
command is used (See Section 5.5.) command is used (See Section 5.5.)
6) If the floor has a shape consisting of a mixture of convex and 6) If the floor has a shape consisting of a mixture of convex and
concave edges, then break up the floor load command into several concave edges, then break up the floor load command into several
parts, each for a certain region of the floor. This will force the parts, each for a certain region of the floor. This will force the
program to localize the search for panels and the solution will be program to localize the search for panels and the solution will be
better. See illustrative example at the end of this section. better. See illustrative example at the end of this section.
7) At least one quadrilateral panel bounded on at least 3 sides by 7) At least one quadrilateral panel bounded on at least 3 sides by
"complete" members has to be present within the bounds of the "complete" members has to be present within the bounds of the
user-defined range of coordinates (XRANGE, YRANGE and user-defined range of coordinates (XRANGE, YRANGE and
ZRANGE) in order for the program to successfully generate ZRANGE) in order for the program to successfully generate
member loads from the FLOOR LOAD specification. A "complete" member loads from the FLOOR LOAD specification. A "complete"
member is defined as one whose entire length between its start and member is defined as one whose entire length between its start and
end coordinates borders the specified panel. end coordinates borders the specified panel.

The load distribution pattern depends upon the shape of the panel. The load distribution pattern depends upon the shape of the panel.
If the panel is Rectangular, the distribution will be Trapezoidal and If the panel is Rectangular, the distribution will be Trapezoidal and
triangular as explained in the following diagram. triangular as explained in the following diagram.

X X

6 6

Z 4 Z 4

6 4 6 4

For a panel that is not rectangular, the distribution is described in For a panel that is not rectangular, the distribution is described in
following diagram. following diagram.
Section 5 5-179 Section 5 5-179
First, the CG of the polygon is calculated. Then, each corner is First, the CG of the polygon is calculated. Then, each corner is
connected to the CG to form triangles as shown. For each triangle, connected to the CG to form triangles as shown. For each triangle,
a vertical line is drawn from the CG to the opposite side. If the a vertical line is drawn from the CG to the opposite side. If the
point of intersection of the vertical line and the side falls outside point of intersection of the vertical line and the side falls outside
the triangle, the area of that triangle will be calculated and an the triangle, the area of that triangle will be calculated and an
equivalent uniform distributed load will be applied on that side. equivalent uniform distributed load will be applied on that side.
Otherwise a triangular load will be applied on the side. Otherwise a triangular load will be applied on the side.

1 1

Triangular 2 Triangular 2
Triangular Triangular

UDL UDL

5 5
Triangular Triangular

Triangular Triangular
1 1

Triangular Triangular

4 4

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

7KH LQSXW IRU )/225 /2$' LV H[SODLQHG WKURXJK DQ 7KH LQSXW IRU )/225 /2$' LV H[SODLQHG WKURXJK DQ
H[DPSOH H[DPSOH

/HW XV FRQVLGHU WKH IROORZLQJ IORRU SODQ DW \  /HW XV FRQVLGHU WKH IROORZLQJ IORRU SODQ DW \ 
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-180 Section 5 5-180 Section 5






; ;
 
 
 
 
 

 
 

 

% %

 
 
 

 
$ $

 
 

 

& &

   
 

   

= =

,I WKH HQWLUH IORRU KDV D ORDG RI  IRUFHXQLW DUHD  WKHQ ,I WKH HQWLUH IORRU KDV D ORDG RI  IRUFHXQLW DUHD  WKHQ
WKH LQSXW ZLOO EH DV IROORZV WKH LQSXW ZLOO EH DV IROORZV
     
/2$'  /2$' 
)/225 /2$' )/225 /2$'
<5$   )/2$'  <5$   )/2$' 
     
,I LQ WKH DERYH H[DPSOH SDQHO $ KDV D ORDG RI  DQG ,I LQ WKH DERYH H[DPSOH SDQHO $ KDV D ORDG RI  DQG
SDQHOV % DQG & KDYH D ORDG RI  WKHQ WKH LQSXW ZLOO EH SDQHOV % DQG & KDYH D ORDG RI  WKHQ WKH LQSXW ZLOO EH
DV IROORZV DV IROORZV
1RWH WKH XVDJH RI ;5$1*( <5$1*( DQG =5$1*( 1RWH WKH XVDJH RI ;5$1*( <5$1*( DQG =5$1*(
VSHFLILFDWLRQV VSHFLILFDWLRQV
ž ž
/2$'  /2$' 
)/225 /2$' )/225 /2$'
<5$   )/2$'  ;5$   =5$   <5$   )/2$'  ;5$   =5$  
<5$   )/2$'  ;5$   =5$   <5$   )/2$'  ;5$   =5$  
/2$'  /2$' 
ž ž
7KH SURJUDP LQWHUQDOO\ LGHQWLILHV WKH SDQHOV VKRZQ DV $ 7KH SURJUDP LQWHUQDOO\ LGHQWLILHV WKH SDQHOV VKRZQ DV $
% DQG & LQ WKH ILJXUH  7KH IORRU ORDGV DUH GLVWULEXWHG DV % DQG & LQ WKH ILJXUH  7KH IORRU ORDGV DUH GLVWULEXWHG DV
WUDSH]RLGDO DQG WULDQJXODU ORDGV DV VKRZQ E\ GRWWHG OLQHV WUDSH]RLGDO DQG WULDQJXODU ORDGV DV VKRZQ E\ GRWWHG OLQHV
LQ WKH ILJXUH 7KH QHJDWLYH VLJQ IRU WKH ORDG VLJQLILHV WKDW LQ WKH ILJXUH 7KH QHJDWLYH VLJQ IRU WKH ORDG VLJQLILHV WKDW
LW LV DSSOLHG LQ WKH GRZQZDUG JOREDO < GLUHFWLRQ LW LV DSSOLHG LQ WKH GRZQZDUG JOREDO < GLUHFWLRQ
Section 5 5-181 Section 5 5-181
Illustration of Notes Item (6) for FLOOR LOAD Illustration of Notes Item (6) for FLOOR LOAD

The attached example illustrates a case where the floor has to be The attached example illustrates a case where the floor has to be
sub-divided into smaller regions for the floor load generation to sub-divided into smaller regions for the floor load generation to
yield proper results. The internal angle at node 6 between the sides yield proper results. The internal angle at node 6 between the sides
108 and 111 exceeds 180 degrees. A similar situation exists at 108 and 111 exceeds 180 degrees. A similar situation exists at
node 7 also. As a result, the following command node 7 also. As a result, the following command

LOAD 1 LOAD 1
FLOOR LOAD FLOOR LOAD
YRANGE 11.9 12.1 FLOAD –0.35 YRANGE 11.9 12.1 FLOAD –0.35

will not yield acceptable results. Instead, the region should be will not yield acceptable results. Instead, the region should be
subdivided as shown in the following example subdivided as shown in the following example

LOAD 1 LOAD 1
FLOOR LOAD FLOOR LOAD
YRANGE 11.9 12.1 FLOAD –0.35 XRA –0.1 15.1 ZRA –0.1 8.1 YRANGE 11.9 12.1 FLOAD –0.35 XRA –0.1 15.1 ZRA –0.1 8.1
YRANGE 11.9 12.1 FLOAD –0.35 XRA 4.9 10.1 ZRA 7.9 16.1 YRANGE 11.9 12.1 FLOAD –0.35 XRA 4.9 10.1 ZRA 7.9 16.1
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-182 Section 5 5-182 Section 5

5.32.5 Prestress Load Specification 5.32.5 Prestress Load Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command may be used to specify PRESTRESS loads on This command may be used to specify PRESTRESS loads on
members of the structure. members of the structure.

*HQHUDO )RUPDW *HQHUDO )RUPDW

35(675(66  35(675(66 
0(0%(5   /2$' 0(0%(5   /2$'
3267675(66  3267675(66 
(6 I  (6 I 
PHPEHUOLVW )25&( I (0 I  PHPEHUOLVW )25&( I (0 I 
(( I  (( I 

f1 = Prestressing force. This value is positive in the direction of f1 = Prestressing force. This value is positive in the direction of
the local x-axis. the local x-axis.
ES = specifies eccentricity of the prestress force at the start of ES = specifies eccentricity of the prestress force at the start of
the member at a distance f 2 from the centroid. the member at a distance f 2 from the centroid.
EM = specifies eccentricity of the prestress force at the mid-point EM = specifies eccentricity of the prestress force at the mid-point
of the member at a distance f 3 from the centroid. of the member at a distance f 3 from the centroid.
EE = specifies eccentricity of the prestress force at the end of EE = specifies eccentricity of the prestress force at the end of
the member at a distance f4 from the centroid. the member at a distance f4 from the centroid.

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

The first option, (MEMBER PRESTRESS LOAD), considers the The first option, (MEMBER PRESTRESS LOAD), considers the
effect of the prestressing force during its application. Thus, effect of the prestressing force during its application. Thus,
See Section See Section
transverse shear generated at the ends of the member(s) subject to transverse shear generated at the ends of the member(s) subject to
1.16.5 1.16.5
the prestressing force is transferred to the adjacent members. the prestressing force is transferred to the adjacent members.

The second option, (MEMBER POSTSTRESS LOAD), considers The second option, (MEMBER POSTSTRESS LOAD), considers
the effect of the existing prestress load after the prestressing the effect of the existing prestress load after the prestressing
operation. Thus, transverse shear at the ends of the member(s) operation. Thus, transverse shear at the ends of the member(s)
subject to the prestressing force is not transferred to the adjacent subject to the prestressing force is not transferred to the adjacent
members. members.
Section 5 5-183 Section 5 5-183
([DPSOH ([DPSOH

0(0%(5 35(675(66 0(0%(5 35(675(66


 72   )25&(   72   )25&( 
0(0%(5 3267675(66 0(0%(5 3267675(66
 )25&(  (6  (0  ((   )25&(  (6  (0  (( 

In the first example, a prestressing force of 50 force units is In the first example, a prestressing force of 50 force units is
applied through the centroid (i.e. no eccentricity) of members 2 to applied through the centroid (i.e. no eccentricity) of members 2 to
7 and 11. In the second example, a poststressing force of 30 force 7 and 11. In the second example, a poststressing force of 30 force
units is applied with an eccentricity of 3 length units at the start, - units is applied with an eccentricity of 3 length units at the start, -
6.0 at the middle, and 3.0 at the end of member 8. 6.0 at the middle, and 3.0 at the end of member 8.

One of the limitations in using this command is that under any one One of the limitations in using this command is that under any one
load case, on any given member, a prestress or poststress load may load case, on any given member, a prestress or poststress load may
be applied only once. If the given member carries multiple stressed be applied only once. If the given member carries multiple stressed
cables or has a PRESTRESS and POSTSTRESS load condition, cables or has a PRESTRESS and POSTSTRESS load condition,
such a situation will have to be specified through multiple load such a situation will have to be specified through multiple load
cases for that member. See example below. cases for that member. See example below.

,QFRUUHFW LQSXW ,QFRUUHFW LQSXW

/2$'  /2$' 
0(0%(5 35(675(66 0(0%(5 35(675(66
  )25&(  (6  (0  ((    )25&(  (6  (0  (( 
 )25&(  (6  (0  ((   )25&(  (6  (0  (( 
3(5)250 $1$/<6,6 3(5)250 $1$/<6,6

&RUUHFW ,QSXW &RUUHFW ,QSXW

/2$'  /2$' 
0(0%(5 35(675(66 0(0%(5 35(675(66
  )25&(  (6  (0  ((    )25&(  (6  (0  (( 
/2$'  /2$' 
0(0%(5 35(675(66 0(0%(5 35(675(66
 )25&(  (6  (0  ((   )25&(  (6  (0  (( 
3(5)250 $1$/<6,6 3(5)250 $1$/<6,6
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-184 Section 5 5-184 Section 5

Examples for Modeling Techniques Examples for Modeling Techniques


The following examples describe the partial input data for the The following examples describe the partial input data for the
members and cable profiles shown below. members and cable profiles shown below.

([DPSOH  ([DPSOH 

3 3 3 3

3 3

10ft 10ft

-2,17 &225' -2,17 &225'


             
0(0% ,1&, 0(0% ,1&,
     
 
 
 
81,7    81,7   
/2$'  /2$' 
0(0%(5 3267675(66 0(0%(5 3267675(66
 )25&(  (6  (0  ((   )25&(  (6  (0  (( 
3(5)250 $1$/<6,6 3(5)250 $1$/<6,6
Section 5 5-185 Section 5 5-185
([DPSOH  ([DPSOH 

3 3 3 3 3 3

20 ft 20 ft

-2,17 &225' -2,17 &225'


             
0(0% ,1&, 0(0% ,1&,
     
 
 
 
81,7    81,7   
/2$'  /2$' 
35(675(66 /2$' 35(675(66 /2$'
 )25&(  (6  (0  ((   )25&(  (6  (0  (( 
3(5)250 $1$/<6,6 3(5)250 $1$/<6,6
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-186 Section 5 5-186 Section 5
([DPSOH  ([DPSOH 

3 3 3 3
3 3

5 ft 10 ft 5 ft 5 ft 10 ft 5 ft

-2,17 &225' -2,17 &225'


                               
0(0% ,1&, 0(0% ,1&,
                     
 
 
 
81,7    81,7   
/2$'  /2$' 
35(675(66 /2$' 35(675(66 /2$'
 )25&(  (6  (0  ((   )25&(  (6  (0  (( 
 )25&(  (6  (0  ((   )25&(  (6  (0  (( 
 )25&(  (6  (0  ((   )25&(  (6  (0  (( 
3(5)250 $1$/<6,6 3(5)250 $1$/<6,6
Section 5 5-187 Section 5 5-187
([DPSOH  ([DPSOH 

3 3 3 3

3 3

20 ft 20 ft

-2,17 &225' -2,17 &225'


                       
0(0% ,1&, 0(0% ,1&,
             
 
 
 
81,7    81,7   
/2$'  /2$' 
35(675(66 /2$' 35(675(66 /2$'
 )25&(  (6  (0  ((   )25&(  (6  (0  (( 
 )25&(  (6  (0  ((   )25&(  (6  (0  (( 
3(5)250 $1$/<6,6 3(5)250 $1$/<6,6
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-188 Section 5 5-188 Section 5
([DPSOH  ([DPSOH 

3 3 3 3 3 3
3 3 3 3

10 ft 10 ft 10 ft 10 ft

-2,17 &225' -2,17 &225'


                       
0(0% ,1&, 0(0% ,1&,
             
 
 
 
81,7    81,7   
/2$'  /2$' 
35(675(66 /2$' 35(675(66 /2$'
 )25&(  (6  (0  ((   )25&(  (6  (0  (( 
 )25&(  (6  (0  ((   )25&(  (6  (0  (( 
3(5)250 $1$/<6,6 3(5)250 $1$/<6,6
Section 5 5-189 Section 5 5-189

5.32.6 Temperature Load Specification for 5.32.6 Temperature Load Specification for
Members, Plates, and Solids Members, Plates, and Solids

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command may be used to specify TEMPERATURE loads or This command may be used to specify TEMPERATURE loads or
strain loads on members, plates, and solids; or strain loads on strain loads on members, plates, and solids; or strain loads on
members. members.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

7(03(5$785( /2$' 7(03(5$785( /2$'

 7(03 I I  I    7(03 I I  I  
PHPEHOHPOLVW  675$,1 I  PHPEHOHPOLVW  675$,1 I 
 675$,15$7( I   675$,15$7( I 

f 1 = The change in temperature which will cause axial elongation in f 1 = The change in temperature which will cause axial elongation in
the members or uniform volume expansion in plates and the members or uniform volume expansion in plates and
solids. The temperature unit is the same as the unit chosen for solids. The temperature unit is the same as the unit chosen for
the coefficient of thermal expansion ALPHA under the the coefficient of thermal expansion ALPHA under the
CONSTANT command. (Members/Plates/Solids) CONSTANT command. (Members/Plates/Solids)
f 2 = The temperature differential from the top to the bottom of the f 2 = The temperature differential from the top to the bottom of the
member or plate (T top surface -T bottom surface ). If f 2 is omitted, no member or plate (T top surface -T bottom surface ). If f 2 is omitted, no
bending will be considered. (Local Y axis) (Members/Plates) bending will be considered. (Local Y axis) (Members/Plates)
f 4 = The temperature differential from side to side of the member. f 4 = The temperature differential from side to side of the member.
(Local Z axis) (Members only) (Local Z axis) (Members only)
See Section f 3 = Initial axial elongation (+)/ shrinkage (-) in member due to See Section f 3 = Initial axial elongation (+)/ shrinkage (-) in member due to
1.16.6 misfit, etc. in length unit (Members only). 1.16.6 misfit, etc. in length unit (Members only).
f 5 = Initial axial elongation (+)/ shrinkage (-) per unit length, of f 5 = Initial axial elongation (+)/ shrinkage (-) per unit length, of
members only. members only.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

7(03 /2$' 7(03 /2$'


 72    7(03   72    7(03 
 72  7(03    72  7(03  
 72  675$,1 (  72  675$,1 (
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-190 Section 5 5-190 Section 5

1RWH 1RWH

It is not necessary or possible to specify the units for temperature It is not necessary or possible to specify the units for temperature
or for ALPHA. The user must ensure that the value provided for or for ALPHA. The user must ensure that the value provided for
ALPHA is consistent in terms of units with the value provided for ALPHA is consistent in terms of units with the value provided for
the temperature load. (see Section 5.26). If ALPHA was provided the temperature load. (see Section 5.26). If ALPHA was provided
by a material name (STEEL, CONCRETE, ALUMINUM) then the by a material name (STEEL, CONCRETE, ALUMINUM) then the
temperature here must be in degree Fahrenheit units. temperature here must be in degree Fahrenheit units.
Section 5 5-191 Section 5 5-191

5.32.7 Fixed-End Load Specification 5.32.7 Fixed-End Load Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command may be used to specify FIXED-END loads on This command may be used to specify FIXED-END loads on
members (beams only) of the structure. members (beams only) of the structure.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

),;(' (1' /2$' ),;(' (1' /2$'

0HPEHUBOLVW );/2$' I  I    I  0HPEHUBOLVW );/2$' I  I    I 

member_list = normal Staad member list rules (TO and BY for member_list = normal Staad member list rules (TO and BY for
generation; and - to continue list to next line). generation; and - to continue list to next line).
See Section See Section
1.16.4 1.16.4
f 1 ... f 6 = Force-x, shear-y, shear-z, torsion, moment-y, moment-z f 1 ... f 6 = Force-x, shear-y, shear-z, torsion, moment-y, moment-z
(all in local coordinates) at the start of the member. (all in local coordinates) at the start of the member.
f 7 ... f 12 = Same as above except at the end of the member. f 7 ... f 12 = Same as above except at the end of the member.

If less than 12 load values are entered, zero values will be added to If less than 12 load values are entered, zero values will be added to
the end. The loads may be extended to one additional line by the end. The loads may be extended to one additional line by
ending the first load line with a - (hyphen). ending the first load line with a - (hyphen).

These loads are given in the member local coordinate system and These loads are given in the member local coordinate system and
the directions are opposite to the actual load on the member the directions are opposite to the actual load on the member

Old input format: Old input format:

Member_number f 1 , f 2 , ..... f 12 Member_number f 1 , f 2 , ..... f 12

Member_number = enter only one member number per line for this Member_number = enter only one member number per line for this
format. [If you want to define the same load for many format. [If you want to define the same load for many
members, then use the member list form of this command members, then use the member list form of this command
shown at the beginning of this section.] shown at the beginning of this section.]
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-192 Section 5 5-192 Section 5

5.32.8 Support Joint Displacement Specification 5.32.8 Support Joint Displacement Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command may be used to specify DISPLACEMENTs (or This command may be used to specify DISPLACEMENTs (or
generate loads to induce specified displacements) in supported generate loads to induce specified displacements) in supported
directions (pinned, fixed, enforced, or spring). directions (pinned, fixed, enforced, or spring).

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

6833257 ',63/$&(0(17 6833257 ',63/$&(0(17

);  ); 
)<  )< 
VXSSRUW MRLQWOLVW )=  I VXSSRUW MRLQWOLVW )=  I
0;  0; 
0<  0< 
0=  0= 

FX, FY, FZ specify translational displacements in X, Y, and Z FX, FY, FZ specify translational displacements in X, Y, and Z
See Section See Section
directions respectively. MX, MY, MZ specify rotational directions respectively. MX, MY, MZ specify rotational
1.16.7 1.16.7
displacements in X, Y, and Z directions. displacements in X, Y, and Z directions.

f1 = Value of the corresponding displacement. For translational f1 = Value of the corresponding displacement. For translational
displacements, the unit is in the currently specified length displacements, the unit is in the currently specified length
unit, while for rotational displacements the unit is always unit, while for rotational displacements the unit is always
in degrees. in degrees.

Description Description

There are two distinct modes of usage for this command. If any There are two distinct modes of usage for this command. If any
“Enforced” specifications were used in the Support command then “Enforced” specifications were used in the Support command then
the “Displacement mode” is used; otherwise the “Load mode” is the “Displacement mode” is used; otherwise the “Load mode” is
used. Despite the name of this command, if displacements are used. Despite the name of this command, if displacements are
specified in spring directions, the displacement is at the joint not at specified in spring directions, the displacement is at the joint not at
the grounded end of the support spring. Please note that the grounded end of the support spring. Please note that
displacement cannot be specified in a direction that does not have a displacement cannot be specified in a direction that does not have a
support or a spring. support or a spring.
Section 5 5-193 Section 5 5-193

DISPLACEMENT MODE DISPLACEMENT MODE


With this mode, the support joint displacement is modeled as an With this mode, the support joint displacement is modeled as an
imposed joint displacement. The joint directions where imposed joint displacement. The joint directions where
displacement may be specified must be defined (same for all cases) displacement may be specified must be defined (same for all cases)
in the SUPPORT command, see section 5.27.1. Any beam in the SUPPORT command, see section 5.27.1. Any beam
members, springs or finite elements will be considered in the members, springs or finite elements will be considered in the
analysis. Other loading, inclined supports, and master/slave are all analysis. Other loading, inclined supports, and master/slave are all
considered. Any number of cases may have displacements entered. considered. Any number of cases may have displacements entered.
However, all cases will have zero displacements at the enforced However, all cases will have zero displacements at the enforced
directions if no displacement values are entered for that case. At directions if no displacement values are entered for that case. At
inclined supports the displacement specification is assumed to be in inclined supports the displacement specification is assumed to be in
the inclined direction. Displacements may not be specified at slave the inclined direction. Displacements may not be specified at slave
directions. directions.

If some cases are to have spring supports and others enforced If some cases are to have spring supports and others enforced
displacements at the same joint directions, then two PERFORM displacements at the same joint directions, then two PERFORM
ANALYSES must be used with the CHANGE command in between. ANALYSES must be used with the CHANGE command in between.
The first perform analysis could have the SUPPORTS with springs, The first perform analysis could have the SUPPORTS with springs,
no enforced directions, and with the load cases without no enforced directions, and with the load cases without
displacements. The second perform analysis would then have displacements. The second perform analysis would then have
SUPPORTS without springs but with enforced directions and the SUPPORTS without springs but with enforced directions and the
cases with displacements. cases with displacements.

Displacement Mode Restrictions Displacement Mode Restrictions

The Support Displacement command may be entered only once per The Support Displacement command may be entered only once per
case. Spring directions and Enforced directions may not both be case. Spring directions and Enforced directions may not both be
specified at the same joint direction in the same Perform Analysis specified at the same joint direction in the same Perform Analysis
step. step.

LOAD MODE LOAD MODE


With this mode, the support joint displacement is modeled as a With this mode, the support joint displacement is modeled as a
load. Only beam members (not springs or finite elements) are load. Only beam members (not springs or finite elements) are
considered in computing the joint load distribution necessary to considered in computing the joint load distribution necessary to
cause the displacement. Other loading, inclined supports, and cause the displacement. Other loading, inclined supports, and
master/slave are also not considered. These unconsidered factors, master/slave are also not considered. These unconsidered factors,
if entered, will result in displacements other than those entered if entered, will result in displacements other than those entered
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-194 Section 5 5-194 Section 5

(results are superimposed). Only those cases with displacements (results are superimposed). Only those cases with displacements
entered will be affected. entered will be affected.

Load Mode Restrictions Load Mode Restrictions

Support Displacements can be applied in up to 4 load cases only. Support Displacements can be applied in up to 4 load cases only.
The Support Displacement command may be entered only once per The Support Displacement command may be entered only once per
case. case.
Finite elements should not be entered. Finite elements should not be entered.
Inclined supports must not be entered. Inclined supports must not be entered.
Spring supports are not considered in calculating the load so their Spring supports are not considered in calculating the load so their
use will lead to displacements different from the input values. use will lead to displacements different from the input values.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

UNIT . . . UNIT . . .
SUPPORT DISPL SUPPORT DISPL
5 TO 11 13 FY –0.25 5 TO 11 13 FY –0.25
19 21 to 25 MX 15.0 19 21 to 25 MX 15.0

In this example, the joints of the first support list will be displaced In this example, the joints of the first support list will be displaced
by 0.25 units in the negative global Y direction. The joints of the by 0.25 units in the negative global Y direction. The joints of the
second support list will be rotated by 15 degrees about the global second support list will be rotated by 15 degrees about the global
X-axis. X-axis.
Section 5 5-195 Section 5 5-195

5.32.9 Selfweight Load Specification 5.32.9 Selfweight Load Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command may be used to calculate and apply the This command may be used to calculate and apply the
SELFWEIGHT of the structure for analysis. SELFWEIGHT of the structure for analysis.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

;  ; 
6(/):(,*+7 <  I 6(/):(,*+7 <  I
=  = 

This command is used if the self-weight of the structure is to be This command is used if the self-weight of the structure is to be
considered. The self-weight of every active member is calculated considered. The self-weight of every active member is calculated
and applied as a uniformly distributed member load. and applied as a uniformly distributed member load.

X, Y, & Z represent the global direction in which the selfweight X, Y, & Z represent the global direction in which the selfweight
acts. acts.

f 1 = The factor to be used to multiply the selfweight. f 1 = The factor to be used to multiply the selfweight.

This command may also be used without any direction and factor This command may also be used without any direction and factor
specification. Thus, if specified as "SELFWEIGHT", loads will be specification. Thus, if specified as "SELFWEIGHT", loads will be
applied in the negative global Y direction with a factor of unity. applied in the negative global Y direction with a factor of unity.

1RWHV 1RWHV

Density must be provided for calculation of the self weight. Density must be provided for calculation of the self weight.

The selfweight of finite elements is converted to joint loads at the The selfweight of finite elements is converted to joint loads at the
connected nodes and is not used as an element pressure load. connected nodes and is not used as an element pressure load.

The selfweight of a plate is placed at the joints, regardless of plate The selfweight of a plate is placed at the joints, regardless of plate
releases. releases.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-196 Section 5 5-196 Section 5

5.32.10 Dynamic Loading Specification 5.32.10 Dynamic Loading Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

The command specification needed to perform response spectrum The command specification needed to perform response spectrum
analysis and time-history analysis is explained in the following analysis and time-history analysis is explained in the following
sections. sections.
Section 5 5-197 Section 5 5-197

5.32.10.1 Response Spectrum Specification 5.32.10.1 Response Spectrum Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command may be used to specify and apply the RESPONSE This command may be used to specify and apply the RESPONSE
SPECTRUM loading for dynamic analysis. SPECTRUM loading for dynamic analysis.

*HQHUDO )RUPDW *HQHUDO )RUPDW

SRSS  * X f1  ACC   DAMP f5   LIN  SRSS  * X f1  ACC   DAMP f5   LIN 


SPECTRUM ABS  Y f2    (SCALE f4)  CDAMP    (MIS) SPECTRUM ABS  Y f2    (SCALE f4)  CDAMP    (MIS)
CQC  Z f3   DIS   MDAMP   LOG  CQC  Z f3   DIS   MDAMP   LOG 
ASCE  ASCE 
TEN  TEN 
Starting on the next line, enter Spectra in one of these two input forms: Starting on the next line, enter Spectra in one of these two input forms:
 P1 V1; P2 V2; P3 V3;……  (with DAMP, CDAMP, or MDAMP)  P1 V1; P2 V2; P3 V3;……  (with DAMP, CDAMP, or MDAMP)
 or   or 
 FILE fn  (with CDAMP or MDAMP)  FILE fn  (with CDAMP or MDAMP)

SRSS , ABS , CQC, ASCE4-98 & TEN Percent are methods of SRSS , ABS , CQC, ASCE4-98 & TEN Percent are methods of
combining the responses from each mode into a total response. combining the responses from each mode into a total response.
The CQC&ASCE4 methods require damping, ABS, SRSS, The CQC&ASCE4 methods require damping, ABS, SRSS,
and TEN do not use damping unless Spectra-Period curves are and TEN do not use damping unless Spectra-Period curves are
made a function of damping (see File option below). CQC, made a function of damping (see File option below). CQC,
ASCE and TEN include the effect of response magnification ASCE and TEN include the effect of response magnification
due to closely spaced modal frequencies. ASCE includes more due to closely spaced modal frequencies. ASCE includes more
algebraic summation of higher modes. ASCE & CQC are more algebraic summation of higher modes. ASCE & CQC are more
sophisticated and realistic methods and are recommended. sophisticated and realistic methods and are recommended.
X Y Z f1, f2, f3 are the factors for the input spectrum to be X Y Z f1, f2, f3 are the factors for the input spectrum to be
applied in X, Y, & Z directions. Any one or all directions can applied in X, Y, & Z directions. Any one or all directions can
be input. Directions not provided will default to zero. be input. Directions not provided will default to zero.
ACC or DIS indicates whether Acceleration or Displacement ACC or DIS indicates whether Acceleration or Displacement
spectra will be entered. spectra will be entered.
SCALE f4 = Scale factor by which the spectra data will be SCALE f4 = Scale factor by which the spectra data will be
multiplied. Usually to factor g’s to length/sec 2 units. multiplied. Usually to factor g’s to length/sec 2 units.

DAMP , CDAMP , MDAMP. Select source of damping input. DAMP , CDAMP , MDAMP. Select source of damping input.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-198 Section 5 5-198 Section 5

f5 = Damping ratio for all modes. Default value is 0.05 (5% f5 = Damping ratio for all modes. Default value is 0.05 (5%
damping if 0 or blank entered). damping if 0 or blank entered).
DAMP indicates to use the f5 value for all modes. DAMP indicates to use the f5 value for all modes.
CDAMP indicates to use Composite modal damping if entered, CDAMP indicates to use Composite modal damping if entered,
otherwise same as MDAMP. otherwise same as MDAMP.
MDAMP indicates to use the damping entered or computed MDAMP indicates to use the damping entered or computed
with the DEFINE DAMP command if entered, otherwise with the DEFINE DAMP command if entered, otherwise
default value of 0.05 will be used. default value of 0.05 will be used.

LIN or LOG. Select linear or logarithmic interpolation of the LIN or LOG. Select linear or logarithmic interpolation of the
input Spectra versus Period curves for determining the spectra input Spectra versus Period curves for determining the spectra
value for a mode given its period. LIN is default. Since value for a mode given its period. LIN is default. Since
Spectra versus Period curves are often linear only on Log-Log Spectra versus Period curves are often linear only on Log-Log
scales, the logarithmic interpolation is recommended in such scales, the logarithmic interpolation is recommended in such
cases; especially if only a few points are entered in the spectra cases; especially if only a few points are entered in the spectra
curve. curve.
For LIN or LOG , when FILE fn is entered, the For LIN or LOG , when FILE fn is entered, the
interpolation along the damping axis will be linear. The last interpolation along the damping axis will be linear. The last
LIN-LOG parameter entered on all of the spectrum cases will LIN-LOG parameter entered on all of the spectrum cases will
be used for all spectrum cases. be used for all spectrum cases.

MIS = Use Missing Mass method. The static effect of the masses MIS = Use Missing Mass method. The static effect of the masses
not represented in the modes is included. The spectra not represented in the modes is included. The spectra
acceleration at 33Hz is used. The results of this calculation are acceleration at 33Hz is used. The results of this calculation are
SRSSed with the modal combination results. If the MIS SRSSed with the modal combination results. If the MIS
parameter is entered on any spectrum case it will be used for parameter is entered on any spectrum case it will be used for
all spectrum cases. all spectrum cases.

SPECTRA data. Choose one of these two input forms. SPECTRA data. Choose one of these two input forms.
1. P1, V1; P2, V2; …. ; Pn, Vn. Data is part of input, 1. P1, V1; P2, V2; …. ; Pn, Vn. Data is part of input,
immediately following SPECTRUM command. Period – Value immediately following SPECTRUM command. Period – Value
pairs (separated by semi colons) are entered to describe the pairs (separated by semi colons) are entered to describe the
Spectrum curve. Period is in seconds and the corresponding Spectrum curve. Period is in seconds and the corresponding
Value is either acceleration (current length unit/sec2 ) or Value is either acceleration (current length unit/sec2 ) or
displacement (current length unit) depending on the ACC or displacement (current length unit) depending on the ACC or
DIS chosen. Continue the curve data onto as many lines as DIS chosen. Continue the curve data onto as many lines as
Section 5 5-199 Section 5 5-199
needed (up to 99 spectrum pairs). Spectrum pairs must be needed (up to 99 spectrum pairs). Spectrum pairs must be
in ascending order of period. Note, if data is in g in ascending order of period. Note, if data is in g
acceleration units, then set SCALE to a conversion factor to the acceleration units, then set SCALE to a conversion factor to the
current length unit (9.81, 386.4, etc.). Also note, do not end current length unit (9.81, 386.4, etc.). Also note, do not end
these lines with a hyphen (-). Each SPECTRUM command these lines with a hyphen (-). Each SPECTRUM command
must be followed by Spectra data if this input form is used. must be followed by Spectra data if this input form is used.

2. FILE fn data is in a separate file. 2. FILE fn data is in a separate file.

Spectra Curves on FILE fn: When the File fn command has been Spectra Curves on FILE fn: When the File fn command has been
provided, then you must have the spectra curve data on a file provided, then you must have the spectra curve data on a file
named “fn” prior to starting the analysis. The format of the named “fn” prior to starting the analysis. The format of the
FILE spectra data allows spectra as a function of damping as FILE spectra data allows spectra as a function of damping as
well as period. If the FILE fn command is entered, it must be well as period. If the FILE fn command is entered, it must be
with the first spectrum case and will be used for all spectrum with the first spectrum case and will be used for all spectrum
cases. No FILE fn command needs to be entered with the cases. No FILE fn command needs to be entered with the
remaining spectrum cases. The format is shown below. fn may remaining spectrum cases. The format is shown below. fn may
not be more than 16 characters in length. not be more than 16 characters in length.

Modal Combination Description Modal Combination Description

SRSS Square Root of Summation of Squares method. SRSS Square Root of Summation of Squares method.
CQC Complete Quadratic Combination method. Default. CQC Complete Quadratic Combination method. Default.
ASCE ASCE4-98 method. ASCE ASCE4-98 method.
ABS Absolute sum. (Very conservative worst case) ABS Absolute sum. (Very conservative worst case)
TEN Ten Percent Method of combining closely spaced modes. TEN Ten Percent Method of combining closely spaced modes.
NRC Reg. Guide 1.92 (1976). NRC Reg. Guide 1.92 (1976).

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

This command should appear as part of a loading specification. If it This command should appear as part of a loading specification. If it
See Sections is the first occurrence, it should be accompanied by the load data to See Sections is the first occurrence, it should be accompanied by the load data to
1.18.3, 5.30, be used for frequency and mode shape calculations. Additional 1.18.3, 5.30, be used for frequency and mode shape calculations. Additional
and 5.34 occurrences need no additional information. Maximum response and 5.34 occurrences need no additional information. Maximum response
spectrum load cases allowed in one run is 4. spectrum load cases allowed in one run is 4.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-200 Section 5 5-200 Section 5

Results of frequency and mode shape calculations may vary Results of frequency and mode shape calculations may vary
significantly depending upon the mass modeling. All masses that significantly depending upon the mass modeling. All masses that
are capable of moving should be modeled as loads, applied in all are capable of moving should be modeled as loads, applied in all
possible directions of movement. For dynamic mass modeling, see possible directions of movement. For dynamic mass modeling, see
sections 5.32 and 1.18.3. An illustration of mass modeling is sections 5.32 and 1.18.3. An illustration of mass modeling is
available, with explanatory comments, in Example Problem No.11. available, with explanatory comments, in Example Problem No.11.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

/2$'  63(&7580 ,1 ;',5(&7,21 /2$'  63(&7580 ,1 ;',5(&7,21


6(/):(,*+7 ;  6(/):(,*+7 ; 
6(/):(,*+7 <  6(/):(,*+7 < 
6(/):(,*+7 =  6(/):(,*+7 = 
-2,17 /2$' -2,17 /2$'
 );   ); 
 )<   )< 
 )=   )= 
63(&7580 6566 ;  $&& 6&$/(  63(&7580 6566 ;  $&& 6&$/( 
                           
                           

Multiple Response Spectra Multiple Response Spectra

If there is more than one response spectrum defined in the input If there is more than one response spectrum defined in the input
file, the load data should accompany the first set of spectrum data file, the load data should accompany the first set of spectrum data
only. In the subsequent load cases, only the spectra should be only. In the subsequent load cases, only the spectra should be
defined. See example below. defined. See example below.
Section 5 5-201 Section 5 5-201

/2$'  63(&7580 ,1 ;',5(&7,21 /2$'  63(&7580 ,1 ;',5(&7,21


6(/):(,*+7 ;  6(/):(,*+7 ; 
6(/):(,*+7 <  6(/):(,*+7 < 
6(/):(,*+7 =  6(/):(,*+7 = 
-2,17 /2$' -2,17 /2$'
 );   ); 
 )<   )< 
 )=   )= 
63(&7580 6566 ;  $&& 6&$/(  63(&7580 6566 ;  $&& 6&$/( 
                           
                           

/2$'  63(&7580 ,1 <',5(&7,21 /2$'  63(&7580 ,1 <',5(&7,21
63(&7580 6566 <  $&& 6&$/(  63(&7580 6566 <  $&& 6&$/( 
                           
                           

FILE FORMAT FOR SPECTRA DATA FILE FORMAT FOR SPECTRA DATA
The format of the FILE spectra data allows spectra as a function of damping as The format of the FILE spectra data allows spectra as a function of damping as
well as period. The format is: well as period. The format is:
Data set 1 MDAMPCV NPOINTCV (no of values = 2) Data set 1 MDAMPCV NPOINTCV (no of values = 2)
Data set 2 Damping Values in ascending order (no of values = Mdampcv) Data set 2 Damping Values in ascending order (no of values = Mdampcv)
Data set 3a Periods (no of values = Npointcv) Data set 3a Periods (no of values = Npointcv)
3b Spectra (no of values = Npointcv) 3b Spectra (no of values = Npointcv)
Repeat Data set 3 Mdampcv times (3a,3b , 3a,3b , 3a,3b , etc.) (i.e. for Repeat Data set 3 Mdampcv times (3a,3b , 3a,3b , 3a,3b , etc.) (i.e. for
each damping value). each damping value).
Data sets 2, 3a and 3b must have exactly Npointcv values each. Blanks or Data sets 2, 3a and 3b must have exactly Npointcv values each. Blanks or
commas separate the values. The data may extend to several lines. commas separate the values. The data may extend to several lines.
Do not end lines with a hyphen (-). No comment lines (*) or semi- Do not end lines with a hyphen (-). No comment lines (*) or semi-
colons. Multiple values may be entered per line. colons. Multiple values may be entered per line.
MDAMPCV = Number of damping values for which there will be MDAMPCV = Number of damping values for which there will be
separate Spectra vs. Period curves. separate Spectra vs. Period curves.
NPOINTCV = Number of points in each Spectra vs. Period curve. If NPOINTCV = Number of points in each Spectra vs. Period curve. If
NPOINTCV is negative, then the period-spectra values are entered NPOINTCV is negative, then the period-spectra values are entered
as pairs. as pairs.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-202 Section 5 5-202 Section 5

5.32.10.2 Application of Time Varying Load for 5.32.10.2 Application of Time Varying Load for
Response History Analysis Response History Analysis
3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This set of commands may be used to model Time History loading on This set of commands may be used to model Time History loading on
the structure for Response Time History analysis. Note that both the structure for Response Time History analysis. Note that both
nodal time histories and ground motion time histories may be nodal time histories and ground motion time histories may be
provided. provided.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

7,0( /2$' 7,0( /2$'


 );   ); 
 )<   )< 
See Sections MRLQW OLVW  )=  ,t , a I 1 See Sections MRLQW OLVW  )=  ,t , a I 1
1.18.3, and  0;  1.18.3, and  0; 
 0<   0< 
5.31.4
 0=  5.31.4
 0= 

;  ; 
*5281' 027,21 <  ,t , a I 1 *5281' 027,21 <  ,t , a I 1
=  = 

Where I W = sequential position in the input data of type number of Where I W = sequential position in the input data of type number of
time varying load (see Section 5.31.4). To refer to first type time varying load (see Section 5.31.4). To refer to first type
number entered, use a 1 here regardless of actual type number entered, use a 1 here regardless of actual type
number entered. number entered.
I D = arrival time number (see Section 5.31.4) (integer). This I D = arrival time number (see Section 5.31.4) (integer). This
is the sequential number of the arrival time in the list is the sequential number of the arrival time in the list
explained in section 5.31.4. Thus the arrival time number of explained in section 5.31.4. Thus the arrival time number of
a 3 is 3 and of a n is n. a 3 is 3 and of a n is n.

f  = The Force or Acceleration Amplitude at this joint and f  = The Force or Acceleration Amplitude at this joint and
direction will be multiplied by this factor (default = 1.0). [ For direction will be multiplied by this factor (default = 1.0). [ For
accelerations, if the amplitude-time curve was in g’s, please use the accelerations, if the amplitude-time curve was in g’s, please use the
Scale Factor in the Define Time History command to convert g’s to the Scale Factor in the Define Time History command to convert g’s to the
acceleration units used in that command. This is recommended due to acceleration units used in that command. This is recommended due to
possible unit changes between that command and this command.] possible unit changes between that command and this command.]
Section 5 5-203 Section 5 5-203
Multiple loads at a joint-direction pair for a particular ( , t , a ) pair Multiple loads at a joint-direction pair for a particular ( , t , a ) pair
will be summed. However there can only be one ( , t , a ) pair associated will be summed. However there can only be one ( , t , a ) pair associated
with a particular joint-direction pair, the first such entry will be used. with a particular joint-direction pair, the first such entry will be used.
Loads at slave joint directions will be moved to the master without moment Loads at slave joint directions will be moved to the master without moment
generation. generation.
Note that either TIME LOAD or GROUND MOTION or both may be specified under Note that either TIME LOAD or GROUND MOTION or both may be specified under
one load case. More than one load case for time history analysis is not permitted. one load case. More than one load case for time history analysis is not permitted.
For TIME LOAD data, multiple direction specifiers can be in one entry as follows For TIME LOAD data, multiple direction specifiers can be in one entry as follows
(the direction specifiers must be on one line and missing values are assumed to be 1): (the direction specifiers must be on one line and missing values are assumed to be 1):

7,0( /2$' 7,0( /2$'


  );  )=    0;     );  )=    0;  
  ); )< )=   ); )< )=

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

/2$'  /2$' 
6(/):(,*+7 ;  6(/):(,*+7 ; 
6(/):(,*+7 <  6(/):(,*+7 < 
6(/):(,*+7 =  6(/):(,*+7 = 
0(0%(5 /2$'6 0(0%(5 /2$'6
 &21 *;    &21 *;  
 &21 *<    &21 *<  
 &21 *=    &21 *=  
7,0( /2$' 7,0( /2$'
  );     );  
  );     );  
*5281' 027,21 ;   *5281' 027,21 ;  

In the above example, the permanent masses in the structure are provided in the In the above example, the permanent masses in the structure are provided in the
form of "selfweight" and "member loads" (see sections 5.32 and 1.18.3) for form of "selfweight" and "member loads" (see sections 5.32 and 1.18.3) for
obtaining the mode shapes and frequencies. The rest of the data is the input for obtaining the mode shapes and frequencies. The rest of the data is the input for
application of the time varying loads on the structure. Forcing function type 1 application of the time varying loads on the structure. Forcing function type 1
is applied at joints 2 and 3 starting at arrival time number 3. (Arrival time is applied at joints 2 and 3 starting at arrival time number 3. (Arrival time
number 3 is 1.8 seconds in example shown in section 5.31.4). Similarly, forcing number 3 is 1.8 seconds in example shown in section 5.31.4). Similarly, forcing
function type 1 is applied at joints 5 and 7 starting at arrival time number 6 (4.4 function type 1 is applied at joints 5 and 7 starting at arrival time number 6 (4.4
seconds). A ground motion (type 2) acts on the structure in the x-direction seconds). A ground motion (type 2) acts on the structure in the x-direction
starting at arrival time number 1 (0.0 seconds). starting at arrival time number 1 (0.0 seconds).
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-204 Section 5 5-204 Section 5

5.32.11 Repeat Load Specification 5.32.11 Repeat Load Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command is used to create a primary load case using This command is used to create a primary load case using
combinations of previously defined primary load cases. combinations of previously defined primary load cases.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

5(3($7 /2$' 5(3($7 /2$'

L   I   L   I   L Q  I Q L   I   L   I   L Q  I Q

where, where,
i 1 , i 2 ... i n = primary load case numbers i 1 , i 2 ... i n = primary load case numbers
f 1 , f 2 ... f n = corresponding factors f 1 , f 2 ... f n = corresponding factors

This command can be continued to additional lines by ending all This command can be continued to additional lines by ending all
but last with a hyphen. Limit of 100 prior cases may be factored. but last with a hyphen. Limit of 100 prior cases may be factored.
Prior cases to be factored may also contain the REPEAT LOAD Prior cases to be factored may also contain the REPEAT LOAD
command. command.

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

This command may be used to create a primary load case using This command may be used to create a primary load case using
combinations of previously defined primary load case(s). The combinations of previously defined primary load case(s). The
REPEAT load differs from the load COMBINATION command REPEAT load differs from the load COMBINATION command
(Section 5.35) in two ways: (Section 5.35) in two ways:

1) A REPEAT LOAD is treated as a new primary load. Therefore, 1) A REPEAT LOAD is treated as a new primary load. Therefore,
a P-Delta analysis will reflect correct secondary effects. a P-Delta analysis will reflect correct secondary effects.
(LOAD COMBINATIONS, on the other hand, algebraically (LOAD COMBINATIONS, on the other hand, algebraically
combine the effects of previously defined primary loadings combine the effects of previously defined primary loadings
evaluated independently). evaluated independently).

2) In addition to previously defined primary loads, the user can 2) In addition to previously defined primary loads, the user can
also add new loading conditions. also add new loading conditions.
Section 5 5-205 Section 5 5-205
3) The REPEAT LOAD option is available with load cases 3) The REPEAT LOAD option is available with load cases
with JOINT LOADS and MEMBER LOADS. It can also be with JOINT LOADS and MEMBER LOADS. It can also be
used on load cases with ELEMENT PRESSURE loads and used on load cases with ELEMENT PRESSURE loads and
FIXED END LOADS. RESPONSE SPECTRUM LOAD and FIXED END LOADS. RESPONSE SPECTRUM LOAD and
TIME HISTORY LOAD should not be used in REPEAT TIME HISTORY LOAD should not be used in REPEAT
LOAD. It is also not available for loads generated using the LOAD. It is also not available for loads generated using the
program’s load generation facilities such as UBC LOAD program’s load generation facilities such as UBC LOAD
Generation, WIND LOAD Generation, MOVING LOAD Generation, WIND LOAD Generation, MOVING LOAD
Generation, etc. Generation, etc.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

/2$'  '/  // /2$'  '/  //


6(/):(,*+7 <  6(/):(,*+7 < 
0(0%(5 /2$' 0(0%(5 /2$'
 72  81,)250 <   72  81,)250 < 
/2$'  '/  //  :/ /2$'  '/  //  :/
5(3($7 /2$' 5(3($7 /2$'
   

4) For a load case that is defined using the REPEAT LOAD 4) For a load case that is defined using the REPEAT LOAD
attribute, the constituent load cases themselves can not be attribute, the constituent load cases themselves can not be
REPEAT LOAD cases. In the example below, load case 4 is REPEAT LOAD cases. In the example below, load case 4 is
violating this rule. violating this rule.

/2$'  /2$' 
6(/):(,*+7 < ¤ 6(/):(,*+7 < ¤
/2$'  /2$' 
0(0%(5 /2$' 0(0%(5 /2$'
 81, *< ¤  81, *< ¤
/2$'  /2$' 
5(3($7 /2$' 5(3($7 /2$'
   
/2$'  /2$' 
5(3($7 /2$' 5(3($7 /2$'
       
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-206 Section 5 5-206 Section 5

5.32.12 Generation of Loads 5.32.12 Generation of Loads

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command is used to generate Moving Loads, UBC Seismic This command is used to generate Moving Loads, UBC Seismic
loads and Wind Loads using previously specified load definitions. loads and Wind Loads using previously specified load definitions.

Primary load cases may be generated using previously defined load Primary load cases may be generated using previously defined load
systems. The following sections describe generation of moving systems. The following sections describe generation of moving
loads, UBC seismic loads and Wind Loads. loads, UBC seismic loads and Wind Loads.

Generation of Moving Loads Generation of Moving Loads

See Pre-defined moving load system types may be used to generate the See Pre-defined moving load system types may be used to generate the
Sections desired number of primary load cases, each representing a Sections desired number of primary load cases, each representing a
1.17 and particular position of the moving load system on the structure. This 1.17 and particular position of the moving load system on the structure. This
5.31.1 procedure will simulate the movement of a vehicle in a specified 5.31.1 procedure will simulate the movement of a vehicle in a specified
direction on a specified plane on the structure. direction on a specified plane on the structure.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

/2$' *(1(5$7,21 Q $'' /2$' L /2$' *(1(5$7,21 Q $'' /2$' L

 ;,1& I   <5$1*(   ;,1& I   <5$1*( 


7<3( M [ \  ]   <,1& I    U 7<3( M [ \  ]   <,1& I    U
 =,1& I   =5$1*(   =,1& I   =5$1*( 

where, where,
n = total no. of primary load cases to be generated. n = total no. of primary load cases to be generated.
i = load case no. for the previously defined load case to be i = load case no. for the previously defined load case to be
added to the generated loads. added to the generated loads.
j = type no. of previously defined load system. j = type no. of previously defined load system.
x 1 , y1 , z 1 = x, y and z coordinates (global) of the initial position of x 1 , y1 , z 1 = x, y and z coordinates (global) of the initial position of
the reference load. the reference load.
f 1 , f 2 f 3 = x, y or z (global) increments of position of load system f 1 , f 2 f 3 = x, y or z (global) increments of position of load system
to be used for generation of subsequent load cases. to be used for generation of subsequent load cases.
r = (Optional) defines section of the structure along global r = (Optional) defines section of the structure along global
vertical direction to carry moving load. This r value is vertical direction to carry moving load. This r value is
Section 5 5-207 Section 5 5-207
added to the reference vertical coordinate (y or added to the reference vertical coordinate (y or
z 1 )in the positive global vertical direction. The moving z 1 )in the positive global vertical direction. The moving
load will be externally distributed among all members load will be externally distributed among all members
within the vertical range thus generated. r always within the vertical range thus generated. r always
should be a positive number. In other words, the should be a positive number. In other words, the
program always looks for members lying in the range program always looks for members lying in the range
Y 1 and Y 1 +ABS(r) or Z 1 and Z 1 +ABS(r). Y 1 and Y 1 +ABS(r) or Z 1 and Z 1 +ABS(r).

The ADD LOAD specification may be used to add a previously The ADD LOAD specification may be used to add a previously
defined load case to all the load cases generated by the LOAD defined load case to all the load cases generated by the LOAD
GENERATION command. In the example below, the GENERATION command. In the example below, the
SELFWEIGHT specified in load case 1 is added to all the SELFWEIGHT specified in load case 1 is added to all the
generated load cases. generated load cases.

Sequential load case numbers will be assigned to the series of Sequential load case numbers will be assigned to the series of
generated primary load cases. Numbering will begin at one plus the generated primary load cases. Numbering will begin at one plus the
immediate previous load case number. Allow for these when immediate previous load case number. Allow for these when
specifying load cases after load case generation. specifying load cases after load case generation.

1RWHV 1RWHV

Primary load cases can be generated from Moving Load systems for Primary load cases can be generated from Moving Load systems for
frame members only. This feature does not work on finite frame members only. This feature does not work on finite
elements. Please ensure that some of the loads will be on the elements. Please ensure that some of the loads will be on the
structure. structure.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

/2$'  '/ 21/< /2$'  '/ 21/<


6(/):(,*+7 6(/):(,*+7
/2$' *(1(5$7,21  $'' /2$'  /2$' *(1(5$7,21  $'' /2$' 
7<3(     ;,  7<3(     ;, 
7<3(     =,  7<3(     =, 
/2$'  /,9( /2$' 21 3$9(0(17 /2$'  /,9( /2$' 21 3$9(0(17
0(0% /2$' 0(0% /2$'
 72   72  81, *<   72   72  81, *< 
/2$' &20%,1$7,21      /2$' &20%,1$7,21     
3(5)250 $1$/<6,6 3(5)250 $1$/<6,6
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-208 Section 5 5-208 Section 5

Generation of UBC Seismic Load Generation of UBC Seismic Load

Built-in algorithms will automatically distribute the base shear Built-in algorithms will automatically distribute the base shear
See Sections See Sections
among appropriate levels and the roof per UBC specifications. The among appropriate levels and the roof per UBC specifications. The
1.17.2 and 1.17.2 and
following general format should be used to generate UBC load in a following general format should be used to generate UBC load in a
5.31.2 5.31.2
particular direction. particular direction.

*HQHUDO )RUPDW *HQHUDO )RUPDW

/2$' L /2$' L
;  ; 
8%& /2$' <  I 8%& /2$' <  I
=  = 
:KHUH 8%& PD\ EH UHSODFHG E\ ,%&    $,-  RU &2/ :KHUH 8%& PD\ EH UHSODFHG E\ ,%&    $,-  RU &2/
where i = load case number where i = load case number
f = factor to be used to multiply the UBC Load f = factor to be used to multiply the UBC Load
(default = 1.0) (default = 1.0)

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

'(),1( 8%& /2$' '(),1( 8%& /2$'


=21(  .  ,  76  =21(  .  ,  76 
6(/):(,*+7 6(/):(,*+7
-2,17 :(,*+7 -2,17 :(,*+7
 72  :(,*+7   72  :(,*+7 
 72  :(,*+7   72  :(,*+7 
/2$'  8%& ,1 ;',5(&7,21 /2$'  8%& ,1 ;',5(&7,21
8%& /2$' ; 8%& /2$' ;
-2,17 /2$' -2,17 /2$'
   )<     )< 
/2$'  8%& ,1 =',5(&7,21 /2$'  8%& ,1 =',5(&7,21
8%& /2$' = 8%& /2$' =
/2$'  '($' /2$' /2$'  '($' /2$'
6(/):(,*+7 6(/):(,*+7
/2$' &20%,1$7,21  /2$' &20%,1$7,21 
           
Section 5 5-209 Section 5 5-209
In the above example, notice that the first two load cases are In the above example, notice that the first two load cases are
UBC load cases. They are specified before any other load cases. UBC load cases. They are specified before any other load cases.

1RWHV 1RWHV

1) The UBC load cases should be provided as the first set of 1) The UBC load cases should be provided as the first set of
load cases. Non-UBC primary load case specified before a load cases. Non-UBC primary load case specified before a
UBC load case is not acceptable. Additional loads such as UBC load case is not acceptable. Additional loads such as
MEMBER LOADS and JOINT LOADS may be specified MEMBER LOADS and JOINT LOADS may be specified
along with the UBC load under the same load case. along with the UBC load under the same load case.

,QFRUUHFW XVDJH ,QFRUUHFW XVDJH

/2$'  /2$' 
6(/):(,*+7 <  6(/):(,*+7 < 
/2$'  /2$' 
-2,17 /2$' -2,17 /2$'
 );   ); 
/2$'  /2$' 
8%& /2$' ;  8%& /2$' ; 
-2,17 /2$' -2,17 /2$'
 )<   )< 
/2$'  /2$' 
8%& /2$' =  8%& /2$' = 
0(0%(5 /2$' 0(0%(5 /2$'
 81, *<   81, *< 
3(5)250 $1$/<6,6 3(5)250 $1$/<6,6

&RUUHFW XVDJH &RUUHFW XVDJH

/2$'  /2$' 
8%& /2$' ;  8%& /2$' ; 
-2,17 /2$' -2,17 /2$'
 )<   )< 
/2$'  /2$' 
8%& /2$' =  8%& /2$' = 
0(0%(5 /2$' 0(0%(5 /2$'
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-210 Section 5 5-210 Section 5

 81, *<   81, *< 


/2$'  /2$' 
6(/):(,*+7 <  6(/):(,*+7 < 
/2$'  /2$' 
-2,17 /2$' -2,17 /2$'
 );   ); 
3(5)250 $1$/<6,6 3(5)250 $1$/<6,6

2) All load cases involving UBC Load generation must be 2) All load cases involving UBC Load generation must be
provided before the ANALYSIS specification. In other provided before the ANALYSIS specification. In other
words, multiple analyses in which the UBC load generation words, multiple analyses in which the UBC load generation
is performed in the separate analyses is not permitted. is performed in the separate analyses is not permitted.

,QFRUUHFW XVDJH ,QFRUUHFW XVDJH

/2$'  /2$' 
8%& /2$' ;  8%& /2$' ; 
6(/):(,*+7 <  6(/):(,*+7 < 
-2,17 /2$' -2,17 /2$'
 )<   )< 
3'(/7$ $1$/<6,6 3'(/7$ $1$/<6,6
/2$'  /2$' 
8%& /2$' =  8%& /2$' = 
6(/):(,*+7 <  6(/):(,*+7 < 
-2,17 /2$' -2,17 /2$'
 )<   )< 
3'(/7$ $1$/<6,6 3'(/7$ $1$/<6,6

&RUUHFW XVDJH &RUUHFW XVDJH

/2$'  /2$' 
8%& /2$' ;  8%& /2$' ; 
6(/):(,*+7 <  6(/):(,*+7 < 
-2,17 /2$' -2,17 /2$'
 )<   )< 
/2$'  /2$' 
Section 5 5-211 Section 5 5-211

8%& /2$' = 8%& /2$' =


6(/):(,*+7 < ¤ 6(/):(,*+7 < ¤
-2,17 /2$' -2,17 /2$'
 )<   )< 
3'(/7$ $1$/<6,6 3'(/7$ $1$/<6,6

3) REPEAT LOAD specification cannot be used for load cases 3) REPEAT LOAD specification cannot be used for load cases
involving UBC load generation. For example, involving UBC load generation. For example,

,QFRUUHFW XVDJH ,QFRUUHFW XVDJH

/2$'  /2$' 
8%& /2$' ;  8%& /2$' ; 
/2$'  /2$' 
6(/):(,*+7 <  6(/):(,*+7 < 
/2$'  /2$' 
5(3($7 /2$' 5(3($7 /2$'
       
3'(/7$ $1$/<6,6 3'(/7$ $1$/<6,6

4) If UBC load generation is performed for the X and the Z 4) If UBC load generation is performed for the X and the Z
directions, the command for the X direction must precede the directions, the command for the X direction must precede the
command for the Z direction. command for the Z direction.

,QFRUUHFW XVDJH ,QFRUUHFW XVDJH

/2$'  /2$' 
8%& /2$' =  8%& /2$' = 
6(/):(,*+7 <  6(/):(,*+7 < 
/2$'  /2$' 
8%& /2$' ;  8%& /2$' ; 
6(/):(,*+7 <  6(/):(,*+7 < 
3'(/7$ $1$/<6,6 3'(/7$ $1$/<6,6
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-212 Section 5 5-212 Section 5

&RUUHFW XVDJH &RUUHFW XVDJH

/2$'  /2$' 
8%& /2$' ;  8%& /2$' ; 
6(/):(,*+7 <  6(/):(,*+7 < 
/2$'  /2$' 
8%& /2$' =  8%& /2$' = 
6(/):(,*+7 <  6(/):(,*+7 < 
3'(/7$ $1$/<6,6 3'(/7$ $1$/<6,6

Generation of IS:1893 Seismic Load Generation of IS:1893 Seismic Load

The following general format should be used to generate the IS The following general format should be used to generate the IS
See Sections See Sections
1893 load in a particular direction. 1893 load in a particular direction.
1.17.2 and 1.17.2 and
5.31.2.5 *HQHUDO )RUPDW
5.31.2.5 *HQHUDO )RUPDW

/2$' L /2$' L
;  ; 
 /2$' <  I  /2$' <  I
=  = 
where i = load case number where i = load case number
f = factor to be used to multiply the 1893 Load f = factor to be used to multiply the 1893 Load
(default = 1.0) (default = 1.0)
Section 5 5-213 Section 5 5-213
([DPSOH ([DPSOH

'(),1(  /2$' '(),1(  /2$'


=21(  .  ,  %  =21(  .  ,  % 
6(/):(,*+7 6(/):(,*+7
-2,17 :(,*+7 -2,17 :(,*+7
 72  :(,*+7   72  :(,*+7 
 72  :(,*+7   72  :(,*+7 
0(0%(5 :(,*+7 0(0%(5 :(,*+7
 72  81,   72  81, 
/2$'   /2$' ,1 ;',5(&7,21 /2$'   /2$' ,1 ;',5(&7,21
 /2$' ;  /2$' ;
-2,17 /2$' -2,17 /2$'
   )<     )< 
/2$'   /2$' ,1 =',5(&7,21 /2$'   /2$' ,1 =',5(&7,21
 /2$' =  /2$' =
/2$'  '($' /2$' /2$'  '($' /2$'
6(/):(,*+7 6(/):(,*+7
/2$' &20%,1$7,21  /2$' &20%,1$7,21 
           

In the above example, the first two load cases are the 1893 load In the above example, the first two load cases are the 1893 load
cases. They are specified before any other load case. cases. They are specified before any other load case.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-214 Section 5 5-214 Section 5

Generation of Wind Load Generation of Wind Load

The built-in wind load generation facility can be used to calculate The built-in wind load generation facility can be used to calculate
the wind loads based on the parameters defined in Section 5.31.3. the wind loads based on the parameters defined in Section 5.31.3.
The following general format should be used to perform the wind The following general format should be used to perform the wind
load generation. Note that areas bounded by beam members only load generation. Note that areas bounded by beam members only
(and ground), and exposed to the wind, are used to define loaded (and ground), and exposed to the wind, are used to define loaded
areas (plates and solids are ignored). The loads generated are areas (plates and solids are ignored). The loads generated are
applied only at the joints at vertices of the bounded areas. applied only at the joints at vertices of the bounded areas.

*HQHUDO )RUPDW *HQHUDO )RUPDW

/2$' L /2$' L
;   ;5 I I  ;   ;5 I I 
:,1' /2$'   I 7<3( M  <5 I I  :,1' /2$'   I 7<3( M  <5 I I 
=   =5 I I  =   =5 I I 
 /,67 PHPEOLVW   /,67 PHPEOLVW 
 $//   $// 

Where Where
i Load case number i Load case number
X, -X, Z or -Z Direction of wind in global axis system. X, -X, Z or -Z Direction of wind in global axis system.
See See
j Type number of previously defined systems j Type number of previously defined systems
Sections Sections
f The factor to be used to multiply the wind loads. f The factor to be used to multiply the wind loads.
1.17.3 and 1.17.3 and
Negative signs may be used to indicate opposite direction Negative signs may be used to indicate opposite direction
5.31.3 5.31.3
of resulting load (default=1.0) of resulting load (default=1.0)
f 1 and f 2 global coordinate values to specify X or Y or Z range f 1 and f 2 global coordinate values to specify X or Y or Z range
for member selection. for member selection.

X, -X, Z or –Z [A minus sign indicates that suction occurs on the X, -X, Z or –Z [A minus sign indicates that suction occurs on the
other side of the selected structure.] and the f factor. If all of the other side of the selected structure.] and the f factor. If all of the
members are selected and X (or Z) is used and the factor is positive, members are selected and X (or Z) is used and the factor is positive,
then the exposed surfaces facing in the –x (or –z) direction will be then the exposed surfaces facing in the –x (or –z) direction will be
loaded in the positive x (or z) direction (normal wind in positive loaded in the positive x (or z) direction (normal wind in positive
direction). If X and a negative factor is used, then the exposed direction). If X and a negative factor is used, then the exposed
surfaces facing in the +x direction will be loaded in the negative x surfaces facing in the +x direction will be loaded in the negative x
direction (normal wind in negative direction). [If –X is entered and a direction (normal wind in negative direction). [If –X is entered and a
negative factor, then the exposed surfaces facing in the -x direction negative factor, then the exposed surfaces facing in the -x direction
will be loaded in the negative x direction (suction). If –X is entered will be loaded in the negative x direction (suction). If –X is entered
Section 5 5-215 Section 5 5-215
and a positive factor, then the exposed surfaces facing in the +x and a positive factor, then the exposed surfaces facing in the +x
direction will be loaded in the positive x direction (suction).] direction will be loaded in the positive x direction (suction).]

A member list or a range of coordinate values (in global system) may A member list or a range of coordinate values (in global system) may
be used. All members which have both end coordinates within the be used. All members which have both end coordinates within the
range are assumed to be candidates for defining a surface which may range are assumed to be candidates for defining a surface which may
be loaded if the surface is exposed to the wind. The loading will be be loaded if the surface is exposed to the wind. The loading will be
in the form of joint loads (not member loads). 1, 2 or 3 ranges can in the form of joint loads (not member loads). 1, 2 or 3 ranges can
be entered to form a “ layer” , “ tube” or “ box” for selecting be entered to form a “ layer” , “ tube” or “ box” for selecting
members in the combined ranges. Use ranges to speed up the members in the combined ranges. Use ranges to speed up the
calculations on larger models. calculations on larger models.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

'(),1( :,1' /2$' '(),1( :,1' /2$'


7<3(  7<3( 
,17(16,7<   +(,*+7   ,17(16,7<   +(,*+7  
(;3  -2,  72  %<   72  %<    (;3  -2,  72  %<   72  %<   
7<3(  7<3( 
,17   +(,*+7   ,17   +(,*+7  
(;3  <5   (;3  <5  
/2$'  /2$' 
6(/) <  6(/) < 
/2$'  /2$' 
:,1' /2$' =  7<3(  =5   :,1' /2$' =  7<3(  =5  
/2$'  /2$' 
:,1' /2$' ; 7<3(  ;5   :,1' /2$' ; 7<3(  ;5  

1RWHV 1RWHV

Please do not use a SET Z UP command in a model with wind load. Please do not use a SET Z UP command in a model with wind load.

A closed surface is generated by the program based on the members in the A closed surface is generated by the program based on the members in the
ranges above and their end joints. The area within this closed surface is ranges above and their end joints. The area within this closed surface is
determined and the share of this area (influence area) for each node in the list is determined and the share of this area (influence area) for each node in the list is
then calculated. The individual bounded areas must be planar surf aces, to a then calculated. The individual bounded areas must be planar surf aces, to a
close tolerance, or they will not be loaded. close tolerance, or they will not be loaded.

Hence, one should make sure that the members/joints that are exposed to the Hence, one should make sure that the members/joints that are exposed to the
wind make up a closed surface (ground may form an edge of the closed surface). wind make up a closed surface (ground may form an edge of the closed surface).
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-216 Section 5 5-216 Section 5
Without a proper closed surface, the area calculated for the region may be Without a proper closed surface, the area calculated for the region may be
indeterminate and the joint force values may be erroneous. Consequently, the indeterminate and the joint force values may be erroneous. Consequently, the
number of exposed joints should be at least 3. number of exposed joints should be at least 3.
Section 5 5-217 Section 5 5-217

5.33 Rayleigh Frequency Calculation 5.33 Rayleigh Frequency Calculation

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command may be used to calculate the Rayleigh method This command may be used to calculate the Rayleigh method
approximate frequency of the structure for vibration corresponding approximate frequency of the structure for vibration corresponding
to the general direction of deflection generated by the load case to the general direction of deflection generated by the load case
that precedes this command. Thus, this command typically follows that precedes this command. Thus, this command typically follows
a load case. a load case.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

&$/&8/$7( 5$</(,*+ )5(48(1&< &$/&8/$7( 5$</(,*+ )5(48(1&<

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

This command is specified after all other load specifications of any This command is specified after all other load specifications of any
primary load case for which the Rayleigh frequency is calculated. primary load case for which the Rayleigh frequency is calculated.
This Rayleigh frequency calculation is based on the Rayleigh This Rayleigh frequency calculation is based on the Rayleigh
See Section See Section
iteration method using 1 iteration. If a more accurate, full-scale iteration method using 1 iteration. If a more accurate, full-scale
1.18.3 1.18.3
eigensolution is required, the MODAL CALCULATION command eigensolution is required, the MODAL CALCULATION command
(see next section) may be used. Note that a full eigensolution is (see next section) may be used. Note that a full eigensolution is
automatically performed if a RESPONSE SPECTRUM or TIME automatically performed if a RESPONSE SPECTRUM or TIME
HISTORY is specified in any load case. HISTORY is specified in any load case.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

/2$',1*  '($' $1' /,9( /2$' /2$',1*  '($' $1' /,9( /2$'
$5($ /2$' $5($ /2$'
 72  $/2$'   72  $/2$' 
&$/&8/$7( 5$</(,*+ )5(4 &$/&8/$7( 5$</(,*+ )5(4
/2$',1*  :,1' /2$' /2$',1*  :,1' /2$'

In this example, the Rayleigh frequency for load case 1 will be In this example, the Rayleigh frequency for load case 1 will be
calculated. The output will produce the value of the frequency in calculated. The output will produce the value of the frequency in
cycles per second (cps), the maximum deflection along with the cycles per second (cps), the maximum deflection along with the
global direction and the joint number where it occurs. global direction and the joint number where it occurs.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-218 Section 5 5-218 Section 5

1RWHV 1RWHV

This command is based on the Rayleigh method of iteration using 1 This command is based on the Rayleigh method of iteration using 1
iteration. The frequency calculated estimates the frequency as if the iteration. The frequency calculated estimates the frequency as if the
structure were constrained to vibrate in the static deflected shape structure were constrained to vibrate in the static deflected shape
generated by the loads in the load case. generated by the loads in the load case.
Section 5 5-219 Section 5 5-219

5.34 Modal Calculation Command 5.34 Modal Calculation Command

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command may be used to obtain a full scale eigensolution to This command may be used to obtain a full scale eigensolution to
calculate relevant frequencies and mode shapes. It should not be calculate relevant frequencies and mode shapes. It should not be
entered if this case or any other case is a TIME LOAD or entered if this case or any other case is a TIME LOAD or
RESPONSE SPECTRUM case. RESPONSE SPECTRUM case.

*HQHUDO )RUPDW *HQHUDO )RUPDW

02'$/ &$/&8/$7,21 5(48(67(' 02'$/ &$/&8/$7,21 5(48(67('

This command is typically used in a load case after all loads are This command is typically used in a load case after all loads are
specified. The loads will be treated as weights and weight moment specified. The loads will be treated as weights and weight moment
of inertias for eigensolutions (see sections 1.18.3 and 5.32). The of inertias for eigensolutions (see sections 1.18.3 and 5.32). The
user is advised to specify the loads keeping this in mind. user is advised to specify the loads keeping this in mind.

This case will be independently solved statically and dynamically. This case will be independently solved statically and dynamically.
Static results using the loads will include joint displacements, Static results using the loads will include joint displacements,
member forces, support reactions, and other outputs computed from member forces, support reactions, and other outputs computed from
a normal static analysis without any dynamic effects included. a normal static analysis without any dynamic effects included.

In addition, the Dynamic results (using loads as masses) will In addition, the Dynamic results (using loads as masses) will
See Sections See Sections
include Mode Shapes and Frequencies. include Mode Shapes and Frequencies.
5.31, 5.32+ 5.31, 5.32+
1.18.3 1RWHV
1.18.3 1RWHV

The MODAL CALCULATION command can be included in any of The MODAL CALCULATION command can be included in any of
the primary load cases, but only in one of them. the primary load cases, but only in one of them.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-220 Section 5 5-220 Section 5

5.35 Load Combination Specification 5.35 Load Combination Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command may be used to combine the results of the analysis. This command may be used to combine the results of the analysis.
The combination may be algebraic, SRSS, a combination of both, The combination may be algebraic, SRSS, a combination of both,
or ABSolute. or ABSolute.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

/2$' &20%,1$7,21  6566  L D /2$' &20%,1$7,21  6566  L D


$%6  $%6 

L   I   L   I   I VUVV L   I   L   I   I VUVV

i = Load combination number ( any integer smaller than i = Load combination number ( any integer smaller than
100000 that is not the same as any previously defined 100000 that is not the same as any previously defined
primary load case number.) primary load case number.)
a1 = Any title for the load combination. a1 = Any title for the load combination.
i 1 , i 2 ... represents the load case numbers which are to be i 1 , i 2 ... represents the load case numbers which are to be
combined. combined.
f 1 , f 2 ... represents corresponding factors to be applied to loadings. f 1 , f 2 ... represents corresponding factors to be applied to loadings.
f SRSS = optional factor to be applied as a multiplying factor on the f SRSS = optional factor to be applied as a multiplying factor on the
combined result of the SRSS load combination (see combined result of the SRSS load combination (see
examples below). examples below).

If the last character on a line is a hyphen, then the command is If the last character on a line is a hyphen, then the command is
continued on the next line. A limit of 100 prior cases may be continued on the next line. A limit of 100 prior cases may be
factored in one command. factored in one command.

1RWHV 1RWHV

1) In the LOAD COMBINATION SRSS option, if the minus 1) In the LOAD COMBINATION SRSS option, if the minus
sign precedes any load case no., then that load case will be sign precedes any load case no., then that load case will be
combined algebraically with the SRSS combination of the combined algebraically with the SRSS combination of the
rest. rest.
2) The total number of primary and combination load cases 2) The total number of primary and combination load cases
combined cannot exceed 1000. combined cannot exceed 1000.
3) A zero factor terminates the list. 3) A zero factor terminates the list.
Section 5 5-221 Section 5 5-221
'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

LOAD COMBINATION LOAD COMBINATION


Results from analyses will be combined algebraically. Results from analyses will be combined algebraically.

/2$' &20%,1$7,21  '///:/ /2$' &20%,1$7,21  '///:/


           

LOAD COMBINATION ABS LOAD COMBINATION ABS


Absolute value of results from the analyses will be combined. Absolute value of results from the analyses will be combined.

/2$' &20%,1$7,21 $%6  '///:/ /2$' &20%,1$7,21 $%6  '///:/


           

LOAD COMBINATION SRSS LOAD COMBINATION SRSS


Results from analyses may be combined both algebraically and Results from analyses may be combined both algebraically and
using the SRSS (Square Root of Summation of Squares) method. using the SRSS (Square Root of Summation of Squares) method.
The combination scheme may be mixed if required. For example, in The combination scheme may be mixed if required. For example, in
the same load combination case, results from load cases may be the same load combination case, results from load cases may be
combined in the SRSS manner and then combined algebraically combined in the SRSS manner and then combined algebraically
with other load cases. Note that the case factor is not squared. with other load cases. Note that the case factor is not squared.

If some of the factors are negative, then the sum of the factored If some of the factors are negative, then the sum of the factored
squares may become negative. If negative, the SQRT will be of the squares may become negative. If negative, the SQRT will be of the
absolute value and the result of the SQRT will be set negative. absolute value and the result of the SQRT will be set negative.

Refer to the following examples for illustration - Refer to the following examples for illustration -

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

Several combination examples are provided to illustrate the Several combination examples are provided to illustrate the
possible combination schemes - possible combination schemes -

Simple SRSS Combination Simple SRSS Combination

/2$' &20%,1$7,21 6566  '/6(,60,& /2$' &20%,1$7,21 6566  '/6(,60,&


           
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-222 Section 5 5-222 Section 5

This (LOAD COMBINATION SRSS 8) illustrates a pure SRSS This (LOAD COMBINATION SRSS 8) illustrates a pure SRSS
load combination with a default SRSS factor of 1. The following load combination with a default SRSS factor of 1. The following
combination scheme will be used - combination scheme will be used -

v= 1.0 1 x L1 2 - 0.4 x L2 2 + 0.4 x L3 2 v= 1.0 1 x L1 2 - 0.4 x L2 2 + 0.4 x L3 2

where v = the combined value and L1 - L3 = values from load cases where v = the combined value and L1 - L3 = values from load cases
1,2 and 3. 1,2 and 3.

Note that since a SRSS factor is not provided, the default value of Note that since a SRSS factor is not provided, the default value of
1.0 is being used. 1.0 is being used.

Algebraic & SRSS Combination in the Same Load Combination Algebraic & SRSS Combination in the Same Load Combination
Case Case

([DPSOH  ([DPSOH 

/2$' &20%,1$7,21 6566  /2$' &20%,1$7,21 6566 


             

The combination formula will be as follows - The combination formula will be as follows -

v = 0.75 x L1 + 0.75 1.3 x L2 2 + 2.42 x L3 2 v = 0.75 x L1 + 0.75 1.3 x L2 2 + 2.42 x L3 2

where v = combined value where v = combined value


L2 & L3 = values from load cases 2 & 3. L2 & L3 = values from load cases 2 & 3.

In the above specification, note that a minus sign precedes load In the above specification, note that a minus sign precedes load
case 1. Thus, Load 1 is combined algebraically with the result case 1. Thus, Load 1 is combined algebraically with the result
obtained from combining load cases 2 and 3 in the SRSS manner. obtained from combining load cases 2 and 3 in the SRSS manner.
Note that the SRSS factor of 0.75 is applied on the SRSS Note that the SRSS factor of 0.75 is applied on the SRSS
combination of 2 and 3. combination of 2 and 3.

([DPSOH  ([DPSOH 

/2$' &20%,1$7,21 6566  /2$' &20%,1$7,21 6566 


                 
Section 5 5-223 Section 5 5-223

Here, both load cases 1 and 2 are combined algebraically with the Here, both load cases 1 and 2 are combined algebraically with the
SRSS combination of load cases 3 and 4. Note the SRSS factor of SRSS combination of load cases 3 and 4. Note the SRSS factor of
0.63. The combination formula will be as follows. 0.63. The combination formula will be as follows.

v = 0.75 x L1 + 0.572 x L2 + 0.63 1.2 x L3 2 + 1.7 x L4 2 v = 0.75 x L1 + 0.572 x L2 + 0.63 1.2 x L3 2 + 1.7 x L4 2

1RWHV 1RWHV

1) This option combines the results of the analysis in the specified 1) This option combines the results of the analysis in the specified
manner. It does not analyze the structure for the combined manner. It does not analyze the structure for the combined
loading. loading.
2) If the secondary effects of combined load cases are to be 2) If the secondary effects of combined load cases are to be
obtained through a PDELTA , Member/Spring obtained through a PDELTA , Member/Spring
Tension/Compression, Multi-linear Spring, or Nonlinear Tension/Compression, Multi-linear Spring, or Nonlinear
Analysis, then the LOAD COMBINATION command is Analysis, then the LOAD COMBINATION command is
inappropriate for the purpose. See the REPEAT LOAD inappropriate for the purpose. See the REPEAT LOAD
command (section 5.32.11) for details. command (section 5.32.11) for details.
3) In a load combination specification, a value of 0 (zero) as a 3) In a load combination specification, a value of 0 (zero) as a
load factor is not permitted. In other words, a specification load factor is not permitted. In other words, a specification
such as such as

LOAD COMB 7 LOAD COMB 7


1 1.35 2 0.0 3 1.2 4 0.0 5 1.7 1 1.35 2 0.0 3 1.2 4 0.0 5 1.7

is not permitted. What happens is that due to the way the is not permitted. What happens is that due to the way the
program processes the data, as soon as it encounters a 0.0, it program processes the data, as soon as it encounters a 0.0, it
stops reading the data at the 0.0 and does not read any further. stops reading the data at the 0.0 and does not read any further.
Thus, in the above loading case, the results will consist only of Thus, in the above loading case, the results will consist only of
forces due to load 1 multiplied by a factor of 1.35. The forces due to load 1 multiplied by a factor of 1.35. The
contribution from 1.2 * load 3 and 1.7 * load 5 will not be contribution from 1.2 * load 3 and 1.7 * load 5 will not be
there because the program simply did not read those data. there because the program simply did not read those data.

4) All combination load cases must be provided immediately after 4) All combination load cases must be provided immediately after
the last primary load case. the last primary load case.
5) The maximum number of load cases that can be combined using 5) The maximum number of load cases that can be combined using
a LOAD COMBINATION command is 100. a LOAD COMBINATION command is 100.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-224 Section 5 5-224 Section 5

5.36 Calculation of Problem Statistics 5.36 Calculation of Problem Statistics

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command may be used for obtaining run statistics like storage This command may be used for obtaining run statistics like storage
space required, bandwidth info etc. space required, bandwidth info etc.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

35,17 352%/(0 67$7,67,&6 35,17 352%/(0 67$7,67,&6

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

This command provides an estimate of the hard disk space required This command provides an estimate of the hard disk space required
to run a file before actually running it. It is particularly to run a file before actually running it. It is particularly
See Section See Section
recommended for PC users running a large problem. This command recommended for PC users running a large problem. This command
1.25 1.25
should be used just after the loading specifications and in place of should be used just after the loading specifications and in place of
the PERFORM ANALYSIS command. the PERFORM ANALYSIS command.

Normally this command is not used because these results are Normally this command is not used because these results are
printed automatically once during an analysis. printed automatically once during an analysis.
Section 5 5-225 Section 5 5-225

5.37 Analysis Specification 5.37 Analysis Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

STAAD analysis options include linear static analysis, P-Delta (or STAAD analysis options include linear static analysis, P-Delta (or
second order analysis), Nonlinear analysis, and several types of second order analysis), Nonlinear analysis, and several types of
Dynamic analysis. Dynamic analysis.

This command is used to specify the analysis request. In addition, This command is used to specify the analysis request. In addition,
this command may be used to request various analysis related data this command may be used to request various analysis related data
like load info, statics check info, mode shapes etc. like load info, statics check info, mode shapes etc.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

/2$' '$7$  /2$' '$7$ 


3(5)250  67$7,&6 &+(&.  3(5)250  67$7,&6 &+(&. 
121/,1($5 Q  $1$/<6,6 35,17 67$7,&6 /2$'  121/,1($5 Q  $1$/<6,6 35,17 67$7,&6 /2$' 
3(5)250 &$%/(    3(5)250 &$%/(   
%27+  %27+ 
$//  $// 

3'(/7$ Q $1$/<6,6 &219(5*( P 35,17 /2$' '$7$ 3'(/7$ Q $1$/<6,6 &219(5*( P 35,17 /2$' '$7$

Where n = no. of iterations desired (default value of n = 1). Where n = no. of iterations desired (default value of n = 1).

See Section This command directs the program to perform the analysis that See Section This command directs the program to perform the analysis that
1.18 includes: 1.18 includes:

a) Checking whether all information is provided for the analysis; a) Checking whether all information is provided for the analysis;
b) Forming the joint stiffness matrix; b) Forming the joint stiffness matrix;
c) Checking the stability of the structure; c) Checking the stability of the structure;
d) Solving simultaneous equations, and d) Solving simultaneous equations, and
e) Computing the member forces and displacements. e) Computing the member forces and displacements.
f) If P-Delta analysis is specified, forces and displacements are f) If P-Delta analysis is specified, forces and displacements are
recalculated, taking into consideration the P-Delta effect. recalculated, taking into consideration the P-Delta effect.
g) Non-linear analysis will take the geometric non-linearity as g) Non-linear analysis will take the geometric non-linearity as
well as the P-Delta effects into account (see Section 1.18.2.2). well as the P-Delta effects into account (see Section 1.18.2.2).
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-226 Section 5 5-226 Section 5

h) If a RESPONSE SPECTRUM is specified within a load case or h) If a RESPONSE SPECTRUM is specified within a load case or
the MODAL CALCULATION command is used, dynamic the MODAL CALCULATION command is used, dynamic
analysis is performed. analysis is performed.
i) In each of the "n" iterations of the PDELTA analysis, the load i) In each of the "n" iterations of the PDELTA analysis, the load
vector will be modified to include the secondary effect vector will be modified to include the secondary effect
generated by the displacements caused by the previous generated by the displacements caused by the previous
analysis. analysis.

There are two options to carry out P-Delta analysis. There are two options to carry out P-Delta analysis.

1) When the CONVERGE command is not specified: The member 1) When the CONVERGE command is not specified: The member
end forces are evaluated by iterating “n” times. The default end forces are evaluated by iterating “n” times. The default
value of “n” is 1 (one). value of “n” is 1 (one).

2) When the CONVERGE command is included: The member end 2) When the CONVERGE command is included: The member end
forces are evaluated by performing a convergence check on the forces are evaluated by performing a convergence check on the
joint displacements. In each step, the displacements are joint displacements. In each step, the displacements are
compared with those of the previous iteration in order to check compared with those of the previous iteration in order to check
whether convergence is attained. In case “m” is specified, the whether convergence is attained. In case “m” is specified, the
analysis will stop after that iteration even if convergence has analysis will stop after that iteration even if convergence has
not been achieved. If convergence is achieved in less than “m” not been achieved. If convergence is achieved in less than “m”
iterations, the analysis is terminated. (DO NOT ENTER “n” iterations, the analysis is terminated. (DO NOT ENTER “n”
when CONVERGE is provided) when CONVERGE is provided)

3) To set convergence displacement tolerance, enter SET 3) To set convergence displacement tolerance, enter SET
DISPLACEMENT f command. Default is maximum span of the DISPLACEMENT f command. Default is maximum span of the
structure divided by 120. structure divided by 120.

Example Example

Followings are some example on use of the command for P-Delta Followings are some example on use of the command for P-Delta
analysis. analysis.

PDELTA ANALYSIS PDELTA ANALYSIS


PDELTA 5 ANALYSIS PDELTA 5 ANALYSIS
PDELTA ANALYSIS CONVERGE PDELTA ANALYSIS CONVERGE
PDELTA ANALYSIS CONVERGE 5 PDELTA ANALYSIS CONVERGE 5
Section 5 5-227 Section 5 5-227

Without one of these analysis commands, no analysis will be Without one of these analysis commands, no analysis will be
performed. These ANALYSIS commands can be repeated if performed. These ANALYSIS commands can be repeated if
multiple analyses are needed at different phases. multiple analyses are needed at different phases.

Note that a PDELTA ANALYSIS will correctly reflect the Note that a PDELTA ANALYSIS will correctly reflect the
secondary effects of a combination of load cases only if they are secondary effects of a combination of load cases only if they are
defined using the REPEAT LOAD specification (Section 5.32.11). defined using the REPEAT LOAD specification (Section 5.32.11).
Secondary effects will not be evaluated correctly for LOAD Secondary effects will not be evaluated correctly for LOAD
COMBINATIONS. COMBINATIONS.

If the PRINT LOAD DATA command is specified, the program If the PRINT LOAD DATA command is specified, the program
will print an interpretation of all the load data. will print an interpretation of all the load data.

PRINT STATICS CHECK will provide a summation of the applied PRINT STATICS CHECK will provide a summation of the applied
loads and support reactions as well as a summation of moments of loads and support reactions as well as a summation of moments of
the loads and reactions taken around the origin. the loads and reactions taken around the origin.

PRINT STATICS LOAD prints everything that PRINT STATICS PRINT STATICS LOAD prints everything that PRINT STATICS
CHECK does, plus it prints a summation of all internal and CHECK does, plus it prints a summation of all internal and
external forces at each joint (generates voluminous output). external forces at each joint (generates voluminous output).

Use the PRINT MODE SHAPES command separately after this Use the PRINT MODE SHAPES command separately after this
command if mode shapes are desired. command if mode shapes are desired.

PRINT BOTH is equivalent to PRINT LOAD DATA plus PRINT PRINT BOTH is equivalent to PRINT LOAD DATA plus PRINT
STATICS CHECK. STATICS CHECK.

PRINT ALL is equivalent to PRINT LOAD DATA plus PRINT PRINT ALL is equivalent to PRINT LOAD DATA plus PRINT
STATICS LOAD. STATICS LOAD.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-228 Section 5 5-228 Section 5

In addition to the above Print parameters, there are additional parameters In addition to the above Print parameters, there are additional parameters
that may be specified for Cable Analysis: that may be specified for Cable Analysis:

67(36 I  67(36 I 
  (4,7(5$7,216 I    (4,7(5$7,216 I 
 3(5)250 &$%/(  $1$/<6,6 (472/(5$1&( I   3(5)250 &$%/(  $1$/<6,6 (472/(5$1&( I 
  6$*0,1,080 I    6$*0,1,080 I 
67$%,/,7< I I  67$%,/,7< I I 
.60$// I  .60$// I 
This command may be continued to the next line by ending with a hyphen. This command may be continued to the next line by ending with a hyphen.
Steps = Number of load steps. The applied loads will be applied Steps = Number of load steps. The applied loads will be applied
gradually in this many steps. Each step will be iterated to gradually in this many steps. Each step will be iterated to
convergence. Default is 15-20. The f1 value, if entered, convergence. Default is 15-20. The f1 value, if entered,
should be in the range 5 to 145. should be in the range 5 to 145.
Eq-iterations = Maximum number of iterations permitted in each load step. Eq-iterations = Maximum number of iterations permitted in each load step.
Default is 15. Should be in the range of 10 to 30. Default is 15. Should be in the range of 10 to 30.
Eq-tolerance = The convergence tolerance for the above iterations. Eq-tolerance = The convergence tolerance for the above iterations.
Default is 0.0005. Default is 0.0005.
Sag minimum = Cables (not trusses) may sag when tension is low. This is Sag minimum = Cables (not trusses) may sag when tension is low. This is
accounted for by reducing the E value. Sag minimum may be accounted for by reducing the E value. Sag minimum may be
between 1.0 (no sag E reduction) and 0.0 (full sag E between 1.0 (no sag E reduction) and 0.0 (full sag E
reduction). Default is 1.0. If f4 is entered, it should be in the reduction). Default is 1.0. If f4 is entered, it should be in the
range 0.7 to 1.0 for a relatively simple process. As soon as range 0.7 to 1.0 for a relatively simple process. As soon as
SAGMIN becomes less than 0.95 the possibility exists that a SAGMIN becomes less than 0.95 the possibility exists that a
converged solution will not be achieved without increasing the converged solution will not be achieved without increasing the
steps or the pretension loads. The Eq iterations may need to be steps or the pretension loads. The Eq iterations may need to be
30 or more. The Eq tolerance may need to be greater or 30 or more. The Eq tolerance may need to be greater or
smaller. smaller.
Stability stiffness = A stiffness matrix value, f5, that is added to the global Stability stiffness = A stiffness matrix value, f5, that is added to the global
matrix at each translational direction for joints connected to matrix at each translational direction for joints connected to
cables and nonlinear trusses for the first f6 load steps. The cables and nonlinear trusses for the first f6 load steps. The
amount added linearly decreases with each of the f6 load steps amount added linearly decreases with each of the f6 load steps
(f6 is 1 if omitted). If f5 entered, use 0.0 to 1000.0. Default is (f6 is 1 if omitted). If f5 entered, use 0.0 to 1000.0. Default is
0.0. 0.0.
K small stiffness = A stiffness matrix value, f7, that is added to the global K small stiffness = A stiffness matrix value, f7, that is added to the global
matrix at each translational direction for joints connected to matrix at each translational direction for joints connected to
Section 5 5-229 Section 5 5-229
cables and nonlinear trusses for every load step. If entered, cables and nonlinear trusses for every load step. If entered,
use 0.0 to 1.0. Default is 0.0. use 0.0 to 1.0. Default is 0.0.

1RWHV 1RWHV

STAAD allows multiple analyses in the same run. Multiple STAAD allows multiple analyses in the same run. Multiple
analyses may be used for the following purposes: analyses may be used for the following purposes:
1) Successive analysis and design cycles in the same run result in 1) Successive analysis and design cycles in the same run result in
optimized design. STAAD's live relational database optimized design. STAAD's live relational database
automatically updates changes in member cross-sectional sizes. automatically updates changes in member cross-sectional sizes.
Thus the entire process is automated. Thus the entire process is automated.
Refer to Example 1 in the Getting Started & Examples manual Refer to Example 1 in the Getting Started & Examples manual
for detailed illustration. for detailed illustration.
2) Multiple analyses may be used for load-dependent structures. 2) Multiple analyses may be used for load-dependent structures.
For example, structures with bracing members are analyzed in For example, structures with bracing members are analyzed in
several steps. The bracing members are assumed to take several steps. The bracing members are assumed to take
Tension load only. Thus, they need to be activated and Tension load only. Thus, they need to be activated and
inactivated based on the direction of lateral loading. inactivated based on the direction of lateral loading.
The entire process can be modeled in one STAAD run using The entire process can be modeled in one STAAD run using
multiple PERFORM ANALYSIS commands. The STAAD run multiple PERFORM ANALYSIS commands. The STAAD run
database automatically keeps track of results for different runs database automatically keeps track of results for different runs
and is capable of generating a design based on load and is capable of generating a design based on load
combinations provided. combinations provided.
Refer to Example 4 in the Getting Started & Examples manual Refer to Example 4 in the Getting Started & Examples manual
for detailed illustration. for detailed illustration.
3) The user may also use Multiple Analyses to model change in 3) The user may also use Multiple Analyses to model change in
other characteristics like SUPPORTS, RELEASES, SECTION other characteristics like SUPPORTS, RELEASES, SECTION
PROPERTIES etc. PROPERTIES etc.
6) Multiple Analyses may require use of additional commands like 6) Multiple Analyses may require use of additional commands like
the SET NL command and the CHANGE command. the SET NL command and the CHANGE command.
7) PDELTA effects are computed for frame members only. They 7) PDELTA effects are computed for frame members only. They
are not calculated for finite elements or solid elements. are not calculated for finite elements or solid elements.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-230 Section 5 5-230 Section 5

5.38 Change Specification 5.38 Change Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command is used to reset the stiffness matrix. Typically, this This command is used to reset the stiffness matrix. Typically, this
command is used when multiple analyses are required in the same command is used when multiple analyses are required in the same
run. run.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

&+$1*( &+$1*(

This command indicates that input, which will change the stiffness This command indicates that input, which will change the stiffness
matrix, will follow. This command should only be used when an matrix, will follow. This command should only be used when an
analysis has already been performed. The CHANGE command does analysis has already been performed. The CHANGE command does
or requires the following: or requires the following:

a) sets the stiffness matrix to zero, a) sets the stiffness matrix to zero,
b) makes members active if they had been made inactive by a b) makes members active if they had been made inactive by a
previous INACTIVE command, and previous INACTIVE command, and
c) allows specifying new MEMBER or Spring TENSION / c) allows specifying new MEMBER or Spring TENSION /
COMPRESSION commands that causes the old specs to be COMPRESSION commands that causes the old specs to be
ignored, otherwise the same specs will be used; and ignored, otherwise the same specs will be used; and
d) allows the respecification of the supports with another d) allows the respecification of the supports with another
SUPPORT command that causes the old supports to be ignored. SUPPORT command that causes the old supports to be ignored.
The SUPPORT specification must be such that the number of The SUPPORT specification must be such that the number of
"releases" before the CHANGE must be greater than or equal "releases" before the CHANGE must be greater than or equal
to the number of "releases" after the CHANGE. to the number of "releases" after the CHANGE.
e) Also, the supports must be specified in the same order before e) Also, the supports must be specified in the same order before
and after the CHANGE command. To accomplish this when and after the CHANGE command. To accomplish this when
some cases have more supports than others do, you can enter some cases have more supports than others do, you can enter
unrestrained joints into the SUPPORT command list using unrestrained joints into the SUPPORT command list using
FIXED BUT FX FY FZ MX MY MZ. It is best to put every FIXED BUT FX FY FZ MX MY MZ. It is best to put every
joint that will be supported in any case into every SUPPORT joint that will be supported in any case into every SUPPORT
list list
f) CHANGE should be after PERFORM ANALYSIS and before f) CHANGE should be after PERFORM ANALYSIS and before
MEMBER TENSION / COMPRESSION, SUPPORT, LOADS. MEMBER TENSION / COMPRESSION, SUPPORT, LOADS.
g) Only active cases are solved after the CHANGE command. g) Only active cases are solved after the CHANGE command.
Section 5 5-231 Section 5 5-231
([DPSOH ([DPSOH

Before CHANGE Before CHANGE

 3,11('  3,11('
 ),;(' %87 ); 0< 0=  ),;(' %87 ); 0< 0=
 ),;(' %87 ); 0; 0< 0=  ),;(' %87 ); 0; 0< 0=

After CHANGE After CHANGE

 3,11('  3,11('
 ),;('  ),;('
 ),;(' %87 ); 0=  ),;(' %87 ); 0=

The CHANGE command is not necessary when only member The CHANGE command is not necessary when only member
properties are revised to perform a new analysis. This is typically properties are revised to perform a new analysis. This is typically
the case in which the user has asked for a member selection and the case in which the user has asked for a member selection and
then uses the PERFORM ANALYSIS command to reanalyze the then uses the PERFORM ANALYSIS command to reanalyze the
structure based on the new member properties. structure based on the new member properties.
See Section See Section
5.18 1RWHV 5.18 1RWHV

1) If new load cases are specified after the CHANGE command 1) If new load cases are specified after the CHANGE command
such as in a structure where the INACTIVE MEMBER such as in a structure where the INACTIVE MEMBER
command is used, the user needs to define the total number of command is used, the user needs to define the total number of
primary load cases using the SET NL option (see Section 5.5 primary load cases using the SET NL option (see Section 5.5
and Example 4). and Example 4).
2) Multiple Analyses using the CHANGE command should not be 2) Multiple Analyses using the CHANGE command should not be
performed if the input file contains load cases involving UBC performed if the input file contains load cases involving UBC
Analysis, Response Spectrum Analysis, Time History Analysis, Analysis, Response Spectrum Analysis, Time History Analysis,
Wind Load Generation or Moving Load Generation. Wind Load Generation or Moving Load Generation.
3) Note that Section load, stress, etc. results for postprocessing 3) Note that Section load, stress, etc. results for postprocessing
will use the last entered data for supports and member will use the last entered data for supports and member
properties regardless of what was used to compute the properties regardless of what was used to compute the
displacements, end forces and reactions. So beware of changing displacements, end forces and reactions. So beware of changing
member properties and releases after a CHANGE command. member properties and releases after a CHANGE command.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-232 Section 5 5-232 Section 5

5.39 Load List Specification 5.39 Load List Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command allows specification of a set of active load cases. This command allows specification of a set of active load cases.
All load cases made active by this command remain active until a All load cases made active by this command remain active until a
new load list is specified. new load list is specified.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

ORDGOLVW  ORDGOLVW 
/2$' /,67   /2$' /,67  
$//  $// 

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

This command is used to activate the load cases listed in this This command is used to activate the load cases listed in this
command and, in a sense, deactivate all other load cases not listed command and, in a sense, deactivate all other load cases not listed
in this command. In other words, the loads listed are used for in this command. In other words, the loads listed are used for
printing output and in design for performing the specified printing output and in design for performing the specified
calculations. Note that, when PERFORM ANALYSIS command is calculations. Note that, when PERFORM ANALYSIS command is
used, the program internally uses all load cases, regardless of used, the program internally uses all load cases, regardless of
LOAD LIST command, except after a CHANGE or RESTORE LOAD LIST command, except after a CHANGE or RESTORE
command. In these two cases, the LOAD LIST command allows the command. In these two cases, the LOAD LIST command allows the
program to perform analysis only on those loads in the list. If the program to perform analysis only on those loads in the list. If the
LOAD LIST command is never used, the program will assume all LOAD LIST command is never used, the program will assume all
load cases to be active. load cases to be active.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

/2$' /,67 $// /2$' /,67 $//


35,17 0(0%(5 )25&(6 35,17 0(0%(5 )25&(6
/2$' /,67   /2$' /,67  
35,17 6833257 5($&7,216 35,17 6833257 5($&7,216
&+(&. &2'( $// &+(&. &2'( $//
Section 5 5-233 Section 5 5-233
In this example, member forces will be printed for all load In this example, member forces will be printed for all load
cases, whereas loading 1 and 3 will be used for printing support cases, whereas loading 1 and 3 will be used for printing support
reactions and code-checking of all members. reactions and code-checking of all members.

1RWHV 1RWHV

The LOAD LIST command may be used for multiple analyses The LOAD LIST command may be used for multiple analyses
situations when a re-analysis needs to be performed with a selected situations when a re-analysis needs to be performed with a selected
set of load cases only. Please note that all load cases are set of load cases only. Please note that all load cases are
automatically active before a CHANGE or RESTORE command is automatically active before a CHANGE or RESTORE command is
used. used.

After a CHANGE command has been used anywhere in the data, it After a CHANGE command has been used anywhere in the data, it
is good practice to specify the LOAD LIST command after an is good practice to specify the LOAD LIST command after an
ANALYSIS command and before the next command; otherwise ANALYSIS command and before the next command; otherwise
only the last case analyzed may be used in the design. only the last case analyzed may be used in the design.

Do not enter this command within the loads data (from the first Do not enter this command within the loads data (from the first
Load command in an analysis set down to the associated Analysis Load command in an analysis set down to the associated Analysis
command). command).
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-234 Section 5 5-234 Section 5

5.40 Section Specification 5.40 Section Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command is used to specify sections along the length of frame This command is used to specify sections along the length of frame
member for which forces and moments are required. member for which forces and moments are required.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

0(0%(5 PHPEOLVW  0(0%(5 PHPEOLVW 


6(&7,21 I I  I   6(&7,21 I I  I  
 $//   $// 

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

This command specifies the sections, in terms of fractional member This command specifies the sections, in terms of fractional member
lengths, at which the forces and moments are considered for further lengths, at which the forces and moments are considered for further
processing. processing.

See Sections See Sections


f 1 , f 2 ... f 5 = Section (in terms of the fraction of the member length) f 1 , f 2 ... f 5 = Section (in terms of the fraction of the member length)
1.19.2,and 1.19.2,and
provided for the members. Maximum number of sections is 5, provided for the members. Maximum number of sections is 5,
1.19.4 1.19.4
including one at the start and one at the end. In other words, no including one at the start and one at the end. In other words, no
more than three intermediate sections are permissible per more than three intermediate sections are permissible per
SECTION command. SECTION command.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

6(&7,21    0(0%   6(&7,21    0(0%  
6(&7,21   0(0%  72  6(&7,21   0(0%  72 
6(&7,21  0(0%  6(&7,21  0(0% 

In this example, first the members 1 and 2 are set to section values In this example, first the members 1 and 2 are set to section values
of 0.0, 0.5, and 1.0, i.e. at the start, mid point and end. The of 0.0, 0.5, and 1.0, i.e. at the start, mid point and end. The
members 3 to 7 are specified by the next SECTION command members 3 to 7 are specified by the next SECTION command
where sections 0.25 and 0.75 are set. where sections 0.25 and 0.75 are set.

In the next SECTION command, member 8 has its section specified In the next SECTION command, member 8 has its section specified
at 0.6. The remainder of the members will have no sections at 0.6. The remainder of the members will have no sections
Section 5 5-235 Section 5 5-235
provided for them. If no section value is given for any member, provided for them. If no section value is given for any member,
it defaults to 0.0 and 1.0 (i.e. start and end). For example, the start it defaults to 0.0 and 1.0 (i.e. start and end). For example, the start
and end forces of the members will be used for design, if no section and end forces of the members will be used for design, if no section
is specified. As mentioned earlier, no more than three intermediate is specified. As mentioned earlier, no more than three intermediate
sections are allowed per SECTION command. However, if more sections are allowed per SECTION command. However, if more
than three intermediate sections are involved, they can be examined than three intermediate sections are involved, they can be examined
by repeating the SECTION command after completing the required by repeating the SECTION command after completing the required
calculations. The following example will clarify. calculations. The following example will clarify.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

6(&7,21    $// 6(&7,21    $//
35,17 6(&7,21 )25&(6 35,17 6(&7,21 )25&(6
6(&7,21    $// 6(&7,21    $//
35,17 6(&7,21 )25&(6 35,17 6(&7,21 )25&(6

In this example, first forces at 3 intermediate sections (namely 0.2, In this example, first forces at 3 intermediate sections (namely 0.2,
0.4 and 0.5) are printed and then forces at an additional 3 sections 0.4 and 0.5) are printed and then forces at an additional 3 sections
(namely 0.6, 0.75 and 0.9) are printed. This gives the user the (namely 0.6, 0.75 and 0.9) are printed. This gives the user the
section forces at more than three intermediate sections. section forces at more than three intermediate sections.

1RWHV 1RWHV

1) The SECTION command just specifies the sections. Use the 1) The SECTION command just specifies the sections. Use the
PRINT SECTION FORCES command after this command to PRINT SECTION FORCES command after this command to
print out the forces and moments at the specified sections. print out the forces and moments at the specified sections.
2) This is a secondary analysis command. Note that the analysis 2) This is a secondary analysis command. Note that the analysis
must be performed before this command may be used. must be performed before this command may be used.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-236 Section 5 5-236 Section 5

5.41 Print Specifications 5.41 Print Specifications

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command is used to direct the program to print various This command is used to direct the program to print various
modeling information and analysis results. STAAD offers a number modeling information and analysis results. STAAD offers a number
of versatile print commands that can be used to customize the of versatile print commands that can be used to customize the
output. output.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW IRU GDWD UHODWHG SULQW FRPPDQGV *HQHUDO IRUPDW IRU GDWD UHODWHG SULQW FRPPDQGV

-2,17 &225',1$7(6  -2,17 &225',1$7(6 


0(0%(5 ,1)250$7,21  0(0%(5 ,1)250$7,21 
(/(0(17 ,1)250$7,21 62/,'   $//  (/(0(17 ,1)250$7,21 62/,'   $// 
 0(0%(5 3523(57,(6     0(0%(5 3523(57,(6   
35,17  0$7(5,$/ 3523(57,(6   /,67 OLVW RI LWHPV  35,17  0$7(5,$/ 3523(57,(6   /,67 OLVW RI LWHPV 
6833257 ,1)250$7,21   LH MRLQWV  6833257 ,1)250$7,21   LH MRLQWV 
RU   PHPEHUV  RU   PHPEHUV 
$//  $// 

*HQHUDO IRUPDW WR SULQW ORFDWLRQ RI FJ *HQHUDO IRUPDW WR SULQW ORFDWLRQ RI FJ

35,17 &* 35,17 &*

*HQHUDO IRUPDW WR SULQW DQDO\VLV UHVXOWV *HQHUDO IRUPDW WR SULQW DQDO\VLV UHVXOWV

 -2,17 ',63/$&(0(176   -2,17 ',63/$&(0(176 


 0(0%(5 )25&(6   0(0%(5 )25&(6 
35,17 $1$/<6,6 5(68/76  /LVW 35,17 $1$/<6,6 5(68/76  /LVW
 0(0%(5 6(&7,21 )25&(6  VSHF  0(0%(5 6(&7,21 )25&(6  VSHF
 0(0%(5 675(66(6   0(0%(5 675(66(6 
(/(0(17 -2,17 675(66(6 $7 I I  (/(0(17 -2,17 675(66(6 $7 I I 
(/(0(17 )25&(6  (/(0(17 )25&(6 
(/(0(17 -2,17 675(66(6 62/,'  (/(0(17 -2,17 675(66(6 62/,' 
02'( 6+$3(6  02'( 6+$3(6 
 $//    $//  
/LVWVSHF /,67 OLVW RI LWHPVMRLQWV  /LVWVSHF /,67 OLVW RI LWHPVMRLQWV 
 PHPEHUV RU HOHPHQWV   PHPEHUV RU HOHPHQWV 
Section 5 5-237 Section 5 5-237
*HQHUDO IRUPDW WR SULQW VXSSRUW UHDFWLRQV *HQHUDO IRUPDW WR SULQW VXSSRUW UHDFWLRQV

35,17 6833257 5($&7,216 35,17 6833257 5($&7,216

*HQHUDO IRUPDW WR SULQW HQWLUH VWHHO WDEOH *HQHUDO IRUPDW WR SULQW HQWLUH VWHHO WDEOH

35,17 (17,5( 7$%/( 35,17 (17,5( 7$%/(

*HQHUDO IRUPDW WR SULQW VWRU\ GULIWV *HQHUDO IRUPDW WR SULQW VWRU\ GULIWV

35,17 6725< '5,)7 35,17 6725< '5,)7

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

Note that the list of items is not applicable for PRINT ANALYSIS Note that the list of items is not applicable for PRINT ANALYSIS
RESULTS, PRINT SUPPORT REACTIONS, and PRINT MODE RESULTS, PRINT SUPPORT REACTIONS, and PRINT MODE
SHAPES command. SHAPES command.

The PRINT JOINT COORDINATES command prints all The PRINT JOINT COORDINATES command prints all
interpreted coordinates of joints. interpreted coordinates of joints.

The PRINT MEMBER INFORMATION command prints all The PRINT MEMBER INFORMATION command prints all
member information, including member length, member incidences, member information, including member length, member incidences,
beta angles, whether or not a member is a truss member and the beta angles, whether or not a member is a truss member and the
member release conditions at start and end of the member member release conditions at start and end of the member
(1=released, 0 = not released). (1=released, 0 = not released).

The PRINT ELEMENT INFORMATION command prints all The PRINT ELEMENT INFORMATION command prints all
incident joints, element thicknesses, and Poisson ratios for incident joints, element thicknesses, and Poisson ratios for
Plate/Shell elements. The PRINT ELEMENT INFORMATION Plate/Shell elements. The PRINT ELEMENT INFORMATION
SOLID command prints similar information for Solid elements. SOLID command prints similar information for Solid elements.

The PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES command prints all member The PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES command prints all member
properties including cross sectional area, moments of inertia, and properties including cross sectional area, moments of inertia, and
section moduli in both axes. Units for the properties are always section moduli in both axes. Units for the properties are always
INCH or CM (depending on FPS or METRIC) regardless of the INCH or CM (depending on FPS or METRIC) regardless of the
unit specified in UNIT command. unit specified in UNIT command.

The following designation is used for member property names: The following designation is used for member property names:
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-238 Section 5 5-238 Section 5

AX - Cross section area AX - Cross section area


AY - Area used to compute shear deformation in local Y-axis AY - Area used to compute shear deformation in local Y-axis
AZ - Area used to compute shear deformation in local Z-axis AZ - Area used to compute shear deformation in local Z-axis
IZ - Moment of Inertia about the local Z-axis IZ - Moment of Inertia about the local Z-axis
IY - Moment of Inertia about the local Y-axis IY - Moment of Inertia about the local Y-axis
IX - Torsional constant IX - Torsional constant
SY - Smallest section modulus about the local Y-axis SY - Smallest section modulus about the local Y-axis
SZ - Smallest section modulus about the local Z-axis SZ - Smallest section modulus about the local Z-axis

The PRINT MATERIAL PROPERTIES command prints all The PRINT MATERIAL PROPERTIES command prints all
material properties for the members, including E (modulus of material properties for the members, including E (modulus of
elasticity), G (shear modulus), weight density and coefficient of elasticity), G (shear modulus), weight density and coefficient of
thermal expansion (alpha) for frame members. This command is thermal expansion (alpha) for frame members. This command is
available for members only. G may be listed as zero if command is available for members only. G may be listed as zero if command is
before load cases and Poisson ratio was entered but G was not before load cases and Poisson ratio was entered but G was not
entered. entered.

The PRINT SUPPORT INFORMATION command prints all The PRINT SUPPORT INFORMATION command prints all
support information regarding their fixity, releases and spring support information regarding their fixity, releases and spring
constant values, if any. The LIST option is not available for this constant values, if any. The LIST option is not available for this
command. command.

The PRINT ALL command is equivalent to last five print The PRINT ALL command is equivalent to last five print
commands combined. This command prints joint coordinates, commands combined. This command prints joint coordinates,
member information, member properties, material properties and member information, member properties, material properties and
support information, in that order. support information, in that order.

The PRINT CG command prints out the coordinates of the center The PRINT CG command prints out the coordinates of the center
of gravity of the structure. Only the selfweight of the structure is of gravity of the structure. Only the selfweight of the structure is
used to calculate the C.G. User defined joint loads, member loads used to calculate the C.G. User defined joint loads, member loads
etc. are not considered in the calculation of C.G. etc. are not considered in the calculation of C.G.

The PRINT (JOINT) DISPLACEMENTS command prints joint The PRINT (JOINT) DISPLACEMENTS command prints joint
displacements in a tabulated form. The displacements for all six displacements in a tabulated form. The displacements for all six
global directions will be printed for all specified load cases. The global directions will be printed for all specified load cases. The
length unit for the displacements is always INCH or CM length unit for the displacements is always INCH or CM
(depending on FPS or METRIC unit) regardless of the unit (depending on FPS or METRIC unit) regardless of the unit
specified in UNIT command. specified in UNIT command.
Section 5 5-239 Section 5 5-239

The PRINT (MEMBER) FORCES command prints member forces The PRINT (MEMBER) FORCES command prints member forces
(i.e. Axial force (AXIAL), Shear force in local Y and Z axes (i.e. Axial force (AXIAL), Shear force in local Y and Z axes
(SHEAR-Y and SHEAR-Z), Torsional Moment (TORSION), (SHEAR-Y and SHEAR-Z), Torsional Moment (TORSION),
Moments about local Y and Z axes (MOM-Y and MOM-Z)) in a Moments about local Y and Z axes (MOM-Y and MOM-Z)) in a
tabulated form for the listed members, for all specified load cases. tabulated form for the listed members, for all specified load cases.

The PRINT SUPPORT REACTIONS command prints global The PRINT SUPPORT REACTIONS command prints global
support reactions in a tabulated form, by support, for all specified support reactions in a tabulated form, by support, for all specified
load cases. Use LIST option for selected joints. load cases. Use LIST option for selected joints.

PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS command is equivalent to the last PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS command is equivalent to the last
three commands combined. With this command, the joint three commands combined. With this command, the joint
displacements, support reactions and member forces, in that order, displacements, support reactions and member forces, in that order,
are printed. are printed.

The PRINT (MEMBER) SECTION FORCES command prints The PRINT (MEMBER) SECTION FORCES command prints
shears & bending moments at the intermediate sections specified shears & bending moments at the intermediate sections specified
with a previously input SECTION command. The printing is done with a previously input SECTION command. The printing is done
in a tabulated form for all specified cases for the first requested in a tabulated form for all specified cases for the first requested
member, then for the next member, etc. member, then for the next member, etc.

The PRINT (MEMBER) STRESSES command tabulates member The PRINT (MEMBER) STRESSES command tabulates member
stresses at the start joint, end joint and all specified intermediate stresses at the start joint, end joint and all specified intermediate
sections. These stresses include axial (i.e. axial force over the sections. These stresses include axial (i.e. axial force over the
area), bending-y (i.e. moment-y over section modulus in local y- area), bending-y (i.e. moment-y over section modulus in local y-
axis), bending-z (i.e. moment-z over section modulus in local z- axis), bending-z (i.e. moment-z over section modulus in local z-
axis), shear stresses in both local y and z directions (FY/AY and axis), shear stresses in both local y and z directions (FY/AY and
FZ/AZ) and combined (absolute combination of axial, bending-y FZ/AZ) and combined (absolute combination of axial, bending-y
and bending-z) stresses. and bending-z) stresses.
For PRISMATIC sections, if AY and/or AZ is not provided, the For PRISMATIC sections, if AY and/or AZ is not provided, the
full cross-sectional area (AX) will be considered in shear stress full cross-sectional area (AX) will be considered in shear stress
calculations. calculations.
For TAPERED sections, the values of AY and AZ are those for the For TAPERED sections, the values of AY and AZ are those for the
location where the stress is printed. Hence if the stress is printed location where the stress is printed. Hence if the stress is printed
at the location 0.0, the AY at AZ are based on the dimensions of at the location 0.0, the AY at AZ are based on the dimensions of
the member at the start node. the member at the start node.

AY = Total depth * Thickness of web. AY = Total depth * Thickness of web.


STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-240 Section 5 5-240 Section 5

AZ = 2/3 area of both flanges put together. AZ = 2/3 area of both flanges put together.

The PRINT ELEMENT STRESSES command must be used to print The PRINT ELEMENT STRESSES command must be used to print
plate stresses (SX, SY, SXY, SQX, SQY), moments per unit width plate stresses (SX, SY, SXY, SQX, SQY), moments per unit width
(MX, MY, MXY) and principal stresses (SMAX, SMIN, TMAX) (MX, MY, MXY) and principal stresses (SMAX, SMIN, TMAX)
for plate/shell elements. Typically, the stresses and moments per for plate/shell elements. Typically, the stresses and moments per
unit width at the centroid will be printed. The Von Mises stresses unit width at the centroid will be printed. The Von Mises stresses
(VONT, VONB) as well as the angle (ANGLE) defining the (VONT, VONB) as well as the angle (ANGLE) defining the
orientation of the principal planes are also printed. orientation of the principal planes are also printed.

The variables that appear in the output are the following. See The variables that appear in the output are the following. See
Figure 1.13 in Section 1 of this Reference Manual for more Figure 1.13 in Section 1 of this Reference Manual for more
information regarding these variables. information regarding these variables.

SQX = Shear stress on the local X face in the Z direction SQX = Shear stress on the local X face in the Z direction
SQY = Shear stress on the local Y face in the Z direction SQY = Shear stress on the local Y face in the Z direction
MX = Moment per unit width about the local X face MX = Moment per unit width about the local X face
MY = Moment per unit width about the local Y face MY = Moment per unit width about the local Y face
MXY = Torsional Moment per unit width in the local X-Y plane MXY = Torsional Moment per unit width in the local X-Y plane
SX = Axial stress in the local X direction SX = Axial stress in the local X direction
SY = Axial stress in the local Y direction SY = Axial stress in the local Y direction
SXY = Shear stress in the local XY plane SXY = Shear stress in the local XY plane
VONT = Von Mises stress on the top surface of the element VONT = Von Mises stress on the top surface of the element
VONB = Von Mises stress on the bottom surface of the element VONB = Von Mises stress on the bottom surface of the element
SMAX = Maximum in-plane Principal stress SMAX = Maximum in-plane Principal stress
SMIN = Minimum in-plane Principal stress SMIN = Minimum in-plane Principal stress
TMAX = Maximum in-plane Shear stress TMAX = Maximum in-plane Shear stress
ANGLE = Angle which determines direction of maximum principal ANGLE = Angle which determines direction of maximum principal
stress with respect to local X axis stress with respect to local X axis

If the JOINT option is used, forces and moments at the nodal If the JOINT option is used, forces and moments at the nodal
points are also printed out in addition to the centroid of the points are also printed out in addition to the centroid of the
element. element.

The AT option may be used to print element forces at any specified The AT option may be used to print element forces at any specified
point within the element. The AT option must be accompanied by point within the element. The AT option must be accompanied by
f 1 and f 2 . Note that f 1 and f 2 are local X and Y coordinates (in f 1 and f 2 . Note that f 1 and f 2 are local X and Y coordinates (in
current units) of the point where the stresses and moments are current units) of the point where the stresses and moments are
Section 5 5-241 Section 5 5-241
required. For detailed description of the local coordinate required. For detailed description of the local coordinate
system of the elements, refer to Section 1.6 of this manual. system of the elements, refer to Section 1.6 of this manual.

The PRINT ELEMENT FORCES command enables printing of The PRINT ELEMENT FORCES command enables printing of
plate “corner forces” [ F = K el ‡ D el ]. plate “corner forces” [ F = K el ‡ D el ].

The PRINT ELEMENT (JOINT) STRESS SOLID command The PRINT ELEMENT (JOINT) STRESS SOLID command
enables printing of stresses at the center of the SOLID elements. enables printing of stresses at the center of the SOLID elements.
The variables that appear in the output are the following. The variables that appear in the output are the following.

Normal Stresses : SXX, SYY and SZZ Normal Stresses : SXX, SYY and SZZ
Shear Stresses : SXY, SYZ and SZX Shear Stresses : SXY, SYZ and SZX
Principal Stresses : S1, S2 and S3. Principal Stresses : S1, S2 and S3.
Von Mises Stresses : SE Von Mises Stresses : SE
Direction cosines : 6 direction cosines are printed following Direction cosines : 6 direction cosines are printed following
the expression DC, corresponding to the the expression DC, corresponding to the
first two principal stress directions. first two principal stress directions.

The JOINT option will print out the stresses at the nodes of the The JOINT option will print out the stresses at the nodes of the
solid elements. solid elements.

The PRINT MODE SHAPES command prints the relative joint The PRINT MODE SHAPES command prints the relative joint
motions of each of the modes that were calculated. The maximum motions of each of the modes that were calculated. The maximum
motion is arbitrary and has no significance. Dynamic analysis will motion is arbitrary and has no significance. Dynamic analysis will
scale and combine the mode shapes to achieve the final dynamic scale and combine the mode shapes to achieve the final dynamic
results. results.

The PRINT ENTIRE TABLE command may be used to obtain a The PRINT ENTIRE TABLE command may be used to obtain a
print-out of the contents of the steel table from which member print-out of the contents of the steel table from which member
properties are being read. This command must be provided properties are being read. This command must be provided
following the specification of all member properties. following the specification of all member properties.

The PRINT STORY DRIFT command may be used to obtain a The PRINT STORY DRIFT command may be used to obtain a
print-out of the average lateral displacement of all joints at each print-out of the average lateral displacement of all joints at each
vertical level of the structure. vertical level of the structure.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-242 Section 5 5-242 Section 5
([DPSOH ([DPSOH

3(5)250 $1$/<6,6 3(5)250 $1$/<6,6


35,17 (/(0(17 -2,17 675(66 35,17 (/(0(17 -2,17 675(66
35,17 (/(0(17 675(66 $7   /,67  72  35,17 (/(0(17 675(66 $7   /,67  72 
35,17 6833257 5($&7,216 35,17 6833257 5($&7,216
35,17 -2,17 ',63/$&(0(176 /,67  72  35,17 -2,17 ',63/$&(0(176 /,67  72 
35,17 0(0%(5 )25&(6 /,67  72  35,17 0(0%(5 )25&(6 /,67  72 

1RWHV 1RWHV

1) The output generated by these commands is based on the 1) The output generated by these commands is based on the
current unit system. The user may wish to verify the current current unit system. The user may wish to verify the current
unit system and change it if necessary. unit system and change it if necessary.
2) Results may be printed for all joints/members/elements or 2) Results may be printed for all joints/members/elements or
based on a specified list. based on a specified list.
Section 5 5-243 Section 5 5-243

5.42 Print Section Displacement 5.42 Print Section Displacement

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command is used to calculate and print displacements at This command is used to calculate and print displacements at
sections (intermediate points) of frame members. This provides the sections (intermediate points) of frame members. This provides the
user with deflection data between the joints. user with deflection data between the joints.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

1235,17  1235,17 
35,17 6(&7,21 0$; ',63/ 16(&7 L 6$9( D $//  35,17 6(&7,21 0$; ',63/ 16(&7 L 6$9( D $// 
/,67 PHPEOLVW  /,67 PHPEOLVW 

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

< <
2ULJLQDO 2ULJLQDO
3RVLWLRQ 3RVLWLRQ

This command prints displacements This command prints displacements


at intermediate points between two at intermediate points between two
joints of a member. These joints of a member. These
\GLVSO \GLVSO
displacements are in global displacements are in global
[GLVSO coordinate directions (see figure). If [GLVSO coordinate directions (see figure). If
the MAX command is used, the the MAX command is used, the
'LVSODFHG program prints only the maximum 'LVSODFHG program prints only the maximum
SRVLWLRQ SRVLWLRQ
local displacements among all load local displacements among all load
;
cases. ;
cases.

i = number of sections to be taken. Defaults to 12 if NSECT is not i = number of sections to be taken. Defaults to 12 if NSECT is not
used and also if SAVE is used. used and also if SAVE is used.
a = File name where displacement values can be stored and used a = File name where displacement values can be stored and used
by STAADPL graphics program. If NOPRINT command is by STAADPL graphics program. If NOPRINT command is
used in conjunction with SAVE command, the program writes used in conjunction with SAVE command, the program writes
the data to file only and does not print them in output. The PC the data to file only and does not print them in output. The PC
version does not need a filename and if one is provided, it will version does not need a filename and if one is provided, it will
be ignored. This option is not necessary in STAAD.Pro. be ignored. This option is not necessary in STAAD.Pro.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-244 Section 5 5-244 Section 5
([DPSOH ([DPSOH

35,17 6(&7,21 ',63/ 6$9( 35,17 6(&7,21 ',63/ 6$9(


35,17 6(&7,21 0$; ',63 35,17 6(&7,21 0$; ',63

See Section See Section


SECTION DISPLACEMENTS are measured in GLOBAL SECTION DISPLACEMENTS are measured in GLOBAL
1.19.3 1.19.3
COORDINATES. The values are measured from the original COORDINATES. The values are measured from the original
(undeflected) position to the deflected position. See figure above. (undeflected) position to the deflected position. See figure above.

The maximum local displacement is also printed. First, the location The maximum local displacement is also printed. First, the location
is determined and then the value is measured from this location to is determined and then the value is measured from this location to
the line joining start and end joints of the deflected member. the line joining start and end joints of the deflected member.

1RWHV 1RWHV

1) The section displacement values are available in Global 1) The section displacement values are available in Global
Coordinates. The undeflected position is used as the datum for Coordinates. The undeflected position is used as the datum for
calculating the deflections. calculating the deflections.
2) This is a secondary analysis command. An analysis must be 2) This is a secondary analysis command. An analysis must be
performed before this command may be used. performed before this command may be used.
Section 5 5-245 Section 5 5-245

5.43 Print Force Envelope Specification 5.43 Print Force Envelope Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command is used to calculate and print force/moment This command is used to calculate and print force/moment
envelopes for frame members. This command is not available for envelopes for frame members. This command is not available for
finite elements. finite elements.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

)25&(  )25&( 
35,17   (19(/23( 16(&7,21 L OLVWVS 35,17   (19(/23( 16(&7,21 L OLVWVS
0$;)25&(  0$;)25&( 
/,67 PHPEOLVW  /,67 PHPEOLVW 
OLVWVSHF   OLVWVSHF  
 $//   $// 

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

Where i is the number of equally spaced sections to be considered Where i is the number of equally spaced sections to be considered
in printing maximum and minimum force envelopes (where i is in in printing maximum and minimum force envelopes (where i is in
the range 2 through 96). If the NSECTION i command is omitted, i the range 2 through 96). If the NSECTION i command is omitted, i
will default to 12. MAXFORCE command produces will default to 12. MAXFORCE command produces
See Section maximum/minimum force values only of all sections, whereas the See Section maximum/minimum force values only of all sections, whereas the
1.19.5 FORCE command prints maximum/minimum force values at every 1.19.5 FORCE command prints maximum/minimum force values at every
section as well as the max/min force values of all sections. The section as well as the max/min force values of all sections. The
force components include FY, MZ, FZ, and MY. Note that the force components include FY, MZ, FZ, and MY. Note that the
SECTION command (as described in section 5.40) does not define SECTION command (as described in section 5.40) does not define
the number of sections for force envelopes. For the sign the number of sections for force envelopes. For the sign
convention of force values, refer to Section 2.19. convention of force values, refer to Section 2.19.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-246 Section 5 5-246 Section 5
([DPSOH ([DPSOH

35,17 )25&( (19 35,17 )25&( (19


35,17 0$;) (19 16  35,17 0$;) (19 16 
35,17 )25&( (19 16  /,67  72  35,17 )25&( (19 16  /,67  72 

1RWHV 1RWHV

This is a secondary analysis command and should be used after This is a secondary analysis command and should be used after
analysis specification. analysis specification.
Section 5 5-247 Section 5 5-247

5.44 Post Analysis Printer Plot Specifications 5.44 Post Analysis Printer Plot Specifications

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command has been discontinued in STAAD.Pro. Please use This command has been discontinued in STAAD.Pro. Please use
GUI for screen and hard copy graphics. GUI for screen and hard copy graphics.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-248 Section 5 5-248 Section 5

5.45 Post Analysis Graphics Display 5.45 Post Analysis Graphics Display

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command has been discontinued in STAAD.Pro. Please use This command has been discontinued in STAAD.Pro. Please use
GUI for screen and hard copy graphics. GUI for screen and hard copy graphics.
Section 5 5-249 Section 5 5-249

5.46 Size Specification 5.46 Size Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command provides an estimate for required section properties This command provides an estimate for required section properties
for a frame member based on certain analysis results and user for a frame member based on certain analysis results and user
requirements. requirements.

*HQHUDO )RUPDW *HQHUDO )RUPDW

:,'7+ I  :,'7+ I 
'()/(&7,21 I   0(0%(5 PHPEHUOLVW  '()/(&7,21 I   0(0%(5 PHPEHUOLVW 
6,=( /(1*7+ I    6,=( /(1*7+ I   
%675(66 I   $//  %675(66 I   $// 
6675(66 I  6675(66 I 

where, where,
f 1 = Maxm. allowable width f 1 = Maxm. allowable width
f 2 = Maxm. allowable (Length/Maxm. local deflection) ratio f 2 = Maxm. allowable (Length/Maxm. local deflection) ratio
f 3 = Length for calculating the above ratio. f 3 = Length for calculating the above ratio.
Default = actual member length. Default = actual member length.
f 4 = Maxm. allowable bending stress. f 4 = Maxm. allowable bending stress.
f 5 = Maxm. allowable shear stress. f 5 = Maxm. allowable shear stress.

Note that the values must be provided in the current unit system. Note that the values must be provided in the current unit system.

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

This command may be used to calculate required section properties for This command may be used to calculate required section properties for
a member based on analysis results and user specified criteria. The a member based on analysis results and user specified criteria. The
user specified criteria may include Member width, Allowable user specified criteria may include Member width, Allowable
(Length/Maxm. Deflection) Ratio, Maxm. allowable bending stress (Length/Maxm. Deflection) Ratio, Maxm. allowable bending stress
and Maximum allowable shear stress. Any number of these criteria and Maximum allowable shear stress. Any number of these criteria
may be used simultaneously. The output includes required Section may be used simultaneously. The output includes required Section
Modulus (about major axis), required Shear Area (for shear parallel to Modulus (about major axis), required Shear Area (for shear parallel to
minor axis), Maxm. moment capacity (about major axis), Maxm. shear minor axis), Maxm. moment capacity (about major axis), Maxm. shear
capacity (for shear parallel to minor axis) and Maxm. (Length/local capacity (for shear parallel to minor axis) and Maxm. (Length/local
maxm. deflection) ratio. maxm. deflection) ratio.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-250 Section 5 5-250 Section 5
([DPSOH ([DPSOH

6,=( :,'  '()/  /(1  %675  $// 6,=( :,'  '()/  /(1  %675  $//
6,=( '()/  %675  0(0%  72  6,=( '()/  %675  0(0%  72 

Note: Note:
It may be noted that sizing will be based on only the criteria It may be noted that sizing will be based on only the criteria
specified by the user in the relevant SIZE command. specified by the user in the relevant SIZE command.

In the first example above, sizing will be based on user specified In the first example above, sizing will be based on user specified
member width of 12, Length/Deflection ratio of 300 (where member width of 12, Length/Deflection ratio of 300 (where
Length= 240) and max. allowable bending stress of 36. Length= 240) and max. allowable bending stress of 36.

In the second example, sizing will be based on Length/Deflection In the second example, sizing will be based on Length/Deflection
ratio of 450 (where Length= actual member length) and max. ratio of 450 (where Length= actual member length) and max.
allowable bending stress of 42. allowable bending stress of 42.

1RWHV 1RWHV

This is a post-analysis facility and must be used after the analysis This is a post-analysis facility and must be used after the analysis
specifications. specifications.
Section 5 5-251 Section 5 5-251

5.47 Steel Design Specifications 5.47 Steel Design Specifications

This section describes all the specifications necessary for structural This section describes all the specifications necessary for structural
steel design. steel design.

Section 5.47.1 discusses specification of all the parameters that Section 5.47.1 discusses specification of all the parameters that
may be used to control the design. Sections 5.47.2 and 5.47.3 may be used to control the design. Sections 5.47.2 and 5.47.3
describes the CODE CHECKING and MEMBER SELECTION describes the CODE CHECKING and MEMBER SELECTION
options respectively. Member Selection by optimization is options respectively. Member Selection by optimization is
discussed in 5.47.4. STAAD also provides facilities for Weld discussed in 5.47.4. STAAD also provides facilities for Weld
Design which are described in 5.47.5. Design which are described in 5.47.5.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-252 Section 5 5-252 Section 5

5.47.1 Parameter Specifications 5.47.1 Parameter Specifications

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This set of commands may be used to specify the parameters This set of commands may be used to specify the parameters
required for steel design. required for steel design.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

3$5$0(7(5 3$5$0(7(5

$$6+72  $$6+72 
$,6&  $,6& 
$,6,  $,6, 
6  6 
$8675$/,$1  $8675$/,$1 
%5,7,6+  %5,7,6+ 
&$1$',$1  &$1$',$1 
&2'( )5(1&+  &2'( )5(1&+ 
*(50$1  *(50$1 
,1',$  ,1',$ 
-$3$1  -$3$1 
/5)'  /5)' 
125:$<  125:$< 

SDUDPHWHUQDPH I  0(0%(5 PHPEOLVW  SDUDPHWHUQDPH I  0(0%(5 PHPEOLVW 


       
352),/( D D D  $//  352),/( D D D  $// 

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

Parameter-name refers to the "PARAMETER NAME" (s) listed in Parameter-name refers to the "PARAMETER NAME" (s) listed in
the parameter table contained in the Steel Design section. the parameter table contained in the Steel Design section.

For a list of parameters for AISC Allowable Stress Design, see For a list of parameters for AISC Allowable Stress Design, see
Table 2.1 of this manual. For a list of parameters for AISC LRFD Table 2.1 of this manual. For a list of parameters for AISC LRFD
Design, see Table 2.2. For steel design per other codes, refer to the Design, see Table 2.2. For steel design per other codes, refer to the
relevant documentation. relevant documentation.

f 1 = Value of the parameter. f 1 = Value of the parameter.


Section 5 5-253 Section 5 5-253

The user can control the design through specification of proper The user can control the design through specification of proper
parameter. parameter.

The PROFILE parameter is available for the AISC ASD code only. The PROFILE parameter is available for the AISC ASD code only.
The user can specify up to three profiles (a 1 , a 2 and a 3 ). Profile, as The user can specify up to three profiles (a 1 , a 2 and a 3 ). Profile, as
described in Table 3.1, is the first three letters of an AISC steel described in Table 3.1, is the first three letters of an AISC steel
table name, e.g. W8X, W12, C10, L20 etc. The PROFILE table name, e.g. W8X, W12, C10, L20 etc. The PROFILE
parameter-name is used only for member selection where members parameter-name is used only for member selection where members
See Section are selected from each of those profile names. The PROFILE for a See Section are selected from each of those profile names. The PROFILE for a
2.3 and T-section is a W-shape. Also, the shape specified under PROFILE 2.3 and T-section is a W-shape. Also, the shape specified under PROFILE
Table 2.1 has to be the same as that specified initially under MEMBER Table 2.1 has to be the same as that specified initially under MEMBER
PROPERTIES. Note that the PROFILE command can only be used PROPERTIES. Note that the PROFILE command can only be used
for the AMERICAN steel table. CODE parameter lets you choose for the AMERICAN steel table. CODE parameter lets you choose
the type of steel code to be checked for design. The default steel the type of steel code to be checked for design. The default steel
code depends on the country of distribution. code depends on the country of distribution.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

3$5$0(7(56 3$5$0(7(56
&2'( $,6& &2'( $,6&
.<  0(0%   72  .<  0(0%   72 
16)  $// 16)  $//
352),/( : : 0(0%    352),/( : : 0(0%   
5$7,2  $// 5$7,2  $//

1RWHV 1RWHV

1) All unit sensitive values should be in the current unit system. 1) All unit sensitive values should be in the current unit system.
2) For default values of the parameters, refer to the appropriate 2) For default values of the parameters, refer to the appropriate
parameter table. parameter table.
3) PROFILE command is available with the American AISC ASD 3) PROFILE command is available with the American AISC ASD
code only. It is not available with the LRFD or AASHTO code only. It is not available with the LRFD or AASHTO
codes. codes.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-254 Section 5 5-254 Section 5

5.47.2 Code Checking Specification 5.47.2 Code Checking Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command may be used to perform the CODE CHECKING This command may be used to perform the CODE CHECKING
operation for steel members. operation for steel members.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

0(0%(5 PHPEOLVW  0(0%(5 PHPEOLVW 


&+(&. &2'(   &+(&. &2'(  
$//  $// 

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

This command checks the specified members against the This command checks the specified members against the
specification of the desired code. Refer to Section 2 of this manual specification of the desired code. Refer to Section 2 of this manual
for detailed information. for detailed information.
See Section See Section
2.5 1RWHV 2.5 1RWHV

The output of this command may be controlled using the TRACK The output of this command may be controlled using the TRACK
parameter. Three levels of details are available. Refer to the parameter. Three levels of details are available. Refer to the
appropriate Steel Design section for more information on the appropriate Steel Design section for more information on the
TRACK parameter. TRACK parameter.
Section 5 5-255 Section 5 5-255

5.47.3 Member Selection Specification 5.47.3 Member Selection Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command may be used to perform the MEMBER SELECTION This command may be used to perform the MEMBER SELECTION
operation. operation.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

0(0%(5 PHPEOLVW  0(0%(5 PHPEOLVW 


6(/(&7   6(/(&7  
$//  $// 

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

This command instructs STAAD to select specified members based This command instructs STAAD to select specified members based
on the parameter value restrictions and specified code. The on the parameter value restrictions and specified code. The
selection is done using the results from the most recent analysis selection is done using the results from the most recent analysis
and iterating on sections until a least weight size is obtained. Refer and iterating on sections until a least weight size is obtained. Refer
to Section 2 for more details. to Section 2 for more details.
MEMBER or ALL is required. MEMBER or ALL is required.

1RWHV 1RWHV

1) The output of this command may be controlled using the 1) The output of this command may be controlled using the
TRACK parameter. Three levels of details are available. Refer TRACK parameter. Three levels of details are available. Refer
to the appropriate Steel Design section for more information on to the appropriate Steel Design section for more information on
the TRACK parameter. the TRACK parameter.
2) Member selection can be done only after an analysis has been 2) Member selection can be done only after an analysis has been
performed. Consequently, the command to perform the performed. Consequently, the command to perform the
analysis has to be specified before the SELECT MEMBER analysis has to be specified before the SELECT MEMBER
command can be specified. command can be specified.
3) This command does not cause the program to re-analyze for 3) This command does not cause the program to re-analyze for
results based on the selected member sizes. However, to results based on the selected member sizes. However, to
maintain compatibility of analysis results with the final member maintain compatibility of analysis results with the final member
sizes, you should enter a subsequent PERFORM ANALYSIS sizes, you should enter a subsequent PERFORM ANALYSIS
command. Otherwise the post processor will display the prior command. Otherwise the post processor will display the prior
results with the revised member sizes. results with the revised member sizes.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-256 Section 5 5-256 Section 5

5.47.4 Member Selection by Optimization 5.47.4 Member Selection by Optimization

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command performs member selection using an optimized This command performs member selection using an optimized
technique based on multiple analysis/design iterations. technique based on multiple analysis/design iterations.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

6(/(&7 237,0,=(' 6(/(&7 237,0,=('

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

The program selects all members based on an optimization The program selects all members based on an optimization
technique. This method performs 2 analyses as well as iteration of technique. This method performs 2 analyses as well as iteration of
sizes to reduce the overall structure weight. This command should sizes to reduce the overall structure weight. This command should
be used with caution since it will require longer processing time. be used with caution since it will require longer processing time.

1RWHV 1RWHV

1) The output of this command may be controlled using the 1) The output of this command may be controlled using the
TRACK parameter. Three levels of details are available. Refer TRACK parameter. Three levels of details are available. Refer
to the appropriate Steel Design section for more information on to the appropriate Steel Design section for more information on
the TRACK parameter. the TRACK parameter.

2) This command will perform 1 additional analysis/design cycles 2) This command will perform 1 additional analysis/design cycles
and therefore may be time consuming. See section 5.48 Group and therefore may be time consuming. See section 5.48 Group
Specification for other options used with this command. You Specification for other options used with this command. You
may want to repeat this command for further optimization. may want to repeat this command for further optimization.

3) See section 5.47.3 note 3). 3) See section 5.47.3 note 3).
Section 5 5-257 Section 5 5-257

5.47.5 Weld Selection Specification 5.47.5 Weld Selection Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command performs selection of weld sizes for specified This command performs selection of weld sizes for specified
members. members.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

0(0%(5 PHPEOLVW  0(0%(5 PHPEOLVW 


6(/(&7 :(/' 75866   6(/(&7 :(/' 75866  
$//  $// 

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

By this command, the program selects the weld sizes of the By this command, the program selects the weld sizes of the
specified members at start and end. The selections are tabulated specified members at start and end. The selections are tabulated
with all the necessary information. If the TRUSS command is used, with all the necessary information. If the TRUSS command is used,
the program will design welds for angle and double angle members the program will design welds for angle and double angle members
attached to gusset plates with the weld along the length of attached to gusset plates with the weld along the length of
members. members.

1RWHV 1RWHV

The weld size calculation may also be controlled parametrically. The weld size calculation may also be controlled parametrically.
For information on available parameters, refer to the appropriate For information on available parameters, refer to the appropriate
Steel Design section. Steel Design section.

MEMBER or ALL is required. MEMBER or ALL is required.


STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-258 Section 5 5-258 Section 5

5.48 Group Specification 5.48 Group Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command may be used to group members together for analysis This command may be used to group members together for analysis
and steel design. and steel design.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

),;(' *5283 ),;(' *5283


*5283 SURSVSHF 0(0% PHPEOLVW 6$0( $6 L *5283 SURSVSHF 0(0% PHPEOLVW 6$0( $6 L

$;  &URVVVHFWLRQ DUHD $;  &URVVVHFWLRQ DUHD


SURSVSHF 6<  6HFWLRQ PRGXOXV LQ ORFDO \D[LV SURSVSHF 6<  6HFWLRQ PRGXOXV LQ ORFDO \D[LV
6=  6HFWLRQ PRGXOXV LQ ORFDO ]D[LV 6=  6HFWLRQ PRGXOXV LQ ORFDO ]D[LV

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

This command enables the program to group specified members This command enables the program to group specified members
together for analysis based on their largest property specification. together for analysis based on their largest property specification.
If member number i 1 is provided in SAME AS command, the If member number i 1 is provided in SAME AS command, the
program will group the members based on the properties of i 1 . This program will group the members based on the properties of i 1 . This
command is usually used after the member selection, where the command is usually used after the member selection, where the
members can be grouped for further processing. If the FIXED members can be grouped for further processing. If the FIXED
GROUP option is used, the specified grouping will be retained in GROUP option is used, the specified grouping will be retained in
memory by the program and will be used in subsequent member memory by the program and will be used in subsequent member
select operations and the results of the "GROUPing" will not be select operations and the results of the "GROUPing" will not be
seen unless a "SELECT MEMBER" operation is performed. seen unless a "SELECT MEMBER" operation is performed.

([DPSOH  ([DPSOH 

*5283 6= 0(0%    72   *5283 6= 0(0%    72  


*5283 0(0%  72   6$0( $6  *5283 0(0%  72   6$0( $6 

In this example, the members 1, 3, 7 to 12, and 15 are assigned the In this example, the members 1, 3, 7 to 12, and 15 are assigned the
same properties based on which of these members has the largest same properties based on which of these members has the largest
section modulus. Members 17 to 23 and 27 are assigned the same section modulus. Members 17 to 23 and 27 are assigned the same
properties as member 30, regardless of whether member 30 has a properties as member 30, regardless of whether member 30 has a
Section 5 5-259 Section 5 5-259
smaller or larger cross-sectional area. AX is the default smaller or larger cross-sectional area. AX is the default
property upon which grouping is based. property upon which grouping is based.

([DPSOH  ([DPSOH 

),;(' *5283 ),;(' *5283


*5283 0(0%  72  *5283 0(0%  72 
6(/(&7 237,0,=(' 6(/(&7 237,0,=('

In the above example, the usage of the FIXED GROUP command is In the above example, the usage of the FIXED GROUP command is
illustrated. The SELECT OPTIMIZED command involves the 3 illustrated. The SELECT OPTIMIZED command involves the 3
stage process of stage process of

1) MEMBER SELECTION based on initial/prior analysis results 1) MEMBER SELECTION based on initial/prior analysis results
2) GROUPing of members 1 TO 5 2) GROUPing of members 1 TO 5
3) RE-ANALYSIS 3) RE-ANALYSIS

The FIXED GROUP command is required for execution of step 2 The FIXED GROUP command is required for execution of step 2
in the cycle. You may want to repeat this data for further in the cycle. You may want to repeat this data for further
optimization. optimization.

1RWHV 1RWHV

This command is typically used after the member selection for This command is typically used after the member selection for
further analysis and design. This facility may be very effectively further analysis and design. This facility may be very effectively
utilized to develop a practically oriented design where several utilized to develop a practically oriented design where several
members need to be of the same size. members need to be of the same size.

Also see section 5.47.3 note 3). Also see section 5.47.3 note 3).
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-260 Section 5 5-260 Section 5

5.49 Steel Take Off Specification 5.49 Steel Take Off Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command may be used to obtain a summary of all steel This command may be used to obtain a summary of all steel
sections being used along with their lengths and weights. sections being used along with their lengths and weights.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

67((/ 0(0%(5 7$.( 2)) 67((/ 0(0%(5 7$.( 2))

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

This command provides a complete listing of all different steel This command provides a complete listing of all different steel
table sections used in the structure. The tabulated listing will table sections used in the structure. The tabulated listing will
include total length of each section name and its total weight. This include total length of each section name and its total weight. This
can be helpful in estimating steel quantities. can be helpful in estimating steel quantities.

The MEMBER option list each member length and weight by The MEMBER option list each member length and weight by
number, profile-type, length and weight. number, profile-type, length and weight.

1RWHV 1RWHV

This facility may be very effectively utilized to obtain a quick This facility may be very effectively utilized to obtain a quick
estimate of the structural steel quantity. estimate of the structural steel quantity.
Section 5 5-261 Section 5 5-261

5.50 Timber Design Specifications 5.50 Timber Design Specifications

This section describes the specifications required for timber This section describes the specifications required for timber
design. Detailed description of the timber design procedures is design. Detailed description of the timber design procedures is
available in Section 4. available in Section 4.

Section 4.50.1 describes specification of parameters for timber Section 4.50.1 describes specification of parameters for timber
design. Sections 4.50.2 and 4.50.3 discusses the code checking and design. Sections 4.50.2 and 4.50.3 discusses the code checking and
member selection facilities respectively. member selection facilities respectively.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-262 Section 5 5-262 Section 5

5.50.1 Timber Design Parameter Specifications 5.50.1 Timber Design Parameter Specifications

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This set of commands may be used for specification of parameters This set of commands may be used for specification of parameters
for timber design. for timber design.

*HQHUDO )RUPDW *HQHUDO )RUPDW

3$5$0(7(5 3$5$0(7(5

&2'( 7,0%(5 &2'( 7,0%(5

 0(0%(5 PHPEHUOLVW   0(0%(5 PHPEHUOLVW 


SDUDPHWHUQDPH I   SDUDPHWHUQDPH I  
 $//   $// 

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

f 1 = the value of the parameter. f 1 = the value of the parameter.


Note that the parameter-name refers to the parameters described in Note that the parameter-name refers to the parameters described in
Section 4. Section 4.

1RWHV 1RWHV

1) All values must be provided in the current unit system. 1) All values must be provided in the current unit system.

2) For default values of parameters, refer to Section 4. 2) For default values of parameters, refer to Section 4.
Section 5 5-263 Section 5 5-263

5.50.2 Code Checking Specification 5.50.2 Code Checking Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command performs code checking operation on specified This command performs code checking operation on specified
members based on the American Institute of Timber Construction members based on the American Institute of Timber Construction
(AITC) codes. (AITC) codes.

*HQHUDO )RUPDW *HQHUDO )RUPDW

 0(0%(5 PHPEHUOLVW   0(0%(5 PHPEHUOLVW 


&+(&. &2'(   &+(&. &2'(  
 $//   $// 

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

This command checks the specified members against the This command checks the specified members against the
requirements of the American Institute of Timber Construction requirements of the American Institute of Timber Construction
(AITC) codes. The results of the code checking are summarized in (AITC) codes. The results of the code checking are summarized in
a tabular format. Examples and detailed explanations of the tabular a tabular format. Examples and detailed explanations of the tabular
format are available in Section 4. format are available in Section 4.

1RWHV 1RWHV

The output of this command may be controlled by the TRACK The output of this command may be controlled by the TRACK
parameter. Two levels of details are available. Refer to Section 4 parameter. Two levels of details are available. Refer to Section 4
for detailed information on the TRACK parameter. for detailed information on the TRACK parameter.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-264 Section 5 5-264 Section 5

5.50.3 Member Selection Specification 5.50.3 Member Selection Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command performs member selection operation on specified This command performs member selection operation on specified
members based on the American Institute of Timber Construction members based on the American Institute of Timber Construction
(AITC) codes. (AITC) codes.

*HQHUDO )RUPDW *HQHUDO )RUPDW

 0(0%(5 PHPEHUOLVW   0(0%(5 PHPEHUOLVW 


6(/(&7   6(/(&7  
 $//   $// 

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

This command may be used to perform member selection according This command may be used to perform member selection according
to the AITC codes. The selection is based on the results of the to the AITC codes. The selection is based on the results of the
latest analysis and iterations are performed until the least weight latest analysis and iterations are performed until the least weight
member satisfying all the applicable code requirements is obtained. member satisfying all the applicable code requirements is obtained.
Parameters may be used to control the design and the results are Parameters may be used to control the design and the results are
available in a tabular format. Detailed explanations of the selection available in a tabular format. Detailed explanations of the selection
process and the output are available in Section 5. process and the output are available in Section 5.

1RWHV 1RWHV

The output of this command may be controlled by the TRACK The output of this command may be controlled by the TRACK
parameter. Two levels of details are available. Refer to Section 5 parameter. Two levels of details are available. Refer to Section 5
for detailed information on the TRACK parameter. for detailed information on the TRACK parameter.
Section 5 5-265 Section 5 5-265

5.51 Concrete Design Specifications 5.51 Concrete Design Specifications

This section describes the specifications for concrete design. The This section describes the specifications for concrete design. The
concrete design procedure implemented in STAAD consists of the concrete design procedure implemented in STAAD consists of the
following steps: following steps:

1) Initiating the design. 1) Initiating the design.


2) Specifying parameters. 2) Specifying parameters.
3) Specifying design requirements. 3) Specifying design requirements.
4) Requesting quantity take-off. 4) Requesting quantity take-off.
5) Terminating the design. 5) Terminating the design.

Section 5.51.1 describes the design initiation command. Section Section 5.51.1 describes the design initiation command. Section
5.51.2 discusses the specification of parameters. Design 5.51.2 discusses the specification of parameters. Design
requirement specifications are described 5.51.3. The CONCRETE requirement specifications are described 5.51.3. The CONCRETE
TAKE OFF command is described in 5.51.4. Finally, the design TAKE OFF command is described in 5.51.4. Finally, the design
termination command is described in 5.51.5. termination command is described in 5.51.5.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-266 Section 5 5-266 Section 5

5.51.1 Design Initiation 5.51.1 Design Initiation

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command is used to initiate the concrete design. This command is used to initiate the concrete design.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

67$57 &21&5(7( '(6,*1 67$57 &21&5(7( '(6,*1

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

This command initiates the concrete design specification. With This command initiates the concrete design specification. With
this, the design parameters are automatically set to the default this, the design parameters are automatically set to the default
values (as shown on Table 4.1). Without this command, none of the values (as shown on Table 4.1). Without this command, none of the
following concrete design commands will be recognized. following concrete design commands will be recognized.

1RWHV 1RWHV

This command must be present before any concrete design This command must be present before any concrete design
command is used. command is used.
Section 5 5-267 Section 5 5-267

5.51.2 Concrete Design-Parameter Specification 5.51.2 Concrete Design-Parameter Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This set of commands may be used to specify parameters to control This set of commands may be used to specify parameters to control
the concrete design. the concrete design.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

$&,  $&, 
%5,7,6+  %5,7,6+ 
&$1$',$1  &$1$',$1 
&2'( )5(1&+  &2'( )5(1&+ 
*(50$1  *(50$1 
,1',$  ,1',$ 
-$3$1  -$3$1 
125:$<  125:$< 

0(0%(5 PHPEHOHP OLVW  0(0%(5 PHPEHOHP OLVW 


SDUDPHWHUQDPH I   SDUDPHWHUQDPH I  
 $//   $// 

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

Parameter-name refers to the concrete parameters described in Parameter-name refers to the concrete parameters described in
Table 4.1. Table 4.1.

f 1 = is the value of the parameter. Note that this value is always f 1 = is the value of the parameter. Note that this value is always
input in current units. The UNIT command is also accepted input in current units. The UNIT command is also accepted
during any phase of concrete design. during any phase of concrete design.

1RWHV 1RWHV

1) All parameter values are provided in the current unit system. 1) All parameter values are provided in the current unit system.

2) For default values of parameters, refer to Section 3. 2) For default values of parameters, refer to Section 3.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-268 Section 5 5-268 Section 5

5.51.3 Concrete Design Command 5.51.3 Concrete Design Command

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command may be used to specify the type of design required. This command may be used to specify the type of design required.
Members may be designed as BEAM, COLUMN or ELEMENT. Members may be designed as BEAM, COLUMN or ELEMENT.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

%($0  %($0 
'(6,*1 &2/801  PHPEOLVW  '(6,*1 &2/801  PHPEOLVW 
(/(0(17  $//  (/(0(17  $// 
6/$%  6/$% 

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

Members to be designed must be specified as BEAM, COLUMN or Members to be designed must be specified as BEAM, COLUMN or
ELEMENT. Note that members, once designed as beam, cannot be ELEMENT. Note that members, once designed as beam, cannot be
redesigned as a column again, or vice versa. redesigned as a column again, or vice versa.

1RWHV 1RWHV

Only plate elements may be designed as ELEMENT. Only plate elements may be designed as ELEMENT.
Enter this command after the parameters needed for this command Enter this command after the parameters needed for this command
have been entered. have been entered.
Section 5 5-269 Section 5 5-269

5.51.4 Concrete Take Off Command 5.51.4 Concrete Take Off Command

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command may be used to obtain an estimate of the total This command may be used to obtain an estimate of the total
volume of the concrete, reinforcement bars used and their volume of the concrete, reinforcement bars used and their
respective weights. respective weights.

*HQHUDO )RUPDW *HQHUDO )RUPDW

&21&5(7( 7$.( 2)) &21&5(7( 7$.( 2))

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

This command can be issued to print the total volume of concrete This command can be issued to print the total volume of concrete
and the bar numbers and their respective weight for the members and the bar numbers and their respective weight for the members
designed. designed.

SAMPLE OUTPUT: SAMPLE OUTPUT:

************** CONCRETE TAKE OFF ************** ************** CONCRETE TAKE OFF **************
(FOR BEAMS AND COLUMNS DESIGNED ABOVE) (FOR BEAMS AND COLUMNS DESIGNED ABOVE)

TOTAL VOLUME OF CONCRETE = 87.50 TOTAL VOLUME OF CONCRETE = 87.50

BAR SIZE WEIGHT BAR SIZE WEIGHT


NUMBER ( ) NUMBER ( )
-------- -------- -------- --------
4 805.03 4 805.03
6 91.60 6 91.60
8 1137.60 8 1137.60
9 653.84 9 653.84
11 818.67 11 818.67
------------ ------------
*** TOTAL = 3506.74 *** TOTAL = 3506.74

1RWHV 1RWHV

This command may be used very effectively for quick quantity This command may be used very effectively for quick quantity
estimates. estimates.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-270 Section 5 5-270 Section 5

5.51.5 Concrete Design Terminator 5.51.5 Concrete Design Terminator

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command must be used to terminate the concrete design. This command must be used to terminate the concrete design.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

(1' &21&5(7( '(6,*1 (1' &21&5(7( '(6,*1

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

This command terminates the concrete design, after which normal This command terminates the concrete design, after which normal
STAAD commands resume. STAAD commands resume.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

67$57 &21&5(7( '(6,*1 67$57 &21&5(7( '(6,*1


&2'( $&, &2'( $&,
)<0$,1  $// )<0$,1  $//
)&  $// )&  $//
'(6,*1 %($0  72   '(6,*1 %($0  72  
'(6,*1 &2/801   72  '(6,*1 &2/801   72 
'(6,*1 (/(0(17  72  '(6,*1 (/(0(17  72 
(1' (1'

1RWHV 1RWHV

Without this command, further STAAD commands will not be Without this command, further STAAD commands will not be
recognized. recognized.
Section 5 5-271 Section 5 5-271

5.52 Footing Design Specifications 5.52 Footing Design Specifications

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This set of commands may be used to specify footing design This set of commands may be used to specify footing design
requirements. Sections 5.52.1 through 5.52.4 describe the process requirements. Sections 5.52.1 through 5.52.4 describe the process
of design initiation, parameter specification, design command and of design initiation, parameter specification, design command and
design termination. design termination.

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

This facility may be used to design isolated footings for user This facility may be used to design isolated footings for user
specified support joints. Once the support is specified, the program specified support joints. Once the support is specified, the program
automatically identifies the support reaction(s) associated with the automatically identifies the support reaction(s) associated with the
joint. All active load cases are checked and design is performed for joint. All active load cases are checked and design is performed for
the support reaction(s) that requires the maximum footing size. the support reaction(s) that requires the maximum footing size.
Parameters are available to control the design. Dowel bars and Parameters are available to control the design. Dowel bars and
development lengths are also calculated and included in the design development lengths are also calculated and included in the design
output. output.

Design Considerations Design Considerations


The STAAD isolated footing design is based on the following The STAAD isolated footing design is based on the following
considerations. considerations.

1) The design reaction load may include concentrated load and 1) The design reaction load may include concentrated load and
biaxial moments. biaxial moments.
2) The vertical reaction load is increased by 10% to account for 2) The vertical reaction load is increased by 10% to account for
the selfweight of the footing. the selfweight of the footing.
3) Footing slab size is rectangular. The user through a parameter 3) Footing slab size is rectangular. The user through a parameter
may control the ratio between the length and the width of the may control the ratio between the length and the width of the
slab. slab.
4) Optional pedestal design is available. 4) Optional pedestal design is available.
5) Footings cannot be designed at supports where the reaction 5) Footings cannot be designed at supports where the reaction
causes uplift on the footings. causes uplift on the footings.
6) This facility is currently available for the American code only. 6) This facility is currently available for the American code only.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-272 Section 5 5-272 Section 5

Design Procedure Design Procedure


The following sequential design procedure is followed: The following sequential design procedure is followed:

1) Footing size is calculated on the basis of the load directly 1) Footing size is calculated on the basis of the load directly
available from the analysis results (support reactions) and user available from the analysis results (support reactions) and user
specified Allowable Soil Pressure. No factor is used on the specified Allowable Soil Pressure. No factor is used on the
support reactions. support reactions.
2) The footing size obtained from 1) and the FACTORED LOAD 2) The footing size obtained from 1) and the FACTORED LOAD
is utilized to calculate soil reactions. is utilized to calculate soil reactions.
FACTORED LOAD = ACTUAL REACTION X Parameter FFAC FACTORED LOAD = ACTUAL REACTION X Parameter FFAC

Note that the user may provide a desired value for parameter Note that the user may provide a desired value for parameter
FFAC. FFAC.

3) Footing depth and reinforcement details are based on soil 3) Footing depth and reinforcement details are based on soil
reactions calculated per 2) above. reactions calculated per 2) above.
4) Dowel bar requirements and development lengths are 4) Dowel bar requirements and development lengths are
calculated and reported in the output. calculated and reported in the output.

Following parameters are available for footing design. Following parameters are available for footing design.

'HVLJQ3DUDPHWHUV 'HVLJQ3DUDPHWHUV
3DUDPHWHU 'HIDXOW 'HVFULSWLRQ 3DUDPHWHU 'HIDXOW 'HVFULSWLRQ
1DPH 9DOXH 1DPH 9DOXH

)<  SL <LHOG VWUHQJWK IRU )<  SL <LHOG VWUHQJWK IRU
UHLQIRUFHPHQW VWHHO UHLQIRUFHPHQW VWHHO

)&  SL &RPSUHVVLYH 6WUHQJWK RI )&  SL &RPSUHVVLYH 6WUHQJWK RI


&RQFUHWH &RQFUHWH

&/($5  LQ &OHDU FRYHU IRU VODE &/($5  LQ &OHDU FRYHU IRU VODE
UHLQIRUFHPHQW UHLQIRUFHPHQW

5(,1) 1XPEHU  EDU 0DLQ UHLQIRUFHPHQW EDU VL]H 5(,1) 1XPEHU  EDU 0DLQ UHLQIRUFHPHQW EDU VL]H
IRU VODE GHVLJQ IRU VODE GHVLJQ

))$&  /RDG IDFWRU IRU FRQFUHWH ))$&  /RDG IDFWRU IRU FRQFUHWH
GHVLJQ GHVLJQ

%&  SVI 6RLO EHDULQJ FDSDFLW\ %&  SVI 6RLO EHDULQJ FDSDFLW\

5$7,2  5DWLR EHWZHHQ VODE VLGHV 5$7,2  5DWLR EHWZHHQ VODE VLGHV
Section 5 5-273 Section 5 5-273

'HVLJQ3DUDPHWHUV&RQW 'HVLJQ3DUDPHWHUV&RQW
3DUDPHWHU 'HIDXOW 'HVFULSWLRQ 3DUDPHWHU 'HIDXOW 'HVFULSWLRQ
1DPH 9DOXH 1DPH 9DOXH

75$&.   RQO\ QXPHULFDO RXWSXW LV 75$&.   RQO\ QXPHULFDO RXWSXW LV
SURYLGHG SURYLGHG
 QXPHULFDO RXWSXW DQG  QXPHULFDO RXWSXW DQG
VNHWFK SURYLGHG VNHWFK SURYLGHG

'(37+ &DOFXODWHG E\ 7KH PLQ GHSWK RI WKH IRRWLQJ '(37+ &DOFXODWHG E\ 7KH PLQ GHSWK RI WKH IRRWLQJ
WKH SURJUDP EDVH VODE 3URJUDP FKDQJHV WKH SURJUDP EDVH VODE 3URJUDP FKDQJHV
WKLV YDOXH LI UHTXLUHG IRU WKLV YDOXH LI UHTXLUHG IRU
GHVLJQ GHVLJQ

6 6 &DOFXODWHG E\ 6L]H RI WKH IRRWLQJ EDVH VODE  6 6 &DOFXODWHG E\ 6L]H RI WKH IRRWLQJ EDVH VODE 
WKH SURJUDP 6 DQG 6 FRUUHVSRQG WR WKH SURJUDP 6 DQG 6 FRUUHVSRQG WR
FROXPQ VLGHV <' DQG =' FROXPQ VLGHV <' DQG ='
UHVSHFWLYHO\ (LWKHU 6 RU 6 UHVSHFWLYHO\ (LWKHU 6 RU 6
RU ERWK FDQ EH VSHFLILHG ,I RQH RU ERWK FDQ EH VSHFLILHG ,I RQH
LV SURYLGHG WKH RWKHU ZLOO EH LV SURYLGHG WKH RWKHU ZLOO EH
FDOFXODWHG EDVHG RQ 5$7,2 ,I FDOFXODWHG EDVHG RQ 5$7,2 ,I
ERWK DUH SURYLGHG 5$7,2 ZLOO ERWK DUH SURYLGHG 5$7,2 ZLOO
EH LJQRUHG EH LJQRUHG

(0%('0(  7KH GHSWK RI WKH IRRWLQJ EDVH (0%('0(  7KH GHSWK RI WKH IRRWLQJ EDVH
17 IURP WKH VXSSRUW SRLQW RI WKH 17 IURP WKH VXSSRUW SRLQW RI WKH
FROXPQ FROXPQ

3('(67$/   QR SHGHVWDO GHVLJQ 3('(67$/   QR SHGHVWDO GHVLJQ
 SHGHVWDO GHVLJQ ZLWK  SHGHVWDO GHVLJQ ZLWK
SURJUDP FDOFXODWLQJ SURJUDP FDOFXODWLQJ
SHGHVWDO GLPHQVLRQV SHGHVWDO GLPHQVLRQV
; ;  SHGHVWDO GHVLJQ ZLWK ; ;  SHGHVWDO GHVLJQ ZLWK
XVHU SURYLGHG SHGHVWDO XVHU SURYLGHG SHGHVWDO
GLPHQVLRQV ; DQG ; DUH GLPHQVLRQV ; DQG ; DUH
SHGHVWDO GLPHQVLRQV SHGHVWDO GLPHQVLRQV
FRUUHVSRQGLQJ WR VODE VLGHV 6 FRUUHVSRQGLQJ WR VODE VLGHV 6
DQG 6 UHVSHFWLYHO\ DQG 6 UHVSHFWLYHO\
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-274 Section 5 5-274 Section 5

5.52.1 Design Initiation 5.52.1 Design Initiation

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command must be used to initiate the footing design. This command must be used to initiate the footing design.

*HQHUDO )RUPDW *HQHUDO )RUPDW

67$57 )227,1* '(6,*1 67$57 )227,1* '(6,*1

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

This command initiates the footing design specifications. Without This command initiates the footing design specifications. Without
this command, no further footing design command will be this command, no further footing design command will be
recognized. recognized.

1RWHV 1RWHV

No footing design specification will be processed without this No footing design specification will be processed without this
command. command.
Section 5 5-275 Section 5 5-275

5.52.2 Footing Design Parameter Specification 5.52.2 Footing Design Parameter Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command is used to specify parameters that may be used to This command is used to specify parameters that may be used to
control the footing design. control the footing design.

*HQHUDO )RUPDW *HQHUDO )RUPDW

&2'( $0(5,&$1 &2'( $0(5,&$1

-2,17 MRLQWOLVW  -2,17 MRLQWOLVW 


SDUDPHWHUQDPH I   SDUDPHWHUQDPH I  
 $//   $// 

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

Parameter-name refers to the parameters described in Section 5.52. Parameter-name refers to the parameters described in Section 5.52.

f  is the value of the parameter. Note that this value should be in f  is the value of the parameter. Note that this value should be in
the current units. The UNIT command is also accepted during the current units. The UNIT command is also accepted during
any phase of footing design. any phase of footing design.

1RWHV 1RWHV

1) All parameter values must be provided in the current unit 1) All parameter values must be provided in the current unit
system. system.
2) For default values of parameters, refer to the parameter table in 2) For default values of parameters, refer to the parameter table in
Section 5.52. Section 5.52.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-276 Section 5 5-276 Section 5

5.52.3 Footing Design Command 5.52.3 Footing Design Command

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command must be used to execute the footing design. This command must be used to execute the footing design.

*HQHUDO )RUPDW *HQHUDO )RUPDW

'(6,*1 )227,1*  MRLQWOLVW  '(6,*1 )227,1*  MRLQWOLVW 


 $//   $// 

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

This command may be used to specify the joints for which the This command may be used to specify the joints for which the
footing designs are required. footing designs are required.

1RWHV 1RWHV

The output of this command may be controlled by the TRACK The output of this command may be controlled by the TRACK
parameter (see Section 5.52). If TRACK is set to the default value parameter (see Section 5.52). If TRACK is set to the default value
of 1.0, only numerical output will be provided. If TRACK is set to of 1.0, only numerical output will be provided. If TRACK is set to
2.0, graphical output will be provided in addition. 2.0, graphical output will be provided in addition.
Section 5 5-277 Section 5 5-277
(;$03/( (;$03/(

67$57 )227,1* '(6,*1 67$57 )227,1* '(6,*1


&2'( $0(5,&$1 &2'( $0(5,&$1
81,7    81,7   
)<  -2,17  )<  -2,17 
)<  -2,17  )<  -2,17 
)&  $// )&  $//
5$7,2  $// 5$7,2  $//
75$&.  $// 75$&.  $//
3('(67$/  $// 3('(67$/  $//
81,7    81,7   
&/($5  &/($5 
%&  -2,17  %&  -2,17 
%&  -2,17  %&  -2,17 
'(6,*1 )227,1*     '(6,*1 )227,1*    
(1' )227,1* '(6,*1 (1' )227,1* '(6,*1
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-278 Section 5 5-278 Section 5

5.52.4 Footing Design Terminator 5.52.4 Footing Design Terminator

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command must be used to terminate the footing design. This command must be used to terminate the footing design.

*HQHUDO )RUPDW *HQHUDO )RUPDW

(1' )227,1* '(6,*1 (1' )227,1* '(6,*1

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

This command terminates the footing design. This command terminates the footing design.

1RWHV 1RWHV

If the footing design is not terminated, no further STAAD If the footing design is not terminated, no further STAAD
command will be recognized. command will be recognized.
Section 5 5-279 Section 5 5-279

5.53 End Run Specification 5.53 End Run Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command must be used to terminate the STAAD run. This command must be used to terminate the STAAD run.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

),1,6+ ),1,6+

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

This command should be provided as the last input command. This This command should be provided as the last input command. This
terminates a STAAD run. terminates a STAAD run.
STAAD Commands and Input Instructions STAAD Commands and Input Instructions
5-280 Section 5 5-280 Section 5
6-1 6-1

STARDYNE for STAAD.PRO STARDYNE for STAAD.PRO

Section 6 Section 6

6.1 Introduction 6.1 Introduction

STAAD.Pro offers two analysis engines – STAAD and STAAD.Pro offers two analysis engines – STAAD and
STARDYNE. The STAAD analysis engine has been described in STARDYNE. The STAAD analysis engine has been described in
section 1 of this manual. The STARDYNE analysis engine is section 1 of this manual. The STARDYNE analysis engine is
discussed in this section. discussed in this section.

STARDYNE was the first commercially available finite element STARDYNE was the first commercially available finite element
analysis software for dynamic analysis and has been in use analysis software for dynamic analysis and has been in use
throughout the world for over 35 years. STARDYNE offers the throughout the world for over 35 years. STARDYNE offers the
structural analyst a reliable and easy to use method to solve any structural analyst a reliable and easy to use method to solve any
problem in static and dynamic analysis. problem in static and dynamic analysis.

This section of the manual contains a general description of the This section of the manual contains a general description of the
analysis capabilities available in STARDYNE. Detailed command analysis capabilities available in STARDYNE. Detailed command
formats and other specific user information is the same as in formats and other specific user information is the same as in
STAAD engine (see Section 5). In addition, several analysis- STAAD engine (see Section 5). In addition, several analysis-
related options may be specified just before the Analysis is related options may be specified just before the Analysis is
performed. For explanation of these options, please refer to performed. For explanation of these options, please refer to
Section 3 of the STAAD.Pro Graphical Environment manual. Section 3 of the STAAD.Pro Graphical Environment manual.

The objective of this section is to familiarize the user with the The objective of this section is to familiarize the user with the
basic principles involved in the implementation of the various basic principles involved in the implementation of the various
analysis capabilities. analysis capabilities.
STARDYNE for STAAD.Pro STARDYNE for STAAD.Pro
6-2 Section 6 6-2 Section 6

6.2 Input Generation – STARDYNE 6.2 Input Generation – STARDYNE

Input is generated through the STAAD.Pro model generation Input is generated through the STAAD.Pro model generation
facilities. Please refer to the STAAD.Pro Graphical Environment facilities. Please refer to the STAAD.Pro Graphical Environment
manual for detailed description. Not all of the Stardyne features manual for detailed description. Not all of the Stardyne features
referred to in this section can be accessed from the Staad.Pro referred to in this section can be accessed from the Staad.Pro
interface. interface.

6.3 Types of Structures – STARDYNE 6.3 Types of Structures – STARDYNE

A STRUCTURE can be defined as an assemblage of elements. A STRUCTURE can be defined as an assemblage of elements.
STARDYNE is capable of analyzing structures consisting of beam STARDYNE is capable of analyzing structures consisting of beam
elements, plate/shell elements, solid elements, and/or matrix elements, plate/shell elements, solid elements, and/or matrix
elements. Almost any type of structure can be analyzed by elements. Almost any type of structure can be analyzed by
STARDYNE. STARDYNE.

6.4 Unit Systems – STARDYNE 6.4 Unit Systems – STARDYNE

The STARDYNE analysis may be conducted in any consistent The STARDYNE analysis may be conducted in any consistent
uniform unit system. STARDYNE intermediate output files, if uniform unit system. STARDYNE intermediate output files, if
inspected, will be in a consistent unit system chosen in any inspected, will be in a consistent unit system chosen in any
consistent uniform unit system. STAAD.Pro provides a seamless consistent uniform unit system. STAAD.Pro provides a seamless
translation to and from the analysis modules so that the user need translation to and from the analysis modules so that the user need
not be concerned with the unit system used in Stardyne (usually not be concerned with the unit system used in Stardyne (usually
Kip-Inch) by the translator. Kip-Inch) by the translator.

6.5 Structure Geometry and Coordinate 6.5 Structure Geometry and Coordinate
Systems–STARDYNE Systems–STARDYNE

A structure is an assembly of individual physical components such A structure is an assembly of individual physical components such
as beams, columns, slabs, plates etc.. In STARDYNE, the finite as beams, columns, slabs, plates etc.. In STARDYNE, the finite
element model will consist of those physical components being element model will consist of those physical components being
subdivided into one or more finite elements per component. subdivided into one or more finite elements per component.
Section 6 6-3 Section 6 6-3
Typically, modeling of the structure geometry consists of two Typically, modeling of the structure geometry consists of two
steps: steps:

A. Identification and description of nodes. A. Identification and description of nodes.


B. Modeling of elements through specification of B. Modeling of elements through specification of
connectivity (incidences) between nodes. connectivity (incidences) between nodes.

Note that subdividing individual physical components, such as an Note that subdividing individual physical components, such as an
I-beam, into several beam finite elements may improve the I-beam, into several beam finite elements may improve the
dynamic response and sometimes improve static response as well. dynamic response and sometimes improve static response as well.
So the user should not think that there must be a one for one So the user should not think that there must be a one for one
correspondence between physical components and the finite correspondence between physical components and the finite
elements. elements.

STARDYNE uses two types of coordinate systems to define the STARDYNE uses two types of coordinate systems to define the
structure geometry and loading patterns. The GLOBAL coordinate structure geometry and loading patterns. The GLOBAL coordinate
system is an arbitrary coordinate system in space that is utilized to system is an arbitrary coordinate system in space that is utilized to
specify the overall geometry & loading pattern of the structure. A specify the overall geometry & loading pattern of the structure. A
LOCAL coordinate system is associated with each element and is LOCAL coordinate system is associated with each element and is
utilized in element output or local load specification. utilized in element output or local load specification.

6.5.1 Global Coordinate System 6.5.1 Global Coordinate System


The Conventional Cartesian Coordinate System is used for The Conventional Cartesian Coordinate System is used for
specification of the structure geometry. This coordinate system is specification of the structure geometry. This coordinate system is
a rectangular coordinate system (X, Y, Z) which follows the a rectangular coordinate system (X, Y, Z) which follows the
orthogonal right hand rule. This coordinate system may be used to orthogonal right hand rule. This coordinate system may be used to
define the node locations and loading directions. The translational define the node locations and loading directions. The translational
degrees of freedom are denoted by u 1 , u 2 , u 3 and the rotational degrees of freedom are denoted by u 1 , u 2 , u 3 and the rotational
degrees of freedom are denoted by u 4 , u 5 & u 6 . degrees of freedom are denoted by u 4 , u 5 & u 6 .

6.5.2 Local Element Coordinate System 6.5.2 Local Element Coordinate System
A local coordinate system is associated with each element. The A local coordinate system is associated with each element. The
local x axis is from the first node to the second node for each local x axis is from the first node to the second node for each
element type. A third node defines the plane containing the element type. A third node defines the plane containing the
orthogonal local y axis and its positive direction. The local z axis orthogonal local y axis and its positive direction. The local z axis
is orthogonal to x and y and positive by the right hand rule. is orthogonal to x and y and positive by the right hand rule.
STARDYNE for STAAD.Pro STARDYNE for STAAD.Pro
6-4 Section 6 6-4 Section 6
The beta angle method of specifying the beam element local The beta angle method of specifying the beam element local
system is defined in the Beam Element topic. system is defined in the Beam Element topic.

6.6 Finite Element Information – STARDYNE 6.6 Finite Element Information – STARDYNE

STARDYNE includes beam, plate/shell, spring, and matrix finite STARDYNE includes beam, plate/shell, spring, and matrix finite
elements. The features of each is explained below. elements. The features of each is explained below.

6.6.1 Plate/Shell Element 6.6.1 Plate/Shell Element


The Plate/Shell finite element is based on the isoparametric or The Plate/Shell finite element is based on the isoparametric or
hybrid element formulation. The element can be 3-noded hybrid element formulation. The element can be 3-noded
(triangular) or 4-noded (3-4 node, isoparametric, hybrid) (triangular) or 4-noded (3-4 node, isoparametric, hybrid)
(quadrilateral). If all the four nodes of a quadrilateral element do (quadrilateral). If all the four nodes of a quadrilateral element do
not lie on one plane, it is advisable to model them as triangular not lie on one plane, it is advisable to model them as triangular
elements. “Surface structures” such as walls, slabs, plates and elements. “Surface structures” such as walls, slabs, plates and
shells may be modeled using finite elements. The user may also shells may be modeled using finite elements. The user may also
use the element for PLANE STRESS action only. use the element for PLANE STRESS action only.

Plate Geometry Modeling Considerations Plate Geometry Modeling Considerations


The following geometry related modeling rules should be kept in The following geometry related modeling rules should be kept in
mind while using the plate/shell element: mind while using the plate/shell element:

1) While assigning nodes to an element in the input data, it is 1) While assigning nodes to an element in the input data, it is
essential that the nodes be specified either clockwise or essential that the nodes be specified either clockwise or
counter clockwise counter clockwise
2) Element aspect ratio should not be excessive. They should 2) Element aspect ratio should not be excessive. They should
be on the order of 1:1, and preferably less than 4:1. be on the order of 1:1, and preferably less than 4:1.
3) Individual elements should not be distorted. Angles 3) Individual elements should not be distorted. Angles
between two adjacent element sides should not be much between two adjacent element sides should not be much
larger than 90 degrees and never larger than 180. larger than 90 degrees and never larger than 180.

Plate Element Load Specification Plate Element Load Specification


Following load specifications are available: Following load specifications are available:

1) Linearly varying pressure on element surface in local 1) Linearly varying pressure on element surface in local
directions. directions.
Section 6 6-5 Section 6 6-5
2) Temperature load due to uniform increase or decrease 2) Temperature load due to uniform increase or decrease
of temperature. of temperature.
3) Temperature load due to difference in temperature between 3) Temperature load due to difference in temperature between
top and bottom surfaces of the element. top and bottom surfaces of the element.
4) Also, Density needs to be provided if selfweight is 4) Also, Density needs to be provided if selfweight is
included in any load case. included in any load case.

Triangle Plate Theoretical Basis Triangle Plate Theoretical Basis


Two types of triangular plates are available: Two types of triangular plates are available:

1) A linear curvature compatible triangle which simulates 1) A linear curvature compatible triangle which simulates
thin plate behavior (without consideration of transverse thin plate behavior (without consideration of transverse
shear effects) for non-sandwich structures; shear effects) for non-sandwich structures;
2) The "Martin" element which simulates thin or thick plate 2) The "Martin" element which simulates thin or thick plate
behavior in a homogeneous (solid) structure. The "Martin" behavior in a homogeneous (solid) structure. The "Martin"
plate must be used when transverse shear effects and/or plate must be used when transverse shear effects and/or
transverse shear stresses are desired in a 3 node element. transverse shear stresses are desired in a 3 node element.
A denser nodal mesh is desirable with this element. A denser nodal mesh is desirable with this element.

Assumptions: Assumptions:
• Linear, elastic, and homogeneous. • Linear, elastic, and homogeneous.
• Small deformations. • Small deformations.
• Constant strain (linear variation of displacement) for in-plane • Constant strain (linear variation of displacement) for in-plane
(both TYPES) and "Martin" plate bending element. (both TYPES) and "Martin" plate bending element.
• Normal stress (σ z ) is neglected. (Thin shell theory.) • Normal stress (σ z ) is neglected. (Thin shell theory.)
• No coupling of in-plane and bending action. • No coupling of in-plane and bending action.
• The displacement of a triangular plate element is defined by • The displacement of a triangular plate element is defined by
three translations and two rotations at each corner of the plate. three translations and two rotations at each corner of the plate.
5 equations (dof) per node. 5 equations (dof) per node.
• Orthotropic properties with axis angle from principal • Orthotropic properties with axis angle from principal
directions to local axes. directions to local axes.

Quadrilateral Plate Theoretical Basis Quadrilateral Plate Theoretical Basis


Several types of quadrilateral plates are available Several types of quadrilateral plates are available

1) QUADB, QUADS. A standard 3-4 node isoparametric 1) QUADB, QUADS. A standard 3-4 node isoparametric
inplane element with “bubble” functions. inplane element with “bubble” functions.
2) QUADB. A bending plate based on 4 linear curvature 2) QUADB. A bending plate based on 4 linear curvature
compatible triangles around a centroidal node with 11 dof compatible triangles around a centroidal node with 11 dof
STARDYNE for STAAD.Pro STARDYNE for STAAD.Pro
6-6 Section 6 6-6 Section 6
per triangle in bending which simulates thin plate behavior per triangle in bending which simulates thin plate behavior
(without consideration of transverse shear effects) (without consideration of transverse shear effects)
3) QUADS. A hybrid method Mindlin thick plate for bending 3) QUADS. A hybrid method Mindlin thick plate for bending
with transverse shear energy included. with transverse shear energy included.
4) QUADH. A hybrid method thin plate for in-plane and 4) QUADH. A hybrid method thin plate for in-plane and
bending. bending.

Assumptions: Assumptions:
• Linear, elastic, orthotropic • Linear, elastic, orthotropic
• Small deformations. • Small deformations.
• Normal stress (σ z ) is neglected. • Normal stress (σ z ) is neglected.
• No coupling of in-plane and bending action. • No coupling of in-plane and bending action.
• The displacement of a quadrilateral plate element is defined by • The displacement of a quadrilateral plate element is defined by
three translations and two rotations at each corner of the plate. three translations and two rotations at each corner of the plate.
5 equations (dof) per node. 5 equations (dof) per node.
• Orthotropic properties with axis angle from principal • Orthotropic properties with axis angle from principal
directions to local axes. directions to local axes.

Plate Element Local Coordinate System Plate Element Local Coordinate System
From node JA to node JB is the local x-axis with origin at JA. From node JA to node JB is the local x-axis with origin at JA.
The JC node lies in the x-y plane and is on the positive y side of The JC node lies in the x-y plane and is on the positive y side of
the x axis. The local z-axis is found by the right hand rule from x the x axis. The local z-axis is found by the right hand rule from x
and y. and y.

Plane Strain Analysis Plane Strain Analysis


If the user wishes to use STARDYNE in an in-plane only, If the user wishes to use STARDYNE in an in-plane only,
isotropic, plane strain analysis, the material properties (E, POIS12, isotropic, plane strain analysis, the material properties (E, POIS12,
ALPHA1) specified for the in-plane triangles and quadrilaterals ALPHA1) specified for the in-plane triangles and quadrilaterals
must be modified as follows: must be modified as follows:

Ea Ea
Ei = Ei =
( 1 − PR a
2
) ( 1 − PR a
2
)
PR a PR a
PR i = PR i =
(1 − PR ) a (1 − PR ) a

ALPHA i = ALPHA a * (1 + PR a ) ALPHA i = ALPHA a * (1 + PR a )


Section 6 6-7 Section 6 6-7
Where: Where:
Ea = Actual Modulus of Elasticity Ea = Actual Modulus of Elasticity
PR a = Actual Poisson’s Ratio PR a = Actual Poisson’s Ratio
ALPHA a = Actual Coefficient of Thermal Expansion. ALPHA a = Actual Coefficient of Thermal Expansion.
and and
E i , PR i , and ALPHA i are the values to be entered in the material E i , PR i , and ALPHA i are the values to be entered in the material
property table for the plane strain analysis. property table for the plane strain analysis.

Output of Plate Element Forces Output of Plate Element Forces


Element outputs are available at the following locations: Element outputs are available at the following locations:

A. Center of the element. A. Center of the element.


B. All corner nodes of the element. B. All corner nodes of the element.

Following are the items included in the ELEMENT FORCE output. Following are the items included in the ELEMENT FORCE output.

QX, QY Shear stresses (Force/ unit len./unit thk.) QX, QY Shear stresses (Force/ unit len./unit thk.)
FX, FY, FXY Membrane stresses (Force/unit len./unit thk) FX, FY, FXY Membrane stresses (Force/unit len./unit thk)
MX, MY, MXY Bending moments per unit width (Moment/unit MX, MY, MXY Bending moments per unit width (Moment/unit
len.) len.)
SMAX, SMIN Principal stresses (Force/unit area) SMAX, SMIN Principal stresses (Force/unit area)
TMAX Maxim. shear stress (Force/unit area) TMAX Maxim. shear stress (Force/unit area)
VONMISES stress (Force/unit area) = VONMISES stress (Force/unit area) =
SQRT { 0.5 * [(S1 - S2)**2 + (S2 - S3)**2 +(S3 - S1)**2 ] } SQRT { 0.5 * [(S1 - S2)**2 + (S2 - S3)**2 +(S3 - S1)**2 ] }
S1, S2, S3 are principal stresses. S1, S2, S3 are principal stresses.
ANGLE Orientation of the principal plane (Degrees) ANGLE Orientation of the principal plane (Degrees)

Notes: Notes:
1. All element force output is in the local coordinate system. 1. All element force output is in the local coordinate system.
2. Principal stresses (SMAX & SMIN), the maximum shear stress 2. Principal stresses (SMAX & SMIN), the maximum shear stress
(TMAX) and the orientation of the principal plane (ANGLE) (TMAX) and the orientation of the principal plane (ANGLE)
are also printed for the top and bottom surfaces of the are also printed for the top and bottom surfaces of the
elements. The top and the bottom surfaces are determined on elements. The top and the bottom surfaces are determined on
the basis of the direction of the local z-axis. the basis of the direction of the local z-axis.

6.6.2 Solid Element 6.6.2 Solid Element


Solid elements enable the solution of structural problems involving Solid elements enable the solution of structural problems involving
general three dimensional stresses. There is a class of problems general three dimensional stresses. There is a class of problems
STARDYNE for STAAD.Pro STARDYNE for STAAD.Pro
6-8 Section 6 6-8 Section 6
such as stress distribution in concrete dams, soil and rock strata such as stress distribution in concrete dams, soil and rock strata
where finite element analysis using solid elements provides a where finite element analysis using solid elements provides a
powerful tool. powerful tool.

Solid Element Theoretical Basis Solid Element Theoretical Basis


The solid element used in STARDYNE is an eight node The solid element used in STARDYNE is an eight node
isoparametric type or optionally hybrid type. The isoparametric isoparametric type or optionally hybrid type. The isoparametric
type is the same as in STAAD with the addition of 3 “bubble type is the same as in STAAD with the addition of 3 “bubble
functions” to improve shear behavior. These elements have three functions” to improve shear behavior. These elements have three
translational degrees-of-freedom per node. By collapsing various translational degrees-of-freedom per node. By collapsing various
nodes together, an eight node solid element can be degenerated to nodes together, an eight node solid element can be degenerated to
an element with four to seven nodes. an element with four to seven nodes.

Solid element Local Coordinate System Solid element Local Coordinate System
The local coordinate system used in solid element is the same as The local coordinate system used in solid element is the same as
the global system, however stresses may be presented as if JA-JB- the global system, however stresses may be presented as if JA-JB-
JC nodes defined a local system (see plate local coordinate JC nodes defined a local system (see plate local coordinate
system). system).

Solid element Properties and Constants Solid element Properties and Constants
Full 3-D orthotropic properties may be used. Also, Density needs Full 3-D orthotropic properties may be used. Also, Density needs
to be provided if selfweight is included in any load case. to be provided if selfweight is included in any load case.

Output of Solid Element Stresses Output of Solid Element Stresses


Element stresses may be obtained at the center and at the nodes of Element stresses may be obtained at the center and at the nodes of
the solid element. The items that are printed are : the solid element. The items that are printed are :

Normal Stresses: SXX, SYY and SZZ Normal Stresses: SXX, SYY and SZZ
Shear Stresses: SXY, SYZ and SZX Shear Stresses: SXY, SYZ and SZX
Principal stresses: S1, S2 and S3. Principal stresses: S1, S2 and S3.
Von Mises stresses: SE Von Mises stresses: SE
Direction cosines: 6 direction cosines are printed, following Direction cosines: 6 direction cosines are printed, following
the expression DC, corresponding to the the expression DC, corresponding to the
first two principal stress directions. first two principal stress directions.

Hybrid Element Formulation, Plate or Solid Hybrid Element Formulation, Plate or Solid
(STARDYNE) (STARDYNE)
In the classical displacement formulation, simple polynomials are In the classical displacement formulation, simple polynomials are
used to interpolate nodal variables internal to the element. For used to interpolate nodal variables internal to the element. For
Section 6 6-9 Section 6 6-9
example, a unit nodal displacement in the x direction, induces example, a unit nodal displacement in the x direction, induces
displacements (≤1.0) in the x direction inside of the element. displacements (≤1.0) in the x direction inside of the element.
From these interpolated displacements the strains can be found. From these interpolated displacements the strains can be found.
Then, using the material constants, the element nodal stiffness Then, using the material constants, the element nodal stiffness
coefficients and stress matrices can be computed. coefficients and stress matrices can be computed.

In the hybrid formulation two sets of interpolation functions are In the hybrid formulation two sets of interpolation functions are
used. The first to interpolate displacements along the element used. The first to interpolate displacements along the element
boundary and the second to interpolate stress fields inside of the boundary and the second to interpolate stress fields inside of the
element. Consequently, there is a rather complex relationship element. Consequently, there is a rather complex relationship
between the nodal displacements and stresses inside of the between the nodal displacements and stresses inside of the
element. STARDYNE offers a choice between the classical element. STARDYNE offers a choice between the classical
displacement and the hybrid elements. The QUADH header displacement and the hybrid elements. The QUADH header
selects the hybrid quads and CUBEH selects the hybrid cubes. selects the hybrid quads and CUBEH selects the hybrid cubes.

Hybrid elements, in general, yield slightly better accuracy if they Hybrid elements, in general, yield slightly better accuracy if they
are only slightly distorted from rectangular or parallelogram are only slightly distorted from rectangular or parallelogram
shapes. If there are areas in the model where severely distorted shapes. If there are areas in the model where severely distorted
elements must be used, select the QUADB and CUBEG types. elements must be used, select the QUADB and CUBEG types.

The classical displacement elements converge to the correct The classical displacement elements converge to the correct
answers "from below". This means that as the finite element mesh answers "from below". This means that as the finite element mesh
gets denser the model gets more flexible and approaches to the gets denser the model gets more flexible and approaches to the
correct answers (assuming that loads and boundary conditions are correct answers (assuming that loads and boundary conditions are
unchanged). The hybrid elements, on the other hand, can converge unchanged). The hybrid elements, on the other hand, can converge
either from above or below. All of the finite elements in either from above or below. All of the finite elements in
STARDYNE are convergent. STARDYNE are convergent.

6.6.3 Matrix (General Spring) Element 6.6.3 Matrix (General Spring) Element
Not available in Staad.Pro. Matrix elements are direct additions to Not available in Staad.Pro. Matrix elements are direct additions to
the Global Stiffness matrix or Mass matrix. The user specifies the the Global Stiffness matrix or Mass matrix. The user specifies the
node incidences and the matrix values. node incidences and the matrix values.

Matrix element Local Coordinate System Matrix element Local Coordinate System
The local coordinate system used in the matrix element is the same The local coordinate system used in the matrix element is the same
as the global system, however stresses may be presented as if JA- as the global system, however stresses may be presented as if JA-
JB-JC nodes defined a local system. JB-JC nodes defined a local system.
STARDYNE for STAAD.Pro STARDYNE for STAAD.Pro
6-10 Section 6 6-10 Section 6
Matrix element Properties and Constants Matrix element Properties and Constants
None needed. None needed.

Output of Matrix Element Stresses Output of Matrix Element Stresses


Element forces may be obtained at the nodes of the matrix Element forces may be obtained at the nodes of the matrix
element. element.

6.6.4 Beam Element 6.6.4 Beam Element


The beam element is assumed to be straight 2 node element of The beam element is assumed to be straight 2 node element of
constant doubly symmetric cross-section. The beam is capable of constant doubly symmetric cross-section. The beam is capable of
resisting axial force, bending moments about the two principal resisting axial force, bending moments about the two principal
axes (coincident with the beam local axes), and twisting moment axes (coincident with the beam local axes), and twisting moment
about the centroidal axis. The stiffness properties for a uniform about the centroidal axis. The stiffness properties for a uniform
beam element are derived from the differential equations for beam beam element are derived from the differential equations for beam
displacements in the engineering beam theory. Lateral deflection displacements in the engineering beam theory. Lateral deflection
is the sum of displacement due to bending strain and the is the sum of displacement due to bending strain and the
displacement due to shearing strain (computed using effective displacement due to shearing strain (computed using effective
shear area and G). shear area and G).

The beam element is really the sum of 4 uncoupled elements, The beam element is really the sum of 4 uncoupled elements,
axial, torsion, shear & bending in x-y, and shear & bending in x-z. axial, torsion, shear & bending in x-y, and shear & bending in x-z.
Any combination can be created via member releases, or setting Any combination can be created via member releases, or setting
cross-section properties to zero, or TRUSS, etc. options. cross-section properties to zero, or TRUSS, etc. options.

Assumptions Assumptions
• Linear, elastic, homogeneous. • Linear, elastic, homogeneous.
• Small strains and displacements. • Small strains and displacements.
• Plane sections remain plane. • Plane sections remain plane.
• No coupling of axial, torque and bending. • No coupling of axial, torque and bending.
• Shear deformation are included. • Shear deformation are included.
• Geometric and elastic properties constant along length. • Geometric and elastic properties constant along length.

Beam Local Coordinate System Definition – Staad.Pro will Beam Local Coordinate System Definition – Staad.Pro will
translate from the Staad input definitions. translate from the Staad input definitions.

Internally in Stardyne the beam element local system are specified Internally in Stardyne the beam element local system are specified
by the following two methods: by the following two methods:
Section 6 6-11 Section 6 6-11
STAAD Beam element Beta Angle STAAD Beam element Beta Angle
The relationship between the local and global coordinate system is The relationship between the local and global coordinate system is
defined by an angle measured in the following specified way. This defined by an angle measured in the following specified way. This
angle will be defined as the beta (β) angle. When the local x-axis angle will be defined as the beta (β) angle. When the local x-axis
is parallel to the global Y-axis, as in the case of a column in a is parallel to the global Y-axis, as in the case of a column in a
structure, the beta angle is the angle through which the local z-axis structure, the beta angle is the angle through which the local z-axis
has been rotated about the local x-axis from a position of being has been rotated about the local x-axis from a position of being
parallel and in the same positive direction of the global Z-axis. parallel and in the same positive direction of the global Z-axis.
When the local x-axis is not parallel to the global Y-axis, the beta When the local x-axis is not parallel to the global Y-axis, the beta
angle is the angle through which the local coordinate system has angle is the angle through which the local coordinate system has
been rotated about the local x-axis from a position of having the been rotated about the local x-axis from a position of having the
local z-axis parallel to the global X-Z plane and the local y-axis in local z-axis parallel to the global X-Z plane and the local y-axis in
the same positive direction as the global Y-axis. the same positive direction as the global Y-axis.

Beam element Reference Point Beam element Reference Point


An alternative to providing the beam element orientation is to An alternative to providing the beam element orientation is to
input the coordinates of an arbitrary reference point located in the input the coordinates of an arbitrary reference point located in the
element x-y plane but not on the axis of the element. From the element x-y plane but not on the axis of the element. From the
location of the reference point, the program automatically location of the reference point, the program automatically
calculates the orientation of the element x-y plane. calculates the orientation of the element x-y plane.

6.6.4.1 Beam Element Prismatic Properties 6.6.4.1 Beam Element Prismatic Properties
Same as STAAD Analysis engine. Same as STAAD Analysis engine.

6.6.4.2 Tapered Beam Elements 6.6.4.2 Tapered Beam Elements


Properties of tapered beam elements may be specified. Given key Properties of tapered beam elements may be specified. Given key
section dimensions, the program is capable of calculating cross- section dimensions, the program is capable of calculating cross-
sectional properties which are subsequently used in analysis. sectional properties which are subsequently used in analysis.
Tapered beam elements may not have beam element loads applied Tapered beam elements may not have beam element loads applied
other than selfweight lumped at ends. other than selfweight lumped at ends.

6.6.4.3 Pipe and Elbow Beam Elements 6.6.4.3 Pipe and Elbow Beam Elements
This option is not in Staad.Pro. Properties of pipe, pipe tee, and This option is not in Staad.Pro. Properties of pipe, pipe tee, and
elbow beam elements may be specified. Given key section elbow beam elements may be specified. Given key section
dimensions, the program is capable of calculating cross-sectional dimensions, the program is capable of calculating cross-sectional
properties which are subsequently used in analysis. Pipe tee and properties which are subsequently used in analysis. Pipe tee and
STARDYNE for STAAD.Pro STARDYNE for STAAD.Pro
6-12 Section 6 6-12 Section 6
elbow beam elements may not have beam element loads applied elbow beam elements may not have beam element loads applied
other than selfweight lumped at the ends and enclosed liquid other than selfweight lumped at the ends and enclosed liquid
weight lumped at the ends. The elbow may optionally allow the weight lumped at the ends. The elbow may optionally allow the
calculation of bending flexibility increase due to thin wall calculation of bending flexibility increase due to thin wall
ovalization (while considering the opposing effect of internal ovalization (while considering the opposing effect of internal
pressure) to be computed. pressure) to be computed.

6.6.4.4 Beam Element End Releases 6.6.4.4 Beam Element End Releases
STARDYNE allows releases for beam element end forces and STARDYNE allows releases for beam element end forces and
moments. Beam elements are assumed to be rigidly framed into moments. Beam elements are assumed to be rigidly framed into
nodes in accordance with the structural type specified. When this nodes in accordance with the structural type specified. When this
full rigidity is not applicable, individual force components at full rigidity is not applicable, individual force components at
either end of the element can be set to zero with element release either end of the element can be set to zero with element release
statements. By specifying release components, individual element statements. By specifying release components, individual element
degrees of freedom are removed from the analysis. Release degrees of freedom are removed from the analysis. Release
components are given in the local coordinate system for each components are given in the local coordinate system for each
element. element.

6.6.4.5 Tension - Only Elements 6.6.4.5 Tension - Only Elements


STARDYNE does not have a tension only element. STARDYNE does not have a tension only element.

6.6.4.6 Cable Elements 6.6.4.6 Cable Elements


STARDYNE does not have a cable element. STARDYNE does not have a cable element.

6.6.4.7 Beam Element Offsets 6.6.4.7 Beam Element Offsets


Some beam elements may not be concurrent with the incident Some beam elements may not be concurrent with the incident
nodes thereby creating offsets. This offset distance is specified in nodes thereby creating offsets. This offset distance is specified in
terms of global coordinate system (i.e. global X, Y and Z distance terms of global coordinate system (i.e. global X, Y and Z distance
from the incident node). Secondary forces induced, due to this from the incident node). Secondary forces induced, due to this
offset connection, are taken into account in analyzing the structure offset connection, are taken into account in analyzing the structure
and also to calculate the individual element forces. The new offset and also to calculate the individual element forces. The new offset
centroid of the beam element can be at the start or end incidences centroid of the beam element can be at the start or end incidences
and the new working point will also be the new start or end of the and the new working point will also be the new start or end of the
beam element. Therefore, any reference from the start or end of beam element. Therefore, any reference from the start or end of
that element will always be from the new offset points. that element will always be from the new offset points.
Section 6 6-13 Section 6 6-13
6.7 Rigid System of Nodes – STARDYNE 6.7 Rigid System of Nodes – STARDYNE

STARDYNE provides for rigid systems similar to STAAD’s STARDYNE provides for rigid systems similar to STAAD’s
master/slave option with all degrees of freedom (Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, master/slave option with all degrees of freedom (Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx,
My and Mz) provided as constraints. The nodes of a rigid system My and Mz) provided as constraints. The nodes of a rigid system
will be assumed to be rigidly connected. Rigid systems are will be assumed to be rigidly connected. Rigid systems are
defined using beams with the rigid beam property specified. defined using beams with the rigid beam property specified.

The Rigid Beam can be used to model those elements of a The Rigid Beam can be used to model those elements of a
structure which are very stiff in relation to the total structure. One structure which are very stiff in relation to the total structure. One
or more rigid beams form a Rigid System. or more rigid beams form a Rigid System.
The highest numbered node in each rigid system (independent The highest numbered node in each rigid system (independent
node) will remain a part of the elastic structural model. The node) will remain a part of the elastic structural model. The
remaining nodes in each rigid system (dependent nodes) will not remaining nodes in each rigid system (dependent nodes) will not
be represented in the stiffness matrix for the elastic model. be represented in the stiffness matrix for the elastic model.
However, if any static loads are applied to these dependent nodes, However, if any static loads are applied to these dependent nodes,
they will be correctly transferred to the elastic model. they will be correctly transferred to the elastic model.

In the nodal equilibrium check, forces and moments will appear at In the nodal equilibrium check, forces and moments will appear at
those nodes contained in a rigid system. A free-body analysis of those nodes contained in a rigid system. A free-body analysis of
the rigid system will indicate that these forces and moments will the rigid system will indicate that these forces and moments will
be in static equilibrium with the external loads acting on the rigid be in static equilibrium with the external loads acting on the rigid
system. system.

6.8 Material Constants – STARDYNE 6.8 Material Constants – STARDYNE

The material constants are: moduli of elasticity (E1, E2, E3); The material constants are: moduli of elasticity (E1, E2, E3);
weight density, Poisson's ratio (POIS12); coefficients of thermal weight density, Poisson's ratio (POIS12); coefficients of thermal
expansion (ALPHA1,2,3), G12, G23, G31, composite damping expansion (ALPHA1,2,3), G12, G23, G31, composite damping
coefficient, and composite element failure criterion constants. coefficient, and composite element failure criterion constants.

Weight density is used in static analysis when selfweight of the Weight density is used in static analysis when selfweight of the
structure is to be taken into account and in dynamics to calculate structure is to be taken into account and in dynamics to calculate
the nodal masses.. Poisson's ratio (POIS12) may be used to the nodal masses.. Poisson's ratio (POIS12) may be used to
calculate the shear modulus (G12), if G12 is left blank, by the calculate the shear modulus (G12), if G12 is left blank, by the
formula, formula,
STARDYNE for STAAD.Pro STARDYNE for STAAD.Pro
6-14 Section 6 6-14 Section 6
G12 = 0.5 x E1/(1 + POIS12) G12 = 0.5 x E1/(1 + POIS12)

Coefficients of thermal expansion (ALPHA1,2,3) are used to Coefficients of thermal expansion (ALPHA1,2,3) are used to
calculate the expansion of the elements if temperature loads are calculate the expansion of the elements if temperature loads are
applied. The temperature unit for temperature load and ALPHAs applied. The temperature unit for temperature load and ALPHAs
have to be the same. have to be the same.

The material constant directions are assumed to be principal The material constant directions are assumed to be principal
directions. For beams the material axes are the beam local axes. directions. For beams the material axes are the beam local axes.
For solid elements the material axes are the global axes. For plate For solid elements the material axes are the global axes. For plate
elements, the material axes are the same as the local plate axes elements, the material axes are the same as the local plate axes
unless an axis angle is specified for a plate. unless an axis angle is specified for a plate.

6.9 Supports – STARDYNE 6.9 Supports – STARDYNE

STARDYNE allows specifications of supports that are parallel as STARDYNE allows specifications of supports that are parallel as
well as inclined to the global axes. Each of the possible six nodal well as inclined to the global axes. Each of the possible six nodal
support directions may be restrained or released. Boundary node support directions may be restrained or released. Boundary node
support dof locations must be specified in order to impose known support dof locations must be specified in order to impose known
displacements at those locations in a static analysis. The actual displacements at those locations in a static analysis. The actual
displacement is specified in each load case input. displacement is specified in each load case input.

6.10 Loads (STARDYNE) 6.10 Loads (STARDYNE)

Loads in a structure can be specified as node load or temperature, Loads in a structure can be specified as node load or temperature,
and element load or temperature. STARDYNE can also generate and element load or temperature. STARDYNE can also generate
the self-weight of the structure and use it as uniformly distributed the self-weight of the structure and use it as uniformly distributed
element loads in analysis. Any multiple of this self-weight can element loads in analysis. Any multiple of this self-weight can
also be applied in any desired direction. also be applied in any desired direction.

6.10.1 Node Load 6.10.1 Node Load


Node loads, forces & moments or temperature, may be applied to Node loads, forces & moments or temperature, may be applied to
any free node of a structure. These loads act in the global any free node of a structure. These loads act in the global
coordinate system of the structure. Positive forces act in the coordinate system of the structure. Positive forces act in the
positive coordinate directions. Any number of loads may be positive coordinate directions. Any number of loads may be
Section 6 6-15 Section 6 6-15
applied on a single node, in which case the loads will be applied on a single node, in which case the loads will be
additive on that node. additive on that node.

It does not matter which type or types of elements are connected to It does not matter which type or types of elements are connected to
the node except that if the elements cannot carry loads in that the node except that if the elements cannot carry loads in that
direction, the load in the unsupported direction will be ignored. direction, the load in the unsupported direction will be ignored.
Loads at supports will not contribute to deformations or element Loads at supports will not contribute to deformations or element
results. results.

6.10.2 Element Loads 6.10.2 Element Loads

%HDP(OHPHQW/RDG %HDP(OHPHQW/RDG
Three types of loads may be applied directly to beam elements in a Three types of loads may be applied directly to beam elements in a
structure. These loads are uniformly distributed loads, structure. These loads are uniformly distributed loads,
concentrated loads, and linearly varying loads (including concentrated loads, and linearly varying loads (including
trapezoidal). Uniform loads act on the full or partial length of a trapezoidal). Uniform loads act on the full or partial length of a
beam element. Concentrated loads act at any intermediate, beam element. Concentrated loads act at any intermediate,
specified point. Linearly varying loads act over the full length of specified point. Linearly varying loads act over the full length of
a beam element. Trapezoidal linearly varying loads act over the a beam element. Trapezoidal linearly varying loads act over the
full or partial length of a beam element. Up to 10 load full or partial length of a beam element. Up to 10 load
descriptions may be specified to act upon a beam element in any descriptions may be specified to act upon a beam element in any
independent loading condition. Beam element loads can be independent loading condition. Beam element loads can be
specified in the element coordinate system or the global coordinate specified in the element coordinate system or the global coordinate
system. Uniformly distributed element loads provided in the system. Uniformly distributed element loads provided in the
global coordinate system may be specified to act along the full or global coordinate system may be specified to act along the full or
projected element length. Positive forces act in the positive projected element length. Positive forces act in the positive
coordinate directions, local or global, as the case may be. coordinate directions, local or global, as the case may be.

Temperatures may be specified on 4 points of cross-section and are Temperatures may be specified on 4 points of cross-section and are
assumed constant along the length. The difference between the assumed constant along the length. The difference between the
specified temperature and the ambient temperature will cause specified temperature and the ambient temperature will cause
initial axial strain and/or bending strain in proportion to the initial axial strain and/or bending strain in proportion to the
thermal expansion coefficient, alpha, for the material and the thermal expansion coefficient, alpha, for the material and the
element geometry. element geometry.

3ODWH(OHPHQW/RDG 3ODWH(OHPHQW/RDG
On Plate/Shell elements, the types of loading that are permissible On Plate/Shell elements, the types of loading that are permissible
are: are:
STARDYNE for STAAD.Pro STARDYNE for STAAD.Pro
6-16 Section 6 6-16 Section 6

1) Pressure loading which consists of loads which act 1) Pressure loading which consists of loads which act
perpendicular to the surface of the element. The pressure perpendicular to the surface of the element. The pressure
loads can be of uniform intensity or trapezoidally varying loads can be of uniform intensity or trapezoidally varying
intensity over the entire surface of the element. intensity over the entire surface of the element.
2) Temperature loads which may be constant across the depth 2) Temperature loads which may be constant across the depth
of the element (causing only in-plane elongation / of the element (causing only in-plane elongation /
shortening) or may vary across the depth of the element shortening) or may vary across the depth of the element
causing bending and elongation on the element. The causing bending and elongation on the element. The
coefficient of thermal expansion, alpha, for the material of coefficient of thermal expansion, alpha, for the material of
the element must be provided for computation of these the element must be provided for computation of these
effects. Orthotropic properties permitted. Temperatures effects. Orthotropic properties permitted. Temperatures
may vary from node to node. may vary from node to node.
3) The self-weight of the elements can be applied using the 3) The self-weight of the elements can be applied using the
SELFWEIGHT loading condition. The density of the SELFWEIGHT loading condition. The density of the
elements has to be provided for computation of the self- elements has to be provided for computation of the self-
weight. weight.

6ROLG(OHPHQW/RDG 6ROLG(OHPHQW/RDG
Staad.Pro version does not have pressure input. On Solid Staad.Pro version does not have pressure input. On Solid
elements, the loading types available are pressure variation normal elements, the loading types available are pressure variation normal
to each face, temperatures at the nodes, and the self-weight using to each face, temperatures at the nodes, and the self-weight using
the SELFWEIGHT loading condition. The alpha and/or density of the SELFWEIGHT loading condition. The alpha and/or density of
the elements has to be provided for computation of these loads. the elements has to be provided for computation of these loads.
Three-dimensional orthotropic properties permitted. Three-dimensional orthotropic properties permitted.

6.10.3 Node Temperature Load 6.10.3 Node Temperature Load


Temperatures may be specified at nodes or on element surfaces. Temperatures may be specified at nodes or on element surfaces.
Node temperatures are transferred to element temperatures before Node temperatures are transferred to element temperatures before
processing. The difference between the specified temperature and processing. The difference between the specified temperature and
the ambient temperature will cause initial axial strain and/or the ambient temperature will cause initial axial strain and/or
bending strain (or bi-axial or tri-axial strain for 2d and 3d bending strain (or bi-axial or tri-axial strain for 2d and 3d
elements) in proportion to the thermal expansion coefficients, elements) in proportion to the thermal expansion coefficients,
alphas, for the material and the element geometry. Orthotropic alphas, for the material and the element geometry. Orthotropic
material properties may be used. The program calculates the material properties may be used. The program calculates the
strains (elongation and shrinkage) due to the temperature strains (elongation and shrinkage) due to the temperature
differences. From this it calculates the induced forces in the differences. From this it calculates the induced forces in the
Section 6 6-17 Section 6 6-17
element and the analysis is done accordingly. Nodal element and the analysis is done accordingly. Nodal
temperatures will not induce bending initial strain in beams or temperatures will not induce bending initial strain in beams or
plates. plates.

6.10.3 Support Displacement Specification 6.10.3 Support Displacement Specification

Displacements can be specified at boundary support nodes in Displacements can be specified at boundary support nodes in
specified directions. Displacement can be translational or specified directions. Displacement can be translational or
rotational. The rotational displacements are in radians. Note that rotational. The rotational displacements are in radians. Note that
displacements can be specified only in directions in which the displacements can be specified only in directions in which the
boundary support node directions are defined. boundary support node directions are defined.

6.11 STARDYNE Analysis Capabilities 6.11 STARDYNE Analysis Capabilities

Currently available analysis capabilities include Currently available analysis capabilities include

1) Static Analysis 1) Static Analysis


Stiffness Modeling Stiffness Modeling
Applied Load Modeling Applied Load Modeling
Static Equation Solution Static Equation Solution

2) Second Order Static Analysis: 2) Second Order Static Analysis:


Stress Stiffened static and eigensolution Stress Stiffened static and eigensolution
Buckling Buckling

3) Dynamic Response Analysis (Modal): 3) Dynamic Response Analysis (Modal):


Mass Modeling Mass Modeling
Natural frequencies and modes analysis Natural frequencies and modes analysis
Response Spectrum analysis Response Spectrum analysis
Linear Time History analysis Linear Time History analysis

Key features of each type of analysis are discussed in the Key features of each type of analysis are discussed in the
following sections. Detailed theoretical treatments of these following sections. Detailed theoretical treatments of these
features are available in standard structural engineering textbooks. features are available in standard structural engineering textbooks.
STARDYNE for STAAD.Pro STARDYNE for STAAD.Pro
6-18 Section 6 6-18 Section 6

6.11.1 STARDYNE Static Analysis 6.11.1 STARDYNE Static Analysis


STIFFNESS MODELING - The general solution procedure STIFFNESS MODELING - The general solution procedure
consists of formulating a nodal stiffness matrix from the finite consists of formulating a nodal stiffness matrix from the finite
elements (beams, plates, and solids) and performing one or more elements (beams, plates, and solids) and performing one or more
of the following operations: static analysis, eigenvalue/eigenvector of the following operations: static analysis, eigenvalue/eigenvector
extraction, and dynamic response analysis. The static analysis and extraction, and dynamic response analysis. The static analysis and
modal extraction phases are based on the "Stiffness Method" also modal extraction phases are based on the "Stiffness Method" also
known as the "Displacement Method". The assumptions and known as the "Displacement Method". The assumptions and
formulations are consistent with "Small Displacement Theory". formulations are consistent with "Small Displacement Theory".

Each finite element contributes stiffness to the nodes to which it is Each finite element contributes stiffness to the nodes to which it is
connected. Each element type has an assumed form of connected. Each element type has an assumed form of
displacement in a manner which satisfies the force equilibrium and displacement in a manner which satisfies the force equilibrium and
displacement compatibility at the nodes. The nodal stiffness displacement compatibility at the nodes. The nodal stiffness
matrices of the individual finite elements are first computed and matrices of the individual finite elements are first computed and
then transformed from the local element coordinate system to the then transformed from the local element coordinate system to the
global coordinate system. Finally, the individual stiffnesses global coordinate system. Finally, the individual stiffnesses
associated with each nodal point are systematically summed to associated with each nodal point are systematically summed to
obtain the total (global) stiffness matrix [ K ]. This square obtain the total (global) stiffness matrix [ K ]. This square
symmetric matrix has up to 6 equations per node. symmetric matrix has up to 6 equations per node.

Assumptions of the Stiffness Method Assumptions of the Stiffness Method


For a complete analysis of the structure, the necessary matrices are For a complete analysis of the structure, the necessary matrices are
generated on the basis of the following assumptions: generated on the basis of the following assumptions:

1) The structure is idealized into an assembly of beam, plate, 1) The structure is idealized into an assembly of beam, plate,
solid, spring, and matrix type elements joined together at their solid, spring, and matrix type elements joined together at their
vertices (nodes). The assemblage is loaded and reacted by vertices (nodes). The assemblage is loaded and reacted by
concentrated loads acting at the nodes. These loads may be concentrated loads acting at the nodes. These loads may be
both forces and moments which may act in any specified both forces and moments which may act in any specified
direction. direction.
2) A beam element is a longitudinal structural element having a 2) A beam element is a longitudinal structural element having a
constant, doubly symmetric or a linearly tapered cross section constant, doubly symmetric or a linearly tapered cross section
along its length. Beam elements may carry axial forces, shear along its length. Beam elements may carry axial forces, shear
and bending in two arbitrary perpendicular planes, and are also and bending in two arbitrary perpendicular planes, and are also
subjected to torsion. subjected to torsion.
Section 6 6-19 Section 6 6-19
3) A plate element is a three or four node flat element having 3) A plate element is a three or four node flat element having
constant thickness and orthotropic properties. constant thickness and orthotropic properties.
4) A solid element is a four to eight node three dimensional 4) A solid element is a four to eight node three dimensional
element having uniform orthotropic properties. element having uniform orthotropic properties.
5) A general matrix element may be a spring or generated 5) A general matrix element may be a spring or generated
element matrices or assembled stiffness / mass matrices from element matrices or assembled stiffness / mass matrices from
an external source. an external source.
6) Beams have 1 to 6 degrees of freedom (DOF) at each node; 6) Beams have 1 to 6 degrees of freedom (DOF) at each node;
plates have 5 DOF; and solids have 3 DOF. Because of this plates have 5 DOF; and solids have 3 DOF. Because of this
mismatch in DOF, the connection between solid elements and mismatch in DOF, the connection between solid elements and
plates or beams needs special modeling. plates or beams needs special modeling.
7) The solved internal element forces and the applied external 7) The solved internal element forces and the applied external
loads acting on each node are in equilibrium except at loads acting on each node are in equilibrium except at
supports. supports.
8) Two types of coordinate systems are used in the generation of 8) Two types of coordinate systems are used in the generation of
the required matrices and are referred to as local and global the required matrices and are referred to as local and global
systems. Local coordinate axes are assigned to each individual systems. Local coordinate axes are assigned to each individual
element and are oriented such that computing effort for element and are oriented such that computing effort for
element stiffness matrices are generalized and minimized. The element stiffness matrices are generalized and minimized. The
nodal coordinate input data are by definition in the Global nodal coordinate input data are by definition in the Global
coordinate axis system. The assembled forces and stiffness coordinate axis system. The assembled forces and stiffness
and the solved displacements are in this Global coordinate and the solved displacements are in this Global coordinate
system. system.

APPLIED LOAD MODELING - Loads may be applied in the APPLIED LOAD MODELING - Loads may be applied in the
form of distributed loads on the element surfaces or as form of distributed loads on the element surfaces or as
concentrated loads at the nodes, element thermal gradients, concentrated loads at the nodes, element thermal gradients,
pressures, inertia (self-weight) loads and imposed nodal pressures, inertia (self-weight) loads and imposed nodal
displacements. Using standard finite element methods the displacements. Using standard finite element methods the
loadings are assembled into a nodal force vector. loadings are assembled into a nodal force vector.

STATIC EQUATION SOLUTION - During a static analysis, this STATIC EQUATION SOLUTION - During a static analysis, this
matrix equation is solved: matrix equation is solved:

[K]•{δ}={P} [K]•{δ}={P}

Where Where
[ K ] = the stiffness matrix [ K ] = the stiffness matrix
{ δ } = the resulting nodal displacement vectors { δ } = the resulting nodal displacement vectors
STARDYNE for STAAD.Pro STARDYNE for STAAD.Pro
6-20 Section 6 6-20 Section 6
{ P } = the applied nodal force vectors { P } = the applied nodal force vectors

Static equation solution uses one of two methods: Static equation solution uses one of two methods:

1) Preconditioned conjugate gradient solver (TurboSolver). This 1) Preconditioned conjugate gradient solver (TurboSolver). This
solver is much faster than method 2 and uses much less disk. solver is much faster than method 2 and uses much less disk.
The TurboSolver is used whenever possible [no inclined The TurboSolver is used whenever possible [no inclined
supports (ASYSG), spring supports, or rigid systems supports (ASYSG), spring supports, or rigid systems
(master/slave) allowed]; otherwise a (master/slave) allowed]; otherwise a

2) Modified Gauss, LDL T , variable bandwidth solver is used. 2) Modified Gauss, LDL T , variable bandwidth solver is used.
This solver is always used in the eigensolutions. This solver is always used in the eigensolutions.

Consideration of [K] Matrix Bandwidth Consideration of [K] Matrix Bandwidth


Method 2 (LDLT) is more efficient when the equations are Method 2 (LDLT) is more efficient when the equations are
reordered to have the non-zero [K] matrix terms form a reordered to have the non-zero [K] matrix terms form a
narrow band about the diagonal. STARDYNE narrow band about the diagonal. STARDYNE
automatically computes a nearly optimum node order. For automatically computes a nearly optimum node order. For
this type of matrix fewer calculations are required due to this type of matrix fewer calculations are required due to
the fact that terms outside the band are all equal to zero. the fact that terms outside the band are all equal to zero.
STARDYNE takes full advantage of the variable STARDYNE takes full advantage of the variable
bandwidth during the solution. bandwidth during the solution.

Independent “Disjoint” Structures (Structural Independent “Disjoint” Structures (Structural


Integrity) - Unlike STAAD two or more independent Integrity) - Unlike STAAD two or more independent
structures may be solved. Check the “message file” for structures may be solved. Check the “message file” for
disjoint structure messages to see if independent structures disjoint structure messages to see if independent structures
were detected. Solving multiple structures in one analysis were detected. Solving multiple structures in one analysis
is not recommended and is usually the result of a modeling is not recommended and is usually the result of a modeling
error. error.

Numerical Instability Problems - Singularities: Numerical Instability Problems - Singularities:


Instability problems can occur due to two primary reasons. Instability problems can occur due to two primary reasons.

1) Modeling problem - There are a variety of 1) Modeling problem - There are a variety of
modeling problems which can give rise to modeling problems which can give rise to
instability conditions. They can be classified into instability conditions. They can be classified into
two groups. two groups.
Section 6 6-21 Section 6 6-21
a) Local instability - A local instability is a a) Local instability - A local instability is a
condition where the fixity conditions at an condition where the fixity conditions at an
element node are such as to cause an element node are such as to cause an
instability in the element about one or more instability in the element about one or more
degrees of freedom. Examples of possible degrees of freedom. Examples of possible
local instability are: local instability are:

(i) Beam Release: Beam elements released at (i) Beam Release: Beam elements released at
both ends for any of the following degrees both ends for any of the following degrees
of freedom (FX, FY, FZ and MX) may be of freedom (FX, FY, FZ and MX) may be
subjected to this problem. subjected to this problem.
(ii) TRUSS or axial only beams have no (ii) TRUSS or axial only beams have no
capacity to transfer shears or moments capacity to transfer shears or moments
from the superstructure to the supports. from the superstructure to the supports.
Depending upon the load carrying capacity Depending upon the load carrying capacity
of the resulting structure there may be a of the resulting structure there may be a
local instability. local instability.
(iii) STARDYNE plates do not have the 6 th dof (iii) STARDYNE plates do not have the 6 th dof
(rotation about the normal to the surface (rotation about the normal to the surface
direction) at each node. direction) at each node.

NOTE 1: NOTE 1:
Zero Stiffness at a node in one or more directions Zero Stiffness at a node in one or more directions
is OK. Loads at those directions will be ignored. is OK. Loads at those directions will be ignored.

NOTE 2: NOTE 2:
For the LDLT solver, Node Point Singularities are For the LDLT solver, Node Point Singularities are
corrected (but not for the TurboSolver). This corrected (but not for the TurboSolver). This
singularity occurs when there is a zero stiffness singularity occurs when there is a zero stiffness
direction other than a global direction. direction other than a global direction.

b) Global Instability - These are caused when the b) Global Instability - These are caused when the
supports of the structure are such that they supports of the structure are such that they
cannot offer any resistance to motion, sliding cannot offer any resistance to motion, sliding
or overturning of the structure in one or more or overturning of the structure in one or more
directions. An example is that of a structure directions. An example is that of a structure
with all the supports released for FX, FY or with all the supports released for FX, FY or
FZ. FZ.
STARDYNE for STAAD.Pro STARDYNE for STAAD.Pro
6-22 Section 6 6-22 Section 6
2) Math precision - A math precision error is caused 2) Math precision - A math precision error is caused
when numerical instabilities occur in the matrix when numerical instabilities occur in the matrix
decomposition process. When a very "stiff" decomposition process. When a very "stiff"
element is adjacent to a very "flexible" element, a element is adjacent to a very "flexible" element, a
math precision error may occur. Replace stiff math precision error may occur. Replace stiff
elements with a rigid system or artificially soften elements with a rigid system or artificially soften
the element. the element.

The loads and stresses in the elements are computed using the The loads and stresses in the elements are computed using the
computed nodal displacement vector. computed nodal displacement vector.

6.11.2 STARDYNE Second Order Static Analysis 6.11.2 STARDYNE Second Order Static Analysis
6WUHVV%DVHG6WLIIQHVV0RGHOLQJ 6WDU 6WUHVV%DVHG6WLIIQHVV0RGHOLQJ 6WDU

STARDYNE can compute additional bending stiffness for beams STARDYNE can compute additional bending stiffness for beams
and plates given the axial or inplane stresses. These matrices are and plates given the axial or inplane stresses. These matrices are
known as geometric stiffness matrices [Kg]. When a stress known as geometric stiffness matrices [Kg]. When a stress
stiffened related analysis is chosen (static, eigensolution, stiffened related analysis is chosen (static, eigensolution,
buckling) then a standard static analysis is performed first to buckling) then a standard static analysis is performed first to
compute the plate & beam stresses. From those stresses and the compute the plate & beam stresses. From those stresses and the
element geometry, the additional bending stiffness is computed. element geometry, the additional bending stiffness is computed.
Then the analysis is performed with the additional stiffness Then the analysis is performed with the additional stiffness
included. included.

Buckling analyses require LANCZOS (DYNAMIC entry) not HQR Buckling analyses require LANCZOS (DYNAMIC entry) not HQR
on the second run. Stress "stiffened" natural frequencies may use on the second run. Stress "stiffened" natural frequencies may use
either eigenvalue method. either eigenvalue method.

All quad plate elements (QUADB, QUADH, QUADS, QUADC) All quad plate elements (QUADB, QUADH, QUADS, QUADC)
including composites can be accommodated, although the including composites can be accommodated, although the
geometric stiffness matrix will be the same for all types. All geometric stiffness matrix will be the same for all types. All
triangular plate types may also be accommodated including 3-node triangular plate types may also be accommodated including 3-node
membrane quad plates. membrane quad plates.

Bending only plates and/or beams, or solid elements, or matrix Bending only plates and/or beams, or solid elements, or matrix
elements produce no stress stiffening and therefore do not elements produce no stress stiffening and therefore do not
contribute to buckling. Positively stressed elements become stiffer contribute to buckling. Positively stressed elements become stiffer
and negatively stressed elements become more flexible. and negatively stressed elements become more flexible.
Section 6 6-23 Section 6 6-23

The following STARDYNE features are not available in Staad.Pro. The following STARDYNE features are not available in Staad.Pro.
They should not be used, or should be considered carefully when They should not be used, or should be considered carefully when
used in stress "stiffened" or buckling analyses: ASYSG; AXIS used in stress "stiffened" or buckling analyses: ASYSG; AXIS
ANGLE; Solid Elements can be used but no stress stiffening will ANGLE; Solid Elements can be used but no stress stiffening will
result from them and they will not enter into any buckling result from them and they will not enter into any buckling
calculations; offset beams, elbows, pipet, and pinned beams are calculations; offset beams, elbows, pipet, and pinned beams are
treated as standard straight beams connected with 6 DOF/node at treated as standard straight beams connected with 6 DOF/node at
each end of the beam. each end of the beam.

6WUHVV6WLIIHQHG6WDWLFDQG(LJHQVROXWLRQ 6WDU 6WUHVV6WLIIHQHG6WDWLFDQG(LJHQVROXWLRQ 6WDU

:+$7 7KLV LV D ORDG FDVH VSHFLILF DQDO\VLV &RPSUHVVLRQ :+$7 7KLV LV D ORDG FDVH VSHFLILF DQDO\VLV &RPSUHVVLRQ
VWUHVVHV LQ EHDP DQG SODWH HOHPHQWV DUH XVHG WR GHWHUPLQH D JOREDO VWUHVVHV LQ EHDP DQG SODWH HOHPHQWV DUH XVHG WR GHWHUPLQH D JOREDO
DGGLWLRQDO VWLIIQHVV PDWUL[ >.J@ WR DGG WR WKH JOREDO VWLIIQHVV PDWUL[ DGGLWLRQDO VWLIIQHVV PDWUL[ >.J@ WR DGG WR WKH JOREDO VWLIIQHVV PDWUL[
LQ HLWKHU D VWDWLF RU HLJHQVROXWLRQ LQ HLWKHU D VWDWLF RU HLJHQVROXWLRQ

:+< 3ULPDULO\ XVHG ZKHQ WKH WHQVLRQ RU FRPSUHVVLRQ LQ EHDP RU :+< 3ULPDULO\ XVHG ZKHQ WKH WHQVLRQ RU FRPSUHVVLRQ LQ EHDP RU
SODWH HOHPHQWV ZLOO FRQWULEXWH VLJQLILFDQWO\ WR WKRVH HOHPHQWV SODWH HOHPHQWV ZLOO FRQWULEXWH VLJQLILFDQWO\ WR WKRVH HOHPHQWV
EHQGLQJ VWLIIQHVV DQG WKDW WKH LQFUHDVHGHFUHDVH LQ VWLIIQHVV LV EHQGLQJ VWLIIQHVV DQG WKDW WKH LQFUHDVHGHFUHDVH LQ VWLIIQHVV LV
LPSRUWDQW WR WKH VROXWLRQ LPSRUWDQW WR WKH VROXWLRQ

+2: 6HOHFW RQO\ RQH VWDWLF ORDGLQJ FDVH WKHQ VHOHFW 6WUHVV +2: 6HOHFW RQO\ RQH VWDWLF ORDGLQJ FDVH WKHQ VHOHFW 6WUHVV
6WLIIHQHG 6WDWLF RU (LJHQVROXWLRQ 2WKHU LQSXWV DUH WKH VDPH DV 6WLIIHQHG 6WDWLF RU (LJHQVROXWLRQ 2WKHU LQSXWV DUH WKH VDPH DV
QRUPDO DQDO\VHV QRUPDO DQDO\VHV

The static global matrix equation becomes: The static global matrix equation becomes:

[ K + Kg ] • { δ } = { P } [ K + Kg ] • { δ } = { P }

The eigensolution global matrix equation becomes: The eigensolution global matrix equation becomes:

ω2 [ m ] { q } - [ K + Kg ] { q } = o ω2 [ m ] { q } - [ K + Kg ] { q } = o

Stress "stiffened" natural frequencies may use either eigenvalue Stress "stiffened" natural frequencies may use either eigenvalue
method. method.
STARDYNE for STAAD.Pro STARDYNE for STAAD.Pro
6-24 Section 6 6-24 Section 6
%XFNOLQJ 6WDU %XFNOLQJ 6WDU

:+$7 (XOHU EXFNOLQJ FDOFXODWLRQ EDVHG RQ D VLQJOH VWDWLF ORDG :+$7 (XOHU EXFNOLQJ FDOFXODWLRQ EDVHG RQ D VLQJOH VWDWLF ORDG
GLVWULEXWLRQ &RPSUHVVLRQ VWUHVVHV LQ EHDP DQG SODWH HOHPHQWV DUH GLVWULEXWLRQ &RPSUHVVLRQ VWUHVVHV LQ EHDP DQG SODWH HOHPHQWV DUH
XVHG WR GHWHUPLQH D JOREDO VWDELOLW\ PDWUL[ >.J@ WR XVH LQ SODFH RI D XVHG WR GHWHUPLQH D JOREDO VWDELOLW\ PDWUL[ >.J@ WR XVH LQ SODFH RI D
PDVV PDWUL[ LQ DQ HLJHQVROXWLRQ 7KH ω UHVXOWV DUH WKH EXFNOLQJ PDVV PDWUL[ LQ DQ HLJHQVROXWLRQ 7KH ω UHVXOWV DUH WKH EXFNOLQJ
IDFWRUV IDFWRUV

:+< 3ULPDULO\ XVHG IRU VWDELOLW\ DQDO\VLV RI SDUWV RI VWUXFWXUHV RU :+< 3ULPDULO\ XVHG IRU VWDELOLW\ DQDO\VLV RI SDUWV RI VWUXFWXUHV RU
PHFKDQLFDO SDUWV PHFKDQLFDO SDUWV

+2: 6HOHFW RQO\ RQH VWDWLF ORDGLQJ FDVH WKHQ VHOHFW EXFNOLQJ +2: 6HOHFW RQO\ RQH VWDWLF ORDGLQJ FDVH WKHQ VHOHFW EXFNOLQJ
DQDO\VLV DQDO\VLV

The process of calculating the system buckling factor and buckled The process of calculating the system buckling factor and buckled
shape involves first solving the static load case for displacements shape involves first solving the static load case for displacements
and beam axial stresses and plate inplane stresses. From these and beam axial stresses and plate inplane stresses. From these
stresses, additional beam and plate bending stiffness can be stresses, additional beam and plate bending stiffness can be
computed, [Kg]. The solution of the following eigenproblem will computed, [Kg]. The solution of the following eigenproblem will
result in the amount that the applied load case would have to be result in the amount that the applied load case would have to be
factored (BF) to be at the critical Euler buckling load. The factored (BF) to be at the critical Euler buckling load. The
buckled shape is normalized to a maximum displacement of one. buckled shape is normalized to a maximum displacement of one.
To get the actual displacements and stresses at the critical To get the actual displacements and stresses at the critical
buckling load, repeat the static analysis with the original loads buckling load, repeat the static analysis with the original loads
multiplied by BF. multiplied by BF.

BF [ Kg ] { q } - [ K ] { q } = o BF [ Kg ] { q } - [ K ] { q } = o

Where Where
[Kg] = the geometric stiffness matrix (banded symmetric) [Kg] = the geometric stiffness matrix (banded symmetric)
BF = Buckling Factor BF = Buckling Factor
{ q } = the normalized buckled shape { q } = the normalized buckled shape

For buckling analysis, the Lanczos eigenvalues are critical For buckling analysis, the Lanczos eigenvalues are critical
buckling factors. The critical buckling loads are (all of the loads buckling factors. The critical buckling loads are (all of the loads
that you have applied) times (the first buckling factor). A positive that you have applied) times (the first buckling factor). A positive
buckling factor that is less than one indicates the applied load is buckling factor that is less than one indicates the applied load is
greater than the buckling load. A negative buckling factor greater than the buckling load. A negative buckling factor
Section 6 6-25 Section 6 6-25
indicates that the applied load case is in the opposite direction indicates that the applied load case is in the opposite direction
of the loading that would cause buckling. of the loading that would cause buckling.

Note that all loads are considered to be factored. If self weight Note that all loads are considered to be factored. If self weight
and compression are applied, then the buckling factor would be for and compression are applied, then the buckling factor would be for
both the compression and the self weight. both the compression and the self weight.

Buckling analyses require LANCZOS, not HQR. Buckling analyses require LANCZOS, not HQR.

6.11.3 STARDYNE Dynamic Response Analysis 6.11.3 STARDYNE Dynamic Response Analysis
Currently available dynamic analysis capabilities include solution Currently available dynamic analysis capabilities include solution
of the free vibration problem (eigenproblem) and several forced of the free vibration problem (eigenproblem) and several forced
vibration excitation analysis types: response spectrum analysis, vibration excitation analysis types: response spectrum analysis,
and linear time history analysis: all utilizing modal superposition and linear time history analysis: all utilizing modal superposition
methods. The dynamic response results are presented as structural methods. The dynamic response results are presented as structural
deformations (displacements, velocities, or accelerations) and as deformations (displacements, velocities, or accelerations) and as
internal element loads and stresses. internal element loads and stresses.

0DVV0RGHOLQJ 6WDU 0DVV0RGHOLQJ 6WDU

The natural frequencies and mode shapes of a structure are the The natural frequencies and mode shapes of a structure are the
primary parameters that affect the response of a structure under primary parameters that affect the response of a structure under
dynamic loading. The free vibration problem is solved to extract dynamic loading. The free vibration problem is solved to extract
these values. Since no external forcing function is involved, the these values. Since no external forcing function is involved, the
natural frequencies and mode shapes are direct functions of the natural frequencies and mode shapes are direct functions of the
stiffness and mass distribution in the structure. Results of the stiffness and mass distribution in the structure. Results of the
frequency and mode shape calculations may vary significantly frequency and mode shape calculations may vary significantly
depending upon the mass modeling. This variation, in turn, affects depending upon the mass modeling. This variation, in turn, affects
the dynamic analysis results. Thus, extreme caution should be the dynamic analysis results. Thus, extreme caution should be
exercised in mass modeling in a dynamic analysis problem. Active exercised in mass modeling in a dynamic analysis problem. Active
masses should be modeled as loads. All masses that are capable of masses should be modeled as loads. All masses that are capable of
moving should be modeled as loads applied in all possible moving should be modeled as loads applied in all possible
directions of movement. In response spectrum analysis, as a bare directions of movement. In response spectrum analysis, as a bare
minimum, all masses that are capable of moving in the direction of minimum, all masses that are capable of moving in the direction of
the spectrum, must be provided as loads acting in that direction. the spectrum, must be provided as loads acting in that direction.

It is strongly recommended that unit self weight be applied in the It is strongly recommended that unit self weight be applied in the
X, Y, and Z directions in all STARDYNE Eigenproblem/dynamic X, Y, and Z directions in all STARDYNE Eigenproblem/dynamic
STARDYNE for STAAD.Pro STARDYNE for STAAD.Pro
6-26 Section 6 6-26 Section 6
analyses even for 2-D frames or structures loaded in one or two analyses even for 2-D frames or structures loaded in one or two
global directions. This will generate nodal masses based on global directions. This will generate nodal masses based on
density and element volumes. As in STAAD the additional masses density and element volumes. As in STAAD the additional masses
at a point can be specified as forces. at a point can be specified as forces.

GUYAN SUPPORT DOF GUYAN SUPPORT DOF


This feature is not available in Staad.Pro. If the HQRII-Guyan This feature is not available in Staad.Pro. If the HQRII-Guyan
eigensolution method is chosen, then you should select some mass eigensolution method is chosen, then you should select some mass
dof (Guyan dof) to be retained in the eigensolution. The other dof (Guyan dof) to be retained in the eigensolution. The other
mass dof will be statically redistributed (transformed) to add to mass dof will be statically redistributed (transformed) to add to
the selected mass dof resulting in a full mass matrix (non- the selected mass dof resulting in a full mass matrix (non-
diagonal). This method is directly analogous to the static diagonal). This method is directly analogous to the static
condensation of stiffness at interior nodes to stiffness at boundary condensation of stiffness at interior nodes to stiffness at boundary
nodes used in substructures or in some finite elements. No nodes used in substructures or in some finite elements. No
stiffness is lost or changed but the kinetic energy of the mass is stiffness is lost or changed but the kinetic energy of the mass is
modified. However if N reasonably distributed Guyan dof are modified. However if N reasonably distributed Guyan dof are
chosen, then N / 2 of the lowest eigenvalues will be accurate. chosen, then N / 2 of the lowest eigenvalues will be accurate.
This procedure is only used by engineers who know how to use This procedure is only used by engineers who know how to use
Guyan dof to eliminate unwanted localized modes. Guyan dof to eliminate unwanted localized modes.

'DPSLQJ0RGHOLQJ 6WDU 'DPSLQJ0RGHOLQJ 6WDU

In the modal dynamic response method, damping is entered as a In the modal dynamic response method, damping is entered as a
damping ratio (as a fraction of critical damping; 5% damping is damping ratio (as a fraction of critical damping; 5% damping is
entered as .05) for each eigenvalue/mode used in the response.. entered as .05) for each eigenvalue/mode used in the response..
An alternative to the user specifying a value for each mode is the An alternative to the user specifying a value for each mode is the
composite modal damping method of assigning damping for each composite modal damping method of assigning damping for each
mode. This method is based on the concept of different materials mode. This method is based on the concept of different materials
having different damping ratios and that a particular mode’s having different damping ratios and that a particular mode’s
damping ratio should be a weighted average of the strain energies damping ratio should be a weighted average of the strain energies
* damping of the materials used. * damping of the materials used.

6ROXWLRQRIWKH(LJHQSUREOHP 6WDU 6ROXWLRQRIWKH(LJHQSUREOHP 6WDU

The eigenproblem is solved for structure frequencies and mode The eigenproblem is solved for structure frequencies and mode
shapes considering a mass matrix lumped at the nodes (See Mass shapes considering a mass matrix lumped at the nodes (See Mass
Modeling above). Masses at all active d.o.f. may be considered. Modeling above). Masses at all active d.o.f. may be considered.
Section 6 6-27 Section 6 6-27
Any structural model which consists of a stiffness matrix and Any structural model which consists of a stiffness matrix and
N mass degrees of freedom contains N normal modes of vibration. N mass degrees of freedom contains N normal modes of vibration.
Each normal mode occurs at a specific frequency of vibration Each normal mode occurs at a specific frequency of vibration
known as a natural frequency (or eigenvalue). At these known as a natural frequency (or eigenvalue). At these
frequencies, the nodal displacements, known as the mode shape (or frequencies, the nodal displacements, known as the mode shape (or
eigenvector), oscillate from positive to negative about 0.0. The eigenvector), oscillate from positive to negative about 0.0. The
advantage of modal methods are that only a small number of the advantage of modal methods are that only a small number of the
low frequency modes are necessary to obtain good dynamic low frequency modes are necessary to obtain good dynamic
response results. response results.

The process of calculating the system eigenvalues and The process of calculating the system eigenvalues and
eigenvectors is known as Modal Extraction and is performed by eigenvectors is known as Modal Extraction and is performed by
solving the equation: solving the equation:

ω2 [ m ] { q } - [ K ] { q } = o ω2 [ m ] { q } - [ K ] { q } = o

Where Where
[ m ] = the mass matrix (assumed to be diagonal, i.e., no mass [ m ] = the mass matrix (assumed to be diagonal, i.e., no mass
coupling) coupling)
ω = the natural frequencies (eigenvalues) ω = the natural frequencies (eigenvalues)
{ q } = the normalized mode shapes (eigenvectors) { q } = the normalized mode shapes (eigenvectors)

Frequency (HZ) = ω/2π Frequency (HZ) = ω/2π

Two solution methods are available: the Lanczos (“Lan Ch ™s”) Two solution methods are available: the Lanczos (“Lan Ch ™s”)
method (recommended) and the HQRII-Guyan method. method (recommended) and the HQRII-Guyan method.

Please note that various nomenclature is used to refer to the Please note that various nomenclature is used to refer to the
normal modes of vibration. (Eigenvalue, Natural Frequency, normal modes of vibration. (Eigenvalue, Natural Frequency,
Modal Frequency and Eigenvector, Generalized Coordinate, Mode Modal Frequency and Eigenvector, Generalized Coordinate, Mode
Shape, Modal Vector, Normal Modes, Normalized Mode Shape. Shape, Modal Vector, Normal Modes, Normalized Mode Shape.

GENERALIZED WEIGHT AND GENERALIZED MASS GENERALIZED WEIGHT AND GENERALIZED MASS
Each eigenvector {q} has an associated generalized mass defined Each eigenvector {q} has an associated generalized mass defined
by by

Generalized Mass (GM) ={ q } T [ M ] { q } Generalized Mass (GM) ={ q } T [ M ] { q }

Generalized Weight (GW) = GM * g Generalized Weight (GW) = GM * g


STARDYNE for STAAD.Pro STARDYNE for STAAD.Pro
6-28 Section 6 6-28 Section 6

PARTICIPATION FACTORS - A participation factor (Qi) is PARTICIPATION FACTORS - A participation factor (Qi) is
computed for each eigenvector for each of the three global (Xi) computed for each eigenvector for each of the three global (Xi)
translational directions. N is the number of nodes. translational directions. N is the number of nodes.

N N
∑ (q j,i )( w j,i ) ∑ (q j,i )( w j,i )
j=1 j=1
Qi = Qi =
GW GW

MODAL WEIGHTS - The summation of modal weights for all MODAL WEIGHTS - The summation of modal weights for all
modes in a given direction is equal to the Base Shear which would modes in a given direction is equal to the Base Shear which would
result from a one g base acceleration. The modal weight for each result from a one g base acceleration. The modal weight for each
mode = (GW)(Q i ²). The sum of the modal weights for the mode = (GW)(Q i ²). The sum of the modal weights for the
computed modes may be compared to the total weight of the computed modes may be compared to the total weight of the
structure (that has not been lumped at supports). The difference is structure (that has not been lumped at supports). The difference is
the amount of mass missing from a dynamic, base excitation, the amount of mass missing from a dynamic, base excitation,
modal response analysis. If too much is missing, then rerun the modal response analysis. If too much is missing, then rerun the
eigensolution asking for a greater number of modes or read about eigensolution asking for a greater number of modes or read about
how to employ the Missing Mass Correction method. how to employ the Missing Mass Correction method.

Lanczos Method and Free-Free Structures - An unrestrained, Lanczos Method and Free-Free Structures - An unrestrained,
free-free model has zero eigenvalues that may be solved in free-free model has zero eigenvalues that may be solved in
LANCZOS. However you must know that zero eigenvalues are LANCZOS. However you must know that zero eigenvalues are
expected and select the Free-Free option. Internally the program expected and select the Free-Free option. Internally the program
will compute a shift frequency, ω², which will be used to create a will compute a shift frequency, ω², which will be used to create a
matrix, [K g ], to be added to the stiffness matrix, [K], prior to the matrix, [K g ], to be added to the stiffness matrix, [K], prior to the
eigensolution ([K g ] = ω² [M]). The eigenvectors of the shifted eigensolution ([K g ] = ω² [M]). The eigenvectors of the shifted
eigenproblem are exactly the same and the frequencies are shifted eigenproblem are exactly the same and the frequencies are shifted
by ω² from that of the actual eigenproblem. So we simply add ω² by ω² from that of the actual eigenproblem. So we simply add ω²
to each computed frequency and we have completed an otherwise to each computed frequency and we have completed an otherwise
unsolvable singular eigenproblem. If, however, a singularity is unsolvable singular eigenproblem. If, however, a singularity is
still detected during decomposition, it is an indication that there is still detected during decomposition, it is an indication that there is
a portion of the structure without mass that is free to move a portion of the structure without mass that is free to move
statically relative to the rest of the structure. Such a structure statically relative to the rest of the structure. Such a structure
could not be solved statically either. For example, a free-free could not be solved statically either. For example, a free-free
beam which has Area, I2 and I3 properties, but has masses in only beam which has Area, I2 and I3 properties, but has masses in only
the transverse directions does not have mass in the axial direction the transverse directions does not have mass in the axial direction
and consequently will be singular in that direction. The remedy and consequently will be singular in that direction. The remedy
Section 6 6-29 Section 6 6-29
would be to set Area=0.0 or restrain the axial direction, since would be to set Area=0.0 or restrain the axial direction, since
without mass, no axial modes can exist. without mass, no axial modes can exist.

6.11.3.1 STARDYNE Response Spectrum Analysis 6.11.3.1 STARDYNE Response Spectrum Analysis
(Dynre4) (Dynre4)

:+$7 $SSUR[LPDWH PRGDO DQDO\VLV ZKLFK FRPSXWHV WKH ¦0RGDO :+$7 $SSUR[LPDWH PRGDO DQDO\VLV ZKLFK FRPSXWHV WKH ¦0RGDO
5HVSRQVHV§ GXH WR D JLYHQ GLUHFWLRQDO EDVH H[FLWDWLRQ UHVSRQVH 5HVSRQVHV§ GXH WR D JLYHQ GLUHFWLRQDO EDVH H[FLWDWLRQ UHVSRQVH
VSHFWUXP (DFK PRGH©V UHVSRQVH WR D JLYHQ H[FLWDWLRQ GLUHFWLRQ DUH VSHFWUXP (DFK PRGH©V UHVSRQVH WR D JLYHQ H[FLWDWLRQ GLUHFWLRQ DUH
WKHQ FRPELQHG XVLQJ RQH RI WKH PDQ\ PHWKRGV DYDLODEOH WR IRUP WKHQ FRPELQHG XVLQJ RQH RI WKH PDQ\ PHWKRGV DYDLODEOH WR IRUP
WKH WRWDO UHVSRQVH IRU WKDW LQSXW GLUHFWLRQ ,I WKHUH LV PRUH WKDQ RQH WKH WRWDO UHVSRQVH IRU WKDW LQSXW GLUHFWLRQ ,I WKHUH LV PRUH WKDQ RQH
GLUHFWLRQ RI LQSXW WKH WRWDO UHVSRQVHV RI HDFK GLUHFWLRQ DUH WKHQ GLUHFWLRQ RI LQSXW WKH WRWDO UHVSRQVHV RI HDFK GLUHFWLRQ DUH WKHQ
FRPELQHG E\ WKH 6566 PHWKRG FRPELQHG E\ WKH 6566 PHWKRG

:+< 3ULPDULO\ XVHG IRU VHLVPLF VWUXFWXUDO HQJLQHHULQJ RI :+< 3ULPDULO\ XVHG IRU VHLVPLF VWUXFWXUDO HQJLQHHULQJ RI
EXLOGLQJV EXLOGLQJV
:+< 67$5'<1( VXSSRUWV WKH 6566 &4& PHWKRGV :+< 67$5'<1( VXSSRUWV WKH 6566 &4& PHWKRGV

+2: )LUVW SHUIRUP WKH 0DVV 0RGHOLQJ VWHS FDUHIXOO\ QRWLQJ WKDW D +2: )LUVW SHUIRUP WKH 0DVV 0RGHOLQJ VWHS FDUHIXOO\ QRWLQJ WKDW D
UHYLVHG QRGHHOHPHQW PRGHO ZLWK DGGLWLRQDO PLGVSDQ QRGHV ZLWK UHYLVHG QRGHHOHPHQW PRGHO ZLWK DGGLWLRQDO PLGVSDQ QRGHV ZLWK
PDVVHV PD\ JLYH EHWWHU G\QDPLF DQG HOHPHQW UHVXOWV 1H[W GHFLGH PDVVHV PD\ JLYH EHWWHU G\QDPLF DQG HOHPHQW UHVXOWV 1H[W GHFLGH
LI 0LVVLQJ 0DVV PRGHV DUH WR EH FRPSXWHG 7KHQ VHOHFW WKH LI 0LVVLQJ 0DVV PRGHV DUH WR EH FRPSXWHG 7KHQ VHOHFW WKH
QXPEHU RI HLJHQPRGHV DQGRU IUHTXHQF\ UDQJH UHTXLUHG 1H[W QXPEHU RI HLJHQPRGHV DQGRU IUHTXHQF\ UDQJH UHTXLUHG 1H[W
SHUIRUP WKH HLJHQVROXWLRQ DQG HQVXUH WKDW WKH GHVLUHG IUHTXHQFLHV SHUIRUP WKH HLJHQVROXWLRQ DQG HQVXUH WKDW WKH GHVLUHG IUHTXHQFLHV
ZHUH FRPSXWHG 1RZ \RX DUH UHDG\ IRU WKH 5HVSRQVH 6SHFWUXP ZHUH FRPSXWHG 1RZ \RX DUH UHDG\ IRU WKH 5HVSRQVH 6SHFWUXP
$QDO\VLV 6WHS $QDO\VLV 6WHS

Response Spectrum Analysis allows the user to analyze the Response Spectrum Analysis allows the user to analyze the
response of multi-degree-of-freedom linear elastic structure response of multi-degree-of-freedom linear elastic structure
models subjected to an arbitrarily oriented foundation shock models subjected to an arbitrarily oriented foundation shock
response spectrum input. You may enter Response Spectra versus response spectrum input. You may enter Response Spectra versus
Frequency tables for any of the directions of motion. Frequency tables for any of the directions of motion.

For any supplied response spectrum (acceleration or velocity or For any supplied response spectrum (acceleration or velocity or
displacement vs. frequency) the following may be calculated: node displacement vs. frequency) the following may be calculated: node
displacement, velocity, and acceleration; element forces and displacement, velocity, and acceleration; element forces and
stresses, and support reactions. Results of the response spectrum stresses, and support reactions. Results of the response spectrum
analysis may be combined with the results of the static analysis to analysis may be combined with the results of the static analysis to
STARDYNE for STAAD.Pro STARDYNE for STAAD.Pro
6-30 Section 6 6-30 Section 6
perform subsequent design. To account for reversibility of perform subsequent design. To account for reversibility of
seismic activity, load combinations can be created to include seismic activity, load combinations can be created to include
either the positive or negative contribution of seismic results. either the positive or negative contribution of seismic results.

6.11.3.2 STARDYNE Linear Time History Response 6.11.3.2 STARDYNE Linear Time History Response
Analysis (Dynre1) Analysis (Dynre1)

:+$7 0RGDO G\QDPLF DQDO\VLV ZKLFK FRPSXWHV WKH ¦0RGDO :+$7 0RGDO G\QDPLF DQDO\VLV ZKLFK FRPSXWHV WKH ¦0RGDO
5HVSRQVHV§ YHUVXV WLPH GXH WR IRUFHV DQGRU JURXQG PRWLRQV WKDW 5HVSRQVHV§ YHUVXV WLPH GXH WR IRUFHV DQGRU JURXQG PRWLRQV WKDW
PD\ YDU\ ZLWK WLPH (DFK XQFRXSOHG PRGH©V WLPH KLVWRU\ UHVSRQVHV PD\ YDU\ ZLWK WLPH (DFK XQFRXSOHG PRGH©V WLPH KLVWRU\ UHVSRQVHV
DUH VXPPHG WR IRUP WKH WRWDO VWUXFWXUH UHVSRQVH YHUVXV WLPH DUH VXPPHG WR IRUP WKH WRWDO VWUXFWXUH UHVSRQVH YHUVXV WLPH

:+< 8VHG IRU DQ\ WLPH YDU\LQJ IRUFHPRWLRQ DQDO\VLV LQFOXGLQJ :+< 8VHG IRU DQ\ WLPH YDU\LQJ IRUFHPRWLRQ DQDO\VLV LQFOXGLQJ
VHLVPLF IRUFHG YLEUDWLRQ HWF VHLVPLF IRUFHG YLEUDWLRQ HWF
:+< 67$5'<1( 7KH VROXWLRQ PHWKRG PD\ EH PRUH DFFXUDWH IRU :+< 67$5'<1( 7KH VROXWLRQ PHWKRG PD\ EH PRUH DFFXUDWH IRU
KLJK IUHTXHQF\ LQSXW IRUFHV OLNH HDUWKTXDNHV KLJK IUHTXHQF\ LQSXW IRUFHV OLNH HDUWKTXDNHV

+2: )LUVW SHUIRUP WKH 0DVV 0RGHOLQJ VWHS FDUHIXOO\ QRWLQJ WKDW +2: )LUVW SHUIRUP WKH 0DVV 0RGHOLQJ VWHS FDUHIXOO\ QRWLQJ WKDW
D UHYLVHG QRGHHOHPHQW PRGHO ZLWK DGGLWLRQDO PLGVSDQ QRGHV ZLWK D UHYLVHG QRGHHOHPHQW PRGHO ZLWK DGGLWLRQDO PLGVSDQ QRGHV ZLWK
PDVVHV PD\ JLYH EHWWHU G\QDPLF DQG HOHPHQW UHVXOWV 7KHQ VHOHFW PDVVHV PD\ JLYH EHWWHU G\QDPLF DQG HOHPHQW UHVXOWV 7KHQ VHOHFW
WKH QXPEHU RI HLJHQPRGHV DQGRU IUHTXHQF\ UDQJH UHTXLUHG 1H[W WKH QXPEHU RI HLJHQPRGHV DQGRU IUHTXHQF\ UDQJH UHTXLUHG 1H[W
SHUIRUP WKH HLJHQVROXWLRQ DQG HQVXUH WKDW WKH GHVLUHG IUHTXHQFLHV SHUIRUP WKH HLJHQVROXWLRQ DQG HQVXUH WKDW WKH GHVLUHG IUHTXHQFLHV
ZHUH FRPSXWHG 1RZ \RX DUH UHDG\ IRU WKH /LQHDU 7LPH +LVWRU\ ZHUH FRPSXWHG 1RZ \RX DUH UHDG\ IRU WKH /LQHDU 7LPH +LVWRU\
$QDO\VLV 6WHS $QDO\VLV 6WHS

STARDYNE has the capability to perform a linear modal response STARDYNE has the capability to perform a linear modal response
history analysis on a structure subjected to time varying forcing history analysis on a structure subjected to time varying forcing
function loads at the nodes and ground motion at its base. Output function loads at the nodes and ground motion at its base. Output
consists of nodal displacements, velocities, accelerations, element consists of nodal displacements, velocities, accelerations, element
loads and stresses. loads and stresses.

The Linear Time History analysis is performed using the modal The Linear Time History analysis is performed using the modal
superposition method. Hence, all the active masses should be superposition method. Hence, all the active masses should be
included in the determination of the mode shapes and frequencies. included in the determination of the mode shapes and frequencies.
Please refer to the section above on "mass modeling" for Please refer to the section above on "mass modeling" for
additional information on this topic. additional information on this topic.
Section 6 6-31 Section 6 6-31
In the mode superposition method, it is assumed that the In the mode superposition method, it is assumed that the
structural response can be obtained from "p" modes (usually the structural response can be obtained from "p" modes (usually the
lowest frequency modes). The equilibrium equations are written lowest frequency modes). The equilibrium equations are written
as: as:

[m]{x}+ [c]{x}+ [k ]{x} = {Pt} [m]{x}+ [c]{x}+ [k ]{x} = {Pt}


.. . .. .
(1) (1)

{x}= ∑ {φ}q {x}= ∑ {φ}q


p p
(2) (2)
i =1 i =1

Equation (1) reduces to "p" separate uncoupled equations of Equation (1) reduces to "p" separate uncoupled equations of
the form: the form:

.. . .. .
q i + 2ξω q i + ω2 q i = R i (t ) q i + 2ξω q i + ω2 q i = R i (t )

where ξ is the modal damping ratio and ω the natural frequency where ξ is the modal damping ratio and ω the natural frequency
for the i th mode. for the i th mode.

These uncoupled modal equations of motion are solved by the These uncoupled modal equations of motion are solved by the
LaPlace transform method from one solution-time-point to the next LaPlace transform method from one solution-time-point to the next
solution-time-point (this is not a numerical integration method like solution-time-point (this is not a numerical integration method like
the Wilson - θ method). There is a solution-time-point at each the Wilson - θ method). There is a solution-time-point at each
time that any load curve changes slope as well as at the requested time that any load curve changes slope as well as at the requested
output times. With the assumption that the load curves are linear output times. With the assumption that the load curves are linear
between solution-time-points this method is exact and stable. between solution-time-points this method is exact and stable.
Unlike in STAAD, this method does not require an integration Unlike in STAAD, this method does not require an integration
time step for solution accuracy but does need the user to specify a time step for solution accuracy but does need the user to specify a
sufficient number of output times to allow linear X-Y plots to sufficient number of output times to allow linear X-Y plots to
reasonably show the peaks and shape of the response curves. reasonably show the peaks and shape of the response curves.
There is no advantage in having thousands of output time points There is no advantage in having thousands of output time points
however. however.

Output consists of "relative" and "absolute" nodal displacements, Output consists of "relative" and "absolute" nodal displacements,
velocities, accelerations, element loads and stresses. For selected velocities, accelerations, element loads and stresses. For selected
node-direction displacements or accelerations, that response value node-direction displacements or accelerations, that response value
may be displayed as a function of time. “Relative” response is may be displayed as a function of time. “Relative” response is
STARDYNE for STAAD.Pro STARDYNE for STAAD.Pro
6-32 Section 6 6-32 Section 6
(for the case of base ground motion) the nodal response relative to (for the case of base ground motion) the nodal response relative to
the base motion (basically the elastic part of the response). the base motion (basically the elastic part of the response).

The user may also select times (and/or have the program select The user may also select times (and/or have the program select
peak times) at which the response of the complete structure is peak times) at which the response of the complete structure is
computed. The results and displays that are then made possible computed. The results and displays that are then made possible
are similar to those in a static solution. are similar to those in a static solution.

6.12 References (STARDYNE) 6.12 References (STARDYNE)

The basic theory of the Finite Element Method is presented in The basic theory of the Finite Element Method is presented in
many textbooks. The following publicly available documents many textbooks. The following publicly available documents
describe many of the technical aspects of the STARDYNE finite describe many of the technical aspects of the STARDYNE finite
elements. elements.

• Beam element • Beam element


Przemieniecki, J. S. Theory of Matrix Structural Analysis. Przemieniecki, J. S. Theory of Matrix Structural Analysis.
McGraw-Hill, New York, USA, 1968. McGraw-Hill, New York, USA, 1968.

• Triangular Plate • Triangular Plate


Clough, R. W. and Tocher, J. L. Finite Element Stiffness Clough, R. W. and Tocher, J. L. Finite Element Stiffness
Matrices for the Analysis of Plate Bending. Conference on Matrices for the Analysis of Plate Bending. Conference on
Matrix Methods in Structural Mechanics, Wright Patterson, AFB, Matrix Methods in Structural Mechanics, Wright Patterson, AFB,
1965 (thin plate) 1965 (thin plate)

Martin, H. C. Stiffness Matrix for a Triangular Sandwich Martin, H. C. Stiffness Matrix for a Triangular Sandwich
Element in Bending. JPL No. 32-1158, Jet Propulsion Laboratory, Element in Bending. JPL No. 32-1158, Jet Propulsion Laboratory,
Pasadena, California, October, 1967 (thick plate and sandwich Pasadena, California, October, 1967 (thick plate and sandwich
option) option)

Quadrilateral (QUADB) Quadrilateral (QUADB)


Clough, R. W. and Felippa, C. A. A Refined Quadrilateral Clough, R. W. and Felippa, C. A. A Refined Quadrilateral
Finite Element for the Analysis of Plate Bending. AD 703-685, Finite Element for the Analysis of Plate Bending. AD 703-685,
Proceedings of the 2nd Conference on Matrix Methods in Proceedings of the 2nd Conference on Matrix Methods in
Structural Mechanics, 1968 (thin plate) Structural Mechanics, 1968 (thin plate)

• Solid Hexahedron • Solid Hexahedron


Section 6 6-33 Section 6 6-33
Irons, B. and Ahmad, S. Techniques of Finite Elements. Irons, B. and Ahmad, S. Techniques of Finite Elements.
Ellis Horwood, Sussex, UK, 1980. Ellis Horwood, Sussex, UK, 1980.

Wilson, E. L., Taylor, R. L., Doherty, W. P., and Ghaboussi, T. Wilson, E. L., Taylor, R. L., Doherty, W. P., and Ghaboussi, T.
Incompatible Displacement Models. Numerical and Computer Incompatible Displacement Models. Numerical and Computer
Methods in Structural Mechanics, pp 43-57, ed. S. Fenves, et al., Methods in Structural Mechanics, pp 43-57, ed. S. Fenves, et al.,
Academic Press, 1973. (8-node cube can be made more flexible by Academic Press, 1973. (8-node cube can be made more flexible by
the incompatible modes-- 'bubble functions'). the incompatible modes-- 'bubble functions').

Taylor, R. L., Beresford, P.J., Wilson, E.L. A Non-Conforming Taylor, R. L., Beresford, P.J., Wilson, E.L. A Non-Conforming
Element for Stress Analysis. International Journal of Numerical Element for Stress Analysis. International Journal of Numerical
Methods in Engineering, 10, 1976 (makes an element with Methods in Engineering, 10, 1976 (makes an element with
incompatible modes to pass the patch test). incompatible modes to pass the patch test).

• Hybrid Cube and Hybrid Quadrilateral Plate • Hybrid Cube and Hybrid Quadrilateral Plate
Pian, T.H.H. Hybrid Models. Numerical and Computer Methods in Pian, T.H.H. Hybrid Models. Numerical and Computer Methods in
Structural Mechanics, pp58-78, ed. S. Fenves, et al., Academic Structural Mechanics, pp58-78, ed. S. Fenves, et al., Academic
Press, 1973. Press, 1973.

Irons, B. and Ahmad, S. Techniques of Finite Elements. Ellis Irons, B. and Ahmad, S. Techniques of Finite Elements. Ellis
Horwood, Sussex, UK, 1980 (Chapter 15). Horwood, Sussex, UK, 1980 (Chapter 15).

Loikkanen, M. Hybrid Membranes, Solids and Plates. System Loikkanen, M. Hybrid Membranes, Solids and Plates. System
Development Corporation, Santa Monica, California. Development Corporation, Santa Monica, California.

• Piping • Piping
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III., 1971. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III., 1971.

Recommended Overall Reading Recommended Overall Reading


Cook, R.D., et.al. Concepts and Applications of Finite Element Cook, R.D., et.al. Concepts and Applications of Finite Element
Analysis. John Wiley, 1989, Third Edition. Analysis. John Wiley, 1989, Third Edition.

Bathe, K.-J. Finite Element Procedures in Engineering Analysis. Bathe, K.-J. Finite Element Procedures in Engineering Analysis.
Prentice-Hall, 1982 Prentice-Hall, 1982

Hughes, T. J. R. The Finite Element Method. Prentice-Hall, 1987. Hughes, T. J. R. The Finite Element Method. Prentice-Hall, 1987.

Zienkiewicz, O.C. The Finite Element Method. McGraw-Hill, Zienkiewicz, O.C. The Finite Element Method. McGraw-Hill,
1977, Third Edition. 1977, Third Edition.
STARDYNE for STAAD.Pro STARDYNE for STAAD.Pro
6-34 Section 6 6-34 Section 6
Section 7 7-1 Section 7 7-1

STAPLE – STAAD.Pro Application STAPLE – STAAD.Pro Application


Programming Language Environment Programming Language Environment

Section 7 Section 7
This section is designed to provide an overview of STAPLE’s This section is designed to provide an overview of STAPLE’s
functionality. STAPLE consists of a set of English language based functionality. STAPLE consists of a set of English language based
commands that can be used to create a script file. The script file is commands that can be used to create a script file. The script file is
a text file that can be created using any text editor. The a text file that can be created using any text editor. The
STAAD.Pro environment provides a powerful text editor that can STAAD.Pro environment provides a powerful text editor that can
be used to create and edit script files. be used to create and edit script files.

The script file may then be run from the STAAD.Pro environment The script file may then be run from the STAAD.Pro environment
to access and extract required information from the run database to access and extract required information from the run database
after that analysis is performed. The extracted information can be after that analysis is performed. The extracted information can be
further processed by the script file to further processed by the script file to

• run the user’s own program. • run the user’s own program.
• perform sort/search operations. • perform sort/search operations.
• create customized output using the user’s own formats. • create customized output using the user’s own formats.
• create interfaces to other software. • create interfaces to other software.
• perform any other post-processing operation. • perform any other post-processing operation.

Running script files Running script files

The script files may be run within the STAAD.Pro environment as The script files may be run within the STAAD.Pro environment as
follows. follows.

• As part of a STAAD.Pro input file. • As part of a STAAD.Pro input file.


• As part of a STAAD.Pro input file using the CALL statement to • As part of a STAAD.Pro input file using the CALL statement to
call an external script file. call an external script file.

The output produced by script files may be viewed and printed The output produced by script files may be viewed and printed
using facilities of the STAAD.Pro environment. using facilities of the STAAD.Pro environment.
STAPLE for STAAD.Pro STAPLE for STAAD.Pro
7-2 Section 7 7-2 Section 7

This section of the documentation describes the commands and This section of the documentation describes the commands and
related instructions for STAPLE. The user utilizes a command related instructions for STAPLE. The user utilizes a command
language format to communicate instructions to the program. These language format to communicate instructions to the program. These
commands are utilized to commands are utilized to

• Initiate and finish a segment of STAPLE commands to create • Initiate and finish a segment of STAPLE commands to create
the script file. the script file.
• Open a user-specified external file. • Open a user-specified external file.
• Access relevant structural information stored within the • Access relevant structural information stored within the
STAAD.Pro database file (.DBS file). STAAD.Pro database file (.DBS file).
• Write relevant data in a required format to an external file. • Write relevant data in a required format to an external file.
• Execute external programs. • Execute external programs.
• Create graphical outputs. • Create graphical outputs.

The command language format and conventions are described in The command language format and conventions are described in
Section 7.1. In Section 7.2, a detailed description of the available Section 7.1. In Section 7.2, a detailed description of the available
commands is provided. commands is provided.
Section 7 7-3 Section 7 7-3

7.1 STAPLE Command Language Conventions 7.1 STAPLE Command Language Conventions

This section describes the STAPLE command language elements This section describes the STAPLE command language elements
and conventions. First, the various elements of the language are and conventions. First, the various elements of the language are
discussed and then the command language format is described in discussed and then the command language format is described in
detail. detail.
STAPLE for STAAD.Pro STAPLE for STAAD.Pro
7-4 Section 7 7-4 Section 7

7.1.1 Elements of The Commands 7.1.1 Elements of The Commands

a) Integer Numbers: Integer numbers are whole numbers written a) Integer Numbers: Integer numbers are whole numbers written
without a decimal point. These numbers are designated as i 1 , without a decimal point. These numbers are designated as i 1 ,
i 2 , etc., and should not contain any decimal point. Signs i 2 , etc., and should not contain any decimal point. Signs
(+ or -) are permitted in front of these numbers. If the sign is (+ or -) are permitted in front of these numbers. If the sign is
omitted, it is assumed to be positive (+). omitted, it is assumed to be positive (+).

b) Floating Point Numbers: These are real numbers that may b) Floating Point Numbers: These are real numbers that may
contain a decimal portion. These numbers are designated as f 1 , contain a decimal portion. These numbers are designated as f 1 ,
f 2 , etc.. Values may have a decimal point and/or exponent. f 2 , etc.. Values may have a decimal point and/or exponent.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

       

( ( ( (

When the sign is omitted, it is assumed to be positive (+). Also When the sign is omitted, it is assumed to be positive (+). Also
note that the decimal point may be omitted, if the decimal note that the decimal point may be omitted, if the decimal
portion of the number is zero. portion of the number is zero.

c) Alphanumerics: These are characters, which are used to c) Alphanumerics: These are characters, which are used to
construct the names for data, titles or commands. No quotation construct the names for data, titles or commands. No quotation
marks are needed to enclose them unless otherwise specified. marks are needed to enclose them unless otherwise specified.

d) Repetitive Data: Repetitive numerical data may be provided d) Repetitive Data: Repetitive numerical data may be provided
by using the following format: by using the following format:

n*f n*f
where n = number of times data has to be repeated where n = number of times data has to be repeated
f = numeric data, namely, integers and floating f = numeric data, namely, integers and floating
point numbers point numbers
Section 7 7-5 Section 7 7-5

7.1.2 Command Formats 7.1.2 Command Formats

a) Free-Format Input: All STAPLE commands are in free-format a) Free-Format Input: All STAPLE commands are in free-format
style. Input data items should be separated by blank spaces style. Input data items should be separated by blank spaces
from the other input data items. Quotation marks are never from the other input data items. Quotation marks are never
needed to separate any alphabetic words such as data, needed to separate any alphabetic words such as data,
commands or titles. commands or titles.

b) Commenting Input: For documentation of a STAPLE script b) Commenting Input: For documentation of a STAPLE script
file, the facility to provide comments is available. Comments file, the facility to provide comments is available. Comments
can be included by providing an asterisk (*) mark as the first can be included by providing an asterisk (*) mark as the first
non-blank character in any line. The line with the comment is non-blank character in any line. The line with the comment is
"echoed" in the output file but not processed by the program. "echoed" in the output file but not processed by the program.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

)25 /2$'   )25 /2$'  

)2//2:,1* &$/&8/$7,216 )25 /2$'  $1'  )2//2:,1* &$/&8/$7,216 )25 /2$'  $1' 

:5,7( 5($&7 )< 0= :5,7( 5($&7 )< 0=

c) Meaning of Underlining in the Manual: Exact command c) Meaning of Underlining in the Manual: Exact command
formats are described in the following sections. Many words in formats are described in the following sections. Many words in
the commands and data may be abbreviated. The full word the commands and data may be abbreviated. The full word
intended is given in the command description with the portion intended is given in the command description with the portion
actually required (the abbreviation) underlined. actually required (the abbreviation) underlined.

For example, if the word MEMBER is used in a command, only For example, if the word MEMBER is used in a command, only
the portion MEMB needs to be input. It is clearer for others the portion MEMB needs to be input. It is clearer for others
reading the output if the entire word is used, but an reading the output if the entire word is used, but an
experienced user may desire to use the abbreviations. experienced user may desire to use the abbreviations.

d) Meaning of Braces and Parenthesis: In some command d) Meaning of Braces and Parenthesis: In some command
formats, braces enclose a number of choices, which are formats, braces enclose a number of choices, which are
arranged vertically. One and only one of the choices can be arranged vertically. One and only one of the choices can be
selected. However, several of the listed choices may be selected. However, several of the listed choices may be
selected if an asterisk (*) mark is located outside the braces. selected if an asterisk (*) mark is located outside the braces.
STAPLE for STAAD.Pro STAPLE for STAAD.Pro
7-6 Section 7 7-6 Section 7
([DPSOH ([DPSOH

 ;<   ;< 
 <=   <= 
 ;=   ;= 

In the above example, the user must make a choice of XY or In the above example, the user must make a choice of XY or
YZ or XZ. YZ or XZ.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

 );   ); 
 )<   )< 
 )=   )= 

Here the user can choose one, two or all of the listing (FX, FY Here the user can choose one, two or all of the listing (FX, FY
and FZ) in any order. Parentheses, ( ), enclosing a portion of a and FZ) in any order. Parentheses, ( ), enclosing a portion of a
command indicate that the enclosed portion is optional. The command indicate that the enclosed portion is optional. The
presence or absence of this portion affects the meaning of the presence or absence of this portion affects the meaning of the
command, as is explained in the description of the particular command, as is explained in the description of the particular
command. command.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

:5,7( )25&( 0(0%(5 W\SH  OLVW :5,7( )25&( 0(0%(5 W\SH  OLVW

In the above line, the word MEMBER is optional. No member In the above line, the word MEMBER is optional. No member
number will be written if this word is not used. number will be written if this word is not used.

e) Multiple Data Separator: Multiple data can be provided on a e) Multiple Data Separator: Multiple data can be provided on a
single line if they are separated by a semicolon (;) character. single line if they are separated by a semicolon (;) character.
One restriction is that consecutive commands can not be One restriction is that consecutive commands can not be
separated by a semicolon. They must appear on separate lines. separated by a semicolon. They must appear on separate lines.

f) Listing Data: In some STAPLE command descriptions, the f) Listing Data: In some STAPLE command descriptions, the
word "list" is used to identify a list of joints, word "list" is used to identify a list of joints,
Section 7 7-7 Section 7 7-7
members/elements or loading cases. The format of a list can members/elements or loading cases. The format of a list can
be defined as follows: be defined as follows:

 L 1  L 2  L 3    L 1  L 2  L 3  
OLVW  L 1 72 L 2 %< L 3  OLVW  L 1 72 L 2 %< L 3 
 ; RU < RU =   ; RU < RU = 

The word TO means all integers from the first (i 1 ) to and The word TO means all integers from the first (i 1 ) to and
including the second (i 2 ). The expression BY and the number including the second (i 2 ). The expression BY and the number
that follows (i 3 ) signifies that member numbers have to be that follows (i 3 ) signifies that member numbers have to be
generated from i 1 to i 2 in steps of i 3 i.e., i 1 , i 1 +i 3 , i 1 +2*i 3 , generated from i 1 to i 2 in steps of i 3 i.e., i 1 , i 1 +i 3 , i 1 +2*i 3 ,
i 1 +3*i 3 , etc. upto but not exceeding i 2 . If BY i 3 is omitted, the i 1 +3*i 3 , etc. upto but not exceeding i 2 . If BY i 3 is omitted, the
increment will be set to one. Sometimes the list may be too increment will be set to one. Sometimes the list may be too
long to fit on one line, in which case the list may be continued long to fit on one line, in which case the list may be continued
to the next line by providing a hyphen preceded by a blank to the next line by providing a hyphen preceded by a blank
space. Also note that only a list may be continued and not any space. Also note that only a list may be continued and not any
other type of data. other type of data.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

)25 0(0%     )25 0(0%    

 72   72 

is the same as: is the same as:

)25 0(0%     72  )25 0(0%     72 

Possible Error: Possible Error:

)25 0(0%  )25 0(0% 

    72      72 

In the above example, the continuation mark for list items is In the above example, the continuation mark for list items is
used when list items are not continued. The continuation mark used when list items are not continued. The continuation mark
is placed at an incorrect position. It should be placed after the is placed at an incorrect position. It should be placed after the
STAPLE for STAAD.Pro STAPLE for STAAD.Pro
7-8 Section 7 7-8 Section 7

number 10. The example below shows another possible error. The number 10. The example below shows another possible error. The
hyphen should appear before the number 25. hyphen should appear before the number 25.

Possible Error: Possible Error:

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

)25 0(0%     72  )25 0(0%     72 


Section 7 7-9 Section 7 7-9

7.2 STAPLE Commands 7.2 STAPLE Commands

This section describes the syntax of the STAPLE Commands. This section describes the syntax of the STAPLE Commands.
Examples are also provided. Examples are also provided.

7.2.1 STAPLE Initiation 7.2.1 STAPLE Initiation


3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command is used to initiate a group of STAPLE commands. This command is used to initiate a group of STAPLE commands.
All STAPLE script files must start with this command. All STAPLE script files must start with this command.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

67$57 6&5,37 /$1*8$*( 67$57 6&5,37 /$1*8$*(

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

STAPLE commands are invoked using the START SCRIPT STAPLE commands are invoked using the START SCRIPT
command. This command is typically followed by other STAPLE command. This command is typically followed by other STAPLE
commands. Finally, the STAPLE script is finished with the END commands. Finally, the STAPLE script is finished with the END
SCRIPT command. STAPLE script files may be independent or SCRIPT command. STAPLE script files may be independent or
part of a STAAD.Pro input file. Note that the STAPLE script file part of a STAAD.Pro input file. Note that the STAPLE script file
may be positioned anywhere within the STAAD.Pro input file. may be positioned anywhere within the STAAD.Pro input file.
However, if the script file is positioned before the PERFORM However, if the script file is positioned before the PERFORM
ANALYSIS command, then analysis results will not be available ANALYSIS command, then analysis results will not be available
for further processing. Similarly, if the STAPLE script file is being for further processing. Similarly, if the STAPLE script file is being
used independently, the STAAD.Pro analysis must be performed used independently, the STAAD.Pro analysis must be performed
before using the script file for post-processing. before using the script file for post-processing.
STAPLE for STAAD.Pro STAPLE for STAAD.Pro
7-10 Section 7 7-10 Section 7

7.2.2 UNIT Specification 7.2.2 UNIT Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command allows the user to specify or change length and This command allows the user to specify or change length and
force units for input and output. force units for input and output.

*HQHUDO IRUPDW *HQHUDO IRUPDW

OHQJWKXQLW  OHQJWKXQLW 
81,7   81,7  
IRUFHXQLW  IRUFHXQLW 
,1&+(6  ,1&+(6 
)((7 RU )7  )((7 RU )7 
&0  &0 
OHQJWKXQLW 0(7(5  OHQJWKXQLW 0(7(5 
006  006 
'0(  '0( 
.0  .0 
.,3  .,3 
3281'  3281' 
.*  .* 
IRUFHXQLW 0721  IRUFHXQLW 0721 
1(:721  1(:721 
.16  .16 
016  016 
'16  '16 

Note: Note:
DME denotes Decameters. MNS denotes mega Newtons and DME denotes Decameters. MNS denotes mega Newtons and
DNS denotes decaNewtons. All other units are self DNS denotes decaNewtons. All other units are self
explanatory. explanatory.

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

The UNIT command can be specified any number of times in the The UNIT command can be specified any number of times in the
script file. All data is assumed to be in the most recent unit script file. All data is assumed to be in the most recent unit
specification preceding that data. Also note that the input unit for specification preceding that data. Also note that the input unit for
Section 7 7-11 Section 7 7-11
angles is always degrees. However, the output unit for joint angles is always degrees. However, the output unit for joint
rotations (in joint displacement) is radians. For all output, the units rotations (in joint displacement) is radians. For all output, the units
are clearly specified by the program. are clearly specified by the program.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

81,7 .,3 )7 81,7 .,3 )7

)25 0(0%  72  )25 0(0%  72 

 

 

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

81,7 &0 .1 81,7 &0 .1

)25 -2,17   )25 -2,17  

:5,7( &225' -2,17 :5,7( &225' -2,17

 

 

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

81,7 &0 .,3 81,7 &0 .,3

)25 0(0%   )25 0(0%  

 

 

1RWHV 1RWHV

Note that mix and match between different unit systems (Imperial, Note that mix and match between different unit systems (Imperial,
Metric, SI etc.) are allowed. Metric, SI etc.) are allowed.
STAPLE for STAAD.Pro STAPLE for STAAD.Pro
7-12 Section 7 7-12 Section 7

7.2.3 The OPEN Command 7.2.3 The OPEN Command

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command is used to create an external file through the This command is used to create an external file through the
STAPLE script language. The created external file may STAPLE script language. The created external file may

• contain relevant structural data in a format desired by the user. • contain relevant structural data in a format desired by the user.
• serve as an input file for an external program. • serve as an input file for an external program.

*HQHUDO )RUPDW *HQHUDO )RUPDW

23(1 ),/( ILOHQDPH 23(1 ),/( ILOHQDPH

where, where,
file-name = name of the user-specified file that needs to be created. file-name = name of the user-specified file that needs to be created.

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

This command needs to be used each time an external file is This command needs to be used each time an external file is
created using the STAPLE script language. Typically, this created using the STAPLE script language. Typically, this
command is followed by the FOR, WRITE, FORMAT and SORT command is followed by the FOR, WRITE, FORMAT and SORT
commands that are used to write the relevant data to the file in a commands that are used to write the relevant data to the file in a
required format. required format.
Section 7 7-13 Section 7 7-13

7.2.4 The FOR Command 7.2.4 The FOR Command

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

The FOR command is used to specify items (joints, members, The FOR command is used to specify items (joints, members,
supports, loads) for which structural data is required. This supports, loads) for which structural data is required. This
command works in conjunction with the CLOSE command to create command works in conjunction with the CLOSE command to create
a loop. a loop.

*HQHUDO )RUPDW *HQHUDO )RUPDW

 -2,17   -2,17 
)25  0(0%(5  LWHPOLVW )25  0(0%(5  LWHPOLVW
(/(0(17  (/(0(17 
6833257  6833257 
 /2$'   /2$' 
žžžžž žžžžž
žžžžž žžžžž
&/26( &/26(

where, where,
item-list = list of the relevant item for which information is item-list = list of the relevant item for which information is
required. required.

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

With the FOR command, the user can specify the particular item With the FOR command, the user can specify the particular item
(joint, member, supports, load) for which the information is (joint, member, supports, load) for which the information is
required. The associated item-list allows the user to specify a required. The associated item-list allows the user to specify a
numerical list for the particular item. numerical list for the particular item.

Note that successive FOR commands may be used to specify more Note that successive FOR commands may be used to specify more
than one item. For example, if joint displacements are required for than one item. For example, if joint displacements are required for
a certain number of load cases, two successive FOR commands, a certain number of load cases, two successive FOR commands,
one for joints and the other for loads may be used. one for joints and the other for loads may be used.

The FOR-CLOSE loop typically contains SORT and/or WRITES The FOR-CLOSE loop typically contains SORT and/or WRITES
command(s) to access and write data to the external file. command(s) to access and write data to the external file.
STAPLE for STAAD.Pro STAPLE for STAAD.Pro
7-14 Section 7 7-14 Section 7

Descriptions for these commands are available in the following Descriptions for these commands are available in the following
sections. sections.

Each FOR-CLOSE loop must be closed by a CLOSE command. Each FOR-CLOSE loop must be closed by a CLOSE command.
Note that one CLOSE command will be used to close multiple FOR Note that one CLOSE command will be used to close multiple FOR
commands. commands.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

)25 6833257   )25 6833257  

)25 /2$'   )25 /2$'  

:5,7( 5($&7 ); )< 0= :5,7( 5($&7 ); )< 0=

)250$7 ¨ 5($&7,21© ) )250$7 ¨ 5($&7,21© )

&/26( &/26(

The above example illustrates the use of the FOR-CLOSE loop. The above example illustrates the use of the FOR-CLOSE loop.
The simple script segment is designed to extract support reactions The simple script segment is designed to extract support reactions
FX, FY and MZ at supports 1 and 2 for load cases 1 and 3. FX, FY FX, FY and MZ at supports 1 and 2 for load cases 1 and 3. FX, FY
and MZ denote the reaction forces in global X and Y directions and and MZ denote the reaction forces in global X and Y directions and
the reaction moment about global Z axis, respectively. For details the reaction moment about global Z axis, respectively. For details
on usage of the WRITE and FORMAT specifications, refer to later on usage of the WRITE and FORMAT specifications, refer to later
sections of this documentation. Note that the FOR-CLOSE loop is sections of this documentation. Note that the FOR-CLOSE loop is
closed by using one CLOSE command. closed by using one CLOSE command.
Section 7 7-15 Section 7 7-15

7.2.5 The WRITE and FORMAT Commands 7.2.5 The WRITE and FORMAT Commands

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

These commands are used to write user-specified structural data These commands are used to write user-specified structural data
(displacements, forces, properties, reactions etc.) for specified (displacements, forces, properties, reactions etc.) for specified
items (joints, members, loads, supports) in an external file which is items (joints, members, loads, supports) in an external file which is
opened (see details of the OPEN command in section 3.2.3) for that opened (see details of the OPEN command in section 3.2.3) for that
purpose. The WRITE command is immediately followed by a purpose. The WRITE command is immediately followed by a
FORMAT command that specifies the format for writing the data. FORMAT command that specifies the format for writing the data.
These commands are explained in the following sub-sections. These commands are explained in the following sub-sections.
STAPLE for STAAD.Pro STAPLE for STAAD.Pro
7-16 Section 7 7-16 Section 7

7.2.5.1 WRITE Commands 7.2.5.1 WRITE Commands

Writing Headers Writing Headers

:5,7( +($'(5 :5,7( +($'(5


)250$7 ©KHDGHU!© )250$7 ©KHDGHU!©

where <header> = text to appear as header where <header> = text to appear as header

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

A header is a title or heading that enables identification of data that A header is a title or heading that enables identification of data that
is going to be stored in the data file opened for that purpose. For is going to be stored in the data file opened for that purpose. For
example, let us say that we wish to write the support reactions due example, let us say that we wish to write the support reactions due
to the load case associated with wind loading. to the load case associated with wind loading.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

:5,7( +($'(5 :5,7( +($'(5

)250$7 ©6XSSRUW 5HDFWLRQV GXH WR :LQG /RDGLQJ© )250$7 ©6XSSRUW 5HDFWLRQV GXH WR :LQG /RDGLQJ©

Writing Joint Coordinates Writing Joint Coordinates

:5,7( &225' -2,17 :5,7( &225' -2,17


)250$7 OLVW! )250$7 OLVW!

In the above syntax, the word COORD means joint coordinates. In the above syntax, the word COORD means joint coordinates.
The word JOINT, if provided (it is optional), will instruct The word JOINT, if provided (it is optional), will instruct
STAAD.Pro to write the joint number for which the values are STAAD.Pro to write the joint number for which the values are
being written. All the 3 coordinates (X, Y, and Z) will be written. being written. All the 3 coordinates (X, Y, and Z) will be written.

* See the section 7.2.5.2 for information on the list-specification * See the section 7.2.5.2 for information on the list-specification
for the FORMAT command. for the FORMAT command.
Section 7 7-17 Section 7 7-17
([DPSOH ([DPSOH

:5,7( &225' -2,17 :5,7( &225' -2,17

)250$7 , ) )250$7 , )

Writing Member Incidences Writing Member Incidences

:5,7( 0,1& 0(0% :5,7( 0,1& 0(0%


)250$7 OLVW! )250$7 OLVW!

In the above syntax, the word MINC means member incidences. In the above syntax, the word MINC means member incidences.
The word MEMB, if provided (it is optional), will instruct The word MEMB, if provided (it is optional), will instruct
STAAD.Pro to write the member number for which the values are STAAD.Pro to write the member number for which the values are
being written. being written.

* See the section 7.2.5.2 for information on the FORMAT * See the section 7.2.5.2 for information on the FORMAT
specification. specification.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

:5,7( 0,1& 0(0% :5,7( 0,1& 0(0%

)250$7 , ; , ; , )250$7 , ; , ; ,
STAPLE for STAAD.Pro STAPLE for STAAD.Pro
7-18 Section 7 7-18 Section 7

Writing Member Properties Writing Member Properties

:5,7( 3523 0(0% 1$0( W\SHOLVW :5,7( 3523 0(0% 1$0( W\SHOLVW
)250$7 OLVW! )250$7 OLVW!
 $;   $; 
 $<   $< 
 $=   $= 
 ,;   ,; 
 ,<   ,< 
W\SHOLVW  ,=  W\SHOLVW  ,= 
 6=   6= 
 6<   6< 
%  % 
'  ' 
 7)   7) 
 7:   7: 

In the above syntax, the word PROP means member properties. The In the above syntax, the word PROP means member properties. The
word MEMB, if provided (it is optional), will instruct STAAD.Pro word MEMB, if provided (it is optional), will instruct STAAD.Pro
to write the member number for which the values are being written. to write the member number for which the values are being written.
The word NAME stands for the member property designation of The word NAME stands for the member property designation of
that member. (W12X26, L20204 are examples of names.) The items that member. (W12X26, L20204 are examples of names.) The items
in the type-list are in the type-list are

AX =
Area of Cross section AX =
Area of Cross section
AY =
Shear Area in local Y axis AY =
Shear Area in local Y axis
AZ =
Shear Area in local Z axis AZ =
Shear Area in local Z axis
IX =
Torsional Constant IX =
Torsional Constant
IY =
Moment of Inertia about local Y axis IY =
Moment of Inertia about local Y axis
IZ =
Moment of Inertia about local Z axis IZ =
Moment of Inertia about local Z axis
SZ =
Section Modulus about local Z axis SZ =
Section Modulus about local Z axis
SY =
Section Modulus about local Y axis SY =
Section Modulus about local Y axis
B =
Width of flange, or width of rectangular cross section B =
Width of flange, or width of rectangular cross section
(Dimension parallel to local Z axis) (Dimension parallel to local Z axis)
D = Depth of cross section, or depth of rectangular cross D = Depth of cross section, or depth of rectangular cross
section (Dimension parallel to local Y axis) section (Dimension parallel to local Y axis)
TF = Thickness of flange TF = Thickness of flange
TW = Thickness of Web TW = Thickness of Web

* See the section 7.2.5.2 for information on the FORMAT * See the section 7.2.5.2 for information on the FORMAT
specification. specification.
Section 7 7-19 Section 7 7-19
([DPSOH ([DPSOH

:5,7( 0(0% 1$0( :5,7( 0(0% 1$0(

)250$7 , ; $ )250$7 , ; $

:5,7( 3523 $; ,= :5,7( 3523 $; ,=

)250$7 ) )250$7 )

Writing Member Releases Writing Member Releases

:5,7( 5(/( 0(0% :5,7( 5(/( 0(0%


)250$7 OLVW! )250$7 OLVW!

In the above syntax, the word RELE means member releases. The In the above syntax, the word RELE means member releases. The
word MEMB, if provided (it is optional), will instruct STAAD.Pro word MEMB, if provided (it is optional), will instruct STAAD.Pro
to write the member number for which the values are being written. to write the member number for which the values are being written.
The member release condition is represented in the form of The member release condition is represented in the form of
symbols 0 or 1 in the output. 0 indicates a release while 1 indicates symbols 0 or 1 in the output. 0 indicates a release while 1 indicates
fixity of a degree of freedom. The release conditions are fixity of a degree of freedom. The release conditions are
represented by 6 such symbols for the start of the member and 6 for represented by 6 such symbols for the start of the member and 6 for
the end of the member. the end of the member.

* See the section 7.2.5.2 for information on the FORMAT * See the section 7.2.5.2 for information on the FORMAT
specification. specification.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

:5,7( 5(/($6( 0(0% :5,7( 5(/($6( 0(0%

)250$7 , ; , )250$7 , ; ,


STAPLE for STAAD.Pro STAPLE for STAAD.Pro
7-20 Section 7 7-20 Section 7

Writing Support Reactions and Joint Displacements Writing Support Reactions and Joint Displacements
 5($&7   5($&7 
:5,7(   -2,17 /2$' W\SHOLVW :5,7(   -2,17 /2$' W\SHOLVW
 ',63/   ',63/ 

)250$7 OLVW! )250$7 OLVW!

 );   ); 
 )<   )< 
W\SHOLVW  )=  W\SHOLVW  )= 
 0;   0; 
 0<   0< 
 0=   0= 

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

In the above syntax, the word REACT means support reactions and In the above syntax, the word REACT means support reactions and
DISPL stands for Joint Displacements. The word JOINT, if DISPL stands for Joint Displacements. The word JOINT, if
provided (it is optional), will instruct STAAD.Pro to write the joint provided (it is optional), will instruct STAAD.Pro to write the joint
number for which the reactions or displacement values are being number for which the reactions or displacement values are being
written. Similarly, the word LOAD, if provided (it is optional), will written. Similarly, the word LOAD, if provided (it is optional), will
instruct STAAD.Pro to write the load case number for which the instruct STAAD.Pro to write the load case number for which the
reactions or displacement values are being written. reactions or displacement values are being written.

In the type-list shown above, In the type-list shown above,

FX = X-translation for DISPL, Force in the X direction for FX = X-translation for DISPL, Force in the X direction for
REACT REACT
FY = Y-translation for DISPL, Force in the Y direction for FY = Y-translation for DISPL, Force in the Y direction for
REACT REACT
FZ = Z-translation for DISPL, Force in the Z direction for FZ = Z-translation for DISPL, Force in the Z direction for
REACT REACT
MX = Rotation about the X axis for DISPL, Moment about X axis MX = Rotation about the X axis for DISPL, Moment about X axis
for REACT for REACT
MY = Rotation about the Y axis for DISPL, Moment about Y axis MY = Rotation about the Y axis for DISPL, Moment about Y axis
for REACT for REACT
MZ = Rotation about the Z axis for DISPL, Moment about Z axis MZ = Rotation about the Z axis for DISPL, Moment about Z axis
for REACT for REACT
* See the section 7.2.5.2 for information on the FORMAT * See the section 7.2.5.2 for information on the FORMAT
specification. specification.
Section 7 7-21 Section 7 7-21
([DPSOH ([DPSOH

:5,7( 5($&7 -2,17 /2$' )< 0= :5,7( 5($&7 -2,17 /2$' )< 0=

)250$7 , ) )250$7 , )

Writing Member End Forces Writing Member End Forces

:5,7( )25&( 0(0% /2$' W\SHOLVW :5,7( )25&( 0(0% /2$' W\SHOLVW
)250$7 OLVW! )250$7 OLVW!

 );   ); 
 )<   )< 
 )=   )= 
 0;   0; 
 0<   0< 
W\SHOLVW  0=  W\SHOLVW  0= 
 );   ); 
 )<   )< 
 )=   )= 
 0;   0; 
 0<   0< 
 0=   0= 

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

In the above syntax, the word FORCE means member end forces. In the above syntax, the word FORCE means member end forces.
The word MEMB, if provided, (it is optional) will instruct The word MEMB, if provided, (it is optional) will instruct
STAAD.Pro to write the member number for which the values are STAAD.Pro to write the member number for which the values are
being written. Similarly, the word LOAD, if provided (it is being written. Similarly, the word LOAD, if provided (it is
optional), will instruct STAAD.Pro to write the load case number optional), will instruct STAAD.Pro to write the load case number
for which the values are being written. for which the values are being written.

In the above type-list, all the variables ending in “1” represent In the above type-list, all the variables ending in “1” represent
member end force values at the 1st joint (starting joint) of the member end force values at the 1st joint (starting joint) of the
member. For example, FX1 means the axial force at the starting member. For example, FX1 means the axial force at the starting
joint, MY1 means the bending moment about the Y axis at the joint, MY1 means the bending moment about the Y axis at the
starting joint. All the variables ending in “2” represent member end starting joint. All the variables ending in “2” represent member end
force values at the 2nd joint (ending joint) of the member. For force values at the 2nd joint (ending joint) of the member. For
example, FY2 means the shear force along the local Y axis at the example, FY2 means the shear force along the local Y axis at the
ending joint, MZ2 means the bending moment about the Z axis at ending joint, MZ2 means the bending moment about the Z axis at
the ending joint. the ending joint.
STAPLE for STAAD.Pro STAPLE for STAAD.Pro
7-22 Section 7 7-22 Section 7

* See the section 7.2.5.2 for information on the FORMAT * See the section 7.2.5.2 for information on the FORMAT
specification. specification.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

:5,7( )25&( 0(0% /2$' )= 0; :5,7( )25&( 0(0% /2$' )= 0;

)250$7 , ) )250$7 , )

Writing Member Section Forces, Member Section Writing Member Section Forces, Member Section
Displacements Displacements
 %02   %02 
:5,7(   0(0% /2$' W\SHOLVW :5,7(   0(0% /2$' W\SHOLVW
 6',   6', 

)250$7 OLVW! )250$7 OLVW!

 );   ); 
 )<   )< 
W\SHOLVW  )=  W\SHOLVW  )= 
 0;   0; 
 0<   0< 
 0=   0= 

In the above syntax, the word BMO means member section forces. In the above syntax, the word BMO means member section forces.
The word SDI stands for member section displacements. The values The word SDI stands for member section displacements. The values
are obtained for the 2 ends plus 11 intermediate sections. The word are obtained for the 2 ends plus 11 intermediate sections. The word
MEMB, if provided (it is optional), will instruct STAAD.Pro to MEMB, if provided (it is optional), will instruct STAAD.Pro to
write the member number for which the values are being written. write the member number for which the values are being written.
Similarly, the word LOAD, if provided (it is optional), will instruct Similarly, the word LOAD, if provided (it is optional), will instruct
STAAD.Pro to write the load case number for which the values are STAAD.Pro to write the load case number for which the values are
being written. In the above type-list, FX, FY and FZ refer to the being written. In the above type-list, FX, FY and FZ refer to the
axial force, shear in Y, and shear in Z if the item being written is axial force, shear in Y, and shear in Z if the item being written is
BMO. If the item being written is SDI, then FX, FY and FZ refer to BMO. If the item being written is SDI, then FX, FY and FZ refer to
the X translation, Y translation and Z translation respectively of the X translation, Y translation and Z translation respectively of
the specific section. Similarly, MX, MY and MZ refer to the the specific section. Similarly, MX, MY and MZ refer to the
torsional moment, moment about the local Y axis, and moment torsional moment, moment about the local Y axis, and moment
about the local Z axis if the item being written is BMO. If the item about the local Z axis if the item being written is BMO. If the item
being written is SDI, then MX, MY and MZ refer to the rotation being written is SDI, then MX, MY and MZ refer to the rotation
Section 7 7-23 Section 7 7-23
about local X axis, rotation about local Y axis, and rotation about local X axis, rotation about local Y axis, and rotation
about local Z axis respectively of the specific section. about local Z axis respectively of the specific section.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

:5,7( %02 0(0% /2$' )< 0= :5,7( %02 0(0% /2$' )< 0=

)250$7 , ) )250$7 , )

* See the section 7.2.5.2 for information on the FORMAT * See the section 7.2.5.2 for information on the FORMAT
specification. specification.
STAPLE for STAAD.Pro STAPLE for STAAD.Pro
7-24 Section 7 7-24 Section 7

7.2.5.2 FORMAT Specification 7.2.5.2 FORMAT Specification

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

Sets the format in which data is written to a file. Sets the format in which data is written to a file.

6\QWD[ 6\QWD[

)250$7 OLVW )250$7 OLVW

where “list” is the list of edit descriptors. where “list” is the list of edit descriptors.

The following edit descriptors are valid. The following edit descriptors are valid.

1) Edit Descriptor for Integers 1) Edit Descriptor for Integers

For writing integer variables, use the alphabet I followed by a For writing integer variables, use the alphabet I followed by a
number that describes the number of digits applicable for the number that describes the number of digits applicable for the
value of that variable. For example, to write a joint number value of that variable. For example, to write a joint number
10781 (which is a five-digit integer), use the FORMAT 10781 (which is a five-digit integer), use the FORMAT
specification. specification.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

)250$7 , )250$7 ,

If the edit descriptor of the integer number is larger than the If the edit descriptor of the integer number is larger than the
number of digits in that number, the number will be printed number of digits in that number, the number will be printed
right aligned (blank spaces will be placed on the left of the right aligned (blank spaces will be placed on the left of the
number). Conversely, if the edit descriptor is smaller than the number). Conversely, if the edit descriptor is smaller than the
number of digits in that number, asterisks will be printed number of digits in that number, asterisks will be printed
instead of the number. instead of the number.

2) Edit Descriptor for Blank Spaces 2) Edit Descriptor for Blank Spaces

For writing n blank spaces, specify the value of n followed by For writing n blank spaces, specify the value of n followed by
the alphabet X. For example, to write 2 blank spaces, the alphabet X. For example, to write 2 blank spaces,
Section 7 7-25 Section 7 7-25
([DPSOH ([DPSOH

)250$7 ; )250$7 ;

If you wish to print more than one integer separated by blank If you wish to print more than one integer separated by blank
spaces using a single format command, separate the descriptors spaces using a single format command, separate the descriptors
with commas. For example, a 3-digit integer followed by 2 with commas. For example, a 3-digit integer followed by 2
blank spaces followed by a 7-digit integer is written using the blank spaces followed by a 7-digit integer is written using the
FORMAT specification. FORMAT specification.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

)250$7 ,;, )250$7 ,;,

3) Edit Descriptor for Decimal Numbers 3) Edit Descriptor for Decimal Numbers

For writing decimal numbers, the alphabet F is used followed For writing decimal numbers, the alphabet F is used followed
by a number ‘a’ followed by a decimal point followed by a by a number ‘a’ followed by a decimal point followed by a
number ‘b’. The number ‘a’ is equal to the number of digits number ‘b’. The number ‘a’ is equal to the number of digits
before the decimal plus the number of digits after the decimal before the decimal plus the number of digits after the decimal
plus 1. The number ‘b’ is equal to the number of digits after plus 1. The number ‘b’ is equal to the number of digits after
the decimal. If the number is a negative number, make sure that the decimal. If the number is a negative number, make sure that
‘a’ is large enough to account for the minus sign also. For ‘a’ is large enough to account for the minus sign also. For
example, to write the number 327.86, we write, example, to write the number 327.86, we write,

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

)250$7 ) )250$7 )

To write the number -45376.483, we write, To write the number -45376.483, we write,

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

)250$7 ) )250$7 )


STAPLE for STAAD.Pro STAPLE for STAAD.Pro
7-26 Section 7 7-26 Section 7

If the edit descriptor of the decimal number is larger than the If the edit descriptor of the decimal number is larger than the
number of digits in that number, the number will be printed number of digits in that number, the number will be printed
right aligned (blank spaces will be placed on the left of the right aligned (blank spaces will be placed on the left of the
number). Conversely, if the edit descriptor is smaller than the number). Conversely, if the edit descriptor is smaller than the
number of digits in that number, asterisks will be printed number of digits in that number, asterisks will be printed
instead of the number. instead of the number.

If you wish to print more than one decimal number separated If you wish to print more than one decimal number separated
by blank spaces using a single format command, separate the by blank spaces using a single format command, separate the
descriptors with commas. For example, the numbers 273.654 descriptors with commas. For example, the numbers 273.654
and -980.1 separated by 2 blank spaces are written using the and -980.1 separated by 2 blank spaces are written using the
FORMAT specification. FORMAT specification.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

)250$7 );) )250$7 );)

If you wish to print decimal numbers and integers and blank If you wish to print decimal numbers and integers and blank
spaces using a single format command, separate the descriptors spaces using a single format command, separate the descriptors
with commas. For example, the numbers 273.654, 400, -980.1 with commas. For example, the numbers 273.654, 400, -980.1
and 15 separated by 2 blank spaces between each number are and 15 separated by 2 blank spaces between each number are
written using the FORMAT specification. written using the FORMAT specification.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

)250$7 );,;);, )250$7 );,;);,

If you wish to print more than one decimal number and/or more If you wish to print more than one decimal number and/or more
than one integer using a single format command, use the than one integer using a single format command, use the
appropriate number (which represents how many such values appropriate number (which represents how many such values
are present) before the F or I specification. For example, the are present) before the F or I specification. For example, the
numbers 100, 120, 135, 621.4, 786.3, 809.5 can be written numbers 100, 120, 135, 621.4, 786.3, 809.5 can be written
using the format. using the format.
Section 7 7-27 Section 7 7-27
([DPSOH ([DPSOH

)250$7 ,) )250$7 ,)

Note that by using I5, we are using the program’s ability to Note that by using I5, we are using the program’s ability to
assign 2 leading blank spaces before the 3-digit integer to our assign 2 leading blank spaces before the 3-digit integer to our
advantage since we now do not have to worry about specifying advantage since we now do not have to worry about specifying
blanks ourselves. Similarly, by choosing a format F7.1 when blanks ourselves. Similarly, by choosing a format F7.1 when
the total digits including the decimal point are only 5, we are the total digits including the decimal point are only 5, we are
able to get 2 blank spaces between the decimal numbers also. able to get 2 blank spaces between the decimal numbers also.

4) Edit Descriptor for Characters 4) Edit Descriptor for Characters

For writing characters or character strings, use the alphabet A For writing characters or character strings, use the alphabet A
followed by the number of characters in the string. The number followed by the number of characters in the string. The number
of characters in the string is equal to the number of alphabets of characters in the string is equal to the number of alphabets
plus the number of blank spaces. For example, the word plus the number of blank spaces. For example, the word
SUPPORT contains 7 characters. The expression “MAT SUPPORT contains 7 characters. The expression “MAT
FOUNDATION” contains 14 characters. FOUNDATION” contains 14 characters.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

)250$7 $ )250$7 $


STAPLE for STAAD.Pro STAPLE for STAAD.Pro
7-28 Section 7 7-28 Section 7

7.2.6 The SORT Command 7.2.6 The SORT Command

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

The SORT command should be provided before the WRITE The SORT command should be provided before the WRITE
command to specify the parameters according to which the desired command to specify the parameters according to which the desired
output values should be sorted. The SORT command is output values should be sorted. The SORT command is
immediately followed by a WRITE command that specifies the immediately followed by a WRITE command that specifies the
names of the values to be output. names of the values to be output.

*HQHUDO )RUPDW *HQHUDO )RUPDW

5($&7,21  5($&7,21 
6257 ',63/$&(0(17 %< $%6   W\SHOLVW 6257 ',63/$&(0(17 %< $%6   W\SHOLVW
)25&(  )25&( 

'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ

Following are the explanations for each specification above and the Following are the explanations for each specification above and the
type-list associated with them. type-list associated with them.

a) BY : The REACT, DISPL or FORCE option always has to be a) BY : The REACT, DISPL or FORCE option always has to be
followed by this word. followed by this word.
b) ABS : This option is to be used if the sorting is to be done b) ABS : This option is to be used if the sorting is to be done
according to the absolute values. Please see the examples according to the absolute values. Please see the examples
below which shows the usage of this option. below which shows the usage of this option.
c) - : This option which is a minus sign, if placed immediately c) - : This option which is a minus sign, if placed immediately
before the name of the variable (see the type-list below for the before the name of the variable (see the type-list below for the
list of variable names) signifies that the sorting is to be done list of variable names) signifies that the sorting is to be done
on the basis of the descending order of values meaning that the on the basis of the descending order of values meaning that the
largest value (largest absolute value if the ABS option is largest value (largest absolute value if the ABS option is
specified; largest algebraic value if the ABS option is not specified; largest algebraic value if the ABS option is not
specified) will come first and the smallest value will come last. specified) will come first and the smallest value will come last.
If the minus sign is not specified, the sorting will be done on If the minus sign is not specified, the sorting will be done on
the basis of the ascending order of values. the basis of the ascending order of values.
Section 7 7-29 Section 7 7-29
d) REACTION d) REACTION
);  ); 
)<  )< 
W\SHOLVW )=  W\SHOLVW )= 
0;  0; 
0<  0< 
0=  0= 
([DPSOH ([DPSOH

6257 5($&7 %< $%6 )< 6257 5($&7 %< $%6 )<

The above command means that the FY support reaction The above command means that the FY support reaction
values should be sorted on the basis of the ascending order of values should be sorted on the basis of the ascending order of
their absolute values. The data set for the sorting consists of their absolute values. The data set for the sorting consists of
the FY support reaction values of all the support joints the FY support reaction values of all the support joints
specified in the most recent FOR list and the load cases specified in the most recent FOR list and the load cases
specified in the most recent FOR list. specified in the most recent FOR list.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

6257 5($&7 %< 0; 6257 5($&7 %< 0;

The above command means that the MX support reaction The above command means that the MX support reaction
values should be sorted on the basis of the descending order of values should be sorted on the basis of the descending order of
their algebraic values. The data set for the sorting consists of their algebraic values. The data set for the sorting consists of
the MX support reaction values of all the support joints the MX support reaction values of all the support joints
specified in the most recent FOR list and the load cases specified in the most recent FOR list and the load cases
specified in the most recent FOR list. specified in the most recent FOR list.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

6257 5($&7 %< $%6 ); 6257 5($&7 %< $%6 );

The above command means that the FX support reaction The above command means that the FX support reaction
values should be sorted on the basis of the descending order of values should be sorted on the basis of the descending order of
their absolute values. The data set for the sorting consists of their absolute values. The data set for the sorting consists of
STAPLE for STAAD.Pro STAPLE for STAAD.Pro
7-30 Section 7 7-30 Section 7

the FX support reaction values of all the support joints the FX support reaction values of all the support joints
specified in the most recent FOR list and the load cases specified in the most recent FOR list and the load cases
specified in the most recent FOR list. specified in the most recent FOR list.

e) DISPLACEMENTS e) DISPLACEMENTS

);  ); 
)<  )< 
W\SHOLVW )=  W\SHOLVW )= 
0;  0; 
0<  0< 
0=  0= 
([DPSOH ([DPSOH

6257 ',63/ %< $%6 )< 6257 ',63/ %< $%6 )<

The above command means that the Y translation values The above command means that the Y translation values
should be sorted on the basis of the descending order of their should be sorted on the basis of the descending order of their
absolute values. The data set for the sorting consists of the Y absolute values. The data set for the sorting consists of the Y
translation values of all the joints specified in the most recent translation values of all the joints specified in the most recent
FOR list and the load cases specified in the most recent FOR FOR list and the load cases specified in the most recent FOR
list. list.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

6257 ',63/ %< 0; 6257 ',63/ %< 0;

The above command means that the X rotation values should The above command means that the X rotation values should
be sorted on the basis of the ascending order of their be sorted on the basis of the ascending order of their
algebraic values. The data set for the sorting consists of the X algebraic values. The data set for the sorting consists of the X
rotation values of all the joints specified in the most recent rotation values of all the joints specified in the most recent
FOR list and the load cases specified in the most recent FOR FOR list and the load cases specified in the most recent FOR
list. list.
Section 7 7-31 Section 7 7-31
([DPSOH ([DPSOH

6257 ',63/ %< )= 6257 ',63/ %< )=

The above command means that the Z translation values The above command means that the Z translation values
should be sorted on the basis of the descending order of their should be sorted on the basis of the descending order of their
algebraic values. The data set for the sorting consists of the Z algebraic values. The data set for the sorting consists of the Z
translation values of all the joints specified in the most recent translation values of all the joints specified in the most recent
FOR list and the load cases specified in the most recent FOR FOR list and the load cases specified in the most recent FOR
list. list.

f) MEMBER END FORCES f) MEMBER END FORCES

 );   ); 
 )<   )< 
 )=   )= 
 0;   0; 
 0<   0< 
W\SHOLVW  0=  W\SHOLVW  0= 
 );   ); 
 )<   )< 
 )=   )= 
 0;   0; 
 0<   0< 
 0=   0= 

In the above type-list, all the variables ending in “1” represent In the above type-list, all the variables ending in “1” represent
member end force values at the 1 st joint (starting joint) of the member end force values at the 1 st joint (starting joint) of the
member. For example, FX1 means the axial force at the starting member. For example, FX1 means the axial force at the starting
joint, MY1 means the bending moment about the local Y axis joint, MY1 means the bending moment about the local Y axis
at the starting joint. All the variables ending in “2” represent at the starting joint. All the variables ending in “2” represent
member end force values at the 2nd joint (ending joint) of the member end force values at the 2nd joint (ending joint) of the
member. For example, FY2 means the shear force along the member. For example, FY2 means the shear force along the
local Y axis at the ending joint, MZ2 means the bending local Y axis at the ending joint, MZ2 means the bending
moment about the local Z axis at the ending joint. moment about the local Z axis at the ending joint.
STAPLE for STAAD.Pro STAPLE for STAAD.Pro
7-32 Section 7 7-32 Section 7
([DPSOH ([DPSOH

6257 )25&( %< $%6 )= 6257 )25&( %< $%6 )=

The above command means that the shear force along the The above command means that the shear force along the
local Z axis at the starting joint of the members should be local Z axis at the starting joint of the members should be
sorted on the basis of the descending order of the their sorted on the basis of the descending order of the their
absolute values. The data set for the sorting consists of the absolute values. The data set for the sorting consists of the
shear force along the local Z axis at the starting joint of all shear force along the local Z axis at the starting joint of all
the members specified in the most recent FOR list and the load the members specified in the most recent FOR list and the load
cases specified in the most recent FOR list. cases specified in the most recent FOR list.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

6257 ',63/ %< 0; 6257 ',63/ %< 0;

The above command means that the torsional moment The above command means that the torsional moment
(moment about the local X axis) at the ending joint of the (moment about the local X axis) at the ending joint of the
members should be sorted on the basis of the ascending order members should be sorted on the basis of the ascending order
of their algebraic values. The data set for the sorting consists of their algebraic values. The data set for the sorting consists
of the torsional moment at the ending joint of all the members of the torsional moment at the ending joint of all the members
specified in the most recent FOR list and the load cases specified in the most recent FOR list and the load cases
specified in the most recent FOR list. specified in the most recent FOR list.
Section 7 7-33 Section 7 7-33

7.2.7 The EXECUTE Command 7.2.7 The EXECUTE Command

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

The EXECUTE command provides a means by which the user may The EXECUTE command provides a means by which the user may
run a program which he/she has created specifically for his/her run a program which he/she has created specifically for his/her
needs. needs.
*HQHUDO )RUPDW *HQHUDO )RUPDW

(;(&87( SURJUDPQDPH (;(&87( SURJUDPQDPH

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

Let us assume that we wish to create a file called REACTION.DAT Let us assume that we wish to create a file called REACTION.DAT
using STAPLE, which will contain the support reactions from the using STAPLE, which will contain the support reactions from the
analysis of a STAAD.Pro input file. Let us also assume that the analysis of a STAAD.Pro input file. Let us also assume that the
user has created his/her own program called TRAPFOOT.EXE user has created his/her own program called TRAPFOOT.EXE
which can design a trapezoidal shaped footing using the data which can design a trapezoidal shaped footing using the data
contained in the REACTION.DAT file. The following example contained in the REACTION.DAT file. The following example
illustrates the command sequence required to perform the above illustrates the command sequence required to perform the above
tasks. tasks.

3(5)250 $1$/<6,6 3(5)250 $1$/<6,6

35,17 -2,17 ',63/$&(0(176 35,17 -2,17 ',63/$&(0(176

6(&7,21    $// 6(&7,21    $//

35,17 6(&7,21 ',63/$&(0(176 35,17 6(&7,21 ',63/$&(0(176

67$57 6&5,37 /$1*8$*( 67$57 6&5,37 /$1*8$*(

81,7 )((7 .,3 81,7 )((7 .,3

23(1 ),/( 5($&7,21'$7 23(1 ),/( 5($&7,21'$7

)25 6833257  )25 6833257 

)25 /2$'    )25 /2$'   

:5,7( 5($&7,21 -2,17 )< 0; 0= :5,7( 5($&7,21 -2,17 )< 0; 0=

)250$7 ,) )250$7 ,)

&/26( &/26(

(;(&87( 75$3)227(;( (;(&87( 75$3)227(;(

(1' 6&5,37 /$1*8$*( (1' 6&5,37 /$1*8$*(

),1,6+ ),1,6+
STAPLE for STAAD.Pro STAPLE for STAAD.Pro
7-34 Section 7 7-34 Section 7

Let us look at the commands in the above example. Let us look at the commands in the above example.

3(5)250 $1$/<6,6 3(5)250 $1$/<6,6


35,17 -2,17 ',63/$&(0(176 35,17 -2,17 ',63/$&(0(176
6(&7,21    $// 6(&7,21    $//
35,17 6(&7,21 ',63/$&(0(176 35,17 6(&7,21 ',63/$&(0(176

These are normal STAAD.Pro commands that you are familiar with These are normal STAAD.Pro commands that you are familiar with
which appear in standard STAAD.Pro input files. The above which appear in standard STAAD.Pro input files. The above
commands are meant for performing the analysis, printing the joint commands are meant for performing the analysis, printing the joint
displacements, and printing the section displacements at the 0.35L, displacements, and printing the section displacements at the 0.35L,
0.55L and 0.83L locations of each member where L stands for the 0.55L and 0.83L locations of each member where L stands for the
member length. member length.

67$57 6&5,37 /$1*8$*( 67$57 6&5,37 /$1*8$*(

This initiates the segment of input associated with the commands This initiates the segment of input associated with the commands
for script file processing from within the STAAD.Pro input file. for script file processing from within the STAAD.Pro input file.

81,7 )((7 .,3 81,7 )((7 .,3

The units for reading/writing of data are set to FEET and KIP. The units for reading/writing of data are set to FEET and KIP.

23(1 ),/( 5($&7,21'$7 23(1 ),/( 5($&7,21'$7

The above command is an instruction to STAAD.Pro to open a file The above command is an instruction to STAAD.Pro to open a file
by the name REACTION.DAT. The support reactions will be by the name REACTION.DAT. The support reactions will be
stored in this file. This will be an ASCII file. stored in this file. This will be an ASCII file.

)25 6833257  )25 6833257 


)25 /2$'    )25 /2$'   
:5,7( 5($&7,21 -2,17 )< 0; 0= :5,7( 5($&7,21 -2,17 )< 0; 0=
)250$7 ,)) )250$7 ,))

The above commands instruct STAAD.Pro to write the values of The above commands instruct STAAD.Pro to write the values of
the JOINT name (namely, 101), the values of the reactions FY, MX the JOINT name (namely, 101), the values of the reactions FY, MX
and MZ into the file REACTION.DAT. This data will be written and MZ into the file REACTION.DAT. This data will be written
for load cases 6, 7 and 8. The data will be written using the for load cases 6, 7 and 8. The data will be written using the
following format specification : following format specification :
Section 7 7-35 Section 7 7-35
JOINT (I5) : A 5 digit integer (Since the Joint number is 101, JOINT (I5) : A 5 digit integer (Since the Joint number is 101,
a five digit format will signify 2 blank spaces a five digit format will signify 2 blank spaces
followed by the digits 1, 0 and 1) followed by the digits 1, 0 and 1)

FY (F8.2) : A real number will 2 digits after the decimal point FY (F8.2) : A real number will 2 digits after the decimal point
and 5 digits before the decimal point. and 5 digits before the decimal point.

MX (F9.2) : A real number with 2 digits after the decimal point MX (F9.2) : A real number with 2 digits after the decimal point
and 6 digits before the decimal point. and 6 digits before the decimal point.

MZ (F9.2) : A real number with 2 digits after the decimal point MZ (F9.2) : A real number with 2 digits after the decimal point
and 6 digits before the decimal point. and 6 digits before the decimal point.

&/26( &/26(

The CLOSE command terminates the FOR-CLOSE loop. The CLOSE command terminates the FOR-CLOSE loop.

(;(&87( 75$3)227(;( (;(&87( 75$3)227(;(

The command for executing the program TRAPFOOT.EXE is The command for executing the program TRAPFOOT.EXE is
specified in the above line. specified in the above line.

(1' 6&5,37 /$1*8$*( (1' 6&5,37 /$1*8$*(

The command signifies the end of script file processing. The command signifies the end of script file processing.

),1,6+ ),1,6+

The STAAD.Pro run is terminated with the help of the above The STAAD.Pro run is terminated with the help of the above
command. command.
STAPLE for STAAD.Pro STAPLE for STAAD.Pro
7-36 Section 7 7-36 Section 7

7.2.8 The CALL Command 7.2.8 The CALL Command

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

Let us assume that there are certain standard script commands that Let us assume that there are certain standard script commands that
the user wishes to specify on every input file run in STAAD.Pro. the user wishes to specify on every input file run in STAAD.Pro.
For example, the user may wish to use the STAPLE facility to print For example, the user may wish to use the STAPLE facility to print
out the support reaction values to a standard file called out the support reaction values to a standard file called
REACTION.DAT for every structure analyzed through REACTION.DAT for every structure analyzed through
STAAD.Pro. This would require that the user type in those STAAD.Pro. This would require that the user type in those
commands (the START SCRIPT LANGUAGE command, the FOR commands (the START SCRIPT LANGUAGE command, the FOR
SUPPORT command, the FOR LOAD command, the WRITE SUPPORT command, the FOR LOAD command, the WRITE
command, the FORMAT command, the CLOSE command, etc.) command, the FORMAT command, the CLOSE command, etc.)
into every STAAD.Pro input file from which analysis results are into every STAAD.Pro input file from which analysis results are
desired. Instead, the user may create a text file (for the sake of our desired. Instead, the user may create a text file (for the sake of our
example, let us call it REACTION.SPL where SPL is short for example, let us call it REACTION.SPL where SPL is short for
script language file) containing just the script commands, and use script language file) containing just the script commands, and use
the CALL command to inform STAAD.Pro that the script the CALL command to inform STAAD.Pro that the script
commands that the user wishes to specify are in the commands that the user wishes to specify are in the
REACTION.SPL file. In other words, the CALL command provides REACTION.SPL file. In other words, the CALL command provides
a means by which the user may specify the script commands a means by which the user may specify the script commands
through an external file instead of from within the STAAD.Pro through an external file instead of from within the STAAD.Pro
input file. input file.

The main advantages of this are : 1) The user can have a standard The main advantages of this are : 1) The user can have a standard
set of script commands in just one file and hence avoid typing them set of script commands in just one file and hence avoid typing them
again and again for various STAAD.Pro input files. In any project, again and again for various STAAD.Pro input files. In any project,
time and effort have to be spent in ensuring that all the relevant time and effort have to be spent in ensuring that all the relevant
information from the analysis of the structure is retrieved. It is information from the analysis of the structure is retrieved. It is
much easier to handle one single, properly constructed, well much easier to handle one single, properly constructed, well
thought out script file than to spend time typing the script thought out script file than to spend time typing the script
commands in every STAAD.Pro file you analyze. This can mean commands in every STAAD.Pro file you analyze. This can mean
less frustration and considerable savings in time and money over less frustration and considerable savings in time and money over
the long run. 2) It permits customization and standardization of the long run. 2) It permits customization and standardization of
script commands to the user’s specific needs. script commands to the user’s specific needs.
Section 7 7-37 Section 7 7-37
*HQHUDO )RUPDW *HQHUDO )RUPDW

&$// VFULSWILOHQDPH &$// VFULSWILOHQDPH

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

Let us assume that a standard script file called REACTION.SPL Let us assume that a standard script file called REACTION.SPL
contains the following script commands. contains the following script commands.

67$57 6&5,37 /$1*8$*( 67$57 6&5,37 /$1*8$*(

81,7 )((7 .,3 81,7 )((7 .,3

23(1 ),/( 5($&7,21'$7 23(1 ),/( 5($&7,21'$7

)25 6833257 $// )25 6833257 $//

)25 /2$' $// )25 /2$' $//

:5,7( 5($&7,21 -2,17 )< 0; 0= :5,7( 5($&7,21 -2,17 )< 0; 0=

)250$7 ,) )250$7 ,)

&/26( &/26(

(1' 6&5,37 /$1*8$*( (1' 6&5,37 /$1*8$*(

The data contained in the STAAD.Pro input file will be as follows : The data contained in the STAAD.Pro input file will be as follows :

3(5)250 $1$/<6,6 3(5)250 $1$/<6,6

35,17 -2,17 ',63/$&(0(176 35,17 -2,17 ',63/$&(0(176

35,17 0(0%(5 )25&(6 35,17 0(0%(5 )25&(6

6(&7,21    0(0%   6(&7,21    0(0%  

35,17 6(&7,21 )25&(6 /,67   35,17 6(&7,21 )25&(6 /,67  

67$57 6&5,37 /$1*8$*( 67$57 6&5,37 /$1*8$*(

&$// 5($&7,2163/ &$// 5($&7,2163/

(1' 6&5,37 (1' 6&5,37

3/27 675(66 ),/( 3/27 675(66 ),/(

3/27 02'( ),/( 3/27 02'( ),/(

),1,6+ ),1,6+

Note that the REACTION.SPL file should be located in the same Note that the REACTION.SPL file should be located in the same
directory as the STAAD.Pro input file. directory as the STAAD.Pro input file.
STAPLE for STAAD.Pro STAPLE for STAAD.Pro
7-38 Section 7 7-38 Section 7

7.2.9 The END SCRIPT LANGUAGE Command 7.2.9 The END SCRIPT LANGUAGE Command

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command is required to convey to STAAD.Pro that the script file This command is required to convey to STAAD.Pro that the script file
processing should be terminated and other STAAD.Pro commands will processing should be terminated and other STAAD.Pro commands will
follow. follow.

*HQHUDO )RUPDW *HQHUDO )RUPDW

(1' 6&5,37 /$1*8$*( (1' 6&5,37 /$1*8$*(

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

&+(&. &2'( $// &+(&. &2'( $//

67$57 6&5,37 /$1*8$*( 67$57 6&5,37 /$1*8$*(

 

 

 

 

)25 /2$'    )25 /2$'   

:5,7( 5($&7,21 -2,17 )< 0; 0= :5,7( 5($&7,21 -2,17 )< 0; 0=

)250$7 ,) )250$7 ,)

&/26( &/26(

(1' 6&5,37 /$1*8$*( (1' 6&5,37 /$1*8$*(


Section 7 7-39 Section 7 7-39

7.3 Graphics Commands in STAPLE 7.3 Graphics Commands in STAPLE

3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

STAPLE provides a powerful set of graphics commands that allow the user STAPLE provides a powerful set of graphics commands that allow the user
to generate professional graphics output through their programs. The to generate professional graphics output through their programs. The
graphics commands may be used as graphics commands may be used as

• part of the user’s own in-house programs that are called using a • part of the user’s own in-house programs that are called using a
script file. script file.
• part of the script file. • part of the script file.

The STAPLE graphics commands are similar in nature to industry-standard The STAPLE graphics commands are similar in nature to industry-standard
graphics languages like HPGL. These powerful commands enable the user graphics languages like HPGL. These powerful commands enable the user
to generate quality graphics as part of the output without having to learn to generate quality graphics as part of the output without having to learn
complicated graphics programming. Note that STAPLE commands may be complicated graphics programming. Note that STAPLE commands may be
used as part of the user’s own programs. When being executed using a used as part of the user’s own programs. When being executed using a
STAPLE based script file, these commands generate output that can be STAPLE based script file, these commands generate output that can be
viewed, displayed, plotted and printed using the facilities of the viewed, displayed, plotted and printed using the facilities of the
STAAD.Pro environment. STAAD.Pro environment.

The following section explains the graphics or drawing commands The following section explains the graphics or drawing commands
supported by STAPLE. supported by STAPLE.

'(),1( '(),1(
3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command establishes a user defined drawing limits in X and Y This command establishes a user defined drawing limits in X and Y
direction. direction.

6\QWD[ 6\QWD[

'(),1( ;PLQ ;PD[ <PLQ <PD[ '(),1( ;PLQ ;PD[ <PLQ <PD[

Xmin: Minimum X limit specified as a real number Xmin: Minimum X limit specified as a real number
Xmax: Maximum X limit specified as a real number Xmax: Maximum X limit specified as a real number
Ymin: Minimum Y limit specified as a real number Ymin: Minimum Y limit specified as a real number
STAPLE for STAAD.Pro STAPLE for STAAD.Pro
7-40 Section 7 7-40 Section 7
Ymin: Maximum Y limit specified as a real number Ymin: Maximum Y limit specified as a real number

The values specified for these variables will be used as the basis for the The values specified for these variables will be used as the basis for the
drawing area. The program will automatically translate these numbers so as drawing area. The program will automatically translate these numbers so as
to fit into the width of 1024X768 screen resolution or an to fit into the width of 1024X768 screen resolution or an
8.5in X 11in. paper size. 8.5in X 11in. paper size.

Origin of coordinates is assumed to be the bottom left corner of the Origin of coordinates is assumed to be the bottom left corner of the
screen. The X axis goes from the left to the right of the screen. The Y axis screen. The X axis goes from the left to the right of the screen. The Y axis
goes from bottom to the top of the screen. goes from bottom to the top of the screen.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

'(),1(     '(),1(    

&2/25 &2/25
3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command sets current pen color. This command sets current pen color.

6\QWD[ 6\QWD[

&2/25 FRORU! &2/25 FRORU!

<color> : String defining the color. <color> : String defining the color.
Valid colors: BLACK, BLUE, GREEN, CYAN, RED, MAGENTA, Valid colors: BLACK, BLUE, GREEN, CYAN, RED, MAGENTA,
BROWN, WHITE, GRAY, LBLUE, LGREEN, LCYAN, LRED, BROWN, WHITE, GRAY, LBLUE, LGREEN, LCYAN, LRED,
LMAGENTA, YELLOW and LWHITE LMAGENTA, YELLOW and LWHITE

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

&2/25 /0$*(17$ &2/25 /0$*(17$


Section 7 7-41 Section 7 7-41

029( 029(
3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command moves the pen to the user specified position. This command moves the pen to the user specified position.

6\QWD[ 6\QWD[

029( ; < 029( ; <

X: X position specified as a real number ( Xmin ≤ X ≤ Xmax) X: X position specified as a real number ( Xmin ≤ X ≤ Xmax)
Y: Y position specified as a real number (Ymin ≤ Y ≤ Ymax) Y: Y position specified as a real number (Ymin ≤ Y ≤ Ymax)

It is extremely important to note that It is extremely important to note that

(Xmin ≤ X ≤ Xmax) (Xmin ≤ X ≤ Xmax)


(Ymin ≤ Y ≤ Ymax) (Ymin ≤ Y ≤ Ymax)

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

029(   029(  

/,1( /,1(
3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command draws a line in current pen color between user specified This command draws a line in current pen color between user specified
points. points.

6\QWD[ 6\QWD[

/,1( ; < ; < /,1( ; < ; <

where, where,
(X1,Y1) is the starting point of the line (X1,Y1) is the starting point of the line
(X2,Y2) is the end point of the line (X2,Y2) is the end point of the line

It is extremely important to note that It is extremely important to note that

(Xmin ≤ X1 ≤ Xmax) (Xmin ≤ X1 ≤ Xmax)


(Xmin ≤ X2 ≤ Xmax) (Xmin ≤ X2 ≤ Xmax)
(Ymin ≤ Y1≤ Ymax) (Ymin ≤ Y1≤ Ymax)
STAPLE for STAAD.Pro STAPLE for STAAD.Pro
7-42 Section 7 7-42 Section 7
(Ymin ≤ Y2 ≤ Ymax) (Ymin ≤ Y2 ≤ Ymax)

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

/,1(     /,1(    

5(&7$1*/( 5(&7$1*/(
3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command draws a rectangle in current pen color. This command draws a rectangle in current pen color.

6\QWD[ 6\QWD[

5(&7$1*/( ; < ; < 5(&7$1*/( ; < ; <

where, where,
(X1,Y1) is a corner point of the rectangle (X1,Y1) is a corner point of the rectangle
(X2,Y2) is the opposite corner point of the rectangle (X2,Y2) is the opposite corner point of the rectangle

It is extremely important to note that It is extremely important to note that

(Xmin ≤ X1 ≤ Xmax) (Xmin ≤ X1 ≤ Xmax)


(Xmin ≤ X2 ≤ Xmax) (Xmin ≤ X2 ≤ Xmax)
(Ymin ≤ Y1 ≤ Ymax) (Ymin ≤ Y1 ≤ Ymax)
(Ymin ≤ Y2 ≤ Ymax) (Ymin ≤ Y2 ≤ Ymax)

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

5(&7     5(&7    
Section 7 7-43 Section 7 7-43

5),// 5),//
3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command draws a rectangle and fills it with current pen color. This command draws a rectangle and fills it with current pen color.

6\QWD[ 6\QWD[

5),// ; < ; < 5),// ; < ; <

where, where,
(X1,Y1) is a corner point of the rectangle (X1,Y1) is a corner point of the rectangle
(X2,Y2) is the opposite corner point of the rectangle (X2,Y2) is the opposite corner point of the rectangle

It is extremely important to note that It is extremely important to note that

(Xmin ≤ X1 ≤ Xmax) (Xmin ≤ X1 ≤ Xmax)


(Xmin ≤ X2 ≤ Xmax) (Xmin ≤ X2 ≤ Xmax)
(Ymin ≤ Y1 ≤ Ymax) (Ymin ≤ Y1 ≤ Ymax)
(Ymin ≤ Y2 ≤ Ymax) (Ymin ≤ Y2 ≤ Ymax)

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

5),//     5),//    
STAPLE for STAAD.Pro STAPLE for STAAD.Pro
7-44 Section 7 7-44 Section 7

32/<*21 32/<*21
3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command draws a generalized polygon in current pen color. This command draws a generalized polygon in current pen color.

6\QWD[ 6\QWD[

32/<*21 1 32/<*21 1
; < ; <
; < ; <
žž žž
;L<L ;L<L
žž žž
;Q <Q ;Q <Q

N: No. of vertices of the polygon (An integer number) N: No. of vertices of the polygon (An integer number)
(Xi,Yi): Coordinates of the ith vertex of the polygon (Xi,Yi): Coordinates of the ith vertex of the polygon

It is extremely important to note that It is extremely important to note that

(Xmin ≤ Xi ≤ Xmax) (Xmin ≤ Xi ≤ Xmax)


(Ymin ≤ Yi ≤ Ymax) (Ymin ≤ Yi ≤ Ymax)

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

32/<*  32/<* 

   

   

   

   

   

   

   

   
Section 7 7-45 Section 7 7-45

),// ),//
3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command draws a generalized polygon and fills it in current pen color. This command draws a generalized polygon and fills it in current pen color.

6\QWD[ 6\QWD[

),// 1 ),// 1
; < ; <
; < ; <
žž žž
;L<L ;L<L
žž žž

;Q<Q ;Q<Q

N: No. of vertices of the polygon in integer N: No. of vertices of the polygon in integer
(Xi,Yi): Coordinates of the ith vertex of the polygon (Xi,Yi): Coordinates of the ith vertex of the polygon

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

),//  ),// 

   

   

   

   

   

   

   

   
STAPLE for STAAD.Pro STAPLE for STAAD.Pro
7-46 Section 7 7-46 Section 7

6,=( 6,=(
3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command sets the current text size. This command sets the current text size.

6\QWD[ 6\QWD[

6,=( YDOXH! 6,=( YDOXH!

<value>: User specified real value depicting the text size. The size is <value>: User specified real value depicting the text size. The size is
measured in the user-specified coordinate system. measured in the user-specified coordinate system.

The value set for the SIZE of text should be in accordance with the limits The value set for the SIZE of text should be in accordance with the limits
of the drawing area set under the DEFINE command described above. The of the drawing area set under the DEFINE command described above. The
default value of SIZE is 80. This could be interpreted as saying that 80 default value of SIZE is 80. This could be interpreted as saying that 80
characters will fit of the screen that is in accordance with normal text characters will fit of the screen that is in accordance with normal text
screens. Hence, a value less than 80 (such as 20) means that text size will screens. Hence, a value less than 80 (such as 20) means that text size will
be larger (since only 20 characters will fit on the screen). Conversely, a be larger (since only 20 characters will fit on the screen). Conversely, a
value larger than 80 means that the text size will be smaller than that which value larger than 80 means that the text size will be smaller than that which
corresponds to SIZE 80. corresponds to SIZE 80.

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

6,=(  6,=( 

$1*/( $1*/(
3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command sets the text orientation with respect to the X axis This command sets the text orientation with respect to the X axis

6\QWD[ 6\QWD[

$1*/( YDOXH! $1*/( YDOXH!

<value>: Text orientation in degrees with respect to the X axis <value>: Text orientation in degrees with respect to the X axis

The angle is measured according to the right hand screw rule, meaning that The angle is measured according to the right hand screw rule, meaning that
a positive angle is measured in the same sense as an arc traveling from the a positive angle is measured in the same sense as an arc traveling from the
X axis to the Y axis along the first quadrant. X axis to the Y axis along the first quadrant.
Section 7 7-47 Section 7 7-47
([DPSOH ([DPSOH

$1*/(  $1*/( 

7(;7 7(;7
3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

To write a character string starting at the current pen position in current To write a character string starting at the current pen position in current
text size and pen color. text size and pen color.

6\QWD[ 6\QWD[

7(;7 XVHU VSHFLILHG VWULQJ! 7(;7 XVHU VSHFLILHG VWULQJ!

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

7(;7 )RXQGDWLRQ IRU 7XUER *HQHUDWRU 7(;7 )RXQGDWLRQ IRU 7XUER *HQHUDWRU

&,5&/( &,5&/(
3XUSRVH 3XUSRVH

This command draws a circle in current pen color This command draws a circle in current pen color

6\QWD[ 6\QWD[

&,5&/( ; < 5 &,5&/( ; < 5

where, where,
(X,Y): Location of center of the circle (X,Y): Location of center of the circle
R: Radius of the circle R: Radius of the circle

It is extremely important to note that It is extremely important to note that

(Xmin ≤ X ≤ Xmax) (Xmin ≤ X ≤ Xmax)


(Ymin ≤ Y ≤ Ymax) (Ymin ≤ Y ≤ Ymax)

([DPSOH ([DPSOH

&,5&/(    &,5&/(   


STAPLE for STAAD.Pro STAPLE for STAAD.Pro
7-48 Section 7 7-48 Section 7
Index 1 Index 1

Index by Section Numbers Index by Section Numbers

$ ANALYSIS FACILITIES, 1.18


$ ANALYSIS FACILITIES, 1.18

ANGLE, ANGLE,
AASHTO, from User Table, 5.19 AASHTO, from User Table, 5.19
allowable code stress, 2.13.2 ASSIGN of, 1.7.5, 5.20.5 allowable code stress, 2.13.2 ASSIGN of, 1.7.5, 5.20.5
axial stress, 2.13.2 BETA, 1.5.3 axial stress, 2.13.2 BETA, 1.5.3
specification of, 1.7.2 specification of, 1.7.2
bending-axial stress bending-axial stress
user table, 1.7.3, 5.19 user table, 1.7.3, 5.19
interaction, 2.13.2 interaction, 2.13.2
STAPLE graphics command, 7.3 STAPLE graphics command, 7.3
bending stress, 2.13.2 bending stress, 2.13.2
general comments, 2.13.1 API CODE (see PUNCH Shear) general comments, 2.13.1 API CODE (see PUNCH Shear)
minimum metal thickness, 2.13.4 minimum metal thickness, 2.13.4
AREA LOAD AREA LOAD
MOVING LOAD, 1.17.1, 5.31.1, MOVING LOAD, 1.17.1, 5.31.1,
5.32.12 command, 1.16.3, 5.32.4 5.32.12 command, 1.16.3, 5.32.4
shear stress, 2.13.2 definition of, 1.16.3 shear stress, 2.13.2 definition of, 1.16.3
stability requirements, 2.13.3 ARRIVAL TIME, 5.31.6 stability requirements, 2.13.3 ARRIVAL TIME, 5.31.6
ABS, 7.2.6 ABS, 7.2.6
ASSIGN command, 1.7.5, 5.20.5 ASSIGN command, 1.7.5, 5.20.5
ACI CODE (see Concrete Design) ACI CODE (see Concrete Design)
ASSIGN PROFILE, 5.20.5 ASSIGN PROFILE, 5.20.5
AISC CODE AISC CODE
ASSUMPTIONS OF THE ASSUMPTIONS OF THE
Allowables, 2.3 Allowables, 2.3
bending stress, 2.3.4 ANALYSIS, 1.18.1 bending stress, 2.3.4 ANALYSIS, 1.18.1
CODE CHECK, 2.5 CODE CHECK, 2.5
Axes Axes
compressive stress, 2.3.3 compressive stress, 2.3.3
member selection, 2.6 global coordinate, 1.5.1 member selection, 2.6 global coordinate, 1.5.1
parameters, 2.4 local coordinate, 1.5.2 parameters, 2.4 local coordinate, 1.5.2
plate girders, 2.10, local and global relationship, plate girders, 2.10, local and global relationship,
steel table, 1.7.3, 5.20.1 1.5.3 steel table, 1.7.3, 5.20.1 1.5.3
tension stress, 2.3.1
torsion per Pub.T114, 2.3.7
% tension stress, 2.3.1
torsion per Pub.T114, 2.3.7
%
truss members, 2.7 truss members, 2.7
Bandwidth Reduction, 1.18.1, 5.11 Bandwidth Reduction, 1.18.1, 5.11
unsymmetric members, 2.8 unsymmetric members, 2.8
ALPHA, 1.12, 5.26, 5.32.6 BASIC EQUATION, 1.18.1 ALPHA, 1.12, 5.26, 5.32.6 BASIC EQUATION, 1.18.1

Alphanumerics, 5.1.1 BEAM Alphanumerics, 5.1.1 BEAM


ASSIGN, 1.7.5, 5.20.5 ASSIGN, 1.7.5, 5.20.5
ANALYSIS concrete DESIGN of, 3.6, 5.51.3 ANALYSIS concrete DESIGN of, 3.6, 5.51.3
assumption of, 1.18.1 specification of, 1.7.2 assumption of, 1.18.1 specification of, 1.7.2
dynamic analysis, 1.18.3 BEAM parameter, Table 2.1& 2.2 dynamic analysis, 1.18.3 BEAM parameter, Table 2.1& 2.2
Non-linear, 1.18.2.2, 5.37 Non-linear, 1.18.2.2, 5.37
BENDING MOMENT/SHEAR BENDING MOMENT/SHEAR
P-DELTA, 1.18.2.1, 5.37 P-DELTA, 1.18.2.1, 5.37
PERFORM, 1.18, 5.37 FORCE, 1.19, 5.41 PERFORM, 1.18, 5.37 FORCE, 1.19, 5.41
printing (see PRINT) Bending stress (see AISC, AASHTO, & printing (see PRINT) Bending stress (see AISC, AASHTO, &
RESPONSE SPECTRUM, 1.18.3 LRFD design) RESPONSE SPECTRUM, 1.18.3 LRFD design)
static analysis, 1.18 static analysis, 1.18
Time-History, 1.18.3, 5.31.6 BETA angle, 1.5.3, 5.26 Time-History, 1.18.3, 5.31.6 BETA angle, 1.5.3, 5.26
5.32.10.2 command, 5.26 5.32.10.2 command, 5.26
2 Index 2 Index
description, 1.5.3, 1.12 CONCRETE DESIGN- 3.0 description, 1.5.3, 1.12 CONCRETE DESIGN- 3.0
BMO, 7.2.5.1 BMO, 7.2.5.1
parameter 5.51.2, Table 3.1 parameter 5.51.2, Table 3.1
Built-In Steel Section Library 1.7.2 Built-In Steel Section Library 1.7.2
specifications, 5.51 specifications, 5.51
& terminator, 5.51.5 & terminator, 5.51.5

CABLE CONCRETE TAKE OFF, 5.51.4 CABLE CONCRETE TAKE OFF, 5.51.4

command of, 1.11, 5.23.2, CONSTANTS, 5.26 command of, 1.11, 5.23.2, CONSTANTS, 5.26
description, 1.11 COORDINATE description, 1.11 COORDINATE
nonlinear, 1.18.2.5 nonlinear, 1.18.2.5
systems, 1.5 systems, 1.5
CALCULATE NATURAL CALCULATE NATURAL
joint, 5.11 joint, 5.11
(FREQUENCY), 5.33 WRITE command, 7.2.5.1 (FREQUENCY), 5.33 WRITE command, 7.2.5.1
CALL, 7.2.8 CQC, Modal Combination, 5.32.10.1 CALL, 7.2.8 CQC, Modal Combination, 5.32.10.1
Cartesian Coordinate System, 1.5.1 CURVED MEMBER, 5.20.7 Cartesian Coordinate System, 1.5.1 CURVED MEMBER, 5.20.7
CB parameter, Table 2.1 & 2.2 CUT-OFF FREQUENCY, 5.30 CB parameter, Table 2.1 & 2.2 CUT-OFF FREQUENCY, 5.30
Center of Gravity (CG)(See PRINT) CUT-OFF MODE SHAPE, 5.30 Center of Gravity (CG)(See PRINT) CUT-OFF MODE SHAPE, 5.30
CHANGE CYLINDRICAL REVERSE, 5.11, CHANGE CYLINDRICAL REVERSE, 5.11,
command of, 5.38 1.5.1 command of, 5.38 1.5.1
(see also Multiple Analysis, (see also Multiple Analysis,
INACTIVE command) ' INACTIVE command) '
CHANGE SPECIFICATION, 5.38 DAMPING, 5.26, 5.32.10.1 CHANGE SPECIFICATION, 5.38 DAMPING, 5.26, 5.32.10.1
CHANNEL SECTION DEFINE, 7.3 CHANNEL SECTION DEFINE, 7.3
ASSIGN, 1.7.5, 5.20.5 DEFINE MESH, 5.14 ASSIGN, 1.7.5, 5.20.5 DEFINE MESH, 5.14
double channels, 2.2.1 double channels, 2.2.1
Specification, 2.2.1 DEFINE MOVING LOAD, 5.31.1 Specification, 2.2.1 DEFINE MOVING LOAD, 5.31.1
user table property of, 1.7.3, 5.19 user table property of, 1.7.3, 5.19
DEFINE TIME HISTORY, 5.31.6 DEFINE TIME HISTORY, 5.31.6
CHECK CODE, 5.47.2, 5.50.2 CHECK CODE, 5.47.2, 5.50.2
DEFINE WIND LOAD, 5.31.5 DEFINE WIND LOAD, 5.31.5
CIRCLE, 7.3 CIRCLE, 7.3
DEFLECTED SHAPES, 5.45.1 DEFLECTED SHAPES, 5.45.1
CLOSE, 7.2.4 CLOSE, 7.2.4
DELETE MEMBERS, 5.18 DELETE MEMBERS, 5.18
CMY parameter, Table 2.1 CMY parameter, Table 2.1
DELETE JOINTS, 5.18 DELETE JOINTS, 5.18
CMZ parameter, Table 2.1 CMZ parameter, Table 2.1
DESIGN - CONCRETE, 3 DESIGN - CONCRETE, 3
CODE CHECKING CODE CHECKING
DESIGN BEAM, 5.51.3 DESIGN BEAM, 5.51.3
specification, 5.47.2, specification, 5.47.2,
DESIGN COLUMN, 5.51.3 DESIGN COLUMN, 5.51.3
Cold Formed Steel, 2.15, 5.20 Cold Formed Steel, 2.15, 5.20
DESIGN ELEMENT, 5.51.3 DESIGN ELEMENT, 5.51.3
COLUMN COLUMN
DESIGN FOOTING, 5.52.3 DESIGN FOOTING, 5.52.3
ASSIGN, 5.20.5 ASSIGN, 5.20.5
DESIGN initiation, 5.51.1, 5.52.1 DESIGN initiation, 5.51.1, 5.52.1
concrete DESIGN, 5.51 concrete DESIGN, 5.51
DFF parameter, Table 2.1 DFF parameter, Table 2.1
Index 3 Index 3
DJ1, DJ2 parameters, Table 2.1 ) DJ1, DJ2 parameters, Table 2.1 )
DIRECTION, 5.27.3 FILL, 7.3 DIRECTION, 5.27.3 FILL, 7.3
DISPLACEMENTS FINISH, 5.53 DISPLACEMENTS FINISH, 5.53
PRINT command, 5.41, 5.42 PRINT command, 5.41, 5.42
WRITE command, 7.2.5.1 FINITE ELEMENT WRITE command, 7.2.5.1 FINITE ELEMENT
Information, 1.6 Information, 1.6
DMAX parameter, Table 2.1& 2.2 Plate/shell, 1.6.1, 5.13, 5.21 DMAX parameter, Table 2.1& 2.2 Plate/shell, 1.6.1, 5.13, 5.21
DMIN parameter, Table 2.1& 2.2 Solid, 1.6.2, 5.13 DMIN parameter, Table 2.1& 2.2 Solid, 1.6.2, 5.13

DOUBLE ANGLE, 2.2.1, 5.19 FIXED END MEMBER LOAD, 1.16.4, DOUBLE ANGLE, 2.2.1, 5.19 FIXED END MEMBER LOAD, 1.16.4,
5.32.7 5.32.7
DOUBLE CHANNELS, 2.2.1 DOUBLE CHANNELS, 2.2.1
FLOOR LOAD, 5.32.4 FLOOR LOAD, 5.32.4
DRAW, 5.29 DRAW, 5.29
FOOTING Automatic Spring Support FOOTING Automatic Spring Support
DRAW ISOMETRIC, 5.29 DRAW ISOMETRIC, 5.29
Generator, 5.27.3 Generator, 5.27.3
DRAW ROTATE, 5.29 DRAW ROTATE, 5.29
FOOTING DESIGN, 1.22, 5.52 FOOTING DESIGN, 1.22, 5.52
DRAW SECTION, 5.29 DRAW SECTION, 5.29
FOOTING DESIGN PARAMETER, FOOTING DESIGN PARAMETER,
DYNAMIC ANALYSIS, 1.18.3 5.52.2 DYNAMIC ANALYSIS, 1.18.3 5.52.2

( FOOTING DESIGN ( FOOTING DESIGN


specifications, 5.52 specifications, 5.52
ELASTIC MAT Automatic ELASTIC MAT Automatic
FOR, 7.2.4 FOR, 7.2.4
Spring Support Generator, 5.27.3 Spring Support Generator, 5.27.3
FORCE ENVELOPES, 1.19.5, 5.43 FORCE ENVELOPES, 1.19.5, 5.43
ELEMENT FORCE, 1.6.1 ELEMENT FORCE, 1.6.1
FORCES FORCES
ELEMENT INCIDENCE, 6.13 ELEMENT INCIDENCE, 6.13
PRINT command, 5.41 PRINT command, 5.41
ELEMENT LOAD, 6.32.3, 1.6.1 WRITE command, 7.2.5.1 ELEMENT LOAD, 6.32.3, 1.6.1 WRITE command, 7.2.5.1
ELEMENT LOCAL AXIS, 1.6.1 FORMAT, 7.2.5.2 ELEMENT LOCAL AXIS, 1.6.1 FORMAT, 7.2.5.2
ELEMENT NUMBERING, 1.6.1 FOUR WINDOW, See WINDOWS ELEMENT NUMBERING, 1.6.1 FOUR WINDOW, See WINDOWS
ELEMENT PLANE STRESS, 5.24 FYLD parameter, Table 2.1& 2.2 ELEMENT PLANE STRESS, 5.24 FYLD parameter, Table 2.1& 2.2
ELEMENT PROPERTY, 5.21 ELEMENT PROPERTY, 5.21
* *
ELEMENT RELEASE, 5.22.2 ELEMENT RELEASE, 5.22.2
GENERAL SECTION GENERAL SECTION
END CONCRETE DESIGN, 5.51.5 END CONCRETE DESIGN, 5.51.5
User Table, 5.19 User Table, 5.19
END FOOTING DESIGN, 5.52.4 END FOOTING DESIGN, 5.52.4
GENERATE ELEMENT, 5.14 GENERATE ELEMENT, 5.14
END RUN SPECIFICATION, 5.53 END RUN SPECIFICATION, 5.53
GENERATION OF LOADS, 5.32.12 GENERATION OF LOADS, 5.32.12
END SCRIPT LANGUAGE, 7.2.9 END SCRIPT LANGUAGE, 7.2.9
GENERATION OF MOVING LOADS, GENERATION OF MOVING LOADS,
EXECUTE, 7.2.7 5.32.12, 1.17.1 EXECUTE, 7.2.7 5.32.12, 1.17.1
EXPOSURE FACTOR, WIND LOAD GEOMETRY MODELLING EXPOSURE FACTOR, WIND LOAD GEOMETRY MODELLING
GENERATOR, 5.31.5 CONSIDERATIONS, 1.6.1 GENERATOR, 5.31.5 CONSIDERATIONS, 1.6.1
GLOBAL COORDINATE, 1.5.1, 1.5.3 GLOBAL COORDINATE, 1.5.1, 1.5.3
4 Index 4 Index
GROUND MOTION, 5.32.10.2 LOAD SYSTEMS GROUND MOTION, 5.32.10.2 LOAD SYSTEMS
GROUP SPECIFICATION, 5.48 Definition of, 5.31 GROUP SPECIFICATION, 5.48 Definition of, 5.31
LOADING, 1.16, 5.32 LOADING, 1.16, 5.32
+ LOCAL COORDINATE, 1.5.2, 1.5.3
+ LOCAL COORDINATE, 1.5.2, 1.5.3
Harmonic Time History Load, 5.31.6 LY parameter, Table 2.1 & 2.2 Harmonic Time History Load, 5.31.6 LY parameter, Table 2.1 & 2.2
HEADER, 7.2.5.1 LZ parameter, Table 2.1 & 2.2 HEADER, 7.2.5.1 LZ parameter, Table 2.1 & 2.2

, 0 , 0
IBC 2000 LOAD, 5.31.2.6 MAIN parameter, Table 2.1& 2.2 IBC 2000 LOAD, 5.31.2.6 MAIN parameter, Table 2.1& 2.2
IGNORE LIST, 5.9 MAKE/OPEN WINDOW, See IGNORE LIST, 5.9 MAKE/OPEN WINDOW, See
INACTIVE MEMBERS, 1.20, 5.18 WINDOWS INACTIVE MEMBERS, 1.20, 5.18 WINDOWS

INCLINED SUPPORT, 5.27.2 MASS MODELING, 1.18.3 INCLINED SUPPORT, 5.27.2 MASS MODELING, 1.18.3

INPUT GENERATION, 1.2, 6.2 MASTER/SLAVE, 1.15, 5.28 INPUT GENERATION, 1.2, 6.2 MASTER/SLAVE, 1.15, 5.28

INPUT NODESIGN, 5.10 MAT Automatic Spring Support INPUT NODESIGN, 5.10 MAT Automatic Spring Support
Generator, 5.27.3 Generator, 5.27.3
INPUT WIDTH, 5.4 INPUT WIDTH, 5.4
MATERIAL CONSTANTS, 1.13 MATERIAL CONSTANTS, 1.13
ISECTION ISECTION
User Table, 5.19 MEMBER CABLE, 5.23 User Table, 5.19 MEMBER CABLE, 5.23

- MEMBER COMPRESSION - only, - MEMBER COMPRESSION - only,


5.23.3 5.23.3
JOINT COORDINATES, 5.11 JOINT COORDINATES, 5.11
MEMBER DISPLACEMENTS, 1.19.3 MEMBER DISPLACEMENTS, 1.19.3
JOINT LOAD, 1.16.1, 5.32.1 JOINT LOAD, 1.16.1, 5.32.1
MEMBER END FORCES, 1.19 MEMBER END FORCES, 1.19
JOINT NUMBERING, 5.11, 5.15 JOINT NUMBERING, 5.11, 5.15
MEMBER FORCES, 1.19.2 MEMBER FORCES, 1.19.2
JOINT WEIGHT, 5.31.2 JOINT WEIGHT, 5.31.2
MEMBER INCIDENCES, 5.12 MEMBER INCIDENCES, 5.12
. MEMBER PROPERTY- FROM . MEMBER PROPERTY- FROM
TABLE, 5.20 TABLE, 5.20
KY parameter, Table 2.1& 2.2 KY parameter, Table 2.1& 2.2
MEMBER - PRISMATIC, 5.20 MEMBER - PRISMATIC, 5.20
KZ parameter, Table 2.1& 2.2 KZ parameter, Table 2.1& 2.2
MEMBER - TAPERED, 5.20 MEMBER - TAPERED, 5.20
/ MEMBER - from User Provided Table,
/ MEMBER - from User Provided Table,
LINE, 7.3 5.20 LINE, 7.3 5.20

LIST MEMBER/ELEMENT MEMBER - ASSIGN, 5.20 LIST MEMBER/ELEMENT MEMBER - ASSIGN, 5.20
INCIDENCE, See QUERY MEMBER LOAD, 1.16.2, 5.32.2 INCIDENCE, See QUERY MEMBER LOAD, 1.16.2, 5.32.2
LOAD COMBINATION, 5.35 MEMBER NUMBERING, 5.12, 5.15 LOAD COMBINATION, 5.35 MEMBER NUMBERING, 5.12, 5.15
LOAD COMBINATION, SRSS, 5.35 MEMBER OFFSETS, 1.12, 5.25 LOAD COMBINATION, SRSS, 5.35 MEMBER OFFSETS, 1.12, 5.25
LOAD GENERATION, 1.17, 5.32.12 MEMBER POSTSTRESS, 5.32.5 LOAD GENERATION, 1.17, 5.32.12 MEMBER POSTSTRESS, 5.32.5
Index 5 Index 5
MEMBER PRESTRESS, 5.32.5 STEEL DESIGN, Table 2.1 MEMBER PRESTRESS, 5.32.5 STEEL DESIGN, Table 2.1
CONCRETE DESIGN, Table 3.1 CONCRETE DESIGN, Table 3.1
MEMBER PROPERTIES, 1.7, 5.20 MEMBER PROPERTIES, 1.7, 5.20
PARTIAL MOMENT RELEASE, PARTIAL MOMENT RELEASE,
MEMBER RELEASE, 1.8, 5.22 MEMBER RELEASE, 1.8, 5.22
5.22.1 5.22.1
MEMBER SELECTION MEMBER SELECTION
P-DELTA ANALYSIS, 1.18.2.1 P-DELTA ANALYSIS, 1.18.2.1
SPECIFICATION, 5.47.3 SPECIFICATION, 5.47.3
PERFORM ANALYSIS, 5.37 PERFORM ANALYSIS, 5.37
MEMBER STRESSES (SPECIFIED MEMBER STRESSES (SPECIFIED
SECTIONS), 1.19.4, 5.41 PERFORM ROTATION, 5.17 SECTIONS), 1.19.4, 5.41 PERFORM ROTATION, 5.17
MEMBER Tension-Only 1.9, 5.23.3 PIPE, 1.7.2, 2.2.1,5.19, 5.20.1 MEMBER Tension-Only 1.9, 5.23.3 PIPE, 1.7.2, 2.2.1,5.19, 5.20.1
MEMBER TRUSS, 1.9, 5.23 PLATE/SHELL ELEMENT, 1.6.1, MEMBER TRUSS, 1.9, 5.23 PLATE/SHELL ELEMENT, 1.6.1,
5.13, 5.14, 5.21 5.13, 5.14, 5.21
MEMBER WEIGHT, 5.31.2 MEMBER WEIGHT, 5.31.2
PLOT BENDING FILE, 5.45.3 PLOT BENDING FILE, 5.45.3
MESH GENERATION, 5.14 MESH GENERATION, 5.14
PLOT DISPLACEMENT FILE, 5.45.1 PLOT DISPLACEMENT FILE, 5.45.1
MINC, 7.2.5.1 MINC, 7.2.5.1
PLOT MODE FILE, 5.45.4 PLOT MODE FILE, 5.45.4
MODAL CALCULATION, 5.34 MODAL CALCULATION, 5.34
PLOT SECTION FILE, 5.45.2 PLOT SECTION FILE, 5.45.2
MOVE, 7.3 MOVE, 7.3
PLOT STRESS FILE, 5.45.5 PLOT STRESS FILE, 5.45.5
Moving Load, 1.17.1, 5.31.1, 5.32.12 Moving Load, 1.17.1, 5.31.1, 5.32.12
POLYGON, 7.3 POLYGON, 7.3
MULTIPLE ANALYSES, 1.20, 5.37 MULTIPLE ANALYSES, 1.20, 5.37
POST ANALYSIS GRAPHICS POST ANALYSIS GRAPHICS
MultiLinear Analysis, 1.18.2.3, 5.27.4 MultiLinear Analysis, 1.18.2.3, 5.27.4
DISPLAY, 5.45 DISPLAY, 5.45
1 PROPERTIES 1 PROPERTIES
members, 1.7, 5.20 members, 1.7, 5.20
NATURAL FREQUENCY, 5.33 NATURAL FREQUENCY, 5.33
WRITE command, 7.2.5.1 WRITE command, 7.2.5.1
NON-LINEAR ANALYSIS, 1.18.2.2, NON-LINEAR ANALYSIS, 1.18.2.2,
PRESTRESS LOAD, 1.16.5, 5.32.5 PRESTRESS LOAD, 1.16.5, 5.32.5
5.37 5.37
PRINT PRINT
NOREDUCE BAND, 5.11 NOREDUCE BAND, 5.11
ALL, 5.37 ALL, 5.37
NSF parameter, Table 2.1 & 2.2 BOTH, 5.37 NSF parameter, Table 2.1 & 2.2 BOTH, 5.37
CG, 6.41 CG, 6.41
2 ELEMENT INFORMATION, 2 ELEMENT INFORMATION,
5.41 5.41
OPEN FILE, 7.2.3 ELEMENT STRESSES, 5.41 OPEN FILE, 7.2.3 ELEMENT STRESSES, 5.41
ENTIRE (TABLE), 5.41 ENTIRE (TABLE), 5.41
OUTPUT WIDTH, 5.4 OUTPUT WIDTH, 5.4
FORCE ENVELOPE, 5.43 FORCE ENVELOPE, 5.43
3 JOINT DISPLACEMENTS, 5.41
LOAD DATA, 5.37
3 JOINT DISPLACEMENTS, 5.41
LOAD DATA, 5.37
MATERIAL PROPERTIES, 5.41 MATERIAL PROPERTIES, 5.41
PAGE EJECT, 5.8 PAGE EJECT, 5.8
MAXFORCE ENVELOPE, 5.43 MAXFORCE ENVELOPE, 5.43
PAGE LENGTH, 5.8 MEMBER INFORMATION, 5.41 PAGE LENGTH, 5.8 MEMBER INFORMATION, 5.41
MODE SHAPES, 5.37 MODE SHAPES, 5.37
PAGE NEW, 5.7 PROBLEM STATISTICS, 5.36 PAGE NEW, 5.7 PROBLEM STATISTICS, 5.36
PARAMETER specifications, 5.47.1, SECTION DISPLACEMENT, PARAMETER specifications, 5.47.1, SECTION DISPLACEMENT,
5.42 5.42
5.52.2 5.52.2
6 Index 6 Index
STATICS CHECK, 5.37 SECTION DISPLACEMENTS, 5.42 STATICS CHECK, 5.37 SECTION DISPLACEMENTS, 5.42
STATICS LOAD, 5.37 STATICS LOAD, 5.37
SECTION SPECIFICATION, 5.40 SECTION SPECIFICATION, 5.40
STEEL/CONCRETE/TIMBER SELECT ALL, 5.47.3, 5.50.3 STEEL/CONCRETE/TIMBER SELECT ALL, 5.47.3, 5.50.3
DESIGN, 1.21, 2.1, 3.1, 4.1, DESIGN, 1.21, 2.1, 3.1, 4.1,
5.47.2, 5.47.3, 5.50.2, 5.51 SELECT MEMBER, 5.47.3, 5.50.3 5.47.2, 5.47.3, 5.50.2, 5.51 SELECT MEMBER, 5.47.3, 5.50.3
SUPPORT INFORMATION, 5.41 SUPPORT INFORMATION, 5.41
SUPPORT REACTIONS, 5.41 SELECT OPTIMIZED, 5.47.4 SUPPORT REACTIONS, 5.41 SELECT OPTIMIZED, 5.47.4

PRISMATIC, 5.19 SELECT WELD TRUSS, 5.47.3 PRISMATIC, 5.19 SELECT WELD TRUSS, 5.47.3

PRISMATIC PROPERTY, 1.7.1, SELFWEIGHT, 5.32.9 PRISMATIC PROPERTY, 1.7.1, SELFWEIGHT, 5.32.9
5.20.2 SEPARATOR, 5.6 5.20.2 SEPARATOR, 5.6
PROFILE, 5.47.1 SET NL, 5.5 PROFILE, 5.47.1 SET NL, 5.5
PROPERTY SPEC, 5.20.2 SET DATA CHECK, 5.5 PROPERTY SPEC, 5.20.2 SET DATA CHECK, 5.5

5 SET RUN, 5.5 5 SET RUN, 5.5


SET ECHO, 5.5 SET ECHO, 5.5
RATIO parameter, Table 2.1& 2.2 RATIO parameter, Table 2.1& 2.2
SET Z UP, 5.5 SET Z UP, 5.5
REACTIONS REACTIONS
PRINT command, 5.41 SIZE PRINT command, 5.41 SIZE
WRITE command, 7.2.5.1 specification, 5.46 WRITE command, 7.2.5.1 specification, 5.46
graphics command, 7.3 graphics command, 7.3
RECTANGLE, 7.3 RECTANGLE, 7.3
SLAB DESIGN, 5.51 SLAB DESIGN, 5.51
REFERENCE LOAD, 5.31.1 REFERENCE LOAD, 5.31.1
SLAVE RIGID, 5.28 SLAVE RIGID, 5.28
REFERENCE POINT, 1.5.3 REFERENCE POINT, 1.5.3
SOLID ELEMENT, 1.6.2, 5.13 SOLID ELEMENT, 1.6.2, 5.13
RELEASE RELEASE
members, 1.8, 5.22.1 SORT, 7.2.6 members, 1.8, 5.22.1 SORT, 7.2.6

elements, 5.22.2 SPECTRUM, 5.32.10.1 elements, 5.22.2 SPECTRUM, 5.32.10.1


WRITE command, 7.2.5.1 SRSS Modal Combination, 5.32.10.1 WRITE command, 7.2.5.1 SRSS Modal Combination, 5.32.10.1
REPEAT, 511, 5.12, 5.13 SRSS Static Load Combination, 5.35 REPEAT, 511, 5.12, 5.13 SRSS Static Load Combination, 5.35
REPEAT ALL, 5.11, 5.12, 5.13 SSY parameter, Table 2.1 REPEAT ALL, 5.11, 5.12, 5.13 SSY parameter, Table 2.1
REPEAT LOAD SPECIFICATION, SSZ parameter, Table 2.1 REPEAT LOAD SPECIFICATION, SSZ parameter, Table 2.1
5.32.11 5.32.11
STAPLE STAPLE
RESPONSE SPECTRUM, 1.18.3, language conventions, 7.1 RESPONSE SPECTRUM, 1.18.3, language conventions, 7.1
5.32.10 5.32.10
commands, 7.2 commands, 7.2
RESPONSE TIME HISTORY, 5.31.6, RESPONSE TIME HISTORY, 5.31.6,
graphics commands, 7.3 graphics commands, 7.3
5.32.10.2 5.32.10.2
START CONCRETE DESIGN, 5.51.1 START CONCRETE DESIGN, 5.51.1
RFILL, 7.3 RFILL, 7.3
START FOOTING DESIGN, 5.52.1 START FOOTING DESIGN, 5.52.1
6 6
START SCRIPT LANGUAGE, 7.2.1 START SCRIPT LANGUAGE, 7.2.1
SECONDARY ANALYSIS, 1.19.1 START USER TABLE, 5.19 SECONDARY ANALYSIS, 1.19.1 START USER TABLE, 5.19
Index 7 Index 7
STEEL DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS, TIME HISTORY ANALYSIS, STEEL DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS, TIME HISTORY ANALYSIS,
2.0, 5.47 Harmonic Loading, 5.31.6 2.0, 5.47 Harmonic Loading, 5.31.6
STEEL TABLE, 5.20.1 TORSION parameter, Table 2.1 STEEL TABLE, 5.20.1 TORSION parameter, Table 2.1
STEEL TAKE-OFF, 5.49 TRACK parameter, Table 2.1& 2.2 STEEL TAKE-OFF, 5.49 TRACK parameter, Table 2.1& 2.2
STIFF parameter, Table 2.1 TRAPEZOIDAL LOAD, 5.32.3 STIFF parameter, Table 2.1 TRAPEZOIDAL LOAD, 5.32.3
STRUCTURE GEOMETRY, 1.5 TRUSS MEMBERS, 1.9, 5.23.1 STRUCTURE GEOMETRY, 1.5 TRUSS MEMBERS, 1.9, 5.23.1
STRUCTURES – Type, 1.3, 5.2 TUBE, 1.7.2, 5.19 STRUCTURES – Type, 1.3, 5.2 TUBE, 1.7.2, 5.19
SUBGRADE, 5.27.3 TWO WINDOW, see WINDOWS SUBGRADE, 5.27.3 TWO WINDOW, see WINDOWS
SUBSTITUTION - JOINT, 5.15 8 SUBSTITUTION - JOINT, 5.15 8
SUBSTITUTION - MEMBER, 5.15 SUBSTITUTION - MEMBER, 5.15
UBC UBC
SUBSTITUTION - COLUMN, 5.15 SUBSTITUTION - COLUMN, 5.15
Accidental Torsion, 5.31.2 Accidental Torsion, 5.31.2
SUPPORT DISPLACEMENT, 1.16.7, UBC LOAD, 5.31.2 SUPPORT DISPLACEMENT, 1.16.7, UBC LOAD, 5.31.2
5.32.8 5.32.8
SUPPORTS, 1.14, 5.27 SUPPORTS, 1.14, 5.27
UBC SEISMIC LOAD, 1.17.2, UBC SEISMIC LOAD, 1.17.2,
SUPPORTS - Inclined, 5.27.2 5.31.2.1, 5.32.12 SUPPORTS - Inclined, 5.27.2 5.31.2.1, 5.32.12

7 UNF parameter, Table 2.1 & 2.2 7 UNF parameter, Table 2.1 & 2.2
UNIT, 5.3 UNIT, 5.3
TABLE - Steel Table , 1.7.3, 5.20.1 TABLE - Steel Table , 1.7.3, 5.20.1
UNIT SPECIFICATION, 5.3 UNIT SPECIFICATION, 5.3
TABLE - User Provided, 5.19 TABLE - User Provided, 5.19
UNIT SYSTEMS, 1.4 UNIT SYSTEMS, 1.4
TAPERED MEMBER, 5.20.3 TAPERED MEMBER, 5.20.3
UNL parameter, Table 2.1 & 2.2 UNL parameter, Table 2.1 & 2.2
TAPERED SECTIONS, 2.7.2, 5.20.3 TAPERED SECTIONS, 2.7.2, 5.20.3
USER PROVIDED TABLE, 1.7.3, USER PROVIDED TABLE, 1.7.3,
TEES, 1.7.2, 5.19 TEES, 1.7.2, 5.19
5.19, 5.20.4 5.19, 5.20.4
TEMPERATURE LOAD, 1.16.6, TEMPERATURE LOAD, 1.16.6,
USER STEEL TABLE, 5.19 USER STEEL TABLE, 5.19
5.32.6 5.32.6
TEMPERATURE/STRAIN, 1.16.6 : TEMPERATURE/STRAIN, 1.16.6 :
TENSION-ONLY MEMBER, 1.10, WELD parameter, Table 2.1 TENSION-ONLY MEMBER, 1.10, WELD parameter, Table 2.1
1.18.2.4, 5.23.3 1.18.2.4, 5.23.3
WELDED PLATE GIRDERS, 1.7.2 WELDED PLATE GIRDERS, 1.7.2
TEXT, 7.3 TEXT, 7.3
WIDE FLANGE, 5.19 WIDE FLANGE, 5.19
TIMBER DESIGN PARAMETER TIMBER DESIGN PARAMETER
WIND LOAD, 1.17.3, 5.31.5, 5.32.12 WIND LOAD, 1.17.3, 5.31.5, 5.32.12
SPECIFICATIONS, 4.0, 5.50.1 SPECIFICATIONS, 4.0, 5.50.1
WMIN parameter, Table 2.1 WMIN parameter, Table 2.1
TIMBER DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS, TIMBER DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS,
4.0, 5.50 WRITE, 7.2.5.1 4.0, 5.50 WRITE, 7.2.5.1

TIME HISTORY ANALYSIS, 1.18.3, BMO (Member Section Forces) TIME HISTORY ANALYSIS, 1.18.3, BMO (Member Section Forces)
5.31.6, 5.32.10.2 COORDINATES 5.31.6, 5.32.10.2 COORDINATES
DISPLACEMENTS DISPLACEMENTS
8 Index 8 Index
FORCES FORCES
HEADER HEADER
MINC (Member Incidences) MINC (Member Incidences)
PROPERTIES PROPERTIES
REACTION REACTION
RELEASE RELEASE
SDI (Member Section SDI (Member Section
Displacements) Displacements)

WSTR parameter, Table 2.1 WSTR parameter, Table 2.1


9 Index 9 Index

S-ar putea să vă placă și